satatae Pr rey Wy RIC ee ee pipe hee tue eb? ae a OO othe arian’ 1 ddd ad tt added hod ‘ daediduta Veda Vip dhe aanded de Veae hs SAME RTM CRP NR PAN LAD Ded ald Le Peet " EMR CPM ee Se we Cea a ‘ ' 4 hwas aa ede Le vA a: ude Wedd dia a hd at Cue * bege ha tag bo 04 ' 4 ' ta ye. as ‘a Cee aay Wek tae) thVadlaae a4 ” i] ‘bade ere werk” sa ie cd om) Vaedehee & bOON OL wae WARK ANN On ARTO MR CN OR OORT RMR NO RH hha + au eb vel we ee ee eas | Wap th MoU tod A te ik at AT Db ete TR YM AS Ste Oe Os TR ARN NWA DM eT Wh wf DO) Tae RY 5, che Pee ew eer mame er eee Bry eae ene Tr UD sr eH WO Oe Se had Led ht ed ee BAG sales Pin ee a ee Te ee ee rt DOOR RAO UCR Od AC Oe N ve pee ee aa OE Re Eee eA hae Le ae Bp ee ae a be Bd abe bY a dldedlie bead a a ed Peed PA eet alee Peete WANE RR HICH DCM IN TTR tata dH TL ae tea a WB Wed ea ae elie eb ' ‘ 4 al ADA ANISM ONAL MA ae ee Ad tt VOOtr er thea ee Paw) PA ae eae Eee ee ELE EE) OW lee ih eae aad Q a) ORAL DOE CORR OLR COR Rane OE ea ENN x , ’ ere Ta te ee | Re RAT it ne GRAS RIO 4a ; y ORS rer Wm a WRN ICN MCR RN rT CNN SUCH R ey ' ra " La a desvetaea MAS) Ped { Se ea a alee ag bed a ely radeaul DIN Coe Ik Nees. . 4 7) PERO ESS MION HRN) WP TA THY A yt td sil a abot ast tg a pacites iy wr ed kD ates bol et } VAM gis ye hal ea RCs POOR eo ) > 2. yew ia ah baad 7 aaa JE Ty a hea New ach d aden aes OU dia dip , a awit 2 hw ‘ LAs daeee Aa aa ARLE pen AS BLN VD ty Gy , Yad t 4 phen 4 art dtd aries a - & ; va Re, ‘ iar RN te he leg yt wi ea Ae, 7 ' ee er ee ee i ee a Bee rc a UREA COE N , ‘anne N vu A idehd 2 24 Dal ey te A NOOO CE ATC HOA Oe AUR NAS ALMA NA A " a , Vite eet) ru ‘ 5 : ' Anti SRA IR LE Ome 4 84 bs ANS ATER EAM TR AE Ro hue Lie £4 OC ee ee daa ae ) Dae of ei he ed a aioe at eh " wan) YL tee Hasy La tee GP Pra wave ey " Pasay ah Ny | Ma ede en ala hae hah rv a? A i it Tee 4 EUW ANN raha ) LEA ae hae Le ACU SS AAA eat whith et bo dep eer ® Py aed te hed MEL Ad edd PTO eR REY wee hye Db ge Be le Dae tt bu NY Nina hay a Ne BE WAR COR COC eee RA DA RN CO IC RC Ad dp Uw VL td IY HE Med Poe Ate nat wr a 4 : a Lae aa att hea baie arnt: WT MAE Ar ytd sa A SACRA RR MRR ROL a Kad ee) ate vag Stidd ela debs D ped Pe Py Ghee Te WDD Pet idaw Qed dd OOO. OCLC Laer sd tae wa de Va hoe eal?) PRO ete SO CCE, MANA a y atee tury NGS tl var ale a Phd , sien eye 2% at ‘\ hey Sty ry KERR RY PCRS OCH REA RRL iY va waar “hha tte ry Ney , Ve aehaeterearkeaa ery ) 4 x : ; A ae ny aa » why a DORR KOO AWN a ae ae a'V Cae ay SUA 3p MOND kas Resa GR 8 a "boi Gh PAN Lae bey hie rn | ei 4 eed a by ey . ‘i ‘whee eae ‘ wre Ma har) tas > ee we ) ahs he eib at S Wee i } Yoo gs 4 Ce: ; ? 1 Gant PEN RRR: Ce te a Po deR 4h 1 he ate - rey? 4 Va aa ees VI de A Peed itd peed) He eehys 1} . wt tit) 1 ied 6 bed Pedederd Cr ee ‘ Mi Row bY \ “9 aN iat ax eddie @ x f apy AP ged aa A ‘ ; 4 » la at , } : sie jae Vo MID eed gd Lk dd i ene atl He P d vude tt 48 4 ” * LAA aig chads thar awe lhe ka i ois a . sau eit Ce ety Wie-de elated Whey ¥) t. 1 ada. Fe} Cob Ste fee ie toed oh alana yea dla ad dee Sar Matin dons CED Rr?) Be Ne | 1d 49 dere? iaw det) of ie ee iad) bdewid ER, ee : ws eee “gs bale Tod me Gh Bete) ah hm eee i dd Leeds tad pide rd bad wh al) oe ava ‘eas sia {isa saeidiad ‘ 44ie ibe Leis a he ee ee oe oe ee Te Bs vA i ven {* ia Bt data a HRC ESI A , 4nd VO a ed 1b te de@ de & a aia Sas peta aida 2! 4G ‘did i re were tee ‘ vie hig Ne Wat i eee eC Tk ee ee Ne ey DY Bad Meh Ld be panded de hed Sut debe Pa? ; } F 4 REMCCOR CLT MY ROOT OI CRA bt Hae ie. fa Fs Via dae ya ' LB, ! * 7 ‘ : ond rr ae | $49 ‘ a4 ed hd we Raed de ‘ 5 Meta Sy sue aE bg eth ns Ltt bed dl pays Fad | P as ie tap LAP iG HUES bed ad aad dhs UR Sie Lore dA > ba yr weed Lease hee tid VA We Fad bb &) Emel mite t brat thin kat, Pt A . ' ) PE 2 ded Gath had atk Eee a ap va, FAA De Dm dee 8,0 Habe fh, d) des J Aa oe } cH Ma A Rial ae Beh dw Opis he 4 advan SV did ang ihe ; N The ted 4 « enineil ’ Mele ag ole ‘ : ‘ ‘ ‘ 5 / ne ahs hed Nat dod aa fa pda ey « aw Te eee ; $ tie tLe Baw hake es Fates -, Ay Sc4he “ie ; sud Ly be ah UL One mri ee oe Pe ab sae ake Seat dkewirh ea oe ee bide dobett Fede et ake ne Tyr g +4 Pd ae igs t rie 4 ch he ore Bee ee etry P 4444 vid bike eb : aah d @h iW hae Per eae ty Van uf nthe N—N- SO;K - 3H,0 | SO3K BOARD OF EDITORS ee: J. Maucay > ‘aw Aqnrs CHASE _ oramruent or TRRRESTRIAL MAGNETISM BUREAU PLANT INDUSTRY paemooiare EDITORS gee , \ Re ey ee IO . " PRILOSOPHICAL 5 socrerr Nee ie - BNTOMOLOGICAL socTETY ven fog Oe A ctaag GWE Srogm <<: *~ 3 ae ‘ "BIOLOGICAL SOCIRTE.- a GEOLOGICAL BOCIETY Bes Re. F. Griecs: ie pie Si 2 ee: i, ee SWANTON ; ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY EB, Wicuers CHEMICAL SOCIETY Doce: ACADEMY OF SCIENCES > a » Ma. Royan AND. “GuILrorp AVES, “ 2 =. _ Baurwone, Maryan Mi r, ‘ary 43, 1923, at the ee ae at Battiare Md., ee eee the 12. Acceptance for mailing at special rate of postage provided for on 1103, fey of Sead 3, 1917. Authorized on iy 5h 7 - Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences aoe This Journat, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sai ms to present 2 brief record of current scientific work in Washington. Tothisendi it publi shes: (1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) short notes of current scientific literature published in or emanating from Washington ry (3) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated Societies; (4) notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. TheJournat is issued semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of each month, except during the summer when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes corres ond to calendar years. Prompt publication is an essential feature; a manuscript renenina the editors on the fifth or the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from the author, i in the issue of the JoURNAL for the following fourth or nineteenth, respectively. Manuscripis may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors; they should ie Sea elearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential changes. ie: editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. References should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To facilitate the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be numbere¢ serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page. Illustrations will be used only when necessary and will be confined to text eae it or diagrams of simple character. The cost of producing cuts for illustrations must be partly met by the author. ae Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be sent to authors — unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors _ will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. Authors’ Reprints.—Reprints will be furnished at the following schedule of prices. Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. Cover. 50 $.85 $1.65 $2.55 $3.25 $2.00 100 1.90 3.80 4.75 6.00 2.50 150 2.25 4.30 5.25 — 6.50 3.00 200 2.50 4.80 Beto: 7.00 3.50 250 3.00 5.30 6.25 00 4.00 x ‘An additional charge of 25 cents will be made for each split page. Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive | pagi- Ci nation and date of issue, will be furnished when ordered. ae As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra. copies or or wees Z should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript. The rate of Subscription per volume 18........0.00ceereee Be Se See ere $6.00" Semi-monthly: numibers. . 2 2.55 bas cle Sew pieces oo Cee a Se oe cones Se pe Wau Monthly numiGens: vii c oe ccc. vente eas 30 eee kates aeeees sp etenee rs al inate . 50 Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences, and addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D.C, European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, London. Exchanges.—The JourNnat does not exchange with other publications. Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, provided that claim is made within thirty days after date of the following issue. *Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, te December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00. Special rate= i, are given to membere of scientific societies affiliated with the Academy JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vou. 1/ JANUARY 3, 1927 Newt GEOLOGY.—On the origin of the “rock wall” at Rockwall, Texas. L. W. SrerHenson, U. 8. Geological Survey. There is in Texas, about 20 miles northeast of Dallas, a town by the name of Rockwall, the county seat of Rockwall County. The town derives its name from a natural feature which is locally called the “rock wall.” Mr. Sidney Paige? investigated the “rock wall’ in 1909, and the following paragraphs are quoted from his account of it: For many years reports of a more or less definite nature have been circu- Jated describing the wonders of the ancient wall surrounding the town of Rockwall, Texas. The writer was able during the past winter to spend a few days investigating this supposed historic structure. It proves to be not a wall, but a number of disconnected sandstone dikes, strictly speaking, not surrounding the town, but trending in many directions. As exposures are few, they have been discovered in such scattered localities in the town’s environs as to suggest the idea that they were fragments of a ruined wall. * % * * Though good exposures are infrequent, owing to the depth of the soil, a peculiar condition affords ample opportunity to observe the dikes in place. These latter are natural courses for underground waters, and wells are often located on them. Though these wells are filled with water, the rock forming the dike, removed during the sinking of the well, may be examined at leisure. I have recently had an opportunity to examine one of the so-called rock walls at a locality at the west edge of the town at a point where it intersects the Dallas-Greenville road. The town is located at the crest of the west-facing slope of the valley of the East Fork of Trinity River (sometimes called Bois d’Are Creek), south of the valley of 1 Published by permission of the Director, U. S. Geological’ Survey, Washington, D.C. Received November 30, 1926. 2 PaIGE, SipneEy, The ‘‘rock wall” of Rockwall, Texas. Science n. ser. 18: 690-691. 1909. 1 2 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 1 Squabble Creek. ‘The wall where I saw it intersects the road about a quarter of a mile west of the center of the town, at an altitude 45 or 50 feet lower than the top of the hill. The owner of the land at this place has made several excavations along the side of the wall, which here trends several degrees west of north, and an appropriate sign at the side of the road invites the interested traveller to view the ancient archaeological structure, which he is permitted to do after the payment of a small entrance fee. Paige’s interpretation, that the wall is not an artificial structure but is in the nature of a sandstone dike, is doubtless correct, but his ex- planation of the cause of its wall-like appearance needs modification. He says: The dikes are of various sizes, varying from an inch in thickness to eighteen inches or two feet. They stand vertically, or nearly so, and have in cases been followed downward fifty feet or more, always imbedded in the lime muds. They are composed of exceedingly fine-grained quartz sands, cemented by calcium carbonate. So far as observed they do not vary appreciably in width | through vertical range. Two joint systems, one nearly horizontal, the other vertical, have cut these dikes in such a manner as to suggest masonry walls, 1.e., they are composed of oblong blocks in horizontal layers. The ‘wall’ which I saw is not a solid sandstone dike broken by horizontal joints, but is composed of a series of alternating, more or less lens-like horizontal layers of clay and sandstone. The clay layers reach a maximum of an inch or more in thickness, and the sandstone layers may attain a thickness of as much as 6 or 8 inches. ‘The sand- stone beds are cut by vertical joints perpendicular to the face of the wall. Some of the sandstone layers thin down and pinch out in a lens-like manner, and some of them divide into two layers separated by clay. ‘The combination of horizontal bedding and vertical jointing in the sandstone layers, gives to the dike its masonry-like appearance. The relatively thin clay layers simulate the mortar of an artificial wall. The vertical joints are irregularly distributed and do not occur in the form of “‘broken joints,’’ as would be expected in a true masonry wall. ‘Two views of the dike are shown in plate 1. Paige did not reach a definite conclusion as to the origin of the dikes. He states that the fissures may have been due to drying or to earth movements, and that the material filling them may have come from below or from above. ‘The fissures are too deep, I think, to have been formed by desiccation from the surface downward. Earth move- ments that produced and widened joints into fissures seem adequate to account for them. Since the dikes are horizontally stratified the . JAN. 3, 1927 STEPHENSON: ORIGIN OF “ROCK WALL’? IN TEXAS 5) materials must have been washed in from above and were probably deposited in standing water in the fissures. The fissures must have A. View of one of the sandstone dikes or rock walls in an excavation on the east or up-slope side, at the west edge of Rockwall town; the dike has here been disturbed by soil creep which has tipped it over, least below, most above, widening the spaces between the hard sandstone layers. B. and sand layers are in undisturbed relation to each other, showing the lenslike character of the sandstone layers; the argillaceous chalk or chalky marl which is cut by the dike is shown on the left. Tiew of the same dike in an excavation on the down-slope side where the clay remained open during the time they were being filled with clay and sand. If the fissures were opened on a land surface, and were filled by ¢ 4 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 1 sediments carried by surface water, one would expect strong cross bedding in the dikes with some coarse foreset beds similar to the bedding found in delta deposits, and he would expect the sediments to be mixed with oxidized substances, leaves, seeds, sticks, bones, and other surficial materials. Instead the sediments are clean and uniform with the exception of the scattered fragments of gray unoxidized clay, and I am therefore inclined to the opinion that the fissures were formed under water, probably that of a shallow sea during the latter part of Upper Cretaceous time. The dike at the west edge of Rockwall cuts the Pecan Gap tongue of the Annona chalk, of Upper Cretaceous age, which here consists of argillaceous chalk or chalky marl, nearly free from sand. Two or 3 feet below the surface the chalk is practically fresh, showing only slight signs of weathering and oxidation. ‘The chalk forms the upper part of the west-facing slope of the hill and the only source of sand that seems adequate to furnish the sandy material of the dike is the Wolfe City sand member of the Taylor marl, which in the next county to the north lies stratigraphically beneath the chalk. I have not seen the Wolfe City sand in the immediate vicinity of Rockwall, but it probably underlies the chalk there. Paige mentions “thinly bedded flaggy sandy limestone” near Rockwall, but does not give the exact locality. The beds of the Pecan Gap chalk at this locality dip at a low angle toward the east, so that the Wolfe City sand, if present, may have come to the surface within a few miles to the west, where it was subject to erosion at the time the dikes were formed in late Cretaceous time. | The sandstone layers consist of medium-grained gray calcareous sand cemented with calcite. Scattered through the sand composing the sandstone layers are considerable numbers of mechanically in- cluded clay fragments, the largest noted being about three-fourths of an inch long. Mr. C. 8. Ross has examined thin sections made from one of the sandstone layers and he describes it as follows: The sand grains are predominantly quartz, but there are many grains of feldspar and chert, and a very few of muscovite. Most of the grains are sharply angular but some are subangular. A few are well rounded or have one border that is well rounded and the other angular, as if rounded grains had been fractured. The calcite cement has replaced or corroded some of the sand grains and especially the feldspar. A veinlet of calcite cuts one of the sections. JAN. 3, 1927 HAY: SKULL OF EQUUS LAURENTIUS 5 Mr. Ross also examined a thin section made from a sample of the Wolfe City sand from near Wolfe City, about 40 miles northeast of Rockwall, and he says of it: The mineral grains are predominantly quartz, but smaller amounts of feldspar, mica, and other minerals, are present. The grains are sharply angular for the most part. The cementing material is finely granular calcite. The sand grains average about 0.05 mm. in diameter. Compared with the material from the dike this sample of Wolfe City sand is quite similar in type and angularity of the sand grains, and the inclos- ing calcite is somewhat similar in habit. The sand grains differ greatly in size, however, since those in the dike average about 0.2 mm., while those in the Wolfe City specimen are only 0.05 mm. in diameter. So far as the evidence goes, therefore, the sand composing the dikes might well have been derived from the Wolfe City sand, but the samples compared are geographically too far apart to warrant basing a final conclusion upon them. PALEONTOLOGY.—On the type skull of Equus laurentius Hay. OLIVER P. Hay, U.S. National Museum. In 1913? the writer described as belonging to a new species of Equus (EF. laurentius) a nearly complete skull which had been found on a sandbar of Kansas River, near Lawrence, Kansas. Prof. J. E. Todd told the writer that with this skull were picked up the base of an antler of an elk and the femur of a carnivore. ‘The femur was regarded by Dr. Roy E. Moodie as belonging probably to a species of Smilodon. In an excellent paper published recently* entitled ‘‘The evolution of the horse: A record and its interpretation,’ Dr. W. D. Matthew, of the American Museum of Natural History, on his page 181, men- tioned, with other species, Hquus laurentius and added as follows: “The last is based upon a recent skull mistakenly supposed by the author to be of Pleistocene age.’”’ No reasons were given for this statement. On reading this the writer became anxious to see that skull once more and to determine for himself whether or not he had fallen into error. The skull is now in the temporary possession of Dr. Childs Frick, of the American Museum, New York, and on the writer’s request Dr. Frick generously sent the specimen. It appears to the writer that two questions are involved. First, 1 Received Nov. 2, 1926. ? Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 44: 584-591. PI. 72,73. 1918. 3 Quart. Rev. Biol. 1: 139-185. 1926. 6 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 1 is the skull of Recent or of Pleistocene age? Second, is it specifically identical with any of the breeds of the domestic horse, Hquus caballus? In case the skull is that of a modern horse it must have been buried within 300 years or less; also very near the place of discovery, for, excepting the loss of the free portions of the nasal bones, it shows no abrasions. Furthermore, the lower jaw was found with the skull. Without doubt it had been buried in a river deposit, either of sand or possibly of sandy muck. Under such conditions one would expect a modern skull to be little or not at all mineralized, to be soft and friable, and to be of relatively light weight on drying out. Often bones of elephants, mastodons, and horses, which have been in such deposits since the early Pleistocene are so soft that they must be handled with the greatest care to prevent crumbling. Now, the skull found at Lawrence is in no such condition. The specimen, skull and lower jaw, is heavy, charged and colored with iron carbonate, and hard. When an area of the skull has been covered many hours with a pad of wet paper the bone does not soften, as it might be expected to do. It seems to the writer that the conditions for fossilization must have been extraordinarily favorable in order that a skull might, within 300 years, reach such a stage of preservation. Does the type of HL. lawrentius present characters which distinguish it from Hquus caballus? The skull is that of one of the smaller horses, the basilar length being 490 mm. (not 481). It has been spoken of as an “Indian pony.’ It ought to be compared with the smaller breeds of the domestic horse. Unfortunately there is, in the U. 8. National Museum, no good specimen of the small horses from the western plains, and probably there is none in the American Museum. At hand is a skull obtained in Arizona by Dr. Walter Hough, of the U. S. National Museum. It is weathered and somewhat damaged. | The writer has taken renewed measurements of the skull from Lawrence and measurements of the Arizona skull. From these measurements have been determined the indices of the important parts according to Prof. H. F. Osborn’s method;! and the corresponding indices have been compared. They have also been compared with indices obtained from the skulls of Hquus lamber from Alaska, Equus niobrarensis, and Equus przewalsku. All of these forms show differ- ences in the structure of their skulls, but these differences are small and apparently might fall within individual variations. The writer be- lieves that no one would, without other characters, base a species on 4Mem. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist. new ser. 1: 85. 1912. JAN. 3, 1927 STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA a such closely similar indices; nor would one, because of these resem- blances, refer all of these horses to one species. We seem still com- pelled to depend on the structure of the teeth and on variations in size of the animals. - The upper cheek teeth are present in the Arizona horse, but they are somewhat shattered, and the second premolars are missing from their sockets. The teeth of the two horses are in about the same stage of wear. The tooth line measures the same in both and the individual teeth are of practically the same size in the two. In both horses the protocones are short. The postprotoconal valleys appear to differ in that those of the Arizona horse are directed more strongly outward than in EL. laurentius. The fossettes of the latter are markedly broader than those of the Arizona horse, and the enamel which surrounds the fossettes is little folded. The hinder one has a very shallow infold in the rear and another infront. Except this, the front wall of the hinder fossette has no undulations. The front wall of the anterior fossette may or may not have a shallow infold; in its inner hinder corner is an M-shaped infold. In the case of the fossettes of H. lawrentius the confronting lines of enamel are considerably more folded than in the Arizona horse and the complication somewhat exceeds that of a large domestic horse at hand. The writer believes that the type skull of Equus laurentius is a real fossil and that it belonged to a horse of probably early Pleistocene age. It appears only fair that those who regard it as a part of a modern horse shall present evidences therefor. BOTANY.—WNew. plants from Central America—VI.1 Pau C. STANDLEY, U.S. National Museum. The new species of plants, chiefly trees and shrubs, described here are all natives of Panama or Costa Rica, and most of them have been collected by myself during the past two years. The Panama species are probably the only new ones awaiting description from the region of the Canal Zone previous to the publication of a flora of that area. Most interesting of the new plants described is Parmentiera V alerit, a large tree belonging to a group hitherto represented in Central America by only two known species, both of which are trees much inferior in size to this one. ‘ Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. For the last preceding paper of this series see This JourNaL 15: 472. 1925. Received Nov. 2, 1926. 8 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 1 Lacistema pedicellatum Standl., sp. nov. Shrub or tree 2—7.5 meters high, the branchlets slender, terete, when young densely strigillose; stipules lance-triangular, 1.5—2 mm. long; petioles slender, 3-8 mm. long, strigillose; leaf blades elliptic-oblong or obovate-oblong, 8—11.5 cm. long, 2.5-4 cm. wide, cuspidate-acuminate, with acute or obtuse tip, . cuneate to obtuse at base, membranaceous, remotely and obscurely serrulate, green and glabrous above, paler beneath, sparsely and minutely strigillose, densely pilose along the costa and in the axils of the lateral nerves; racemes solitary in the leaf axils, 3.5-6.5 cm. long, slender, laxly flowered, the rachis densely sordid-hispidulous, the bracts puberulous, much shorter than the pedicels, the pedicels 1-2 mm. long, glabrous; sepals 3 or 4, broadly rounded, glabrous; disk large, 4-lobate; stamen glabrous, the cells divergent; ovary very sparsely setose, the style short, the stigmas 3, longer than the stamen; fruit subglobose, 4 mm. in diameter, sparsely puberulent; seeds 3. Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 679251, collected along the Rio Culebra above Santa Isabel, Province of Col6én, Panama, near sea level, Aug. 10, 1911, by H. Pittier (no. 4152). Collected also on hills north of Frijoles, Canal Zone, Dec. 19, 1923, Standley 27426. The most closely related species is L. Pittieri Blake, of Venezuela. Both are marked by the pedicellate flowers, those of most species being sessile in the bracts. L. Putter: differs from the Panama plant in its densely hispid ovary and entire leaves. Heisteria longipes Standl., sp. nov. Glabrous shrub, the branchlets slender, green; petioles slender, 7-12 mm. long; leaf blades elliptic to elliptic-oblong, 8-12 cm. long, 3-6 cm. wide, abruptly obtuse-acuminate or obtuse, acute at base, thin, the lateral nerves 7 to 9 on each side, slender; pedicels in fascicles of 2 or 3, slender, 1—-1.5 cm. long; fruiting calyx rotate, purplish red, 2 cm. broad, subentire; petals 6, ovate-deltoid, acute; stamens 12, slightly longer than the petals; fruit oval, 8 mm. long. Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 679090, collected along the Trini- dad River, Canal Zone, Panama, July, 1911, by H. Pittier (no. 4006). The leaves are much like those of H. macrophylla Oerst., the most widely distributed species of Central America, but in that the pedicels are shorter than, or rarely equal, the fruiting calyx. Heisteria latifolia Standl., sp. nov. Small tree, 4 meters high, glabrous, the branchlets obtusely angulate, green; petioles thick, stout, about 2 cm. long; leaf blades elliptic or broadly elliptic, 27-32 cm. long, 12-15 cm. wide, acuminate, rounded or obtuse at base, sub- coriaceous, lustrous above, the lateral nerves about 16 pairs, subarcuate, anastomosing near the margin; pedicels usually geminate, 1 cm. long; fruiting calyx subentire, rotate, red, 2-2.5 cm. broad; fruit oval, 12 mm. long. Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 679256, collected along the Rio Culebra above Santa Isabel, Province of Col6n, Panama, near sea level, Aug. 10, 1911, by H. Pittier (no. 4156). JAN. 3, 1927 STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA 9 Distinguished from all the other Central American species of the genus by the very large, broad leaves, borne on comparatively long petioles. Hydrangea inornata Standl., sp. nov. Scandent shrub, the branchlets terete, covered with brown, longitudinally suleatulate bark, when young tomentulose, the internodes elongate; petioles 1—2 em. long, glabrous; leaf blades elliptic or oblong-elliptic, 8-23 cm. long, 3.0-11 cm. wide, acutely acuminate or abruptly contracted into a short acumen, acute or subobtuse at base, coriaceous, entire, glabrous on both surfaces, the lateral nerves 5 to 8 on each side, arcuate, prominent beneath, the ultimate nerves closely reticulate, prominulous beneath; inflorescences ample, short-pedunculate, 5-9 cm. broad, the cymes umbellately arranged, many-flowered, the rachises stellate-tomentulose, the axes of the first order 1-3 em. long, equaling or surpassing the rest of the cyme, the pedicels 1-4 mm. long or the flowers sessile; flowers all fertile, pink; sepals 4, much broader than high; petals 4, 2 mm. long; stamens 8, the filaments 1.5 mm. long, the anthers small; styles 3 or 4; hypanthium broadly cup-shaped, glabrous, 1.5 mm. wide. Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 577962, collected in forests at Tuis, Atlantic slope of Costa Rica, altitude 700 meters, December, 1900, by H. Pittier (no. 14068). This Costa Rican plant appears to be related to H. ecuadorensis Briq., and belongs to the Section Cornzdia, Subsection Monosegia B. Aphananthae, as outlined by Briquet.2 Aside from the Panama species here described, an one other Hydrangea is known from Central America, H. Oerstedit Briq., which is frequent in the higher mountains of Costa Rica. It is a large woody vine with broad cymes which bear numerous bright pink sterile flowers. It is a very handsome plant when in full flower, and quite as showy as the cultivated hydrangeas. The juvenile plants of H. Oerstedii are very different in general appearance from the adult ones. They are very slender, with coarsely toothed leaves only 1 to3 cm. long. These juvenile plants are abundant nearly everywhere in the mountains of Costa Rica, closely investing tree trunks and even fence posts. The writer for several years has been familiar with this form, and had often wondered to what family it might belong. It was only during the past winter, after close study, that the true relationship of this juvenile form was recognized, and even then it was hard to credit the evidence, so different in aspect are the two states of the plant. The juvenile plants are many times more plentiful than adult ones. In 1922 I collected in Salvador on the Volcano of San Salvador juvenile plants of this genus, but at that time did not recognize their relationship. The Salvador plant may be the immature form of H. Oerstediz, or perhaps it belongs to a species not yet described. 2 Ann. Cons. Jard. Bot. Genéve 20: 396. 1919. 10 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 1 Hydrangea panamensis Standl., sp. nov. Shrub, the branchlets terete, brown, when young appressed-stellate-tomen- tose, the internodes short; petioles stout, 1-1.5 cm. long, stellate-tomentose; leaf blades oblong, elliptic, or ovate, 8-10.5 cm. long, 3-4.5 cm. wide, obtuse at apex or rounded and emarginate, obtuse at base, coriaceous, entire, above dark green, furnished with remote microscopic appressed stellate scalelike hairs, beneath brownish, sparsely and microscopically stellate-pilose, the lateral nerves about 6 on each side, straight, laxly anastomcsing close to the margin, prominent beneath, the reticulation of the ultimate nerves incon- spicuous; inflorescences dense, pedunculate, 3.5 cm. broad; bracts caducous, 1.5-2 cm. long, rounded at apex, stellate-tcmentcse on the outer surface: axes of the first order umbellately arranged, about 1 cm. long, densely brown- tomentose, about as long as the upper part of the cyme; flowers sessile or short- pedicellate; sepals 4, broadly triangular, obtuse, broader than long; petals 4, rounded, 2 mm. long, glabrous; stamens 8; styles 3 or 4; hypanthium campanulate, glabrous, rounded at base, 1.5 mm. wide. Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 678998, collected along the Rio Fat6, Province of Colén, Panama, near sea level, July, 1911, by H. Pittier (no. 3919). The collector reports that the plant was epiphytic upon a Sloanea tree. The corolla is described as yellow, and the bracts and calyx as purple. This Hydrangea is noteworthy in its habitat, since most of the tropical American species occur only in the high mountains. The Panama species belongs to the same group as H. inornata, and in Briquet’s key to the species would run to H. Mathewsi: Briq., a Peruvian plant with rugcse-nerved, obo- vate, crenate-denticulate leaves. To H. panamensis are to be referred, probably, juvenile specimens collected by the writer (no. 27431) near Frijoles, Canal Zone, in 1923. Erythrina panamensis Standl., sp. nov. Shrub or tree 1-6 meters high, the young branchlets whitish-sericeous; branches armed with stout conic prickles; petiole and rachis at first sericeous but soon glabrate, the petiole sometimes prickly; leaflets deltoid to ovate- deltoid, the terminal leaflet often rounded-deltoid, 11-24 cm. long, 6.5-18.5 em. wide, abruptly or gradually acuminate or long-acuminate, entire, thin, above bright green and glabrous or glabrate, beneath pale, sericeous with slender straight whitish hairs; racemes about 12 cm. long, the rachis tomen- tulose, the pedicels 2-4 mm. long; calyx 14-17 mm. long, tubular-campanulate, 5-6 mm. thick, minutely strigillose with whitish hairs or almost wholly glab- rous, the margin shallowly bilobate, the lobes subequal, rounded; standard red, glabrous, linear-oblong, obtuse, about 6 cm. long, 1 cm. broad, attenu- ate at base; keel petals cohering above, 11-12 mm. long; pod long-stipitate, 11-20 em. long, about 1.5 cm. thick, 4 to 13-seeded, strongly and abruptly constricted between the seeds, at first densely whitish-sericeous, later glabrate; seeds red, about 9 mm. long, 6 mm. thick. Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 677253, collected about the Agua Clara Reservoir near Gatun, Canal Zone, Panama, February 5, 1911, by H. Pittier (no. 2656). JAN. 3, 1927 “STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA RE The following Panama collections represent the same species: Rio Indio de Gattin, Canal Zone, Mazon 4808. Near Gattin, Goldman 1854. Barro Colorado Island, Canal Zone, Standley 31352. Cana, Williams 782. Be- tween Gorgona and Gatun, Pzttzer 2287. The writer previously’ referred most of this material to EH. costaricensis Micheli, but more ample Costa Rican material of that species proves that the Panama Erythrina is distinct. E. costaricensis may be distinguished readily by the loose matted tomentum of the leaves. DYSOPSIS GLECHOMOIDES (Rich.) Muell. Arg. It seems worth while to record here the occurrence in Costa Rica of Dysop- sis, a monotypic genus of the family Euphorbiaceae, not reported previously north of the Andes of Ecuador. Specimens were collected by Prof. Juvenal Valerio and the writer (no. 43770), Dec. 31, 1925, on the Cerro de las Vueltas, Province of San José, Costa Rica, at an altitude of 3,000 meters. The plant is an inconspicuous succulent herb, growing in wet forest. Various writers have stated that in general appearance it resembles Hydrocotyle, but when growing it scarcely suggests that genus, although it does have a striking re- semblance to certain species of Pilea. Euphorbia Valerii Standl., sp. nov. Slender shrub 3-4.5 meters high, sparsely branched, glabrous throughout the branches about 1 cm. thick at apex and bearing there a few leaves, densely covered with the scars of the fallen leaves; leaves alternate, the petioles stout 1.5—-2.5 cm. long; leaf blades narrowly oblanceolate-oblong, 35-40 cm. long 9-10 em. wide, entire, obtuse, gradually narrowed from near the apex to the acute base, abruptly decurrent upon the petiole, the lateral nerves obsolete; peduncles arising in the axils of the uppermost leaves, stout, 18-24 cm. long; flowers numerous, the pedicels 1—1.5 cm. long, arranged in 3 or 4 times dicho- tomous cymes 7 cm. long and 9 cm. broad; bracts of the inflorescence cadu- cous, not seen; involucre broadly campanulate, reddish, about 7 mm. long, 10 mm. wide, the lobes ovate-quadrate, their margins laciniate; styles united almost to the apex; immature capsules subglobose, more than 1 cm. in diameter. , Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,251,433, collected in wet for- est at Los Ayotes, in the Sierra de Tilardn, Guanacaste, Costa Rica, altitude about 700 meters, Jan. 21, 1926, by Paul C. Standley and Juvenal Valeri (no. 45338). Euphorbia Valeri is referable to Boissier’s group Laurifolia, which has been recognized by some botanists as a separate genus, Huphorbiodendron. No species of this group has been reported from Central America. Euphorbia Sinclairiana Benth., described from Gorgona Island, Colombia, is, to judge from its description, closely related to the Costa Rican plant, and it may be that the two are conspecific. The involucres in L. Sinclairiana are described as smaller, and the leaves as acutely short-acuminate. 3 Contr. U.S. Nat. Herb. 20:180. 1919. 12 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 1 Only two or three plants of H. Valerii were found, growing in very dense and wet forest. The branches, when broken, yield a copious flow of white latex. The sap of the related species of Mexico is known to cause blistering and painful inflammation of the skin. : Loasa grandis Standl., sp. nov. Coarse herb 1.5-2.5 meters high, branched only above, the branches stout, hollow, hispid with slender divaricate stinging hairs, and covered with dense, very short hairs hooked at apex; leaves alternate, the petioles 4.5-7 em. long, pubescent like the stems; leaf blades in outline elliptic or ovate-elliptic, 16-30 cm. long, 12-24 cm. wide, the uppermost much reduced, acute or acu- minate, at base rounded to shallowly cordate, shallowly lobed, the lobes 4 or 5 on each side, broadly triangular, obtuse or acute, irregularly dentate; leaves thin, above along the nerves short-hispid, scabrous, beneath hispid along the costa, furnished along the nerves with slender nail-shaped hairs, elsewhere scaberulous; flowers numerous, arranged in a large much-branched panicle bearing a few reduced leaves, the pedicels 2-3 cm. long; sepals broadly ovate, about 1 cm. long, acute, 5 or 7-nerved, sparsely serrate-dentate, scabrous; petals pale green, cucullate, almost orbicular, about 3 cm. long, rounded at apex, furnished on both sides with minute nail-shaped hairs; scales oval, petaloid, 7 mm. long, 4 mm. wide, broadly rounded at apex, glabrous, bearing outside below the apex 3 small conic appendages; staminodia 2 opposite each scale, linear-attenuate, about equaling the filaments, ciliate at the middle; stamens numerous, the filaments free, glabrous, inserted continuously be- tween the staminodia, 1 cm. long; anthers oblong, almost 2 mm. long; ovary 1-celled, densely hispid, with 5 parietal placentae, the ovules numerous; style columnar, about 12 mm. long, the stigma obtuse; immature capsule more than half superior, the free portion hispid with very slender, short hairs. : Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,251,425, collected in wet for- est near Tilardn, on the road to El Silencio, in the Cordillera de Tilardn, Guanacaste, Costa Rica, altitude about 625 meters, in January, 1926, by Paul C. Standley and Juvenal Valerio (no. 44558). The plant seems to be rare, since it was seen only once in the several weeks spent in exploration of the Cordillera of Tilaran. The large flowers are rather handsome. This has little in common with the two other species of Loasa known from Costa Rica. Of the latter, L. speciosa Donn. Smith is known only from the volcanoes of Irazti and Turrialba and the adjacent slopes. Its orange-yellow bell-shaped flowers are about 6 cm. long, and very showy, but they are well protected, since the long hairs, as in other species of the genus, sting quite as painfully as any nettle. On Irazti this species is known as “campana’ and at Las Nubes it is called ‘‘ortiga veinticuatro.” The latter name is given because the pain from the sting is said to last 24 hours. The other Central American species has been described as Loasa bipin- nata Donn. Smith, but it appears to be only one of the forms of L. triphylla Juss., which is widely distributed in South America. Above the Isthmus of JAN. 3, 1927 STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA 13 Panama it is known from Chiriqui in Panama and from Costa Rica and Veracruz. In many parts of Costa Rica it is an abundant and pernicious weed of the forests. Many are the anguished exclamations I have heard from companions on botanical excursions who have brushed against the plant, for the stiff hairs penetrate ordinary clothing with the greatest ease. In Costa Rica this plant often is called ‘‘ortiga”’ (nettle), but the more usual name is “pringamosca,” evidently a corruption of the term “‘pringamoza,”’ which is given elsewhere in Mexico and Central America to various stinging plants. Ardisia myriodonta Standl., sp. nov. Plant woody or suffrutescent, 0.3-1 meter high, the branchlets terete, stout, glabrous, toward the apex minutely brown-punctate; petioles slender, 8-16 mm. long, glabrous; leaf blades oblong-elliptic, 12-25 cm. long, 4.5—9.5 em. wide, subabruptly short-acuminate, long-attenuate toward the base, thinly membranaceous, glabrous, along the margin densely red-punctate, the lateral nerves about 18 on each side, subarcuate, prominent beneath, the margin pectinate-serrate, the teeth very numerous, close-set, very narrow, attenuate, unequal; inflorescence small, sessile, 3.5 cm. long, many-flowered, dense, tripinnately paniculate, the flowers subcorymbose, the pedicels 3-5 mm, long, glandular-lepidote, the bracts deciduous; sepals 5, nearly free, lance-oblong, attenuate, 2 mm. long, densely punctate, very minutely cilio- late-dentate; fruit globose, black, 6 mm. in diameter, glabrous, sparsely ver- ruculose-punctate. Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,251,625, collected on Barro Colorado Island in Gattin Lake, Canal Zone, Panama, November, 1925, by Paul C. Standley (no. 40848). No. 40841 from the same locality also repre- sents the species. Related, according to description, to A. pellucida Oerst., of Mexico and Guatemala, which has longer petioles and broadly ovate sepals. Flowers of the Panama plant are, unfortunately, not available. It is remarkable for its low stature, most of the Central American Ardisias being large shrubs or small trees. Vincetoxicum pinguifolium Standl., sp. nov. Large scandent herb, the branchlets terete, densely covered with minute divaricate hairs and sparsely divaricate-hirsute with hairs about 2 mm. long; petioles slender, 2-4 cm. long; leaf blades rounded-ovate, 5.5-9.5 cm. long, 3-7 cm. wide, abruptly short-acuminate, deeply cordate at base, the sinus narrow, the basal lobes broadly rounded, the blade multiglandular at base, green above, paler beneath, on both sides soft-pubescent with very minute, dense hairs, the lateral nerves about 5 on each side, prominent beneath; inflorescences umbelliform, few-flowered, the peduncle 6-16 mm. long, the pedicels 10-25 mm. long, minutely pubescent, the bractlets subulate, 2-3 mm. long; calyx lobes lance-ovate, acute, 3 mm. long, minutely pubescent out- side; corolla reddish brown, minutely puberulent outside, within pilose with few long white hairs, deeply lobate, the lobes 6 mm. long, ovate, obtuse: corona shorter than the gynostegium, annular, fleshy, black, irregularly corrugate; immature follicles long-tuberculate, densely hirsute. 14 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 1 Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,251,722, collected in wet forest on Barro Colorado Island in Gattin Lake, Canal Zone, Panama, November, 1925, by Paul C. Standley (no. 40946). Nos. 40871 and 41116, from the same locality, represent the same species. In this large genus, whose species are so badly in need of critical revision, it is difficult to suggest the relationship of the plant here described. It has not been possible to refer it to any of the few species reported previouslae from Central America. The extremely fine and dense pubescence of the leaves makes them feel soft and greasy to the touch. Vincetoxicum edule (Hemsl.) Stand. Gonolobus edulis Hemsl. Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot. 2: 331. 1882. Vincetoxicum pseudobarbatum (Pittier) Standl. Gonolobus pseudobarbatus Pittier, Contr. U. 8. Nat. Herb. 13: 105. J. 14. 1910. Vincetoxicum dubium (Pittier) Standl. Gonolobus dubius Pittier, Contr. U.S. Nat. Herb. 13: 106. f. 15. 1910. Vincetoxicum viridiflorum (Mey.) Standl. Cynanchum viridiflorum Mey. Prim. Fl. Esseq. 141. 1818. Gonolobus viridiflorus Roem. & Schult. Syst. Veg. 6: 61. 1820. Lycianthes Maxonii Standl., sp. nov. Slender branched erect shrub 1-3 meters high; branchlets at first minutely pilose with incurved lustrous hairs, later subterete, glabrous; leaves solitary, subequal, the petioles 4-6 mm. long; leaf blades oblong-obovate to cuneate- obovate, 9-13 cm. long, 3-5 cm. wide, abruptly short- or long-acuminate (acu- men short and obtuse or 15 mm. long and attenuate), cuneate or obtuse at base, thin, at first minutely punctulate, in age glabrous, above deep green, paler beneath; inflorescences sessile in the leaf axils, 1 to 3-flowered, the pedicels slender, 6-22 mm. long, glabrous, divaricate or recurved; calyx cup-shaped, 2.5 mm. long, 3 mm. broad, glabrous, whitish, bearing near the truncate subscarious margin (about 1 mm. below the margin) 5 very short, wartlike, greenish tubercles; corolla violet, stelliform, 5 mm. long, glabrous outside, deeply lobed, the lobes linear-oblong, acute; filaments equal, 1.5 mm. long, glabrous, the anthers oblong, 3.5 mm. long, connate, obtuse, dehiscent by minute apical pores; fruit subglobose, bright red, about 1 cm. in diameter, 4-seeded. Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 1,180,543, collected in wet forest on Barro Colorado Islandin Gattin Lake, Canal Zone, Panama, June 6, 19238, by William R. Maxon (no. 6808). The following additional collections from Barro Colorado Island belong here: Standley 31365, 31326, 40880, 41088, 41145. JAN. 3, 1927 STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA 15 Lycianthes Maxonzi is related, apparently, to the Guatemalan L. cerato- calycia (Donn. Smith) Bitter, which has a calyx with usually 10 appendages, and a corolla 15 mm. long. Lycianthes Maxonii var. appendiculata Standl., var. nov. Like the typical form in habit and foliage; pedicels solitary; calyx furnished with 5 filiform divaricate teeth about 1.5 mm. long, inserted well below the truncate margin. Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,217,917, collected in moist forest along the Rio Tapia, Province of Panama, Panama, by Paul C. Stand- ley (no. 28040). In the long spreading calyx appendages this plant is strikingly different from the typical form, but since there are no other distinguishing characters, it is probably only a variant of the plant found on Barro Colorado Island. Lycianthes solitaria (Blake) Standl. Solanum solitarium Blake, Contr. U.S. Nat. Herb. 24: 21. 1922. Solanum calochromum Blake, published on the same page, is a synonym of Lycianthes nitida Bitter, both names being based in part on the same collections. Solanum hirsutissimum Standl., sp. nov. Plant herbaceous or suffrutescent, sparsely branched, about 1 meter high, the branchlets stout, densely pilose with soft divaricate several-celled hairs 4-5 mm. long, densely prickly, the prickles stout, laterally compressed, divaricate or recurved, minutely glandular, 5-10 mm. long, at base 2.5-6 mm. broad; leaves solitary, the petioles 2.5—5 cm. long, pilose and prickly like the stems; leaf blades broadly ovate or rounded-elliptic, 13-19 cm. long, 9-16 em. wide, acute or obtuse, at base truncate or subcordate, shallowly lobed, the lobes about 5 on each side, broadly triangular, acute or obtuse, up to 2.5 em. long; leaves densely pilose on both surfaces, armed on the nerves with long straight prickles, the hairs of the upper surface long, simple, those of the lower surface sessile or short-stipitate, multiradiate at apex, the rays elongate, several-celled, simple hairs often mixed with the stellate ones; pedicels pseudo- lateral, solitary or geminate, slender, 1.5—2 em. long, densely pilose, unarmed, recurved in fruit; calyx campanulate, 5-lobed to the middle, outside densely pilose with slender simple glandular hairs, 17 mm. long, about 20 mm. broad, thin, the lobes broadly ovate, obtuse or. acutish; corolla 2 cm. long, densely glandular-pilose outside; stamens equal, the anthers subsessile, connivent, 11 mm. long, 2 mm. wide, dehiscent by apical pores; ovary densely hirsute; fruit globose, orange-colored, about 3 cm. in diameter, smooth, sparsely hir- sute, the hairs long, bearing at the base numerous very short rays; seeds numerous, compressed, 2.5 mm. wide, scrobiculate. Type in the U. 8S. National Herbarium, no. 715419, collected along the Rio Dupi, eastern Chiriqui, Panama, near sea level, Dec. 19, 1911, by H. Pittier (no. 5217). The following collections also belong here: PanaMA: Rio Tapia, Province of Panama, Standley 30659, 28293, 26157. 16 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 1 This plant is weedy in habit and ordinary in appearance, and should be referable to some earlier described species, but I have been unable to find any description or named specimens with which it agrees. Solanum allophyllum (Miers) Standl. Pionandra allophylla Miers in Seem. Bot. Voy. Herald 174. 1854. Cyphomandra allophylla Hemsl. Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot. 2: 417. 1882. Solanum ellipsoideibaccatum Bitter, Repert. Sp. Nov. Fedde 11: 486. 1913. The specific name is too much like S. allotophyllum Dammer, but since the two are derived from different Greek words, both may be maintained in the genus. [Capsicum macrophyllum (H. B. K.) Standl. Witheringia macrophylla H. B. K. Nov. Gen. & Sp. 3: 14. 1818. Bassovia macrophylla Coulter, Bot. Gaz. 16: 145. 1891. -Parmentiera Valerii Standl., sp. nov. Tree about 12 meters high, the trunk 40 cm. in diameter, the crown narrow, sparsely branched, the branchlets ochraceous, glabrous, furnished with numer- ous pale lenticels; leaves subopposite, often fascicled at the nodes, the petioles slender, glabrous, 4-7 mm. long; leaflets 4-7, usually 5, slender-petiolulate, elliptic to obovate, 2.5-5 cm. long, acute, at base attenuate or cuneate, entire, glabrous, blackish when dried; flowers and fruits borne on the lower part of the trunk, fasciculate, the pedicels 2—2.5 cm. long; calyx green, spathaceous, cleft on one side to the base, rounded at apex, glabrous, 3.2—-4 em. long; corolla white, 6—-7.5 cm. long, glabrous, funnelform, the tube 6-7 mm. thick, 2-3 cm. wide in the throat, the lobes short, undulate; imma- ture fruit about 20 cm. long and 4 ecm. thick, green, smooth; seeds oval, compressed, about 6 mm. long. Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,251,451, collected in wet forest near Naranjos Agrios, Guanacaste, Costa Rica, altitude 700 meters, Jan. 29, 1926, by Paul C. Standley and Juvenal Valerio (no. 46411). Only one tree of this species was seen in the Cordillera of Tilara4n. This was 100 large to be climbed, and it was only by throwing sticks at the high crown that imperfect specimens of the leaves could be obtained. ‘The leaves seemed very immature, and when fully grown they probably exceed consider- ably the dimensions indicated in the description. : The two other species of Parmentiera known from Central America have uniformly three leaflets and winged petioles. JAN. 3, 1927 CHRISTIE AND COBB: RHIGONEMA 17 ZOOLOGY .—Rhigonema (Isacis Serjabin, 1914; ?/sacis Baylis & Daubney, 1926; nec Jsacis Lespés, 1856), nemas inhabiting the intestine of millipeds1 J. R. Curistrze and N. A. Coss, Bureau of Plant Industry. The first rhigonema adequately described was Ascaris infecta Leidy, 1849, from North America,—redescribed and figured in “A Flora and Fauna within Living Animals,’ Smithsonian Contributions to Knowl- edge, Washington, 1853; a second was Rhabditis acuminata D’ Udekem, 1859, from Europe; a third, the type species, Rhigonema brevicolle Cobb, 1898, from Australia; a fourth, Jsacis multipapillata Serjabin, 1914, from British East Africa. These rhigonemas constitute a very distinct and easily recognized homogeneous generic group. ISACIS The rhigonemas have been wrongly referred to Jsacis, Lespés, 1856.2. We consider it impossible, from the literature or in any other way, satisfactorily to determine the nema from the investigation of which Lespés proposed his insufficiently characterized genus [sacis, and therefore think the name Jsacis should be abandoned. ‘The various efforts to rehabilitate it have resulted only in additional uncertainty and confusion. Of the well founded nemic genera, estab- lished, some of them before the date of Lespés’ article, some of them later, there are several to which Lespés’ nema might conceivably be assigned, but always with so much uncertainty as to make such a course wholly impracticable,—e.g. Deplogaster, Rhabditis, Anguillula, one or more of the Oxyuridae, and several others. Lespés said his specimens closely resembled Leptodera Dujardin; were three-lipped, oviparous, and with the vulva near the middle of the body. He declared the male sexual armature identical with that of Leptodera, except that there was no bursa. Lespés gave no clear indication that his specimens possessed a pharynx;—we presume his word ‘‘bouche”’ should be translated, ‘mouth,’ and not “pharynx” or ‘throat.’ His “three tubercles” we take to be the three lips he later mentioned, faintly shown also in his illustrations. The illustrations show the presence of two equal spicula, but whether joined distally, as in some rhabdites, is left uncertain. He clearly figured the accessory piece,— 1 Received Nov. 27, 1926. 2 Ann. Sci. Nat. IV. Zool. 5-6: 335. 1856. 18 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 1 in fact, of all the characters he listed, the nature of the accessory piece was one of the most clear and unmistakable. Nevertheless the characters he gave do not adequately define either a species or a genus. ISACIS AND RHIGONEMA While the features described by Lespés are inadequate for the characterization of either a species or a genus, they are ample, in our opinion, to exclude from Rhigonema any species having them. Yet Serjabin carefully described a Rhigonema, his R. multipapillata, and referred it to Isacis Lespés; (perhaps following Diesing,—a course we are unable to understand, for it is very manifest that Diesing’s ‘‘Tsacis Lespés’’ designates a practically meaningless collection of either unrecognizable or incompatible forms). The same course has been followed by Baylis and Daubney, whose text seems to indicate that they used Serjabin’s description as a main source for the characteriza- tion of their Isacis Lespés. , RHIGONEMA, COBB, 1898. Cylindroid nemas having the following average size and form :— O.8_ 4.0,,B.3 25°54719 92. O.8_ 4.5,, 9.5 95 92. 4g 23° 3.6, 4. Be Sie er, a ee aes 45°" sae with a more or less acute conoid posterior extremity; cuticle colorless, exceedingly finely striated, faintly winged if at all, sometimes with exceedingly minute retrorse prickles, especially anteriorly; lateral chords one-sixth to one-third as wide as the body; musculature oxyuroid,—e.g. in R. wnfectum, 16 equivalent fields, 4 in each quadrant; anteriorly subtruncate with three very flat, thin, mobile lips overlying an exceedingly shallow vestibule, leading to a small but definite triquetrous pharynx, this latter armed in front with three broad, in- wardly arcuate, lobed and denticulate, more or less retrorse onchia joined into a transverse triangle, at the blunt corners of which they are so “hinged” together as to be worked by antagonistic muscles: (1) very weak ‘‘extensors’”’ passing from the onchia radially outward and very slightly forward, the muscles doubtless aided by the elasticity of the labial region; (2) powerful retractors passing from the onchia backward and outward. Cephalic papillae, four, submedian, small; JAN. 3, 1927 CHRISTIE AND COBB: RHIGONEMA 19 circular depressed amphidial openings small, but larger than the papillae, and arranged in practically the same circlet with them near the margin of the head. Oesophagus unusually broad and strong, with a more or less indistinct pharyngeal swelling but very distinct, broad, even napiform, highly muscular cardiac bulb, set off, fore and aft, by distinct constrictions and armed with a large triple corrugated valve. A circlet of nine (3 double; also 3 single, opposite the onchia and alternating with the 3 double) saccate, cephalic, often pigmented glands empty into the pharynx. Large cardia flat, three-lipped. The faintly tessellated intestine is set off by a distinct constriction. Renette bilateral. Anterior lip of the vulva usually more or less papilliform and slightly retrorse. ‘ ?’, the details as figured by Leidy, except that the pear-shaped swelling between each ovary and uterus should be regarded asaspermatheca. In young but mature females elongated cephalated sperms may occur in the unpaired enlargement sometimes present near the vulva. The numerous ellipsoidal, smooth eggs are deposited after segmentation has begun. Males with two equal spicula without accessory piece. ‘o. Nobursa. There is a single pre-anal ventral papilla in addition to the small pre- and post-anal “‘submedian”’ ones. ‘Type species, R. brevicolle. Habitat: Parasitic in the intestine of millipeds. _Julus and Spirobolus, both hosts of rhigonemas, represent groups of millipeds consisting of numerous species found in many different parts of the world. This fact, together with the morphology and dis- tribution of the known rhigonemas, warrants the prediction that species of Rhigonema will prove numerous. Parona’s Isacis modiglianir, 1896, may perhaps prove to be a rhigonema. As the millipeds have come down to us from as long ago as the carboniferous era with relatively little morphological, and therefore presumably little physiological, change, their parasites are of unusual interest. Should the latter also have meanwhile evolved similarly, it is not unreasonable to expect from this source hints as to the primi- tive form of some nemic structures. 20 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 1 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 940TH MEETING The 940th meeting was held in the auditorium of the Cosmos Club on Saturday evening, May 15, 1926. The meeting was called to order by Presi- dent Bowts at 8:17, with 55 persons in attendance. The program for the evening consisted of an address by Dr. Joun C. Mbreian on The Meaning of EKvolution in Indiidnal Experience. Discussed by Messrs. HawkEeswortn, C. A. BRiaas, CrirTENDEN, WRiGHT, Bowiz, TUCKERMAN, MAarMeErR, THONE and:others. 9041ST MEETING The 941st meeting was held jointly with the Washington Academy of Sci- ences and the Chemical Society on Saturday evening, May 29, 1926, in the Auditorium of the Cosmos Club. The meeting was called to order by Presi- dent Burasss of the Academy at 8:16 P.M. with 144 persons in attendance. The program for the evening consisted of an address by Professor ERNST CouHEN of the University of Utrecht, on the subject: Metamorphosis of matter and the alleged constancy of our physico-chemical constants. The address was illustrated with lantern slides and with experiments. Discussed by Messrs. WasHBuRN, Norris, Hupson, Hey, Sosman, Linp, Wricut, and WHITE. 942D MEETING The 942d meeting, the first meeting following the summer intermission, was held at the Cosmos Club on Saturday evening, October 2, 1926. The meeting was called to order by President Bowi1k at 8:16 p.m. with 52 persons in attendance. The program for the evening consisted of an address by Dr. H. U. SverpRuP Director of the Geophysical Institute B of Bergen, on The tides on the north Siberian shelf; their bearing on the existence of land in the Arctic Sea, and their dynamics (Illustrated with lantern slides). The address was published in Turis JouRNAt for Dee. 3, 1926. The subject was discussed by Messrs. BreIT and Marmer. On behalf of the Society President Bowizr thanked the speaker for his interesting address. Upon call for informal communications Mr. W. D. Lamserrt called atten- tion to the work of Esclangon on the hypothesis of a cosmic tide due to the translation of the solar system through space. ‘This was discussed by Messrs. Breit and Wootarp. Mr. HawkeswortsH then spoke on a mathematical development of the law of disintegration of radium. 943D MEETING The 943d meeting was held at the Cosmos Club on Saturday evening, October 16, 1926. The meeting was called to order by Vice-President AuLT at 8:17 p.m. with 65 persons in attendance. The program for the evening consisted of an address by Dr. C. G. ABBor, on A new observatory in Southwest Africa. (Illustrated with lantern slides.) The speaker described the present state of the investigation of the Smith- sonian Institution on the variation of the sun. For fifteen years, measure- JAN. 3, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY Fes ments were carried on by the method of Langley at Mount Wilson, Califor- nia, from 1905 to 1920. Beginning with July, 1918, daily observations, as far as possible, have been continued at Calama, Chile, and at Mount Monte- zuma, Chile, up to the present time. Starting with October, 1920, observa- tions were continued at Mount Harqua Hala, Arizona, until October, 1925, when the station was removed to Table Mountain, California, where the daily observations are still going on. A comparison of the daily values at Mount Montezuma and Mount Har- qua Hala indicates an average daily divergence of about 4 per cent. A considerable number of days failed of observations at both stations, and a large number failed of record at one station or the other. Hence it appeared that the satisfactory study of the variation of the sun requires at least one, and preferably two additional stations, to be located in the most cloudless and favorable high-altitude regions to be found in the world. The National Geographic Society, appreciating this need, and the world- wide bearing of the observations of the sun’s radiation, made a grant to Dr. ABBOT in the year 1925 to enable him to select the best available station in the eastern hemisphere, equip an observatory, and carry it on for approxi- mately four years. The speaker described the conditions desirable and the evidence which pointed to Algeria, Baluchistan and Southwest Africa as the most promising countries for the location. He described the investigations which were made in these countries, which resulted in the selection of Mount Brukkaros in Southwest Africa of which the altitude is 5,202 feet, the longitude, 17° 48’ E and the latitude 25° 52’ 8. As this station is situated in the central part of the Hottentot Reservation it was necessary to obtain permission of the Hottentots to locate there. The road, garage, reservoirs, observing tunnels and dwelling house were prepared during the summer of 1926, under the direc- tion of Mr. A. Dryden, Inspector of Public Works for the Government of Southwest Africa. An expedition under Mr. W. H. Hoover, field director, with Mr. F. A. Greeley, assistant, provided with sixty cases of apparatus and accessories, landed at Cape Town on September 13, 1926, and it was expected that actual observations on Mour:t Brukkaros would be undertaken by the end of October. The average rainfall in the region is 35 inches. It occurs mainly in the months of February and March, so that the months of December and Janu- ary which are the least satisfactory at the stations on Table Mountain and Montezuma will be very good months at Mount Brukkaros. The speaker was at or near Mount Brukkaros for twelve days in early March, which is the height of the rainy season, and during his stay eleven days of the twelve would have been satisfactory for the solar radiation observations. Doubt having been expressed by various critics as to the reality of the variation of the sun, and as to the reality of the influence which, according to Clayton, solar variation reflects on the weather, the speaker exhibited a number of slides confirming these supposed effects. Numerous slides illus- trative of the journey of explorations and the stations engaged in solar radiation work were shown. (Author’s abstract.) The address was discussed by Dr. Brett. 944TH MEETING The 944th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club on Saturday evening, October 30, 1926. The meeting was called to order by President Bowin at 8:17 with 36 persons in attendance. 22 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 1 The program for the evening consisted of two papers. The first by W. P. WHITE was on Improvements in galvanometer stabilizers. Apparatus, particu- larly galvanometers, can be shielded from horizontal disturbances by hanging with wires or cords. Julius (1895), who used three wires, showed that the suspended body is apt to perform vibrations about a horizontal axis through its own center of gravity. He tried to avoid these by attaching his wires at the same level as the center of gravity and subsequently arranged to place the galvanometer so that its head came at the point of least motion, that is, at the center of gravity. This produced a relatively complicated and expensive apparatus. He put his dampers also at the level of the center of gravity. These dampers were crossed vanes of sheet metal attached to the stabilizer and immersed in pots of heavy oil. In some cases it has been found that these secondary rotational oscilla- tions are negligible. When this is the case the construction can be much simplified. A suggestion coming from the Reichsanstalt is that the damper should be put below. This is both easier and more convenient and tends to damp the secondary oscillations, which Julius’ arrangement damps as little as possible. With swing coil galvanometers exceedingly slight changes of level produce large deflections, and it seems probable that an instrument suspended from three long, slender wires would be tipped through differential expansion if the room temperature is not especially uniform and constant. This difficulty is almost entirely avoided if the instrument is suspended from two wires which hang from two opposite arms of a horizontal cross whose two other arms are supported from above and which is free to shift its position slightly in case the wires expand differently. Heavy oil is an admirable damper. An instrument floating in the center . of a moderately large tank of it—one containing perhaps from twenty to forty dollars worth of oil—would probably be stabilized for almost any con- ceivable conditions. Damping is almost indispensable with suspended bodies (oil damping is generally used), but the damper transmits some motions while it quenches others. If the vessel of oil is relatively wide impulses coming from its walls, that is, from the building, are largely damped by the oil itself before they reach the suspended apparatus. Damping alone, however, will not insure complete absence of vibration because the damper has no action until some motion is present. Since the vibrations of apparatus, especially of suspended apparatus, are largely influenced by resonance, general conclusions can not be drawn from the performance in a few instances. (Author’s abstract.) The paper was discussed by Messrs. Bowin, McKrruan, TuCcKERMAN and HUMPHREYS. The second paper of the program was by G. R. Wait on The magnetic per- meability of iron and magnetite in high-frequency alternating fields. (Illustrated with lantern slides). Arkadiew measured the absorption of electric waves by two parallel wires, and found that the permeability of iron and nickel wires varied with the wave-length. The values for both iron and nickel decreased to very small values when the wave-length was decreased to 1.3 cm. He explained this decrease in the ferro-magnetic property in iron and nickel on the basis of the natural vibrations of the elementary magnets. From these results, together with those of other workers, particularly those of Kart- schagin and those of Wwedensky and Theodortschik, the conclusion was drawn that the elementary magnets had several periods of oscillation. In JAN. 3, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 23 view of the attention this subject has received and must continue to receive in the field of magnetism, the author undertook a repetition of the work of Wwedensky and Theodortschik. Two experimental methods have been followed, the one making use of a high-frequency oscillating tube circuit and a resonating circuit, the other employing two high-frequency tube circuits and one audio-frequency circuit. The former is known as the resonance method and the other as the heterodyne beat method. Various forms of iron, such as filings, wires, and powder, were used as well as magnetite in the form of crystals and powder. The resonance method extended from about 50 to 160 meters wave-length, while the heterodyne beat method covered the range from about 80 to 1,700 meters. Wwedensky and Theodortschik found an abnormal increase in the perme- ability of iron wires at about 100 meters which was attributed by them to the resonance of the elementary magnets. The present investigation failed to confirm this result. Although apparent anomalies at first were found, it was discovered that they were all due to resonance between various parts of the ‘circuit. Upon eliminating this difficulty no abnormal change in permeability over the range covered was found. Consequently, the author feels justified in concluding that if elementary oscillators exist, hey have failed to resonate at the frequencies employed. Various errors in the work of Wwedensky and Pheadertchit were pointed out. Some of these may have been largely responsible in producing the ap- parent anomalies observed by them. (Author’s abstract.) The subject was discussed by Messrs. BAuER, McKEEHAN, SOSMAN and Breit. The complete paper will be published in an early number of the Physical Review. Upon invitation of the President, Dr. BAurR explained informally the status of the International Research Council and affiliated Unions. H. A. Marmer, Recording Secretary. GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 406TH MEETING The 406th meeting was held in the Cosmos Club May 6, 1925. Program: T. A. JAGGER: Engulfment in volcanism. The speaker called attention to the published result of measurement of volume of rock engulfed! in the explosive eruptions at Kilauea in May, 1924. Engulfment accounted for 253 times the amount ejected explosively. This observation was made by Mr. R. H. Finch at the Observatory. The engulfed rim rock equalled over seven billion cubic feet, equivalent to a cylindrical column reaching down 3,000 feet below the bottom of the remnant pit, and having the diameter of that bottom. This breccia must partially choke the vent to great depths. The explosions appeared to be actuated by steam, rising through orifices in the jumble of fallen crags, ejecting nothing but old and mostly crystalline rocks, ‘and vented by different parts of the bottom area. The explosion phe- nomena followed three months of down-faulting and crateral subsidence, and accompanied acceleration of engulfment already initiated. Engulfment phenomena in great volume have been common in the past without any explo- sion. ‘The sequence of phenomena from 1914 to 1924 agrees with the hypoth- 1 Bull. Haw. Vole. Obs., December, 1924. 24 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 1 esis that tension of magma opened fault rifts in the larger edifice, lava in the pit shaft lowered hydrostatically, the pit walls collapsed into the rift when deprived of the magmatic pressure, ground water entered the shaft between hot lava below and a plugged vent above, and a geyser mechanism resulted. Thereafter the gas tension in the magma reasserted itself, the lava rose and shut off the ground water, and in July the lava reappeared for a fortnight in the bottom of the pit. Dr. E. 8. SHEPHERD suggests that the enormous amount of weathered rock engulfed would feed oxygen in the form of ferric iron oxide to new attack by hydrogen, so that a large amount of heat would be liberated, and the ferric iron would be reduced to ferrous. The abundant surfaces of the breccia would make diffusion possible in a rising magma charged with hydrogen, resulting in oxidation of the hydrogen thoroughly but not too rapidly, and in oxidized gas at the surface of the lava lakes. This is what we find. An excess of ferric over ferrous oxide in the engulfed material of only one percent more than in the glass would raise the temperature of one tenth of the breccia from 20°C. to 1200°C. yielding heat enough to keep the voleano going for years. (Author’s Abstract.) ; J. D. Srars, Recording Secretary. SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS The Smithsonian Institution has received recently the botanical library which was presented to the Institution several years ago by Captain John Donnell Smith, of Baltimore. This is one of the finest private botanical libraries of the United States, and is especially rich in works relating to the flora of tropical America. Mr. ExuswortH P. Krurie and Mr. ALBERT C. SmitH, of the National Museum, who are engaged in botanical exploration in Colombia, have had headquarters for several weeks at Cartagena. This port is of interest be- cause it is the type locality of many species described by Jacquin over 150 years ago. A visit has been made also to Turbaco, where Humboldt collected the types of many plant species. x GS OF THE ACADEMY AND ne Antropol Society. ee of the affiliated societies wil appear on this page if a he thirteenth and the twenty-seventh day of each month. Popes, : on The Philosophical Society . eee ae pe ae See a ao o The Geological Society... isc. es oS eee Oe a8 He 0ew 66 te te ae ee es hae erin) o: Screntiric NOTES AND News. oe of % Xi Zé t ~ ge ~~ ms Vol. 17 January 18, 1927 No. 2 pee AF egy nia ey laa~ ge ae JOURNAL (x 48291927. %) PRY | of A 14 21S SIONAL ME OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES BOARD OF EDITORS D. F. Hewerr S. J. MaucuLy AGNES CHASE GEOLOGICAL SURVEY DEPARTMENT OF TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM BUREAU PLANT INDUSTRY ASSOCIATE EDITORS L. H. Apams S. A. RoHwer PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY E, A. GoLtpMAN G. W, STose BIOLOGICAL SOCIBIY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY R. F. Griaes J. R. Swanton _ BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY E. WicHERS CHEMICAL SOCIETY > PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY BY THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES ’ Mr. Royant AnD GUILFORD AVES. BALTIMORE, MaryLanD Entered as Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., under the Act of August 24, 1912. Acceptance for mailing at speciai rate of postage provided for in Section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 1918 Ret % a, ; This ae the official « organ ee he present a brief record of current scientific work in Washingto (1) short original papers, written or co short notes of current scientifie lite (3) proceedings and programs of meeti: notes of events connected with the scienti semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of e when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes corre publication is an essential feature; a manuscript rea the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on 8 isstfe of the Je OURNAL for the cies fourth or nine . M anuseripis may. be sent to any mpuiier of th Board of clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing editors cannot suderiate to do more Bee ier oO ee met. hy the author. . aaa Proof.—In order to frethitate. soni pabeatorh no saceat will bat sen unless requested. ba is urged that manuscript be submitted in final fo. se exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. : _ Authors’ eres: Pee Pe will be furnished at i the followin sched le Copies 4pp. sé pa. 12 pp. paca tl 50 | $.85. $1.65 $2.55 rem 100 P00 BBO. med 180 Sie 22a ee OA es Oreo 200: 32 bo A. 80 5. Hoe, 200 Pa tag ene 45 5 AD aA 6. 25 e.! An aditionn! charge of 25 cents will be made for each split p page. : Covers bearing the name of the author ‘and title oF the article, t! incl p nation and date of i issue, will be furnished when ordered. en As-an author will not eRe see proof, his raqnus for extra copies should invariably be attached to the first page of ae Epes ay, be a The rate of Subscription per ois i Semi-monthly sa Osa EMEC Monthly MUMIDOER., yi ake ici an es oii wlan as ok a dias win alee sme _ Remittances should ‘be made payable to ‘acento. hence of StienmeaY ant addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Waking pe European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, London. ay . Exchanges.—The JouRNAL does not exchange with other publications. Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, provided that claim i is ‘ma e€ within thirty days after date of the eto Ee issue, eS see ~ *Volume ‘a however, from June 19, 4911, to December 19, 1911, will be neat ne $3. 00. “Spocial rates are given to members. of scientific societies affiliated with. the Solver iiens te a ih Boek tips JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vor. 17 JANUARY 18, 1927 No. 2 SPECTROSCOPY .—Regularities in the arc spectrum of lanthanum.' W. F. Meccers, Bureau of Standards. Although regularities among lines of the spark spectrum of lantha- num (La II) have been known for some time,” nothing concerning the structure of the arc spectrum of this element (La I) has heretofore been published. With the aid of new data, the analysis of the La II spectrum has recently been extended,? and the first regularities in the La I spectrum were detected. The new descriptive material included an extensive list of temperature classifications of lanthanum lines by Dr. King and Miss Carter,‘ and some unpublished Zeeman-effects ob- served by the late Professor B. E. Moore. The temperature clas- sification has been especially valuable on account of its division of the La lines into two sets, one set (La I) characterizing the neutral atom and the other (La II) the ionized atom of lanthanum. The mul- tiplets in either spectrum have a large wave length range so that estimation of line intensities becomes very difficult and there is further- more a possibility that certain deviations from the intensity rules might be expected for heavy atoms like La. Nevertheless, the es- timates of line intensities by King and Carter have been very useful in the construction of multiplets and it appears that the intensity rules are usually fulfilled, at least qualitatively. In asimilar manner deviations from the Landé g values might be expected to produce some strange Zeeman-effects for La I lines since such have already 1 Published by permission of the Director of the Bureau of Standards. Received December 9, 1926. 2Porpow, Ann. der Physik, 45: 147. 1914. Pautson, Ann. der Physik, 45: 1203. 1914. Goupsmit, Kon. Akad. Wet. Amsterdam, 33: No. 8. 1924. 3 Muaeers, J.O.8.A.&R.8.I1. In press. 4 Kine and Carter, Astrophys. Journ. In press. 25 26 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 2 TABLE 1.—ReEwuativeE TERMS IN THE La I Spectrum TERM TERM LEVEL SYMBOL VALUE SEPARATION OR TEMES SA TSORES) a2D, 00.07 a?P, b?P, a?D, b?D, c?D, d2D, a2F, b?F, c2F, dF, e2F, | I, I, II, IV, a‘D, a‘F, béF, atG 1053 .2 a’?D3 1053 .24 a‘F, 2668 .27 a’P, a2D, b’D, c?D, a2F, b2F, c2F, a*b, a‘F, b4F, a4G 341.8 a‘F; 3010..0- 484 .6 ath, 3494 .6- 627 .0 a‘hs 4121 64 I 14804 .1 a2D, atF aD. 15031.77 a2D, a‘F 1506 .7 ial 15196 .8 a2D, a‘F a2D3 16538.411 a’F, 16856 .97 a?D, a‘F 1053 .3 b2D2? 17699.8 a’F, 17910.24 7 a2D, a‘ 247 3 b2p; 17947.1 4 a4G; 18156.97 a2D, atl CDs alsin a a2D, a‘F 447 .0 N20 a‘G. 18603.9-|: 525.4 a‘Gs 19129.3- c2p3; 19379.4]4 a’?P, 20019.1| 7 a2D, a‘F 988 .1 a4F, 20083.0/7 a2D, a‘P 178.3 aiGe 20117.44 eee WOO A= 290.8 IT OBS 2) = 425.0 a4F, 20763.2 - 620.8 2B 20972 1 ler a2D, a‘F a4F; 21384.0 J 475.8 bab ee21447.9 2 e2F,? 21662.5 a2D, a4 JAN. 18, 1927 MEGGERS: ARC SPECTRUM OF LANTHANUM 27 cro, VAECE _ spranatvon Sens at, (22246.67 a2D, a‘P 192.8 atD2, 22439 .4- 364.9 a‘D3 22804.3- 498 9 a4D, 23303 .2.) dF; 23875.07 a2D, at 534.7 a@F, 24409.74 b4F, 24507 .83 a2D 476.5 b’F; 24984.3- e7F,? 25218.1| 7 a2D 396 .0 b4F, 25380. 3- 424 9 e?F3;? 25643.0}. 616.7 bal. 125997'.04 III 21022 .7. a2D, a‘F b?P1? 27968.77 a2 953.7 bP? 28722'.4. d?D3? 29502 .37 a2D 62.7 d2D.? 29565 .0. IV 30788 .5 a2D V 30897 .0 a2D been noted*® for La II lines. Even though the available Zeeman- effect data for La I lines are not very precise, they nevertheless serve to identify most of the important levels in the doublet- and quartet- systems of spectral terms. The relative terms, comprising 48 levels in the La I spectrum are presented in Table 1 in which the successive columns contain (1) the term symbol for each level, (2) the relative energy value on the basis of a?D. = 0.0, (8) the level separations of the complex terms, and (4) asummary of the term combinations. Until better criteria are availa- ble the spectroscopic symbols suggested for several of the levels must remain in doubt; five of the levels are tentatively represented by Roman numerals. 5 Goupsmit, Kon. Akad. Wet. Amsterdam, 33: No. 8. 1924. 28 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 2 As in scandium’ and yttrium,’ likewise in lanthanum the lowest energy (normal state) of the atom is represented by a doublet-D, and the first metastable state by a quartet-F term. According to the theory of Heisenberg and Hund? the former results from the ds? configuration of 3 electrons, and the latter from d?s; the first triad of quartet terms (4D, ‘F, ‘G) arising from the d2p arrangement. It is of interest to compare the interval ratios of the metastable quartet-F term with the theoretical values, since in yttrium a most remarkable agreement was found’ for the analogous term. The interval rule is indeed obeyed by this term almost equally well in all three spectra (Se I, Yt I, La I), as can be seen from the following: Separations Ratios Theoretical a aes gos Ag ot — 900 OO mene OO 21 Se 66.955 42°) $2.5) 4. 380.8 = 9 00) 27 aie OGe ee onus 39 Yt 264.1 °°: 7199 4 9: 14103 = QL00 Fs 706 onee 57 La 627-0 9: 4846". :, 341.8) = 900: 2) 6) 9aire ee ao0 If this is not a coincidence it indicates that small, progressive changes in the interval ratios occur for analogous terms in spectra of elements In successive periods. The combinations of terms in Table 1 are given in detail in Table 2, beginning with combinations of doublet with doublet terms. These are followed in order by doublet-quartet, quartet-quartet, and quartet-doublet combinations. The symbols and term values of the low levels are placed at the head of the table, and the data for the higher levels at the left margin. The differences of the combining term values are represented in the body of the table by the vacuum wave numbers of the spectral lines. Wave length data are printed immediately above the wave numbers, and are followed by parentheses containing intensity estimates and temperature classes as given by King and Carter. The wave lengths shorter than 5500A are from the measurements of Wolff!® and the longer ones are by Kiess;" the former being converted from Rowland’s scale to the International Angstrom scale of wave lengths in which the latter were measured. 6 Mreaarrs, This Journat 14: 419. 1924. 7Meaaers, This Journan 14: 419. 1924. Meraaers and Moors, This Journau 15: 207. 1925. Mraaers and Kiuss, J.0O.8. A. & R.8.1., 12: 417. 1926. § HEISENBERG, Zeitschr. f. Phys. 32: 841. 1925. Hunp, Zeitschr. f. Phys. 33: 345. 1925. 9 Mreaaers and Moors, This Journau 15: 207. 1925. 10 WourFrF, Zeitschr. f. wiss. Phot. 3: 395. 1905. 11 Kiuss, Sci. Pap. Bur. Stand. 17: 324. 1921. yan. 18, 1927 Vv 30897 .0 ‘LV 30788.5 d2D3? 29502 .3 d2Do? 29565 .0 b?2P2? 28722 .4 b2Pi? 27968.7 III 27022.7 e2F'3? 25643 .0 e2F4? 25218.1 d?F4 24409.7 d?F'3 23875.0 c?F'4? 21662 .5 b2F4 21447.9 b?F3 20972.1 a2P2 20019.1 a2Pi 20197 .4 e2Ds 19379 .4 e2D2 18172.3 b?D3 17947.1 b?D2? 17699 .8 a2F4 17910.2 3349 .81(3 IIT A) 29843 .88 3362.03(12 IIT A) 29735 .42 3514.07 (20 II A) 28448 .93 os 2 28511.8 3613.10(30 II) 27669.18 — 2 25969 .7 4065 .58(30 IT) 24589. 80 4137.02 (40 I) 24165.17 4280 .27(100 1) 23356 .47 4380.56(12 II A) 22821.74 4850.79(20 1) 20609 .44 4901.86 (25 I) » 20394.75 19918.9 5271.19(150 I) 18965.78 5455.11(400 I) 18326 .36 5839.78(20 IT A) 17119.19 5917.62(15 II A) 16894 .01 16646.6 5930.60(400 I) 16857 .05 MEGGERS: ARC SPECTRUM OF LANTHANUM 29 TABLE 2.—ComBINaTIONS IN THE La I SpectTRUM a2De 00.0 3235.64(5 IIT A) 30896 .90 3247 .03(8 II A) 30788 .50 3388.60(12 IL A) 29502 .27 3381.42(15 II A) 29564 .95 3480.61(8 III A) 28722 .40 3574.41(50 IT) 27968 .68 3699 .54(12 III A) 27022 .87 3898 .60(40 IT) 25642 .97 4187 .31(125 I) 23874 .97 4766 .90(100 I) 20972 .15 4993 .85(20 IT) 20019 .06 4949 .76(200 I) 20197 .36 5158 .69(80 I) 19379 .38 5501.35(300 T) 18172 .32 5570.38(5 II A) 17947 .11 5648 .26(80 IIT) 17699 .69 30 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 2 TABLE 2—Continued a2D3 1053.2 a2F3 16856.9 a?D3 16538 .4 a2D»2 15031.7 15196.8 14804 .1 atp 23303 .2 atDs 22804 .3 atDo 22439 .4 atD1 22246 .6 atk; 21384 .0 atl’s 20763 .2 atF3 20338 .2 atFe 20083 .0 b‘F’s 25997 .0 btF4 25380.3 b1F3 24984 .3 btF2 24507 .8 atGs 20117.4 atGs 19129.3 atGu 18603 .9 atGs 18156.9 6325 .92(150 1) 15803 .62 6455 .98(300 I) 15485 .25 13978.5 7068.32 (100 II) 14143 .73 7270.08(5 II A) 13751.24 4493 .14(25 I) 22249 .93 4596 .18(10 I) 21751. 12 21386 .2 5072.12(1 III A) 19710. 14 5185 .89(20 IT) 19285 .18 5253 .46(100 I) 19029 .80 4109.49(15 II A) 24327 .09 4177 .47(30 I) 23931.18 4262.35(15 IT A) 23454. 67 5696.19 (40 I) 17550.73 5845 .02(6 IT A) 17103 .85 a?2Do 00.0 5930 .60(400 TI) 16857 .05 6044.85(2 IIT A) 16538 .44 6650 .80(100 I A) 15031.65 6578 .52 (400 T) 15196.81 6753 .04(50 I A) 14804 .07 a ? 22804.3 4455.24(10 IT A) 22439 . 12 4493 .82(10 I A) 22246 .57 ae 2 20338.2 | 4977 .92(8 IT A) 20083.11 24984.3 4079. 18(40 I) 24507 .87 5506.07 (40 II) 18156.76 ———— Sanna JAN. 18, 1927 aiD. 23303 .2 a4D3 22804 .3 a‘D> 22439 .4 aD; 22246 .6 atFs 21384 .0 atF, 20763 .2 aiF 20338 .2 atF2 20083 .0 biFs 25997 .0 btF4 25380 .3 b4F3 24984 .3 biF2 24507 .8 atGs 20117.4 atGs 19129.3 atGy 18603 .9 atG3 18156 .9 II 27022 .7 e&F3? 25643 .0 e? Fy? 25218 .1 d?Fs 24409 .7 a‘F; 4121.6 5211.87 (300 IT) 19181.65 5791.33 (400 I) 17262 .40 6007.37(50 III A) 16641 .63 4570. 14(250 I) 21875 .06 4702 .63(10 I) 21258 .77 6249 .92(500 I) 15995.79 6661.40(80 I A) 15007.71 6903.07(1 ITI A) 14482 .31 21096.5 20288. 1 MEGGERS: ARC SPECTRUM OF LANTHANUM TABLE 2—Continued atFy 3494.6 5046 .87(60 IIL) 19808 .76 5177 .30(300 IT) 19309. 73 5588 .35(80 IT) 17889 .42 5789 .23(250 I) 17268 .66 5935.26(15 IT A) 16843 . 80 4442 67(12 IT) 22502 . 67 4567 .92(200 I) 21885. 67 4652 .12(20 I) 21489 .61 6394.24 (600 1) 15634.76 6616.59(80 I) 15109 .37 14662.3 22148 .4 4602 .04(20 IIT) 21723 .42 4779 .90(4 IT) 20915.13 20293 .2 5050.56 (80 IT) 19794 .26 5145.42 (200 IT) 19429 .36 5631.22(100 I) 17753. 24 5769.37 (80 I) 17328 .12 5855.58(15 IIT A) 17073 .00 4468 .98(25 11) 22370 .22 4549 .51(50 I) 21974.24 4650.35 (15 1) 21497 .75 6410.98 (300 I) 15593 .93 6600.17(50 IT A) 15146 .97 4163.30(8 III A) 24012 .65 4417.11(6 III) 22632 .89 4501.59(10 IT A) 22208 .15 21399 .7 dl a‘F 2668.2 4964.81(4 IIT A) 20136.1€ 5056 .46(80 IT) 19771.20 5106.24 (150 IT) 19578 .44 5657 .74(50 IT) 17670.00 5740.65 (100 I) 17414 .82 4479 .82(15 II A) 22316 .08 21839 .6 6454.51(200 I) 15488 .77 4104 .88(60 I) 24354 .43 22974.8 32 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES TABLE 2—Concluded _vou. 17, No. 2 atk’; atk, atl’; atl. 4121.6 3494.6 3010.0 2668.2 dF: ? 4791.38(5 IT) 4714 .13(5 I) 23875 .0 20380 .4 20864 .98 21206 .92 cE? 5699 .38(5 IIT) 5502.66(10 ITI) 5359.72(2 III A) 21662 .5 17540 .91 18168 .01 18652 .52 b2F4 5769 .99(25 III A) 5568 .48(50 IL) 5422.09(3 III A) 21447.9 17326.25 17953 .25 18437 .96 b?F3 5720.03(10 III A) 5565.74 (20 IT) ? 20972.1 17477 .59 17962 .10 18303 .9 a?P2 5877 .63(2 IIT A) 5761.84(60 I) 20019.1 17008 .96 17350.76 a?Pi 5703 .29(10 TIT) 20197 .4 17528 .90 eDs 6293.57(80 II A) 6107 .27(12 II A) 5982 .34(5 III A) 19379 .4 15884 .85 16369 .43 16711.26 c2De 6593.46 (60 I) 6448.15(60? II A) 18172.3 15162 .37 15504 .05 b?Ds 6917.24(10 III A) 6692 .88(30 I A) 6543 .15(500 I) 17947 .1 14452 .65 14937.13 15278 .95 b?De —= % 6650.80(100 I A) 17699.8 14689 .8 15031.65 a? === 2 6934.98(50 ITT) 6709 .50(200 I) 17910.2 13788 .6 14415 .76 14900. 14 a?F3 iy 7219.88(15 II A) © 7045.93 (300 IT) 16856.9 13362.3 13846. 83 14188 .67 a?D3 7664 .33(10? IIT) u a 2 16538 .4 13043 .87 13528 .4 13870 .2 a?De 8316.03(2 IV A) 8086 .07(15 IIT) 15031.7 12021.67 12363 .55 II 8203.39(1) K 7979.75(3n?) K 15196.8 12186 .73 12528. 30 I 8839.67(1) K 8476 .48(2) K 14804. 1 11309 .54 11794.11 Comparisons of the 3-electron spectra, Sc I, Yt I, La IJ, can best be drawn from energy diagrams, and for this purpose references will be made to Figures 1, 2, and 3, in which the various spectral terms are plotted as rectangles at distances from the zero axis proportional to their energies.. The vertical height of each rectangle represents the range of the sub-levels in the term; the increase of these separa- JAN. 18, 1927 MEGGERS: ARC SPECTRUM OF LANTHANUM 33 tions with atomic number is very noticeable. Each line connecting two spectral terms represents all the combination possibilities between the sub-levels of the combining terms, that is, a mulivplet of spectral lines. 40000 30000 20000 10000 25 25 2D 2p 20 = Js 20. ve 4g = 25 4p 4p H fe 4¢ 5G 4G Fig. 1—Energy diagram for the Sc I spectrum Whereas in Yt I the quartet-F is about 11000 em.— above the doub- let-D term, in La I it is only about 3000 units high. The value of quartet-F relative to doublet-D has not yet been established in Se I, although the intersystem combinations have been sought for diligently. ‘The reason is probably found in the weakness of these connecting lines. In the spark spectra of these three elements a remarkable increase of intensity of intersystem combinations was observed? as the atomic number increased. A similar state of affairs is now strikingly evident in the are spectra; no intersystem connection has been detected in Sc I, the strongest one in Yt I has intensity 20, while in La I the strongest one is marked 500. In the absence of intersystem combinations for Sc I the low quartet-F term in Fig. 1 JAN. 18,1927 WHERRY: SOIL REACTIONS OF SAPROPHYTIC ORCHIDS oO is tentatively placed 10000 cm. above doublet-D. Laporte has pre- dicted” that this difference will be about 11000 cm.—. My plan is to extend the analysis of the La I spectrum in con- nection with investigations of the Zeeman-effects and hyperfine structures of the spectral lines. I take this opportunity to thank Dr. King and Miss Carter for their kindness in lending me their tables of intensities and temperature classes in advance of publication, and I wish also to acknowledge the helpfulness of Professor Moore’s ob- servations of Zeeman-effects in giving clues for this analysis. PLANT ECOLOGY.—The soil reactions of some saprophytic orchids. Epe@ar T. Wuerry, Bureau of Chemistry. The soil reaction preferences of a number of native orchids have been recorded by the writer in three previous papers, the most com- plete list of data being in “‘Soil Acidity.”” Subsequent to the prepara- tion of that article opportunities have been presented to study many of the included species further, as well as to extend the work to others. The results to date on the saprophytic species commonly known as Coral-roots are here tabulated, and supplementary notes on a color form of one of them and the range of another are given. TABLE 1.—So1t REeaAcTIONS OF SEVEN SAPROPHYTIC ORCHIDS SOIL REACTION-RANGF AND APPARENT OPTIMUM (X) SPECIES STUDIED STATES IN NUM- : - Sten Ge (Cc. = CORALLORRHIZA) WHICH TESTS Ber or | Medi- Sub- | Minim- Minim- (H, = HEXALECTRIS) WERE MADE TESTS acid acid acid = alk. . — oh || seal aren Rosia Pers aaa eee aS f= mo Vile he) 2 teal Wamactlata (mUIt.)......+0--8- Md.-Me. 25 |—|x{|X}]}x}]x}]—|—|—-|— exouonvoOrniza . 2628. . wc ee: Va.-Md. 50 |}—}x{|x|]Xj]x]—}|—|—|]— ee rridart@or. ii. phe ee. Si) ANG OY .-Me. QDi ie be ex) | x: (ox) 2p xe Pa SLCTIONG 4. occa) k Oa. Va.-Md. 25 |}—}|—|—|x|x|X/]x/]x]— (OL SPF 15 er ee Mich.-Ont. 10 | —| —| —| —| x |X] x] x] — Wrriicranilia...........0......) Ela: 5 |—}| —| —| —| —| x] X}] x] — iaspleata. (aplit-)t. s. $228 220.0 ¢Bla.-Md. 25 |—|—|.—| —| x | x|X]|]x]|x p p The data presented in Table 1 have been obtained chiefly by stirring up the soil from the immediate vicinity of the plant roots with four times its volume of distilled water, allowing the mixture to settle for 22 Laporte, Zeitschr. f. Phys. 39: 123. 1926. 1 Received Dec. 13, 1926. 2Smithsonian Report 1920: 264. 1922. 36 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 2 several minutes, and determining the active acidity or alkalinity of the extract with a double-wedge comparator. The summarized results are grouped in reaction-classes designated by names rather than by numerical values, in accordance with suggestions recently published in ‘‘Soil Reaction in Relation to Horticulture.®”’ In the course of these studies a well-marked pale form of the Autumn Coral-root, Corallorrhiza odontorhiza Nutt., has been recog- nized, and as no such form of this species appears to have been named, it is here placed on record as: Corallorhiza odontorhiza forma flavida n. f.—Plant in every respect like the typical form of the species except in the lack of all traces of purple color, the lip being pure white without spots, and the sepals, ovaries, bracts, and stem being dull yellow, of varying shades of Ridgway’s no. 23. Type locality, ravine west of Pierce Mill, Washington, D. C., just outside of Rock Creek Park, in the Piedmont physiographic province; collected by Mrs. Nellie C. Knappen, September 15, 1924; type specimen in the U. 8S. National Herbarium, no. 1,285,622. A large colony was found by the writer a few hundred meters north of Bull Run Postoffice, Fairfax County, Virginia, October 13, 1926, also in the Pied- mont, and the accompanying illustration is made from a photograph taken there. Three stalks from this locality have been deposited in the National Herbarium, preserved in a mixture of acetic acid, ethanol, formaldehyde, and glycerol, in which their color and texture appear to remain essentially unchanged. The habitat at both localities is a thin oak-pine woods on clayey soil, of low subacid reaction, active acidity 10-25, (pH 6.0-5.6). It is also desired to place on record an extension of range of the Crested Coral-root Hezalectris spicata (Walt.) Barnhart. The nor- thernmost locality at which this plant appears to have been reported in the literature is Williamsburg, in the Coastal Plain of Virginia, where it was found by the late E. J. Grimes. There are, however, specimens in the U. S. National Herbarium collected by Miss M. J. Rathbun at Delaplane, in the Blue Ridge of Virginia, considerably further northwest. In mid-August, 1923, a single flowering stalk of this species was found by Miss F. W. Layton on an islet in Rhodes River, about 12 kilometers southwest of Annapolis, in Anne Arundel County, in the Coastal Plain province of Maryland, its range being thus extended into a new state, and to a point 150 kilometers north of Williamsburg and 125 kilometers east of Delaplane. The plant was pressed and deposited in the National Herbarium. In July of 3 Amer. Hort. Soc. Bull. 4. 1926. 4 Rhodora 24: 150. 1922. JAN. 18, 1927 WHERRY: SOIL REACTIONS OF SAPROPHYTIC ORCHIDS oO” the following year another stalk appeared a few meters away; this was not disturbed, but did not reappear in 1926, nor could any trace of the species be found this year in spite of the most careful search of the vicinity. Evidently, as in the case of certain other native orchids (e.g., Bastphyllaea corallicola, Isotria verticillata, Trvphora trianthophora,) the roots may lie dormant in the ground for two years or more without sending up flowering stalks, but in time attain suffi- cient vigor to bloom, produce seed, and so keep the species from dying out. Fig. 1.—Corallorrhiza odontorhiza forma flavida n.f. Bull Run, Va. The Crested Coral-root has been studied at a number of localities, and proves to be essentially a neutral, calcareous soil plant. In Tennessee it has been observed to grow both in the cedar glades, rooted in small.accumulations of alkaline soil in crevices of limestone rock, and in rich woods in the mountains, where the rocks are not calcareous, but local conditions have favored the thorough decomposi- tion of plant debris into neutral leaf-mold. The habitat at Delaplane, 38 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 2 Va., corresponds to the second of these. Along the Atlantic Coast the soils are predominantly acid, but coquina and shell-marl outcrop in some places, and masses of oyster-shells accumulated by the Indians provide a source of lime for soil-neutralization elsewhere. At the localities of this orchid observed in Florida—where, by the way, it blooms in May, not July or August, as sometimes stated—the soil is sandy, but shell material of one or the other of these origins lies not far beneath the surface, so that the reaction is essentially neutral. The same relation holds at the town of Bluffton, 8. C., at the south edge of which a large colony occurs, blooming in mid-June. At Williamsburg, Va., the lime comes from a stratum of large Pecten shells. The Rhodes River islet, on which the plant reaches its north- easternmost known point, is underlain chiefly by clay giving rise to acid soil, but at one end there is a thin deposit of oyster-shells, evi- dently marking a temporary Indian settlement, and it is here that the plant has obtained a foothold. The seeds which started this colony presumably came from as yet undiscovered localities along the shores of Chesapeake Bay or adjacent estuaries, where calcareous outcrops are occasional, and it would be interesting to search for these, although the encroachment of civilization has probably destroyed most of them. ENTOMOLOGY .—Noies on and descriptions of Syrphid flies of the subfamily Cerioidinae.. RaymMonp C. SHANNON, Bureau of En- tomology. (Communicated by 8. A. RoHweEr.) Considerable additional information on the Cerioidinae which may be regarded as supplemental to my previous paper on this group, “The Syrphid-flies of the subfamily Cerioidinae in the U.S. National Museum Collection,’ was obtained by the writer while examining certain European collections during a trip to Europe in the summer of 1925. I wish especially to thank Professor Hervé-Bazin, Major E. E. Austen, and Professor Mario Bezzi for the facilities they afforded me in this work. | The Cerioidine flies are the most attractive in appearance of the Syrphidae and this, together with their comparative rarity, have made them highly. prized by collectors. There appears to be a sur- 1 Received Nov. 16, 1926. 2Ins. Ins. Mens. 13: 48-65. 1925. JAN. 18, 1927 SHANNON: SYRPHID FLIES 39 prisingly large number of species for the unusual type of develop- ment which characterizes the subfamily.- More than 120 species are known, mostly from the tropics, and, as a rule, the species are very dis- tinct in form and color. Comparatively few synonyms (about ten) have been made in the group, although thirty writers have proposed names for the species. The resemblance of the different species of Cerzoidinae in appear- ance and behavior to various species of Hymenoptera, combined with the coincidental occurrence of the resemblants in the same region, is extraordinary and seemingly indicates true mimicry. Most of them simulate different species of wasps while a few have the appearance of certain saw-flies. The two most striking features of their similarity are the greatly extended antennae (long in the Hymenoptera and short in most Syrphidae) and the greatly constricted abdomen in the majority of the forms of these flies. The species resembling saw- flies have the abdomen broad throughout but the anterior corners are yellow, giving the flies the offhand appearance of having the abdomen petiolate basally. One of the latter group, from Australia (Tenthredomyia mellivora), has been reared from larvae found feeding on the honey in the nest of a species of native bee. Mr. Rohwer has shown me a species of saw-fly, Pterygophorus cinctus Klug, from the same region which it closely resembles. The larvae of this genus of saw-flies are gre- garious and feed on the foliage of the eucalyptus trees. Froggat has recorded that cattle are poisoned and killed when they feed upon these larvae which are migrating down the tree trunks. It is possible that the adult saw-flies retain the poisonous qualities of the larval stage and, if this is the case, it may be that they are purposely let alone by predaceous enemies. ‘This, if true, would indicate that the resemblance which the fly bears to the saw-fly may be of more im- portance than mere chance resemblance. The pupa of a number of species of Cerioidinae have been found on tree trunks but only in one other species, Cerioides conopoides (Lin- naeus) is there anything known of the larval habits of these flies. Larvae of C. conopoides have been found in the sap of diseased pop- lars and other trees and in ulcers on elms. Prior to the writer’s paper, noted above, only one generic name, Cervoides, was valid in the subfamily. Two others, Certa and Sphizi- morpha, have been repeatedly used, sometimes for the purpose of indicating generic differences between species, although Ceria is a 40 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 2 preoccupied name and Sphiximorpha, at the time of its erection, was given the same genotype which had been previously assigned to Ceriordes. In the writer’s treatment of the subfamily, four genera, Ceriordes, Monoceromyta (originally considered as a subgenus’), Tenthredomyia, and Polybiomyva (the last two being newly proposed) were recognized; and, insofar as the material (rather limited in exotic forms) at hand permitted, the species were located in their respective genera. More- over, he called attention to the apparent absence of another generic type, as follows: “‘It appears that there should be a fifth group or genus which is not represented in the material at hand. It should be of a more generalized nature characterized by an unconstricted abdomen and a short or absent antennifer.”’ A species which fits these requirements was found in the collection of M. Hervé-Bazin, namely Cerioides petri Hervé-Bazin, from Kumanotaira, Karuizawa, Japan. This species is made the type of the new genus Primocerioides. The writer has examined seventy-seven species of Cervoidinae (27 species recorded in his first publication) and finds that all of them may be placed without difficulty in the four genera he defined in his previous paper, except C. petri Hervé-Bazin, which, as has just been stated, becomes the type of anew genus. The species not seen by the writer have been located in their respective genera as well as the pub- lished descriptions will permit. A list of the genera with the species which they contain is appended at the end together with the dis- tribution of each species. The geographic distribution of the genera turns out to be remarkably consistent. . | Primocerioides (1 species)—Palearctic (Japan). Tenthredomytia Subgenus Tenthredomyia (16 species)—Holarctic, usually northern latitudes or high altitudes (such as the Canadian zone). Subgenus Pterygophoromyia (3 species)—Australia. Monoceromyia (40 species)—Mainly in the tropics of both hemispheres. Two species occur in Australia; twelve in Africa, none in Europe or temperate America. Cerioides (35 species)—In all continents. Polybiomyia (15 species)—Tropical America and southwestern United a one species from Malaysia (Aru Islands) and one from Natal, rica. 3 Bull. Brook. Entom. Soc. 16: 33. 1922. JAN. 18, 1927 SHANNON: SYRPHID FLIES 41 Cerioides is the most widely distributed of the genera and at the same time contains the most diverse set of species. Polybiomyia is mainly confined to the new world. The occurrence of one species of the genus, P. smaragdina (Walker), remarkable for its entirely green metallic coloration, in the Aru Islands of Malaysia, is of particular interest inasmuch as Crepidomyza ventralis (Walker), a genus and species of the Xylotinae, also occurs in the Aru Islands; all other species of Crepidomyia are known only from South America. Polybiomyia divisa (Wiedemann), recorded from Natal, Africa, is peculiar in its venation and could well be considered as a different subgenus. Pterygophoromyia, a subgenus of Tenthredomyia, differs from all other Cerioidinae (except Primocerioides?) in having a plumose * filament (the plumula) attached to the thorax just below the squama, the absence of which was formerly considered to be one of the char- acters of the subfamily. KEY TO THE GENERA OF CERIOIDINAE A 1. Antennal process (antennifer) very short or absent, rarely equaling half the length of first antennal joint. B 1. Abdomen not constricted basally; eyes pilose Primoceriodes, new genus B 2. Abdomen constricted basally; eyes bare. C 1. Metasternum membranous behind............ Cerioides Rondani C 2. Metasternum completely girdled with chitin Polybiomyia Shannon A 2. Antennifer very elongate, distinctly longer than first antennal joint B1. Abdomen very slightly and progressively narrowed basally, an- femoncormensibrieht yellow. s.:...5.:.:5:: Tenthredomyia, Shannon See biunala absent...) 5: .. +. oe Tenthredomyia, sensu stricto Go2> Plumula. present. -. 2.0.0.0. Pterygophoromyia, new subgenus B 2. Abdomen strongly constricted at juncture of the first and second segments, usually the main length of the second segment contracted iHEOLAlOnehpEhlOley ci sos ele SEL: Monoceromyia, Shannon. Primocerioides, new genus Genotype Ceriodes (sic!) petri Hervé-Bazin, Ann. Soc. Entom. France 83: 414. 1914. The characters given in the key will serve to distinguish this new genus. The absence of the antennifer and the nonconstricted abdomen mark this genus as the most generalized one in the sub-family Cerzoidinae. The genotype, which is peculiar in several respects, is the only species known in this genus. The pubescence is unusually developed, the eyes and face being distinctly pilose; the first antennal joint is long, the second short, and the third fairly long; the third longitudinal vein is straight and bears an appendix projecting into the first posterior cell. 4Suannon, A reclassification of the subfamilies and genera of North American Syr- phidae, Bull. Brook. Entom. Soc. 16: 67. 1921. 42. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 2 Only the type specimen, a male, in the collection of M. Hervé-Bazin, is known. Type locality, Kumanotaira, Karuizawa, Japan. AUSTRALIAN CERIOIDINAE Four species of Cerioidinae have been described to date from Aus- tralia. Three other species are now at hand and a possible fourth has been mentioned in a paper by G. H. Hardy, ‘‘Notes on some Australian Syrphidae.”’ ‘This latter species may be the same as the one described below as Monoceromyia hardyi, new species. KEY TO SPECIES OF AUSTRALIAN CERIOIDINAE A 1. Antennifer not developed; abdomen constricted basally; third vein moderately curved downwards, without appendix on the loop Cerioides breviscapa (Saunders) A 2. Antennifer very elongate, longer than first antennal joint. ; B 1. Abdomen not constricted basally; plumula present TENTHREDOMYIA (Subgenus PrERYGOPHOROMYIA) C1. First tergite entirely orange red; second almost entirely black without callosities; third tergite of male with a prominent tubercle T. saundersi Shannon C 2. First tergite biackish with yellow anterior corners; second largely yellow with a pair of lateral callosities; the third without tubercle. D 1. Meso- sterno- and pteropleura with yellow T. ornata (Saunders) D 2. Mesopleura only with yellow......... T. mellivora, new species B 2. Abdomen strongly constricted basally ; plumula absent MONOCEROMYIA C1. Thorax without yellow markings except on the humeri, noto- pleurae and scutellum; wings entirely infuscated M. austeni, new species C 2. Thorax with numerous yellow markings; wings infuscated only on amMbEnory DORGERM eae ia. ee M. hardyi, new species CERIOIDES BREVISCAPA (Saunders) Cera breviscapa Saunders, Trans. Entom. Soc. London 4: 65. 1847. | Ceriodes breviscapa (Saunders) Hardy, Australian Zoologist 2: 13. 1921. This species has some affinities with species of Monoceromyia and Ten- thredomyia. Originally recorded from Port Philip, South Australia. Hardy reports one specimen from South Australia and four from New South Wales. Type.—In the British Museum. Genus TENTHREDOMYIA Shannon Subgenus Pterygophoromyia, new subgenus Typre.—Tenthredomyia saundersi Shannon. The subgenus Pierygophoromyia is characterized by the presence of a small but distinct plumula (a plumose filament attached to the thorax just below the squama). The subgenus, so far as known, is confined to Australia. JAN. 18, 1927 SHANNON: SYRPHID FLIES 43 TENTHREDOMYIA (PTERYGOPHOROMYIA) ORNATA (Saunders) Cerza ornata Saunders, Trans. Entom. Soc. Lond. 4: 64, pl. 4, fig. 3, 3a, 3b. 1845. Ceria australis Macquart (synonym?) Dipt. Exot. Suppl. 4: 128. 1849. “Cerioides ornata Saunders,’ Hardy, Australian Zoologist 2: 13. 1921. Tenthredomyia australis (Macquart) Shannon, Ins. Ins. Mens. 13: 54. 1925. A male specimen at hand (previously recorded by the writer as T. aus- tras Macquart) agrees with 7’. ornata except in some particulars found in the original description as regards the abdominal coloration. The original description and figure indicate that the basal segment is reddish, margined behind with yellow, with the anterior corners yellow and equal in length to the second segment. The female is figured and shows only four seg- ments, the first of which equals the third in length. There should be five segments shown for the female, and apparently that which is intended for the first is the first and second combined, which together equal the length of the third. The specimen at hand differs from the description and figure in having the first segment more extensively darkened; but it agrees otherwise with the type of C. ornata according to my examination of the type. The type of C. ornata has the fourth tergite margined behind with yellow, con- trary to the impression given in the description. The description of C. australis (Macquart) agrees with 7. ornata except that the first antennal joint is stated to be as long as the antennifer, and in the figure given for C. australis the first joint is shown to be as long as the antennifer and equal in length to the following two combined. The first joint in 7’. ornata is scarcely more than half the length of the antennifer and the three joints are nearly of equal length. Hardy states under ‘‘Cerioides ornata Saunders” that there were two species standing in the collection of the Macleay Museum under this name. One was characterized by a pair of callosities on the second segment, the other not having these callosities. These callosities are present in 7’. ornata (Saunders) and J. mellivora (new species, described below) but are absent in 7’. saunderst. They are less developed in the female than in the male. Tenthredomyia (PTERYGOPHOROMYIA) mellivora, new species. Closely related to JT. ornata Saunders. Differs chiefly in having the yellow on the pleurae confined to the mesopleura and in having the second sternite black with the hind margin yellow and the third tergite entirely black. In T. ornata the second tergite is almost entirely yellow and the hind margin of the third is yellow. The ocellar triangle of the male is equilateral and the callosities on the second tergite are more prominent than in 7. ornata. In the female the eyes converge as closely together at the vertex as in the male but widen rapidly downwards; the center of the front has a very large black spot which includes the ocelli. The fifth tergite is obscurely reddish yellow. Length, about 12 mm., not including antennifer which is 1.5 mm.; antennifer and antenna combined, 5 mm.; wing 13 mm. Described from two males and four females; eight additional specimens are - in the British Museum. Type.—Male; allotype female, in the British Museum; paratypes in the U.S. National Museum. Cat. No. 40105 U.S. N. M. Two specimens have been reared and the puparia are mounted with the specimens and bear the label ‘‘Larvae live on honey in native: bee’s nest.’’ (Note by donor). . a Type locality.—Burpengary, South Queensland, (T. L. Bancroft). 44 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 2 TENTHREDOMYIA (PTERYGOPHOROMYIA) SAUNDERSI Shannon Tenthredomyia saundersi Shannon, Ins. Ins. Mens. 18: 53. 1925. Original description based on a single male. ‘The collection of the British Museum contains one male and four females. The species is nearest to T. ornata Saunders. In addition to the characters given for the male in the original description attention may be called to the differences existing be- tween the females of the two species. The front is much narrower in 7. saundersit and widens rather gradually downwards; the black spot on the front is much smaller and below the middle; first tergite reddish yellow, the sides yellow, a little darkened at the middle of the hind margin; second tergite velvety black with a bright yellow hind margin; abdomen without callosities; the yellow spot on the pleurae confined to the mesopleura. Type.—In U. 8. National Museum. Type locality—New South Wales: Sidney (January, 1900, Mackay). Other localities—Queensland: Burnett River (T. L. Bancroft); Mackay (G. Turner). Genus MonocEeRomyIA Shannon Monoceromyia SHANNON, Bull. Brook. Entom. Soc. 17: 32. 1922; Ins. Ins. Mens. 18: 50. 1925. The only intimation of the occurrence of this genus in Australia was that given by Hardy in the Australian Zoologist (vol. 2, p. 13, 1921). He calls attention in this publication to a species occurring in Queensland and New South Wales which has a greatly constricted abdomen and has the third vein of the wing deeply looped into the first posterior cell. No mention is made of the length of the antennifer, but a further characteristic noted by Hardy, namely, that the wing is infuscated above the third vein except the area within the deflected portion of the third vein, indicates a possible rela- tionship with the species here described under the name M. hardy. Monoceromyia hardyi, new species Male.—Rather small species, mostly dark with reddish yellow and yellow markings. Ocellar region black, remainder of vertex yellow; frontai triangle yellow, very broad and short; antennifer yellowish brown, distinctly longer than first antennal joint; antenna reddish brown, relative length of joints 1:0.75: 0.60; the base of the third joint nearly equal to its length; style two- thirds the length of the third joint, dark brown; face bright yellow with a black median stripe extending from base of antennae to oral margin and on each side of the face a black stripe extending from the oral angle upwards to the eye; thorax black, humeri and notopleural regions yellow; a pair of small, submedian, prescutellar, yellow spots and another pair of more elongate, sublateral spots which spread on to the postalar calli; scutellum yellow with median black spot bordering on anterior margins, meso- and sternopleurae with yellow spots, the pteropleura partly reddish yellow; legs largely red- dish yellow, the femora and tibia partly dark brown; abdomen rather strongly constricted at juncture of first and second segments, third and fourth seg- ments globose; first and second tergites reddish yellow, third and fourth black with reddish yellow hind borders; hypopygium reddish brown; an- terior border of wing deeply infuscated; the third vein deeply looped into first posterior cell, without appendix on the loop, the portion of the wing within the deflection and behind the third vein hyaline. Length 11 mm., plus antennifer 12 mm.; wing 8 mm. JAN. 18, 1927 SHANNON: SYRPHID FLIES 45 Type.—Male, in British Museum. Type locality Queensland: Brisbane (November 12, 1912, H. Hacker). Named for G. H. Hardy, student of Australian Syrphidae. Monoceromyia austeni, new species Male.—A larger species than the above, from which it is easily differen- tiated by the separated eyes, which at their greatest approximation are fur- ther apart than the width of the first antennal joint; antennifer and antennae entirely reddish brown; face slightly concaved, rising below to a moderate, keel-like tubercle; thorax black except for humeri and notopleural callosities and hind margin of the scutellum; legs reddish brown, all the femora with rather broad, subbasal dark bands; abdomen strongly constricted on basal half of second segment; first tergite black; second yellow on basal half with a dorsal, median dark line; posterior half of second tergite black, third and fourth tergites blackish with narrow yellow hind borders; hypopygium reddish brown; wings entirely smoky; third vein with loop and a short ap- pendix attached to loop. Length 13.5 mm., with antennifer 14.60 mm., wing 11 mm. Type.—Male, in British Museum. Type locality Queensland: Brisbane (November 24, 1912, H. Hacker). Named for Major E. E. Austen, the noted dipterologist of the British Museum. NEW SPECIES OF ASIATIC CERIOIDINAE Cerioides meijerei, new species Large, nearly black species, very close to C. fruhstorferz de Meijere. Female.—Head black, sides of face with a large yellowish spot and a smaller one on eye margin opposite antennal base; antennifer very short, its length about half its breadth; antenna black; first and second joints very elongate, of equal length; the third very small, but little longer than broad, style black; mesonotum black with a very obscure yellow spot on humerus and notopleura; hind margin of scutellum yellowish; pleurae black with an obscure yellowish stripe on mesopleura; legs almost entirely dark reddish brown: abdomen blackish; anterior corners faintly yellowish; petiole of second segment dark brown; second segment greatly constricted and elongate, the two basal segments equal in length to remainder of abdomen; hind margin of third tergite narrowly reddish brown; anterior half of wing deeply infuscated; posterior half faintly infuscated; third vein deeply looped into first posterior cell; the loop without an appendix. Length 18 mm.; wing 13 mm. One female. C. fruhstorferi differs in having the yellow facial markings much smaller and in having the third vein but little deflected. Type.—In British Museum. Type locality—Indo China: Haut Mekong. Tong Lap. (March 30, 1918, R. V. de Salvaza). Named for Professor J. C. H. de Meijere, who has worked extensively on the Cerioidinae as well as many other groups of Dzptera. Tenthredomyia brunettii, new species Rather small species, superficially related to Monoceromyia dimidiatipen- nis (Brunetti) of India and resembling the North American species T. tridens (Loew) and T. anchoralis (Coquillett). 46 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 2 Male and female.—Head yellow with black markings as follows: Male, a stripe extending from foremost ocellus to the occipital margin, a spot on Sch side between the base of antennifer and eye; a small median stripe which fades out half way to the antenna; a black stripe on each side extending be- tween oral margin and eye. I[emale, the ocellar markings extend as a stripe from the occipital margin to the ocelli, whence a fork extends from each side to the eye, and, continuing along the eye margin, come together and in so doing inclose a yellow spot which lies before the ocelli. Antennifer yellow below, black above, twice the length of first antennal joint which in turn is about equal to the length of each of the other two joints; lower portion of head, behind the lower facial stripes, bright yellow; the yellow of the humerus and notopleura converging into a single spot; a pair of sublateral mesonotal stripes behind the suture; scutellum entirely yellow; meso-sterno- and pteropleurae with yellow; femora yellow, more or less marked with black preapically; tibiae yellow, more or less darkened apically; tarsi more or less darkened; first tergite black with yellow sides, the yellow converging basally; second, third and fourth tergites black with yellow hind borders; hypopygium of male and fifth tergite of female black; anterior border of wing irregularly infuscated, hyaline behind. Length 11 mm., plus antennifer 12 mm.; wing 8 mm. Two males, one female. Type male and allotype female.—In British Museum. Type locality.—British Baluchistan: Quetta (June 2, 1902, C. G. Nurse). Monoceromyia dimidiatipennis (Brunetti) most closely resembles this species. Besides the abdominal constriction it differs in being more ex- tensively black. The post oral region is black, the humeral and notopleural yellow markings are separated; and no yellow occurs on the pteropleura. Named for Mr. E. Brunetti, in recognization of his contributions to our knowledge of Indian Dizptera. Tenthredomyia hungkingi, new species Approaches Tenthredomyia tridens (Loew) of North America very closely in size, structure, and color. Female.—Head largely black; the posterior orbit (space between upper occipital margin and hind margin of eye to ocelli to eye) yellow, a yellow spot present above each antenna; the face yellow with a median black stripe from base of antennifer to oral margin; antennifer reddish yellow; antennae black, mesonotum black, humeri, a small spot on notopleura, a pair of sub- lateral, postsutural stripes and scutellum yellow; yellow marking on pleurae confined to meso- and sterno-pleurae; legs reddish yellow; femora more or less darkened around the middle; first tergite black with anterior corners yellow; second, third and fourth tergites black with rather narrow yellow hind borders; fifth tergites black; wings infuscated on anterior half. Length 12 mm., plus antennifer 13 mm.; wing 10 mm. Two females. T tridens differs in having the yellow on the posterior orbit divided by the black extending from the ocellar region, the pteropleura partly yellow and the yellow on the hind borders of tergites two, three, and four expanding on their outer ends (contracting in JT. hungkingi, particularly on the fourth tergite). Type.—In British Museum. Type localityx—China: Hsikon, near Tieotean: (June 17, 1906, F.. M. Thomson) Tientsin, (June 15, 1906, JeeaN ls Thomson). Named for Teou Hung-King, (452-536 A.D.) one of the first Chinese naturalists to record observations on Syrphidae—namely Lristalis tenax (Linnaeus). : JAN. 18, 1927 SHANNON: SYRPHID FLIES 47 Monoceromyia salvazai, new species A large, nearly black species. Male.—F ace yellow, flat, with a median raised line extending from anten- nifer to oral margin which is black; a yellow spot on eye margin opposite base of antennifer; remainder of head black; antennifer and antennae black; antennifer nearly as long as two basal antennal joints; third joint a little more than half the length of second; style black basally, white apically; thorax black with only hind margin of scutellum obscurely yellow; legs largely blackish, the femora apically becoming reddish brown; abdomen strongly constricted at second segment which is as long as the third and _ fourth eombined and reddish brown on the more constricted portion; abdo- men otherwise black: wings infuscated anteriorly; third vein sharply looped downwards and with an appendix attached to loop. Length 21 mm., with antennifer, 23 mm.; wing 14mm. One male. M. obscura (Brunetti) resembles M. salvazaz in general appearance and color but is a smaller and more slender species with the mesonotum sub- quadrate. In M. salvazaz the mesonotum is much longer than broad. Type.—In British Museum. Type locality—Luang Prabang: Ban Sen Savouane (March 16, 1920, R. V. de Salvaza). Named for Mr. R. V. de Salvaza, the collector. Monoceromyia wiedemanni, new species. Fairly large, nearly black species, very closely allied to M. obscura Brunetti. Male.—Head black, a pair of yellow spots, one on eye margin opposite base of antennifer, and a large yellow marking on each side of face; an- tennae black, the joints of equal length, the basal two equal to length of antennifer; style grayish; thorax black with yellow only on the humeri and hind scutellar margin; legs brownish black; abdomen strongly constricted at second segment, which is as long as the following two segments, the con- stricted portion brownish; extreme hind edge of third tergite brown, slightly raised; remainder of abdomen shining black; the fourth tergite towards the hind margin with a deeply impressed transverse line; wings deeply infuscated anteriorly; third vein moderately looped downwards. Length 15mm., with antennifer, 16.5 mm.; wing 11 mm. One male. M. obscura differs in having the antennifer shorter, less than length of the two basal antennal joints; the frons yellow in the male, and no constriction before the hind margin of the fourth tergite. Type.—In British Museum. Type locality—Indo China: Luang Prabang, Ban Nam Mo. (March 3, 1918, R. V. de Salvaza). Named for C. R. W. Wiedemann, the first to describe a species of Ceriodi- nae from the Asiatic region (Ceria javana, 1824). Monoceromyia wallacei, new species A rather large species, predominantly black, with yellow and brownish markings. Closely allied to M. tridecimpunctata (Brunetti). Female.—Head black, a yellow spot on eye-margin opposite base of an- tennifer; face with a broad yellow stripe on each side; antennifer reddish yellow; antennae reddish brown, first joint a little longer than second which is equal to third; the two basal joints equal to antennifer; thorax with yellow on the humeri, a small spot on notopleura, a pair of postsutural stripes, 48 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 2 hind margin of scutellum, and part of the meso- and sternopleura; legs reddish brown, tarsi darker, basal halves of tibiae yellowish; anterior corners of first tergite yellow, sides of constricted portion of second tergite yellow- ish brown; hind margins of second, third and fourth tergites narrowly yellow, all three of which are slightly rimmed; fifth tergite black; wings dilutely in- fuscated on anterior margin; third vein moderately looped, without appendix. Length 17 mm., with antennifer 18.5 mm.; wing 14 mm. Described from one female. Type.—In British Museum. Type locality.—Celebes: Macassar (1857, A. R. Wallace). Named for the famous naturalist, A. R. Wallace, who collected it. Monoceromyia hervebazini, new species A large black species with yellow markings. Male.—F ace yellow with a median longitudinal black stripe which at the base of the antennifer sends out arms to the eye margins; remainder of head black; antennifer and antenna blackish, last joint dark brown; style whitish; thorax black with humeri yellow, a small yellow spot at outer end of trans- verse suture; meso- and sternopleurae partly yellow; legs reddish brown, more yellowish on basal half of hind femur; first tergite black; the second con- stricted and elongated, one-fourth longer than the third, yellowish on the most slender portion, with a dark median stripe; posterior third broadened, blackish; third tergite black, hind border yellow, the sides rimmed, the im- pressed line crossing the tergite along the anterior margin of the yellow border; fourth tergite black, the sides rimmed, the impressed line crossing the tergite near its hind border and producing a deep constriction, behind the constric- tion the tergite is brownish, with the extreme hind edge yellow; hypopygium black; wing rather dilutely infuscated on basal and anterior half, leaving the outer posterior quarter, nearly hyaline; length 18 mm., plus antennifer 19.5 mm.; wing 14 mm. Two males. Monoceromyia trinotata de Meijere has the third and fourth tergites deeply constricted near the hind margins by means of impressed lines, but this species is smaller, more slender, second abdominal segment much more elongate and possesses a number of yellow markings which are absent in M. hervebazint. Type.—In British Museum. Type locality —Shanghai, China (1854, Fortune). Named for M. Hervé-Bazin, an eminent dipterist of France, who is greatly interested in the Chinese fauna, having made a very extensive col- lection there. KEY TO THE ASIATIC SPECIES OF CERIOIDINAE AT HAND. (Measurements do not include antennifer) A 1. Antennifer undeveloped; third vein deeply looped; abdomen strongly constricted basally; black species with yellow facial markings; 18 mm. (indo > Chimg)) Rus RE Se tem ere Cerioides meijerei Shannon A 2. Antennifer greatly elongated. B 1. Abdomen not, or very slightly, constricted basally, with yellow apical corners: TENTHREDOMYIA. C 1. Thorax with yellow only on humeri and disk of scutellum. (China) T. grahami Shannon JAN. 18, 1927 SHANNON: SYRPHID FLIES 49 C 2. Pleurae with yellow and additional yellow markings on mesonotum. D 1. Yellow on notopleura confluent with yellow on humeri; ptero- pleura partly yellow (Baluchistan)....... T. brunettii, Shannon D 2. Yellow on notopleura widely separated from that on humeri; pteropleura without yellow (China)....T. hungkingi Shannon B 2. Abdomen strongly constricted at second segment; with or without yellow basal corners: MONOCEROMYIA C 1. Third tergite equal to or longer than the second; pleurae without yellow markings; 20 mm. (China)......M. pleuralis (Coquillett) C 2. Third tergite much shorter than second. D 1. Entire body, including wings, blackish except a pair of narrow, yellow facial stripes and white style; 25 mm. (Philippines) M. petersi (Speiser) D 2. Wings with strong contrast between the infuscation on anterior border and the hyalinity of posterior border; head and usually the body with more yellow. E 1. Pleurae entirely black. ~ F 1. Thorax black except hind scutellar margin; male without deep impressions on tergites; 20 mm. (Indo China) M. salvazai, Shannon F 2. Thorax with humeri at least obscurely yellow. G 1. Antennifer as long as combined length of first and second joints; 15 mm. (Indo China). .M. wiedemanni Shannon G 2. Antennifer shorter than the two basal joints 15 mm. CTVANG FE ola ee than eee, LS M. obscura (Brunetti) E 2. Pleurae marked with yellow. F 1. Meso-sterno- and pteropleurae marked with yellow. G 1. Post oral region black; mesonotum without post sutural markings or prescutellar spot; scutellum yellow with a median black spot dividing the yellow; 20 mm. (Malasia) M. javana (Wiedemann) G 2. Post oral region yellow; mesonotum with a pair of yellow post sutural stripes and a prescutellar spot; scutellum black, the hind margin yellow; 16 mm. (India) M. trinotata (de Meijere) F 2. Meso- and sternopleurae only with yellow; mesonotum with a pair of post sutural yellow stripes. G 1. Post oral region yellow; 16 mm. (India; Malacca?) M. ?tridecimpunctata (Brunetti) G 2. Post oral region black; 18 mm. (Celebes) | M. wallacei Shannon I’ 3. Mesopleura only with yellow; post sutural stripes obscure browment6 sme (Ching) 2. te 25 00 2.22 oe: M. wui Shannon LIST OF THE SPECIES OF CERIOIDINAE Arranged according to the present generic concept. Those species marked by an * have been examined by the writer. PRIMOCERIOIDES Shannon “petri (Hervé-Bazin) (Cerioides) Japan 50 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 2 CERIOIDES Rondani North and Central America and the West Indies cylindrica (Curran) (Ceria) California *durani Davidson Arizona *loewil (Williston) (Ceria) California ontarioensis (Curran) (Ceria) Ontario signifera (Loew) (Ceria) U.S. (?) Mexico *willistoni (Kahl) (Ceria) = signifera (Loew)? Pa., Md., La., Tex. South America *barbipes (Loew) (Ceria) Brazil bigotii (Williston) (Ceria) Brazil, Bolivia boliviana (Kertesz) (Ceria) Bolivia *braueri (Williston) (Ceria) Brazil facialis (Kertesz) (Ceria) Paraguay flavosignata (Kertesz) (Ceria) ~ Bolivia, Peru *meadei (Williston) (Ceria) Brazil *miki (Williston) (Ceria) Brazil nigripennis (Williston) (Ceria) Mexico picta (Kertesz) (Ceria) Boliva, Peru pyrrhocera (Kertesz) (Ceria) Bolivia *roederii (Williston) (Ceria) Brazil sackeni (Williston) (Ceria) Brazil superba (Williston) (Ceria) Mexico trichopoda (Kertesz) (Ceria) Bolivia variabilis (Kertesz) (Ceria) Bolivia, Peru vicina (Kertesz) (Ceria) Peru wulpii (Williston) (Ceria) Brazil, Bolivia Europe, Western Asia, Northern Africa *subsessilis (Illiger) (Ceria) Europe, ete. Asia and Malaysia *decorata (Brunetti) (Ceria) India fruhstorferi (de Meijere) (Ceria) India fulvescens Brunetti (Ceria) India *meijerei Shannon Indo China triangulifera Brunetti (Ceria) India Africa bezzi Hervé-Bazin Australia *breviscapa (Saunders) (Ceria) South Australia JAN. 18, 1927 SHANNON: SYRPHID FLIES dl TENTHREDOMYIA Shannon North America *abbreviata (Loew) (Ceria) Eastern North America *proxima (Curran) ‘Ceria) = abbreviata (Loew) Canada, New England *anchoralis (Coquillett) (Sphiximorpha) New Mexico pictula (Loew) (Ceria) Southern United States sartorum (Smirnov) (Cerioides) Turkestan *snowl1 (Adams) (Sphiximorpha) New Mexico *tridens (Loew) (Ceria) West of the Rocky Mountains Europe, Western Asia, Northern Africa *conopoides (Linnaeus) (Musca) Mediterranean countries, Persia *vespiformis (Latreille) (Ceria) Mediterranean countries. Asia, Malaysia *annulifera (Walker) (Ceria) New Guinea *brevis (Brunetti) (Ceria) India *brunettii Shannon Baluchistan compacta (Brunetti) (Ceria) India *dimidiatipennis (Brunetti) (Ceria) India *orahami Shannon China *hungkingi Shannon China metallica (Van der Wulp) (Ceria) New Guinea ornatifrons (Brunetti) (Ceria) India relicta (Walker) (Ceria) Aru Islands (Saunders)? relictura (Walker) (Ceria) Aru Islands Australia (Belongs to subgenus Pterygophoromyia) australis (Macquart) (Cerra) = ornata (Saunders)? Tasmania *mellivora Shannon South Queensland *ornata (Saunders) (Ceria) New South Wales *saundersi Shannon New South Wales MonocEROMYIA Shannon North America *eacica (Walker) (Ceria) Mexico *daphnaeus (Walker) (Ceria) Jamaica *tricolor (Loew) (Ceria) West Indies, Florida *veralli (Williston) (Ceria) | Panama South America bicolor (Kertesz) (Ceria) Peru, Bolivia lynchiu (Williston) (Ceria) Brazile Europe None 52 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 2 Asia and Malaysia anchorata (Bigot) (Sphiximorpha) lateralis (Walker)? annulata (Kertesz) (Cerioides) bakert Shannon = petersi (Speiser) (Synonymy based on a comparison of M. petersi in Bezzi’s collection.) erux (Brunetti) (Ceria) *eumenioides (Saunders) (Ceria) *fenestrata (Brunetti) (Ceria) flavipennis (de Meijere) (Ceria) *hervebazini Shannon *himalayensis (de Meijere) (Ceria) “Savana (Wiedemann) (Ceria) *lateralis (Walker) (Ceria) *obscura (Brunetti) (Ceria) *patricia (Brunetti) *petersi (Speiser) *pleuralis (Coquillett) (Sphiximorpha) *polistoides (Brunetti) *salvazi Shannon similis (Kertesz) (Cerioides) tibialis (Kertesz) (Cerioides) *tridecimpunctata (Brunetti) (Ceria) *trinotata (de Meijere) (Cerioides) *wallacei Shannon *wul Shannon *wiedemanni Shannon Africa afra (Wiedemann) ammophilina (Speiser) (Cerioides) brunneipennis (Loew) (Ceria) *caffra (Loew) (Ceria) congolensis Bezzi frenata (Loew) (Ceria) *vambiana (Saunders) (Ceria) *hopei (Saunders) (Ceria) maculipennis (Hervé-Bazin) (Cerioides) *neavei (Bezzi) (Cerioides) *pulchra (Hervé-Bazin) (Cerioides) *speiserl (Hervé-Bazin) (Cerioides) A ustralia *austeni Shannon *hardyi Shannon Borneo Fuhosho; Toyenmongai Philippines India India India India China India Malaysia Malaysia India India Philippines Japan India Indo China Formosa New Caledonia Indo China India Celebes China Indo China Cape of Good Hope Kilimandjaro South Africa South Africa Belgian Congo Cape of Good Hope Gambia Sierra Leone Belgian Congo Uganda Belgian Congo, Rhodesia Uganda Queensland (ueensland JAN. 18, 1927 SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS 53 POLYBIOMYIA Shannon North and Central America arietis (Loew) (Ceria) Mexico *bellardil Shannon Texas _*bergrothi (Williston) (Ceria) Mexico *captis Curran Mexico *engelhardti Shannon Arizona *macquarti Shannon Texas, Mexico *nigra (Bigot) (Sphiximorpha) Mexico *pedicellata (Williston) (Ceria) . Mexico *rufibasis (Bigot) (Sphiximorpha) Mexico *sayl Shannon Arizona *schnablii (Williston) (Ceria) Mexico *schwarzi Shannon Panama *townsendi (Snow) (Ceria) Texas, New Mexico, Arizona Malaysia *smaragdina (Walker) (Ceria) Aru Islands Africa *divisa (Walker) (Ceria) Natal Errata to the “‘Syrphid-flies of the subfamily Ceriodinae,’”’ R. C. Shannon,> Ceriodinae, spell Ceriozdinae. Ceriodes, spell Cerioides. acica Walker, p. 64, spell caczca Walker. Quotation marks should be placed about the descriptions of Polybromyza captis Curran and Cerioides durant Davidson, given in the keys, in order to give these authors full credit for these species. | SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS ARTHUR M. Piper has been appointed Assistant Geologist in the Geo- logical Survey and has been assigned to the Water Resources Branch. S. SpeNcER Nye, Junior Geologist in the Geological Survey, has been transferred from the Geologic Branch to the Water Resources Branch. The twenty-fifth anniversary of the establishment of the National Bureau of Standards was celebrated on December 4, 1926, by an exhibit of apparatus and methods at the Bureau, a reception and luncheon, and a dinner in the evening at which Dr. S. W. Srrarton, the first director of the Bureau, was a guest. 5 Ins. Ins. Mens. 13: 48-65. 1925. 54 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 2 The annual exhibit representing work of the departments of the Carnegie Institution of Washington was held at the Institution on December 11 to 13, 1926. Professor THEODOR VON KarRMAN, dean of the Aerodynamic Institute of the University of Aachen, Germany, gave a series of six lectures at the National Museum on Modern development of aerodynamic theories, on De- cember 3 to 13, under the auspices of the Daniel Guggenheim Fund for the Promotion of Aeronautics. The Pick and Hammer Club met at the Geological Survey on December 11. W. T. THom reported on the symposium on the hypothesis of con- tinental sliding, held at the New York meeting of the Association of Petro- leum Geologists; and A. C. Lawson described his recent trip through Africa. The Petrologists’ Club met at the Geophysical Laboratory on December 14. G. Tuneu described his observations on Oxidation of low-grade por- phyry copper ores; H. EK. Merwin and H. 8. WasHinaton discussed The relation of the optical properties to the composition of monoclinic pyroxenes; and W. T. ScHALLER gave brief notes on Hydrates of the borax group. At a joint meeting of The AcapEmy and the Chemical Society on December 16, 1926, the first part of the program consisted of the presentation of the John Scott Medal and an award of one thousand dollars to Dr. Harvry C. Hayes of the Navy Department in recognition of his work on sonic sounding. The presentation was made by a representative of the Board of Directors of City Trusts of Philadelphia, and was acknowledged by Assistant Secretary WarRNER of the Navy Department and by Dr. Hayres. The second part of the program consisted of a lecture by Professor J. N. BrONsTED, of the University of Copenhagen, on The metal-amines and their significance for the physical chemistry of solutions. The Acapemy held its annual meeting at the Bureau of Standards Tuesday evening, January 11. Dr. G. K. Buresss, the retiring president gave an illustrated address on the work of the Bureau, after which the laboratories were open for inspection, tests of various kinds being shown. Initial arrangements are being made for the repair of the CARNEGIE during 1927 in accordance with the appropriation made by the Board of Trustees of the Carnegie Institution of Washington on December 10, 1926, for the rehabilitation of that vessel, which must precede the three-years’ cruise to begin in 1928. Mr. Grsu returned to Washington from his trip in Europe December 23 and is now preparing his report on the conferences held with various European scientists interested in earth-currents and atmospheric electricity. Mr. O. Daut, who was aviator and assistant to Dr. SverpRuUpP during the Arctic Drift Expedition of 1922 to 1925, was appointed to the staff of the Department beginning January 1 and has been assigned to the work being done by Drs. Breit and Tuve. --=_ JAN. 18, 1927 SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS Sy9) The time of the Third General Assembly of the International Union of Geodesy and Geophysics at Prague has been set, for the general meetings, from September 4 to 11, 1927; preliminary meetings of the various sections preceding the general meetings are expected to begin August 28. Messrs. Ratpo W. G. Wyckorr and STERLING B. HEeNpDRIckKs have re- signed from the staff of the Geophysical Laboratory, Carnegie Institution of Washington, to take up X-ray investigation at the Rockefeller Institute for Medical Research, in New York. Commander N. H. Heck has returned to Washington after completing inspection duty in the Hawaiian Islands. Professor A. S. HircuHcock has returned from Cuba, where he spent about a month collecting grasses. He visited the Jata Hills near Guanabacoa accompanied by Brother Léon of the Colegio de La Salle. These barren serpentine hills east of Havana support a characteristic vegetation. The pine woods of Pinar del Rio were investigated in company with Brother Léon and Professor Roig, botanists who have done much to increase our knowledge of Cuban plants. Stops were made at two laboratories having facilities for visiting scientists. The first called Harvard House, is under the auspices of Harvard University, and is located at Soledad, near Cienfuegos, on a sugar plantation. In connection with Harvard House is a fine botanical garden. The second laboratory is in charge of the Tropical Plant Research Founda- tion, which has its Cuba division at Baragué (Province of Camaguey) ona large sugar plantation. Through the courtesy of the United Fruit Company Professor Hitchcock was able to visit the Company’s plantations at Guaro and Preston (Province of Oriente) and to investigate the pine forests of the Sierra Nipe. * SPS Fe a on ae. ee es ete a ify Ni ae BE eae ne se ete et et Ke eer Sere. : ‘ x = Ly veer et ae wi’ = + ay CNet ; ce - ~ a Savy ois at: : Gj ¥y xed s ~ by a ee rod AFFILIATED ‘SOCIETIES — | January 20, ‘Tue AcapEmy. . anuary | 22s The Philosophical Becty: Wenkae Sanronp: The problem of magnetic analysis. (Ilustrated.) : Hey: The constant of gravitation. (Illustrated.) y, sana 26. The Geological Society. y ~ The Biological Society. - _ The Botanical Society. ' The Entomological Society. _ . ‘The Se ea Society, Program: “ . a ee Seen et ee ate een f ey Po Ar re ee es -inae. Rayaonp C. Soe eT | Sctmwrrere Notes AND Nees ly ee Aa conc sep Gee ae. Recording Secretary: W. D. Dawes Coast and Geodetic Treasurer: R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey. v ace ees ei ala) Sea n 7 es ee ol. 17 : FEBRUARY 3, 1927 No. 3 ae % we ; ? en CER SS ee be 2 bee CWRU MIAT Gre ts co, : Shes ~ owe F Tey ani Meee : 7 fe Pre <4:402/ <<) * SOR af dee . } | 1 / : a . : — Ss > & = . R, ns - Vn Tin - exn3 3 34 a Ss “SIONAL NYS > i OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES higeid - BOARD OF EDITORS ~Wiiiiam J. Perers Aenrs CHASE J. B. Rensipg, Jr. t DEPARTMENT OF TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM BUREAU PLANT INDUSTRY NATIONAL MUSEUM ASSOCIATE EDITORS L. H. Apams S. A. RoHWER PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY E, A. GotpMan G. W. Stross BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY R. F. Grieas J. R. SWANTON BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY E. WicHERS CHEMICAL SOCIETY PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY BY THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Mr. Royau anD GUILFORD AvEs. BALTIMORE, MarYLAND Entered as Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., under the Act of August 24, 1912. Acceptance for mailing at special rate of postage provided for in Section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 1918 This J OURNAL, the official org yy present a brief record of currents (1) short original papers, written short notes of current scientific litera’ (3) proceedings and programs of me notes of events connected with the scientifi semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of n when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes corres} Sie aie is an essential ch will oral a manuser: it reach M esac may be sent to any arate of the’ Béard re} 3 glearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without ess editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious min should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publ _ the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that | _ gerially and submitted on a separate manuscript page. | _ Illustrations will be used only when necessary and will be con mn or diagrams of simple character. The cost of producing cuts for il us ! partly met bytheauthor. _ apse Proof.—in order to facilitate prompt publication no proof I be sent to unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted i in final orm; th will exercise due care in seeing that copy isfollowed. _ i Authors’ Reprints,—Reprints will be furnished the following. se Copies 4 pps ous 8 pp. § 12 pp. ~—680 $.85 ~—61.65 82. 5 100 1.90 © 3.80 475 150, 2.05. 430 e505 2 200 DON La RO ee Rane On ; 250 es oe Ze a 6. ae ; Cover bearing the name ae aie author and title of the sateen wit inel nation and date of issue, will be furnished when ordered. As an author will not pen see proof, his Pome for extra ‘copie or rep i should invariably be attached to the first page of his eae es SS et a lle The rate of Subscription per volume oe ie Seeger : esvese Monthly numbers.....-...+.+-+eeceeeeeseeeseeessesecescerseeees Remittances should be made payable to “Washington Academy of Gownten addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Weslenaie European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, London. Exchanges.—The Journau does not exchange with other publications. — of sae Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, bee that. claim i is within thirty days after date of the eee’ issue, z "4 : er 4 wes aes ek, Fate ie *Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, ‘to Hieaiiber 19, 1911, will he ate for $3. 00. ‘Special rates are given to members of scientific societies | affliated with ee Academy JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES iY FEBRUARY 3, 1927 No. 3 PETROLOGY .—An analctte-rich rock from the Deccan traps of India. N. L. Bowen. Geophysical Laboratory, Carnegie Institution of Washington. : In a study of the thin sections of a large collection of specimens of the Deccan traps in the possession of Dr. H. S. Washington a type was noted with a large proportion of a clear isotropic groundmass. ‘This has a very low refractive index and is therefore quite distinct from the glassy groundmass occasionally found in some of the ordinary traps. The isotropic substance is, in fact, analcite and in other respects the rock is so unusual that its occurrence seems worthy of note. The specimen is labelled ‘‘Deccan trap N.W. base of Ketool Hill, Cutch, India,” and has the general appearance of an ordinary trap. The weathered surface has occasional pits that suggest amygdules but are in reality produced by the weathering out of olivine crystals which show as clear grains on the fresh break and are the only con- stituent of the rock identifiable in the hand specimen. Under the microscope the rock is found to consist principally of analcite and pyroxene with a fair amount of olivine, as the small phenocrysts already noted, some nephelite, a little biotite, and rather abundant grains of an opaque ore mineral. The pyroxene occurs as clusters and patches of minute felted prisms, some of which have the appearance of irregular individual grains in ordinary light, the composite character being clearly revealed, how- ever, under crossed nicols. They average about 0.1 mm. in length and not more than } that amount in width. The high extinction angle and high refractive indices (above 1.70) mark it as augite. It probably makes up nearly one-half the rock. Analcite acts as a matrix between the patches and streaks of augite but another mineral is found to be 1 Received December 23, 1926. 7 58 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 3 interstitial to the prisms of augite of the felted mass when they are not too crowded to permit a determination of its presence. It has low refraction but, unlike the analcite, has a definite birefringence. Oc- casionally, on the border between augite clusters and analcite, definite prismoids of this mineral were observed which had weak birefringence, parallel extinction, negative elongation, and higher index than analecite but much lower than augite. They are in all probability nephelite. In one thin section a rounded area about 2 mm. in diameter was noted in which the mineral constituents are somewhat different from those in the main mass. The mineral determined as probably nephe- lite is the principal constituent and in it are contained prisms of a pyroxene which, unlike the augite of the main rock, is decidedly green and undoubtedly somewhat acmitic. In addition to this there are grains of a strongly pleochroic deep-brown amphibole. ‘This patch is, on a minute scale, analogous to the blebs of a pegmatitic character often seen in igneous rocks, especially those of an alkaline type. Of the constituents of the main mass of the rock, again, analcite is perhaps a little less abundant than pyroxene. It occurs as a ground- mass to the patches and clusters of augite prisms and its own distribu- tion is therefore correspondingly patchy. It is entirely isotropic in thin section and the refractive index is between 1.485 and 1.495. Acid dissolves the mineral with separation of silica and the solution shows alumina and soda. There is no tendency for analcite to occur as euhedral individual crystals resembling leucite such as are common in analcite basalts. The patches of analcite are, however, granular, the border between grains being ordinarily marked by filaments of some substance of higher index and the shapes of the individuals strongly suggesting the polyhedral outlines appropriate to analcite. Olivine is present as crystals that sometimes show an approach to euhedral outline but are generally of irregular shape and make up perhaps 10 to 15 per cent of the rock. ‘They may be as much as 2 mm. in diameter and therefore far exceed in size the grains of any other mineral. The refractive index y = 1.70 and 2V is nearly 90° so — that the olivine must contain approximately 10 per cent FeO. In some grains it is entirely fresh and in others it may be completely transformed to serpentine. Mica occurs in very subordinate amount and its relations to the pyroxene and ore suggest that it has been formed by reaction of the alkalic liquid with these minerals. Its strongest absorption is a pale brown and is in the normal position for biotite. FEB. 3, 1927 BLAKE: NEW ASTERACEAE FROM COSTA RICA 59 The ore mineral appears as small grains often of approximately octahedral shape. Feldspar is entirely absent. The Deccan traps are a thick series of basaltic lavas of the plateau type.2. They are normally of ordinary basaltic composition and are made up almost exclusively of augite and plagioclase. ‘The present rock is decidedly different. ‘There is no information regarding its mode of occurrence and therefore no definite assurance that it is a lava, but the extremely fine prisms of augite suggest a rate of cooling that is consistent with such a mode of occurrence. It is not possible to interpret the rock as an ordinary basalt in which analcite has replaced plagioclase for the augite has neither the granular character produced by extremely rapid chilling nor the ophitic char- acter produced by somewhat less rapid chilling in ordinary basalt. The minute prisms are, indeed, such as appear to be characteristic of alkaline basalts. The presence of nephelite suggests the possibility that the rock was a nephelite basalt now strongly analcitized. The evidence that analcite takes the place of other minerals, .princi- pally nephelite, is not clearly to be made out and is rather suggested than proved by its patchy distribution and the fact that nephelite rather than analcite is the matrix of the pyroxene prisms where they are most closely crowded. Occasionally, however, a seam of analcite is to be seen lying along the imperfect prismatic cleavage of nephelite. On the whole it would appear that the rock is a nephelite basalt which has suffered analcitization, but the possibility that it is an analcite basalt and the analcite dominantly primary can not be excluded. In either case it is apparently the first example from the Deccan traps of a rock of such strongly alkaline affinities. I am much indebted to Doctor Washington for the opportunity of examining his collection of these rocks. BOTANY.—WNew Asteraceae from Costa Rica. S. F. Buaxe, Bureau of Plant Industry.! The four new species described in this paper form part of the ex- tensive collections of plants made in Costa Rica in 1924 and 1925-6 by Paul C. Standley of the U. S. National Museum. Notes on cer- tain other species are added. 2H. S. Wasuineton. Deccan Traps and other Plateau Basalts. Bull. Geol. Soe. Amer,, 33: 765-803. 1922. 1 Received December 23, 1926. 60 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 3 Archibaccharis irazuensis Blake Hemibaccharis trazuensis Blake, Contr. U. 8. Nat. Herb. 20: 551. 1924. Dr. Johann Mattfeld of Berlin has called my attention to the fact that in describing the genus Hemibaccharis? I overlooked Heering’s genus Archi- baccharis,* founded on Baccharis hieraciifolia Hemsl. and B. hirtella DC. Of the 15 species recognized in my treatment, several have already been transferred to Archibaccharis in Standley’s ‘““Trees and Shrubs of Mexico.” The six following species (all Mexican or Guatemalan) require transfer. Archibaccharis corymbosa (Donn. Smith) Blake Diplostephium corymbosum Donn. Smith, Bot. Gaz. 23:8. 1897. Hemibaccharis corymbosa Blake, Contr. U. 8. Nat. Herb. 20: 553. 1924. Archibaccharis flexilis Blake Hemibaccharis flexilis Blake, Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. 20: 549. 1924. Archibaccharis glandulosa (Greenm.) Blake Baccharis glandulosa Greenm. Proc. Amer. Acad. 40: 36. 1904. Hemibaccharis glandulosa Blake, Contr. U. 8. Nat. Herb. 20: 546. 1924. Archibaccharis hieracioides Blake | Baccharis hieraciifoia Hemsl. Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot. 2: 129. 1881. Not B. hieractfolia Lam. 17838. Archibaccharis hieraciifolia Heer. Jahrb. Hamb. Wiss. Anst. 21: Beiheft 3: 40. 1904, as to synonym only. Hemibaccharis hieracioides Blake, Contr. U.S. Nat. Herb. 20: 547. 1924. Heering’s treatment of this species is far from clear. Although he pub- lished the name as ‘‘A. hzeracizfolia Heering n. spec.’”’ and cited Hemsley’s synonym with a mark of interrogation, he apparently did not consider the plant referred to (Pringle 6257) a new species, for he gave no diagnosis, merely remarking that Hemsley’s description called for leaves attenuate at both ends and petioled or subsessile, while in his plant they were sessile and auriculate. Pringle 6257 is in fact the type number of Baccharis glandulosa Greenm. (1904), a species distinct from B. hieracizfolia Hemsl. In the case of his second numbered species, Heering was similarly ambiguous, listing it as “A. hirtella Heering n. spec.,’ but citne “B. hirtella DO ex deser.”’ and “B. hirtella Klatt! Leopoldina X X. (1884), p. 4” among the synonyms. On the whole, it seems advisable to treat these two names of Heering as representing new combinations rather than new species. A third species, Archibaccharis schultzit Heer. (1. c. 41), based on Liebmann 425, is mentioned by Heering with a few words of description quite insufficient to permit the recognition of the species in the absence of specimens. Baccharis hieraciifolia Hemsl. was based on Bourgeau 951 and 1230, both from Desierto Viejo, Valley of Mexico. Both numbers, as represented in the 2 Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. 20: 544. 1924. 3 Jahrb. Hamb. Wiss. Anst. 21: Beiheft 3: 40. 1904. FEB. 3, 1927 BLAKE: NEW ASTERACEAE FROM COSTA RICA 61 Kew Herbarium, belong to the species with naked petioles, Archibaccharis hieracioides. ‘The specimen of Bourgeau 1230 in the U. S. National Her- barium, however, is A. glandulosa (Greenm.) Blake, with amplexicaul- based leaves. Archibaccharis salmeoides Blake Hemibaccharis salmeoides Blake, Contr. U. 8. Nat. Herb. 20: 548. pl. 50. 1924. Archibaccharis simplex Blake Hemibaccharis simplex Blake, Contr. U. 8S. Nat. Herb. 20: 547. pl. 49. 1924. Gnaphalium rhodarum Blake, sp. nov. Annual, leafy; stem lanate-tomentose and stipitate-glandular; leaves lanceolate, acuminate, green and glandular above, arachnoid-tomentose be- neath, short-decurrent: heads rosy, medium-sized, in close glomerules crowded in a small panicle. Single-stemmed, 24-30 cm. high or more, erect, the stem or the few branches simple below the inflorescence, lanate-tomentose with whitish wool, densely so toward apex, toward base glabrescent, exposing the dense stipitate glands; leaves nearly uniform, 2.5—5 cm. long, 4-8 mm. wide, with attenuate dark callous tips, broadest toward base and decurrent in rather broad wings 3-8 mm. long, repand, very narrowly revolute-margined; heads campanulate- subglobose, about 4mm. high and thick, glomerate at tips of the usually few and short branches of the panicle, the glomerules 1-1.8 em. thick; pistillate flowers 37, hermaphrodite 10; involucre 4 mm. high, about 3-seriate, some- what graduate, the phyllaries broadly ovate to oblong, obtuse or slightly apiculate, somewhat erose, the concealed green base arachnoid, the tips bright rosy or becoming light brown in age; corollas whitish; achenes oval- oblong, plump, 0.7 mm. long, papillose, otherwise glabrous; pappus bristles white, deciduous separately, not thickened above. Cosra Rroa: In paramo, Cerro de las Vueltas, Province of San José, alt. 2700-3000 meters, 29 Dec. 1925-1 Jan. 1926, Standler y & Valerio 43623 (type no. 1,258,330, U. S. Nat. Herb.); in open forest, same data, Standley & Valerio 48961; Cerro de Buena Vista, alt. 3100 meters, 19 Jan. 1891, Put- tier 3433. Pittier’s plant was determined by Klatt as Gnaphalium roseum H. B. K., to which G. rhodarum is related. In G. rosewm, however, the leaves are persistently tomentose above and much less conspicuously decurrent. The specific name is Latinized from ‘podapés,' rosy, a word given in Schrevelius’ Lexicon but not in Liddel! and Scott. Gnaphalium subsericeum Blake, sp. nov. Low herb; stem simple, white-lanate-tomentose; leaves rather few, linear, attenuate, green above, closely subsericeous-tomentose with white hairs beneath, not decurrent; heads small, numerous in a small dense cymose panicle; phyllaries narrow, blackish green below the obtusish firm white tips; corollas reddish-purple above. Stems 11-16 cm. high, erect, solitary (or paired?) from an apparently perennial slender root, densely and subsericeously lanate-tomentose; leaves nearly uniform (the upper only slightly shorter), about 12 above base of 62 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 3 stem, 3.5-6 cm. long, 3-5 mm. wide, attenuate to a callous brownish tip, sessile, not narrowed at base, entire, firm, above deep green, glabrescent or glabrate, very narrowly revolute- margined, the narrow green costa evident beneath; heads campanulate, 4 mm. high, 2.8 mm. thick, glomerate on the very short branches, forming a very dense rounded panicle 3-3.5 em. thick; pistillate flowers 69, hermaphrodite 8; involucre 4 mm. high, about 5- -seriate, rather strongly graduate, the outer phyllaries ovate, obtuse, the inner linear, obtuse or acutish, all with narrow greenish midline below, bordered by whit- ish, then by a narrow line of shining yellow brown, blackish or greenish black below the white chartaceous apex, thinly arachnoid below; achenes angled, 0.6 mm. long, nearly glabrous; pappus bristles apparently deciduous in groups, those of the hermaphrodite flowers slightly stouter than the pistillate, but not clavate-thickened. Costa Rica: Wet meadow, La Palma, Province of San José, alt. 1600 meters, 3 Feb. 1924, Standley 32941 (type no. 1,226,057, U.S. Nat. Herb. iy Evidently related to Gnaphalium salicifolium (Bertol.) Sch. Bip. (G. rhodanthum Sch. Bip.), which ranges from Mexico to Guatemala. In Gnaphalium salicifoltum the stem is distinctly indurate below or even suffrutes- cent, and densely leafy, the leaves are less attenuate, persistently tomentose above and not subsericeous beneath, the heads distinctly larger, and the phyllaries usually purple-tinged. | RENSONIA SALVADORICA Blake, Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. 13: 145. 1923. Bie) 1° This species, the only representative of its genus, was described from three collections made by Mr. Standley in the Department of Ahuachapan, Salva- dor, in January 1922. The original material was in mature fruit, and did not show the character of the ray corollas. The description of the genus can now be completed from further material of the same species collected in January 1926 at five different localities in the Cordillera of Tilara4n, Province of Guanacaste, Costa Rica, at 500-700 meters altitude, by Paul C. Standley and Juvenal Valerio (nos. 44224, 45572, 45828, 46083, and 46455). The specimens are described as collected from erect or ascending, usually sub- scandent, rarely epiphytic shrubs 1—4.5 m. high, common in moist or dry for- est. The following characters should be added to the generic description: Corollas all yellow; rays 8, fertile, 1-seriate, spreading, about equaling the disk (tube hispidulous above, 1.38 mm. long; lamina oval-oblong, shallowly or rather deeply 2-lobed, with one of the lobes sometimes bidentate, 3.8-5 mm. long, 2.6 mm. wide, hispidulous on back chiefly on the nerves, 8-9- nerved, 2 of the nerves much stronger than the others); ray achenes usually with a pappus of a single stout hispidulous awn or tooth (0.8 mm. long or less) on the inner side; pappus of disk achenes a short, thick, hispidulous- ciliolate crown, usually prolonged into 1-3 unequal teeth or short awns 1.2 mm. long or less. Hieracium sphagnicola Blake, sp. nov. Section Crepidisperma; phyllopodous; basal leaves oblanceolate, up to 17 cm. long, thin, sparsely long-pilose; stem rather tall, bearing 0-2 elongate leaves below the middle, sparsely long-pilose below, loosely cymose-branched above. bearing 5-8 heads on elongate, flexuous, flocculent, finely glandular, and apically pilose peduncles; involucre narrowly campanulate, 8-11 mm. high, stipitate-glandular and sparsely pilose, chiefly toward base; achenes FEB. 3, 1927 BLAKE: NEW ASTERACEAE FROM COSTA RICA 63 ; t ’ cated ' AV : g at / ASV GE ‘ f A / t ' j > “leg c Ah Y 4 i , A ae La od ef / i & g J ) / Le, y i y Fig. 1. Rensonia salvadorica Blake (drawn from Standley & Valerio 45572).—A, portion of plant, X1; B, fruiting head, <6; C, disk floret and pale, X5; D, ray floret, X4; EH, stamens, X10; F, style and nectary of disk floret, X10; G, style branches of ray floret, X10. 64 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 3 distinctly tapering above or nearly columnar, 3-4 mm. long; pappus brownish, 5 mm. long. Plants apparently tufted, 35-85 cm. high, from slender, vertical (?) root- stocks; basal leaves oblanceolate or obovate, 7-17 cm. long (including the slender petiole, this 1.5-9 cm. long), 8-18 mm. wide, obtuse or rounded, bluntly callous-apiculate, tapering at base, remotely denticulate (teeth dark, glandular-callous, up to 0.5 mm. long), green on both sides, above sparsely pilose, especially toward margin, with brownish hairs (these minutely hispidu- lous, about 3 mm. long, with darker brown, somewhat pustulate base), beneath similarly pilose chiefly along costa, the petioles more densely pilose; stem leaves similar to the basal but narrower, 6—11.5 cm. long, 3-7 mm. wide, densely pilose-ciliate at base; stems 1-2 together, very slender, branching above or sometimes from near base, below pilose with loosely reflexed hairs like those of the leaves, practically glabrous near middle, above sordid- flocculent and finely stipitate-glandular with short, several-celled hairs; bracts subtending the upper peduncles small and narrow or minute; peduncles monocephalous, 1.5-5.5 cm. long, flexuous and often divaricate, the glands blackish below, yellowish above, the longer hairs blackish; involucre some- what graduate, the phyllaries blackish green, lance-oblong or the outer lanceolate, obtuse to subacuminate (the inner 1—-1.3 mm. wide), the glandular hairs yellowish-tipped, blackish below; flowers about 23, their corollas yellow, 14 mm. long (lamina 9 mm.), deeply 5-toothed (teeth 3.5-4.5 mm. long), the teeth essentially glabrous; achenes brownish black or purple brown, short- tapering at base; styles pale. Costa Rica: Common in open sphagnum bog, Laguna de la Chonta, northeast of Santa Maria de Dota, Province of San José, alt. 2000-2100 meters, 18 Dec. 1925, Standley 42139 (type no. 1,252,630, U. S. Nat. Herb.). Also collected at same place and date under no. 423438. Readily distinguished from H. zrasuense Benth., H. standley: Blake, and H. abscissum Less., the only other species known from Costa Rica, by its foliage and pubescence. | . Hieracium standleyi Blake, sp. nov. Section Crepidisperma; phyllopodous, eriopodous; basal leaves small, sparsely long-pilose; stem scapose, short, bearing linear bracts at base of peduncles, otherwise naked, glabrous below; peduncles 3, long, monocepha- lous, above flocculose, finely glandular, and sparsely pilose; involucre rather broad, 9-11 mm. high, the phyllaries lanceolate to oblong, obtuse to acutish, broad (the inner 1.5-2 mm. wide), pilose at base and along midline, not glandular; achenes obscurely tapering above, 2.5-3.8 mm. long; pappus brownish, 4.5 mm. long. Perennial, 1-stemmed, 17 em. high, from a short praemorse rootstock with elongate slender rootlets, pilose-tufted at base with somewhat rusty hairs; basal leaves about 6, obovate, 3.5-4 em. long (including the petioliform base, this about 1 cm. long), 1 em. wide, rounded, bluntly callous-apiculate, taper- ing at base, obscurely and bluntly callous-denticulate, firm, above light green, sparsely pilose (hairs 1.5-3 mm. long, whitish, with small dark pustulate base, minutely hispidulous but not obviously many-celled), beneath pale green, sparsely long-pilose chiefly along costa and the 4-5 pairs of lateral veins; scape 3-headed, the unbranched portion 1.8 cm. long, practically glabrous, the lowest peduncle 13.5 em. long, 1-headed and with an abortive lateral head, subtended by a linear-spatulate bract 2 cm. long and 1 mm. FEB. 3, 1927 LEONARD: NEW PLANTS FROM HISPANIOLA 65 wide, sparsely pilosulous below, above loosely flocculose and densely short- glandular with small, blackish-based, many-celled, yellowish glands, toward the head also loosely pilose with blackish-based hairs, the 2 other peduncles about 7.5 em. long; involucre campanulate, 7-10 mm. thick (as pressed), rather strongly graduate, the outermost phyllaries lance-triangular, 2-4 mm. long, obtuse, blackish-green, pilose at base and along midline (the hairs blackish below, whitish above), the inner phyllaries about 13, narrowly oblong, obtuse, or acutish, thinner and paler above, with black, sparsely pilose midline; corollas ‘‘bright yellow,” about 10 mm. long (lamina 7 mm. long), with 5 glabrous teeth (1.3-1.8 mm. long); achenes deep purple-brown; styles blackish-green. Costa Rica: Scarce, in paramo, Cerro de las Vueltas, Province of San José, alt. 2700-3000 meters, 29 Dec. 1925-1 Jan. 1926, Standley & Valerio 43624 (type no. 1,253,331, U.S. Nat. Herb.). This species, represented by a single specimen, is apparently nearest the Mexican Hieracitum junceum Fries, but is abundantly distant in involucral characters from that species as described in Zahn’s monograph. BOTANY.—Fourteen new species of plants from Hispaniola. E. C. Lronarp, U. 8. National Museum. (Communicated by PauL C. STANDLEY.) 7 The fourteen species of flowering plants here described from the island of Hispaniola belong to several families, and all but three are based upon material collected by the writer in the course of his visit to the mountains of northern Haiti during the winter of 1925-26. Of the two exceptions, one is a Brunfelsia found by Dr. W. L. Abbott - on the Samand Peninsula, Dominican Republic, and the other two are new grasses from Furcy, southern Haiti, described by Agnes Chase from specimens obtained by the writer on a visit to that region in company with Dr. Abbott, in 1920. Phthirusa siegeri Leonard, sp. nov. Stems branched, erect or ascending, 20 to 50 cm. high, glabrous, the upper internodes compressed narrowly winged, broadened at the nodes, the lower internodes terete, light gray; leaves firm, leathery, oblong-obovate or oblong- elliptic, 4 to 7.5 em. long, 1.5 to3 em. broad, rounded or obtusish and apiculate at apex, gradually or somewhat abruptly narrowed to a short (2 to 5 mm. long) petiole, glabrous on both surfaces, drying olive-green, the midrib on lower surface and the petiole sharply triangular in cross-section, the lateral veins 3 or 4 pairs, inconspicuous in younger leaves; flowers 2 to 4 in racemes 1.5 to 3 em. long, in the axils of the upper leaves, the rachis light gray-fur- furaceous, flattened, broadened at the insertion of the pedicels; pedicels 1 to 2 mm. long, gray-furfuraceous; cupule shallow, about 2 mm. long, 4 mm. broad, gray-furfuraceous, obscurely lobed, the lobes deltoid, obtuse; calyx 1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. Received December 29, 1926. 66 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 3 minute, entire; petals 6, yellowish without, reddish within, thick, linear- oblong, 2 to 5 mm. long, 0.75 mm. broad at base, gradually narrowed from middle to an acute tip;,stamens 6, attached to the petals about 1 mm. above their base, the 3 sterile ones 1.5 mm. long, excavate on the margins below the triangular sterile anther (this 0.75 mm. broad), the 3 fertile stamens 1 mm. long, their anthers oval, apiculate, about 0.05 mm. broad; style fusiform, scarcely 2 mm. long; berry oval, black, 1 cm. long, 6 mm. broad, minutely reticulate. Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no 1,149,122, collected from a tree on a dry plain east of the Atalaye Plantation, vicinity of St. Michel, Départ- ment du Nord, Haiti, altitude 350 meters, November 18, 1925, by H. C. ' Leonard (no. 7166). Additional specimens examined: Harti: Mt. La Mine, vicinity of St. Michel, November 19, 1925, Leonard 7227. Dry bank along the Puilboreau road, north of Ennery, Départ- ment de |’Artibonite, altitude 400 meters, January 17, 1926, on Poztea multiflora (Sw.) Uro., Leonard 8903; February 13, 1926, Leonard 9715. Dry thickets on mountain slope southeast of Ennery, January 19, 1926, Leonard 8971. Phthirusa siegert is easily distinguished by the short, stout, few-flowered, light gray-furfuraceous racemes, large black oval berries, and small yellow- ish flowers. The species is named for Mr. E. J. Sieger, manager of the United West Indies Corporation, who assisted me greatly in my work at St. Michel. Coccoloba revoluta Leonard, sp. nov. Small tree with numerous spreading branches; bark light gray; young twigs puberulent, striate, slightly swollen at the nodes, the internodes 1 to 2.5 cm. long; ocreae 5 mm. long, obliquely 2-lobed at tip, the lobes short, obtuse; petioles 3 to 4mm. long, 2mm. broad at base, flat, puberulent above, glabrous beneath; leaves ovate, 2 to 4.5 cm. long, 1.5 to 3 cm. broad, rounded or obtuse at apex, subcordate at base, firm, revolute, drying olive-green, glabrous and prominently but minutely reticulate on both surfaces, the principal nerves 4 to 5 pairs, obscure above, prominent beneath; flowers and fruit not seen. Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,149,188, collected in a dry thicket several miles north of the Atalaye Plantation, vicinity of St. Michel, Départment du Nord, Haiti, altitude 350 meters, December 26, 1925, by E. C. Leonard (no. 8499). No. 7244, collected November 20, 1925, at the same locality is of this species. In shape and texture of leaf blades this species closely resembles C. pilonis Urb. and C. krugiz Lindau, but in neither of these species is the upper surface of the leaf blades prominently reticulated, and both have longer and more slender petioles. Coccoloba fulgens Leonard, sp. nov. Small tree 3 to 6 meters high; stems, leaves, and inflorescence glabrous; twigs reddish brown; ocreae 5 to 8 mm. long, oblique at tip, soon deciduous; petioles 2 to 10 mm. long; leaf blades oblong-elliptic to obovate, 2 to 5 em. long, 15 to 25 cm. broad, round at apex, narrowed from middle to petiole, acutish or obtuse at base, entire, firm, shining, yellowish green when dry, both surfaces coarsely and prominently reticulate, the lower surface minutely FEB. 3, 1927 LEONARD: NEW PLANTS FROM HISPANIOLA 67 glandular-punctate, the principal lateral veins 4 or 5 pairs; racemes solitary, terminal on small branches, 2 to 3 cm. long, the fruits 20 to 35, somewhat crowded; ocreolae 0.75 mm. long; flowers not seen; pedicels 1 mm. long; fruit reddish brown, pyriform, 6 mm. long, 4 mm. thick, the accrescent sepals closed over fruit, triangular, blunt, about 2.5 mm. long. Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 1,300, 397, collected in a thicket on the Puilboreau Pass between Ennery and Plaisance, Départment de 1’ Arti- bonite, Haiti, altitude 900 meters, January 23, 1926, by E. C. Leonard (no. 9145). In fruit and shape of leaf blades this plant resembles C. obtuszfolia Jacq. but that species has puberulent stems and petioles, a longer and more slender rachis, and larger leaves. Aeschynomene aurea Leonard, sp. nov. Herbaceous, branched at base, the branches slender, erect or ascending, leafy to the summit, striate, sparingly and minutely strigose with white hairs, or the hairs on the tips of the branches spreading; stipules sessile, ovate or lanceolate, rounded at base, acute or acuminate, prominently nerved, sparsely strigillose or glabrous; leaves 1.5 to 3 cm. long, hispidulous with white hairs, the petioles 3 to 4 mm. long, the petiolules 0.5 mm. long, the leaflets 6 to 11 pairs, 5 to 6 mm. long, 2 to 2.5 mm. wide, oblique and subcordate at base, oblique and obtuse at apex, prominently reticulate-veined beneath; flowers few, in axillary or terminal racemes up to 3 cm. long; pedicels 5 to 10 mm. long, pubescent with white, appressed or spreading hairs; bracts ovate, 1.5 mm. long, acutish, prominently parallel-veined; calyx 4 mm. long, sparsely strigillose, 2-lipped, the 2 lower lobes obtuse, the 3 upper ones triangular and acuminate; corolla golden yellow, the standard ovate to suborbicular, about 9 mm. long, 8 mm. broad, more or less pubescent with- out, the claw cuneate, 2 mm. long, 2 mm. broad above, the wings ob- liquely obovate, as long as the standard, the claw slender, the keel curved, obliquely truncate, about 5mm. long; stamens diadelphous, the united portion of the filaments 4.5 mm. long, the free portion 1.5 to 2 mm. long; ovary stipitate, 5 mm. long, minutely pubescent; style about 4 mm. long, abruptly bent, glabrous above, pubescent below; pods 2 to 2.5 cm. long, flat, 3 to 5- jointed, reticulate, appressed-pubescent, deeply constricted below, the tip hair-like, about 5 mm. long. Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,300,172, collected on the Puilboreau road above Ennery, Départment de l|’Artibonite, Haiti, altitude 800 meters, January 13, 1926, by E. C. Leonard (no. 8818). Aeschynomene aurea is closely related to A. tenuis Griseb., a Cuban species, but the two plants differ strikingly in several respects. The stems of A. tenuis are glabrous and bear but few leaves which are mostly near the base, the leaflets are narrower, the flowers smaller, and the pods glabrous or but very sparsely strigillose, very obscurely reticulate, and thick-margined. The stems of A. aurea are strigose and leafy to the summit and the pods are appressed-puberulent, prominently reticulate, and not thick-margined. Galactia retrorsa Leonard, sp. nov. Twining vine; stem retrorsely pilose with yellowish hairs about 0.5 mm. long; stipules retrorsely pilose, 3 to 4 mm. long; petioles 2 to 6 cm. long, re- trorsely pilose; leaflets 3; petiolules pilose with yellowish, appressed or ascend- 68 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 3 ing hairs, those of the lateral leaflets 1 to 2 mm. long, those of the terminal one 5 to 10 mm. long; leaf blades oblong-elliptic, rounded at both ends, firm, entire, the upper surface with a few hairs on the mid-rib, the lower surface velvety-appressed-pilose, the hairs on midrib denser and yellowish, the veins reticulate but not prominent; flowers numerous, in axillary racemes reaching 6 cm. in length; peduncles very short or none, the pedicels slender, 2 to 3 mm. long, pilose with minute, whitish, spreading, retrorse or appressed hairs; calyx slightly 2-lipped, about 5 mm. long, minutely appressed-pilose or a few of the hairs ascending, the lobes 1.5 mm. long, triangular, with an awnlike tip; corolla bright purple, about 8 mm. long, the standard orbicular, 5 mm. broad, emarginate, the claw 3.5 mm. long, 1.5 mm. broad, narrowed to 0.5 mm. at base, the wings obovate, 5 mm. long, 2 mm. broad, the keel curved, rounded, emarginate, about 3 mm. long; stamens diadelphous, the tube and single stamen 5.5 mm. long, the free portion of the 9 united stamens 0.5 mm. long, the stamen tube narrowed above; stigma 3 mm. long, appressed- pubescent. Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,149,590, collected on hillside near small stream on the north slope of Mt. Platanna, in the vicinity of St. — Michel, Haiti, altitude about 350 meters, December 7, 1925, by E. C. Leonard (no. 7811). No. 8119, collected in the vicinity of Marmelade, and no. 9228 from Plaisance, are to be referred to this species. They were taken from fruit- ing plants and differ from the type in their relatively shorter leaf blades and more sparsely pubescent stems. The pods are 2.5 to 3 cm. long, 5mm. broad, slightly curved, abruptly narrowed at the apex to a short curved tip, and appressed-pilose with minute yellowish hairs. The seeds are dark greenish brown or black, flat, 3.5 mm. long and 2 to 2.5 mm. broad. This well-marked species is characterized by the large rounded-elliptic leaflets, densely flowered, sessile racemes, and yellowish retrorse pubescence of stem and petiole. Trichilia truncata Leonard, sp. nov. Shrub or small tree 1 to 3 meters high; young twigs puberulent, the older twigs glabrous or sparingly puberulent, the lenticels round, about 0.5 mm. in diameter, prominent; leaves odd-pinnate; rachis 2 to 6 cm. long, puberulent; petiolules thick, 1 to 2 mm. long; leaflets 3 or 5, subopposite, 4 to 11 cm. long, 2 to 5 cm. broad, firm, leathery, drying bright green, extremely variable, cuneate or narrowly obovate, broadest above the middle, gradually narrowed from the broadest portion to the base, the margins straight or curved, en- tire, truncate and 3-lobed at apex, or, if narrowed, undulate or coarsely toothed, the apex and teeth or lobes blunt, the upper surface glabrous, the midrib impressed, the lower surface with prominent puberulent midrib and veins, the principal lateral veins 5 to 11 pairs, the secondary ones reticulate; flowers racemose, terminal, in the axils of the upper leaves, the racemes small, about 1 em. long, the branches puberulent; pedicels 1 mm. long, puberulent; lobes of the calyx triangular, acute, pubescent; flowers not seen; fruit obovoid, 7 to 10 mm. long, velvety-pubescent. Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, ‘no. 1,300,370, collected along the Puilboreau road, vicinity of Ennery, Haiti, altitude 900 meters, January 21, 1926, by E. C. Leonard (no. 9095). Additional specimens were collected near Marmelade, altitude 800 meters, December 20, 1925 (Leonard 8275 and 8288). No. 8288 consists of seedlings about 30 em. high with both juvenile and mature leaves. The juvenile leaves are linear, 8 to 18 em. long, 0.3 to 1 cm. wide, and blunt at apex. FEB. 3, 1927 LEONARD: NEW PLANTS FROM HISPANIOLA 69 This strange plant is found in thickets on the broken lime-capped summits of the higher mountain ranges of northern Haiti. It is probably related to T. pallida Sw., which it closely resembles in all respects except in the peculiar cuneate, truncate or lobed leaves. 7’. cunezfolia Urb., a species found in the Dominican Republic, has this type of leaf but the lobes are tipped with prominent spines. Croton ekmanii Leonard, sp. nov. Monoecious aromatic shrub about 1 meter high; branches slender; young twigs minutely stellate-pubescent and pilose (each long hair a prolonged ray of one of the stellate hairs); older twigs smooth, gray; petioles very slender, 1 to 3 cm. long, rather sparingly pilose and stellate-pubescent; leaf blades ovate, 2 to 5 cm. long, 1.5 to 2.5 em. broad (those of the short axillary branches much smaller), obtusish and apiculate at apex, rounded or subcordate at base with a very narrow sinus, thin, entire or undulate, the upper surface dull green, sparingly stellate-pubescent, becoming papillose and subscabrous on loss of the pubescence, the veins obscure, the lower surface grayish green, pilose and stellate-pubescent, the long hairs predominating on the younger leaves, the 4 to 6 lateral veins and midrib rather prominent; glands 1 or 2 pairs on the petiole at base of leaf blade, slender, hair-like, 1 to 1.5 mm. long; flowers few, in smali axillary racemes up to 1 cm. long; pistillate flower solitary, the pedicel 1.5 mm. long, pilose and stellate-pubescent, the sepals triangular, 1.5 mm. long, 0.5 mm. broad at base, the styles branched, clawed at tip, bearing several white stellate scales; capsule (Immature) densely white-stellate-pubescent; staminate flowers 4 to 6, subsessile on a slender rachis, sparingly pilose and stellate-pubescent, the sepals ovate-lanceolate, slightly faleate, 1.25 mm. long, 0.75 mm. broad, acutish at apex, the petals obovate, pilose at base, shorter than the sepals; stamens 16 to 20, the fila- ments glabrous, the anthers, oval, about 0.5 mm. long; mature fruit not seen. Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 1,301,545, collected along stream on the Atalaye Plantation, vicinity of St. Michel, Départment du Nord, Haiti, November 17, 1925, by E. C. Leonard (no. 7030). This species is readily distinguished by its thin ovate leaves, slender petioles with hairlike glands, and by the two types of pubescence. Thouinia milleri Leonard, sp. nov. Shrub or small tree reaching 4 meters in height; bark smooth, reddish brown, the lenticels prominent; young twigs appressed-puberulent; petioles 1.5 to 8 mm. long, glabrous; leaflets 3; petiolules 1 mm. long; lateral leaflets oblong-ovate or oblong to linear-lanceolate, 2 to 10 cm. long, 1 to 1.5 em. broad, the terminal leaflet linear-lanceolate, 10 to 25 em. long, 1.5 to 2.2 em. broad, all obtuse and apiculate at apex, narrowed at base, firm, serrate, the teeth low, tipped by the excurrent latera! veins, glabrous above, puberu- lent beneath, the midrib and lateral veins prominent on lower surface, the lateral veins numerous, parallel, widespreading, joining the midrib nearly at right angles, the veinlets prominently reticulate; flowers numerous, in crowded, axillary and terminal racemes 3 to 6 cm. long; pedicels slender, 3 to 4mm. long, puberulent; sepals 4, obovate, ciliate with minute blunt hairs composed of square or oval cells, dissimilar, 2 of the sepals keeled, 1 mm. long, the other 2 concave, 1.75 mm. long; petals white, cuneate, 3 mm. long, the apex truncate, undulate, bearing a pair of small bearded scales on the claw 0.75 mm. above its base; stamens 8, the filaments slender, slightly exceeding 70 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 3 the petals; anthers white, oval, 0.5 mm. long; ovary 0.5 mm. long, winged; ovules 2. Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,300,595, collected at the base of a cliff along the Gonaives road about 5 miles from Ennery, Départment de l’Artibonite, altitude 325 meters, February 3, 1926, by E. C. Leonard (no. 9472). ‘Two additional specimens from Haiti were examined, one collected among rocks at the mouth of the caverns north of St. Michel, December 5, 1925, by Leonard (no. 7750); the other near l’Arcahaie, March 10, 1925, by G.S. Miller (no. 267). Muller 267 is a twig bearing leaves and a raceme of mature fruit. ‘The samaras are greenish, spreading, obovate, the dorsal edge straight, the ventral curved, 2 cm. long, 7 mm. broad, somewhat striate, and puberulent. The seeds are obovate, 3 mm. long, 2 mm. broad and sparingly puberulent. T. patentinervis Radlk., a Cuban species, is closely related to this plant, but has leaf blades not exceeding 7 cm. in length and smaller flowers. Tetrazygia brevicollis Leonard, sp. nov. Round-topped shrub about 2 meters high; bark light gray, smooth; young branches sparingly and minutely stellate-furfuraceous; petioles 3 to 6 mm. long, gray-stellate-furfuraceous; leaves often erect, the blades oblong-elliptic, 3 to 5 em. long, 1 to 2cm. broad, acutish or obtuse at apex and tipped by a blunt mucro 0.5 mm. long, rounded at base, firm, entire, revolute, the upper surface shining, the midrib channeled, the lateral veins obscure, the lower surface light gray, densely and smoothly stellate-furfuraceous, 5-nerved, the first pair of nerves slender and near the margin of the leaf blade, joining the midrib at base, the midrib and second pair of nerves prominent, the latter joining the midrib about 2 mm. above the base, the lateral nerves numerous, wide-spreading, slender, impressed; flowers 1 or 2 on each of the pair of ter- minal peduncles; peduncles 13 mm. long, slightly flattened, furfuraceous, sub- tended by the upper pair of leaf blades; pedicels 1 mm. long; calyx rather sparsely white-stellate-furfuraceous, the tube 2 mm. long, the lobes :trian- gular, acuminate, 3.5 mm. long, spreading; corolla not seen; fruit (¢mmature in specimen examined) oval, 5 mm. long, 4 mm. thick, sparsely stellate- furfuraceous, becoming glabrous. Type in the U. 8S. National Herbarium, no. 1,149,939, collected on a dry slope six miles north of the Atalaye Plantation, vicinity of St. Michel, Départ- ment du Nord, Haiti, altitude 400 meters, December 26, 1925, by E. C. Leonard (no. 8461). This species is very close to 7. longicollis Urb. & Cogn., but differs in having smaller leaves and inflorescence and a much shorter calyx tube. T. longicollis is described as having a calyx tube 7 to 8 mm. long, panicles 3 to 5 cm. long, and leaves reaching 6 cm. in length. Hyptis congesta Leonard, sp. nov. Herbaceous, about 50 cm. high; stem erect, or ascending at base, simple or sparingly branched, square, the angles rounded, the four sides prominently channeled, finely striate, closely puberulent with white curved hairs, also sparingly pilose above, 4 mm. thick; petioles 1 to 3 cm. long, white-tomentose and pilose; leaf blades oblong-ovate, 2 to 5.5 em. long, 1 to 2.5 em. broad, cordate at base, gradually narrowed to an acute or acutish apex, both surfaces tomentose, the lower surface whitish and strongly reticulate, coarsely serrate FEB. 3, 1927 LEONARD: NEW PLANTS FROM HISPANIOLA 7] ‘the teeth crenulate, the axils of the leaves with short branches bearing small leaves; floral bracts similar to and intergrading with the stem leaves; flowers in short cymes, the cymes crowded in a terminal spikelike cluster at the sum- mit of the stem; pedicels 1 to 2mm. long, puberulent; calyx 8 to 9 mm. long, 4mm. broad at throat, 3 mm. at the rounded base, 10-nerved, tomentose, the margin ciliate, the teeth abruptly linear, 2 to 2.56 mm. long, involute, pilose; corolla light purple or lavender, pubescent at least above, about 5 mm. long, the upper lip obcordate, spreading, the lower lip 3-lobed, the lobes rounded, reflexed; stamens 4, didynamous, the filaments about 1 mm. long, pilose, the anthers oval, 1.5 mm. long; style reaching mouth of corolla, the stigma 2- lobed, the lobes spreading; mature nutlets not seen. Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,149,437, collected on dry calcareous slopes north of Mt. La Cidre, Départment du Nord, Haiti, alti- tude 300 meters, November 30, 1925, by E. C. Leonard (no. 7594). This species is well marked by the crowded terminal inflorescence and the white-tomentose reticulate leaves. It is probably related to H. pectinata CE) Port. Solanum gonaivense Leonard, sp. nov. Shrub about 2 meters high; branches slender, terete, grayish, stellate- pubescent; spines in pairs at the base of the leaves and branches, 2 to 5 mm. long, slender, recurved, glabrous; leaves 1 to several on minute axillary branches, rosulate; petioles 0.5 to 1 mm. long; leaf blades oblong or narrowly obovate, 3 to 8 mm. long, 2 to 3 mm. wide, rounded at apex, narrowed or rounded at base, both surfaces stellate-tomentose, entire, the midrib and the 2 or 3 pairs of lateral veins obscure; flowers few, solitary and terminal on the leaf-rosettes; pedicels 1 to 4 mm. long, stellate-tomentose; calyx 3 to 4 mm. long, stellate-tomentose, the lobes 4, linear-oblong, unequal, 3 to 4 mm. long, 1 mm. broad, rounded at apex; corolla white, 8 to 9 mm. long, the tube 1 mm. long, the lobes 4, narrowly lanceolate, blunt at apex, minutely stellate- pubescent without, glabrous within, stamens 4, attached to corolla tube 0.5 mm. above the base, the anthers linear-lanceolate, 6 to 7 mm. long, blunt at apex, subcordate at base, the filaments 0.5 mm. long; style 8 mm. long, glabrous, ovary globose, 0.75 mm. in diameter, glabrous; mature fruit not seen. Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 1,301,034, collected in an arid thicket on the Ennery Road about 8 miles northeast of Gonaives, Départ- ment de |’Artibonite, February 19, 1926, by E. C. Leonard (no. 10,007). This plant is closely related to S. microphyllum (Lam.) Dun. and may be merely a variety or form of that species. It differs chiefly in the much smaller leaves and flowers. Brunfelsia abbottii Leonard, sp. nov. Shrub; older stems gray, minutely reticulate, glabrous, papillose, sometimes flaky, the tips pubescent with small curved hairs; petioles about 5 mm. long, glabrous or sparingly pubescent with small curved hairs; leaf blades lance- elliptic, 6 to 10 cm. long, 2 to 3 em. broad, gradually narrowed to base, acuminate at apex, both surfaces sparingly pubescent, minutely reticulate above, minutely scurfy (?) beneath, the midrib impressed above, prominent beneath; flower terminal; calyx 1 cm. long, glabrous and somewhat scurfy, the lobes oblong, 2.5 mm. long, 2mm. broad, obtuse or subtruncate, narrowed 72 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 3 slightly at middle; coro!la white (?), 8.5 to 9 cm. long, the tube slender, about* 7 mm. broad at throat, gradually narrowed to 3 or 4 mm. at base, glabrous without, pubescent within, especially at throat, the limb 3.5 em. broad, spread- ing, the lobes rounded; stamens didynamous, the upper pair reaching nearly to the throat, the lower pair about 5 mm. shorter; anthers lunate, about 4 mm. long, the filaments attached at center of concave side; style exceeding the lower pair of stamens; stigma 2.5 mm. broad; ovary 2 mm. long, oval, glabrous. Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 1,147,362, collected on the upper slopes of Loma Atravezada, base of Punta Cabrén, Samang Peninsula, Dominican Republic, altitude 300 to 600 meters, December 14, 1923, by W. L. Abbott (no. 2987). Abbott’s 280 collected on the summit of Pil6n Azticar near Saman4, altitude 500 meters, December 18, 1920, belongs to this species. This specimen consists of a twig bearing leaves and a single fruit. The leaves are thinner and slightly larger than those of the type. ‘The fruit is almost globular, glabrous, and about 18 mm. in diameter, the pericarp glabrous, shining, and yellow within. The seeds are light brown, 2.5mm. long, 2mm. broad, round at both ends, oval in cross-section, with a straight and a curved side, and deeply but minutely reticulate. This is a very distinct species which bears but little resemblance to any Brunfelsia hitherto described from the West Indies. Calamagrostis leonardi Chase, sp. nov. Plant perennial; culms 60 to 100 cm. tall, slender, ascending, solitary or few together, compressed, glabrous; nodes dark, glabrous, the lower genicu- late; sheaths mostly shorter than the internodes, strongly nerved, the lower minutely retrorsely pu- bescent, shredded in age, the upper glabrous; ligule hyaline, 3 to 4 mm. long, erose; blades lax, flat, 6 to 20 em. long, 2 to 5 mm. wide, scabrous, mostly min- utely ciliate and in some leaves, sparsely pilose on the upper surface; panicle finally long-exserted, pale, nodding, 12 to 20 em. long, 2 to 4 cm. wide, loosely flowered, the slender ascending scabrous branches 2 to 5 em. long, mostly in small fascicles, evenly dis- tributed; spikelets erect on slender scabrous pedicels 2 to 5mm. long; glumes about 4.5 mm. long, equal or the first very slightly shorter, abruptly acute, sca- brous on the back and keel, the margins thin, both commonly purple-tinged toward the apex; floret nearly equaling the glumes, the callus bearing copious white hairs about half as long as the floret; lemma 4 to 4.2 mm. long, scabrous on the back and bearing a slender scabrous awn, flexuous and divergent at maturity, a little above the middle, the margins and apex of the lemma thin; palea about 3.5 mm. long; rachilla joint about + the length of the floret, or slightly longer, long-pilose with white hairs on the outer side and with a few hairs at the summit. Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no 1,076,783, collected on red clay, open mountain top, in the vicinity of Furcy, Haiti, 1300 meters altitude, May 26, 1920, by E. C. Leonard (no. 4325). A second collection was made on Mt. Tranchant, in the vicinity of Furcy, Leonard 4370. This species, the only one known from the West Indies, is most nearly re- lated to the South American C. beyrichiana Nees, from which it differs in 4 Fig. 1.—Spikelet of Calamagrostis leonardt, x 5 dia. ommB SS, L927 LEONARD: NEW PLANTS FROM HISPANIOLA (3 the abruptly acute not attenuate glumes scarcely exceeding the sessile floret (in C. beyrichiana the floret is raised on a short curved rachilla-joint), in the more divergent, more flexuous awn, and in the more copious hairs on the prolonged rachilla joint. Leptochloa monticola Chase, sp. nov. Plants perennial in dense tough clumps; culms 90 to 100 cm. tall, erect, rigid, simple, scabrous below the . slightly constricted glabrous nodes; leaves firm, the sheaths mostly over- lapping, minutely ciliate at the truncate summit, otherwise glabrous, the lower somewhat twisted and shredded in age; ligule very minute, almost obsolete; blades 20 to 30 cm. long, 2 to 6 mm. wide (flattened out) involute, somewhat tortuous and with a very thick midrib, glabrous on the outer surface, scabrous, strongly nerved and obscurely pilose on the inner, pungent-pointed, tapering to a narrow base, the blades bending forward past the culm, bringing the outer surface upward; panicle short-exserted, purplish, about 30 cm. long, and 8 cm. wide, the common axis stiff, ridged and scabrous, the numerous racemes approximate, those of the middle as much as 10 cm. long, the upper and lower shorter, all rather stifiy ascending; spikelets distant about half their own length on the slender scabrous rachis, 8 to 10 mm. long, 6 or 7 flowered, the appressed scabrous pedicels 0.5 to 1.5 mm. long; glumes lanceolate-ovate, acute, bronze-tinged Fig. 2.—Spike- with strong scabrous keels and thin margins, the first 2.5 let and floret of to 3 mm. the second 3.5 to 4 mm. long; rachilla joints 0.3 Leptochloa mon- to 0.4 mm. long, pilose at the summit; lemmas 4.5 to 5 ttcola, X 5 dia. mm. long, lanceolate-ovate, acuminate, the midnerve slightly exserted from between two minute teeth, densely long-pilose at the base, on the midnerve toward the base, and on the lateral nerves from the base to the middle; palea about 1 mm. shorter than the lemma, concave between the keels, the margins sparsely pilose. Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,077,272, collected on summit of Pic de Brouet, in the vicinity of Furcy, Haiti, altitude about 1300 meters, June 13, 1920, by E. C. Leonard (no. 4751), “common on the summit.”’ This robust species is very different from any known species of Leptochloa especially in the forwardly bent involute blades, which are found only in species (like Ammophila breviligulata Fern.) of windswept areas. PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES THE PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY — O457TH MEETING The 945th meeting was held in the auditorium of the Cosmos Club on November 13, 1926. The meeting was called to order by President Bow1E at 8:21 with 43 persons in attendance. The program for the evening consisted of two papers, followed by motion 74 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 3 pictures of the total solar eclipse of 1926. The first, by W. P. Warre was on A new method of avoiding trouble from lag in mercury contact thermostats. The paper deals with a form of the familiar mercury-contact type of ther- mostat or temperature-controller. In that type the ‘‘bulb,” which is really a gigantic thermometer, contains a mercury contact which turns a heater off or on, so as always to bring the temperature to the fixed value for which the regulator is set. In all such regulators there is a delay, or lag, in getting the heat from the heater to the bulb, so that the heat is always turned on, or off, a little too late. The temperature thus keeps running by the true value, oscillating around that. The resulting temperature variations can be mini- mized by making the oscillations quicker, which makes them also smaller. In this form of regulator a very fine heater, inclosed within the bulb, pro- vides for very quick oscillations. This heater is connected with the regular bath heater. Whenever heat is turned on it znstantly raises the temperature of the bulb, which at once shuts the heat off, only to be turned on again as quickly. Exceedingly rapid oscillations are possible, though a period of a few seconds is preferred. This device is generally more convenient in opera- tion than one where the oscillations are produced by mechanical means, since it adds no moving parts. It applies the minimum of heat to a very small part of the bulb; hence it avoids most of the temperature uncertainty which results when the oscillations are quickened by causing the main heater to heat the bulb from the outside. (Author’s abstract.) The paper was discussed by Mr. STIMson. The second paper by Mr. G. F. Taytor, was entitled Description of a new type of thermostat. (Illustrated with lantern slides.) A new type of thermo- stat is described in which a spherical piston completely submerged in mercury takes the place of a bare mercury to metal contact. The piston is made of one or more small spheres. Each of the spheres is surrounded by a small air space. The surface tension of the mercury as it is forced into the air space exerts a pressure on the piston causing its motion. The piston raises or lowers a magnetized steel weight which makes and breaks electrical contact. The bulb of the thermostat is made of a spiral coil of thin-walled copper tube ; inch in diameter supported on a frame made of four strips of brass. The piston and contacts are supported in the center of the coil. The bulb is filled with torulene and the piston with mercury. A special valve is provided to keep the mercury and the torulene separate. The torulene will pass freely in either direction through the valve but the mercury will not pass. The in- strument may, therefore, be turned in any position without mixing the liquids. An overflow cup at the top of the piston which furnishes mercury and keeps the piston submerged is made in a cellular or honeycomb form so that the mercury will not escape even if the cup is inverted. The instrument has heavy contacts and may be used without a relay to break a current of about four ampheres. Experiments were described in which a large number of metals and alloys were tried in order to find one which would carry the greatest current with a minimum of deterioration. Pure radium showed the least deterioration, but electrical contact sometimes failed to accompany mechanical contact. An alloy of 80% radium and 20% platinum was found most satisfactory. A method was described for making disc contacts of this non-malleable mate- rial. The contacts, which are held tightly together by magnetic attraction, are separated by a spring which causes a sudden and decided break, this, however, at the expense of sensitivity. When very close control is desired, the spring and magnet are not used. In this case the interval between make FEB. 3, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 79 and break was between 20 and 40 microns for the thermostat tested. The thermostat is set to any desired temperature by raising or lowering the pin with its attached piston, using sufficient pressure to force the mercury past the piston. A spherical piston, three millimeters in diameter, and about .001 em. smaller than the tube in which it fits, will support a pressure of 50 grams and the weight supported appears to be proportional to the number of spheres used. A piston of ten spheres should support 1.5 kg. If more than one sphere is used in making the piston, they are strung on a catgut cord. A somewhat larger piston made of a larger number of spheres would: do work sufficient to operate mechanical devices such as steam valves or even doors. A thermo-regulator made on this plan has given very satisfactory service for three years in a cold storage plant. ‘The regulator controls the temperature of the brine tank by starting and stopping the compressers. It is also pro- posed to operate the pen of a thermograph by using a piston to operate the tracing pen instead of a bimetal of Bordon type. The piston being more sturdy would be less susceptible to vibration and would carry the pen along a straight line instead of a curved line. These instruments are covered by U. S. Public Service Patent No. 1484802, reissue No. 15890. (Author’s abstract.) The paper was discussed by Messrs. Wurrr and ApDAMs. Following the presentation of the papers, motion pictures of the total solar eclipse of 1926 were shown. ‘This was made possible through the courtesy of Mr. JAMES STOKLEY of Science Service. 946TH MEETING The 946th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club on Saturday evening, November 27, 1926. The meeting was called to order by President Bow1r at 8:17 with 33 persons in attendance. The program for the evening consisted of two papers. The first by F. L. MOouLeER was on Spectra excited by atomic hydrogen. (Illustrated with lantern slides.) Hydrogen from a Wood discharge tube flowed into a tube containing metal vapor and the spectrum emitted by the mixture was photographed, Ob- servations of Bonhoeffer (Zeitschr. f. Phys. chem. 116: 391, 1925) with sodium and mercury are confirmed. Sodium and cadmium gave strong emission of their first resonance lines and no other lines or bands. Potassium showed the first resonance line faintly. Mercury gave the complete hydride band spectrum and also faint emission of the resonance line at 2537 A. caesium, magnesium thallium and zine gave no line or band spectra. The excitation energies of the observed lines and bands are, except for 2537 of mercury, less than 3.8 volts, though many lines of lower energy did not appear. There are two pos- sible explanations of the radiation. ‘The metal atom may be excited in a three body collision with two hydrogen atoms. In this case the entire energy of recombination of hydrogen, 4.38 volts, should be available for excitation. The second possibility is that first a hydride is formed and that this reacts with H to form H, and an excited metal atom. The available energy of excitation is the energy of recombination of H minus the energy of formation of the hydride. The second theory seems to offer the best explanation of the observations. (Author’s abstract.) The subject was discussed by Messrs. BREIT, CurTIS and HAWKESWORTH. The second paper, by W. G. BromMBacHER was entitled Discussion of a barometric method of measuring aircraft altitudes. (Illustrated with lantern slides.) The altitude of aircraft is indicated to the pilot by an aneroid ba- 76 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 3 rometer calibrated in altitude according to an altitude-pressure-temperature relation. This is, for the United States, up to 35,332 feet, 7 = 63691.8 T.,, log = T = 288 — 0.001982 7 0.001982 7% 288 (233 — 0.001982 Z in which Z is the standard altitude in feet; P, the pressure in millimeters of mercury; 7’ and T,,, the absolute temperature and absolute mean temperature respectively in degrees Centigrade. The variation in the indication from the altitude due to seasonal changes in air temperature amounts roughly to 5 per cent. E The principal objection to this method of determining altitude lies in the fact that pressure levels are indicated, not the elevation above the surface of the earth. Knowledge of the elevation is important for many purposes, especially for landing when the visibility is poor. The indication at the ground level usually varies with time due to both the variation in the baro- metric pressure and the changing elevation of the ground underneath the air- craft. ‘The barometric pressure at the ground has a variation roughly equiva- lent to 25 feet per hour change in altitude during the passage of a well defined cyclone. Ifa landing is to be made in such circumstances and if the position of the pointer at 760 millimeters is suitably marked, the following procedure is suggested for obtaining the elevation. ‘The landing field personnel, at request, reads the barometer and radios the negative of the corresponding standard altitude to the aircraft. The pilot adjusts the altimeter dial so that the 760 millimeter mark and the altitude received by ratio correspond. The elevation of the landing field is now indicated by the altimeter. The performance of altimeters has been greatly improved since 1918, especially the elastic properties. The maximum hysteresis (the maximum difference in reading) of good instruments ata given altitude, for decreasing and increasing pressures, has been reduced to one-half. This difference at the ground level, known as the after-effect, has been reduced from approxi- mately 200 feet to 50 feet or less. An improvement now in progress is that of compensation for the effect of the seasonal variation in air temperature. This compensation may be achieved either automatically or through manual control. The mechanism of an instrument of the automatic type now under construction was shown in order to illustrate the method. Essentially, the mechanism is adjusted by a bimetallic strip or manually so that the multiplication is modified as required by the particular air temperature existing at the time. (Awthor’s abstract.) The paper was discussed by Messrs. Jupson, Bowi1n, TUCKERMAN and HUMPHREYS. President Bow1r then called upon Dr. TucKERMAN who spoke informally on the arrangements for the 25th anniversary of the Bureau of Standards, to take place on Dec. 4th. Following this, President Bowre spoke briefly on the accuracy now attainable in geodetic work. H. A. Marmer, Recording Secretary. Jia se loge _ AFFILIATED SOCIETIES February 9. The Geological Society. February 10. The Chenien Society. February 12. The Biological Bieler. ‘ebruary 15. The Anthropological Scie. ruary 17. THe AcapEMY. February 19. The Philosophical Society. n The Philosophical Society...... os Corresponding Secretary: a B. ‘TuckE Recording bee W. D. ier BOARD OF EDITORS - A@NES Cuase JoHN B. Ressipe, Jr. 18 |: BUREAU PLANT. INDUSTRY NATIONAL MUSEUM a et Oi ooo | x ASSOCIATE EDITORS . a ef ‘S, A. Ronwer : | ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY eis : es G. W. Srosz ‘am Seat gts oa : te, GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY Bic GE LE. Me z aoaas ae ee ee peat AD Swanton ee ss BOTANICAL SOCIETY == ss ANTEROPO ie eke.) Ee, RCE ie 15) CHEMICAL socteTY PUBLISHED @EMI-MONTHLY | ae EXCEPT IN v JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER WHEN } MONTHLY | Ope ick BY THE pret | WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Mr. Roran AnD GUILFORD AVES, | | ‘Baurmonz, MaryiaNnD pie e xy Ait te Pasta nter jas Second Clas Mae January 11, 1923, at the viet ote: at Baltimore, Md., under the — i Setor Ao ,1912. Acceptance for mailing at special rate of postaze provided for in cio 1108, Act of October 3, 1917, Authored: on a 1918 : fr j vag i ‘This J OURNAL, the official organ ot the Washington eee. of Se present a brief record of current scientific work in Washington. To thisend (1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Aca short notes of current scientific literature published in or emanating from Was. (3) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated Soci notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JournaLi semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of each month, except during the su when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspond tocalendar years. Pr publi¢ation is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the editors on the fif the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from the author, issue of the Journat for the f ollowine fourth or nineteenth, respectively, eRe Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors; ' they ehounn clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential changes. The G editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors, References | should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To facilitate — the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be. numbered | nt serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page. e : Illustrations will be used only when necessary and will be confined to text figures ah or diagrams of simple character. The cost of producing cuts for illustrations must be. lee partly met by the author. NG Proof.—Iin order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will he sent to en re unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted i in final form; ‘ the editors, is will exercise due care in seeing that copyisfollowed. | Authors’ Reprints.—Reprints will Me furnished at the following schedule of prices, Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12pp. 16 pp. —— Cover __ go hae 50 —-$.85 $1.65 $2.55 $3.25 Oe OOS 100 1.90 3.80 4.75 6.00 ey 705, | 150.) ) 2.25 4.30 6:25. |. 6.50 3.00 | 200 2.50 4.80 5.75 7.00 3.50 250 3.00 5.30 6. 25 | aq. 5 4.00 An additional charge of 25 cents will be made for dash aplie 7 page. Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the article, wie inclusive pagi- | i nation and date of issue, will be furnished when ordered. _ | a * oo As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra sib or reprints should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript. The rate of Subscription per role Eye yee $6. oo* Semi-monthly mumberes. . i. Jes ook s aoe’ vane des ce 6 lee ewee a Sales als Seinen ee Monthly numbergics oho e oie yk Bee swale 5 o's Wie'a'e vs eee pie cite etme aiaiara eal Remittances should be made payable to ‘Washington Academy of Sciences,”’ co ea addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington,D.C. European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, London. et, ri Exchanges.—The JourNAL does not exchange with other publications. Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, provided that claim is made | within thirty days after date of the following issue. he GRRE *Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to December 19, 1911, will be dont for $3.00. Bal rates. are given to members of scientific societies ‘affiliated with the Academy JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoL. 17 FEBRUARY 19, 1927 No. 4 BOTANY.—Alfaroa, a new genus of trees of the family Juglandaceae from Costa Rica. Pau C. Stanpuey, U.S. National Museum.1 In 1924 the writer found in flower in the mountains southof Cartago, Costa Rica, a tree which at the time of collection was supposed to be Oreomunnea pterocarpa Oerst., one of the least-known and most remarkable trees of Central America. That tree has had a curious history, and is of interest because of the fact that it has been referred by some botanists to the genus Engelhardtia, a group known other- wise from the East Indies. Later Mr. C. H. Lankester forwarded specimens of the same tree collected at Juan Vifias, in the same general region. Comparison of them with authentic material of Oreomunnea proved that they repre- sented a different species. These new specimens were just past the flowering state, and the bracts very small, but it was supposed that they might in age develop into the large hand-shaped bracts that distinguish Oreomunnea. The Juan Vifias specimens were given a provisional name as a new species of Oreomunnea, but fortunately it was decided to delay publication until more material had been col- lected. This I was able to do during the present year, when in early March a second visit was made, in company with Prof. Rubén Torres Rojas, to El Mufieco, perhaps the richest locality botanically that I have ever seen. We were fortunate in finding the trees in young fruit. ‘The fruits proved to be a great surprise, for they were not at all like those of Oreomunnea, but rather miniature walnuts. Aside from the superficial aspect of the fruit, the tree did not re- semble very closely a walnut tree. Study of the ample series of material now at hand indicates that this Costa Rican tree is best treated as the type of a new genus, which is described here. 1 Published with permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. Re- ceived Dec. 3, 1926. 77 78 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 4 Alfaroa Standl., gen. nov. Tree; leaves mostly opposite, estipulate, pinnate, with no truly terminal leaflet, the leaflets numerous, mostly alternate but sometimes opposite, membranaceous, serrate or entire, glandular-punctate beneath; flowers monoecious, spicate, the spikes terminal, the pistillate flowers numerous, inserted singly, sessile, the staminate flowers few, solitary and sessile at the base of the spike or few and arranged upon two short basal branches; bracts of the staminate flowers linear-subulate, shorter than the calyx and free from it; calyx irregularly 4—5-lobed, the lobes oblong, obtuse; stamens about 9, inserted in a single series about the ovoid rudiment of the ovary, the fila- ments nearly obsolete, the anthers 2-celled, dehiscent by longitudinal slits; pistillate flowers subtended by a minute 3-lobed free bract shorter than the ovary; perianth deeply 4-lobed, the lobes oblong-linear, unequal, obtuse, erect, persistent upon the apex of the fruit; style shorter than the perianth lobes, bifurcate, the stigmas subglobose, verrucose; fruit oval or obovoid, small, the pericarp nearly dry, thin, indehiscent, adhering closely to the endocarp; nut thin-walled, smooth, falsely 4-celled, the partitions nearly complete; seeds 4-lobed to the base. The genus is named in honor of Anastasio Alfaro, Director of the National Museum of Costa Rica, who is remembered with affectionate regard by all scientists who have visited Costa Rica for many years past. His enthusiasm, with regard to all matters relating to natural history has done much to stimulate in others an interest in these subjects. In botany his chief interests have been the ferns and orchids, and in the latter, especially, he has made notable discoveries. To the National Herbarium he has contributed an extensive series of beautifully prepared specimens of orchids, representing many species of this family of plants, in which Costa Rica is supreme among American countries. To Don Anastasio the writer is indebted personally for many courtesies extended during two visits to Costa Rica. Alfaroa costaricensis Standl., sp. nov. Tree 5-12 m. high or larger, the small crown composed of few spreading branches; bark nearly smooth, pale brownish; branchlets and leaf rachis usually densely hirsute with long stiff divaricate hairs, sometimes merely. velutinous-pubescent or in juvenile plants glabrate; leaves almost all opposite, those of a pair often very unequal, or one of the leaves sometimes suppressed ; leaflets usually 10-20, very variable, often almost all opposite, oblong to narrowly lance-oblong, usually 10-18 em. long and 1.5-4 em. wide but often larger, the lowest leaflets of each leaf usually much reduced, acute to long- acuminate at apex, sessile, obtuse to truncate at base and oblique, rarely auri- culate on the lower side, densely serrate with apiculate teeth or often entire, membranaceous, above glabrous or nearly so except on the costa, beneath glaucous or glaucescent, usually hirtellous along the nerves and sometimes puberulent between the nerves, but often glabrous or nearly so; flower spikes stout, erect, 3-5 em. long, short-pedunculate, the rachis densely hirtellous and glandular, the pistillate portion many-flowered (flowers 30-50), dense or interrupted; staminate flowers few, solitary near the base of the spike or 2 to 4 on lateral basal branches less than 1 cm. long; staminate flowers 4 mm. FEB. 19, 1927 STANDLEY: ALFAROA ue broad, the perianth glandular; pistillate flowers green, 5—6 mm. long, the ovary sparsely hirtellous and densely covered with golden glands, the lobes 1 mm. wide, glabrate, the outer surface with a few golden glands; stigmas red; fruit- ing spikes 12-18 cm. long or longer, many-fruited; fruits oval or obovoid, about 2.5 em. long and 2 cm. thick, densely velutinous-hirsute and covered with sessile glands; nut smooth, broadly rounded at base and apex, the endo- carp less than 1 mm. thick. Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium no. 1,226,388, collected in moist forest at El Mufieco, south of Navarro, Province of Cartago, Costa Rica, altitude about 1,400 meters, February 8, 1924, by Paul C. Standley (no. 33620. ) The following additional collections represent the same species: Costa Rica: Juan Vifias, alt. 1,260 m., in open pasture, June, 1922, C. H. Lankester. La Estrella, Province of Cartago, Standley 39217, 39446. Alto de la Estrella, Standley 39122. El Mufieco, Standley 33501, 33504; Standley & Torres 50870, 50874, 50969, 50986, 51078, 51204. The genus Alfaroa is related to Juglans, but differs in several im- portant characters. It is unique in the Juglandaceae in having oppo- site leaves. It is difficult to make a definite decision regarding the arrangement of the leaves, but it is certain that most of them are opposite, and always those on young sterile branches. Occasionally on the older, larger branches there is a single leaf at a node. In Juglans the leaves have a terminal leaflet. In that genus, of course, the nut is rugose, and usually much roughened. I did not notice that the foliage of Alfaroa had any odor suggestive of that of walnut leaves, but the glands upon the leaves would suggest the possi- bility of an aromatic odor. It is in the inflorescence that the two genera exhibit the greatest divergence. ‘The staminate flowers of Juglans are borne in slender drooping catkins; in Alfaroa they are borne singly at the base of the erect pistillate spike, or upon two short special lateral branches. Trees of Alfaroa are abundant in the wet mountains south of Cartago, especially at El] Mufieco, where they are plentiful among other trees on the tops of the hills. The plants sometimes flower when they are mere shrubs, and the aspect of the mature tree does not suggest a walnut tree. The pale under surface of the leaves is striking, and the young leaves are usually handsomely colored with red and pink. ‘The long spikes of small fruits, recurved by their weight, are borne in great profusion. For this tree I was given by a guide the name gaulin, but this name was disputed by other persons. No use is made of the nuts, appar- ently. I have not seen the nuts when mature and fresh, and do not know whether they are edible. 80 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 4 ZOQOLOGY.—Five new Chinese squirrels1 A. Brazier HOWELL, U.S. National Museum. Among the Chinese mammals in the United States National Museum are specimens representing five new races of sciuromorph rodents, which may be known as follows: Eutamias asiaticus umbrosus subsp. nov. Type.—Male adult, skin and skeleton no. 240744, U. S. National Museum, from 140 miles south of Lanchowfu, Kansu, China; August 21, 1923. Col- lected by F. R. Wulsin, National Geographic Society Central China Expedi- tion; original number 1118. Diagnosis. —A dark colored chipmunk differing from zntercessor, its nearest ally, in the absence of gray hairs throughout the darker areas of the head and shoulders. The coloration of the head is darker and duller, and the gray tips to the hairs upon the upper side of the tail practically hide any ochraceous markings. Skin.—As above, with the transition between the color of the sides and the buffy whitish of the under parts more abrupt than in intercessor. The whole anterior half of the dorsum presents a much more saturate appearance, the pelage is longer and there is a more pronounced ochraceous overwash on the two medial light stripes of the middle back. The feet are also slightly darker and more ochraceous, this being more pronounced upon the fore feet. Skull.—As in intercessor but a bit more slender and bullae smaller, although this difference may not hold good in series, as but one good adult skull is now available. Measurements—Collector’s measurements of the type are: head and body, 155; tail, 115; foot, 38; ear, 17. Total length of the skull is 42 mm. Material.—Four specimens: two from 120 and 140 miles south of Lanchowfu, and two-from Sungpan, Szechwan. : Remarks.—Although the skins are in summer pelage it is obvious from the coat that it is a more strictly mountainous form than is zntercessor. ‘The Kansu examples are evidently from the north slope of the Minshan Range of mountains, which marks the boundary between that province and Szechwan, while the Sungpan specimens are from just south of this range. Whether the race is confined to this circumscribed region is a matter for conjecture. Dremomys rufigenis lentus subsp. nov. Type.—Male adult, skin and skull no. 240384, U. 8. National Museum, from near Wenchuanshein, Szechwan, China, altitude 6000 feet; August 14, 1924. Collected by D. C. Graham; original number 14. Diagnosis.—A rather large race, with back, flanks and cheeks uniformly colored. Rufous of underparts confined to chin and upper lips, anal region, and faintly along the inner margin of the hind legs. Postauricular spots buffy. Shin. —With the exception of the postauricular spots, which are rather well defined, the whole upper surface, including feet, flanks, head and cheeks, are uniformly colored, the paler annulations of the hairs being more olivaceous than brown. The tail as usual is darker because of the greater preponderance 1 Received January 19, 1927. FEB. 19, 1927 HOWELL: NEW CHINESE SQUIRRELS 81 of black upon the hairs. Below the rufous areas are rather sharply confined to a narrow space a couple of millimeters wide along the upper lips and upon _the chin, and in the anal region, almost exclusively upon the base of the tail, but a narrow border of this color extends along the inner side of the hind leg. The throat, chest and belly are overwashed with gray showing a faint sug- gestion of buffiness. The under side of the tail is paler than the upper only because there is less black distad upon the hairs. Skull.—The right zygoma is broken and the occipital and bullae are missing. On the whole the skull resembles that of belfield:, but the anterolateral parts of the nasals extend farther ventrad, the premaxillae extend a marked distance farther caudad beyond the nasals, and the incisors are longer and heavier. Specimen.—One, the type. Measurements.—Collector’s measurements are as follows: head and body, 200; tail, 155; foot, 50. The total length of the skull is about 54; interorbital width, 14. 3) shortest length of nasals, 16.8; tips of nasals to caudal termina- tions of the premaxillaries, 20.7 mm. Remarks.—No specimen of the Yunnan race ornatus is s available, but this is easily distinguished from lentus by the ferruginous cheeks extending nearly to the level of the ears. In the same respect the latter differs from the typical race, and from belfieldi which has not only bright cheeks but much ferruginous in the tail as well. Sciurus caniceps canigenus subsp. nov. Type.—Male adult, skin and skull no. 241509, U. 8S. National Museum, from Hayenhsien, Hangchow Bay, Chekiang, China; December 10, 1925. Collected by Arthur de C. Sowerby; original number 1515. Diagnosis —A rather small race. Chin and cheeks very gray and without facial markings. No silvery tips to the hairs of the tail, and the terminal tuft exhibits a tendency to be black at base. Skin.—The dorsal surface is of the normal sciurine annulated pattern, perfectly uniform save for a barely appreciable tendency toward darkening upon the head, though not upon the shoulders. The dorsal hairs have pale tips and the general tone of this surface varies from brownish to paler and grayer, this possibly being due to age but not to season. The cheeks, muzzle and chin are dark silvery gray with no vestige of brown. The ears are short and scantily haired and there is a whitish postauricuar spot entirely hidden by the ears in the dried skins. The tail is unicolor with the back save that the annulations are coarser. There are no white tips to the caudal hairs but the terminal tuft exhibits a tendency—very strongly marked in one in- dividual—to be black at base with the usual buffy tips to the hairs. The feet are gray, modified by the presence of black hairs. The gray of the chin ex- tends upon the throat, but in the grayer specimens especially this is altered upon the chest to a creamy tint, and in the browner ones, to a faintly ae overwash, which extends over the belly and the inside of the hind egs. Skull—As with so many sciuromorphs, there is nothing particularly dis- tinctive cranially, save that the skull is much smaller than in true caniceps. Measurements.—Collector’s measurements of the type are: head and body, 194; tail, 156; hind foot, 47; and ear, 21mm. Measurements of the skull are: total length, 50; zygomatic width, 30.5; interorbital width, 17; and upper tooth row, 10 mm. ; 82 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 4 Material.—Two specimens from Kangpu and three from Haiyenhsien, both localities in Chekiang. _ Remarks.—The relationship of this race unquestionably lies with caniceps, although it may ultimately be advisable to assign it full specific rank. The occurrence of a squirrel of this group so far east in China is somewhat of a surprise. As the specimens at hand were taken in winter it is evident that this form does not assume a brighter coat at this season as do some of the other subspecies. Unfortunately, the only skin available of true caniceps is in this bright pelage, but it is evident that canigenus is browner about the top,of the head, the feet are more silvery (less buffy), and caniceps entirely lacks the ochraceous wash of the underparts. Petaurista rubicundus, sp. nov. Type.—Nursing female, skin only; no. 240857, U. 8S. National Museum, from Mapientung, Szechwan, China. Killed by native hunters in the fall of 1924 and secured by D. C. Graham. Diagnosis.—A flying squirrel with underparts light but bright rufous; face, chin, sides of neck and feet darker rufous, and hairs of the remainder of the body giving the appearance of being broadly tipped with the same color. Tip of tail black. Skin.—The underparts are palest mediad, being almost apricot color, but gradually deepening to intense rufous upon the throat and borders of the membranes. ‘The feet are of the same color but a trifle darker. The pelage of the dorsal surface is thick and full, plumbeous at base, the shorter hairs with brown tips. The very numerous guard hairs are annulated first very dark brown, then black for one or two millimeters followed by ochraceous rufous for some ten millimeters, and finally, short tips of glossy black, the latter hardly distinguishable in general effect. The ears are thin and almost hairless, and the postauricular spots are not differentiated. ‘The hairs of the face are deep rufous with plumbeous bases and short black tips, resulting in a rich effect. The proximal portion of the tail is dull mahogany, with short black tips that gradually lengthen caudad until the tail tip is entirely black. The skin is unaccompanied by measurements but the hind foot has a length of about 72 mm. Material.—One specimen, the type. Remarks.—The type is a flat skin in beautiful pelage and the animal was skinned through the mouth in a truly expert manner, leaving no dis- eernible break in the pelt. Unfortunately the skull is missing, but the specimen is evidently so different from anything heretofore described that I have no choice but to name it. An effort to establish tentative relationship with some of the Indian members of the genus was without result. Petaurista sulcatus, sp. nov. Type.—Female adult, skin and skull no. 219206, U. 8S. National Museum, from Hsinlungshan, 65 miles northeast of Peking, Chihli, China, altitude 3000 feet; August 18, 1917. Collected by Arthur deC. Sowerby; original number 1017. Diagnosis.—A small Petaurista with dorsal coloration of the general type of P. melanopterus, leucogenys, etc. Maxillary incisors, very broad, each with a well-defined groove. FEB. 19, 1927 HOWELL: NEW CHINESE SQUIRRELS 83 Skin.—The hairs of the middle back are plumbeous at base and browner distad, while numerous longer hairs have buffy tips. The hairs of the sides, especially upon the hips, and of the upper parachutes, lack the browner distal portion mentioned above and appear almost black, except for the buffy tips. There is but the suggestion of an ochraceous spot behind the ear, and ochrace- ous areas upon both eye lids. The remainder of the head is distinctly lighter than the back and much grayer. The dorsum of the feet is so dark as to be practically black, ticked with a few buffy hairs. Upon the under surface of the body proper of the type specimen the hairs are palely plumbeous at base with white tips upon those over the throat and hinder beily, but with buffy tips elsewhere, while the hairs of the ventral surface of the parachute are wholly ochraceous. In the skin of the topotype these latter have plumbeous bases. There is a sharply-defined sooty spot upon the chin as is usual in many species. Skull.—In general conformation the skull much resembles that of lewco- genys, but the total breadth, as well as the width of the rostral tip, is narrower, and the interpterygoid fossa is much deeper. The molariform teeth are of the same type as 1n melanopterus, the premolar being a trifle smaller than the first molar. The maxillary incisors are broad (3 mm.) with a well defined, broad groove laterad to the middle. Close inspection shows that this groove exhibits a tendency toward doubleness, with an extremely faint ridge between. ‘The mandibular incisors are correspondingly robust. Measurements.—Collector’s measurements of the type and topotype are: head and body 310-305; tail, 343-330; foot 65-63; and ear, 40 mm. Measure- ments of the skulls are: condylobasilar length, 54-52.5; zygomatic width, 41.5-41; interorbital width, 15-14.6; maxillary tooth row, 13.7-14; and greatest width of maxillary incisive alveoli, 8.7-9. Materval_—Three specimens: two, including the type, from Hsinlungshan, and one skin without skull from Eastern Tombs, Chihli. Remarks.—All specimens of the Chinese members of this genus of what may be termed the normal sciuropterine type of coloration have heretofore been referred to either P. melanopterus, xanthotis, or filchnerinae. The last is a large squirrel probably identical with xanthotis. Since Milne-Edward’s original description of the last-mentioned, the only published record of its capture noted is that by Lyon (1907) of a specimen from Kansu. ‘This is before me and seems to be at least subspecifically distinct from melanopterus, and differences in the molar pattern renders it not unlikely that the relation- ship is not that close. At any rate, these flying squirrels are of large size with skulls normal, including narrow, simple, maxillary incisors. The reference of chief interest in the present connection is that of Pere Huede (Mems. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, IV, 1898). In this there is quite lengthy discussion of the molar pattern of several flying squirrels, but none of the incisors. His identifications need careful checking, to say the least, but his plates seem to be exceptionally good and accurate. Turning to his figures illustrating several views of his so- -called Pteromys melanopterus it is at once seen that this is a very different animal from that of Milne-Edwards, distinguishable instantly by the broad, grooved, maxillary incisors. Compari- son shows that these figures are exceptionally fine representations, in every respect, of the skull of P. sulcatus. 84 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 4 It was at first thought that this character was probably of generic sig- nificance, but it was found that the maxillary incisors of P. fuluinus—a very different type of squirrel—may vary from the pattern normal for the genus in somewhat the same direction. In four skulls from Kashmir two have simple incisors, a third is faintly ridged and grooved, and a fourth more definitely has four faint ridges and three equally faint grooves of the same width between them. ‘To my mind this circumstance at once settles in the negative the question of generic, or even subgeneric, separation of the Chinese examples. The skin from Eastern Tombs, without skull, date, or measurements, is almost certainly a winter specimen of this species. Its pelage is denser, it largely lacks the ochraceous tone to the underparts of the body proper, and the head is considerably darker; but it is similar in other respects. ENTOMOLOGY .—WNotes on the Dexwd genera Cordyligaster and Eucordyligaster.' J. M. Aupricu, U. S. National Museum. (Communicated by 8. A. RoHWER.) In some material received from Professor Melander was a specimen — of a yellow Cordyligaster from South America; the process of identifica- tion led to some results worthy of publication. It would seem that no yellow forms have come to light since the description of two species about eighty years ago. There are two American genera closely allied in all but one character. In Cordyligaster the calypters are very small, while in Hucordyligaster they are of normal size. ‘The difference is striking. ‘The former genus has three known species and the latter two; all five are tropical, but one has a wide northern range and is common in the vicinity of the District of Columbia. This species, Hucordyligaster minusculus, is so unmistakeable and so well represented in collections that the generic characters may be omitted here. CoRDYLIGASTER Macquart Cordyligaster Macquart, Dipt. Exot. 2 (pt. 3): 247 (reprint 90). 1843.— Schiner, Novara, 322. 1868.—Van der Wulp, Tijdsch. v. Ent. 28: 191. 1885; Biologia, Dipt. 2: 252. 1891.—Coquillett, Type-Species N. A. Dipt. 527. 1910.—Adams, in Williston’s Manual, 356. 1908.— Townsend, Ins. Ins. Menst. 4: 122. 1916. Megistogaster Macquart, Dipt. Exot. Suppl. 2 (pt. 2): 185 (reprint 212) 1851.—Townsend, Ins. Ins. Menst. 4: 7. 1916. Cordylidexia Giglio-Tos, Ditt. del Mess. 3: 67. 1894. Kucordylidexia Townsend, Ins. Ins. Menst. 3: 41. 1915. 1 Received January 18, 1927. FEB. 19, 1927 _ ALDRICH: NOTES ON DEXIID GENERA 89 The sole original species of Cordyligaster was Dexia petiolata Wiedemann; Megistogaster had two species, of which Townsend designated fusczpennis Macquart as type in 1916; Cordylidexia was a new name proposed on account of supposed preoccupation, taking Dexza petiolata as type. Coquillett, 1910, showed that the name is not preoccupied in the strict sense. Hucordylidexia was proposed for a new species, H. ategulata Townsend, which Townsend sub- sequently stated was a synonym of petzolata. Key To SPECIES OF CORDYLIGASTER 1. Antennae, palpi, legs and abdomen black...... petiolatus Wiedemann. Antennae, palpi, legs and abdomen yellow or mostly so............ 2 2. Femora with black bands, hind coxae black........ tipuliformis Walker. Hemora and hind coxae yellow. 2s02010 elves analis Wiedemann. CORDYLIGASTER PETIOLATUS Wiedemann. Dexia petiolata Wiedemann, Auss. Zweifl. 374. 1830. Cordyligaster petiolatus Macquart, Dipt. Exot. 2 (pt. 3): 247 (reprint 90) 1843.—Rondani, Esame.....Ditt. Brasil. 76. 1848.—Schiner, No- vara 322. 1868.—Van der Wulp, Tijdsch. v. Ent. 28: 191. pl. 6, f.1, 2. 1885.—Townsend, Ins. Ins. Menst. 4: 122. 1916. Megistogaster fuscipennis Macquart, Dipt. Exot. Suppl. 2 (pt. 2): 186 (reprint 213), pl..19, f. 7. 1851. Eucordylidexia ategulata Townsend, Ins. Ins. Menst. 3: 41. 1915. Originally described from Brazil, and reported from Panama, Costa Rica and Guatemala by Townsend, in 1915. In addition to the specimens men- tioned by Townsend, the National Museum now has two from Rurrenna- baque, Rio Beni, Bolivia,collected by Dr. Wm. M. Mann on the Mulford Biological Exploration; and one from Belem, Para, Brazil, collected by F. X. Willams for the Hawatian Sugar Planters’ Experiment Station. CORDYLIGASTER ANALIS Macquart Megistopoda analis Macquart, Dipt. Exot. Suppl. 2 (pt. 2) 187 (reprint 214). 1851. Cordyligaster analis Townsend, Ins. Ins. Menst. 4: 122. 1916. Described from a single male from the Amazon. The type had the fourth abdominal segment black except its anterior border. The specimen from Professor Melander, a female which I provisionally place here, is from British Guiana (Parish, collector); it has the fourth abdominal segment wholly yellow, as well as the legs and coxae. The only black color is on the thoracic dorsum, base of scutellum, metanotum, and a spot just above the hind coxa, which fades out upward. ‘There is only a single pair of orbital bristles, the upper. The dorsum and pleurae are covered with golden pollen, but on the former the black remains visible in four large oval spots arranged in a square. CORDYLIGASTER TIPULIFORMIS Walker Cordyligaster tipuliformis Walker, Trans. Ent. Soc. new ser. 4: 205 (reprint 17). 1857.—Townsend, Ins. Ins. Menst. 4: 122. 1916. Described from a female, from “South America.” I know of no other specimens. ‘Townsend thought this and C. analis must have been described 86 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 4 from immature or bleached specimens, but my new yellow specimen is per- fectly normal, rendering this explanation improbable. Walker describes the abdomen as ferruginous, the base of the second and third segments testaceous. EUCORDYLIGASTER Townsend Eucordyligaster Townsend, Ins. Ins. Menst. 4: 123. 1916. The type was designated as Cordyligaster septentrionalis Townsend. With- in recent years the National Museum has received a cotype of Cordyligaster minusculus Van der Wulp, which has been compared with the type of sep- tentrionalis and proves to be the same species. EUCORDYLIGASTER MINUSCULUS Van der Wulp Cordyligaster minusculus Van der Wulp, Biologia, Dipt. 2: 252, pl. 6, f. 7, 7a. 1891—Banks, Ent. News 18: 450. 1907.—Thompson, Psyche 17: 212. 1910.—Johnson, Psyche 19: 103. 1912——Daecke, Ent. News 26: 42. 1915. Eucordylidexia minusculus Giglio-Tos, Ditt. del Mess. (pt. 3) 67. 1894. Cordyligaster septentrionalis ‘Townsend, Ann. Ent. Soc. Amer., 2: 212. 1909; Ins. Ins. Menst. 3: 41. 1915. The species, as already stated, occurs commonly about Washington. Daecke notes it at Marietta, Pa., the farthest north of the records. Thompson pointed out the synonomy of septentrionalcs. EUCORDYLIGASTER NYOMALA Townsend Cuidvineas ster nyomala Townsend, Ins. Ins. Menst. 2: 938. 1914. Eucordyligaster nyomala Townsend, Ins. Ins. Menst. 4: 128. 1916. Known only in the single male type from Nomala, Peru. It is readily distinguished from septentrionalis by its yellow palpi; the thoracic dorsum is covered with golden pollen with faint dark stripes in front; the antennae are dark red. ENTOMOLOGY .—Descriptions of new genera and species of Mallo- phaga, together with keys to some related genera of Menoponidae and Philopteridae! H. EK. Ewinc, U.S. Bureau of Entomology. (Communicated by 8. A. ROHWER.) In the Chapin collection of ectoparasites, recently donated to the United States National Museum, are some rare, and in many instances unusual, Mallophagan specimens. These specimens, mounted by Dr. E. A. Chapin, are in excellent condition for showing many of those minute chitinous structures which are coming to have such an impor- tant part in our recent diagnoses of Mallophagan genera and species. In this paper six new genera are established. Although no figures are given, it is believed that the keys supped will show probably more 1 Received January 19, 1927. FEB. 19,1927 EWING: NEW GENERA AND SPECIES OF MALLOPHAGA 87 clearly than figures would, the significant taxonomic characters and also the relationships of the newly established genera to the pre- viously described ones. ‘The generic concept used in establishing these genera predicates that all the species of the genus shall possess two or more correlated characters of more than specific importance. In ad- dition to the six new genera proposed, seven new species are described. A New SPECIES OF TRIMENOPONIDAE Philandesia foxi, new species Forehead provided with only small setae. Antennae four-segmented; second segment with very broad, truncate process, bearing two long setae at angle; last segment longer than broad. A short seta is situated on expansion over antennal fossa just in front of the eye. Prothorax about two-thirds as broad as head and with a marginal row of about a dozen long setae, as well as a pair of small spine-like setae on the angles and another pair behind the first pair of long marginal setae. Ptero- thorax slightly broader than the prothorax and with straight, strongly divergent sides. Each abdominal segment typically with a distinct, posterior, transverse row of setae and an indistinct anterior transverse row. Next to last segment of male about twice as long as the others. Last segment of female with a double comb of short, marginal setae. Genital armature of male very peculiar. The structure taken to be the basal plate arises from about the middle of the abdomen and is divided into four processes; two short outer processes that are broadened and provided with a spine-like appendage distally; and two long inner processes. Par- ameres free, straight and broadened at their tips; endomeres united, extend- ing beyond the tips of parameres. Length of female, 2.42 mm.; width, 0.93 mm. Length of male, 2.20 mm. width, 0.81 mm. Type host and type locality—Marmota flaviventris from Brewster, Wash- ington State. Type.—Cat. no. £0135. W FS. UN 2 MM. Described from one male (holotype) taken from type host collected 1918, by F. W. Logan, Brewster, Washington, and from one female collected at New York City, from a rat (Rattus norvegicus) and sent in by Dr. Carroll Fox. The manuscript name, without description, of this species was pub- lished in a list of ectoparasites of the genera Rattus and Mus for the New World by Fox in his “Insects and Disease of Man,” page 217. This name, so pubtished in 1925, is a nomen nudum, and becomes validated with this de- scription. P. fox differs from P. townsend: Kellogg and Nakayama in a number of characters. It has eight large setae on the posterior margin of the head instead of the four as on townsend?, and at least a dozen large marginal setae on the prothorax instead of the half dozen of the other species. This species is also related to species of Dennyus in a number of ways. 88 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 4 New MENOPONIDAE Acolpocephalum, new genus Last antennal segment subhemispherical. Eyes degenerate, situated on margin Just behind antennal notch. Pterothorax enlarged, broader and much longer than prothorax. Abdomen with nine segments, first and second similar. Legs very short and stout; femora inflated; first tarsal segment extending distally and overlapping second for over half the length of the latter. ‘Tarsal claws very small and weak, almost vestigial on second and third legs. Genotype and its host species.—Acolpocephalum brevipes, new species, from Ptiloris victoriae. Only a single species is included at present in this new genus. The tarsal characters found in this species are different from those of any Mallophagan species known to the writer. Acolpocephalum brevipes, new species Head compact, as broad as long. Free margin of forehead almost but not quite, evenly rounded. Mandibles sharply pointed, without crushing sur- faces or transverse ridges; left mandible slightly smaller than right and with two sharp, tooth-like projections at the end. Temporal lobes subquadran- gular. Prothorax about three-fifths as broad as the head, with rounded lateral margins and a peg-like spine on anterior corner. Pterothorax as broad as greatest width of abdomen, sides slightly outwardly curved and strongly divergent posteriorly. A few spine-like setae are situated at each posterior corner of pterothorax. Abdomen about one and a half times as long as broad and with posterior end broadly and evenly rounded. A long seta springs from the lateral margin of each segment, which typically bears in addition a transverse row of setae. Legs almost of the same size, but second pair slightly iarger than the first and the third slightly larger than the second. Femora of all the legs about two-thirds as broad as long, those of third pair not quite as stout as those of the other two pairs. Tuibiae of all legs very short and stout; those of first pair about one and a half times as long as broad at their distal ends. Last seg- ment of each tarsus very stout, strongly curved on outer margin and ter- minated with minute to vestigial claws; claws on tarsus I best developed, the outer about twice as large as the inner. Length of female, 1.11 mm.; width, 0.41 mm. Type host and type locality —Ptiloris victoriae, from Queensland, Australia. Type.—Cat no. 40136, U. S. N. M. Described from a single female (holotype) taken from skin of rifle bird, Piiloris victoriae, from Atherton Tableland, Queensland, Australia. Chapinia, new genus Forehead greatly reduced, broadly rounded in front. Mandibles situated almost approximate to anterior, free margin of clypeus. Last segment of antenna capitate. Antennal fossa covered above by a transversely notched FEB. 19,1927 EWING: NEW GENERA AND SPECIES OF MALLOPHAGA 89 expansion of the head, the posterior part of which bears the double cornea, of the eye onitsfree margin. Prothorax large, with almost straight, posteriorly convergent sides. Pterothorax undivided, with almost straight, posteriorly divergent sides. Abdomen broad, of nine segments in female and ten in male; first and second segments similar. First segment of each tarsus but slightly overlapping the second; tarsal claws well developed and subequal on each tarsus. Genital plate of male broad and flat, not rod-like. Genotype and its host species.—Chapinia robusta, new species, from Cera- togymna atrata. This genus is established for the single new species, and at the suggestion of Dr. Chapin, the collector of the specimens. It is related to Actornitho- philus Ferris but differs from Ferris’ genus in the shape of the forehead, position of the mandibles and type of genital armature of the male. Chapinia robusta, new species Head decidedly “hat-like,” the almost straight contour of the sides of the forehead is continued far beyond the bases of the antennae and along the side of expansions over the antennal fossae. Mandibles small, equal, simple and pointed at tips. Antennae of typical Menopon type, but third segment revealing traces of its fused condition by breaking off easily near its base at suture line; last segment slightly longer than broad. Prothorax about two-thirds as broad as head and bearing a conspicuous spine at each anterior corner. Pterothorax the mirror of prothorax consider- ably enlarged. At each posterior corner of pterothorax there is a lateral pecten of five or six spine-like setae, two of which in the female are much longer than those of the male. Abdomen broad, constricted somewhat in front and bearing a few very long lateral setae, those on the seventh and eighth segments being especially conspicuous. Genital armature of male large and heavily chitinized. Basal plate ex- tending backward from fifth abdominal segment, it is broad and strap-like. Posteriorly the basal plate divides into two slender lateral arms and a stout, distally split central piece; which structures bear the parameres and endo- mere respectively: Parameres rather slender, upwardly curved, more or less hook-like structures which encompass the endomere laterally. Endomere large and curved, plate-like with a pair of lateral horns. Penis absent. Legs long, the tibial segments particularly being slender. Patch of setae on each posterior femur pronounced. Second tarsal segments of all the legs very slender. Length of male, 1.59 mm.; width, 0.70 mm. Length of female, 2.00 mm.; width, 0.95 mm. Type host and type locality—Ceratogymna atrata from Congo, Africa. Type.—Cat. no. 40137, U. S. N. M. Described from one male (holotype) and one female (paratype) collected by EK. A. Chapin from the skin of hornbill, Ceratogymna atrata, taken November 3, 1917, at Nytonga, Congo, Africa. 90 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 4 Amyrsidea, new genus Forehead reduced and evenly rounded in front. Antennae five-segmented (third segment showing suture near base), with last segment .cylindrical. Antennal fossa covered above by a transversely sutured expansion of the head. Eyes wanting. Pharyngeal sclerite well developed. Prothorax large, without sternum, the sternal region being largely covered by the plate- like coxae of first pair of legs. Pterothorax broader than long and with straight posterior margin. Female with a whorl of conspicuous subequal spines on the posterior margin of last abdominal segment. Typically each abdominal segment is provided on each side ventrally with a brush of setae, smaller than those which clothe the body. Femora of third pair of legs each with a ventral patch of setae. First tibiae without spurs at distal ends; second and third tibiae provided with tibial spurs. First tarsal segment of leg I large and overlapping the second segment; first tarsal segment of legs II and III much smaller and not overlapping second segment. Subequal tarsal claws well developed on all the legs. Genital armature of male compact but complicated. Basal plate, plate-like, but very deeply incised posteriorly for the reception of the complicated endomeres and bearing thorn-like pro- jections from the inside margins of lobes bounding incised space. Parameres free, movable appendages. Genotype and its host species.—Menopon ventrale Nitzsch, from Argusianus argus. This genus is established for the peculiar Menopon of Argusianus species The writer has examined three males and three females of this species taken from the argus pheasant, Argusianus argus, collected at Trong, Lower Siam, and one female from Arguszanus grayz taken in West Borneo. The absence of eyes, the presence of tibial spurs on the second and third tibiae, the whorl of spines on the last segment of the female and the peculiar and complicated genital armature of the male constitute a striking combination of characters for the delimitation of the genus. Numidicola, new genus Forehead reduced and broadly rounded. Antennae long, five-segmented; third segment small and forming a pedicel to the fourth; fifth segment long, filiform. Antennal fossae roofed over above by an unsutured expansion of the head. Eyes vestigial and on the free margin of expansions over antennal fossae. Pharyngeal sclerite large, conspicuous. Prothorax very large, about as broad as head; prosternum wanting; large, plate-like precoxae meeting on median line. Pterothorax not larger than prothorax, very short, sides mark- edly divergent posteriorly. Abdomen with very short segments, eight in the male and nine in the female, each typically with a single transverse row of setae. First tarsal segment of each tarsus but slightly if at all overlapping the second. Each tarsus terminated distally with two well-developed, equal claws. Genital armature of male with rod-like basal plate, free parameres and large distally free endomeres. Genotype and its host species — Numidicola longicornis, new species, from Numida ansorgit. Included with the type species in this genus is the Menopon antennatum of Kellogg and Paine. The combination of two characters is enough to dis- _ FEB. 19, 1927 EWING: NEW GENERA AND SPECIES OF MALLOPHAGA 91 tinguish this genus from the others of Menoponidae. These are the presence of long, filiform, five-segmented antennae and the position of the eyes on the margins of the undivided expansions of the head covering the antennal fossae. Numidicola longicornis, new species A fragile, very hairy, golden colored species. First segment of antenna slightly longer than broad; second segment cylindrical, twice as long as first; third segment minute, enlarged toward the tip, about half as long as the fourth; fourth about half as long as the fifth and broadest toward its distal end; fifth segment filiform, not clubbed, although it is broadest near the tip; it is about one and a half times as long as three and four combined. Eyes ves- tigial, without pigment, but showing two degenerate corneas. Prothorax as broad as the head, broadly rounded posteriorly and bearing a marginal row of closely set, long setae. Pterothorax with a few spine-like setae on lateral margins and a row of close-set, long setae on posterior margin. Abdominal setae in close-set rows, some of them somewhat flattened. Last abdominal segment of male studded above with many short spines. Genital armature of male: Basal plate long, flat, widening posteriorly; parameres long, slender slightly curved and blunt-pointed at tips; endomeres similar to parameres but stouter, attached to sac, outwardly curved. The endomeres extend posteriorly slightly beyond the parameres. Hind legs slightly larger than the middle ones; femur III with ventral patch of setae. Tibiae II and III each with about eight spines on inner side, the more distal being the stoutest. Length of male, 1.35 mm.; width, 0.64 mm. Length of female, 1.26 mm.; width, 0.71 mm. Type host and type locality— Numida ansorgii from British East Africa. Type slide.—Cat. no. 40138, U. S. N. M. Description based on five males and one female (two immature specimens were obtained) taken from the skin no. 243182 U. 8. N. M., of the guinea, Numida ansorgii, collected at Tana River, British East Africa, August 26, 1912. This species differs from N. antennatum (Kellogg and Paine) in the shape of the antennal segments and in the structure of the genital armature of the male. Key To Some RELATED GENERA OF MENOPONIDAE, INCLUDING THOSE DESCRIBED IN THIS PAPER 1. Antennal fossae open above (ocular emarginations deep) or only slightly covered by expansions from head; last segment of antenna usually clavate, rarely capitate; temporal lobes large, somewhat subrectangu- lame Viese presenta Md NOt WEStIaIAl, 2)... 26's o043 els dccahds) pede Sema 2 Antennal fossae largely or entirely covered above by lateral expansions from the top of head; last segment of antenna variously shaped; tem- poral lobes rarely subrectangular; eyes usually present, but frequently RICE ETA elie aatee Va otic ciccoths 2 SHAN wis sone Es tae LTRS Emer EE 6 2. Posterior femora and abdominal sterna without definite ventral patches of setae, although combs of spines may be present................ 3 Posterior femora and certain abdominal sterna with definite ventral PAtehesvonsorusmeston sebdes, s..05. 2)... doh Rese ee. 4 92 JOURNAL OF THE’ WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 4 3. Pterothorax (meso-metathorax) enlarged, much larger than prothorax; first segment of each tarsus overlapping the second for about half the length of the latter; tarsal claws minute to vestigial. Small stout Lice ON Parrots. str. Go cee ere ee Acolpocephalum, new genus Pterothorax normal; first segment of each tarsus slightly or not at all overlapping the second; tarsal claws not vestigial Colpocephalum Nitzsch 4. Setae of femoral and sternal patches smaller than those clothing the Inodiy: | sects es We Ne oer 0) oe aro ee Heleonomus Ferris Setae of femoral and sternal patches as large as those which clothe the bod yisnh sea aw OP EO UR Sr 5 5. HoncHead broad and rounded with large mandibles in normal position; genital armature of male weak with long rod-like basal plate Actornithophilus Ferris Forehead reduced, triangular, with small mandibles situated approximate to the front margin of clypeus; genital armature of male large with broad: basal splatecae ia iain ae tala Chapinia, new genus 6. Posterior femora and certain abdominal sterna with definite ventral patches or brushes of ‘setae... tcc. eh 7 Posterior femora and abdominal sterna without definite ventral patches or brushesof "setae. 000 oe ie eel Dt, 2 8 7. Pharyngeal sclerite present; second abdominal sternite sometimes with a pair of asters of heavy spines on posterior margin................ 8 Pharyngeal sclerite wanting; second abdominal sternite never with asters Oly, SPUR ee 2 deen eee ior hod u ieee ae Dennyus Neumann 8. Temporal region of head of usual shape, and much broader than forehead and prothorax; posterior margin of last abdominal segment without row of spine-like setae; prosternum present; last antennal segment capitate Myrsidea Waterston Temporal region reduced, but little broader than forehead or prothorax; prosternum wanting; procoxae expanded into body sclerites; last antennal segment not capitate...) 2.5.0... .:....-. ee 9 9. Expansion of head skeleton covering top of antennal fossa divided by a transverse suture; female with a row of stout spines on the posterior margin of last abdominal segment............ Amyrsidea, new genus Expansion covering top of antennal fossa entire; female without spines on posterior margin of last abdominal segment Numidicola, new genus New PHILOPTERIDAE Echinophilopterus, new genus Clypeus separated from head by distinct clypeal suture; appearing deeply incised in front because of the lateral chitinizations (clypeal bands) extending beyond the signature for about a third of their length. Trabeculae very large, long and rounded at their tips. Antennae short. Abdomen short, almost circular and bearing many short, stout spines below on first, second and possibly third or fourth segments. Other characters similar to those of Philopterus Nitzsch. Genotype and its host species.—Echinophilopterus chapint, new species, from Tanygnathus mueller. FEB. 19,1927 EWING: NEW GENERA AND SPECIES OF MALLOPHAGA 93 This new genus is established for those parrot-infesting Philopteri that have the abdomen studded below with short, stout spines. It was suggested to the author by Dr. E. A. Chapin, who collected the type species. Besides the type species and another new one described in this paper, there are included in this genus some of the species in Piaget’s forficulatus group. The writer was at first inclined to make forficula Piaget the type of this genus but changed his mind when it was observed that Piaget does not mention the group of spines on the ventral surface of the abdomen nor give any definite type host species for this louse. Echinophilopterus chapini, new species Head large for the size of body, with long forehead. Signature of clypeus much longer than broad, sides very slightly outcurved, and with a short, tongue-like anterior median process having a rounded hyaline margin. Lateral chitinizations of clypeus pronounced, extending beyond the signature by about a third of their length, pointed and hyaline at their tips; each bears two prominent, curved setae above. ‘Trabeculae reaching to the middle of second antennal segment, slightly recurved and evenly rounded at tips. Prothorax about two-thirds as large as pterothorax, sides straight and slightly divergent posteriorly. Pterothorax with a long seta on each lateral margin, in front of which is a small spine-like seta and behind which are two setae, the most posterior of which is the longer. Abdomen almost as broad as long and in both sexes bearing below many short, stout, sharp spines which are situated chiefly on the first three segments. — In three specimens one or more spines are also on the fourth segment. Genital armature of male stout, compact and well chitinized. Basal plate about twice as long as wide, sides almost straight and subparallel. Parameres short, stout, outwardly curved hooks, in length equal to about half the width of basal plate. Endomeres wanting. A penis-like structure extends almost to the tips of parameres. Length of male, 1.66 mm.; width, 0.71 mm. Length of female, 2.06 mm.; width 0.87 mm. Type.—Cat. no. 40139, U. 8S. N. M. Described from four specimens, two males and two females, taken from skins of a parrot, Tanygnathus muellert, collected in the Celebes. Echinophilopterus tanygnathi, new species Head large, particularly the temporal region. Signature of clypeus much longer than broad, sides almost straight and parallel; a short, tongue-like projection extends from the middle of the anterior end of the signature. Lateral chitinizations of clypeus very long, with anterior free ends expanded, inwardly cupped and hyaline; above slightly in front of the middle each bears two long curved setae and near the base a single, straight seta. ‘Trabeculae reaching almost to the middle of the second antennal segment, decidedly broadened at their bases. Prothorax almost as large as pterothorax, sides straight and very slightly divergent posteriorly. No lateral marginal setae on prothorax, but there is a minute spine and a much larger seta at each angle. Chaetotaxy of lateral 94 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 4 margin of pterothorax: First a small spine, next a long more or less flagelli- form seta equal to about half the width of the pterothorax, next a similar seta half as long, last a very long seta equal to three-fourths the width of the pterothorax. Abdomen distinctly longer than broad. Ventral spines distributed over the central halves of the first three segments. Last segment of abdomen broader than long. Length of female, 1.79 mm.; width, 0.73 mm. Type host and type locality —Tanygnathus burbridger from Sulu Island, Philippine Islands. Type.—Cat. no. 40140, U. 8S. N. M. Described from a single female (holotype) taken from a skin of a parrot, Tanygnathus burbridget, collected at Mt. Bud Dajo, Sulu Island, Philippine Islands, October 11, 1906. Differs from E. chapini in having a longer central process on anterior end of signature of clypeus, in having shorter and stouter and differently shaped trabeculae and in some minor characters. Physconelloides, new genus Clypeus broadly and evenly rounded in front; clypeal suture present. Forehead with a pair of large, backwardly pointing, lateral horn-like or spine- like processes which arise from the chitinous thickening just behind the clypeal sutures. A similar but smaller pair of processes arise ventrally from the clypeus just in front of the clypeal sutures. Antennae short, second segment longest. ‘Temporal lobes large, squarish. Eyes concealed from above the lateral expansions of the temporal lobes. Esophageal sclerite present and well developed. Prothorax smaller than the ptero- thorax, with sides strongly divergent posteriorly. Pterothorax short, but very broad with rounded lateral margins. Abdomen eight-segmented in both sexes. Genital armature of male very long and slender; basal plate composed of two long chitinous rods; parameres free, conspicuous; endomeres not united distally. Tarsal claws unequal, the inner being the stouter and having a different curve from the outer. Genotype and its host species.—Physconelloides ceratoceps, new species, from Leptotila ochroptera chloraucheuia. This new genus is clearly related to Physconella Paine but differs from Paine’s genus in having the large horn-like process on the underside of the clypeus in addition to those on the sides of the forehead, and in having the angulate temporal lobes instead of rounded ones. The type species is the only one included in the genus. Physconelloides ceratoceps, new species Clypeus heavily chitinized along the front margin; ventral processes recurved, equal to the second segment of antennae in length. Lateral processes of head about one and a half times as long as ventral processes and overlapping most of the first antennal segment. Antennae short; first seg- ment as broad as long; second segment about twice as long as broad and equal to three and four together; fifth segment distinctly longer than fourth. FEB. 19,1927 EWING: NEW GENERA AND SPECIES OF MALLOPHAGA 95 Temporal lobes squarish, each with a minute spine-like seta on outer corner and two very long setae on posterior margin. Pharyngeal sclerite as broad as long. Prothorax with a pair of setae just in front of posterior angles. Ptero- thorax about three times as broad as long, with lateral margins almost evenly rounded and each bearing a large seta near its middle. Abdomen somewhat pear-shaped in outline with the broadest place behind the middle. Tergal and sternal plates apparently wanting. Pleural plates heavily chitinized and more or less united with each other. Abdomen almost nude except for three long lateral setae on each side of sixth segment and two on each side of seventh segment in the female and two large setae on each side of seventh segment and a posterior marginal pair on the eighth segment of male. Genital armature of male very slender and delicate; basal plate arising from the chinitized base of first abdominal segment and extending through almost the whole length of the abdomen as two slender rods; parameres outwardly directed, almost straight processes thickened at their bases; endo- meres free and similar to parameres.. Coxae of first pair of legs contiguous. Those of second pair of legs sepa- rated from each other for a distance about equal to the diameter of one of them by the expanded, plate-like epimera behind the first coxae. The inner tarsal claw of front leg is about twice as big as the outer and differently curved; it is also slightly larger than the outer one on the second and third pairs of legs. Length of female, 1.65 mm.; width, 0.66 mm. Length of male, 1.11 mm.; width, 0.52 mm. Type host and type locality——Leptotila ochroptera chlorauchewia, from Argentina. Type slide:—Cat. no. 40141, U.S. N. M. Described from a male (holotype) and a female (paratype) taken from type host, a pigeon, which was collected at Rio Quia, Las Palmes, Argentina Chaco, July 17, 1920, by Dr. A. Wetmore. Key To SoME RELATED GENERA OF PHILOPTERIDAE, INCLUDING THE Two New GENERA DESCRIBED IN THIS PAPER 1. Forehead produced laterally into a pair of large, recurved horn-like FORGE SCs Spite) tee Se as oe ee sions Wel Sein vas oa) oh», Sha Rehee 2 Forehead not produced laterally into horn-like processes............-.. 3 2. Temporal lobes rounded; elypeus without ventral spine-like processes Physconella Paine Temporal lobes angulate; clypeus provided with a pair of large, spine- like processes on ventral side............ Physconelloides, new genus 3. Forehead with membranous flaps (more conspicuous in the male) pro- jecting beyond the lateral margins. (The Giebeliinae of Waterston) . if Forehead without laterally projecting membranous slaps. see «eats es! 4. Antennae the same in the two sexes. On petrels...... Giebelia alles Antennae different in the two sexes. On giant fulmars and _ shear- sVIRE) CS. Sha ge ch Ae Stan OR Om POY ee Trabeculus Rudow 5. Antennae alike in the two sexes; trabeculae very large and usually TURE NOU UD array yey fab he. up 2). fe gen aid ah a geen eae ol © Sat She a tere 6 Antennae different in the two sexes. Onowls...... Strigiphilus Mjéberg 96 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 4 6. Forehead irregularly rounded and without hyaline margin to clypeus; trabeculae reduced, immovable, not reaching the distal end of first antennal seement-Onbowlsin.t. 9... Eustrigiphilus Ewing Without ‘such ‘characters... 0. 000) 4050.08). 2 ee ie 7. Clypeal region expanded and with hyaline free margin throughout, but rounded and not emarginate in front; antennae very short. On geese; ducksand’ swans: (0.15 0).20, 0 eee oO Anatoecus Cummings Clypeal region not rounded in front with free hyaline margin.......... 8 8 Signatural plate divided; antennae long, with segment two distinctly longer than any of the others. Onibises........ Ibidoecus Cummings signatural plate not divided... 10.1022. 22090% ). )8 9 9. Clypeal margin deeply incised in front; abdomen bearing many short, sharp spines below. On parrots........ Echinophilopterus, new genus Clypeal margin not deeply incised in front; abdomen without spine on ventral surfaces 2 ihn i Leu Le Oe UE er 10 10. Clypeal region bearing above on each lateral chitinization (clypeal band) a tuft of three or more setae. Chiefly on cuckoos Cuculoecus Ewing Clypeal region not bearing such lateral tufts of setae Part of genus Philopterus Nitzsch and its derivatives, Neophilop- terus Cummings and Dollabella Cam PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 194th MEETING The 194th meeting of the AcapEmy and the twenty-seventh annual meeting was held at the Administration Building of the Carnegie Institution on the evening of Tuesday, January 18, 1925. The meeting was called to order by Vice-President Hazarp, who called upon the retiring President, A. L. Day, to give his address entitled, The study of earth movements in California. President Day gave a brief account of the events leading to the movement for the cooperative study of earthquakes and earth movements and the forma- tion of the Advisory Committee of Seismology in order to make the coopera- tion effective. He mentioned the various lines of work, astronomical, geodetic, hydrographic, and geologic, as well as the strictly seismologic, that formed a part of the cooperative scheme, and outlined the parts taken by the various agencies doing this kind of work. Among the new instruments used in this investigation he mentioned the Anderson-Wood torsion selsmometer and the sonic sounding device of the Navy Department. He concluded by saying: “Such a number of vigorous agencies, thus brought together, cannot fail to accomplish a great deal more than any one could do alone; such a representative group of agencies, I believe, cannot fail of success.” President Day’s address is published in full in Sczence, 61: 323. March 27, 1925. Following a brief intermission after the address, the annual business meeting of the AcapEmy was held. The minutes of the 26th annual meeting were read and approved. The Corresponding Secretary, Francis B. SILSBEE reported briefly on the activities of the Acapmmy. During the year 35 persons were elected to regular membership, and Dr. SiauRD ORLA-JENSEN FEB. 19, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: THE ACADEMY 97 of Copenhagen to honorary membership in recognition of his work in bac- terlology. Eighteen resignations were accepted during the year, of whom 7 were resident members, and 5 were dropped for non-payment of dues. The Acapemy lost by death the following 9 members: ALFRED H. Brooks, Joun T. Heprick, Nep Ho.uister, F. Omori, J. J. StevENsoN, A. W. VocprEs, Wooprow WILson, E. V. WINCHELL, and R. 8. Woopwarp. During the year the Board of Managers held four meetings. In addition to attending to routine business and the election of new members, the Board adopted a resolution in support of the project for a National Arboretum, and designated respresentatives to the International Mathematical Congress at Toronto, to the Centenary Celebration of the Franklin Institute at Phila- delphia, and to the Washington meeting of the American Metric Association. The report of the Recording Secretary, WALTER D. LAMBERT, was read. There were held during the year 9 public meetings, most of them jointly with one or more of the affiliated societies, at which addresses were delivered. The names of the affiliated societies participating, the names of the speakers, the titles of the addresses, and occasional items of interest in connection with them were given. The report of the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, showed total receipts of $5,579.86, and disbursements of $4,227.56, with a balance in bank on Dec. 31, 1924, of $3,140.80. The value of the AcApEMyY’s investments was $16,036.37, and the estimated net worth including all items was $18,669.14. The report of the auditing committee, consisting of WHITMAN Cross, G. M. Couns, and O. 8. ApAms, was read, which verified the Treasurer’s figures. The reports of the Treasurer and of the auditing committee were then accepted. The report of the editors of the JouRNAL was presented by the senior editor, E. P. Kinurp. Figures were given regarding the number of articles and their distribution among the various branches of science. The general form and policy of the JouRNAL was substantially as during the previous year. The Committee of Tellers reported that the following officers had been elected for 1925; President, VERNON KELLOGG; Non-resident Vice-Presidents, J. StTiecLiTz, WILLIAM WHEELER; Corresponding Secretary, FRANcis B. SILSBEE; Recording Secretary, WALTER D. LAMBERT; Treasurer, R. L. Faris; Managers, Class of 1928, E. C. CRITTENDEN, G. W. McCoy. The following Vice-Presidents nominated by the affiliated societies were then elected: Anthropological Society, TRUMAN MicHEtson; Archaeological Society, WALTER Hovuau;, Bacteriological Society, W. M. CuarKx; Biological Society, S. A. RonweER; Botanical Society, H. L. SHantz; American Chemical Society, Washington Section, Lerason H. Apams; Entomological Society, A. G. Bovine; Washington Section, Society of American Foresters, GEORGE B. SupwortH; National Geographic Society, FREDERICK V. CoviLLE; Helmin- . thological Society, B. H. RANsom. 195th MEETING The 195th meeting of the AcapEMy was held jointly with the Anthro- pological Society, the Archaeological Society, and the Biological Society in the auditorum of the Carnegie Institution Building the evening of Tuesday, January 20, 1925. It was devoted to a symposium on The origin and evolu- tion of man. President Joun C. Merriam of the Carnegie Institution spoke on the geological aspects of the evidence and the significance of evolution for the future. 98 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 4 There is need to increase the knowledge of what we are by learning how we came into existence and what are the nature and sources of our characters and what is their possible future development. The problem of the evolution of man includes three questions: (1) the history and evolution of man from his origin to the present time; (2) the problem of the evolution of man from a possible ancestral type; (38) the future course of development of the human race. Willit represent evolutionary progress? In general the problem of the evolution of man is part of the larger question of evolution of the whole organic world and can be understood or interpreted mainly through study of this question as a whole. We approach the general problem of evolution from the point of view of comparative anatomy, of embryology, of experimental evolution, and of historical development. The question of historical de- velopment is understood only through the approach of geological history, which must itself be interpreted through an understanding of the geological record. An understanding of the meaning of time involves, first, the inter- pretation of local sequences of strata, and second, fitting together those fragments of the geological record scattered over the whole world which together represent the time sequence as we know it. The paleontological record is read from this volume. 1. Change. 2. Not repeat. 3. Definite direction. 4. Apparent overlap or connection of members of the sequence. One of the most important features in the story of man is that the earlier chapters are read from the geological record and not from documents of entirely recent or historical origin. Does the point of origin indicate derivation of man from an ancestral non- human type? Yes. Man appears at the right time and with the physical characters that we would expect if he were derived from a non-human type by modification. What is creation? Making of something new out of pre- existing materials. Does man’s history show changes in physical types? Yes. Advancein brain type? Yes. Will the future probably bring new and more advanced types of man? Yes, unless the myriad centuries of evolution of the organic world have led to halting of evolution only when an organism becomes intelligent. Intelligence should lead us to choose the best path of evolution and we believe it will. (Author’s abstract.) The next speaker, Dr. ApoLF ScHULTz, spoke on The embryological evidence of the evolution of man. His address, under that title, is published in full in This JouRNAL, vol. 15, June 19, 1925. The concluding speaker was Dr. ALES HrpuicKa of the U. S. National Museum, who spoke on anthropological explorations in connection with the problem of evolution. The addresses were illustrated with lantern slides. 196th MEETING The 196th meeting was held jointly with the Geological Society of Wash- ington in the assembly hall of the Cosmos Club on the evening of Wednesday, January 28th. Professor FrrepERIcK J. Pack of the University of Utah spoke on Some scenic aspects of Utah geology. Dr. Hucu D. Mismr of the U. 8. Geological Survey spoke on Hroszon in the San Juan Canyon, Utah. The canyon of San Juan River extends west across a high arid region in southeastern Utah and joins the Glen Canyon of Colorado River near the southern boundary of the state. It reveals a magnificent geologic structure. There is section possession of the same dimensions as the canyon, as muchas FEB. 19, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: THE ACADEMY 99 half a mile high and 133 mileslong. The rocks aggregate a thickness of 5,000 feet and consist of limestone, sandstone, and shale, ranging in age from Pennsylvania to Jurassic. Most of the rocks are red beds, and, since soil is scanty and rock ledges abound, red is the predominating color in any landscape view. The rock strata have been flexed into a broad gentle arch, but neither the arch nor the minor structural features, such as anticlines, synclines, monoclines, faults, and joints, have influenced the course of the river. The present crooked course of the river in the canyon is a striking example of an entrenched meandering stream. Such a course may have been developed on a former cover of Tertiary sediments-or on a peneplain, fragments of which stand near and above the walls. The peneplain is possibly of Pleistocene age, and the canyon cutting therefore apparently began in Pleistocene time. The cutting was rapid but did not continue uniformly as there were a few short pauses when the river was graded and deposited gravel which now floors benches of small area on the walls. Rock debris, consisting of sand, gravel, and boulders, forms the bed of the river and attains a depth of perhaps 100 feet or more. But it is presumably absent in a few of the rapids that are produced by inclined ledges of hard-rock which cross the channel. Long stretches of the canyon, where the debris is deepest, present the peculiar ex- ample of an alluvial stream flowing between close walls of solid rock, but much of the debris is apparently moved by high floods that take place many years apart. The San Juan River carries an unusually large quantity of debris for streams in the United States and it is one of the chief contributors of mud to Colorado River. The water is always muddy, but during flood stages the river is actually a river of mud; and according to samples taken by Pierce it occasionally carries by volume three times as much silt as water. The heavy load of debris carried during floods causes a peculiar kind of waves known as sand waves. These waves attain a height of about 7 feet and resemble those thrown up by a stern-wheel river steamboat. They travel upstream, in marked contrast to other kinds of waves that are stationary and also to waves that travel downstream. If the proposed storage and power projects on San Juan and Colorado rivers are carried to completion the river, on reaching the heads of the reservoirs, will change its work from erosion to deposition. An important question concerning the reservoirs is, How soon will they be filled with rock debris? The answer to this question remains for the future, because the data available at present are not sufficient for making an estimate of the total lead of debris that is carried each year by the San Juan and discharged into the Colorado. (Author’s abstract.) Both papers were illustrated with colored lantern slides. 197th MEETING The 197th meeting was held jointly with the affiliated biological societies of Washington in the assembly hall of the Cosmos Club on the evening of February 19, 1925. A group of papers was presented on the general subject of Undesirable Immigrants. Dr. J. R. MouLuER treated the subject from the standpoint of Animal Diseases, under the title Forezgn Insects a Menace. It is to the interest of this country to prevent the introduction of contagious diseases, whether of humans, of other animals, or of plants. Within the past year there have been two examples of the great economic loss which may result 100 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 4 from the inroads of foreign pests and of the danger to some of our greatest industries. The outbreak of foot-and-mouth disease among the livestock of California and Texas, was the concern of the entire country and Congress acted promptly in appropriating money to combat it. This plague of live- stock is so contagious that the United States Department of Agriculture takes every precaution against introduction, even to prohibiting experimental work with the disease in this country. In spite of all precautions the virus of a dangerous disease sometimes gets by the barriers maintained by the Bureau of Animal Industry. The exact method by which the recent foot-and-mouth disease gained entrance is not known. ‘The introduction of virus of the European fowl pest, which appeared in poultry flocks of this country last December, is of peculiar interest, because of the probable method of its introduction. This disease had not been known in the United States and precautions were taken against its introduction, but it has been found that an investigator working on filterable viruses in a large eastern institution obtained the virus of the European fowl pest, in the sum- mer of 1923, from the Pasteur Institute of France. Dr. Jonn R. Mouusr, Chief of the Bureau of Animal Industry, says there is a possibility that the disease was introduced through some other channel, but that this is the only known source of this virus, and that the disease was first found in States where work with the virus was done. The Department of Agriculture does not permit the importation of animals from countries having destructive animal diseases not already present here. It is very rarely that a dangerous disease gets past the barriers that have been raised to exclude livestock diseases. There have been several outbreaks of foot-and-mouth disease in the past 40 years which have been stamped out by the bureau veterinarians. There have been a few outbreaks of other animal diseases foreign to this country, includ- ing the present outbreak of the European fowl pest. Only those well ac- quainted with disease conditions throughout the world know what we have probably escaped by maintaining quarantine walls and by sending inspectors into foreign countries. (Abridged from author's abstract.) Dr. THomas E. SnNyprErR of the Bureau of Entomology treated the subject from the standpoint of plant diseases and insect pests, under the title Forest insect pests and their control. Col. GrnELEY has referred to the great destruction of forest trees by barkbeetles and defoliating insects and emphasized the importance of forest management in their control. There are other types of forest insects which cause an annual Icss of forest products estimated at $40,000,000. To this loss must be added percentages of the cost and upkeep of lumber camps, machinery, equipment, logging railroads, wages and keep of men and animals in the woods, storage in the mill pond, sawing, drying, finishing and piling at the mill. Where the products, such as telephone poles, construction timbers, etc., are damaged after being put in place, the cost of replacement involves losses of labor and time, as well as the cost of the original and replaced products. The control of these insects is an important factor in forest conservation. The losses they cause can be greatly lessened by slight read- justments in logging operations, mill management, closer utilization and the use of wood preservatives. (Author’s abstract.) Dr. LAwRENCE Kots of the Hygienic Laboratory treated the subject from the standpoint of Hwman diseases. The addresses were illustrated by lantern slides and moving pictures. Water D. LAMBERT, Recording Secretary. ieee j : 2 MEETINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND APRIL RCRD ROC METIBGEE Sn i! (a 9. The: Philosophical aise a a | ba ne BY © Geologicl Soriety. — The al Society. t] em oe of the afilinted ela ‘will appear on this page by the thirteenth and the twenty-seventh of each month. | oar CONTENTS 2 “ache fe : tbe pina —Alfaroa, a new genus of the faaity Jagandscee from : a Ri with aan to some ae genera iat uM enoponioe and RG RRS anh) Meal: Treasurer: Reds Panis, Coast and Geodetic Survey. | ¢ Vou. 17 Marcu 4, 1927 No. 6 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES BOARD OF EDITORS Wiuuiams J. PETERS AGNES CHASE JOHN B. REESIDE, Jr, DEPARTMENT OF TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM BUREAU PLANT INDUSTRY NATIONAL MUSEUM ASSOCIATE EDITORS L, H. Apams S. A, RonwEr : PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 4 E, A. GotpMaNn G. W. Stosz fy BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 3 R. F. Griees J. R. SwanTON i BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY E. WICHERS eee et i ee % en iD ¥ oy : x Be Yu ee F Mr. Roya anp GuILFoRD AVES. BALTIMORE, MARYLAND ge as Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., under the . of August 24,1912, Acceptance for mailing at special rate of postage provided for in Section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 1918 This A! OURNAL, the official org present a brief record of current sc (1) short original papers, written - short notes of current scientific literatur. (3) proceedings and programs of meetin t. notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washing semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth on each mont when it appears on the nineteenth only. ‘Volumes a 4p toe publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reachi ing the He twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request f1 issue of the JouRNAL for the following fourth 0 ninete Manuscripts may be Sent to any member of the clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obv ‘should appear only as footnotes and should include yea the work of both the editors and printers it is sugg serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page Illustrations will be used only when necessary and will be co _ or diagrams of simple character. The cost of producing cuts for: _ partly met by the author. i Proof -—In order to facilitate meaee publication. no proof will e sent t: unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted 1 in final form t will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. ; _ Authors! s Reprints .—Reprints will be furnished at the following: sc ed e of prices. Copies 4 pp. 9 1) Oe i a 4 pp. 50 $.85 $1.65 ae 55 100 AGO eo 475. : 150 25 ee BOG a5 Ob. eae 200 2.60. 4 80 37 Ps eat 00 ae 30 ae Be 25 oe An additional charge of 25 cents will be made for each split page. Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pa nation and date of issue, will be furnished when ordered. ; As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his eee for in copic should invariably be attached to the first page of S See ey The rate of Subscription Ber volumes Ween Sea sates mon oe Semi-monthly numbers................ Pistia ee Wek cee pee niey cae oy ine _ Monthly numbers..........-... Sed as ats ye ahr a vin cia ars RN oe 2 are Remitlances should be made payable to “Washington iN oom of ‘Seine addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Mein ee European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, London. Exchanges.—The JouRNAL does not exchange with other ‘publications. ine Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, prea S that bows is Fae within thirty days after date of the ihe oak issue. Sealy: “Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to December 19, 1911, will be sent. for $3. 00, - Special rates a Z are given to members of ieee societies affiliated ve the Academy. — nee JOURNAL ; OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vou. 17 Marcu 4, 1927 No. 5 GEOPHYSICS.—The part played by tsostasy in geophysics and geology.' Wi.iaM Bowls, U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey. It was about a half-century from the time that the idea of isostasy was advanced by Airy and Pratt until there was undertaken a quanti- tative test of sufficient magnitude to prove or disprove the theory. It was very fortunate that we had in the United States a geodetic prob- lem which had to be solved in the interests of surveying, charting, and mapping. ‘This problem was the placing of the triangulation of the United States on a single spheroid and relating it to a single initial station. The testing of isostasy proved to be an incident in this work. Prior to the time when the late Dr. John F. Hayford assumed charge of the geodetic work of the U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey, 27 years ago, there were not sufficient connected triangulation and astronomic data to make possible the placing of the triangulation system of this country, which is the basis for surveys, maps and charts, in its correct relation to the meridian through Greenwich and the plane of the equa- tor. Shortly after Hayford took charge of the geodetic work, the readjustment of the separate arcs of triangulation in a single network was begun. The result of this work was the adoption of what is now called the North American Datum. This datum may be defined as the Clarke spheroid of 1866, a latitude and longitude for the initial triangulation station, Meades Ranch, in central Kansas, and an azi- muth from that station to the triangulation station Waldo. Hayford had available a sufficient number of astronomic stations to make the adjustment of the triangulation to the single datum and he soon learned, from an inspection of the data, that it would be possible 1 Presidential address before the Philosophical Society of Washington, January 8, 1927. Received January 26, 1927. 101 102 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 5 to make a determination of the shape and size of the earth from the triangulation of the United States alone. In order that this might be done accurately, he had the astronomic latitudes, longitudes and azi- muths observed at many more triangulation stations in the country. It is well known that the method of determining the shape and size of the earth is to compare the values of degrees of latitude and longi- tude, as derived from astronomic observations, with those determined by triangulation. The difference between the astronomic and geodetic values are due partly to erroneous values for the spheroid used in the triangulation computations and partly to the errors of observations in the triangulation and astronomic work. There is also present in the data an outstanding difference due to the deflection of the vertical or station error which caused much trouble to those who had previously determined the figure of the earth. Hayford, who was familiar with the literature on isostasy, realized that there was a possibility of apply- ing corrections to the astronomic data which might eliminate to a large extent that part of the difference between the astronomic and the geodetic latitudes and longitudes and azimuths which is due to the irregular configuration of the earth’s surface and also to the irregular densities in the outer portion of the earth. He assumed, in his com- putations, various depths to which the irregular densities might extend. These depths varied from zero to 200 miles. He found, as a result of what he called his first investigation, a limiting depth to these irregular densities and, therefore, to the crust, of 113.7 kilometers. A second investigation, in which considerably more data were used, resulted in a derived depth of the crust of 122.2 kilometers. Later an extensive test of isostasy was made by the use of gravity data, and this supple- mented and greatly strengthened the conclusions reached from the deflections of the vertical. From the gravity data the best value for the depth of the earth’s crust is 95 kilometers. An inspection of Hay- ford’s work indicated that his depth of compensation derived by the use of deflection data in mountain areas only was 97 kilometers. It was thought that a mean of these two values, 96 kilometers, is the best depth and it has been generally adopted by geodesists, although seismologists are inclined to favor a depth of approximately 60 kilo- meters and many geologists are of the opinion that 60 kilometers most nearly agrees with available geological evidence. We do not know just why there should be a limiting depth to the outer portion of the earth having residual rigidity, but that there is a change in physical characteristics near the 60-mile depth is undoubtedly true. MARCH 4, 1927 BOWIE: ISOSTASY IN GEOPHYSICS AND GEOLOGY 103 It was assumed in both the gravity and deflection computations that the compensation of the topography, by deficiency of density under land areas and excess of density under the water areas, is dis- tributed uniformly from the surface to a limiting depth. ‘This, of course, is an artificial assumption, for it is rather difficult to see how there could be any uniformity, except in a most general way, in the distribution of the deficiencies and excesses of density. It is certain that the differences from normal could not start right at the surface of the solid earth as was assumed, nor that they broke off suddenly at a certain depth below sea level. Innumerable assumptions may be made in regard to the distribution of deficiencies and excesses with depth, but the chances are that no two investigators would agree on an as- sumption. We may however regard the uniform distribution as prac- tically a mean of all of the possible distributions, and, therefore, as probable as any. It has been found, by test computations, that the gravity anomalies can be reduced just about as well by assuming that all of the isostatic compensation is distributed in a thin layer at a depth of about 30 miles below the earth’s surface as by having the com- pensation distributed uniformly. This simply means that no matter what the distribution, we must have the center of gravity of the com- pensation of approximately 30 miles below sea level. It would be interesting if we could learn the actual distribution of the deficiencies and excesses that balance the topography, for we then might be able to interpret the past history of the earth with more success than is now possible. The testing of isostasy by the U. 8. Coast and Geodetic Survey has been supplemented by that of investigators in other countries. India has taken a leading part and a number of tests have shown that its area is in equilibrium. This has also been found to be true for Spain, Holland, Norway, southern Canada and the Mackenzie Basin. The region around certain islands in the southern Pacific has been found to be in equilibrium. (This Pacific work was made possible by a grant of funds by the Philosophical Society of Washington.) Wher- ever land areas have been tested the prisms of the crust below have been found to be in isostatic equilibrium. During the last few years gravity observations of a rather high degree of accuracy have been made at sea on a submarine by the use of a special pendulum apparatus. ‘The instruments were designed and the method devised by Dr. Vening Meinesz of the Dutch Geodetic Com- mission. Itis along step forward in geodetic work to have a means of 104 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 5 determining gravity at sea and data of great value can now be col- lected over the oceans by the submarines of many countries. Thisis a peace-time work for the submarines that should have much value in theoretical science and might, eventually, have a profound influence on industry. Much of the wealth of a nation depends on what is in the earth below its area. We can only discover what is in the earth and how to utilize it by means of geological or geophysical investigations and. it is certain that isostasy will be a factor in these endeavors. It is well known that for the first mile and a half of the earth’s crust the temperature increases at the rate of about 50°C. per mile. We do not know what is the temperature gradient lower down, but it is safe to make the assumption that this rate of increase is maintained for some miles below the earth’s surface. Much has been written on the heat of the interior of the earth but it is not necessary to do more than touch on this problem here. ‘The pressure on the earth’s materials increases with depth to enormous proportions. Is it not possible that the change in the character of the earth’s materials from one of residual rigidity to one of practically no rigidity is due to the increased heat and pressure near the depth of compensation, approximately 60 miles below the earth’s surface? Reductions of a number of Dr. Meinesz’ gravity stations at sea have been made by the U. 8. Coast and Geodetic Survey. ‘There is an indication that gravity over the Atlantic and the Pacific is, on an average, greater than gravity at sea level over the land. After the reduction for topography and compensation has been made for the sea stations there is an outstanding average positive anomaly. This posi- tive anomaly might be due to each of several causes or a combination of two or more of them. First, it might be due to a lack of accurate information as to the configuration of the ocean bottoms for a hundred miles or more around each of the stations. This, however, does not seem to be a very fruitful source for discovering the cause of the anom- alies, for a lack of definite information would tend to give both posi- tive and negative anomalies about equal in number. The lack of definite suboceanic topographic data would be accidental in its effect. The second cause for the positive anomalies might be an actual departure of crustal prisms beneath the ocean from the perfect iso- static condition. This, however, does not seem to be a very probable cause. ‘The earth’s crust has been formed for a billion years or more and the central portions of the ocean basins have been less disturbed by erosion and sedimentation than have the land areas; therefore, the MARCH 4, 1927 BOWIE: ISOSTASY IN GEOPHYSICS AND GEOLOGY 105 crust beneath the central parts of the ocean is likely to be more nearly in equilibrium than elsewhere. The prisms of the crust under the oceans have had sufficient time to bring about complete isostatic adjustment among themselves and with respect to continental areas. The third cause for the positive anomalies may be the irregularities in the geoid surface. Over the oceans, with isostasy practically per- fect everywhere, the geoid surface should be and probably is closer to the center of the earth than are points at sea level on land areas in the same latitudes. In a given latitude the value of gravity increases toward the center of the earth down to a certain distance below sea level. On the other hand it decreases with elevation above the sur- face of the earth. A change in elevation of ten feet makes the com- puted value of gravity one part in a million greater or smaller. Grav- ity values are reduced to the geoid because we do not have sufficient data to determine the relation at any particular point between geoidal and spheroidal surfaces. A computation was recently made at the office of the U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey by C. H. Swick which showed that, in the middle Atlantic the geoid is approximately 8 meters below the spheroid or to put it in another way, using the sphe- roid as a datum, the geoid is 25 meters lower than at a certain point in the Appalachian mountains in South Carolina to which the computa- tion was referred. Such a difference in the elevation of the geoidal surface in relation to the spheroid should make a difference in the value of gravity of about 8 partsin a million. The effect on gravity of the depression of the geoid over the ocean areas would seem to be system- atic and the average gravity anomalies over the oceans should, for any large area and large number of stations, tend more to be positive than the average anomalies over large land areas. The factors in the gravity formula by means of which we obtain the gravity at sea level at any latitude are based on the values of gravity observed over continental areas. Necessarily, since in this area the geoid is above the spheroid, the values of gravity are too small. It would seem that a gravity formula to be used for both land areas and oceans should be based on observed values well distributed over land and water. Then, if we knew the deviation of the geoidal from the spheroidal surface, we could apply negative corrections to the com- puted values over the land areas and positive corrections to the values over ocean areas. Then, the resulting mean anomalies with regard to sign would be approximately zero for any large group of stations, whether on land or water. 106 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 5 The question of the reduction of gravity stations to the geoidal surface rather than to the spheroidal is a matter that needs to be in- vestigated further with a view to learning just what the gravity anomalies at stations at sea, which tend to be positive, may mean in terms of isostasy. There is another cause for outstanding anomalies at sea just as for large anomalies on land; that is the presence of material thatis abnor- mally heavy or light in density close to the gravity station, both hori- zontally and vertically. It would seem from the results of gravity observations taken at sea that isostasy in the crust under the oceans is approximately as com- plete as under the land. After all corrections have been applied to the computed values, including the reduction to the spheroidal surface, the remaining anomalies would on an average be quite small as com- pared with the effect of a deficiency of crustal material equal to the difference between the mass of ocean waters and a mass of surface rock of equal volume. It seems necessary to conclude from the proof of isostasy that the isostatic adjustment or transfer of material from the base of a prism of the crust that is being depressed by sediments to the base of a prism of the crust that is undergoing erosion must take place below the crustal material. The material of the crust itself has residual rigidity and maintains its form for geological time. It is, therefore, too strong to permit of horizontal flow as a result of disturbance of the isostatic equilibrium. Besides, this material has apparently maintained through a long period of geological time, different densities in columns extending approximately 60 miles below sea level. ‘There is a stress difference from high areas towards the low areas of the earth’s surface until the depth of compensation has been reached where the stress difference is practically zero. ‘Therefore there could not be in the upper part of the crust any horizontal movement of material from the sedimented area towards the area that is being eroded. The principle of isostasy is a proof also that the earth’s crust is exceedingly weak. No definite dimensions can be given to the mass of material that can be held up by the earth’s crust without isostatic adjustment but a test has been made which throws some light on this subject. Of the more than 300 stations of the United States, 42 having elevations of 1000 meters or more were selected for the test. For each of the stations, corrections were applied for the topography of the world and for the compensation of all of this topography except for a disk directly under the station extending horizontally to a dis- MARCH 4, 1927 BOWIE: ISOSTASY IN GEOPHYSICS AND GEOLOGY 107 tance of 17.9 miles. The result of ignoring that compensation was to make all of the stations have negative anomalies, except 4, and the average anomalies with and without regard to sign became —0.037 and 0.040 dyne. This, it seems, is an indication that we cannot ignore in our gravity reductions the compensation of even such small amounts of topography without having the anomalies bear a definite relation to the elevation of the station. A second test was made with these stations by ignor- ing the compensation of the disk of topography extending to a dis- tance of 36.5 miles in all directions from the station. In this case all of the anomalies except one became negative and the mean values, with and without regard to sign, became —0.072 and 0.072. It is certain that a disk as large as 1000 meters in thickness and 36.5 miles in radius is largely compensated and it is probable from the two tests that a disk much smaller than 1000 meters in thickness and 17.9 miles in radius does not escape compensation entirely. These tests seem to give some idea of the masses which the earth’s crust cannot withstand as extra loads. Since the earth’s crust is so weak as not to withstand the loading and unloading caused by sedimentation and erosion, we must conclude that some of the geological theories that are based on the idea of avery rigid crust, carrying horizontal thrusts for hundreds and even thou- sands of miles, must be modified or abandoned. In this particular, it would seem that isostasy has its most important bearing. Isostasy in itself is not an active agency; it is a condition of rest and its proof leads to the logical conclusion of a very weak crust and thus restricts the field within which hypotheses and theories may be formulated to account for surface changes. There are two ideas of isostasy, one advanced by Airy and the other by Pratt. The Airy idea postulates a rather uniform density of crustal material or at least a density that varies the same along all radu. That view requires a greater thickness of crustal material under con- tinental and island areas than under water areas. ‘This theory seems logical until we inquire into the cause of mountain uplift and of the formation of synclinoria. The advocates of the Airy idea claim that the thickening of the crust is due to a crushing and distorting of crus- tal material beneath areas which have undergone heavy sedimentation. They hold that the crust beneath such areas is weaker than in other places. The horizontal forces causing that crushing are supposed to have their origin either in the collapsing of the non-cooling crust on 108 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 5 a cooling interior, or to an expansion of the crust due to radio-activity without any change occurring in the volume of the nucleus, or to a collapsing and buckling of the crust on a nucleus which is being com- pressed by the overloading of the crustal material. Any one of these processes may be going on but it is quite certain that, should there be great horizontal forces carried through crustal material, the deepest parts of the ocean would be the ones to buckle up rather than areas of erosion, the surfaces of which are close to sea level. On the Airy hypothesis the crustal material under the oceans must be very much thinner than under continental areas and therefore the first to yield. The Pratt hypothesis calls for a uniform depth of crust with material of different densities in the prisms under surfaces of different elevations. If we assume normal densities for the crustal material under the coastal plains then we must assume a lighter material under the plateaus and mountain areas of the continent and a heavier material under the oceans. One objection to the Pratt hypothesis is that changes in density of crustal material, greater than those caused by ordinary thermal expansion, must be taking place when an area once at or close to sea level is thrust upward into a plateau or a mountain system. If the mountains are three miles high on an average, which is approxi- mately that of the Himalayas, the Pratt hypothesis requires a 5% increase in volume and decrease in density in the prisms of the crust below. This is on the assumption that the crust extends to a depth of 60 miles below sea level. On the other hand, if a synclinorium is formed where previously there was an area of uplift and erosion, we must assume on the Pratt idea a greater contraction of the prism of the crust beneath, than could be caused by normal thermal contraction, and a decrease in volume. ‘The usual thermal expansion or contrac- tion is not enough to account for the major uplifts and depressions. The Airy hypothesis and also many of the old hypotheses which are based on a collapsing crust, must seek some interior cause of the major movements of the earth’s surface. With the Pratt hypothesis, on the other hand, erosion and sedimentation seem to be all that is needed to start the sequence of events which change the surface configuration. An enormous quantity of water has fallen to the earth’s surface dur- ing the geological period. The average annual rate of rainfall is about 30 inches for the land areas of the world. At that rate there would be approximately a mile of rain in 2000 years or somewhat more than a half million miles during the sedimentary age which is generally supposed to be about 13 billion years long. MARCH 4, 1927 BOWIE: ISOSTASY IN GEOPHYSICS AND GEOLOGY 109 The rate of erosion for the United States as determined by the U. 8. Geological Survey is equivalent to one foot of material over our 3,000,000 square miles of area in 9000 years. At that rate, there would be a mile of erosion in about 45,000,000 years. The sedimentary age is more than 30 times that long. . This indicates what a tremendous amount of work has been done on the earth’s surface in transferring material from one place to another. ‘The amount of erosion in any one area would not of course be as much as 30 miles in thickness, due to the fact that an area is base leveled long before any such amount of material can be carried away. On an average, however, erosion may have aggregated something like 30 miles or more during the sedimen- tary age. Of course, some areas might have been above sea level undergoing erosion at one part of the age and during another part might have been below sea level-receiving sedimentation. For this reason the erosion from any one area during the entire sedimentary age might have been only a fraction of the total amount of erosion which could have taken place in an area continuously exposed to approximately the same conditions now found in the United States. Nearly all of the sediments derived from a continent go to shoal water and are deposited within about 100 miles of the shore. Only a small part goes beyond that limit. These sediments are deposited in a most irregular way. The mouth of any particular river may wander along the shore or change its position as the Yellow River did in 1852, shifting from the south to the north side of the Shantung Peninsula. The sediments deposited by a river will be deeper in some places than in others and the chances are that they will be the deepest not very far off the general coast line of the continent. Farther out to sea, they will gradually thin out. If the sediments are being deposited in an inland sea they will be thickest close to the shores of the sea. All mountain ranges seem to have been uplifted in areas which have previously been subjected to very heavy sedimentation. ‘There seems to be a direct connection between sedimentation and mountain uplift. As material is carried from elevated regions and deposited in lower ones, the isostatic balance is disturbed. The weight of the sediments depresses the crust beneath them, and the prisms undergoing erosion become lighter than normal. The result is that the crust in the area of sedimentation tends to sink and to force subcrustal material into crustal space, finally pushing up the lightened erosion prism. Even- tually a balance is restored between the crust beneath the sedimentary area and the crust under the erosion area by movement of subcrustal material. 110 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 5 There is no such thing as a transfer of subcrustal material from below the crust where sedimentation is occurring to the space below the crust undergoing erosion. There is merely a pushing aside of crustal material as the sediments depress prisms and the result is a movement of subcrustal material all the way back to the area of ero- sion. The motion is similar to that which would occur in a pail of water, in which wooden blocks are floating, if one block is increased in mass and the other decreased. ‘The water does not flow from one block to another but the whole liquid mass is readjusted. How far below the crust the distortion of subcrustal material may occur in the res- toration of the isostatic balance is not known. It may be 10, 100 or even 1000 miles but probably the thickness of subcrustal material affected is not excessive. If an area undergoing erosion should lose 1000 feet from the surface there will not be that much lowering of the area, for there will have occurred an influx of subcrustal material below the base of the prism to restore the isostatic equilibrium of the prism affected. The amount of lowering will depend on the relative densities of subcrustal and crustal material. If the difference in density is 10% then the surface would be lowered only 100 feet by the erosion of 1000 feet of material. It is thus seen that many times as much material can be eroded from an uplifted area before base leveling has been accomplished as there was in the original uplift. Of course uplift occurs gradually and as soon as an area begins to increase its elevation above the surrounding regions, erosion commences, so the mass of the original uplift is more or less a hypothetical quantity. When an elevated area has been base leveled the source of sedimen- | - tation has been shut off and there is quiescence in the erosion and sedi- mentary areas. In a later geological period the former erosion area becomes a basin in which sediments are deposited. On the other hand, the former sedimentary area is uplifted and a mountain system ora plateau is formed from which erosion begins. ‘There is thus a sort of oscillation between the uplifted and downwarped areas. Such areas have, no doubt, changed positions several times during the sedimentary age and will continue such changes in the future. While there is much sedimentation in lakes and valleys, a great part of the material washed down from great elevation is carried to sea and deposited near the shores. Eventually a belt of sedimentation 100 miles or more in width is extended along the whole waterfront of a continent. Later this material is raised up into a plateau or mountain MARCH 4, 1927 BOWIE: ISOSTASY IN GEOPHYSICS AND GEOLOGY I aT system and then erosion from it occurs. Part of the eroded material will work inland, possibly to the regions from which the sediments came, but much of it—probably at least half—is carried out to sea. Thus there is ever a tendency for the continental area to encroach on the ocean area. The process might be exceedingly slow and still be considerable in amount during a long geological period. Wehave no available evidence to show just what were the original limits of the continental areas. In the continental areas should probably be in- cluded areas along the shores out to the edges of the continental shelves. The continental areas are much larger when thus considered. The sediments that are carried to sea force subcrustal material back to- wards the areas of erosion. As the density of sediments must be from 10% to 20% less than that of the subcrustal material the thick- ness of the sediments must be that much greater than the thickness of the subcrustal matter displaced and a gradual filling up of the ocean areas must be taking place. It seems certain that the earth’s surface was very irregular before the beginning of the sedimentary age. This is indicated by the heavy elements found in greater percentages in the igneous rocks on the ocean islands than in the igneous rocks on continents. The specific volumes of these igneous rocks for land areas are greater than for the lavas under the ocean areas. It seems probable that the earth’s crust was in equilibrium before the beginning of sedimentation and, if so, then owing to the variation in the specific densities of the igneous rocks composing the crust, there should have been some areas standing at higher ele- vations than others. When water began to fall to the earth, it col- lected in the low areas to form oceans and inland seas. The weight of the water then disturbed the isostatic equilibrium of the crust and caused a readjustment by the movement of subcrustal material from below the water areas towards the land areas. I am assuming that, prior to the sedimentary age, the earth’s sur- face was too hot to permit water to fall on it and remain there. This may not have been the real condition of affairs, for water may already have been on the earth with the atmospheric conditions such that there were no evaporation and precipitation to cause water to run over the land areas. In any event there was a time when rain began to fall. Without running water over land areas there could have been no ero- sion and sedimentation. It would be rather difficult to see how the processes which have been going on to cause the irregularities in the earth’s surface could begin to operate if the surface were perfectly 112 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 5 level at the beginning of the sedimentary age. The earth must have become quite cold, if it were ever in a molten state, by the time that the sedimentary age began, and any instability, due to internal causes, would certainly have been eliminated before the earth had cooled to the point where water could remain on its surface. Owing to the fact that the earth’s crust is now in isostatic equilib- rium, and that it probably has been so for all of the sedimentary age and even for a long time prior to the beginning of that age, we must conclude that the strength of the crustal material is very low. It will yield or break under the gravitational forces resulting from the accumulation of sediments or the unloading of an area by erosion. A crust so weak as to remain in isostatic equilibrium is not competent to carry thrusts through great distances such as are required in the collapse hypothesis. Many who held to that hypothesis prior to the establishment of isostasy, now believe in what is generally called the “roots of mountains” theory which, in effect, is the idea of isostasy as first advanced by Airy. In order that crustal material may extend into subcrustal space in the form of roots to balance the masses above sea level, it would have to be extremely weak under the uplifted areas. If the normal thick- ness of the crust were 50 miles and if the difference in density between the lower crustal and the subcrustal matter is 15 per cent then the extension of the crust into subcrustal space under an uplifted area having an average elevation of two miles would be of the order of 15 miles. The crustal material under the elevated region would have been tremendously distorted to have a 50-mile thickness increased to approximately 70 miles. Even though there were a weak place in the crust, under the sediments which had been laid down prior to the uplift, this part of the crust would have been thickened materially shortly after the uplift began. Then, instead of a thickness less than normal, there would be one greater than normal, and the result of continued distorting of the crustal material to the sides of the area affected would be to buckle up the crust off to the sides of the area which had previously been one of sedimentation. Of course, the beginning of the movement of uplift and of depression of a root might have heated up the prism of the crust and thus made it weaker than normal but it seems to me that the mechanics of the “roots of moun- tains’ theory are not very sound. There is another weakness in the roots theory. The material of the roots which was weak enough to be crushed, distorted and pushed ~ MARCH 4, 1927 BOWIE: ISOSTASY IN GEOPHYSICS AND GEOLOGY 113 down into subcrustal space against the hydrostatic pressure of the subcrustal material, would seem to be too weak to maintain its new position for a long geological time against that hydrostatic pressure. Material cannot be both strong and weak and, if the roots can be formed by the weakness of the crustal material, they cannot be strong enough to maintain themselves against the gravitational forces exerted against them. | The proof of isostasy and the consequent weakness of crustal mate- rial force us to the conclusion that the major changes in surface eleva- tion must be due to a change in volume of the crustal material directly below the affected areas. ‘The isostatic investigations have shown that the most probable depth to which the crustal material extends is about 60 miles. The temperature gradient found from measure- .ments of temperatures in wells and mines is approximately 50°C. per mile. ‘The gradient varies greatly from place to place, but this is a fair average. We may assume then a temperature gradient of about 1°C. per 100 feet. If the earth were maintained in isostatic equilib- rium to a very high degree of perfection, then as sediments were deposited along the coast or in lakes or valleys, the crust would sink down under the added weight. It is not known just how thick the sedimentary beds must be before there is an isostatic yielding of the crust below but if, say, a hundred feet of sediments causes an adjust- ment, then each element of the crust below would be pushed down nearly one hundred feet into regions which are about 1° hotter than the space they formerly occupied. While sedimentation progresses at a rather slow rate yet the conduction of heat through rock is sup- posed to be even slower. _ The normal thermal expansion of a prism of rock 60 miles in length per one degree Centigrade is about 10 feet. The coefficient of expan- sion on which this calculation is based is that of marble. For a thousand feet of sediments the change in temperature due to the 1so- static yielding of the crust might result in a subsequent uplift of 100 feet. It is believed that many of the small vertical oscillations of the surface of the earth have been caused by the thermal expansion and contraction of the crustal material after it was pushed down under sediments to hotter regions or raised to colder regions by isostatic adjustment following erosion. | The maximum thickness of sedimentary beds for any one period is generally believed to be about eight miles, approximately 40,000 feet. The expansion of the crustal material depressed eight miles due to 114 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 5 thermal change would be about 4000 feet. That is, the surface would be raised approximately that amount when the depressed crustal mate- rial had taken on the temperature normal to the new position. But 4000 feet is a small elevation, as compared with what we have in many mountain regions. The Himalayas have a maximum elevation of about 29,000 feet while the average elevation is close to three miles. The Andes have an average elevation of about three miles. We there- fore must look for some cause other than thermal contraction and expansion of crustal material to cause surface changes. By a process of elimination we are forced to conclude that a change of density and volume is brought about by chemical or physical processes in addition to that caused by thermal expansion and contraction. Just how this occurs it is impossible to say, but there are numerous cases of two minerals having exactly the same chemical composition but different volumes and densities, a notable example being diamonds and graphite. Both are pure carbon, but the diamond has a density of 3.52 and the graphite only 2.25. The difference is about 36% of the density of the diamond. It may be that there is some rearrangement of the elements as a result of changes of temperature and pressure which would cause a change of density of 3% in the prism of crustal material, and that is sufficient to raise the surface as much as two miles. We have no proof that expansion and contraction actually take place in the earth’s crust but a careful consideration of the mechanics of the earth seems to make these the most probable causes of surface changes. Opposition to this explanation of surface changes has been raised by a number of students of the earth because of their difficulty in explaining on this basis the great horizontal movements which have occurred in the material near the earth’s surface. Undoubtedly there have been extensive horizontal movements but the writer maintains that these can be explained more easily on the theory that they are incidental to the vertical uplift rather than that they are the major movements and that the vertical movements are incidental. In prac- tically all cases where a horizontal movement has been detected in exposed strata, the thickness of the strata involved was small; probably one or two miles is about the maximum thickness of material that has been overthrust for any considerable distance. Usually the thick- ness of material involved in the overthrust is a half mile or less and in some cases only a few hundred feet. It is difficult to see how a thin veneer of stratified rock could be moved horizontally for the many miles that some have estimated the movement to be. The moving “MARCH 4, 1927 BOW1E: ISOSTASY IN GEOPHYSICS AND GEOLOGY 115 material must overcome frictional and shearing resistances and if the uplift is due to the action of regional forces the overthrust material must be pushed uphill for it is in this direction that the movement would occur according to the collapse hypothesis. On the collapse hypothesis the crust that is weak enough to be dis- torted by the action of horizontal forces carried through long distances must be strong enough to push up a mountain system and to force down into subcrustal space sufficient material to form a root that will support the mass which is above sea level. ‘These horizontal forces, presumably, would be acting through the whole crust rather than merely in the outer layers. IJ cannot conceive of blocks of material a mile or two in thickness being pushed overland distances of 10, 20 or more miles as seems to be required to explain certain cases of over- thrusting. Of course, it is difficult to explain an overthrust of 50 miles on any hypothesis and the isostatist has little or nothing to sug- gest, except that the field evidence regarding the overthrusting and the extent of horizontal movements in general may have been somewhat misinterpreted. One is likely to seein data those things which support the views that are considered authentic. It is my belief that as much evidence, probably more, could be collected in the field in favor of the vertical uplift theory as may be obtained in support of the view that the horizontal movement is the predominating one. It is probable that the direction of the overthrust and of much of the horizontal movement of material is from the center of the uplifted mass outward towards its edges. If this should be found to be true then the Pratt theory of isostasy would be much strengthened. In Daly’s recent book, The Mobile Earth, he mentions a block of material resting on the plains of Montana many miles to the eastward of the uplifted area from which it came. That is a clear indication that the overthrust was from the uplifted regions towards the low areas to the sides. When the direction of overthrusts has been discovered, we shall be able to make greater progress in the solution of the problem as to how the uplift occurs. A Pratt isostatist naturally leans towards the idea of a very weak crust with expansion and contraction of crustal material as the major causes of surface changes in elevation. A belief in the Pratt isostasy leads one to think that earthquakes are the result of four major proc- esses. Anearthquake is generally accepted as being due to the break- ing of rock. This rock must be within the crustal space for the sub- crustal material is too plastic to break but instead it yields and 116 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 5 conforms to changes without rupture. The crustal material itself must vary somewhat in plasticity as its lower limit is approached. The lower crustal material is under a tremendous load and movement in the lower half of the crust would be somewhat plastic with very little breaking of material. Seismologists have not yet determined with any degree of definiteness the depths at which the earthquakes occur, but the late Prof. Omori of Japan, who was recognized as one of the foremost seismologists of all time, claimed that he had not found any earthquake focus lower than 27 kilometers. I do not know whether his methods of determining the depth were adequate to secure exact- ness but his depths are very acceptable to the Pratt isostasists. The four major causes of earthquakes would seem to be: Ist. The breaking of crustal material caused by the weight of sediments. | 2nd. The breaking of rock as the crustal material is pushed up under an area of erosion to restore the isostatic balance. rd. The breaking of the rocks as the result of the expansion of the crustal material under an area which had previously undergone heavy sedimentation. Ath. The breaking of rock caused by the contraction of crustal material under an area which had previously undergone erosion during an extended time. With the earth’s crust in isostatic equilibrium, it is difficult to see how any material from subcrustal space could work its way through the entire crust and be exuded at the surface as a lava overflow. The pressure exerted by a column of liquid material extending from — the earth’s surface to the bottom of the crust would be enormous, and this pressure would be sufficient to fracture rock and make a lava overflow at some point whose altitude is much iess than the top of a voleano. According to the Pratt theory of isostasy the overflow of lava from a fissure or from a volcano is probably caused by an expan- sion of the crustal material below. No extra mass has been added to the prism of the crust involved. It is merely a case of fluid material from some depth within the crust being raised to the surface, increasing the volume of the prism and decreasing the density. Whatever proc- esses cause the uplift of a mountain system undoubtedly cause the voleano and the lava overflow. It would seem that the earth is gradually losing heat as a result of erosion and sedimentation. As the eroded material is carried away the prism of the crust beneath is forced up to restore the equilibrium. MARCH 4, 1927 BOWIE: ISOSTASY IN GEOPHYSICS AND GEOLOGY 117 Erosion may have occurred to the extent of five or ten miles beforean uplifted area is base leveled. In such a case every element of the crust beneath would have been raised to a position approximately equal to that distance and would have been brought to a region having a much lower temperature than that of the region from which it came. Eventually there would be a loss of heat at the surface and the material of the prism would be cooled down by 100° to 300°C., depending on how far the crustal material had been pushed up. That heat lost would not be compensated by any heat gained in other places. The areas of heavy erosion later become syneclinoria into which sediments are deposited. The sediments accentuate the synclinoria resulting in a pushing down of crustal material into hotter regions. Eventually this material takes on the temperature of its new position, expands to form mountain systems or plateaus and again loses heat at the sur- face. What maintains the heat of the earth no one knows. There have been many theories, including the one now advocated by many that the disintegration of radioactive materials replaces heat in suffi- cient amounts to cause the surface of the earth to remain at a practi- cally constant temperature. Be this as it may, we cannot escape the conclusion that the raising up of crustal material under areas of erosion brings hotter material to the surface with a consequent loss of heat. It is rather difficult to see how a volcano could come into being out in the middle of an ocean but, in general volcanoes are merely a part of a region that is higher than the surrounding bottoms of the ocean. The Hawaiian Islands, for instance, occupy a long stretch extending for some 1200 kilometers while the average width of the pedestal on which the islands rest is of the order of magnitude of 140 kilometers. There must have been light crustal material where the islands now are at the beginning of the sedimentary age and the up- lifts and subsidences of the Hawaiian area have been the result of erosion, sedimentation and to a certain extent of the accumulation of rock from coral growth. It is very difficult to explain a chain of islands out in an ocean without assuming under it crustal material which has been lighter than normal density from the beginning of the sedimentary age. This brief sketch of the relation of isostasy to geological and geo- physical problems is only the skimming of the surface of atremendous problem. It is hoped that much thought and investigation by those interested in the subject will supplement the very meager data which we now possess. 118 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 5 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 407TH MEETING The 407th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club, October 28, 1925, Vice- president HmweEtTT presiding. Program: C.K. WentwortH and HE. T. Apreu: A source-analysis of geologic literature on North America, 1921-22. N. H. Darton: Pre-Paleozoic surface of Arizona and New Mezico. R. S. Bassuer: Mississippian rocks in northern Tennessee. 408TH MEETING The 408th meeting was held in the auditorium of the Interior Building, November 11, 1925, President StmrPpHENSON presiding. The Secretary an- nounced the election to corresponding membership of W. A. NELSON, State Geologist of Virginia. Program: A. H. RepFiELp: Petroleum possibilities of Germany. H. S. Wasuineton: The 1925 eruption of Santorini. H. T. Stearns: The volcanoes of Japan in 1924. In Japan and the islands nearby there are 74 active volcanoes which are aligned in narrow curved zones forming arcs that follow closely the crests of a series of great folds in the crust of the earth. It is generally supposed that the magma supplying the vol- canoes exists in rifts or fissures that coincide largely with the axes of the folds. The chief voleanic zones are as follows: the Kurile, the Nasu, the Kampu, the Fuji, the Hakusan, the Aso, and the Kirishima zones. The Kurile zone comprises a line of small volcanic islands which extends from Kamchatka to Volcano Bay on the southern side of the island of Hok- kaido. Three eruptions on this zone during 1924 were recorded by a steamer. On February 15, 1924, a huge cauliflower cloud was seen rising from a volcano on Raikokejima, and at the same time two submarine eruptions occurred not far from Matau Island. } The Nasu zone extends from the islands a few miles north of Hokkaido through Volcano Bay to Fujiyama. During 1924 there were gaseous emana- tions sometimes accompanied by light ash falls from the crater of Asamayama on this zone. Parallel with and west of the Nasu zone is the Kampu zone. No volcanoes on this zone were in eruption during 1924. The Fuji zone extends south from Fujiyama to the Bonin Islands. A small cinder cone in the center of the crater of Mihara, the central cone of the voleano Oshima located in the Bay of Tokyo, emitted huge volumes of steam during the writer’s visit on December 16, 1924. At the same time heavy blue fumes were being discharged with a hissing sound at a high tem- perature. No glow from molten lava was visible in the daylight. The lava flow on the floor of the crater had not entirely cooled for heat rose from many cracks in its surface. The Hakusan zone extends from Kyushu along the nortbern side of Hondo, the mainland of Japan. On January 23, 1925, Shiranesan (Kusatsu) located on this zone, emitted a huge volume of smoke and on the 24th, a heavy explosion occurred with loud rumblings, and ash fell over the surrounding area. MARCH 4, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 119 Aso-dake, on the Aso zone, which crosses Kyushu from northeast to south- west, had one explosion on January 9, 1924. On January 6, 1925, it again ejected ashes which caused damage to the farms at its base. The Kirishima zone extends from Kirishima southwestward toward Formosa. Sakurajima was in repose during the writer’s visit in 1924, although it was reported that a fumerole in the summit crater occasionally sent up a column of white steam. Kirishima volcano was not active during 1924, although on December 21, 1924, a hot fumerole inside of a small cone existed on the southeast wall of the summit crater. (Auwthor’s abstract.) JOINT MEETING A joint meeting of the Society and the WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES was held at the Cosmos Club, November 19, 1925, President KrLLoaa of the ACADEMY presiding. Program: Professor Witut1aAm H. Hopsss, of the University of Michigan: The glacial anticyclones—the poles of the atmospheric circulation. 409TH MEETING The 409th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club, November 25, 1925, President STEPHENSON presiding. The Secretary announced the death of J. K. Hinumrs, a founder and active member of the Society, the resignation of L. B. Pusry from active membership, and the election to active member- ship of E. R. Pout, GeorcrE TunELL, T. B. Notan, H. W. Hoots, and P. G. Nurtrina. Program: C. KE. Resspr: Human and geographic aspects of the 1925 Smith- sonian-Princeton Expedition to Europe. E. O. Unricu: Huropean Paleozoic stratigraphy and stratigraphers. 410TH MEETING The 410th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club, December 9, 1925, President STEPHENSON presiding. Vice-president Hewett took the chair during the presentation of the address of the retiring president. This address, entitled ‘‘Major features in the geology of the ‘‘Atlantic and Gulf Coastal Plain,” was printed in This JouRNAL (vol. 16, pp. 460-480). THIRTY-THIRD ANNUAL MEETING The thirty-third annual meeting was held at the Cosmos Club after the adjournment of the 410th meeting, President STEPHENSON presiding. The annual report of the secretaries was read and approved. The Treas- urer presented his annual report showing an excess of assets over liabilities of $1,137.49 (book value) on December 9, 1925. The auditing committee reported that the books of the Treasurer were correct. The Amendment to the Standing Rules restoring dues of active members to $2.00 was unani- mously carried. The Society accepted, upon recommendation of the Council, the anonymous offer, through Kirk Bryan, of three prizes of $10 each for excellence of presentation of papers during 1926. The results of balloting for officers for the ensuing year was as follows: President: N. H. Darton; Vice-Presidents: W. T. Lnn, Cuarues Butts; Treasurer: J. B. Reesipe, JR.; Secretaries: J. D. Sears, W. P. Wooprine; Members-at-Large-of-the-Council: B. S. Buturr, 8. R. Capps, G. R. MAns- FIELD, O. KE. Mernzier, C. N. FENNER; Nominee as Vice-President of Wash- ington Academy of Sciences representing the Geological Society: L. W. STEPHENSON. 120 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 5 411TH MEETING The 411th meeting was held in the auditorium of the Interior Building, January 13, 1926, President Darton presiding. Program: W. W. Rusny: Stream piracy in northeastern Wyoming. Ex- treme northeastern Wyoming is drained by the Little Powder, Little Missouri, and Belle Fourche rivers. Little Missouri River, the central of the three, has the lowest gradient and field evidence indicates it has been and will be robbed by both the neighboring streams. The ancient capture of the headwaters of the Little Missouri by the Belle Fourche River at Stoneville Flats is well known. Old terraces and topographic relations seem to show that a tribu- tary of Little Missouri River formerly flowed northwestward along the present course of Belle Fourche River between Stoneville Flats and Belle Fourche, 8. Dak. This capture is attributed chiefly to foreshortening of the Cheyenne River asa result of the advance of Pleistocene glaciation, although the diversion of the lower Little Missouri River by an ice sheet had a slight additional effect. Field evidence indicates that the resulting rejuvenation worked slowly upstream and that the capture may have occurred at about the end of the Pleistocene. Tributaries of Belle Fourche River will eventually divert the remaining headwaters of Little Missouri River. The lithology of old gravels, the present stream gradient, and the land forms near the head of Belle Fourche River, and the sharp bend and terraces of Powder River suggest that the present Belle Fourche River formerly rose in the Big Horn Mountains, but was beheaded near Pumpkin Buttes by Powder River. This capture, which possibly occurred at the beginning of the Pleistocene, may be the result of greater precipitation in the Powder- Yellowstone drainage system than in the ancient Little Missouri system. Little Powder River is preparing to behead the Little Missouri and perhaps the Belle Fourche River. The latter case of incipient piracy may be a read- justment following the capture at Stoneville Flats. (Author’s abstract.) Krr« Bryan: The ‘Palouse soil’ problem of the Columbia Plateau, Wash- ington. One of the conspicuous features of the Columbia Plateau is the mantle of soil which blankets the surface of the underlying rocks. The fine- grained unconsolidated material is in places 100 to 150 feet thick, and it is intimately dissected into hills by miniature ramifying valleys. Since this material is everywhere of about the same thickness and conforms to the gen- eral slope of the plateau, it is a natural assumption that it once formed a continuous cover and has since been dissected. With the assistance of a number of colleagues, somewhat scattered information about this so-called soil has been brought together and an analysis of the origin and age of the material made. In general the upper 3 to 6 feet of the material is a top skin or veneer that throughout the plateau is largely wind-borne. It rests on various sorts of material and the underlying mass that forms the inner core of the hills is generally unexposed and unknown. At various places there has been identified (1) laminated silt; (2) reddish compact silt with limy con- cretions, apparently an old loess; (3) yellow clay that microscopic examination shows to be an old loess; (4) ancient glacial till. In places in the eastern part of the plateau the yellow clay, or old loess rests on thin decomposed basalt but in the western part of the plateau the more sandy mass rests on nearly fresh basalt. Here below the general level there is a terrace covered by similar wind-borne soil in which the bones of an elephant were found. On this account, and in view of the association of the material with glacial till it is evident that the ‘“‘Palouse soil” is of Pleistocene age. MARCH 4, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 121 A review of the known facts in regard to present dust storms indicates that these remarkable meteorological phenomena have been in operation only for the past few decades since the grass cover of the plateau was broken by ploughing. If the present rate of fall of dust as estimated for Spokane had been in operation since Wisconsin time there would be 16 inches of dust on the Wisconsin terrace whereas this terrace is free of dust. Similarly the pre- Wisconsin till plains and terraces (Spokane glaciation of Bretz) are almost free of dust. A still older till has a cover of 16 inches to 3 feet of loess and in other places the cover on the ancient tillmay be greater. Therefore, the time of formation of main loess (“‘Palouse soil’) seems to be far back in Pleisto- cene time. (Author’s abstract.) LAURENCE LAForGE: The recognition of peneplains. 412TH MEETING The 412th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club, January 27, 1926, Presi- dent Darton presiding. The Secretary announced the resignation from active membership of Miss Lucy M. Jonzs. Program: W. T. ScHALLER: The mineralogy of the Tintic Standard mine, Utah. The oxidation of silver-rich galena, silver-rich tetrahedrite, pyrite, and other sulphides, has yielded a number of unusual and rare minerals chiefly sulphates. Among these may be mentioned kornelite, ferropallidite, plumbojarosite, and argentojarosite. The plumbojarosite has formed, in part, directly from cerussite, but no evidence was seen that the argento- jarosite had formed in any way but by the commingling of sulphate solutions of silver and iron. Some galena, partly oxidized to anglesite, forms a eutectic-like structure with it. Chains of orthorhombic sulphur crystals (similar to artificial ones) suggest paramorphism from earlier higher tempera- ture monoclinic crystals. Rectangular casts suggest the one time presence ofanhydrite. Most of the minerals mentioned probably formed from rather hot solutions. (Author’s abstract.) H. G. Fercuson: Regional relations of Nevada ore deposits: The two-fold division of Nevada ore deposits into those formed at depth associated with granitic intrusive and those formed near the surface in connection with Tertiary volcanics has long been recognized. Evidence is accumulating - suggesting that each of these groups should be again divided. The great Sierra batholith intruded at about the close of the Jurassic carries on its western flank satellitic batholiths with which are associated the quartz veins which have yielded the great California gold production. On the eastern flank the geologic conditions are similar but the veins accompanying the satellitic batholiths, though similar in appearance and mineralogy to those of California, have yielded no important gold production. Owing to favorable climatic conditions, however, these western Nevada veins have under- gone secondary enrichment in silver, and it was from these rich secondary ores that the great silver production of such camps as Austin and Belmont was obtained. These were for the most part exhausted many years ago. Replacement and contact deposits are relatively rare. The Sierra region yields a very small percentage of the country’s production of base metals, chiefly copper. A very different condition prevails in the interior region. Here intrusions of Eocene age have associated with them deposits, chiefly of the replacement type, valuable chiefly for base metals, and the vein type of deposit though present is not predominant. 122 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 5 The line of division between the two prevailing types seems to pass through the middle of Nevada. To the west the deposits are mostly of the vein type, rich in silver near the outcrop but disappointing in depth. In the eastern part of the State on the other hand the rich secondary silver ore at the out- crop in many places passed in depth to workable lead-silver ore. The in- ference is drawn that the Western Nevada veins deposits allied with the Sierra batholith were formed at about the close of the Jurassic, whereas those in the eastern part of the State, showing strong affinities with the Rocky Mountain type, should be tentatively placed in the Eocene. This is not in accord with Lindgren’s suggestion that the locus of the Cordilleran intrusions moved gradually eastward but implies two distinct and widely separated periods of batholithic intrusion. The proposed division of the near-surface deposits is based largely on work in the region of the Tonopah and Hawthorne degree sheets. Here certain deposits such as those of Tonopah and Aurora are associated with lavas of pre-Esmeralda age, that is, older than the upper Miocene. Man- hattan, Round Mountain, Goldfield, Bodie, and a number of less important deposits are definitely post-Esmeralda in age. The deposits of the Tonopah- Aurora type are so widespread over Nevada that it is surmised that this was the major period of late Tertiary mineralization. The characteristic features are strong veins, the presence of primary argentite and commonly other silver minerals, free gold heavily alloyed with silver, usually about equal parts by weight, and often fairly abundant base metal sulphides. Although many of these are properly gold camps if value of output is considered, in all cases the weight of silver produced greatly exceeds that of the gold. This type is widespread; it is well represented in Mexico, New Zealand, and the East Indies and has been called the Pacific type of ore deposit. Of the relatively few deposits with predominant gold, Bodie, Goldfield, Manhattan, and Round Mountain are known to be of post-Esmeralda age, and it is inferred that further work may place the others there also. These deposits do not form as distinct a class as the pre-Esmeralda group. In most of the less important and also Round Mountain, Bullfrog, Oatman, and part of the Manhattan district, free gold is the only important metallic mineral, the amount of sulphides being very small and barren. In Goldfield, and part of the Man- hattan district, however, complex mineral associations prevail. Commonly, the veins are less persistent and less well defined than those of the earlier type. Primary bonanzas of great richness may occur, but the productive depth is on the average less than in the pre-Esmeralda silver deposits. | Although it will be many years before the succession of lavas throughout the Great Basin is well enough known to speak with any certainty, the available evidence points to a widespread mineralization prior to the Upper Miocene. This is allied in type and therefore possibly in age with deposits in all regions bordering the Pacific. The post-Miocene deposits are of different character and possibly only of local importance. It appears, therefore, that there have been four distinct periods of major mineralization in Nevada. The first is closely allied to the Sierra gold type, but unfortunately deficient in gold, of post-Jurassic age, and prevails in the western part. The second which might be called the Rocky Mountain type, prevails in the eastern part of the state, and is probably of Eocene age. Mineralization of probable Miocene age with predominant silver was widespread, while a later period probably early Phocene, has yielded nelabatrely few deposits of importance. (A uthor’s abstract.) . - MARCH 4, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 123 W.G. ALDEN: The Gros Ventre landslide of June, 1925. On June 23, 1925, there occurred in the valley of Gros Ventre River, about 35 miles south of Yellowstone Park and near the east side of Jackson Hole, Wyo., a landslide which carried down from the adjacent slope and deposited in the valley many million cubic yards of rock debris. This slide, which occurred within a space of a few minutes, formed a dam about 225 feet high and half a mile long, which completely blocked the river and so impounded the water as to form a lake 4 or 5 miles long, with a maximum width of about three-quarters of a mile. This lake submerged much of three private ranches and one ranger station of the Teton National Forest, and has created a situation more or less perilous to ranches and villages all the way down the Gros Ventre and Snake River valleys. This appears to have had no connection with the Montana earthquake which occurred four days later. The Gros Ventre valley in this part is cut several thousand feet into upturned Cretaceous, Jurassic, and Triassic rocks. The slide occurred at the heavily wooded north end of the long north spur of Sheep Mountain, one of the northern peaks of the Gros Ventre Range. It was probably due to the saturation of clay shale inter- bedded with the Carboniferous limestones and sandstones as the result of heavy rains and melting snows. The strata at this place, on the south side, dip into the valley at angles of 18 to 21 degrees, and the movement was obliquely down the dip. The upper end of the slide is at the top of the slope about 13 miles south of the river and 1700 to 2200 feet above it. The front of the great mass of rock debris and forest trees plunged across the half-mile- wide valley bottom and piled up 400 feet high against the red sandstone cliff on the north, then settled back somewhat. The flooded stream rapidly filled the basin thus formed and in about three weeks the water rose 220 feet back of the dam. It is estimated that about 150,000 acre feet of water was impounded over 2000 acres of land. As the inflow decreased, seepage began and increased to 400 or 500 second feet, so that the dam was not overtopped. It was reported late in January, 1926, that no particular change in conditions had taken place up to that time. The great point of interest is as to what will occur next spring, inasmuch as it seems certain that the dam must be over- topped if there is any such spring flood as occurred in 1918 when the flow at Kelly, four miles below the site of the dam, reached a peak of 6000 second feet and averaged 4000 second feet for two weeks. (Author’s abstract.) 413TH MEETING The 413th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club, February 10, 1926, Vice-president LEE presiding. Program: R. T. Evans: Erosion forms in Zion National Park, Utah. W. T. Len: Some scientific aspects of the Mammoth Cave region, Kentucky. 414TH MEETING The 414th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club, February 24, 1926, President Darton presiding. The Secretary announced the election to active membership of PaRKINSON PoPiINokr and Miss TaisiaA STADNICHENKO. W. T. SCHALLER was awarded by ballot the prize of $10 for excellency in presentation of papers during the first third of 1926. Program: H. W. Hoots: Geologic features of the southern end of the San Joaquin Valley, California. The San Emigdio Mountains lie at the southern end of the San Joaquin Valley. They trend in an east-west direction and, 124 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 5 together with the Tehachapi Mountains farther east, form that elevated area which connects the southern end of the Sierra Nevada range with the Coast Ranges. The geologic character of the San Emigdio Mountains, broadly considered, is intermediate between that of the Sierra Nevada range and that of the eastern Coast Ranges of this region in that it has a central mass of granodiorite which connects with the Sierra Nevada, and a northern foothill belt of highly disturbed Tertiary sediments which broadens progressively westward. The San Andreas fault lies south of the San Emigdio Mountains, trends 8 80° E, and separates the granodiorite from a much folded and faulted mass of Tertiary strata. Approximately 24,000 feet of Tertiary and Quater- nary sediments, ranging in age from Eocene to late Pleistocene, lies north of the granodiorite. These rocks, consisting of massive sandstone and con- glomerate, soft shale, volcanics, and coarse fanglomerate are folded into pronounced anticlines and synclines with east-west trend and are broken by many faults. All major folds, without exception, have their north-dipping limbs the steeper with inclinations of 45°-60° in contrast to south-dipping limbs of 20°-380°. The major faults, one of which appears to be an overthrust of low angle south dip, also trend east-west, approximately parallel to the San Andreas fault farther south, and have stratigraphic displacements as great as 5,000 feet; minor faults, apparently with vertical planes, trend either northeastward or northwestward. It is considered likely that these struc- tural features have resulted from northward thrusts from the south during late Tertiary and Quaternary time similar in effect to those which, during the earthquake of 1906, produced relatively northward movement of the fault- block west of the San Andreas rift. That movement of this western fault- block has actually been northward during the past 30-40 years is attested by recent resurveys of the Coast Ranges by the U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey. Wheeler Ridge, the topographic expression of one of the most prominent east- west trending asymmetrical anticlines, lies at the northern edge of the foothills directly in front of the major fault which appears to be of low-angle overthrust | type. Study of its structural details and probable origin leads one to believe that it has been subjected to thrusts from the south since the anticline, developed in late Pliocene and Pleistocene strata, was formed. In conclu- sion, the stratigraphy, pronounced development of solifluction and large earth-flows, and the physiographic history of a part of the foothill region were briefly described. (Author’s abstract.) F. L. Hess: The source and use of cesium. Pollucite is the only known cesium-bearing mineral and it has been found only on the Island of Elba, . where it was discovered and occurs as a mineralogical curiosity. At Buck- field, Maine, it has been found in comparatively large quantity and a few thousand pounds has been mined. The pegmatite which has been mined during the last summer by W. D. Nevel and previously by Perien 8. Dudley, is an almost diagrammatic representation of the theory brought out by the writer! of the gradual growth of pegmatites from fine grained masses to those containing huge individual crystals or masses of single minerals. eeecemnlplied by that is a o h d Nom ed OOo: OG p a a As a numerical example take: ° = 0.6, = 1 meter and va = or d = 106 kilometers approximately; p ae 5,.6 C 138 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 6 we get No Us This displacement is of the right order of magnitude to explain the irregularities in the variation of latitude, though in most cases several times larger than would be needed. The average shrinking or swelling postulated by Brown to explain the motion of the moon varies from a few inches, when the expansion and contraction extends to the center of the earth, up to 12 feet when it goes down only to the depth of isostatic compensation, as in the example above.® In view of the diversity of the earth’s sur- face there is no difficulty in imagining an irregularity of less than a meter in an average shrinking or swelling of twelve feet. The difficulty with the hypothesis—other than the primal one of finding a cause for the shrinking and swelling—lies in the matter of sea level.? A uniform expansion or contraction would cause merely a very slight lowering or raising of sea level due to the increased or decreased area of the ocean basins, but an irregular expansion or contraction of an amount necessary to account for irregularities in the variation of latitude would cause oscillations of sea level that would be well within the limits of observation, that would in fact almost force themselves on one’s attention. A change in level due to the addition or removal of a layer of matter would be largely masked by the rise or fall in sea level due to the attraction of the layer and the change in level produced by the dis- placement of the pole, but this is not true of the change in radius produced by mere shrinking and swelling down to a moderate depth. Such changes in radius may be considered as isostatically compensated and as having therefore very little effect on sea level. ) The suggestion!* has been made that a not unreasonable change in the volume of the circumpolar ice sheets" might effect a change in 8 Correspondence with Prof. Brown develops the fact that he had in mind a dif- ferent mode of expansion, namely, expansion in a thin layer just below the outer crust so as to push un the latter without altering its density. For a given elevation or de- pression of the surface an expansion of the type intended by Brown would be twice as effective in altering the moments and products of inertia as the type here treated. 9 Dr. William Bowie called my attention to this. 10 This suggestion was communicated ina personal letter from Dr. Harold Jeffreys of St. John’s College, Cambridge, who attributes it to Prof. J. W. Evans. Jeffreys is to discuss it briefly in an early issue of The Observatory. 11 There are known to be gradual increases and decreases in these due toslight climatic fluctuations of obscure origin. It would be very interesting to make a quantitative study if all the material were available. - MARCH 19, 1927 LAMBERT: VARIATION OF LATITUDE AND MOTION OF MOON 139 — [j- the moment of inertia of the earth sufficient to cause the irregularities in its rotation that are reflected in the apparent errors in the lunar tables. The effect of an increase in the ice sheets would probably be to decrease the moment of inertia by lowering the level all over the ocean surface, which lies mostly in latitudes where the lowering would affect the moment of inertia more than in the high latitudes of the ice sheets. On account of the lack of symmetry of the configuration of the continents and oceans a withdrawal of water from the ocean or an addition of water to it would produce an effect on the position of the earth’s axis of figure. The quadratures made by Darwin and Turner” for a different purpose may be used for evaluating the effect. If enough circumpolar ice were melted to raise the ocean level one meter, the pole would be shifted by 0”. 22, which is several times as much as is needed to explain most of the irregular variation of lati- tude. The direction of displacement is such that the north pole | would move southward along the meridian of 59° East of Greenwich. The moment of inertia with regard to the axis of rotation would be increased by about one part in ten million. This again is a quantity several times as large as the largest change needed by Brown to explain the irregularities of the moon. These figures are on the supposition that there is no yielding of the solid portion of the earth under the load of water. On account of elastic yielding they are subject to a slight diminution, especially those for the variation of latitude, which would be reduced to perhaps four-fifths of the amount given, the direction of the polar displacement being unchanged. Y Prof. Evans’ explanation of the lunar puzzle thus fits the latitude laa puzzle also in regard to the order of magnitude of the quantities involved. The amount of water required to be added or withdrawn, that is, say 10 to 30 centimeters, does not seem wildly unreasonable, though larger than can be readily granted. The explanation is probably therefore only a partial one. The apparent tendency, previously noted for the irregularities in the motion of the moon and in the displacement of the pole to occur simultaneously is an indication at least that the phenomena are related and that the cause of the lunar irregularities is chiefly terres- trial. The alternate release and storage of water in the polar ice caps occurring in the slow oscillations of irregular climatic cycles may be an important element of both phenomena. * On the Correction to the Equilibrium Theory of Tides for the Continents. Pro- ceedings Royal Society of London, 40: 303. 1886, or Darwin’s Scientific Papers, 1: 328. 140 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 6 BOTAN Y.—Two new grasses, Psammochloa mongolica from Mongolia and Orthachne breviseta from Chile. A. 8S. HrrcHcocx, Bureau of Plant Industry. Recently a package of grasses was received from Dr. E. D. Merrill, comprising the grass part of the collections of Mr. R. W. Chaney on the Third Asiatic Expedition of the American Museum of Natural History. Several interesting species were found, one of which appears to be new and to constitute a new genus. Psammochloa Hitche., gen. nov. Spikelets 1-flowered, the rachilla articulating above the glumes, not pro- longed behind the palea; glumes about equal; lemma narrow, about as long as the glumes, membranaceous, villous, awned from between 2 minute blunt lobes, the awn deciduous; palea narrow, villous, as long as the lemma and not inclosed in it; anthers large, minutely pointed, bearing a few short stiff hairs.— A stout perennial rhizomatous grass with long narrow compound panicles. The genus differs from Stipa in the membranaceous lemma without a strong callus, in the weak deciduous awn and in the equal palea not inclosed. The pilose-tipped anthers show a relationship to : Stipa through the section Lasiagrostis. In as- | pect it resembles Calamovilfa but the callus is | aN je \ not bearded. Psammochloa mongolica Hitchc., sp. nov. Culms 1 to 1.5 meters tall, erect, glabrous, from strong rhizomes; sheaths glabrous; ligule thin, about 1 cm. long; blades firm, glabrous, flat or soon involute, elongate, strongly nerved on the upper surface, 5 to 10 mm. wide, ex- a ass <== row, erect, pale and shining, the branches ascending or appressed, only slightly scabrous; \\RY/ \ tending into a long fine involute point; panicle ‘i 1 one-third to half the height of the plant, nar- LEZ LEE A scaberulous pedicels; glumes equal, narrow, acute, weakly nerved, puberulent; lemma about as long as the glumes, narrow, villous, the awn weak, straight or somewhat flexuous, 8 to 10 mm. long, early deciduous; palea narrow, as long as the lemma, villous, not inclosed at Fig. 1.—Spikelet and floret maturity. k of Psammochloa mongolica, Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 5 dia.: anther tip X10 dia, 1,296,544, collected at Tsagan Nor, Outer Mongolia, on dunes at 1000 meters altitude, in 1925, by R. W. Chaney (no. 502) on the Third Asiatic Expedition of the American Museum of Natural History. A second specimen was collected at Gatun Bologai, on dunes, Chaney 443. 1 Received January 18, 1927. spikelets about 1 cm. long, longer than the MARCH 19, 1927 HITCHCOCK: NEW GRASSES 141 In 1847 Hooker published a new species of Muhlenbergia (M. rariflora Hook. f.2 from Cape Tres Montes, southern Chile, where it was collected by Darwin. Later this species was independently described by Steudel under a new genus, Orthachne (O. retorta. Nees in Steud.)? and based on the same collection cited above. Miss D. K. Hughes (now Mrs. Wilson Popenoe) established the identity of the two species and took up the earlier specific name as Orthachne rariflora (Hook f.) Hughes.‘ In a recent collection of Chile plants made by Dr. E. Werdermann, received from the Gray Herbarium of Harvard University, there was a new species which appears to be congeneric with the one mentioned above. Orthachne differs from Stipa in the membranous texture of the lemma which does not inclose the palea. As Miss Hughes points out* Orthachne differs from the allied Streptachne R. Br. of Australia in having the palea equal to the lemma instead of much smaller and in having a joint at the base of the awn. ‘The new species described below has the faintly 1-nerved ovate-lanceolate glumes, the equal palea, and the habit of Orthachne (the glumes are narrow and the first is 3-nerved in Streptachne), but the awn is con- tinuous with the lemma (not jointed). It differs from both Streptachne and the original species of Orthachne in the pilose midnerve and margins of the lemma. It seems to be more closely allied to Fig. 2.—Glumes, Orthachne than to the Australian Streptachne, hence Bae es is included in the former. Orthachne breviseta »x 5 dia. differs from O. rariflora in the short curved awn (instead of 2 to 3 cm. long and very flexuous), the continuous (not jointed) awn, and the pilose lemma. Certain one-awned species of Aristida have been erroneously referred to Orthachne and Streptachne. Orthachne breviseta Hitchc., sp. nov. Perennial in dense tufts; culms erect or ascending, slender, glabrous, 15 to. 30 em. tall, having a single node near the base; leaves in a dense basal cluster; sheaths glabrous; ligules firm, obtuse, 1 to 2 mm. long; blades closely involute, glabrous, 0.3 to 0.4 mm. in diameter, sharp-pointed, somewhat curved or tlexuous, 3 to 5 cm. long, the single culm blade below the middle, 1 to 1.5 cm. 2 Bot. Antarct. Voy. 371. pl. 131. 1847. SSymne Pl hme OT 854 * Kew Bull. Misc. Inf. 1923: 301. 1923. 142 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 6 long; panicles rather loose, 3 to 5 cm. long, somewhat nodding, the branches slender, glabrous, ascending, rather lax, 1 or 2 at a place, the lower as much as 2 cm. long; spikelets few, longer or shorter than the ultimate pedicels; glumes nearly equal, ovate-lanceolate, acute, 3 to 4 mm. long, glabrous, nerveless, the lower half purple, the upper half hyaline; lemma nearly terete, purple, about 4 mm. long, five-nerved, the intermediate pair of nerves very obscure, hairy between the lateral nerves and the margin, the midnerve densely short- pilose on the lower three-fourths, the callus short, acutish, densely short- pilose, the apex of the lemma gradually narrowed into a stout, scaberulous, curved, untwisted awn, 3 to 4 mm. long, the sides of the lemma extending upward as two short slender teeth at the base of the awn; palea acute, as long as the lemma and not inclosed in it, pilose between the 2 faint adjacent nerves. Type in the Gray Herbarium of Harvard University, collected on Volean Yates, Province of Llanquihue, Chile, alt. 1300 meters, March, 1925, by E. Werdermann (no. 669). The type is the only specimen seen. BOTANY.—WNew grasses from Panama.1 AGNES CHASE, Bureau of Plant Industry. In preparing manuscript on the grasses for the forthcoming Flora of the Panama Canal Zone, it is necessary to use names of new species that have been in manuscript for some time awaiting the completion of revisions of genera. ‘The proposed Flora will not contain descrip- tions, for which reason the new species from the Canal Zone and immediate vicinity are described here. Two new combinations are also made. Thrasya Hitchcockii Chase, sp. nov. A tufted perennial; culms rather slender, about 70 cm. tall, ascending, simple except for axillary leafless long-peduncled racemes, very flat, sparsely pilose; nodes constricted, the lower short-pubescent; sheaths keeled, pilose, especially at the summit and along the margin, or the uppermost nearly glabrous; ligule firm-membranaceous, about 1 mm. long; blades 15 to 30 cm. long, 5 to 6 mm. wide in the middle (the uppermost reduced or obsolete) © tapering to both ends, rather firm, finely pubescent on both surfaces and coarsely pilose, at least at the base and along the margins, as well, the pale midnerve prominent beneath; inflorescence terminal and axillary, the solitary arcuate racemes 10 to 20 em. long, on long very slender angled pilose pe- duncles, 2 or 3 peduncles from the uppermost sheath; rachis 2 mm. wide, the narrow membranaceous margins upturned, glabrous, or with a very few long hairs on the edge; spikelets subsessile, spreading about 45°, somewhat crowded, oblong-elliptic, turgid, 3.5 mm. long, 1.8 mm. wide; first glume minute or obsolete; second glume slightly shorter than the sterile lemma, faintly 5- nerved, pilose on the upper third and along the margins; sterile lemma sub- acute, deeply sulcate, shghtly indurate, but thinner down the center and prob- 1 Received January 25, 1927. - MARCH 19, 1927 CHASE: NEW GRASSES 143 ably splitting at maturity, faintly 5-nerved, the first lateral pair of nerves: minutely crested at the apex, pilose along the margin near the summit, the. sterile palea as long as its lemma, thin with firm nerves, subtending a rudi-. mentary staminate flower; fruit elliptic, subacute, 3 mm. long, 1.5 mm. wide, the lemma and palea indurate, papillose-roughened, the lemma with a few stiff erect hairs at the apex. Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium no. 1,269,446, collected at the edge of a copse, on a hill, Chorrera, Province of Panama, September 16, 1911, by A. 8. Hitchcock (no. 8140). This species is intermediate between the two groups of Thrasya, the ex- tremely specialized T. petrosa (Trin.) Chase and its allies and 7. cultrata (Trin.) Chase and 7’. campylostachya (Hack.) Chase, which resemble Pas- palum pilosum Lam. Axonopus centralis Chase, sp. nov. Perennial in large bunches; culms erect to stiffly spreading, simple except for the axillary inflorescence, 40 to 90 cm. tall, leafy throughout, compressed, glabrous; nodes glabrous; sheaths keeled, striate, hyaline-margined, usually pubescent on the overlapping edge, at least toward the summit, appressed- pubescent on the sides of the collar; hgule minute, firm, fimbriate; blades folded and keeled at base, flat above, rather lax, 15 to 50 cm. long, 8 to 10 mm. wide, rather strongly nerved, very sparsely pubescent on the upper surface, glabrous beneath, ciliate on the margin toward the base; inflorescence terminal and axillary, finally long-exserted on very slender striate peduncles, the terminal of 3 to 6 racemes, the axillary of 2 or 3, the upper 2 or 3 approxi- mate, the lower remote, the common axis 1 to 6 em. long; racemes 8 to 15 em. long, lax, ascending or spreading, the slender rachis glabrous, minutely scaberulous on the angles; spikelets subsessile, mostly rather distant, oblong, 3 mm. long, 0.7 mm. wide, the glume and sterile lemma equal, extending one- third their length beyond the fruit, 3 nerved (rarely a faint outer pair in addition) or the midnerve commonly suppressed in the sterile lemma or in both, the lateral nerves of the glume extending into minute scabrous teeth at the apex, the internerves bearing a band of silky pubescence; fruit 2 mm. long, 0.7 mm. wide, oblong-elliptic, pale-stramineous. This species is related to Azonopus leptostachys (Humb. & Bonpl.) Hitchce., from which it differs in its smaller size, fewer and much shorter racemes, and in the minutely dentate apex of the spikelet. This character has not been observed in any other species of the genus. Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 928831, collected in open grass- land between Culebra and Pedro Miguel, Canal Zone, August 28, 1911, by A. 8. Hitchcock (no. 7928). ) Other specimens of this species..are: Panama: Between Culebra and Pedro Miguel, Hitchcock 7928. Ancon, Hitchcock 19891. ‘Taboga Island, Hitchcock 8077. NicesRAGuA: Jinotepe, Hitchcock 8716. Axonop us ater Chase, Sp. Nov. A densely tufted perennial; culms ascending, simple except for the axillary inflorescence, 40 to 50 cm, tall, leafy at the base, compressed, glabrous; nodes appressed-pubescent ; sheaths much shorter than the internodes, keeled, the margins stiffly ciliate; ligule minute, fimbriate; blades folded throughout, 144 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 6 keeled, rather stiff, 4 to 15 cm. long, 4 to 5 mm. wide (opened out), obtuse and scabrous at the apex, sparsely papillose-ciliate on the margin; inflorescence dark purplish brown throughout, terminal and axillary, long-exserted on very slender peduncles, the terminal of 2 to 5, the axillary of 2 racemes, 2 or 3 digitate, the others 5 to 12 mm. below; racemes 4 to 6 em. long, widely spreading, the center angle of the slender rachis sharply raised; spikelets subsessile, not crowded, oblong-elliptic, 1.7 to 1.8 mm. long, 0.7 mm. wide, the glume and sterile lemma equal, covering the fruit but not exceeding it, strongly 2-nerved, the midnerves suppressed, blotched with blackish purple, glabrous or the glume very obscurely pubescent at base; fruit about the size and shape of the spikelet, pale stramineous, minutely papillose-striate, the lemma with a very minute tuft of hairs at the apex. — Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 1,259,877 collected on moist clay on side of cut along railroad, Gatun, Canal Zone, September 2, 1911 by A. 8. Hitchcock (no. 7976). This species belongs in the group that includes Axonopus Purpusii (Mez) Chase (Paspalum Purpusit Mez?) differing from the North American forms in the smaller, glabrous blackish spikelets, and from the few South American species of this group having glabrous spikelets in the smaller blackish spikelets with two-nerved glume and sterile lemma. Paspalum subciliatum Chase, sp. nov. A tufted perennial; culms erect and crowded from a short horizontal rhizome, eae nif the innovations short and subglobose, re- ji My a sembling bulblets at the base of flowering EN 4 culms; culms simple, 15 to 45 em. tall, slender, compressed, striate, glabrous, leafy : below; sheaths striate, glabrous or with a Fig. 1.—Paspalum subciliatum, few hairs on the margins at the summit, inflorescence, natural size; spike- the lower mostly short and crowded, the let and fruit, X 10. upper one elongate and bladeless; ligule cili- ate, about 0.5mm. long; blades erect, folded at base and slightly wider than the sheath, flat above, drying more or less involute, with attenuate tip, 10 to 20 cm. long, 2 to 3 mm. wide (or occasional lower ones 5 to 8 em. long and 5 mm. wide), jong-pilose on the upper surface toward the base, otherwise glabrous; inflorescence long-exserted, with a dense tuft of short white hairs at base; racemes 2, conjugate (rarely a third below), narrowly ascending to spreading, 3 to 6.5 cm. long, one usually a little longer and naked at the very base; rachis slender, flexuous, glabrous, purplish; spikelets grayish green, solitary, subsessile, scarcely or not at all imbricate, elliptic, subacute 2.2 to 2.4 mm. long, 1.2 to 1.5 mm. wide; glume and sterile Jemma equal, covering the fruit, 3-nerved, the glume minutely pubescent, * Bot. Jahrb. Engler 56: Beibl. 125: 10. 1921. MARCH 19, 1927 CHASE: NEW GRASSES 145 the hairs longer around the margin, the sterile lemma ciliate toward the summit, otherwise glabrous; fruit pale, very minutely papillose striate. Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 734821, collected in a savanna, in the vicinity of Balboa, Canal Zone, September 6, 1911, by A. 8. Hitchcock (no. 8017). Putter 4500, collected in Sabana de Juan Corso, near Chepo, Province of Panama, also belongs to this species. This species belongs to the Notata group, and somewhat resembles P. minus Fourn., from which it differs in the more slender culms, subglobose innovations, narrower blades and especially in the grayish spikelets, pubescent on the glume with a delicate fringe of hairs showing from the flat (sterile- lemma) side. Paspalum centrale Chase, sp. nov. Plants perennial, in small to rather dense and spreading tufts; culms often branching from the lower nodes, sometimes from the middle ones, ascending to spreading, occasionally geniculate and rooting at the lower nodes, 15 to 60 cm. tall. (usually 30 to 45 em.), compressed, ridged, glabrous; nodes glabrous; sheaths rather loose, mostly exceeding the internodes, from sparsely to conspicuously pilose, sometimes glabrous except near the margins, rarely throughout; ligule brown, membranaceous, 2 to 3 mm. long; blades flat, ascending, 5 to 25 em. long, 3 to 10 mm. wide (commonly 10 to 20 em. long and 5 to 7 mm. wide, the uppermost reduced), long-acuminate, about as wide at the base as the summit of the sheath, pilose throughout, often sparsely so or rarely subglabrous on the under surface; racemes 2 to 6, distant about + to 2 their length, or the upper closer, 2 to 7 cm. long, mostly widely spreading, often arcuate, the common axis slender, narrowly winged, rather stiff, sometimes bearing scattered long hairs toward the summits of the internodes, the rachises 1 to 1.8 mm. wide, long-pilose at the base, the hairs sometimes as much as 10 mm. long, hispidulous and sometimes with a few scattered long hairs on the margins and on the midnerve above; spikelets mostly solitary (the secondary one of the pair rudi- mentary, or a few developed in some racemes) slightly or scarcely imbricate, 2 to 2.3 mm. long, 1.7 to 1.8 mm. wide, elliptic obovate, olivaceous to brownish, glabrous; glume and sterile lemma barely or scarcely covering the fruit, rather fragile, 5-nerved, the outer one of the lateral pair sometimes obscure; fertile lemma and palea shining, very min- utely papillose-striate, at first pale turning dark brown. Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 950876, collected in open flat meadow near the coast, La Union, El Salvador, November 13, 1911, by A. S. Hitcheock -(no. 8789). Along ditches and in moist open ground near the coast Salvador to Panama. The following specimens are from the Canal Zone: Panama: Culebra, Hitchcock 7985, 8059. Balboa, Hitchcock 8004, 8005, 8008, Chivi Chivi, Killip 4077. Las Sabanas, Pittier 6817. oS 6 or ~ Z vate \ / Oe i] c ,, lene oS q| I : rh se ¢ eae | | [ | : . | | c \oeeaie (acs HY y ‘ / | j / \ ] CY H/ i) \ 7, NY Fig. 2.—Paspalum centrale, inflorescence, natural size; spikelet and fruit, < 10. 146 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 6 This species is closely related to Paspalum Boscianum Fligge from which it differs in being perennial, not so coarse and less branching in habit, in the pilose foliage, in the relatively slender racemes, with’ narrower rachises and mostly solitary, rather less turgid spikelets. The panicles of depauperate plants of Paspalum Boscianum with solitary spikelets resemble shorter- racemed panicles of P. centrale, but such plants are readily distinguished by the difference in foliage. The spikelets of P. centrale never assume the rust- brown color characteristically (but not constantly) found in those of P. Boscianum. Paspalum Standleyi Chase, sp. nov. A slender tufted perennial, forming leafy mats, the culms spreading, some of them rooting at the lower nodes or creeping: culms 20 to 27 cm. long, slender, compressed, simple or branching at the base, glabrous or sparsely pilose below the nodes; nodes bearded with ascending hairs, the upper sparsely so: leaves aggregate at base, the sheaths keeled, the lower rather broad, papillose-pilose, especially along the midnerve and margin and on the collar, the upper glabrous except on the margin and collar; ligule minute; blades flat, spreading, 3 to 6 cm. long, 3 to 6 mm. wide, rounded at base, sparsely papillose-pilose on the lower sur- face, papillose (or with a few hairs) to glabrous on the upper, the upper blades mostly suppressed; racemes 3 or 4, spreading, 2.2 to 4 cm. long, on a slender glabrous common axis 1 to 1.5 em. long, the axils glabrous or nearly so, the slender rachis dark purplish, glabrous; spikelets solitary on short flat pedicels, scarcely imbricate, narrowly ovate, somewhat unsymmetrical, subacute, depressed- plano-convex, 1.6 mm. long, 0.9 mm. wide, glab- rous, pale or purple-tinged; glume and sterile lemma equal, barely exceeding the fruit, the midnerve suppressed, the marginal nerves strong, the sterile lemma obscurely longitudinally wrinkled in the middle; fruit 1.5 mm. long, 0.7 mm. wide, pale. Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,269,445, collected in marshy thicket, Juan Didz, Province of Panama, January 11, 1924, by Paul C. Standley, no. 30548. This species is allied to Paspalum hyalinum Nees of Brazil, from which it differs in its spreading habit, softer foliage, the blades much shorter and broader, and slightly larger spikelets, the thin glume and sterile lemma not hyaline and tearing in the middle as in P. hyalinum. y/ Fig. 3.—Paspalum Stand- leyi, inflorescence, natural size; spikelet and fruit, X 10. Paspalum acutum Chase, sp. nov. A robust perennial, probably 2 meters or more tall; culms simple, glabrous, leafy to the summit; sheaths overlapping, compressed, striate, pilose on the margin at the summit, otherwise glabrous, the junction with the blade slightly constricted, dark colored; ligule membranaceous, 1.5 to 2 mm. long; blades about as wide as the sheath, slightly rounded and folded at base, MARCH 19, 1927 CHASE: NEW GRASSES 147 flat above, 30 to 75 cm. long, 14 to 18 mm. wide, long-acuminate, glabrous beneath, sparsely pubescent on the upper surface and with long hairs back of the ligule, the margins sharply serrulate, the uppermost blade greatly reduced; inflorescence scarcely exserted (in specimens seen), the main axis rather slender, 10 to 15 em. long, plano-convex, scabrous on the margins; racemes 6 to 10, thick, heavy, nodding, 9 to 12 cm. long, with a tuft of long hair at the base, the rachis 1 to 1.5 mm. wide, slightly flexuous, scabrous-serrulate on the - margin, otherwise glabrous; spikelets in pairs on minute slender pedicels, imbricate, olive-green, elliptic, 3.5 to 3.9 mm. long, 2 mm. wide, abruptly acute; glume and sterile lemma equal, abruptly pointed beyond the fruit, 5-nerved, the lateral nerves close together near the margins, the glume silky- ciliate on the margin near the summit or nearly glabrous (spikelets varying in a single raceme), the lemma glabrous; fruit elliptic, 3 mm. long, 1.8 mm. wide, pale-stramineous, the lemma and palea minutely papillose-striate under a lens. Fig. 4.—Paspalum acutum, inflorescence, natural size; spikelet and fruit, x 10 Type in the U. S. National Herbarium no. 1,037,448, collected in dry fields, Ancon, Canal Zone, September 18, 1917, by E. P. Killip (no. 4003). The two specimens seen lack the base, but the species belongs to the Virgata group and is undoubtedly perennial. It differs from Paspalum virgatum L. in the more leafy culms and in the pointed elliptic spikelets, glabrous except the margin of the glume toward the summit, and_in the pale fruit. Sorghum vulgare sudanense (Piper) Hitchcock. Andropogon sorghum sudanensis Piper, Proc. Biol. Soc. Washington 28: 33. 1915 Holcus sorghum sudanensis Hitche. Proc. Biol. Soc. Washington 29: 128. 1916. 148 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 6 PLANT ECOLOGY.—The sotl-reaction preferences of certain plant orders... Epgar T. WuHeErry, Bureau of Chemistry. The data thus far published on the soil-reaction preferences of plants have referred chiefly to individual species or to ecological associations. It seems of interest to consider the matter from a different standpoint, namely, that of the orders into which plants naturally fall. The present study has been undertaken to ascertain whether any significant differences could be recognized in the soil- reaction preferences of the orders of higher plants represented in the northeastern United States. The plan adopted was as follows. In a copy of the Check List of the Plants of Gray’s Manual, 7th edition, 1908, the names of the orders, taken from that manual itself, were first inserted in their proper places between the families. Columns representing the several degrees of acidity or alkalinity to be recognized were then ruled in the margins, and a mark was placed opposite each species upon which any observations had been made, in the column corresponding to what appeared to be the optimum reaction-value for that species. The data were, finally, summarized and are presented herewith. 7 In a treatment so general as is here attempted, it is impracticable to recognize a large number of different degrees of acidity or alkalinity, and the number has been reduced to three, mediacid, subacid, and circumneutral. Although these terms have been repeatedly defined by the writer,? it seems desirable to state here their equivalence in terms frequently used by others. Medzacid signifies the highest de- gree of acidity commonly met in normal soils; in the “‘specific acidity” plan of statement it signifies an active acidity in the hundreds; in the logarithmic plan, it represents pH 4.1 to 5.0. Swubacid represents, correspondingly, an active acidity in tens, or pH 5.1 to 6.0. Active. acidity 10 or pH 6.0 appears to be the lowest degree of acidity at which oxylophytes or acid-place plants thrive. The plants which favor values of acidity lower than this seem, for the most part, to grow about equally well a similar distance on the alkaline side of the neutral point. The term circumneutral, which is accordingly applied to them, covers the range from an active acidity of 8 to an active alkalinity of 8, or from pH 6.1 to 7.9, inclusive. 1 Received January 24. 2 Soil acidity, etc. Ecology, 1: 160. 1920; Smithsonian Annual Report, 1920: 247. 1922. Soil reaction in relation to horticulture, Bull. Amer. Hort. Soc. 4: 1. 1926. MARCH 19, 1927 WHERRY: SOIL-REACTION PREFERENCES OF PLANTS 149 In Table 1 a dash (—) is placed in a column opposite the order name when no significant number of species belonging in that order appear to thrive best at the reaction indicated, a lower-case x when a moderate number of species do so, and a capital X when the majority of the species show that reaction-preference. ‘The summary indicates that very few orders prefer mediacid soils, and that approximately two- thirds of those covered fall in the circumneutral group. It is hoped TABLE 1.—THE ORDERS OF HIGHER PLANTS IN THE NORTHEASTERN UNITED STATES AND THEIR APPARENT SOIL-REACTION PREFERENCES < 2 es a p 5 PLANT ORDER = a . PLANT ORDER a a z oP lee = felicia iets ee lwecle see ollee = 7) oO = D S) HOMITGENES sas doe ees — x xX ATMA OS a Wee ieee osc fi pe x xX Bomusetales...5....... — x x Papaverales.. 725... ..: — Xx xX ycopodiales.......... x x x Parmacenialess i742). alge x _ Conmiterales 5: ...... X »¢ x ROSALES ae haces kare x x x Pame@anales.. 00... 6. - — x x Geraniales gic. s uae % x x WWayagales:-..........:| — x x Sapindalesw.n.c3.. 7: x xX x Cwamimales kl. x x xX Rhamnaleseie.2. 8. a x x Ae SN Se x % aX. Mialivalese 2s 5 .jscunh.. — x xX DONATES 2.02 lant | . X x xX WitOlaleSwrvce dirs eee: x x x Lil CC ae % x xX Opuntialess yee x x x Scitamainales.......... — — xX WWinvaGaleSte cals, coast x xX X Oretrames. is. i 6... x x x Wimbellslest. 5... ax x x merales.o..0.:.......) = — x BGIGALCS inreseiss Carsak: x > x SH] (Ss re - K x Rrimmlales: face tal ba x xX Whynte@sles so. 6... kk. x xX ‘x Bibendlesmc cat. .: x xX x Juelandales.:.......... — xX x Gentianaless.-) x x x Leitneriales...........]| — — xX Polemoniales......... x x x Ramalesi an, ot hh x xX x Plantaginalesss. 2. 72. _ K xX HOMbIEALES =. koa. ol S x xX Riubiales pesca: tc xX x x Bainialales sh ac och Jal =X xX x Campanulales....... x Xx x Aristolochiales........ xx x SS) SS aS olveonales ..c.. <<. x Bs xX Number with each Chenopodiales........ _ x x OP UMMUTME 5.2 eee 3 11 30 Caryophyllales........ x x xX that these data may be of use in considering the geological history of the plant orders, the reasons for their present distribution, and similar problems. Perhaps some day discussions of “reaction and range” may take the place of the current one on “age and area.”’ The present preliminary note may serve to indicate to what extent differences between the soil-reaction preferences of plant orders may be looked for. 150 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 6 ENTOMOLOGY.—Some_ scoliid wasps from tropical America.! S. A. Ronwer, Bureau of Entomology, United States Depart- ment of Agriculture. Recently I have received from Mr. Harold E. Box certain specimens of scoliids for identification. Among these was one species which was being introduced into Porto Rico to help in the control of white grubs. This species is new, and its description, along with some related forms and a species of Hlis, is presented at this time to make the names available to authors who may be dealing with the economy and habits of these species. 1.) te * Genus CAMPSOMERIS Guérin GROUP TRICINCTAE Some of the species here grouped around tricincta (Fabricius) were assigned by Saussure and Sichel? to their species group plumipedis. ‘The other pre- viously described species was characterized subsequent to Saussure’s and Sichel’s work. The species of the group tricinctae can be distinguished from plumipes and allies by the presence of dense red or reddish hair on the apical segments of the abdomen and the presence of a patch of hair on the wing membrane adjacent to the stigma. The following characters are common to all females of the group éricinctae: Length 12-20 mm. Black; basal three or four tergites marked with yellow; head and thorax clothed with fulvous hair; thorax in some species marked with yellow; terminal abdominal segments clothed with fulvous or rufous hairs; wings infumate or subhyaline, costa usually darker and usually a dusky spot at end of radial cell (indistinct in lémosa); area adjacent to stigma densely clothed with hair (less so in limosa). Males of only two (tricincta and fulvohirta) of the species are in the National Collection. They may be assigned to this group by the dense red hair at the end of the abdomen. KEY TO THE FEMALES OF GROUP TRICINCTAE 1. Posterior aspect of propodeum sloping, not sharply separated from the dorsal aspect which is closely covered with distinct, large punctures; stermites alll lack: < oct ie a ea ee 2. Posterior aspect of propodeum perpendicular, sharply separated from dorsal aspect which is without close uniform punctures; sternites marked with yellow; area inclosed by first cubital and at least most of radial cells clothed with long hair; a dark spot beyond apex of radial cell... .3. 2. Dorsal part of posterior aspect of propodeum closely and coarsely sculp- tured; yellow markings on tergites interrupted into spots; only anterior part of area inclosed by first cubital cell clothed with hair; no distinct dark spot beyond radtalicelleeyy ve seein Bees limosa (Burmeister). ' Received January 28, 1927. 2 Cat. Species Gen. Scolia, 243. 1864. MARCH 19, 1927 ROHWER: SCOLIID WASPS FROM TROPICAL AMERICA 151 Dorsal part of posterior aspect of propodeum smooth, almost without punctures; first three tergites with yellow bands; area inclosed by first cubital and radial cells clothed with brown hair; wing beyond radial Gomedarki rowel suey POLES Se completa, new species. 3. Disk of propodeum separated from the posterior aspect by a transverse ridge which is higher medianly; legs rufous; yellow markings of tergites forming continuous bands; pronotum without yellow spots tricincta (Fabricius). No transverse ridge separating disk of propodeum from the posterior aspect; femora, at least, black; yellow markings of tergites usually forming lateral spots ae Pee) enn cer! AMR bey Na EN er SOLAS ener st NOs 4. 4, Metanotum with a yellow spot and about two-thirds as long as dorsal aspect of propodeum; disk of propodeum with a lot of long bristle-like hairs; fourth tergite with a small yellow spot on each side hesterae, new species. Metanotum black and about three-fourths as long as dorsal aspect of propodeum; disk of propodeum with dense appressed pile and without a bunch of bristle-like hairs; fourth tergite black... .fulvohirta (Cresson). CAMPSOMERIS (CAMPSOMERIS) LIMOSA (Burmeister) Scolia limosa Burmeister, Abh. Naturf. Gesel. Halle, 1: (pt. 4) 28. 1853. Female and male. Elis limosa (Burmeister) Saussure, Ann. Soc. Ent. France, ser. 3, 6: 246. 1858. Elis (Dielis) limosa (Burmeister) Saussure and Sichel, Catal. Species Gen. Scolia, 250. 1864. (Judging from variation allowed these authors had more than one species included under this name). All the specimens of this species before me are from Mexico and the follow- ing definite localities are included: Huipulco (August 29, 1922, E. G. Smyth); Coapa, D. F. (August 18, 1922, E. G. Smyth); Oaxaca (September, 1923, E. G. Smyth, Chittenden no. 13670); District Federal (L. Conradt). These specimens show but little variation in structure or color, and agree well with the original description. The absence of a distinct, infuscate spot beyond the apex of the radial cell helps to distinguish this species. Turner? synonymizes (mexicana Cameron) = rokztanskyi Dalla Torre with lhmosa. Judging from the original description by Cameron this cannot be correct. Cameron very definitely states that the apical segments of the abdomen have black hairs, while in /zmosa the apical segments of the abdomen are clothed with red hair. Campsomeris (CAMPSOMERIS) completa, new species This species comes nearest to limosa (Burmeister) but the differences given in the above key should make it easy to distinguish the two forms. The complete yellow bands on the tergites and general habitus suggests relation- ship with certain of the species which have the pubescence of the head and thorax pale and of the apical tergites black. The color of the pubescence is 3 Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 8, 8: 624. 1911. 152 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 6 distinctive and until the species of the other group have been carefully studied it is impossible to point out the relationships in this direction. Female.—Length 16 mm. Clypeus gently convex, covered with coarse longitudinal wrinkles; frons, vertex and occiput smooth with only a few widely scattered punctures; basal joints of the flagellum spinose at apex beneath; pronotum with close, distinct punctures; mesoscutum with large, distinct, rather close punctures except over a small median area; scutellum smooth, with a median longitudinal impressed line and a few large ‘punctures laterally ; metanotum with large distinct punctures on basal portion, its median length about two-thirds the median length of dorsal aspect of propodeum; posterior face of propodeum sloping, not distinctly separated from the dorsal aspect, the median part smooth and with only a few scattered punctures, the lateral parts with small punctures dorsally; dorsal aspect of propodeum with uni- form, distinct, close punctures; tergites dull, with a few scattered setigerous punctures; sternites polished, with scattered setigerous punctures which are arranged in two rows on the third and are more numerous and closer on the base of second and apex of fourth; apical margin of radial cell oblique above, arched outwardly below and exceeding the second cubital cell. Black; first three tergites with transverse apical yellow bands, that on the first slightly indentate medianly, that on the second with two broad forward projections laterally, that on the third broadly produced forward medianly; tegulae, tarsi and spines on tibiae rufo-piceous; head, dorsum of thorax and apical two abdominal segments with long ferruginous hair; sides of thorax, femora and basal abdominal segments with long gray hair; appressed pile gray, not abundant, occurring only on sides of thorax and posterior aspect of propodeum. Wings dusky hyaline, costal margin of fore wings ferruginous basally and followed by an elongate brown area beyond the radial cell; area inclosed by first cubital, radial and part of second cubital and median cells covered with brown hair. | One paratype shows a narrow yellow band on the fourth tergite and another is only 14mm.long. Otherwise there is very little variation in the specimens in the type series. Type locality.— Victoria, Mexico. e Other localities —Cerro, Mexico, and Guanajuato, Mexico. Described from three (one type) females from the type locality collected March 16, 1922, by T. C. Barber and T. E. Holloway; from one female from Cerro, collected October 28, 1922, by E. G. Smyth; and one female from Guanajuato. Type and four paratypes.— Cat. no. 40167 U. S. N. M. CAMPSOMERIS (CAMPSOMERIS) TRICINCTA (Fabricius) Tiphia tricincta Fabricius, Systema Entom., 354. 1775; Spec. Insect. 1: 451. 1781; Mant. Insect. 1: 280. 1787; Entom. Systema, 2: 227. 1793; Systema Piez. 235. 1804. Elis (Campsomeris) tricincta (Fabricius) Saussure, Ann. Soc. Ent. France, ser. 3, 6: 246 and 248. 1858. Female. Blis (Dielis) tricincta (Fabricius) Saussure and Sichel, Cat. Species gen. Scolia, 248. 1864. Female and male. (Probably only for those speci- mens from the West Indies). Campsomeris (Campsomeris) pyrura Rohwer, Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus. 49: (no. 2105), 235. 1915. Female and male. - MARCH 19,1927 ROHWER: SCOLIID WASPS FROM TROPICAL AMERICA 153 There seems to be nothing in the original Fabrician description of this species, or any of the subsequent descriptions by the same author, to justify the assumption of Saussure that it was described in the male. While the original description applies fairly well to the male, the male has more yellow markings on the thorax than is called for. The description does apply very exactly to the female and the original mention that the first joint of the antenna is ferruginous makes the identity nearly certain. In fact the mention Of this character convinced me that the specimens to which I gave the name pyrura were really triconcta. There seems no reason to doubt the above synonymy. The original description gives the locality as, ‘“Habitat in America Dom. v. Rohr.” and Saussure and others have considered that the species occurred in a number of the islands of the West Indies as well asin Mexico. It may be that the species does occur in many islands of the West Indies and in Mexico, but it seems more probable that in recording this distribution authors have confused other forms with tricincta. I have seen this species from the follow- ing localities:—Porto Rico: Mayaguez (types of pyrura), Mamayes Santa Rita, San Juan, Maricao, Arecibo, Adjuntas, Manati, Aibonito, Naguabo, Cayey, and Barros. Harti: Port au Prince. Campsomeris (CAMPSOMERIS) hesterae, new species It seems probable that this species will be found in some collections under the name lzmosa (Burmeister) as the variation permitted for limosa by Saus- sure indicates they had more than one species under that name. Besides differing from limosa by the characters mentioned in the above key, the species may be separated from lzmosa by the distinct black mark which occurs in the fore wing beyond the end of the radial cell. This new species is more closely allied to the West Indian fulvohirta (Cresson) and may be found to vary so as to be distinguished from Cresson’s species with difficulty. The material before me can be easily distinguished by the characters given in the foregoing key. | Female.—Length 18 mm. Head smooth with only a few scattered punc- tures, these closer on the vertex; clypeus convex, smooth, with punctures only basally; apical joint of antenna shorter than the two preceding, truncate apically; pronotum with close, distinct punctures; mesoscutum smooth medianly, laterally with close, distinct punctures; scutellum smooth, with a few large, distinct punctures laterally and basally; metanotum with distinct punctures along basal margin, two-thirds as long medianly as the median dorsal aspect of the propodeum; propodeum truncate posteriorly, the posterior aspect smooth, perpendicular and distinctly differentiated from the dorsal aspect; dorsal aspect of propodeum with close, uniform, rather large punc- tures, not produced medianly or separated from the posterior aspect by a carina or ridge; tergites dull, with a few scattered setigerous punctures; sternites shining, smooth, the second with many rather close punctures basally, remaining sternites with scattered setigerous punctures; radial cell oblique apically and exceeding the second cubital cell. Black; median spot on metanotum, lateral spots on first four tergites (those on second and third 154 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 6 narrower laterally), apices of anterior femora beneath and bases of anterior tibiae exteriorly yellow; tegulae, tibiae and tarsi rufo-ferruginous; head, dorsum of thorax, apical margins of tergites, all of fifth and sixth tergites, the three apical sternites and tibiae and tarsi clothed with long ferruginous hair; sides, venter of thorax and dorsal aspect of propodeum with fine appressed, pale golden pile; hairs of sides of thorax, femora, base of first tergite and basal sternites pale yellow. Wings dusky hyaline, costal margin ferruginous basally, beyond the radial cell with an elongate subviolaceous spot; area inclosed by the first cubital and radial cells clothed with long dark brown hair. The paratype from Guatemala is 20 mm. long. One paratype from Venezuela is 17 mm. long. Another paratype from Venezuela is 14 mm. long, has two small yellow spots on the scutellum and two yellow spots on the pronotum. A paratype from ‘‘Ecua”’ is 22 mm. long and has the spots on the first three tergites connected forming complete bands, those on tergites two and three being deeply emarginate medianly. Type locality—Tucuche, Trinidad, British West Indies. Other localities.— Cayuga, Guatemala; Las Adjuntas, Venezuela; ‘‘Eeua”’ (Eeuador).. Described from two females (one type) from the type locality collected May 31, 1925, by Hester M. Rohwer; one female from Guatemala collected June, 1915, by W. Schaus; three females from Venezuela collected June 29 and 30, 1926, and July 12, 1926, by H. E. Box; and one female from ‘‘Ecua’”’ from C. F. Baker collection. Type and five paratypes.— Cat. no. 40168 U.S. N. M. One paratype returned to H. E. Box. The material collected by Mr. Box was sent under his number ‘E”’ and accompanied by a note stating that the species had been collected at Guatire (300 meters), Venezuela; that 1t frequented flowers of Clibadiuwm, Melochia and (?) Wedelza; that it had been introduced into Porto Rico and had arrived there alive and oviposited regularly on grubs of Lachnosterna portoricensis. CAMPSOMERIS (CAMPSOMERIS) FULVHIRTA (Cresson) Scolia (Elis) fulvohirta Cresson, Proc. Ent. Soc. Phila., 4: 119. 1865. Female and male. In two of the females from Santiago, Cuba, before me the pronotum is entirely black. Three females from Santiago, Cuba; one female and one male from Taco Taco, Cuba, April 1-6, 1922. The last two mentioned specimens agree almost exactly with the original description. Also one male from Portland, Jamaica, determined by W. J. Fox. Two females collected at Miami, Florida, May, 1917, by W. M. Mann are assigned here. They differ from the Cuba specimens in having the yellow spots on the tergites somewhat smaller and in having the third sternite blaek. Genus Ets Fabricius Elis caracasana, new species The species is probably more closely allied to the species toluca (Cameron), centralis (Cameron) and parvimaculata (Cameron), but it differs from these species in having the abdomen black except for a yellow band on the first tergite. It also resembles montivaga (Cameron), but besides the difference in color of the abdomen, it may be distinguished from Cameron’s description 1n MARCH 19, 1927 ROHWER? SCOLIID WASPS FROM TROPICAL AMERICA 155 having the basal median area of the propodeum not roughened. The large spines on the legs are whitish instead of being rufous. ‘The species is rather characteristic and may readily be recognized by its dark color, the infuscated costal margin of the wing and the coarse sculpture of the frons. Female—Length 17.5 mm. Clypeus with large, irregular, sometimes confluent punctures, anterior margin almost without sculpture and nearly truncate; frons with coarse, irregular, sometimes confluent punctures and with distinct, deep, impressed line from between bases of antennae to almost the anterior ocellus; area surrounding the ocelli and vertex shining, with large, scattered punctures; distinct transverse groove behind posterior ocelli; posterior orbits smooth but with a few punctures along the hind margin; dorsal aspect of the pronotum opaque, granular and in addition with large, irregular, sometimes confluent punctures; mesoscutum bipunctate, the large punctures widely distributed and in the posterior part of the median area they are elongate; scutellum unipunctate with large, scattered punctures; dorsal aspect of the propodeum opaque, finely granular, with no distinct area set off by large punctures; posteriorly the dorsal aspect is irregularly wrinkled and this irregular wrinkling extends onto the sides of the posterior aspect ; posterior aspect with the median area with dorsad-ventrad aciculations; mesepisternum with large, close, distinct punctures; sides of the propodeum with oblique rugae and with the areas between the rugae aciculate; first tergite with small, separate punctures; the second, third and fourth tergites with the punctures slightly larger and closely crowded together; the fifth tergite bipunctate but the small punctures rather inconspicuous and the larger punctures not much larger than those on the posterior margin of the fourth tergite; pygidium longitudinally striate for its entire length; sternites with large, scattered punctures near their apical margins; inner calcarium of the posterior tibia ~ strongly curved basally and with a prominent tooth at the end of the curved portion; fourth abscissa of the cubitus subequal in length with the second intercubitus and shorter than the third abscissa of the radius, but slightly longer than the fifth abscissa of the cubitus. Black; head, thorax and legs and ventral part of abdomen with scattered, glistening white hairs; the ventral part of the anterior face of the first tergite with a patch of long white hair; first and second tergites with a faint violaceous reflection; median posterior spot on the scutellum, metanotum medianly, a median longitudinal line on dorsal aspect of propodeum, lateral posterior angles of propodeum, oblique spot on side of propodeum, a transverse band on the first tergite medianly (dilated at the sides) yellow; wings subhyaline, the costal margin deeply infuscated and with a violaceous tinge; venation black. Paratypes show the species may vary in size from 18 to 12 mm., that the oblique yellow spot on the sides of the propodeum may be wanting, and that there may be elongate yellow spots on the sides of the third tergite basally. Described from eight females (one type) collected by Harold E. Box in July, 1926, at Las Adjuntas, near Caracas, Venezuela, 960 meters above sea level, on flowers of Clibadium surinamense and Melochia caracasana. Type and paratypes.—Cat. no. 40239 U.S. N. M. One paratype returned to sender. 156 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 6 SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS The American Geophysical Union will hold its eighth annual meeting April 28 and 29, 1927, at the National Academy of Sciences, 21st and B Streets, Northwest, Washington, ID. Gs, with, the following schedule of meetings. Thursday, April 28.—9:30 a.m. to 12:30 p.m., Sections of Geodesy and Terrestrial Magnetism and Electricity.—2:30 p. m. to 5:30 p.m., Sections of * Voleanology and Oceanography. Friday, April 29.—9:30 a.m. to 12:30 p.m., Sections of Meteorology and Seismology.—2:30 p.m. to 5:30 p.m., General Meeting of the Union. New York University is now arranging for the installation, in its new Daniel Guggenheim School of Aeronautics, of a wind tunnel which will represent the most up-to-date equipment in this country for testing airplane models. It is estimated that air velocities in the tunnel will exceed 100 miles per hour. The Petrologists’ Club met at the Geophysical Laboratory on February 15. JAMES GILLULY reviewed Twenhofel’s Treatise on sedimentation, and J. B. MeRrtIzE reviewed Tarr’s Origin of chert and flint, adding new observations of his own on chert formations in Alaska. LL. LaForen, in an informal com- munication, showed a fragment of vein quartz containing unusual casts of a pyroxene, some of which completely penetrated the block. Dr. Ropert H. LomBarp resigned from the Geophysical Laboratory on March 1, to join the research laboratory of the Norton Company, manu- facturers of grinding wheels and refractory products, at Worcester, Massachusetts. Mr. O. W. Torreson sailed from New York for Peru on February 17 to relieve Mr. R. H. Goddard who has been in charge of the Huancayo Magnetic Observatory two years. a : ; : . AFFILIATED ‘SOCIETIES adn os y Ake a The Geological Society. : Apri aot ~The Biological Society. | arch 19. The Philosophical Society. Program in cieiep aimee tain | March 26. The Biological Society. _ Gi 2 00th sr pyiarintys of the Annecy of Sir one Newton: Pact R. Hen: The contributions of Newton to mechanics and to astronomy. RNAL oo APR. 4 1927 ee wig tts Var, c Sh * WV MUS S— OF THE 7 “SONAL MUS" = “ a < ’ TON ACADEMY — IENCES "BOARD OF EDITORS : - Aqnes CHASE : Joan B. Reesrpe, Jr. oTISM ‘BUREAU PLANT INDUSTRY NATIONAL MUSEUM ASSOCIATE EDITORS : ie ea S. A. RonwEr of. EE eee ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 3 | _G. W. Stosz E peuaes it: 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., codes the Accep tance for mailing at special rate of postage provided for ty Act of October 3, 1917, Authorized on July as 1918 This JOURNAL, =o official o organ of thi shington ademy _ present a brief record of current scientific work in Washington. To (1) short original papers, written or communicated by members short notes of current scientific literature published in or emanati (3) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth on each month, exe when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspond to calenda publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the edi the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request. frc issue of the J OURNAL for the following f ourth or samy AEE ctivel: Manuscripts may be sent to any member -elearly typewritten and in suitable form for prir Ww : editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obv es — err should appear only as footnotes and should include year of pub the work of both the editors and printers it is suggeste serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page. oe oo A Tilustrations will be used only when necessary and will be ed to tex’ or diagrams of simple character. The cost of producing ¢ cu for llust: ations must b _ partly met by the.author. So ace: Proof —In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. Authors’ Reprints -—Reprints will be furnished at the follo Copies 4 pp. cee. Ppa = 12 pp. c 50° $.85 $1.65 $2.55 100. 490% et GOO ees Re Das” O.. 150 205 © A380 = 2b eB: 200 2352008 Ee a a 250 3. 00 5.30: 1: 6.25, An additional charge of 25 cents will ine made for ch split page. Covers bearing the name of the author i title of the eartiale, with inclusiv nation and date of issue, will be furnished when ordered. 3 As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his. peas foe extra copies ahead invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript. pce: ‘The rate of Subscription per pe Semi-monthly tumbere. 3 oe a ae ee Monthly numbers........-.+.sseeeeeeeeeeereneereescesteees Remittances should be made payable to “Washington Academy of Sei neces, addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washingt European Agent: Weldon | & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, London. __ Exchanges.—The JouRNAL does not exchange with other "publications. | Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, wee bie 2 cla within thirty days after date of the following issue. . . *Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3. 00. Special rate are given to members of scientific societies a iated with the eect Bi : JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vor, 17 | AprRIL 4, 1927 | No. 7 OCEANOGRAPHY .—The tide at Tahiti! H. A. Marner, Coast , and Geodetic Survey. } Particular interest attaches to the tide at Tahiti since this island furnishes a striking exception to the general rule that ‘‘the tide follows the moon.’ Instead of coming later each day by about 50 minutes, high water here generally comes about noon and midnight and low water about six o’clock in the morning and six o’clock in the evening. Precise data with regard to the tide at Tahiti have been wanting. Only short series of observations appear to have been made, and these, for the greater part, a number of yearsago. Recently, however, at the instance of the U. 8. Hydrographic Office an excellent series of automatic tide records covering several years has been secured by Mr. Harrison W. Smith of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology, who was sojourning in Tahiti. The tide gauge was installed in Papeari Harbor on the southern coast of Tahiti, in latitude 17°45’S., longitude 149°22’W. A harmonic analysis of a year of these observations has been made at the Coast and Geodetic Survey, a series of hourly heights 369 days in length beginning Feb. 1, 1924, being used. The results derived from the direct analysis were cleared for the effects of other com- ponents, the analysis and clearance being made in accordance with the procedure given in Harris’ Manual of Tides and in Schureman’s Harmonic Analysis and Prediction of Tides. The results derived are given in Table 1. Several of the lesser components were derived, not from analysis, but by inference from other components. Such inferred values are enclosed in parentheses. The formulae used for inferring the ampli- tudes and epochs of these components are as follows: 2N. = 0.133N2, 2N° = 2N2° = I se Re = 0.00882, Ren = S2°; Te = 0.05982, T2° = 82°; 2 = 0.007Mo, 2° = 82° — 0.536 (S2° — M.°) ; ' Received February 10, 1927. 157 158 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 7 po = 0.024M,, jigs = 2M.° _ 82°; y= 0.194Nz,, Yo = M.° — 0.866 (M,.° — N,°). From the harmonic constants above, it is seen that the tide at Tahiti is of the semidaily type, the ratio of K; + O, to M, being 0.29. The peculiar behavior of the tide here is evidenced in the relatively large value of 8, as compared with Mz, the ratio being 0.88. The ages derived from these constants are: phase age 29 hours, parallax age —4 hours, and diurnal age —14 hours. The spring range, from the harmonic constants, is 1.1 feet, and the neap range 0.1 foot. TABLE 1.—Harmonic Constants, TAHITI COMPONENT H K COMPONENT H K feet ° feet ° Ki 0.036 278 O1 0.048 293 Ke 0.075 20 Pi 0.013 253 Le 0.010 1 Qi 0.014 290 Mi 0.003 115 Re (0.002) (20) Ma. 0.291 351 Si 0.005 88 M3; 0.008 195 Se 0.255 20 M, 0.012 136 S, 0.002 149 Me 0.006 122 Te (0.015) (20) Ms 0.002 148 Ae (0.002) (4) No 0.061 353 be (0.007) (822) QIN (0.008) 355 v2 (0.012) (352) A nonharmonic analysis from the tabulation of the high and low — waters, gives a mean range of 0.78 foot, a spring range of 0.97 foot, and a neap range of 0.58 foot. It will be noted that the mean and the spring ranges, from the high and low waters, do not differ much from the corresponding ranges derived from the harmonic constants. The neap range, however, from the high and low waters is considerably greater. Undoubtedly this is to be ascribed to the relatively large effects of disturbances due to meteorological conditions on a tide of such small range. From the high and low waters the lunitidal inter- vals derived are 12509™ for the high water, and 5*53™ for the low water. Since 8. is somewhat smaller than M, it is obvious that the oft- repeated statement that the tide at Tahiti comes at the same time every day, is only a rough approximation. The tabulations show that there is some progression in the time of tide from day to day. This progression is considerably less than 50 minutes about the time of spring tides and considerably more about the time of neap tides. APRIL 4, 1927 STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA 159 At spring tides high water comes about noon and midnight, and low water about six o’clock both morning and afternoon. At spring tides the tide has its greatest range and is therefore most noticeable while at neap tides the times of high and low water are difficult to determine. Apparently, therefore, the characteristics of the SpE tides here have been taken as the average characteristics. BOTANY .+~New plants from Central America.—VII.. Pau C. STANDLEY, U.S. National Museum. The new species described on the following pages are mostly plants collected by myself in Costa Rica during the past two years. They include representatives of four South American genera now reported for the first time from North America: Puya and Greigia of the Bromeliaceae; Ophiomeris, a curious member of that small family, Burmanniaceae, related to the orchids; and Panopsis, of the Pro- teaceae. One of the new species described, a Brunellia, is a Mexican tree. Several of the descriptions have been contributed by other writers— that of a Salvadorean Agave by Dr. William Trelease; those of three Panamanian Caesalpiniaceae by Dr. J. N. Rose; and those of a new Scutellaria and a Mendoncia by Mr. Emery C. Leonard. | Puya dasylirioides Standl., sp. nov. Plants large, terrestrial, 1-2.5 m. high; leaves mostly in a large dense basal cluster, stiff, 30-60 cm. long and larger, at base (above the sheaths) about 5 em. wide, evenly tapering to the long-attenuate subulate apex, thick, finely striate, yellow-green, glabrous on the upper surface, beneath finely and closely whitish-lepidote; leaf-margins armed with sharp-pointed ascending blackish broad-based spinose teeth 4-5 mm. long and 1-4 cm. apart, the tip of the blade often unarmed; leaf-sheaths somewhat inflated but hard, dark brown, 7-8 cm. wide, the upper part of the sheath armed with minute close-set teeth; leaves of the stem similar to the basal ones but shorter, decreasing in size upward, the uppermost unarmed or nearly so and with thin brown papery sheaths; uppermost bracts of the stem 7-8 cm. long, much exceeding the internodes, loosely imbricate, abruptly acuminate into an ensiform blade 1.5-2 em. long, sparsely arachnoid-villous with short whitish hairs; inflo- rescence spikelike, 30 cm. long or longer, 5-7 cm. thick, very dense and many- flowered; floral bracts similar to those of the stem but shorter, slightly ex- ceeding the flowers, thin, dark brown, subulate-acuminate, . short-villous; partial inflorescences few-flowered, about 3 cm. long, dense, the pedicels very thick, 1 em. long, thinly brownish-tomentose; sepals 12 mm. long, ovate- 1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. For the last preceding number of this series of papers see This JoURNAL 17; 7-16. 1927. Re- ceived January 26, 1927. 160 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 7 oblong, narrowed to the obtuse apex, striate, thinly tomentose; capsule sub- globose, 3-sulcate, about 12 mm. long and broad, rounded at base and apex, glabrous; seeds very numerous, the body blackish brown, 2 mm. long, longi- tudinally striate and pitted between the striae, the wing whitish. Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, nos. 1,252,726—1,252,727, col- lected in the Laguna de la Chonta, northeast of Santa Maria de Dota, Province of San José, Costa Rica, altitude 2,100 meters, Dec. 18, 1925, by Paul C. Standley (no. 42334). Juvenile plants (no. 43653) collected in the paramos of the Cerro de las Vueltas, at 3,000 meters, probably are referable to the same species. I did not see any adult plants in the latter region. Puya dasylirioides is the most conspicuous plant of the Laguna de la Chonta, which is a sphagnum bog of several acres, occupying probably an old crater, and inclosed on all sides by dense wet forest. The plants grow in great numbers everywhere except in the deep water, their tall stiff stems (all in fruit in December) suggesting mullein stalks. This lake is one of the most remarkable localities from a botanical standpoint that I have ever seen. It yielded a substantial number of curious plants that I have not found elsewhere in Costa Rica. The genus Puya, represented in the high mountains of South America by over 40 species, has not been reported from North America. The Costa Rican plant, according to Mez’s monograph, is related to the imperfectly known P. Goudotiana Mez, of Bogota. The leaves, with their hard broad bases and narrow spine-margined blades, strongly suggest those of some species of Dasylirion. They show upon their faces the impressions of the spiny margins of the adjacent leaves, produced by mutual pressure in the dense rosette which they form, a feature characteristic of the genus Dasylirion. Greigia sylvicola Standl., sp. nov. Plants large, terrestrial, arising from elongate rootstocks, the stems stout, 1-1.5 m. high, densely leafy; leaves linear, 130 cm. long or shorter, 12-18 mm. wide, long-attenuate to the apex, somewhat dilated at base into a short, slightly inflated sheath 3-4 cm. wide; sheaths densely dotted with large, closely appressed, brown scales, the blades with a few minute brown scales but appearing glabrous, finely striate, thin, when fresh bright green; margins of the sheath unarmed, those of the blade just above the sheath (for 15-18 cm.) armed with numerous antrorse, dark brown, spinose teeth 1.5-3 mm. long and 8-22 mm. apart, the margins along the middle of the blade for the greater part of its length unarmed or with minute teeth, the apex of the blade for 20-25 cm. finely and densely spinose-serrate; in- florescence terminal, nearly hidden among the leaves, headlike, many- flowered, about 5 cm. long and broad, borne on a stout bracted stalk 4 em. long; bracts equaling the sepals, green, linear-lanceolate to (outer ones) ovate, thin, long-acuminate, sparsely brown-lepidote, entire below, toward the apex densely serrate with coarse brown broad-based incurved teeth; flowers sessile; ovary turbinate, 3-angled, 10-15 mm. long, 5 mm. broad: sepals free, green, lanceolate, about 2 cm. long, long-acuminate, entire, spinose at apex, sparsely brown-lepidote; immature fruit about 1.5 em. long and 1 cm. thick, many-seeded. APRIL 4, 1927 STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA 161 Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,252,555, collected in forest near Laguna de la Escuadra, northeast of El Copey, Province of San José, Costa Rica, altitude about 2,200 meters, Dec. 16, 1925, by Paul C. Standley (no. 41975). This bromeliad is frequent in the high mountains of the Cantén de Dota, but although locally abundant, fertile plants were found only once. The plants grow in the densest and wettest forest of oak and bamboo, usually in the darkest swamps or in running water, associated with begonias and Lobeliaceae. The following sterile specimens, all from the same region, are referred to this species: Costa Rica: Near Finca La Cima, above Los Lotes, alt. 2,400 m., Standley 42797. Laguna de la Chonta, northeast of Santa Maria de Dota, alt. 2,100 m., Standley 42357. Cerro de las Vueltas, alt. 3,000 m., Stand- ley 44009. The genus Grezgia (Bromeliaceae) has not been reported north of Colombia. It consists of half a dozen species which range southward into Chile. The Costa Rican plant is related, according to description, to G. albo-rosea (Griseb.) Mez, of Venezuela, which has broader leaves and larger flowers Vriesia disticha (L.) Stand. Renealmia disticha L. Syst. Nat. ed. 10. 974. 1759. Tillandsia heliconioides H. B. K. Nov. Gen. & Sp. 1: 234. 1815. Pogomesia leiocalyx (Clarke) Standl. Pogomesia Raf. (1836) is the oldest name for the genus of Commelinaceae to which the name T7inantia Scheidw. (1839) has been more generally applied. Tinantia leiocalyx Clarke, Bot. Gaz. 18: 211. 18983. Pogomesia erecta (Jacq.) Standl. Tradescantia erecta Jacq. Coll. Bot. 4: 113. 1790. Tinantia erecta Schlecht. Linnaea 25: 185. 1852. Agave compacta Trelease, sp. nov. Section Guatemalenses. Acaulescent, not cespitose. Leaves gray-green, not transversely banded, fleshy, oblanceolate-obovate, upcurved above the thick contracted base, acuminate, plicate upwards, smooth, about 100 cm. long and 25 em. wide; spine light brown, dull, smooth, straight, acicular, involutely grooved from above the middle with acute edges, decurrent for more than its own length, about 50 by 5mm.; teeth brown, 10-20 mm. apart, scarcely 3 mm. long in the middle and reduced upwards and downwards, triangular from lenticular bases, nearly straight, the margin straight between them. Inflorescence densely paniculate, ovoid, 2.5 m. tall and half as broad, the scape about equaling the leaves, the horizontal branches few- parted at the end, their divisions very compactly flowered; pedicels scarcely 10 mm. long; flowers yellow, about 40 mm. long; ovary 20 mm. long, equaling the perianth, oblong; tube openly conical, about 5 mm. deep; segments 15 mm. long, shorter than the ovary; filaments inserted toward the throat, 35 mm. long, more than twice as long as the segments. Fruit unknown; freely bulbiferous. | 162 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 7 Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, nos. 1,208,021—1,208,024, taken from a plant cultivated in the Patio de Ensayos, San Salvador, Salvador, by Salvador Calderén (no. 2251). Unique in its short compact panicle, commencing at the height of the leaf tips. Heliconia Lankesteri Standl., sp. nov. Plants of medium size for the genus, 1.5-2.5 m. high; petioles long and slender, glabrous, the sheaths glabrous, tinged with red; leaf-blades oblong- elliptic, about 75 cm. long and 25 cm. wide, abruptly short-acuminate, rounded at base, thin, glabrous, green on both surfaces; inflorescence erect, pedunculate, deltoid, about 30 cm. long and wide, glabrous throughout or nearly so, the rachis thick and stout, conspicuously zigzag, the internodes 1-3 em. long; bracts about 16, slightly upcurved from near the base, cherry- red or dark yellow, long-attenuate to an obtuse tip, closely set, the upper basal margin of one bract nearly reaching the base of the next higher bract; lowest bract as much as 32 cm. long, the middle ones about 12 em. long, strongly concave, the bases 1.5-2.5 cm. high; flowers numerous, dark yellow or red, 4.5 cm. long, glabrous; fruits pedicellate, partly exserted from the bracts, subglobose, about 1 cm. in diameter. Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, nos. 1,228,683-—1,228,684, col- lected in wet forest at La Estrella, Province of Cartago, Costa Rica, March 26, 1924, by Paul C. Standley (no. 39494). To this species may be referred the following additional collections: Costa Rica: Vicinity of Orosi, Prov. of Cartago, Standley 39927. Forests of El Copey, Prov. of San José, alt. 1,800 m., Tonduz 11821. This plant is related to H. adflexa (Griggs) Standl. (Bihar adflexa Griggs)? a Guatemalan species which differs in its pubescent rachis and narrower, much more distantly spaced bracts. The species is named for Mr. C. H. Lankester, in whose company I made the excursion to La Estrella, where the type was collected. Heliconia tortuosa (Griggs) Standl. Bihaz tortuosa Griggs, Bull. Torrey Club 30: 650. 1903. Heliconia straminea (Griggs) Stand. Bihai straminea Griggs, Bull. Torrey Club 42: 327. 1915. Ischnosiphon elegans Standl., sp. nov. Plants erect, 1-1.5 m. high, much branched, the branches slender; leaf sheaths 4-14 em. long, conspicuously nerved, puberulent or glabrate; petioles 2.5 cm. long or less, the lower portion puberulent or scaberulous, the callus terete, glabrous; leaf-blades oblong-ovate, 6-17 cm. long, 3-6.5 cm. wide, abruptly acuminate, obtuse or rounded at base and usually abruptly con- tracted, thin, green, glabrous; spikes solitary, short-pedunculate, 20-25 em. long, 6-8 mm. thick, the internodes about 2 cm. long, thinly pilose with 2 Bull. Torrey Club 42: 325. 1915. APRIL 4, 1927 STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA 163 short white hairs; bracts usually 10, lanceolate, 3.5-4 em. long, acute, green, appressed or ascending, coriaceous, thinly pubescent, especially near the margins, finely nerved; flower 1 in each bract, sessile; ovary glabrous; bract- lets oblong-linear, 2.3 cm. long, hyaline, rounded at apex and densely white- pilose; sepals narrowly linear, 2 cm. long, pilose; corolla white, the tube filiform, over 3 cm. long, white-pilose, the lobes 1 cm. long; capsule cylindric, 1.5 em. long, pilose at apex; seed and aril together 12 mm. long, 3 mm. thick, smooth, mottled with light and dark brown, the aril 3 mm. long. Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,253,581, collected in moist forest near Tilarfn, Guanacaste, Costa Rica, altitude 600 meters, January, 1926, by Paul C. Standley and Juvenal Valerio (no. 44251). The following additional collections, all from Guanacaste, illustrate the same species: Costa Rica: Tilardn, Standley & Valerio 46623. Naranjos Agrios, alt. 600 m., Standley & Valerio 46487, 46460. El Silencio, Valerio 64. The only other Central American species, which grows in Panama, I. leucophaeus (Poepp. & Endl.) Koern., has large broad leaves, whitish beneath, and clustered spikes. The Costa Rican plant is related to I. gracilis (Rudge) Koern., of Brazil and the Guianas, a species with narrower leaves, more slender spikes, and seeds twice as large. Ophiomeris panamensis Standl., sp. nov. Plant hyaline, white, glabrous, the stem about 6 cm. long, 1.3 mm. thick, naked, subflexuous; flower solitary, terminal, 2 or 3-bracteate at base, the bracts lance-oblong to ovate, 1.5-3 mm. long, appressed; perianth cam- panulate, gibbous, 15 mm. long in its greatest length, about 10 mm. wide, at base abruptly narrowed, the orifice oblique, 8 mm. broad; corolla limb 6-parted, the 3 outer lobes short, ovate, and 3 inner ones about 3 cm. long, flexuous, filiform, dilated at base, spirally included in bud; stamens 6, equal, free, opposite the perianth lobes, the filaments deflexed, expanded into petaloid blades, these emarginate at apex; anthers small, 2-celled, the cells collateral, almost parallel, longitudinally dehiscent; ovary adnate to the perianth, free at apex and rounded, 1-celled. many-ovulate; style 1.5-2 mm. long, the 3 stigmas short, erect. Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 1,269,478, collected along the Pearson Trail on Barro Colorado Island in Gattin Lake, Canal Zone, Panama, July 11, 1925, by C. W. Dodge (no. 3484). Collected also along the Shan- non Trail on the same island, July 17, 1925, Dodge 3460. This is the first representative of the family Burmanniaceae, subfamily Thismieae, to be reported from tropical North America. One other member of the group, Sarcosiphon americanus (Pfeiffer) Schlechter, was found a few years ago near Chicago, a truly remarkable record, inasmuch as the other plants of the family are tropical in distribution. The available material of the Panama plant is very scant, and the plant is so delicate that in the dried state it is difficult to determine its characters satisfactorily. According to the most recent treatment of the group, by Schlechter, it seems to agree best with the genus Ophiomeris, of which two species, both Brazilian, are known. In O. macahensis Miers the orifice of the perianth is small and lateral, while in O. panamensis it is merely oblique, 164 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 7 and much larger. In the latter, also, the anther cells are much less divergent than in the Brazilian species. It is strange that this plant has not been found in Panama by other col- lectors, especially since Prof. Dodge states that it was plentiful on Barro Colorado in the summer of 1925. It may well be that it is an ephemeral plant, found only when conditions are exceptionally favorable, and having a growth period of very few weeks. Myrica phanerodonta Standl., sp. nov. Shrub 2.5-3.5 m. high, the older branches subterete, blackish, the young ones stout, sparsely or densely pubescent or glabrate, gland-dotted, densely leafy, the internodes about 1 cm. long; petioles stout, 2-6 mm. long, puberu- lent; leaf-blades obovate or oblong-obovate, 3-6 em. long, 1.38-2.8 em. wide, obtuse to rounded at apex, acuminate to broadly cuneate at base, coriaceous, serrate, the teeth about 10 on each side, salient, scarcely 1 mm. long, the blades deep green above, puberulent along the costa, slightly paler beneath, rather sparsely gland-dotted, puberulent on the prominent costa or glabrate, the lateral nerves very slender, plane or slightly elevated, straight or sub- arcuate, extending to the margin; staminate aments axillary, solitary, sessile, 10-18 mm. long, 4 mm. thick; anthers 1 mm. long. Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 799175, collected on the sum- mit of the Voledn de Poas, Costa Rica, altitude 2,644 meters, November, 1896, by A. Tonduz (no. 10785). The following collections represent the same species: Costa Rica: Upper slopes of Voledn de Pods, Standley 34884. Cerro de Zurqui, Prov. Heredia, alt. 2,200 m., Standley & Valerio 50423. Related to M. parvifolia Benth., of Colombia, which lacks the numerous salient teeth that mark the leaves of MM. phanerodonta. Myrica PUBESCENS Willd. Sp. Pl. 4: 746. 1805. Heretofore only a single species of Myrica, M. mexicana Willd. (M. xala- pensis H. B. K.), has been known from Central America. ‘This is a common and widely distributed plant, frequent in Costa Rica. It is strange that there has not been collected in Costa Rica long ago the Colombian Myrica pubescens Willd., a well-marked species, common in central Costa Rica, and occurring in the vicinity of both Cartago and San José, which are not exactly unex- plored regions. The name “‘encinillo’”’ is applied to the tree. The following collections of M. pubescens are in the National Herbarium: Costa Rica: Vara Blanca to La Concordia, Maxon & Harvey 8477. Rio Reventado, Cartago, Standley & Valerio 49386. Between Aserri and Tarbaca, Standley 34058, 41356. Quebradillas, Standley 43018. Santa Maria de Dota, Standley 41574. Cerro de Piedra Blanca, above Escast, Standley 32457, 32586. Panopsis costaricensis Standl., sp. nov. Large shrub or tree, 5-10 m. high, the branchlets glabrate, densely leafy, brownish, bearing numerous pale elevated lenticels; leaf buds densely fer- ruginous-sericeous; petioles stout, 4-10 mm. long, glabrous; leaf-blades oblanceolate-oblong or obovate-oblong, 6-20 em. long, 2-6 cm. wide, obtuse APRIL 4, 1927 STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA 165 or rounded at apex, cuneately narrowed at base, subcoriaceous, lustrous, entire, concolorous or when dry sometimes brownish beneath, the venation conspicuous on both surfaces, coarsely reticulate, the principal lateral nerves about 6 oneach side, very irregular; flowers yellowish white, racemose, the ra- cemes few, forming aterminal panicle, the rachises8—13 cm. long, many-flowered, floriferous nearly to the base, thinly pilose with minute, mostly appressed, brownish hairs; bracts linear-subulate, about 6 mm. long; pedicels divaricate, slender, 3-4 mm. long, pubescent like the rachis; perianth lobes linear, 5-6 mm. long, pilose outside with sparse minute appressed hairs; hypo- gynous scales united to form a membranaceous 4-denticulate cup about 0.6 mm. high; ovary densely brown-hirsute; style 4 mm. long, glabrous, clavate at apex; fruit broadly ovoid, only slightly asymmetric, subsessile, about 4.5 em. long and 3 cm. in diameter, obtuse at base, abruptly con- tracted to the large mammiliform apex, smooth, glabrous. Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 861785, collected on hills of Santiago, near San Ramon, Costa Rica, in flower, May 1, 1901, by A. M. Brenes (no. 14303). The following additional collections are referred here: Costa Rica: Fraijanes, Prov. Alajuela, alt. 1,600 m., Standley &. Torres 47440. La Ventolera, on the southern slope of Voledn de Pods, alt. 1,700 m., Standley 34567. | The other species of Panopsis are South American, this being the first one reported for North America. The Costa Rican tree resembles in foliage characters Bolivian specimens collected by Bang and distributed as P. Sprucei Meisn., but the Bolivian species has a much shorter style and copious pubescence on branches and leaves. Brunellia costaricensis Standl., sp. nov. Medium-sized tree with rounded crown, the branchlets stout, glabrous or at first very sparsely pilose; leaves opposite, pinnate, the leaflets 7 to 10 (terminal leaflet often absent), the petiole and rachis together 8-28 cm. long, stout, subterete, glabrous; petiolules stout, 8-14 mm. long, shallowly suleate above, glabrous; leaflets oblong, 7.5-13.5 em. long, 2.5-5.5 cm. wide, rounded or obtuse at apex and abruptly short-cuspidate (cusp 5-6 mm. long, obtuse), at base broadly rounded to obtuse, somewhat unequal, remotely and very shallowly appressed-crenate, coriaceous, deep green above, glabrous, beneath pale, when very young rather densely sericeous with minute, closely appressed hairs, but soon glabrate, the costa impressed above, salient beneath, the lateral nerves very prominent beneath, 15-18 pairs, ascending, nearly straight, extending to the margin; panicles axillary, rather dense, many-flowered, about 16 cm. broad, much branched, peduncu- late, the branchlets densely pilose with minute, ascending or subappressed hairs, the pedicles stout, 4-6 mm. long, jointed below the middle; calyx lobes 5, ovate to elliptic-oblong, 2-2.5 mm. long, acute or acutish, minutely sericeous on both surfaces; carpels of the fruit 4 or 5, when fully mature 3 mm. high, sessile, densely and minutely sericeous, the stout style lateral; seeds dark red-brown, very lustrous, smooth, 2.5 mm. long. Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,306,244, collected in wet forest at Yerba Buena, northeast of San Isidro, Province of Heredia, Costa Rica, altitude about 2,000 meters, February, 1926, by Paul C. Standley 166 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 7 and Juvenal Valerio (no. 49900). The species is represented by the following additional collections: | Costa Rica: Yerba Buena, Standley & Valerio 49951. La Palma, alt. 1,460 m., Tonduz 12605 (J. D. Smith 7412). This Costa Rican Brunellia, the only representative of the genus known from Central America, has been determined as B. comocladifolia Humb. & Bonpl., a species of Colombia and the Greater Antilles. The Colombian tree is strikingly different in its nearly sessile leaflets which are softly pubes- cent beneath with dense spreading fulvous hairs. Its carpels, also, are hispidulous. Brunellia mexicana Standl., sp. nov. Tree, the young branches stout, terete, glabrous, with short internodes; leaves opposite, pinnate, the leaflets 11 to 17, the petiole and rachis together 11-50 cm. long, slender, terete, glabrous or puberulent; petiolules 2-4 mm. long, puberulent or glabrous; leaflets oblong or lance-oblong, 6-14 cm. long, 24.5 em. wide, acuminate or long-acuminate, at base somewhat oblique, rounded to obtuse, appressed-serrulate, subcoriaceous, deep green on the upper surface, short-pilose with appressed hairs along the nerves or glabrous, the costa impressed, beneath glaucous, when young velvety-pubescent, the pubescence in age mostly deciduous except along the nerves, the costa and lateral nerves prominent beneath, the latter about 19 pairs, arcuate, extend- ing to the margin; panicles solitary in the leaf axils, about 15 cm. broad, densely many-flowered, the peduncles elongate, compressed, the branches densely tomentose; pedicels 4-7 mm. long, jointed near the base; calyx lobes 5, oblong-ovate, 2.5 mm. long, acutish, tomentulose on both surfaces, spread- ing in fruit; carpels of the fruit 4 or 5, at maturity 5 mm. long, compressed, the short stout style nearly basal, the carpels densely tomentose and hispid with short stiff hairs: seeds 2 mm. long, dark brown, scarcely lustrous. Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,265,699, collected at Teco- matla, Veracruz, Mexico, October, 1925, by C. A. Purpus (no. 10454). The same species was collected in Oaxaca by Galeotti (no. 7247). Brunellia mexicana is much closer to B. comocladifolia than to B. costaricen- sis. The Colombian species differs in the broader-based leaflets, green beneath and with prominent-reticulate secondary venation, and in the much smaller carpels. The pale under surface of the leaflets of B. mexicana is caused, perhaps, by a microscopic tomentum, or possibly by a waxy exudate. Bauhinia Standleyi Rose, sp. nov. Large woody vine, the stem often flattened and then 5 cm. or more broad; young branches with dense brown pubescence; tendrils slender, hairy; stipules small, broadly ovate to orbicular, 2 mm. long, hairy below, glabrous above, caducous; petiole 2-3 em. long; leaf-blades broader than long, 3-5 em. long, 2-lobed, sometimes cleft below the middle, the lobes rounded, 7 to 9-nerved, dull green, softly pubescent on both sides; inflorescence ter- minal, 4-5 cm. long, many-flowered, pubescent; bracts linear; pedicels slender, 10 mm. long or less, bearing 1 or 2 linear bractlets; calyx cup-shaped, 4-5 mm. long, the lobes 1-3 mm. long, linear; petals 5, very hairy below, 10— APRIL 4, 1927 STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA 167 12 mm. long, erect, greenish white, one of them with small purple spots; perfect stamens 10, glabrous; pods broadly spatulate, 6-7 cm. long, 2 cm. broad near the top, in age glabrate. Type in U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,152,798, collected by Paul C. Standley, near Punta Paitilla, Province of Panama, Panama, December 7, 1923 (no. 26247). The following collections represent the same species: PanaMA: Taboga Island, Macbride 2800; Standley 27908. Ancon, Piper 6031. Along the Corozal Road near Panama, Standley 23776. Around El Paraiso, Canal Zone, Pittter 2577. Vicinity of Penonomé, Williams 134. Cassia Killipii Rose, sp. nov. Procumbent herb with long slender branches, often 1 meter long, the short pubescence interspersed with spreading hairs and more or less viscid; stipules minute; leaflets 2 pairs, orbicular to short-oblong, 5-10 mm. long, rounded at apex, glabrous above or nearly so, pubescent beneath, strongly veined; flowers axillary and solitary or somewhat paniculate above; flower bud obtuse, densely long-setose; sepals 8-9 mm. long, obtuse; petals 11-13 mm. long, brick-red: ovary densely setose; fruit setose, 2.5 cm. long, 5 mm. broad. Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,266,850, collected by E. P. Killip near the Tapia River, Province of Panama, Panama, December 9, 1917 (no. 3281). The following specimens are referable to this species: PANAMA: Vicinity of Penonomé, Willzams 104. Between Paso del Arado and Ola, Prov. Coclé, Pitter 5014. Along the Rio Tapia, Prov. Panama, in savanna or on grassy slopes, Standley 28186, 30656. Cassia pallidior Rose, sp. nov. Low shrub, glabrous or nearly so; leaflets 12 pairs or fewer, narrowly oblong to orbicular, 1.5-3.5 cm. long, a little hairy when young but soon glabrate, very pale beneath, apiculate; stipules linear, caducous; gland be- tween the lowest pair of leaflets large, clavate; inflorescence 2-flowered; peduncles and pedicels slender; flowers large; sepals thin, orbicular; petals orbicular to short-oblong, sometimes 3 cm. long; 3 of the anthers with long slender beaks; pod 12-15 cm. long, 5-6 mm. broad. Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 676,583, collected by H. Pittier near Alhajuela, Panama, January, 1914 (no. 2343). The following collections also belong to this species: PANAMA: Sabana de Alhajuela, Pitter 3465. Costa Rica: Rio, Virilla, Prov. San José, Tonduz 9824 (J. D. Smith 7007), 12714 (J. D. Smith 7437). Tephrosia Heydeana (Rydb.) Stand. Cracca Heydeana Rydb. N. Amer. FI. 24: 166. 1923. Pavonia fruticosa (Mill.) Standl. Sida fruticosa Mill. Gard. Dict. ed. 8. Sida no. 18. 1768. Pavonia typhalaea Cav. Diss. Monad. 3: 134. 1787. 168 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 7 Pavonia Preslii Standl., nom. nov. Malachra ovata Presl, Rel. Haenk. 2: 125. 1835. Not Pavonia ovata Spreng. 1826. Pavonia panamensis Stand. Malache panamensis Standl. Contr. U. 8. Nat. Herb. 18: 116. 1916. Hybanthus guanacastensis Standl., sp. nov. Shrub 1.5-4.5 m. high, the branches densely leafy, the older ones slender, terete, grayish, the young ones sparsely or densely puberulent; stipules 2.5— 3 mm. long, broadly ovate, glabrous, the costa and basal portion indurate, the costa excurrent as a subulate mucro, the margins scarious, whitish, ciliolate; petioles 2-5 mm. long, glabrous; leaf-blades oblong to oblong- elliptic, 4-10 cm. long, 1.54.5 cm. wide, acute to long-acuminate, at base rounded to acutish and conspicuously oblique, thin, glabrous, rather re- motely and irregularly serrate-dentate, the teeth callous-tipped, the vena- tion prominent on both surfaces; flowers axillary, solitary, the pedicels 6-10 mm. long, slender, glabrous, jointed above the middle; sepals ovate, 2 mm. long, acute or obtuse, thin, greenish, glabrous but ciliolate; lower petal _ 6 mm. long, panduriform, broad and inflated at base, constricted above, then expanded into a short broad truncate blade, glabrous, the upper petals 4 mm. long; filaments broad, about equaling the villous anthers, the connective expanded into a large thin quadrate appendage; immature capsule 6 mm. long, orbicular, glabrous, rounded at apex, the persistent style 2 mm. long. Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,254,104, collected in wet mountain forest at Los Ayotes, near Tilardn, Guanacaste, Costa Rica, altitude about 700 meters, January 21, 1926, by Paul C. Standley and Juvenal Valerio (no. 45423). To the same species are referred the following collections from Guanacaste: | ! Costa Rica: Quebrada Serena, Standley & Valerio 46161, 46197. Los Ayotes, Standley & Valerio 45346. Related to H. mexicanus Ging., which has flowers only half as large on much shorter pedicels. Hybanthus tenuifolius (Dowell) Standl. Calceolaria tenuifolia Dowell, Bull. Torrey Club 33: 550. pl. 18. 1906. Hybanthus longipes (Dowell) Standl. Calceolaria longipes Dowell, Bull. Torrey Club 33: 551. pl. 19. 1906. Hybanthus glaber (Dowell) Standl. Calceolaria glabra Dowell, Bull. Torrey Club 33: 552. pl. 20. 1906. Hybanthus brevis (Dowell) Stand. Calceolaria brevis Dowell, Bull. Torrey Club 33: 552. pl. 21. 1906. Hybanthus angustifolius (H. B. K.) Stand. | Tonidium angustifolium H. B. K. Nov. Gen. & Sp. 5: 377. 1821. APRIL 4, 1927 STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA 169 Hybanthus riparius (H. B. K.) Stand. Tonidium riparium H. B. K. Nov. Gen. & Sp. 5: 378. 1821. Hybanthus nigricans (Dowell) Standl. Calceolaria nigricans Dowell, Bull. Torrey Club 33: 554. 1906. Hybanthus humilis (Rose & Dowell) Standl. Calceolaria humilis Rose & Dowell, Contr. U. 8. Nat. Herb. 10: 125. pl. 42. 1906. 7 Hybanthus Rosei (Dowell) Standl. Calceolaria Roset Dowell, Bull. Torrey Club 338: 555. pl. 22. 1906. Xylosma Hemsleyana Stand. Hisingera elliptica Clos, Ann. Sci. Nat. IV. 8: 226. 1857. Xylosma elliptica Hemsl. Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot. 1: 57. 1879. Not X. el- liptica Tul. 1868. Symplocos Johnsonii Standl., sp. nov. Tree 18 m. high, the branchlets subterete, glabrous, bearing few large elevated lenticels; petioles stout, 12-18 mm. long, broadly channeled above, glabrous; leaf-blades oblong or elliptic-oblong, 11.5-22 cm. long, 4.5-8 cm. wide, abruptly acute, with obtuse tip, acute or acuminate at base, subcoriace- ous, entire or essentially so, glabrous, lustrous above, the costa impressed above, prominent beneath, the lateral nerves very slender, about 14 on each side, arcuate- ascending, laxly anastomosing near the margin; inflorescence few-flowered, dense and congested, the flowers sessile; calyx-tube 2 mm. long, glabrous, the lobes broadly rounded, 2 mm. long, minutely ciliolate, otherwise glabrous; corolla 16 mm. long, the tube 8-9 mm. long, 2.5 mm. thick, the 5 lobes obovate or oblong, rounded at apex, glabrous; stamens very numerous, free above, equaling the corolla lobes, the filaments connate into a tube, very unequal, finely and densely papillose, not collected in recognizable fascicles, stout, abruptly contracted near the apex into a very slender tip; style 16 mm. long, densely hirsute below. Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,081,463, collected at Samac, Alta Verapaz, Guatemala, altitude 1,350 meters, October 20, 1920, by Harry Johnson (no. 874). This species belongs to Brand’s section Symplocastrum, subsection Pseudo- alstonia, and in his key to the group, in the Pflanzenreich, runs at once to S. quindiuensis, of Colombia. That species has much smaller leaves and a smaller corolla. Among the Central American species, S. Johnsonii is con- spicuous because of its large leaves. The collector reports that the flowers are rose-pink and very fragrant. It is a pleasure to be able to name this fine species for Mr. Johnson, who ob- tained in Alta Verapaz in 1920 one of the most interesting and most carefully prepared collections of plants ever made in Guatemala. Chelonanthus alatus (Aubl.) Stand. Iusianthus alatus Aubl. Pl. Guian. 204. 1775. 170 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 7 Scutellaria argentata Leonard, sp. nov. Tall slender herb (only the upper portion of plant available for study); stem dark purplish, glandular-pubescent; petioles 1-1.5 em. long, densely glandular-puberulent; leaf-blades oblong-elliptic or oblong-obovate, obscurely panduriform, acuminate at apex, narrowly cordate at base, rather coarsely serrate with flat teeth, both surfaces bearing shiny silver dots, glabrous except the glandular-puberulent midrib and veins of the lower surface, the veinlets inconspicuously reticulate; flowers numerous, crowded in a terminal raceme about 8 cm. long; rachis strongly glandular-puberulent; bracts linear, 2-3 cm. long, about 0.5 mm. broad, obtuse, deciduous; pedicels 2-2.5 mm. long, glandular-puberulent; calyx 4 mm. long, the lobes reddish purple, glandular-pubescent, the crest small; corolla bright crimson, sparingly pubescent, 4-5 cm. long, the tube slender, 4 mm. broad at throat, gradually narrowed to 2 mm. at base, the upper lip much larger than the lower, the middle lobe rounded, deeply emarginate, curving over the stamens, the lateral lobes short, oblong, 25 mm. long, 8-9 mm. broad, the lower lip tri- angular, rounded, shallowly notched at apex; stamens didynamous, curved at tip, glabrous, the upper pair 2 mm. longer than the lower, the anthers of the upper pair 1-celled, oval, 1.25 mm. long, 0.75 mm. broad, those of the lower pair 2-celled, broadly ovate, 1.25 mm. long and broad, cordate at base, slightly emarginate at apex; style equaling the upper pair of stamens, curved at tip, glabrous, the stigma unequally 2-lobed, the lobes spreading; ovary glabrous, on a conical gynobase 1 mm. long and 1.5 mm. broad at base; nutlets not seen. Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,266,817, collected at La Florida, Costa Rica, in 1925, by C. H. Lankester. This attractive plant is well marked by its long slender crimson dower! glandular pubescence, and silvery-punctate leaves. The slightly paniduri- form leaf-blades suggest a relationship with S. costaricana, but that species can be separated easily by its smaller corolla and eglandular pubescence. Gonzalagunia rudis Stand. Duggena rudis Standl. Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. 18: 125. 1916. Since there is some doubt as to the identity of the plant described as the type of the genus Duggena, it is preferable to use for this group of Rubiaceae the next older name, Gonzalagunia. Pentagonia pubescens Stand. Watsonamra pubescens Standl. Contr. U. 8. Nat. Herb. 17: 441. 1914. The generic name Pentagonia Benth. has been rejected because of Penta- gonia Vent. (1841), but the latter does not seem to be effectively published. Pentagonia Donnell-Smithii Standl. Watsonamra Donnell-Smithii Standl. Contr. U.S. Nat. Herb. 17: 442. 1914. Pentagonia Pittieri Stand. Watsonamra Pittieri Standl. Contr. U. 8. Nat. Herb. 17: 448. 1914. APRIL 4, 1927 PROCHEDINGS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 171 Pentagonia brachyotis Stand. Watsonamra brachyotis Standl. Contr.U. 8. Nat. Herb. 17: 443. 1914. Pentagonia gymnopoda Standl. Wuatsonamra gymnopoda Standl. Contr. U. 8. Nat. Herb. 17: 444. 1914. Pentagonia alfarcana Standl. Watsonamra alfaroana Standl. Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. 15: 287, 1925. Cephaelis nana Standl. Evea nana Standl. Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. 15: 105. 1925. PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES THE PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 947TH MEETING The 947th meeting, constituting the 56th annual meeting, was heid in the Cosmos Club auditorium on December 11, 1926. It was called to order by President Bowie at 8:19, with 46 persons present. The report of the Treasurer showed total receipts, $1753.08; disburse- ments, $1207.73, leaving a balance of $545.35. The report of the secretaries showed that 19 meetings were held during the year, several in conjunction with other societies. The following officers were elected for the year 1927: President, J. P. Avuut; Vice-Presidents, L. H. Apams and P. R. Hryu; Treasurer, W. D. LAMBERT; Recording Secretary, H. E. Merwin; Member-at-Large, General Committee, O. S. ADAMS. At the conclusion of the business meeting, Mr. L. H. Apams presented an address entitled What we know about the interior of the earth (Illustrated by lantern slides). The outer parts of the earth have been thoroughly explored, at the surface and to a depth of a mile or so, but the sum total of our knowl- edge of the deeper parts of the earth is not very large. And yet the mysteries are slowly being solved. From varied sources information has been gathered and pieced together to form a picture of earth’s interior—a picture as yet crude and imperfect but one which is gradually being made clearer and more complete. Volcanoes bring up material from considerable depths and show us that beneath the cooler surface is a hot and active interior; the amount of radioac- tive substance found in ordinary rocks indicates that unless the earth is,- and always has been, growing hotter, the interior must be of a very different composition from that of the surface layers; geological studies have given us a store of information concerning the structure and composition of the rocks found at the surface and allow us to make certain deductions as to the way in which the character of the rocks should vary with depth; laboratory meas- urements on gravitational attraction tell us the density of the earth as a whole and indicate the presence of very dense material at the center; astro- nomical data on the motion of the earth give us the moment of inertia of the 172 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. VOL. 17, No. 7 earth, from which the distribution of density in the interior can be inferred; and finally, the most important of all, the transmission of earthquake waves through the earth, taken in conjunction with laboratory measurements on the elasticity of rocks, yield very definite and conclusive evidence concerning the nature of the earth’s material at various depths. The present state of the earth is closely connected with the manner of its formation. It is generally agreed that the earth, as well as the other planets, were formed from the sun during the close approach of another star, which by tidal action pulled out large masses of glowing gas from the surface of the sun. One of these detached masses first liquefied and then solidified to form the earth. In the two billion years that have elapsed since its solidification, the temperature except in the outer few dozen miles has not changed appreci- ably. In the center of the earth is a core of iron, about 6000 km. in diameter, which settled out during the liquefaction. From the surface of the iron core upwards to the lower surface of the ‘‘crust’’ there is mainly ultrabasic rock (iron magnesium silicates) while the crust itself, 60 km. in thickness, consists of the ordinary granitic and gabbroic rock with a very small amount of sedimentary material at the surface. The rigidity of the earth, except near the center and near the surface, is everywhere greater than steel. ‘The pres- sure increases steadily with depth and is about three million atmospheres at the center. The temperature in the very interior is unknown but is probably several thousand degrees. Further advances in our knowledge of the earth’s © interior will come mainly (1) from a higher precision in seismic data and (2) from a complete understanding of the physics of the atom so that the be- havior of substances at all temperatures and pressures can be predicted. (Author’s abstract.) H. A. Marner, Recording Secretary. ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 379TH MEETING The 379th regular meeting was held Thursday, December 3, 1925, in Room 43, National Museum, with President R. A. CusHMAN in the chair and 25 members and 5 visitors present. C. T. GREENE reported the death of Mr. H. W. WEenzEux, Coleopterist, of Philadelphia. He was born in Philadelphia, May 16, 1858, and died there November 5, 1925, aged 67 years. A committee was appointed to draw up suitable resolutions. Election of officers followed: President, J. M. ALpRicH; 1st Vice-president, J. A. Hysuop; 2nd Vice-president, J. E. GRar; Editor, Cart HErnricH; Corre- sponding Secretary-Treasurer, S. A. RonwmrR; Recording Secretary, C. T. GREENE; Executive Committee, W. R. Watton, A. N. CaupE.Lu, T. E. SNYDER; Representative of the Society to the Washington Academy of Sciences, Dr. A. G. B6vina. Program: Dr. N. E. McInpoo: 1. Senses of the boll weevil. (Illustrated.) 2. An vinsect alfactometer. This apparatus was on exhibition and its mecha- nism was explained to the society. Mr. R. A. CusuMan told of rearing a species of Sympzesis as an external parasite of the eggs of Cimbex americana (Leach). The species of Sympzesis are normally parasitic on leaf-mining Lepidoptera and the speaker was of the APRIL 4, .1927 PROCEEDINGS: ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 173 opinion that the location of the host in this case was the determining factor leading to its parasitization by the Sympiesis. Dr. ALpRIcH spoke of an interesting chapter in the history of Dipterology, giving an account of Meigen’s visit to Kiel, Copenhagen, and Lund in 1824, at the expense and in the company of Wiedemann. ‘This trip is described in Forster’s biographical sketch of Meigen in Stettiner Ent. Zeitung for 1846. Mr. J. L. WEBB made some remarks on the Thurbaria weevil, stating that it was considered a variety of the boll weevil. Mr. K. W. Bascock spoke briefly, mentioning some of his experiences during a recent trip to Europe. 380TH MEETING The 380th regular meeting was held Thursday, January 7, 1926, in the National Museum, with President J. M. ALpRricH in the chair and 25 members and 11 visitors present. Report of the Corresponding Secretary-Treasurer for 1925 was read and accepted. Dr. H. E. Ewine, Chairman of the Committee which examined the Treasurer’s books, reported the books correct. Mr. C. T. GREENE read his report as Recording Secretary for 1925. The reports were accepted. Dr. O. A. JOHANNSEN of Cornell University was elected to membership. Program: W. H. Wuite: Plant resistance to insect injury. Discussion by Back, RowHER, and BAKER. AustTIN H. Cuarx: Odors of male butterflies. Discussion by BAKER, EWING ROHWER and SNODGRASS. Mr. Rouwer exhibited a photograph of Dr. Walther Horn, of Germany, and his assistant, Miss Christel Doering. Mr. J. A. Hystop spoke briefly to the Society on Mr. Chapman’s book on insect equilibrium. Discussed by ALpRicH, BAKER, and SNODGRASS. Mr. R. C. SHannon exhibited several species of ‘Syrphidae showing good examples of mimicry. This material was from the British Museum. ° He also spoke briefly about his forthcoming trip to Argentina. E. A. Bacx: A Note on Anthrenus seminiveus Casey. This Dermestid closely resembles the furniture beetle, Anthrenus fasciatus. The only refer- ence to seminiveus is by Casey when he described the type, found in the build- ing where he lived. After about 10 years two instances of destruction caused by this insect have been brought to the attention of the Department of Agriculture within a short time of each other during late 1925. In one case the brushes of a shoe-polishing outfit, in a hotel about half a mile from the building in which Colonel Casey lived, were ruined. In the other building in which Colonel Casey lived, a divan upholstered in curled hair, Spanish moss and tow, was found, on removing the cover, to harbor several thousand beetles and larvae. This is to be published shortly in the Proceedings of the Entomological Society of Washington by E. A. Back and R. T. Corton. Mr. Rouwer recorded the occurrence of the European sawfly, Acantholyda erythrocephala (Linnaeus), in Pennsylvania. This European sawfly is a well known pest to European coniferous trees and two specimens were taken in a nursery at Chestnut Hill, Pa., May 7, 1925, by F. F. Smith and A. B. Wells. Both of these specimens were males. Mr. RouweEr also recorded a second specimen of Zadiprion townsendi (Cockerell). This specimen was collected by W. J. Chamberlin, Santa Rita Mts., Arizona, July, 1924, and is the second specimen known. Zadiprion 174 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 7 townsendi (Cockerell) was described in 1898 from asingle female collected under a pine tree in the White Mountains of New Mexico. It is closely allied to Zadiprion grandis (Rohwer), an enemy to rock pine in Nebraska. Discussion by Baker and Ewine. Dr. J. M. AupRricH mentioned a case in nomenclature, where the name of a variety proved to be antedated by a name which also antedated the species. He asked whether in this case the variety becomes the species, or whether this relation is to be determined on taxonomic grounds without reference to priority. 381ST MEETING The 381st meeting was held Thursday, February 4, 1926, in the National Museum with President J. M. Aupricu in the chair and 29 members and 6 visitors present. Program: R. A. CusHMAN, retiring President: Some types of parasitism among the Ichneumonidae. (Illustrated by numerous lantern slides.) Dis- cussion by Messrs. Howarp, ALDRICH, BAKER, and GAHAN. F. C. CraigHEap: Forest insects. (Illustrated by numerous lantern slides showing the effect of the insect damage on the trees.) 382D MEETING The 382d meeting was held at 8 p.m., March 4, 1926, in the National Museum, with President J. M. ALDRICH 1 in the chair and 30 members and 15 visitors present. Program: VerNoN L. Kewttoee: Memories of a veteran entomologist, Dr. F. H. Snow. Dr. Snow was born at Fitchburg, Mass., June 29, 1840, and died Sept. 20, 1908. Hestudied to be a Congregational minister. He was at the University of Kansas 42 years and was very much interested in zoology, botany and entomology. A great deal of teaching was done in the field and 26 or 28 major collections were made. Dr. Kn.iuoae told interesting stories and incidents of some of these trips. He talked of the formation of the insect collection, and mentioned several of Dr. Snow’s famous students. Discussed by Dr. Howarp, who spoke of W. A. Snow, son of Dr. F. H. Snow. Dr. Wm. Scuaus exhibited some books from the Dognin Library. These books were given to Dr. Scuaus personally for raising the money to buy the Dognin collection of Lepidoptera. These books were of the 17th and 18th centuries. Dr.ScuHaus spoke briefly of his impressions of the British Museum after an absence of 13 years. Dr. ALDRICH said that Dr. Williston sold his collection of Diptera to the University of Kansas in order to buy the H. H. Smith Collection of Diptera from the West Indies and Brazil. This latter collection was afterward sold to the American Museum of Natural History in New York City. There was a general discussion on parasitism. Mr. Jack BELLER of the Southern Museum of Los Angeles, California, spoke briefly to the Society. Mr. J. KE. Grar exhibited specimens of the Mexican bean beetle showing some variations. Cuas. T. GREENE, Recording Secretary. APRIL 4, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 175 383D MEETING The 383d meeting was called to order at 8:10 p.m., Thursday, April 1, 1926, in the National Museum with first Vice-president Hystop in the chair, and 18 members and 10 visitors present. The Corresponding Secretary, Mr. RoHwemr, read a circular letter from the International Institute for Intellectual Cooperation connected with the League of Nations requesting information on methods of distribution of technical publications in foreign countries. This matter was referred by the Society to the Corresponding Secretary, with power to act. Dr. A. L. Meuanper, of the College of the City of New York, and Miss GRACE SANDHOUSE of the Federal Horticultural Board, were elected to membership. Program: W. A. Horrman, of Johns Hopkins University: Biological notes on Haitian Anophelines. (Illustrated by lantern slides.) The two species of Anopheles known from Haiti, A. grabhami and A. albimanus, were discussed, emphasis being placed upon the relations between the larvae of these species and their environment. the United States. DEOGRACIAS Vi. VEUADOLIDG (3 5 ons aes PROCEEDINGS eee Geolopical Soviety $02.00 nean hae fevers pees teste cee nee Biological Society... ss. 05.5. Gi-wbe seeks we ee “OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY > President: ALEXANDER WETMORE, Smithsonian insti = Corresponding Secretary: L. B. TuckERMAN, Bureau of Stand Recording Secretary: W. D. Lambert, Coast and Geodetic § : Treasurer: R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey. Sacre * Vou. 17 May 19, 1927 No. 10 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES BOARD OF EDITORS Wiis J, Peters Aanss CHASE Joun B, ReeEsipe, Jr. DEPARTMENT OF TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM BUREAU PLANT INDUSTRY NATIONAL MUSEUM ge SS 7 ASSOCIATE EDITORS ‘¥ L. H. Apams S. A. Ronwer 4 PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY al = E. A. GoLpMAN G. W. Srosz a BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY s its R. F. Griees J. R. Swanton “5 5 BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY of E. WicHERS ron CHEMICAL SOCIETY » re > 2S PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY weayh ia EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN. MONTHLY BY THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCESM/ AY \ Mr. Royau anp GuiLrorD AVES. \_ x : 2 TON i an. ty $3 ee Ba.tImore, MARYLAND pet hn ts re >, ‘ VF O18 H i - Sez 2 eg = % Entered as Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., under the Act of August 24,1912. Acceptance for mailing at special rate of Postage provided for 24 in Section 1103, Act of October 3, i917. Authorized on PRE aU ree (1) short original papers, writte: semi-monthly, on the fourth and ninetee when it appears on the nineteenth only acilitate the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that fo tnotes be. cusses This he oe the official organ f th present a brief record of current scientifi short notes of current scientific li (3) proceedings and programs of meetings notes of events connected with the scientifi publication is an essential feature; ‘a manuscrip reaching _ the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from issue of the JOURNAL for the sellonae: fourt 0 nineteenth, Fespe t Manuscripts may be sent to any pone: of the Board of E clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious m rs. should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page. — Illustrations will be used only when necessary and will be or diagrams of simple character. __ Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof ill be unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted i in final will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. . ) Authors’ fe ee will be furnished at the following sch dule : Copies 4 pps 88 pp. ey ee we 16 50 Seo Sine $2.55 100 1.90 SOO SATO 160 eR aan 5.05 : 2200 250° PRA Rb ee ae 250 3.00. 630,00 Gag) 7am An additional charge of 25 cents will be made for each hsplit page. Covers bearing the name of the aiekee aoe title of the ¢ article, wit nation and date of issue; will be furnished when ordered. Pea RS As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra copies : should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript. se Havas of Subecphen or whee 1 Spier rueaine i ul Sala eae cei RRC (op : Monthly nomibers i... nos 0 oot on os ae ae ee pen ee Remittances should be made payable to wechinuis Mee of. Seikboe addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Waele European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, London. Eachanges.—The Journau does not exchange with other ’ publications. 228 Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, pee that esas is mad within thirty nes" after date of phe following i issue. ae "4 *Volume I, however, from Juns 19, 1911, te : Docsubne 19, 1911, ial be sent for $3, 00. Special rates are given to members of aalea societies affiliated with the Academy, EP ae a RL ee Oe COE ad FLEE, De EOE ERE RL OS I TORE ee ee ee eeu JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vou. 17 May 19, 1927 No. 10 BOTANY.—WNew plants from Central America. —VIII. Pauin GC. STANDLEY, U. 8. National Museum.! The eighteen plants here described as new are chiefly Costa Rican, and the greater part of them are based upon material collected by the writer. Many of these new species belong to the Araceae and Bromeliaceae, families in which the Costa Rican flora is exceptionally rich. Worthy of special note is the new Gynandropsis described from Costa Rica. This plant is strikingly beautiful because of its red flowers, and is well worthy of cultivation for ornamental purposes. Anthurium tilaranense Standl., sp. nov. Plant epiphytic, the caudex very short or elongate, the internodes abbre- viated, the cataphylls weathering into coarse persistent fibers; petioles 15-20 em. long, slender, shallowly sulcate on the upper side, geniculate 1.5-2 cm. below the base of the blade; leaf blades firm-coriaceous, green, glabrous, deeply 3-lobed to within 3.5 cm. of the base, 16-22 cm. long and of equal or greater breadth, the basal lobes 11-14 em. long, oblong, 2.5-4 em. wide, rounded at apex, convex on the lower margin, concave on the inner, the terminal lobe narrowly oblong, 16-22 cm. long, 3-5.5 cm. wide, abruptly narrowed to the cuspidate-acuminate apex, the 2 basal nerves divergent at an angle of about 80 degrees, margined to the base, the secondary nerves of the terminal lobe about 17 on each side, ascending at an acute angle, anastomosing remote from the margin to form a conspicuous collective nerve, all the nerves slender but prominent beneath; peduncles 7-15 cm. long; spathe oblong or ovate-oblong, 3-7 cm. long, 1.2—2.5 cm. wide, green, rounded and cuspidate at apex, united for about 1.5 cm. with the peduncle; spadix sessile, cylindric, rounded at apex, very densely many-flowered, 4-7 cm. long, 6-12 mm. thick, green or reddish. 1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. For the last preceding paper of this series see page 159 of this volume of The JourNau. Received March 23, 1927. 245 246 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES’ VOL. 17, No. 10 Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,254,577, collected on tree in moist forest at Quebrada Serena, southeast of Tilardn, Guanacaste, Costa Rica, altitude about 700 meters, January 27, 1926, by Paul C. Standley and Juvenal Valerio (no. 46310). Collected also at Los Ayotes, near Tilardn, Standley & Valerio 45586. In general appearance as well as in technical characters this plant resembles Engler’s illustration? of A. denudatum Engler, a Colombian species. In that, however, the leaves are essentially different, the lateral lobes being reflexed rather than directed forward, as in the Costa Rican plant. to. 12\ mm long... 6200 .?.. 2. M. Leonardii. Pinnae a single pair, vestigial, often lacking; phyllodia leaf-like. 3. M. extranea. Petioles terete or channeled. Leaflets linear, 0.5 to 1 mm. broad; pods 4 to 5 mm. broad. 4. M. domingensis. Leaflets oblong, 2 to 3 mm. broad; pods 8 to 10 mm. broad. 5. M. mornicola. Prostrate herbs or clambering vines (sometimes woody at base); pods armed with slender setae. Branches not prickly; valves of pod naked............ 6. M. pudica. Branches prickly; valves of pod setose................ 7. M. invisa. 1. Mimosa ceratonta L. Sp. Pl. 5238. 1753 Acacia ceratonia Willd. Sp. Pl. 4: 1091. 1805. Lomophis ceratonia Raf. Sylv. Tellur. 118. 1838. Slender, trailing or climbing vine, up to 6 meters long (sometimes shrubby) ; stems glabrous, angular, armed with flat prickles about 1.5 mm. long; stipules subulate, 2 to 3 mm. long; petioles and rachises together 8 to 12 cm. long, armed with sharp curved prickles 1 mm. long, glabrous; pinnae 1 to 5 pairs, the rachilla slender and armed with small curved prickles; petiolules about 1 mm. long; leaflets 3 to 5 pairs, obliquely obovate, 1 to 1.5 em. long, 5 to 13 mm. broad, rounded at both ends, thin, glabrous, paler beneath, 3-nerved; heads numerous, in terminal racemes or narrow panicles, or few and in the axils of the upper leaves, globular, 10 to 12 mm. in diameter, white or pinkish; peduncles | to 2 cm. long, prickly; calyx 0.75 mm. long, the lobes triangular, unequal; corolla 2 mm. long, the lobes usually 3, elliptic, obtusish, 1 mm. long; stamens usually 6, 5 to 6 mm. long; pod oblong, straight or slightly curved, 3 to 5 cm. long, 12 to 15 mm. broad, flat, thin, glabrous, shining, not 256 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 10 jointed, the margins armed with flat hooked prickles 2 to 2.5 mm. long; seeds dull, flat, oval, 5 mm. long, 3 mm. broad, glabrous, 7 or 8 in each pod. Type locality’: Tropical America, perhaps the West Indies. Distribution: Hispaniola to St. Vincent. Specimens examined: Dominican Repustic: In clearing, vicinity of Laguna, Samand4 Peninsula, Abbott 399. Common creeper in secondary growth, Laguna, Abbott 430. Vicinity of Samana, Abbott 476. Without locality, Wright, Parry & Brummel 66. A well marked species, easily distinguished by its large leaves and broad, not jointed pods. 2. Mimosa Leonardii Britt. & Rose, sp. nov. Low shrub; twigs slender, gray, terete, glabrous or the younger minutely puberulent; prickles paired, infrastipular, reflexed, 3 to 4 mm. long, very sharp; petiole, rachis, and rachilla strongly flattened, channeled above, glabrous, armed with ‘small, single or paired, sharp, recurved prickles, the petiole with rachis 3 to 6 em. long; pinnae 2 or 3 pairs, widely separated; leaflets 1 to 3 pairs, oblong, 4 to 8 mm. long, 2 to 4 mm. broad, rounded at apex, round and oblique at base, thick, entire, glabrous; veins and midrib obscure, the pair of lateral veins joining the midrib at base; peduncles axillary, single or in clusters, 8 mm. long or less, puberulent; flowers sessile, in heads 6 to 7 mm. broad, pinkish; calyx 0.5 mm. long, 4-lobed, the lobes low, blunt, minutely ciliolate; corolla 1.75 mm. long, the tube narrowly campanulate, the lobes 4, erect, oval, acutish at apex; stamens 5 to 8, the filaments glabrous, 2.5 to 4 mm. long, the anthers oval, 0.5 mm. long; ovary 1.25 mm. long, pubescent; pod 4 to 5 cm. long, 6 to 8 mm. broad, flat, curved, the margins thickened, 8 to 10-jointed, the joints square, glabrous, purplish; seeds orbicu- lar, flat, 2.5 mm. in diameter. Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,300,376, collected on a dry bank of the Puilboreau Road near Ennery, Haiti, altitude 350 meters, January 22, 1926, by E. C. Leonard (no. 9105). This species is a very distinct one, easily recognized among the other West . Indian mimosas by the armed, flattened petioles and rachises. 3. MIMOSA EXTRANEA Benth. Trans. Linn. Soe. Bot. 30: 433. 1875 Slender unarmed shrub up to 3 meters high; branches erect or ascending, © reddish brown, glabrous, the younger ridged, the ridges extending in 3’s from the bases of the phyllodia; stipules not seen; phyllodia linear, 3 to 6 cm. long, 2 to 5 mm. broad, obtuse at apex, narrowed at base, firm, dark green, prominently 3-nerved, often without leaflets; pinnae minute, 1 pair at the tip of the phyllodium, each with a single pair of leaflets; leaflets nearly orbic- ular, 1 mm. in diameter; inflorescence a terminal panicle, the flowers capi- tate, numerous; peduncles | to 2 cm. long, puberulent; heads globose, about 8 mm. in diameter at flowering; calyx 0.75 mm. long, the lobes 4, triangular; corolla 3 mm. long, funnelform, the lobes 4, elliptic, 1 mm. long, obtusish, pink at tip; stamens usually 6, 4 to 5 mm. long; ovary pubescent; style equal- ing the stamens; pods 3 to 4 em. long, 5 to 6 mm. broad, 5 to 8-jointed, shghtly constricted at the joints, flat, reddish brown, seeds flat, 3.5 mm. long, 3 rim. broad. Type locality: Santo Domingo. MAY 19, 1927 ROSE AND LEONARD: SOME MIMOSAE 257 Specimens examined: Haiti: Puilboreau Road in vicinity of Ennery, Départment de |’Artibonite, Leonard 8815, 8828, 8882. Between Gonaives and La Hotte Rochés, Nash & Taylor 1548. This is the only species of Mimosa with well developed phyllodia. 4. Mimosa DOMINGENSIS (Bertero) Benth. Journ. Bot. Hook. 4: 409. 1842 Acacia domingensis Bertero; A. DC. Prodr. 2: 464. 1825. Mimosa diplacantha Benth. Trans. Linn. Soc. Bot. 30: 424. 1875. Shrub; twigs branching, the older terete, gray, the younger obscurely angled, reddish, glabrous, sparingly armed with small curved prickles; stipules linear, spinelike, 1 to 2 mm. long; petioles with rachis 2 to 5 cm. long, pulvinate at base, armed at the insertion of the pinnae with a pair of curved prickles; pinnae 1 or 2 pairs, pulvinate, channeled above, 1 to 1.5 em. long, unarmed or bearing an occasional curved prickle; leaflets 7 to 10 pairs, the lower pair reduced to minute scales, the remainder sessile on a minute pulvinus, linear- oblong, 3 to 5 mm. long, 0.5 to 1 mm. broad, rounded at both ends, oblique at base, firm, glabrous, obscurely 3-nerved; flowers capitate, borne in the axils of the upper leaves; peduncles elongating to 3 em., puberulent and glandular, reddish; heads ovoid, about 10 mm. long and 18 mm. broad at flowering, pink; calyx 1 mm. long, the lobes minute, triangular; corolla 2.5 em. long, the lobes 4, triangular-ovate, 0.75 mm. long, acutish; stamens 8, 4 to 5 mm. long, the filaments tapering at tips, the style slightly exceeding the stamens, the stigma minute; pods 2.5 to 3 cm. long, 4 to 5 mm. broad, 5 to 7-jointed, slightly constricted at the joints, flat, glabrous, reddish, acuminate at tip, narrowed at base; seeds blackish, flat, nearly orbicular, 2.5 mm. in diameter, glabrous. Type locality: Santo Domingo, the type collected by Bertero. Specimen examined: Dominican REepusuic: Azua, Rose, Fitch & Russell 4018. Mimosa domingensis is a well marked species, distinguished by its linear leaflets. The well developed pulvini indicate that the plant is sensitive. 5. Mimosa MORNICOLA Urb. Symb. Ant. 7: 228. 1912 Scandent shrub; twigs armed with curved spines 2 mm. long, the young branches minutely white-puberulent, often unarmed, the petioles decurrent in 3 parallel blackish costae, the intercostal areas brown; stipules filiform, 3 to 9 mm. long, subulate, more or less curved; leaves 4 to 7 em. long, with 4 to 9 pairs of pinnae, the rachis and rachillae grooved and minutely pubescent above, armed (in the older leaves) with 2 or 3 infrastipular curved prickles, the pinnae 1.5 to 2.5 em. long, rather strongly curved, terminated by a pair of curved prickles 1.5 mm. long, the younger leaves unarmed or with a few prickles; leaflets 6 to 9 pairs, becoming black or brown when dry, the first pair reduced to minute subulate scales, the remainder oblong, 4 to 6 mm. long, 2 to 3 mm. broad, rounded or broadly obtuse at apex, obliquely truncate or subcordate at base, entire, glabrous on both surfaces, the midrib obscure above, prominent beneath; inflorescence paniculate, 10 em. long, minutely puberulent; flowers numerous, in ovoid-globose heads 4 to 6 mm. long; calyx 1 mm. long, 4-lobed, the lobes triangular; corolla funnelform, 1.5 to 1.8 mm. long, the lobes triangular-ovate; stamens 4 to 9, the filaments about 3 mm. long; ovary elliptic, villous; pods 5 to 6 cm. long, 8 to 10 mm. broad, 5 to 7- jointed, minutely puberulent, the margins undulate; seeds flat, nearly orbic- ular, 4 mm. in diameter. 258 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 10 Type locality: Morne Bonpére, Haiti. Type collected by Buch (no. 685). — Specimens examined: Haiti: Morne Bonpére, Buch 685 (photograph and fragment of leaf). Bank of stream, l’Atalaye Plantation, vicinity of St. Michel, Leonard 7014. DoMINicaN Repusiic: Azua, Rose, Fitch & Russell 3994. Nigua, Faris 447. A good deal of variation is shown by the specimens cited. Faris’s no. 447 from Nigua is a flowering twig with the facies of the type, but differing in its armed leaves and greater number of pinnae (8 to 10 pairs), and also in its more numerous leaflets (8 or 9 pairs on each pinna) and stamens (6 to 9). The type of M. mornicola is described as an unarmed shrub with not more than 8 pairs of pinnae, each with 7 or fewer pairs of leaflets, and flowers with but 4 or 5 stamens. Mature twigs with fruit, represented by Rose, Fitch and Russell’s no. 3994 and Leonard’s 7014, have both stem and leaves armed with sharp prickles. These differences are probably due to the age of the twig and variable environmental factors. The Azua specimen differs further in the slightly larger leaflets, which are broader in proportion than those of the other plants examined. 6. Mimosa pupica L. Sp. Pl. 518. 1753 Mimosa pudica glabrata A. DC. Prodr. 2: 426. 1825. Herbaceous, or woody at base, branched, usually prostrate, up to 5 dm. long, the stems armed with flat, straight or slightly curved prickles 1 to 4 mm. long, hispid, hirsute, or glabrate; stipules lanceolate, acuminate, 3 to 6 mm. long, striate, hirsute, glabrate, sometimes ciliate; petioles slender, 1 to 6 cm. long, pulvinate at base, deflexing when touched, hirsute or glab- rate, often more or less finely puberulent above; pinnae 1 or 2 pairs (when 2, the pairs approximate), 1 to 6 cm. long, hirsute or glabrate, pulvinate at base, the pulvinus and channeled upper surface finely pubescent; first pair of leaflets borne at the summit of the pulvinus, reduced to small linear spreading bracts about 1 mm. long; normai leaflets 15 to 25 pairs, narrowly oblong, 3 to 10 mm. long, 1.5 to 2 mm. broad, acutish or obtuse at apex, oblique and rounded at base, thin, glabrous above, sparingly strigose beneath, meeting above in pairs when touched; heads ovoid, 8 to 10 mm. long, pink or pur- plish, axillary; peduncles 1 to 3 cm. long, glabrous or sparingly hirsute; bracts obovate or oblong, 0.5 to 0.75 mm. long, acutish, the lowermost ciliate; calyx minute, the lobes unequal, awnlike; corolla funnelform, about 2 mm. long, the lobes 4, nearly 1.5 mm. long, obtusish; stamens 4, long-exerted, pink or white; pods numerous, crowded in a head, linear-oblong, 1 to 1.5 cm. long, 3 to 4 mm. broad, 2 to 5-jointed, constricted at the joints, the sides glabrous, the margins prickly-hispid; seeds brown, flat, nearly orbicular, 2.56 mm. in diameter. Type locality: Brazil. Distribution: West Indies and continental tropical America. Specimens examined: Harti: Open mountain slope, Furey, Leonard 4290. Along small stream, Mt. La Cidre, Leonard 7536. Meadow, Dondon, Leonard 8589, 8657. Roadside, Plaisance, Leonard 9179. Meadow, Pilate, Leonard 9588. River bank, Gros Morne, Leonard 9894. Dominican Repusiic: Wet meadow along railroad, Sdnchez, Samand MAY 19, 1927 COLLINS: POTSHERDS 2909 Peninsula, Abbott 14. Haina, Faris 39, 159. Sdnchez, Rose, Fitch & Russell 4352. Without locality, Wright, Parry & Brummel. This is the common sensitive plant of tropical America, so called because it responds to irritation by a rapid drooping of the petioles and folding to- gether of opposed leaflets. The plants are often found in this “sleeping” condition in the early morning, but gradually expand as warmed by the rising sun. Under cultivation the plant often becomes robust and assumes an erect position. Its common name in the Dominican Republic is morir-vivir; in northern Haiti it is called ronté. 7. Mimosa InvisA Mart. Herb. Fl. Bras. 121. 1837 Schrankia brachycarpa Benth. Journ. Bot. Hook. 2: 130.°1840. Mimosa diplotricha Wright in Sauv. Pl. Cub. 34. 1873. A herbaceous clambering vine 1 to 2 m. long, the branches angled with numerous reflexed prickles, pilose when young; pinnae 4 to 8 pairs; leaflets many pairs, oblong-linear, 3 to 4 mm. long, glabrous on both sides, ciliate; flowers in dense heads; calyx and corolla glabrous; stamens twice as many as the petals, purplish; pods linear-oblong, 1 to 2 cm. long, setose on the valves and margin, more or less pubescent. Type locality: Rio de Janeiro, Brazil. Distribution: Brazil, north to Mexico and the West Indies. Specimen examined: Haiti: In meadow at sea-level, near Port Margot, Nash 303. The type of M. znvisa from Brazil has not been examined. It is possible that the common North American plant which has long passed under this name is specifically distinct. EXCLUDED SPECIES Mimosa ANGUSTIFOLIA Lam. Encycl. 1: 12. 1783 Erect tree; bark brown or grayish; wood white and very strong; leaves with 4 or 5 pairs of pinnae each bearing from 30 to 50 pairs of narrow leaflets, these green above and pale beneath; flowers racemose; pods 10 to 13 cm. long, 6to8 mm. broad, appressed, yellowish; seeds small, orbicular, usually 12 in each pod. Type locality: Santo Domingo. Plant not seen. The racemose inflorescence and long, nonjointed pods are characteristic of the genus Acacia, to which this species, probably, should be referred. ARCHEOLOGY .—Potsherds from Choctaw village sites in Mississippt.} Henry B. Couuins, Jr., U. 8. National Museum. (Communi- cated by D. I. BUSHNELL, JR.) | Archeological research in the southeastern states can probably never reach the point of exactness that it has in the Southwest. There are 1 Published by permission of the Bureau of American Ethnology, Smithsonian In- stitution. Received April 12, 1927. 260 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 10 no stone ruins, and barring a few exceptional kitchen-middens along the coasts, no extensive refuse heaps showing successive culture layers. The climate, furthermore, is not such as to preserve textiles, basketry, wood-work or other perishable objects so that about all that is now left of the once high material culture of the Southern tribes is the pottery and the ornaments and implements of stone, shell, and bone. It is very desirable, therefore, to seize upon every available source of tribal identification of the cultures represented, and to accomplish this end there is probably no safer beginning than to locate the historic Indian village sites and to study their type of cultural remains for comparison with other sites of unknown age. This method was followed during the past two summers when for several months the writer carried on preliminary archeological work in Mississippi for the Bureau of American Ethnology in coéperation with the Mississippi Department of Archives and History, represented by Mr. H. H. Knoblock.? The region chosen for investigation was the east central section of the state, the former home of the Choctaw. A brief reconncissance of this area was first made and a number of mounds and Choctaw village sites were located and later explored. Wherever possible, surface collections of potsherds, flint artifacts, etc., weremade. Itis to such collections of potsherds that attention is here called, for these seem to indicate that there was a definite type of historic Choctaw pottery, entirely distinct from that of any other region. In the accompanying plate are shown examples of this type of pottery from the sites of two old Choctaw villages, Chickachae in the northeastern part of Clarke County, and Ponta (Coosa) in northern Lauderdale County. According to Prof. H. 8. Halbert, who worked for many years among the Choctaw in Mississippi, Ponta was occu- pied as late as 1846.3 The time of the abandonment of Chickachae is not definitely known but it probably took place between 1810 and 1834, during which period the greater part of the Choctaw lands were signed away and their former owners forced to migrate west of the Mississippi River. The first reference to Ponta and Chickachae is found in the manuscript journal of Régis du Roullet, the French army officer, who in 1729 made the first official exploration of the Choctaw country. The two villages again appear on the map and in the 2 Archeological and anthropometrical work in Mississippi. Smithsonian Misc. Coll. 78 (1). 1926. 3 Bernard Romans’ map of 1772. Publ. Miss. Hist. Soc. 6: 415-439. 4In Mississippi Department of Archives and History and in Manuscript Division of the Library of Congress. MAY 19, 1927 COLLINS: POTSHERDS 261 Figs. 1-7. Potsherds from site of Chickachae, old Choctaw village in northeastern Clarke Co., Miss. Figs. 8-16. Potsherds from site of Ponta, Northern Lauderdale Co., Miss. 262 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES’ VOL. 17, No. 10 accompanying report of Capt. Bernard Romans, dated 1772, based on his exploration of the Choctaw country for the English colonial government during the preceding year. It was principally by means of the Romans map that Prof. Halbert, with his intimate knowledge of the geography and early history of the region, was able to locate the sites of many of the old Choctaw villages. The pottery from these two sites, of which typical decorated pieces are shown in the plate, is of a hard uniform texture and is usually tempered with sand so fine that it can hardly be detected by the unaided eye. Both inner and outer surfaces are smooth and some- times rather highly polished. In color the sherds range from light red and buff through gray into black, the largest proportion being buff or hght gray. The color was usually produced by polishing the surface, merely intensifying the shade to which the firing had brought the clay. A few sherds, however, most of them from Chickachae, have received a slip of light brick red on both surfaces. Little can be learned from the sherds as to the original form of the vessels except that most of them appear to have been bowls of medium. depth. The preponderance of decorated rims and the corresponding scarcity of rims among the many plain pieces suggests that the decoration was largely confined to the upper part of the vessel. As may be seen from the plate, this decoration, which is the most important and character- istic feature of the pottery, consists of straight or curved bands made of finely incised parallel lines. ‘These bands, formed usually by five or six lines, range in width from about 5 to 10 millimeters. The uniform distance between the lines, as well as their uniform depth, shows that they were made by trailing a fine, comb-like implement across the surface of the vessel while it was still soft. Among the 118 decorated sherds of this type from Ponta, there are fewer than half a dozen in - which the lines seem to have been drawn free hand. ‘The lot of 67 similar sherds from Chickachae shows a slightly larger proportion on which the lines are somewhat irregular. The bands on the majority of sherds from Chickachae are also a little broader than those from Ponta, the average width being between 8 and 9 millimeters as com- pared with about 6 millimeters for the Ponta pieces, and the lines composing them are likewise somewhat deeper. With these slight variations, however, the ware from the two sites is identical. | | No other well defined ceramic type is represented in the potsherds from Ponta and Chickachae. Less than 20 sherds from these two MAY 19, 1927 COLLINS: POTSHERDS 263 sites bear decorations other than of the type described: these few are of cruder ware and are meagerly ornamented with irregular incised lines. There is, in addition, comparatively little undecorated ware of a cruder type; the greater part of the plain sherds, of which there are many, are of the same smooth compact ware as the decorated pieces. The potsherds from Chickachae and Ponta represent the only ade- quate samples that were obtained. Very scanty collections of sherds were picked up on the sites of Yowanne in Wayne County, Okhata talaya in Newton County, and Halunlawasha in Neshoba County, and yet among the handful of sherds thus obtained one or more of the banded type was found at each of the three places. The presence of this single type of decorated ware from such widely separated Choctaw settlements, covering the entire area known to have been occupied by that tribe, suggests very strongly that it was the prevailing type of pottery in use at some period of their history. It may safely be regarded as historic, in the sense that it is found thus far only at Choctaw sites known to have been occupied as late as the 19th century, but further than this its age cannot at present be determined. In texture and color this Choctaw pott:cry is similar to a widespread type from the mounds in western and central Mississippi and in parts of Arkansas and Louisiana. It is strikingly different, however, from the prevailing type of mound pottery from eastern Mississippi. ‘The pottery from the mounds of this section is usually rough and crumbly and contains rather coarse tempering material. The decorations most often found are produced either by ‘‘brushing”’ or by impressing cords or coarse fabrics on the soft surface. Sometimes there is an ornamenta- tion consisting of carelessly incised lines or punctations, and, infre- quently, of the stamped curvilinear designs so common in Georgia and Florida. It is too early to speculate, on the basis of this ceramic distribution, as to whether this Choctaw pottery developed locally or whether it had its origin to the west. Consideration of this question, as well as that of a possible earlier occupancy of the Choctaw territory by some other tribe, must be deferred until more complete information is available. It would be very desirable, for this purpose, to have additional collections of potsherds from other known Choctaw village sites and from the little known mounds and unidentified sites of central and western Mississippi. 264 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 1J RADIOTELEGRAPHY.—Ezperimental confirmation of the influence af a low-resistivity layer subsoil on the forward inclination of radio waves. J. HE. I. Carrns, Watheroo Magnetic Observatory, Department of Terrestrial Magnetism, Carnegie Institution of Washington. (Communicated by Louis A. BauEr.) On the conclusion of the resistivity-survey of the region about the Watheroo Magnetic Observatory, at the end of June 1926, it was seen that the characteristics of the terrain were such as to afford means of experimental confirmation, or otherwise, of the suggestion, first put forward by Hack,! that ground-water (or a low-resistivity layer), at a depth of a fraction of a wave-length below the ground-surface, would almost entirely annul the ‘“‘forward”’ inclination experienced by radio waves when travelling over ground of considerable resistivity. The survey at Watheroo showed the surface layer, down to depths varying from 5 to 10 meters, of the sand-plain which comprises the greater part of the surrounding country, to be of very high mean resistivity, falling off rapidly below this surface layer to value less than one-tenth per cent of that at the surface at depths of 60 meters in most cases. At one place, about 2 miles east of the Observatory, the low-resistivity layer breaks through to the surface, the resistivity down to 100 meters being less than 400 chms per centimeter cube. Thus the conditions were admirably suitable. Although Hack had shown previously that the inclination would be annulled, measure- ments of resistivity of undisturbed soil were not at that time available. These measurements, at Watheroo were made at low frequency (ap- proximately 60 cycles), and the results are accurate to within one per cent.’ Two sites only were selected for the measurements, namely, at the places of highest and lowest resistivities, respectively, upon the con- clusion of the survey. ‘The highest was at the mid-point of the “sur-— vey line P” about three-quarters mile due north of the Observatory, and had a mean value down to 5 meters depth of approximately, 1,500,000 ohms per centimeter cube. The point of lowest resistivity was selected principally to test the accuracy of the apparatus, since it was of such low value down to a depth of 100 meters, that the in- clination must have been negligible. The variations of resistivity with depth at the point P and for mid-point of section e, line 2 (the low-resistivity spot) are given in Table 1. At P the ground sloped 1 J. ZenNNECK, Wireless Telegraphy (English Translation), pp. 260-262, 1915. 2L. H. Gisu and W. J. Roonry, Terr. Mag., 30, 161-188, 1925. MAY 19, 1927 CAIRNS: INCLINATION OF RADIO WAVES 265 backwards towards the transmitter at an angle of about one-quarter degree (measured roughly with a theodolite), while at section e, line 2, the surface sloped away from the transmitter at an angle of 1.3 degree. Observations were made on one station only, 6WF (wave TABLE 1.—VaRisATIONS OF MEAN RESISTIVITY WITH DEPTHS AT WATHEROO MAGNETIC OBSERVATORY MEAN RESISTIVITY FOR POINT DEPTH 12 Mid-point section e, line 2 m ohms per cm. cube ohms per cm. cube 2.5 1,016,000 301 ») 1,417,000 236 10 954,500 205 20 214,000 223 30 - 39,000 224 60 1,480 256 TOKO. 8 TA cS oit thes ies oa SRP oe 310 length 1,250 meters), since the times of transmission from this station were definitely known. ‘The Observatory is almost exactly due north of the transmitter, and 132 miles from it. APPARATUS The apparatus consisted of a portable Hertzian rod oscillator, mounted on the telescope of a theodolite, and connected to a screened five-valve receiver by leads passing through a thick iron tube. The rod was 7 feet above ground when set up for measurements. The rod consisted of two five-foot lengths of thin wood joined by ebonite strips and stayed at the ends by strings passing to a king-post at the center. Upon the rod, the wire forming the aerial was strained, and ~ tied at intervals with thread to prevent movement relative to the rod itself. The straining of the rod introduced a slight bend, thus inserting a small component of the oscillator normal to its length; the means for eliminating the effect of this are described below. The screening was effective enough to reduce the stray pick-up to zero, and the effects due to the unsymmetrical capacities of the individual halves of the rod were reduced considerably by means of a partial ground to the mid-point of the oscillator-system, as described by Greenleaf W. Pickard.? The oscillator was mounted on the top of 3GREENLEAF W. Picxarp, The Polarization of Radio Waves, Inst. Radio Kn- gineers, 1925. ; 266 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 10 the screening box containing the receiver, and the observer stood on another box at the center, immediately opposite to the lead-in tube. The ground was cleared for a distance of at least 15 feet all round the point where observations were being made. The receiver was caused to oscillate, thus giving a heterodyne note with the carrier of the received wave. ‘The circuit employed is shown in Figure 1. TO AMPLIFIER PARTIAL GROUND TO [RON SCREEN, THEODOLITE, AND FILAMENT BATTERY Fig. 1.—Diagrammatic sketch of set-up METHOD OF OBSERVATION The two halves of the oscillator were not in the same straight line, so that the procedure for observation had to be devised to eliminate the effect due to the fixed component of the rod normal to its length. A short length of the leads also, about 3 inches, was unscreened, so that the procedure had to include means for eliminating the pick-up which these introduced. One side of the rod was marked Up, the other Down, one lead was marked N, and when N was connected to the north terminal of the rod, the arrangement was termed Posztion A ; when NV was connected to the south terminal, the arrangement was called Posttion B. The schedule for a single observation then was: (I) Rod Up—(1) position A, vertical circle east; (2) position B, vertical circle east; (3) position B, vertical circle west; (4) position A, vertical circle west. (II) Rod Down—(1) position A, vertical circle west; (2) position B, vertical circle west; (3) position 6, vertical circle east; (4) position A, vertical circle east. MAY 19, 1927 CAIRNS: INCLINATION OF RADIO WAVES 267 By this method of complete reversal, the results should be free from the spurious effects due to imperfections in the oscillator and lack of symmetry, stray pick-up, and incorrect setting of the horizontal circle on the bearing of the transmitter. In the case of the observations at P, 20 readings were made for each combination, to obtain a fairly reliable mean, then 20 on the next, and so forth. A slightly variable factor was introduced by the wind, which during both sets of readings was blowing from the west, and causing the rod to vibrate consider- ably. This caused, on occasions, a noticeable blurring of the minima. TABLE 2.—ReESuLTS OF OBSERVATIONS AT WATHEROO MAGNETIC OBSERVATORY ON Station 6WF TRANSMITTING AT WavE-LENGTH 1,250 METERS INCL’N INCL’N Mae ae y |S) | EES fc ceo SRR ae Res.-survey Up, A, E 20 +7.6 line P Up, B, E 20 —7.2 Up. 3B We 20 —9.6 Uip;..AGeW. 20 a0: Oh i |(—'- ‘ Doe AW 20 186 0.6 | Night | +0.2 | —0.4 Down, B, W 20 —7.6 Down, B, E 20 —9.5 Down, A, E 20 +6.6 Middle section | Up, A, EF 10 +6.8 |) é, res.-Sur- Up, B, E 10 —8.1 || vey line 2 Up, B, W 10 —8.2 || Up, A, W 10 +10.1 Det AW, ty | fs ee ee ae ety) Down, B, W 10 —5.6 Down, B, E 10 —9.4 Down, A, E 10 +7.7 It is shown‘ that the ratio of the horizontal to the vertical-electric force, on Zenneck’s theory, is given by the formula NS tang (1) = ee ———— 9 — tan x eatin where m = nk p/2 X 10", m = nk; p/2 X 10", and n = frequency, k = dielectric constant of air, k!' = dielectric constant of the soil, p = resistivity in ohms per centimeter cube, and 8 = the angle of the forward inclination of the wave-front to the normal. When the 4J. A. Furemine, The Principles of Electric Wave Telegraphy and Telephony, 4th edi- tion, 1919. 268 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 10 rod makes the same angle with the horizontal as the wave-front does with the normal to the ground, no sound is heard in the telephones. The rod was rotated, therefore, about its horizontal axis, with its long axis normal to the wave-front, until a minimum was heard. RESULTS OF OBSERVATIONS The results of the observations are shown in Table 2. The maxi- mum departure from the mean of the readings in any one set was 4°, and that on one occasion only. In general, the departures were 2° or less, and the mean may be taken as accurate to 1°. _ DISCUSSION OF RESULTS In each case, the resultant inclination to the ground normal is seen to be negative, and this, if real, is most probably due to two causes: (1) The vibration of the rod caused by the wind; and (2) the fact that the minima in the positions giving negative inclination were sharper Fig. 2.—Plot of wave-front angle of forward inclination in degrees for wave- length = 1250 meters against resistivity in ohms per centimeter cube. than in the positive positions. In any case, the resultant inclination is less than the accuracy of the mean readings, and it may be taken, therefore, that it is either zero or negligible. From an inspection of Figure 2, which is plotted from values computed according to formula (1), assuming a value for the dielectric constant of the soil as 2 (the value of k, has little effect on the value for tan 8), it will be seen that if the surface layer alone were concerned in the conduction of the wave, an inclination of the order of 20° should have been observed at P and none at all at section e, line 2. From the circumstance that MAY 19, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 269 no inclination was observed in either instance, it is evident that the low-resistivity layer below the surface is sufficient to entirely annul the forward inclination of radio waves, at least those of wave-length 1,250 meters. Moreover, from Table 1, it may be deduced that the mean depth to which waves of this wave-length penetrate, is at least 45 meters, for at that depth, the mean resistivity at P is such as to give a forward inclination of 1°. SUMMARY Over soil, the mean resistivity of which had been measured in situ down to depths of 60 to 100 meters, and which consisted of a layer of sand of an exceptionally high resistivity over a layer at no consider- able depth of very low resistivity, radio waves of wave-length 1,250 meters were found to experience no forward inclination. This is regarded as being more definite proof than has hitherto been given of the effect of ground-water or a low-resistivity layer a short distance below the surface, owing to the greater precision of the resistivity measurements of the undisturbed soil. I wish to express appreciation of the interest shown and the facilities given by Mr. H. F. Johnston, Observer-in-Charge at the Watheroo Magnetic Observatory; also thanks to Observer Mr. F. W. Wood for material assistance in transporting apparatus and recording, and to Mr. W. J. Rooney, who made the resistivity-survey of the region for the resistivity-values at the two points of observation in advance of publication. PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 948TH MEETING The 948th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club, January 8, 1927. The address of the evening was given by the retiring president, WILLIAM Bowtn, on The part played by isostasy in geophysics and geology. (Published in the JOURNAL, 17: 101-117, March 4, 1927). 949TH MEETING 949th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club, January 22, 1927. Program: R. L. Sanrorp, The problem of magnetic analysis. The idea that the magnetic properties of iron and steel can be used as criteria of their mechanical properties has been the subject of speculation and experiment for more than forty years. In view of the fact that the application of this 270 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES’ VOL. 17, No. 10 idea, which has been termed magnetic analysis, is still in the experimental stage, it seems desirable to consider what progress has been made, to ask ourselves whether further effort is justified, and, if so, along what line investi- gation should be directed. New testing methods have been developed, making possible much investi- gational work that otherwise could not have been done. The large mass of data which has been obtained indicates a close connection between the mag- netic and mechanical properties of steel. No positive evidence has yet been obtained to controvert the idea that there is a definite relaticn between magnetic and mechanical properties, and in view of the great need for a practical method for the nondestructive test- ing of iron and steel and their products further effort in this field appears to be amply justified. Main attention should be given to fundamental investigation because it is necessary to know the underlying principles in order to realize to the fullest extent the possibilities of magnetic analysis. The greatest obstacle at present is the effect of mechanical strain. Mechanical and magnetic properties are both modified by strain, but not necessarily to a corresponding degree and this factor must be eliminated or evaluated before the fundamental rela- tionships can be discovered. If this can be done the practical application should be a relatively simple matter. (Author’s abstract). The paper was discussed by Messrs. Wu1rTE AND HUMPHREYS. P. R. Hey, The constant of gravitation. The Bureau of Standards has had under way for the past three years a redetermination of the Newtonian constant of gravitation, the quantity k in the formula for the force of attrac- tion between two bodies Force = eae The method used was that of the Cavendish torsion balance, set up in a vacuum. The large attracting masses were placed in two positions, at right angles, and the difference in the time of swing noted. This amounted to about five and a half minutes. The last experimenter who used this method (Karl Braun, 1896) obtained a difference of only about three quarters of a minute. The programme of observations has been finished, but the calculations are not yet completed. It is expected that the results will be ready to announce in a couple of months. (Author’s abstract). The paper was discussed by Messrs. Breit, WHITE, Curtis, DRYDEN, PRIEST, WADLEIGH AND CROOK. H. E. Merwin, Recording Secretary. THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 427TH MEETING The 427th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club, March 9, 1927, President Butts presiding. Informal communication: HucH D. Misrr: Shapes of dren pebbles in San Juan County, Utah. The question, ‘‘Do stream pebbles have any characteristic shape?,”’ has been asked by many geologists. On this question MAY 19, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 271 I here record briefly my observations in the canyon of San Juan River, Utah, in 1921. Pebbles of many kinds of rocks, including sedimentary and crystalline rocks, and vein materials, constitute the gravel deposits on widely scattered benches in the canyon. The deposits occur at several different levels up to 600 feet above the river, and consist largely of pebbles that have been derived from pre-Cambrian and later rocks in the San Juan Mountains of south- western Colorado. ‘The pebbles from these mountains have been transported by streams for distances that range from 200 to more than 300 miles. Their shapes, as well as the shapes of the pebbles that are derived from the rocks along or near the Canyon, are the result of stream wear. Such wear is of course influenced by the nature and structure of the pebbles, and the shape of the original rock fragments. The pebbles are mostly 1 to 3 inches in diameter and most of them are well rounded. The well rounded pebbles consist of quartzite, limestone, gneiss, schist, sandstone, conglomerate, vein quartz, porphyritic igneous rocks, and granitoid igneous rocks. Also the well rounded pebbles contain a consider- able proportion of flattened ellipsoids rather than spheres or flattened spheroids. Many platy rocks such as schist and laminated sandstone natu- rally break into flat fragments and readily yield flattened pebbles when the corners are rounded off. Homogeneous rocks such as granite, andesite and vein quartz might be expected to yield some spherical pebbles, but not a single sphere was observed by me. All pebbles of these and other kinds of homogeneous rocks are flattened. The flattened ellipsoidal form of the pebbles may be due to the original shape of the rock fragments, none of which would likely have equal dimensions as does a cube. Pebbles that are not well rounded include flint, agate, and chalcedony. I believe their brittleness and also their great hardness are factors that in- fluence their shapes. I believe they may break into large and small frag- ments at times during their life history. Many subangular pebbles are bounded by facets which were formed by the breaking of the rock along laminae or other weak planes. Wuind-faceted pebbles were not noted by me but some pebbles, especially those of limestone, were furrowed with minute grooves that were produced by sand blasts in the few small areas of dune sand. (Awthor’s abstract.) Program: W. P. Wooprine and P. V. Rounpy: Geology and orl develop- ment of the Elk Hills, California. The Elk Hills le along the southwest edge of the San Joaquin Valley in the outer belt of foothills of the Temblor Range. The only outcropping beds are late Pliocene nonmarine deposits called the Tulare formation. ‘They consist of alternating beds of sand and clay. The sand is clean and arkosic, cross-bedded, and has a complex pattern of gravel courses. ‘The clay is silty and massively bedded, and carries calcareous layers ranging even in the same layer from calcareous clay to limestone. The sands are alluvial fan deposits and the clays seem to be mud-flat and playa deposits. ‘The alternation of these beds at any one place is so perfect and on so large a scale that it demands some kind of periodic control and probably the simplest kind of periodic control is periodic subsidence of the San Joaquin Valley. The oil-bearing beds lie in the upper part of the Etchegoin forma- tion, which underlies the Tulare formation. Immediately above the main oil zone and lying in nonmarine beds is a thin layer carrying some curious fossils, known as Scalez petrolia. ‘These fossils are calcareous opercula of freshwater snails similar to living pond snails of the genus Viviparus, which, 272 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 10 however, have horny opercula. The Scales-bearing bed is a very reliable datum plane and is used to great advantage by the oil operators. Structurally the Elk Hills consist of two main gently folded anticlines. Narrow steeply folded anticlines lie along or near the south edge of the hills and also at the northwest edge. ‘These little anticlines probable are very shallow and in some way are the offspring of the main folds, but their origin is not clear. The main oil zone of the eastern part of the field hes immediately below the Scalez-bearing bed. The gas produced in the central part of the field is obtained from beds above this zone. Contours drawn on the Scalez-bear- ing bed show that the dip of the oil-bearing beds is twice as great as the dip of the surface beds. Faults that have a maximum stratigraphic displace- ment of about 250 feet at the horizon of the oil-bearing beds have not been recognized at the surface. During the last 64 years the field has produced more than 76,000,000 barrels of oil. (Authors’ abstract.) , CHARLES W. GILMORE: Fossil footprints in the Grand Canyon. ‘Two trips to the Grand Canyon, Arizona, were undertaken for the dual purpose of securing collections of fossil tracks for the U. S. National Museum and pre- paring an exhibit in sztu for the National Park Service. The tracks occur in the Coconino, Hermit, and Supai formations at levels of 1,000, 1,300 and 1760 feet, respectively, below the present rim of the Canyon wall. Both of the projects were successfully carried out, a collec- tion of slabs of footprints some 4,400 pounds in weight were secured for the National collections and a track-covered surface several hundred square feet in area was uncovered by the side of the Hermit Trail in the Coconino sandstone to form a permanent exhibit of the tracks as they occur in nature. All of the tracks in the Coconino occur on the inclined surfaces of the strong cross-bedding of the sandstone, and all but three of the hundreds of tracks and trails observed were headed up the slope. No satisfactory ex- planation of this fact has yet been obtained. Adequate ichnite faunas have now been established for the Coconino and Hermit, and a beginning made on a fauna for the older Supai. In all, 24 genera and 33 species of fossil tracks have now been recognized, distributed as follows: Coconino, 15 genera and 22 species; Hermit, 6 genera and 8 species; Supai, 3 genera and 3 species. Comparison of these faunas shows them to be absolutely distinct from one another as not a single genus is common to any two of the faunas. Both vertebrate and invertebrate animals are represented by these tracks. No skeletal remains have yet been found in the Grand Canyon and consequently no direct evidence can be offered as to the makers of any of these tracks. (Auwthor’s abstract.) RaymMonpn C. Moors: Problems in the History of the Grand Canyon Region. The unparalleled vertical and horizontal extent of rock exposures in the Grand Canyon region and the clearness with which phenomena relating to almost all branches of geology are represented, have made this territory a classic ground for studies in geologic science. Yet, because of inaccessibility, observations have been essentially confined to a small part of the district. Indeed, excepting John Wesley Powell, the writer is the first geologist who has had opportunity to visit parts of the upper and lower sections of the canyon. Notwithstanding excellent exposures and the more or less detailed obser- vations of various workers, it is expectable that there are many unsolved problems in the geologic history of the Grand Canyon region. ‘These may be MAY 19, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 273 arranged conveniently in groups: (a) those of the stratified rocks, their age, origin, relations to associated formations, regional relations, and the signifi- cance of various minor characters; (b) those of the igneous rocks, intrusive and extrusive; (c) those of the metamorphic rocks, their classification and origin; (d) those bearing on the structure of the rocks, its origin, geologic age and effects; and (e) those in the field of physiography. Only a few of these problems can be indicated here. (a) The stratified rocks include about 4,000 feet of sub-horizontal limestone, sandstone and shale of Paleozoic age, resting unconformably on 12,000 feet of somewhat evenly inclined Proterozoic strata and on Archeozoic rocks. The regional relationships of the Kaibab limestone and Coconino sandstone at the top of the column, the nature and significance of the contact between these formations, and the origin of the Coconino are important problems. The complementary variations in thickness of the Coconino and subjacent Hermit shale, the time represented by the unconformity at the base of the Hermit, the position of the Pennsylvanian-Permian boundary, and the stratigraphic relationships of the Devonian and of the Cambrian formations are largely unsolved problems. The remarkably smooth surface of the pre- Paleozoic rocks beneath the Cambrian, and of Archeozoic rocks beneath the Unkar series, suggests marine planation, possibly supplementing sub- aerial peneplanation. (b) The zgneous rocks include great and small intrusive masses of acid, intermediate, and basic rocks in the Archeozoic, mainly basic intrusive and eruptive rocks in the Proterozoic, and basic eruptives of Tertiary and Recent age. The many miles of continuous exposures of Archeozoic igneous rocks afford splendid opportunity for study that is almost untouched. The occur- rence in each of the Proterozoic areas of thick diabase sills near the base of the Unkar series recalls the widespread similar rocks in the Proterozoic of other areas and in the Triassic Newark series. The wide geographic distri- bution and persistence in stratigraphic position of the Grand Canyon diabase call for notice. In comparatively recent time basaltic lava invaded the canyon near Lava Falls, below the mouth of Havasu Creek, and flowed downstream at least seventy miles. Numerous remnants of the narrow canyon-bottom lava flow are found, with even upper surface a little over 100 feet above present river level. The results of temporary damming of the river and the length of the attenuated basaltic flow are interesting subjects of investigation. (c) The metamorphic rocks of the Archeozoic have been classed together under the term Vishnu schist. Very much of the schist is undoubtedly of sedimentary origin; in parts of the canyon there are great thicknesses of little altered quartzite and slate. Several types of meta-igneous rocks are found. The differentiation of the Archeozoic complex offers several important problems. (d) The structure of the rocks in the Grand Canyon region affords many subjects for study. The structure of the Archeozoic and Proterozoic rocks and its regional relations; the sharp monoclinal folds of post-Cretaceous-pre- Eocene age; the large normal faults of post-Wasatch (Eocene) age; the movements at certain places at different geologic times, in some cases in opposite directions; and the nature, time and causes of regional warping are some of these problems. (e) The physiography of the canyon country has long been an alluring field for research, and observations in this region have helped to clarify various 274 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 10 physiographic concepts. ‘The relation of land forms to rock hardness and structure is evident, though the development of some of the characteristic features, such as the amphitheaters, the long narrow spurs and the general pattern of sculpture in parts of the Grand Canyon, have not been obvious. The writer accords with the conclusion of Noble and Matthes that small faults and comparatively unnoticed fractures have played an important role in the shaping of the canyon. However, the origin of the canyon as a whole, the location of the course of the river, and the physiographic history of the region offer problems that are largely unsolved. Remnants of peneplains, intrenched meanders and other features bear testimony to a long and probably complex history. ‘The writer’s study leads to the conclusion that much erosion in the Grand Canyon area, involving removal of most of the Mesozoic rocks that were once present here, was probably accon:plished in pre-Wasatch time; that the river was established in its present course mainly by super- position, following a course that was consequent on Tertiary beds; and that the main stream is influenced by structure near the south end of the Kaibab Plateau, between Diamond Creek and the mouth of the canyon, and perhaps at other places, but seems to be unrelated to the great Tertiary faults which cross the region. Study of Glen Canyon, Marble Gorge, and adjacent parts of the plateau country suggests the existence of a well advanced erosion cycle which was interrupted at a stage when the river had already begun the excavation of the Grand Canyon and had cut downward more than 2,000 feet below the Kaibab rim. Perhaps this earlier erosion cycle corresponds to the “Great Denudation’’ of Dutton that preceded the stage of active canyon cutting. While the sudden widening of the canyon in the Kaibab division may result from the beginning of erosion here in the earlier erosion cycle, the writer knows of no identifiable remnant of the suggested pre-canyon cycle within the Grand Canyon. Such platforms as the Tonto bench and the Esplanade are structural in origin. It is doubtful whether any remnants of an older valley could be preserved where subsequent downward erosion has been so active. The distribution of rapids, in almost every case at the mouth of a tributary stream, and the relation of river gradient to rock hardness and other factors of stream erosion are interesting subjects of study. One may conclude that despite numerous rapids, a certain more or less stable relationship has been attained on Colorado River between the rate of erosion and the ability of the river to erode. (Author’s abstract.) 428TH MEETING The 428th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club March 23, 1927, President Burts presiding. Program: T. B. Nouan: Potash brines underlying Great Salt Lake Desert, Utah. During the summer of 1925, the Geological Survey, in codperation with the Bureau of Mines and the General Land Office, pros- pected the potash-bearing brines in the Great Salt Lake Desert region. Two types of brine were found: (1) brine contained in. the interstices of crystalline salt deposits, and (2) brine found at a definite horizon in clays belonging to the Lake Bonneville beds. ‘The first type of brine is the more concentrated of the two and is believed to represent a residual mother liquor, more or less modified by rain water, that has existed since the final withdrawal of the waters of Lake Bonneville. The horizon at which the second type of brine occurs is thought to be a salt-impregnated zone deposited during the final stage of the earlier desiccation of Lake Bonneville, and would thus be MAY 19, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 275 equivalent to the unconformity found by Gilbert between the Yellow Clay and the White Marl. ‘The brine found is considered as being the result of the introduction of surface drainage waters along this soluble layer. This hypothesis is based upon the following observations: The depth to the brine horizon is a minimum at the center of the Desert and increases to 9 feet at the edge of the prospected area. ‘This compares with a thickness of 10 feet for the White Marl in the type section at the Old River Bed. - The clays above and below the brine horizon are sufficiently impermeable that towards the center of the area, where the brines are under a hydrostatic head, a rise of as much as a foot results when the horizon is tapped by a bore hole. Obviously, the brine horizon has some property not possessed by the remainder of the clay. The concentration of sodium chloride in the brine increases towards the center of the area, and the rate of increase was found to vary inversely with the amount of surface drainage waters available. Thus, where large drainage channels enter the prospected region, the chlorine content is notably depressed. Further, the relative amounts of potassium and magnesium in the brine show a striking dependence upon the character of the country rock in the adjacent highlands—potash, for example, being high in the brines where rhyolite flows from the highlands nearby; and magnesium tending to dominate near areas of dolomitic rocks. The calcium sulphate and carbonate, which presumably formed a large part of the mineral content of the indraining surface waters, have been almost entirely precipi- tated and are represented by a “‘caliche” or hardpan immediately above the brine horizon. Deep bore holes put down by one of the operating companies showed the presence of several deeper brine horizons. If these may be interpreted in the same manner as the one prospected, it would seem that the history of the Bonneville Basin is considerably more extensive than has been so. far recognized. (Author’s abstract.) C. K. WeEntTWortTH, J. E. HOFFMEISTER, AND H. S. Lapp: Unusual types of sediments from Pacific Islands. Four types of islands are represented in this study: (1) oceanic islands of volcanic origin such as the Hawaiian groups; (2) oceanic islands without known igneous base such as the coral islands of the Line and Tonga groups; (8) islands like Eua, Tonga, which have a vol- canic ash base nearly entirely covered with limestone; and (4) islands like Vitilevu, Fiji, which are partly volcanic but have some continental types of rocks. (1) In Hawaii the sediments are derived mainly by chemical weathering from basalt and consist of highly ferruginous mantlerock and soil; gravel and ferruginous clays with very little sand; coral reef rock; detrital calcareous sand composed of coral, shell and foraminiferal debris; and pyroclastic rocks and their crystal sand derivatives. (2) The sediments of the Line Islands, which are wholly of organic origin, are chiefly coral and Tridacna gravels and conglomerates; beach sands of coral and molluscan shell debris and foraminifera; and coral muds and silts. Reef formations are the fundamental rocks of the group and the source of the detrital derivatives. (3) The island of Eua is a representative of the Tongan group. ‘The core of the island is voleanic tuff. This is overlain by younger sediments of various sorts, including a reworked tuff to which much organic material has been added. Foraminiferal and coralline limestones form an extensive series of terraces, and in one locality andesite boulders in a matrix of calcare- ous sand form a thick deposit of conglomerate. 276 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 10 (4) The dominant sediments of Vitilevu, Fiji, are those belonging to the agglomerate-tuff-marl series, most of which are marine in origin. The marls are usually reworked tuffs to which variable amounts of clay and shelly material have been added. Subordinate rock types include conglomerates, sandstones, and limestones of several sorts, often more or less tuffaceous. Both foraminiferal and coralline limestones occur. Ordinarily these are found as small lenticular bodies in the main series, but two limestone masses, each several hundred feet in thickness, are known. (Authors’ abstract.) W.C. ALDEN: Certain Pliocene and Pleistocene features of Yellowstone Park and its environs. | W. P. Wooprinc, W. W. RuBey, Secretaries. SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS Members of the United States Geological Survey on May 2 tendered Dr. GEORGE OTIS SMITH a testimonial Juncheon in honor of his completion of 20 years as Director. Dr. Smitu became a member of the Survey in 1896 and was appointed Director in 1907. TED SOCIETIES — ological So THE MEETINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND Society. ~ Tk c i B a ry a a ophi nth. his page mo ll appear on t . ies wi nty-seventh of each ted societ ia the thirteenth and the twe Yef-the-atili = ings mt » pote Lt TS ha i) ‘of the meet co) ms se ; f aioe “CONTENTS ne ¥ meee ‘OnIGINAL Paras * tivity fayer. eS on the forward liaanien ote wade CAIRNS Pago cieh'e Vee be We Pay w by Gly aco gs eta ite are ae ee OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY — President: AumxANDER Rellghels es! Smithsonian Institution. fe Treasurer: R. L. ae Coast: a ee a i ah le aed = Sit PP IES OE NIT IE Dit Ok ee ie me Sd bt ht ES ae! EIS be Loe : * site foes fe Vou. 17 JUNE 4, 1927 No. 11 eine: * y ees, nies a SS ag JOURNAL OF THE “WASHINGTON ACADEMY r OF SCIENCES ne eee 7 Pood. Wane gale: Pini 7 ¢ . t< aoe Lae re ie . i, 3 “i “ BOARD OF EDITORS S Wi.uiaM J. Peters Aagnes CHase Joun B. Ruesipz, Jr. ‘ DEPARTMENT OF TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM BUREAU PLANT INDUSTRY NATIONAL MUSEUM vs ASSOCIATE EDITORS ‘ 4 eS Vet a A VATION At. i kL =, a ~ a - ON cao tT WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES pms ey | BOARD OF EDITORS aS 3. PETERS — AaNnEs CHASE Joun B. REEsIDE, JR. : | DEPARTMENT or etn MAGNETISM BUREAU PLANT INDUSTRY NATIONAL MUSEUM aR OK 3 | | ASSOCIATE EDITORS _L. H. Apams S. A. Ropwer PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY E. A. GOLDMAN . G. W. Stosz BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY R. F. Grieas J. R. SWANTON BOTANICAL SOCIETY ~- : ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY BY THE . _ WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SC: ENCES tgs Mr. RoyaL AND GuILFoRD AVES. | BatTIMorE, MaryLAND . Entered as Sacara Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md.. under the (Act of August 24,1912. Acceptance for mailing at s; ecial rate of postage provided for in Section a Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 1918 + Ale | This Jota: the official eae the Washington pte of ciences, present a brief record of current scientific work in Washington. To this en (1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the short notes of current scientific literature published in or emanati n (3) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affili notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. T semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth on each month, except when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspond to calend publication is an essential feature; a manuscript, reaching the edit the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from t issue of the JouRNAL for the f pron ine fourth or nineteenth, respectivel, M anuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors; clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without. essential cha editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. Tot the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be serially and submitted on aseparate manuscript page. _ . Sta Illustrations will be used only when necessary and will be confined ts) {es or diagrams of simple character. : Proof —In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be sent to auth ) unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; 5 the editor will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. Authors’ Reprints.—Reprints will be furnished at the following schedule of P ices Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12ipp.) 0 46 pp. Cover te ie ‘eo y 50 §$.85. $1.65 $2.55. $3.25 $2.00 5 | 100 1.90 3.80 4.75 225 OO. 2s) Se aa oe 150. (2:25 4.30) 5% 36230 6250. es SO 200 2.50 4.80 nF ay es at Wldues ey OU Vans Satis 078 ak ‘250 3.00.0). 6.80) 6220. 80 a Anadditional charge of 25 cents will be made for each split page. re ae ‘ | Covers bearing the name of the author nad fle of the article, with inclusive pagi- nation and date of issue, will be furnished when ordered. ous As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra copies or ‘reprints should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript. rt The rate of Subscription per Vole TS ses eeseseseneeereeseeteetetenetens $6. 00" Semi-monthly numbers..........-... sesso eee een ceceecsnnseecsevesenees oy no Monthly numbers.......... 662. e eee eect nee c cence eet ee see ceececsnsccnses OO Remiitances should be made payable to COViahtar ta Aree of Seistioed i and addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey Washington, 1 D. C. hee European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, London. | a Exzchanges.—The JouRNAL does not exchange with other ‘publications. ee Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, provided that claim is mi a . within thirty days after date ofthefollowingissue. PU eines ns *Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to Desiuber 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00, ‘Special rates are given to members of scientific societies affiliated with the Academy. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vou. 17 | Junn 19, 1927 No. 12 BOTANY.—New plants fram Central America.—IX. Pavu C. STANDLEY, U. 8. National Museum.! On the following pages are described thirteen new Central American plants, chiefly trees and shrubs. Of special interest are the two new species of Weinmannia, representatives of a genus of trees of which only a single species has been known previously from Central America. There is included in the present paper a description of a new species of Hybanthus from western Mexico. Weinmannia Wercklei Standl., sp. nov. Usually a large shrub or small tree but sometimes (according to Wercklé) a large tree, the older branchlets slender, terete, dark reddish brown, the young ones compressed, densely puberulent, with short or elongate internodes; stipules soon deciduous, oval, 3-5 mm. long, broadly rounded at apex, green, glabrous within, sparsely or densely sericeous or strigillose outside; leaves simple, the petioles 2-3 (rarely 10) mm. long, puberulent or glabrous; leaf blades lance-oblong to ovate-oblong, mostly 3.5-5.5 em. long and 1.2-2.3 em. wide (on young sterile branches up to 12 by 6 cm.), acute or acuminate, acute at base, rather coarsely crenate-serrate, subcoriaceous, deep green above, glabrous, beneath paler, often brownish when dried, sparsely pilose, at least along the costa, with short appressed hairs, in age glabrate, the costa slender, prominent beneath the lateral nerves about 13 on each side, incon- spicuous, nearly straight, extending to the margin; racemes terminal and axillary, pedunculate, densely many-flowered, the rachis 2-3 em. long, puberulent, the pedicels slender, fasciculate, 2-5 mm. long, puberulent; calyx 5-parted, sparsely puberulent or glabrate, scarcely more than 1 mm. long, the lobes ovate, acute; filaments glabrous; ovary narrowly ovoid, densely whitish-pubescent, the styles glabrous, 1 mm. long. Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 678753, collected at San Crist6- bal de Candelaria, Province of Cartago, Costa Rica, altitude 1,700 meters, by C. Wercklé (Pittier no. 3685). The following sterile specimens are conspecific: 1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. For the last preceding paper of this series see page 245 of this volume of The Journau. Re- ceived March 30, 1927. 309 310 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 12 Costa Rica: La Palma, Province of San José, alt. 1,450 m., Biolley & Tonduz 12513; Standley 37990. Cerros de Zurqui, Province of Heredia, alt. 2,200 m., Standley & Valerio 50589. El Mufieco, Province of Cartago, alt. 1,500 m., Standley & Torres 51140. Santa Maria de Dota, Province of San José, alt. 1,800 m., Standley 41581. Only one species of Weinmannia, W. pinnata L., with pinnate leaves, has been known heretofore from Central America. In its foliage characters W. Wercklez resembles W. lamprophylla Hieron., of Colombia, which has a glabrous ovary. Weinmannia burseraefolia Standi., sp. nov. Tree, the older branchlets blackish, with short internodes, glabrous; stipules broadly oval, persistent and recurved, green, coriaceous, glabrous; leaves pinnate, the petiole 1.5-1.8 cm. long, suleate on the upper surface, glabrous, narrowly margined above, the rachis 3.5—4 cm. long, sparsely short- barbate at the nodes, elsewhere glabrous, narrowly winged between the lobes, the wings entire, 2-4 mm. in (combined) width; leaflets 9, oblong-ellip- tic to ovate-elliptic, 2.2-3.5 cm. long, 1-1.4 em. wide, acutish to acuminate, sessile, the lateral ones oblique at base and acutish, the terminal one acumi- nately contracted at base; leaflets coriaceous, finely appressed-serrate, (serrations about 11 on each side), glabrous, lustrous above, slightly paler beneath, the costa very slender, prominent on both surfaces, the other vena- tion inconspicuous. Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,306,224, collected in wet forest at Yerba Buena, northeast of San Isidro, Province of Heredia, Costa Rica, altitude 2,000 meters, February 28, 1926, by Paul C. Standley and Juvenal Valerio (no. 49848). At the time of collecting the specimens the tree was recognized as distinct from the common Weinmannia pinnata, but it was impossible to discover fertile branches. Although the material is sterile, I have little hesitancy in describing it as a new species. From W. pinnata it differs in its acute, gla- brous, closely serrate (not crenate) leaflets. In general appearance W. burseraefolia somewhat suggests W. crenata Presl, of northern South America. Alchemilla pascuorum Standl., sp. nov. Sarmentose perennial, the stems 10-30 cm. long, procumbent, often root- ing at the nodes, with elongate internodes, slender, hirsute with long, slender, chiefly appressed hairs; basal and lower stem leaves slender-petiolate, the uppermost leaves sessile or short-petiolate; stipules connate into a sheath, cleft into narrowly oblong, green, sericeous lobes; lower petioles 2 cm. long or shorter, appressed-hirsute; leaf blades reniform, 2-4 cm. wide, deeply cleft into 5-7 lobes, these broadly cuneate-obovate, rounded at apex, deeply ser- rate above the middle, with narrow, obtuse or acutish teeth, green on the upper surface and sparsely sericeous, beneath grayish green, rather densely sericeous with long, slender, closely appressed hairs; blades of the uppermost leaves deeply 3-lobed; flowers green, cymose, in small dense clusters near or at the ends of the branches, the pedicels 1.5 mm. long or shorter; hypanthium globose-urceolate, 1.5 mm. long, densely sericeous; sepals and bractlets erect, subequal, 0.6 mm. long, the bractlets lanceolate, the sepals lance-ovate, gone 19, 1927 STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA oll acute or acutish, sparsely sericeous or glabrate; achenes broadly ovoid, obtuse, somewhat compressed, 1 mm. long, dark brown, nearly smooth. Type in the U. S. National Herbarium no. 1,228,245, collected in wet meadow at Las Nubes, Province of San José, Costa Rica, altitude about 1,800 meters, March 21, 1914, by Paul C. Standley (no. 38455). This plant is frequent in the pastures of the high mountains of central Costa Rica, and the following collections may be cited: Costa Rica: Southern slope of Turrialba Volcano, near Finca del Voled4n de Turrialba, alt. 2,000—-2,400 m., Standley 35028, 34940. Las Nubes, Standley 38386. ‘Rio Birris, Standley 35416. Fraijanes, alt. 1,600 m., Standley & Torres 47627. On Turrialba the plant is called “mochililla.”” Like the other species, it is grazed by cattle. Alchemilla pascuorum is a near relative of A. venusta Cham. & Schlecht., of Mexico and Guatemala, but in that the stems are hirsute with spreading hairs, and the leaves also are loosely hirsute. ALCHEMILLA SUBALPESTRIS Rose, Contr. U.S. Nat. Herb. 10: 96. 1906 This species, known previously only from Mexico, may bé reported from Costa Rica. It was collected near Finca La Cima, above Los Lotes, north of El Copey, altitude 2,100 meters, in December, 1925, Standley 42551. ACAENA CYLINDROSTACHYA Ruiz & Pavon, Fl. Peruv. 1: 68, pl. 104, f. 2. 1798 This species, apparently common in the central and northern Andes of South America, may now be reported from Costa Rica. It was collected by the writer (Standley & Valerio 43639, 43682) on Cerro de las Vueltas, Costa Rica, at 3,000 meters, in December, 1925. Itisfrequentinthe paramos of this high peak. Although not a very conspicuous plant, it attracts atten- tion because of its handsome leaves with beautiful silky pubescence. One other species of the genus, Acaena elongata L., is common in the higher mountains of Central America, and ranges northward to Mexico. Oxalis Maxonii Standl., sp. nov. Plants woody or suffrutescent, branched, ascending or recumbent, the branches up to 1 m. long, red-brown, pilose with short, straight, mostly appressed hairs and puberulent with short curved hairs, the internodes short or elongate; leaves palmately 3-foliolate, the petioles very slender, 1.5-5 em. long, pilose with slender, ascending or appressed, whitish hairs; leaf- lets short-petiolulate, the petiolules less than 2 mm. long, pilose with stiff spreading white hairs, the blades ovate or broadly ovate, 2-4.5 cm. long, 1.2—2.3 cm. wide, acute to very obtuse at apex, obtuse to rounded-obtuse at base, the lateral leaflets asymmetric, smaller and more obtuse than the terminal one, thin, green and glabrous on the upper surface, ciliate, beneath paler, thinly appressed-pilose with slender hairs, often glabrate; cymes slender- pedunculate, about equaling the leaves, 2 to 4-flowered, the bracts linear, about 4 mm. long, the pedicels proper 2-3 mm. long, minutely appressed-pi- lose, shorter than the slender peduncles, the bractlets linear, minute; sepals 4.5-5 mm. long, lanceolate, acute or obtuse, erect, thinly pilose with short slender white appressed hairs, thin, greenish; petals yellow, 1.5 em. long, rounded at apex, glabrous; filaments 7 mm. long, densely pubescent; styles 312 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 12 densely pubescent; capsule (immature) oval-globose, 4 mm. long, densely pubescent with short slender whitish ascending hairs. Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 675390, collected in brushy undergrowth near the river, El Boquete, Chiriqui, Panama, altitude 1,000 to 1,300 meters, March, 1911, by William R. Maxon (no. 4996). Here are referred the following additional collections from Chiriqui: Panama: Along river in shade, El Boquete, Pittier 2970. Woods along Griffen Trail, Horqueta Mts., alt. 1 (00 m., Killip 3527. _ In general appearance this is like O. acuminata Schlecht. & Cham., of Mexico and Guatemala, but in the latter the flowers are smaller, and the long-acuminate leaflets are pubescent on the upper surface. Picramnia longifolia Standl., sp. nov. Shrub 2.5-3 m. high, the young branches slender, at first sparsely and minutely puberulent, densely leafy; leaves 17 to 21-foliolate, the petiole 2-3 cm. long, the rachis 14-20 cm. long, sparsely puberulent or glabrate, the leaflets alternate, rather distant, the petiolules 2-8 mm. long, puberulent; leaflets obliquely ovate to oblong-ovate or (the lowest) broadly ovate, 3-4.5 em. long, 1-2 cm. wide, rather abruptly acuminate or long-acuminate to an obtuse tip, at base very oblique, acute on one side, obtuse or rounded on the other, deep green above, slightly paler beneath, sparsely and minutely puberu- lent on the costa, elsewhere glabrous; staminate inflorescence pedunculate, about 20 ecm. long, the rachis sparsely puberulent, the inflorescence much interrupted, the glomerules sessile and distant, the panicle branched near the base, the branches 5-10 mm. long, the bracts about equaling the glomer- ules; staminate flowers scarcely 1.5 mm. long, short-pedicellate, 4-parted, glabrous or nearly so, the sepals oval; pistillate racemes (in fruit) peduncu- - late, 10-12 cm. long, ‘simply racemose, the rachis very sparsely puberulent, the pedicels solitary or fasciculate, stout, 5-8 mm. long, glabrate, divaricate or ascending; sepals 4, rounded, persistent and spreading in fruit, minutely and densely appressed-pilose; fruit dark red, obovoid-globose, about 1 cm. long and 8 mm. thick, rounded at apex, glabrous. Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,307,021, collected i in wet forest on Cerro de las Caricias, north of San Isidro, Province of Her edia, Costa Rica, altitude about 2,400 meters, March 11, 1926, by Paul C. Stand- ley and Juvenal Valerio (no. 52211). No. 52108, from the same locality, belongs to this species. Related to P. quaternaria Donn Smith, the most abundant Picramnia of Costa Rica, which differs in its less numerous leaflets and simple staminate inflorescences. Hybanthus serrulatus Standl., sp. nov. Plants herbaceous or suffrutescent (only upper part of plant at hand), about 60 cm. high, the branches green, sparsely or densely incurved-puberulous; leaves alternate, the stipules subulate, 1.5—2.5 mm. long, the petioles 4-8 mm. long, puberulent; leaf blades ovate, the larger 5 cm. long and 2.3 cm. wide, acu- minate, obtuse to acute at base, ‘thin, finely and closely crenate-serrate to the base, finely villosulous above with whitish hairs, beneath slightly paler, incurved-puberulous, especially on the nerves; flowers numerous, in racemes terminating short or elongate axillary branches; racemes 4 cm. long or shorter, JUNE 19, 1927 STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA 313 the pedicels 4-6 mm. long, widely ascending, finely puberulent, the bracts leaflike, lanceolate, 1.5 cm. long or shorter, those at the base of the pedicel filiform and stipule-like; sepals broadly ovate, obtuse, nearly 2 mm. long, green, densely scaberulous-puberulent; lower petal 2.7 mm. long, densely puberulent outside, narrowly spatulate, the blade much shorter than the claw, the other petals about equaling the sepals; capsule rounded-ovate, 3 mm. long, scaberulous, minutely rostrate at apex; seeds ochraceous. Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 386032, collected in clay soil in the Sierra Madre of Michoacan or Guerrero, Mexico, altitude 1,100 meters, November 4, 1898, by E. Langlassé (no. 558). Related to H. fruticulosus (Benth.) Johnston, of Lower California, in which the much narrower leaves are remotely and unequally dentate or subentire. Begonia Torresii Standl, sp. nov. Plants perennial, erect (the base sometimes decumbent), 25-40 cm. high, branched, the branches few, ascending, short or elongate, succulent, short- villous or glabrate; stipules oblong to ovate, about 1 cm. long, obtuse, green, glabrous, tardily deciduous; petioles slender, 4-15 mm. long, short-villous; leaf blades oblong or ovate-oblong, sometimes broadest near the apex, 2.5—7 em. long, 1-3 cm. wide, obtuse to acuminate, oblique at base, rounded on one side, very acute on the other, irregularly duplicate-serrate, often coarsely so, or laciniate-serrate, especially near the apex, the teeth usually setose- mucronate, at first often copiously short-villous on both sides but in age usually glabrate; peduncles 1 or few-flowered, slender, erect, equaling or longer than the leaves, glabrous, or sparsely villous below; flowers pink; bracts oval, 4-6 mm. long, green, glabrous; staminate sepals oval, 6 mm. long, glabrous, exceeding the petals; capsule green, glabrous, 2 cm. long and wide, rounded at base, abruptly contracted above into a stout beak 1 cm. long, the body of the capsule 3-lobed, the lobes divaricate, triangular, abruptly contracted into a short horn. Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,228,283, collected in wet forest at Las Nubes, Province of San José, Costa Rica, altitude about 1,900 meters, March 21, 1924, by Paul C. Standley (no. 38561). The following additional collections may be cited: Costa Rica: Las Nubes, Standley 38599, 38523, 38640, 38816. Southern slopes of Turrialba Volcano, near the Finca del Volein de Turrialba, alt. 2,400 m., Standley 35338. The species is named for Prof. Rubén Torres Rojas, in whose company part of the material was collected. Begonia Torresii belongs to the section Casparya (sometimes recognized as a distinct genus), and is related to B. urticae L.f., of Colombia. It is probably the plant reported from Costa Rica by A. De Candolle? as Casparya urticae y hispida, although the descrip- tion does not agree very well. The Colombian B. urticae differs from B. Torresti in its thicker, more obtuse and more densely pubescent, short- petioled leaves, and in its pubescent fruit. Begonia Valerii Standl., sp. nov. Erect herb, 1-1.5 m. high, the stem stout, leafy above, usually simple, densely pilose with soft spreading brownish several-celled hairs; stipules 2 Prodr. 15!: 274. 1864. 314 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 12 lanceolate to ovate, 1.5-2 cm. long, attenuate, densely brown-pilose, soon deciduous; petioles slender, 8-17 cm. long, brown-pilose; leaf blades broadly oblique-ovate, 16-26 cm. long, 9-16 cm. wide, abruptly cuspidate-acuminate, very oblique at base and deeply cordate, densely, finely, and unequally dentate, thin, deep green above, thinly pilose with long spreading hairs or glabrate, beneath slightly paler, thinly pilose, especially on the nerves, with long, rather stiff, spreading hairs, about 10-nerved at base; peduncles 20-30 em. long, thinly pilose, exceeding the leaves, the cymes lax or dense, several times dichotomous, many-flowered, 7-20 cm. broad, the branches sparsely pilose, the flowers umbellate at the ends of the branches; pedicels 5-15 mm. long, very slender, sparsely pilose; flowers white or pinkish; staminate flower with 2 sepals, these suborbicular, about 7 mm. long and wide, rounded at apex, rounded to subcordate at base, glabrous outside or sparsely pilose near the base; petals none; filaments united at base; capsule 3—lobed, 6 mm. long, sparsely pilose or glabrate, 2 of the wings very narrow, the third oval- oblong, horizontal, rounded at apex, about 1 cm. wide. Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,254,000, collected in wet forest at El Arenal, Guanacaste, Costa Rica, altitude about 500 meters, January 19, 1926, by Paul C. Standley and Juvenal Valerio (no. 45245). The following collections also are referred here: Costa Rica: El Arenal, Standley & Valerio 45287. Pejivalle, Province of Cartago, Standley & Valerio 46885, 46963, 47112. In general appearance this resembles B. znvolucrata Liebm., which has glabrous pedicels and usually lobed leaves. B. Biolleyi C. DC., also closely related, is separated by its much more copious pubescence, that of the lower surface of the leaves consisting of long matted hairs. » Begonia Carletonii Standl., sp. nov. Plants small, with short, densely leafy rootstocks 2-3 mm. thick, emitting numerous long fibrous roots and also slender stolons; stolons rooting at the nodes and bearing a single leaf, sometimes also a peduncle, at each node, the internodes 5-8 cm. long, sparsely setose-pilose; stipules lanceolate, about 9 mm. long, attenuate, persistent, thin, brown, pilose; petioles slender, 3.5—5 em. long, pilose with long slender spreading brown hairs; leaf blades obliquely ovate, 6—9.5 cm. long, 2.7—-5 cm. wide, long-acuminate, oblique at base and shallowly cordate, the basal lobes broadly rounded, palmately 8-nerved at base, the central nerve 3 times dichotomous, thin, sparsely setose-pilose on both surfaces, green above, paler beneath, the margin closely, finely, and unequally sinuate-dentate; peduncles equaling the leaves, 2 or 3-flowered, very slender, sparsely pilose; bracts and bractlets ovate or oblong, obtuse, 3 mm. long or shorter, erect, persistent; ovary densely villous; staminate flowers slender-pedicellate, the 2 sepals rounded-ovate, 6 mm. long, rounded-obtuse, rounded at base, sparsely pilose, the petals oblong-spatulate, 6 mm. long, rounded at apex, glabrous; capsule 7 mm. long, sparsely pilose, the 3 wings very unequal, the largest 6 mm. broad, obtuse, divaricate. Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, nos. 1,081,658-659, collected in the a of Bocas del Toro, Panama, April 22, 1921, by M. A. Carleton (no. 206). This begonia, although a small and inconspicuous plant, is exceptionally JUNE 19,1927 STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA 315 neat in appearance. It is not closely related to any Central American species with which I am acquainted. Oreopanax Donnell-Smithii Standl., sp. nov. Tree, the young branches very thick, densely leafy, densely stellate-to- mentose; bud scales densely tomentose; petioles slender, 6-21 cm. long, glabrous; blades of the larger leaves cordate-suborbicular to rounded-ovate, 19-24 cm. long, 16-18 cm. wide, rounded or very obtuse at apex, broadly rounded at base and shallowly cordate (sinus narrow, I—1:5 cm. deep), charta- ceous, entire, glabrous, deep green above, pale beneath, 5-nerved at base (with 2 inconspicuous slender lower nerves); blades of the leaves at base of inflorescence smaller, broadly ovate to oval, rounded at apex, broadly rounded ‘or emarginate at base; panicles large, pyramidal, 20-30 cm. long and broad, the branches stellate-pubescent with minute ochraceous hairs; bracts 1—-1.5 mm. long, triangular, divaricate; staminate flower heads dense, many-flowered subglobose, 5 mm. in diameter, forming lax racemes 5-13 cm. long, the pe- duncles stout, divaricate, 5-8 mm. long, stellate-pubescent; bractlets broad, rounded at apex, glabrate, ciliolate; corolla lobes 1.5 mm. long, ovate, obtuse; filaments slender, exceeding the corolla, the anthers oval, 0.8 mm. long. Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 355151, collected at Atirro, Province of Cartago, Costa Rica, altitude 600 meters, April, 1896, by John Donnell Smith (no. 6533). Here may be referred the following collections: Costa Rica: Rio de las Vueltas, Tucurrique, alt. 635 m., Tonduz 13120 bis. Orosi, alt. 1,000 m., P7ttier 1764. This tree is a relative of O. capitatum (Jacq.) Decaisne & Planch., which has much narrower leaves. Oreopanar Donnell-Smithit resembles also O. costaricense March., but in that the inflorescence is glabrous. Oreopanax nubigenum Standl., sp. nov. Tree 6-10 m. high, the branchlets thick and stout, densely leafy, very sparsely stellate-pubescent or glabrous; scales of the leaf buds rounded, glabrous, ciliate, the stipule-like bracts enveloping the budding inflorescence as much as 6 em. long, glabrous; petioles slender, 3.5-17 cm. long, glabrous; leaf blades broadly deltoid-rounded, often as broad as long, sometimes rounded-rhombic, 7.5-15 cm. long and broad, acute or abruptly acute, rarely obtuse, at base varying from truncate to obtuse but often very broadly cun- eate, entire, coriaceous, glabrous, 5-nerved at base; fruiting panicles 9-17 cm. long, rather dense, the branches stellate-pubescent, the bracts 1.5-3 cm. long, triangular, acute, ciliate, divaricate; fruiting heads very numerous, containing 4-8 fruits, the peduncles stout, divaricate, 8-13 mm. long, stellate-pubescent; fruits subglobose, 5 mm. long, 6 or 7-celled, glabrous. Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,228,409, collected in wet forest at Las Nubes, Province of San José, Costa Rica, altitude, 1,800 meters, March 21, 1924, by Paul C. Standley (no. 38806). Represented also by the following collections: Costa Rica: Las Nubes, Standley 38711. Cerros de Zurqui, Province of Heredia, alt. 2,200 m., Standley & Valerio 50808. This, also, is a relative of O. capitatum and of O. Donnell-Smithii. From the latter it is distinguished by the acute leaves, which are not cordate at base. 316 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 12 Sciadophyllum nicaraguense Standl., sp. nov. ) Shrub 2.5 m. high; petiole 40 cm. long, stout, terete, obscurely strigillose or glabrate; petiolules stout, 4.5-13 cm. long, glabrate; leaflets (4 present on the single leaf available) oval-oblong, 24-32 cm. long, 9.5-15 em. wide, broadly rounded at apex and caudate-cuspidate, the acumen 2—2.5 cm. long, attenuate, at base rounded, pergamentaceous, entire, concolorous, glabrous above or nearly so, somewhat lustrous, beneath dull, sparsely pubescent with minute appressed hairs, the costa and lateral nerves salient on both sur- faces, the lateral nerves about 19 on each side, divaricate, curved near the margin and irregularly anastomosing, the ultimate nerves prominulous, closely reticulate; rachis of the inflorescence (only fragments present) ferrugi- nous-tomentulose, the bracts deciduous; umbels few-flowered, the peduncles 6-8 mm. long, the pedicels about 3 mm. long, ferruginous-tomentulose; ovary tomentulose; calyx nearly 2 mm. broad; disk annular, fleshy; styles connate into a conic column nearly 2 mm. long. Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,082,152, collected at San Juan del Norte, Nicaragua, March 2, 1896, by C. L. Smith (no. 78). Only incomplete material is available for study, but this is sufficient to prove the plant a distinct species. Only one other member of the genus, S. systylum Donn. Smith, is known from Central America. It grows in the mountains of Costa Rica. The flowers of S. nicaraguense resemble those of S. systylum, but the latter plant has copious stellate pubescence. Dendropanax monticola Standl., sp. nov. Tree 4.5-6 m. high, glabrous throughout, the older branchlets ochraceous ; petioles slender, 1.3-6 cm. long; leaf blades ovate or elliptic-ovate, 7-13.5 em. long, 2.5-6 em. wide, acuminate or long-acuminate, rounded or very obtuse at base, pergamentaceous, entire, deep green above, slightly paler beneath, triplinerved, the lateral nerves 4 or 5 on each side, divergent at an angle of about 55 degrees, arcuate, slender, irregularly anastomosing close to the margin, the costa very slender; umbels few, few-flowered (flowers about 10), arranged in a terminal short-pedunculate umbel or in a short raceme; rachis of the raceme 1.6—4 cm. long, the umbels on peduncles 1.8—4 cm. long, the peduncles naked; pedicels 4-7 mm. long; ovary turbinate, nearly 2 mm. long, the calyx entire or remotely denticulate; petals green, obtuse or rounded at apex, 1.5 mm. long; stamens shorter than the petals; fruit not seen. , Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,305,191, collected in wet forest near Fraijanes, Province of Alajuela, Costa Rica, altitude about 1,600 meters, February 12, 1926, by Paul C. Standley and Rubén Torres Rojas (no. 47538). The following collections represent the same species: Costa Rica: Fraijanes, Standley & Torres 47418. Cerro de las Caricias, Province of Heredia, alt. 2,000-2,400 m., Standley & Valerio 52051. La Ventolera, southern slope of Volcdn de Pods, Standley 34687. The nearest relative of this tree is D. querceti Donn. Smith, also Costa Rican, which has usually solitary umbels, and leaves which are broadest at or above the middle and narrowed at base. Dendropanax praestans Standl., sp. nov. Small tree, the branchlets stout, ochraceous, glabrous, densely leafy at the ends, the internodes very short; stipules very small, scarious, the margins JUNE 19, 1927 -STEJNEGER: A FROG FROM TIBET O17 laciniate; leaves dimorphous, those of some branches merely dentate, those of other branches all or nearly all digitately trilobate, the petioles slender, 2—7 em. long, glabrous; blades of the simple leaves ovate-oblong to ovate, 8.5-12.5 em. long, 3.5-6 cm. wide, acuminate, at base obtuse or broadly cuneate, irregularly sinuate-serrate, the teeth obtuse, a few of them often much larger than the others, the leaves entire near the base or below the middle, 3-nerved at base, the lateral nerves about 5 on each side, arcuate-ascending; lobed blades about 13 em. long and broad, broadly cuneate at base, lobed to within 3 cm. of the base, the lobes narrowly oblong, about 2 cm. wide, attenuate to apex, irregularly sinuate-serrate, the sinuses between the lobes rounded; leaves all subcoriaceous, glabrous, deep green above, paler beneath, minutely punctate, the venation prominent beneath; umbels many-flowered, arranged in a short-pedunculate terminal umbel, the peduncles of the ultimate umbels stout, 1.5-2 em. long, naked or bearing near the base a short cuplike sheath- ing bract; pedicels stout, 4-5 mm. long, sparsely and minutely puberulent or glabrate; hypanthium hemispheric, the calyx very short, 3 mm. broad; petals triangular-oblong, acute, glabrous, 2-2.5 mm. long; stamens shorter than the petals, the filaments short, subulate; fruit subglobose, 5-celled, 5-6 mm. broad, glabrous; styles united for half their length. Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 677609, collected in wet forest of Cuesta de las Palmas, southern slope of Cerro de la Horqueta, Chiriquf, Panama, altitude 1,700 to 2,100 meters, March, 1911, by H. Pittier (no. 3213). Here belong, probably, leaf specimens collected by myself (no. 41973) at Laguna de la Essuadra, northeast of El Copey, Costa Rica, at about 2,100 meters. These leaves are very large, about 30 cm. long, and deeply 5-lobed, the lobes coarsely serrate, or the terminal one pinnately lobed. Among all the other North American species of Dendropanav (Gilibertia) this may be recognized at once by the toothed leaves. ZOOLOGY.—A new genus and species of frog from Tibet... LEONHARD STEJNEGER, U.S. National Museum. In his Monograph of the South Asian, Papuan, Melanesian, and Australian Frogs of the genus Rana, Boulenger? described (p. 107) a series of ten frogs from Southern Tibet under the name of Rana pleskei (Guenther). The three localities: Lake Yamdok, 15,000 feet alti- tude, Kamba Jong [Kampadzong], and Gyantse are situated south of the Brahmaputra on the north slope of the Himalayas, north of the frontiers of Sikkim and Bhutan. Guenther’s types came from western Szechwan, China. The National Museum having recently received from the Rev. D. C. Graham good material of the true Nanorana pleskei and also, in ex- change with the British Museum through the kindness of H. W. Parker, two specimens from Tingri, Tibet, not far from the general ‘Received May 7, 1927. 2 Rec. Indian Mus. 20: 1-226. 1920. 318 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 12 region whence came Boulenger’s material, I am in a position to affirm that the latter belongs to a new species totally different from Guen- ther’s species. In further confirmation, Dr. Thomas Barbour was kind enough to lend me for comparison a specimen from Yatong [Yathung] in the projecting angle of Himalayan Tibet between Sikkim and Bhutan. Altirana, new genus Diagnosis.—‘‘Vomerine teeth, if present, much reduced; no tympanum; no stapes; fingers and toes not dilated at the tips; outer metatarsals separated by web in their distal third or fourth only; zygomatic branch of the squa- mosal short; omosternal style not forked at the base; terminal phalanges obtuse.” (Boulenger.) To this should be added that the precoracoid is as well developed as in Rana typified by R. temporaria. Altirana parkeri, new species Diagnosis.—Digits without terminal dilatations and horizontal grooves; tympanum absent; outer metatarsals separated in their distal third; no dorsolateral glandular fold; no long tooth-like protruberance in front of lower jaw; toes fully webbed; subarticular tubercles present but rather flat and indistinct; fifth toe slightly shorter than third; second and fourth fingers subequal; tibiotarsal articulation reaching the shoulder. Type-locality—Tingri, Tibet, at 15,000 feet altitude. Type.—U.S. National Museum, No. 72328. WAS 2zNeMe M.C. Z. No. 72328 fad. No. 11636 oad. Measurements Millimeters Millimeters ‘Lip ‘ofssnout; CO GVEMU arcs erect eo eees Ae eee ee: 25:00 2eaaere 34.00 Stinky OPE) ee om terior DOrdernvOlmeyienw jn... Canes D200. eee see 5.75 SESS 1 eS he. SC NOSE EMU cs tee ate, kat cone cee a. Sask ene oe eee Dic2D Cl or diagrams of simple character. — se Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof unless requested. It is urged oe manuscript be submitted i in will exercise due carein seeing that copyisfollowed. __ ae Reprints.—Reprints will be furnished at the followin, Copies eyes. $505) ae 8 pp. | 12 pp. 50: $85 Ses $2.55 100 1.90 POOF CAND 150 <2 2a alee 525 D: 200 2.50 Oe BO Wn ae LO ok A ce «oie Cees 250 3.00; 6.20. (62h te ee An additional charge of 25 cents will be made for cach split page. ; Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagi nation and date of issue, will be furnished when ordered. : | As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his riage for ie copies ‘or should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript. The rate of Subscription per polemie ts oil tt Ss SemisMoOnenly NUMBEIE re ces ss ia ee oe ee cee Be owes Monthly suinbere 6 feces ee eke eee - Remiitances should be made payable to “Washington Academy ° ences,” addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Bes, European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, Boe On. 25 Ezchanges.—The Journau does not exchange with other publications. — Fee Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, ey — fom is s made within thirty days after date of the ee issue. ek oe MS * Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to ce 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00, Special r rates = are given to a of acientific Sopiatics affiliated with the cogase ack ote JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vou. 17 Avueust 19, 1927 No. 14 MATHEMATICS.—On the analytical and graphical representation of the arithmetic, geometric and other means.!. C. E. VAN ORSTRAND, U. 8. Geological Survey. The means ordinarily employed in mathematical statistics are sim- ple functions of certain average values obtained from the equation Pity TP P2keYo T+ ++ Pann (1) Cera apee which represents the least square adjustment of the line, y = mz, through the points, %1,yi; V2,Y2; ..-.- tnyn Whose respective weights are Pi, Po, --.- Pn- In the following consideration of each special case there has been put for convenience Si el ae I dea | ' | Vise aGe | oh pes ! t 1 c { | eae ! f ; } { \ ' t 1 | l ! ! ! | 1 { | | i i see Qa t ! | I ! 1 | oO leap nen ee eee ee Le ale te ! 1 | x 2 x 7 = x, a x, X xX, Fie. 1 1 Published by permission of the Director, U. 8. Geological Survey. Received May 20, 1927. 307 358 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO Substituting in (1) the relations Ir =H Ye = oH Yn = 1 1 if 1 Dao ie eo ae we have Ly n i Wes] Vane S355 oo. = Ee LS D2; ny Gime Go se oe, YM +:.4%o + 5. ee n Referring to the diagram, Fig. 1, we have ao = ll Bi Resa ee, f j oa = — : = arithmetic mean. n THE GEOMETRIC MEAN Fie. 2 Putting tn = U5 = is 2] Un Sl 1 1 1 oe log 2, ee log ra ery log Xn and writing log x for « we have . 14 AuG. 19, 1927 VAN ORSTRAND: REPRESENTATION OF VARIOUS MEANS 309 _ a ee ae i Bloga” loga,+logz.+ ...logz, loga,+logs.+ ...logz, n ap, — 1 : log z+ log a+ ... log xz, n oa = log (geometric mean) . geometric mean = e- THE HARMONIC MEAN (a) l ' ' \ 1 { ! | { \ ' | ' t t \ t \ J aa z, 4 \ U ' ' ' \ | 1 oF. x 2 onl aia rd | ee X gs ----- Fig. 3 _ Replacing the abscissas by their reciprocals and putting Ua YN eo ie) cousin ae 1 Pi = Ui; Po = Vo, ... Pa = In we have n 1 h aa i awn j 7\ = harmonic mean. alee ae =e al ara a ee =a vy X2 n TNX Xo Ver ee ty t 1 1 O80 Ne oe ae —) = reciprocal harmonic mean. TN \U1 2 Gs 360 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 14 THE HARMONIC MEAN (b) Another representation of the harmonic mean is obtained from the relations UG ie Oa es Oris Unis 1 ea 1 al Pi =. v2 P2 —* or’ : Pn a; Lene There results | : | : | | = (*) aye al 1 1 é m= ta Gace Tarde) oe —) = rec:procal of harmonic mean. nN Te NG bo ni Allon 1 ES = TITTIES. 1/1 il 1 —(~$=+4...—> 12 bl Ai) Abra. THE CONTRA-HARMONIC MEAN AuG. 19, 1927 VAN ORSTRAND: REPRESENTATION OF VARIOUS MEANS (361 ut ‘ Ui = Ya. = = SL Pi = P2 = = Pn = 1 then we have ; aie ; os re Te «w+ x? + Gat TEEPE) a Lin ab = 1 Ce pre ee zi. 02 = _ = contra-harmonic mean. i Bo He ees Ba : THE ROOT-MEAN-SQUARE Fic. 6 Put i 1 ih SS SS lice Sr ee oe ES Se Y1 ary Ye a5’ Yy Ln ig pea Manette pn 1 and equation (1) becomes n 1 m == Se ee, =— ae en Le i a ae Le > 2? art xv? + ... 2,? a ab = 1 Se Gera Vo". a ee, Odea ee a | SS MIE SUA x. ‘362 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 14 \/ Bee A oe fat Cyt eae a = root-mean-square. The root-mean-square is evidently the abscissa of the point of inter- section of the line, y = mz, with the hyperbola, zy = 1, for we have © nN 1 Y= N= eee ee, ee Deleon es Gas 5 “ 7? Xo" eee pe ni oc = (ye es ee n If we overlook the physical requirements and base our definition on the mathematical relations only, it is evident that the definitions of harmonic mean and reciprocal harmonic mean are inconsistent—the definitions should be interchanged as each of the other means is a function of 1/m instead of m. It is interesting to note that with the exception of the root-mean- square which is defined with reference to the simplest form of hyper- bola, all of the means here discussed are defined with reference to the straight line, y = a+ bz, in which a = 1 and b = 0. Generalizing our results, we may say that certain means may be defined as the abscissa, or as a function of the abscissa of the point of intersection of the line, y = mz, with the curve, y = f(z). The value of m is determined by the method of least squares from the n points (v1, y: weight p, ... Xa, Yn Weight p,) on the curve y = f(z), the abscissae (14, 2 ... %,) of the n points being the quantities whose mean is to be determined. A further generalization of the definition consists in replacing the x coordinates by functions of these coordi- nates such as log x. | | PALEONTOLOGY .—New species of mollusks from the Hocene of Texas... JuutiA GARDNER, U. 8. Geological Survey. This paper contains descriptions and figures of 21 new species and subspecies of mollusks from the Claiborne and Wilcox groups in Texas, distributed as follows: Cook Mountain formation, 16; Lisbon forma- tion, 1; Yegua formation, 1; Wilcox group, 3. 1 Published by permission of the Director, U.S. Geological Survey. Received May 12, 1927. AauG. 19, 1927 GARDNER: NEW SPECIES OF MOLLUSKS 363 Family LEpIDAE Genus Lepa Schumacher Leda trivitate Gardner, n. sp. Figure 5 1919. Leda houstonia Harris, Bull. Am. Pal. 6: pl. 23, f. 18. Not Leda houstonia Harris, 1895. Shell small, thin, rather highly polished, compact; the aititude of the shell exceeding half the latitude, broadly and quite strongly inflated. Umbonal angle very large. Umbones not conspicuous; slightly bulbous and feebly opisthogyrate, placed a little in front of the median vertical. Anterior dorsal margin more gently sloping than the posterior; anterior extremity broadly rounded; posterior extremity obtusely rostrate; base line strongly arcuate; posterior ridge obtuse and, toward the ventral margin, often ill- defined; posterior area thus delimited, narrow, lanceolate with faint traces of secondary rays, both posterior and anterior sometimes visible. External surface for the most part smooth; a microscopically fine, concentric striation usually developed toward the lateral and ventral margins; traces of radial threadlets often visible upon the ventral portion of the rostrum and, more rarely, upon the anterior ventral margin. Ligament pit minute, sub- umbonal, wider than it is high. Teeth strong, elevated medially, lower toward the distal extremities of each series; anterior teeth not far from ten in number, coarser than the posterior teeth which run close to fifteen. Adductor impressions relatively large; the anterior sub-circular, the posterior larger and more angular. Pallial line obscure. Inner margins entire excepting for a very fine crenulation along the rostrum. Dimensions: Altitude, 2.5 millimeters; latitude, 4.0 millimeters; diameter, 2.1 millimeters. Holotype.—U. 8. Nat. Mus. Cat. No. 369248. Type locality——Bluff on San Antonio River 4 miles south-southeast of Floresville, Wilson County, Texas. Geologic horizon.—Cook Mountain formation (lower part of Claiborne group). Leda trivitate is closely allied to Leda houstonia Harris. It is, however, a smaller, relatively higher and more inflated species, with a less sharply defined sculpture both radial and concentric. It is more widely distributed than L. houstonza and more abundant at the localities at which it occurs. Leda jewetti Gardner, n. sp. Figure 6 Shell small, plump, polished, the young not far from equilat2ral; the adults produced slightly and obtusely rostrate posteriorly. Anterior dorsal margin a little higher than the posterior; anterior lateral margin broad and broadly rounded; posterior extremity narrow, obtuse; base line strongly arcuate, constricted in front of the rostrum in the adults. Umbones full, the tips proximate and opisthogyrate, slightly anterior. Lunule and escutcheon similar, the former a little less produced, narrow, lanceolate, delimited by a 364 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 14 ridge most elevated near the umbones. Posterior area defined by a secondary ray evanescing upon the rostrum. External surface concentrically threaded medially, the threads uniform over a symmetrical area, the sculpture abruptly disappearing a little in front of the rostrum and more gradually evanescing anteriorly. Ligament minute, sub-umbonal. Dentition vigorous, the teeth elevated and acutely A-shaped medially, those of the anterior series more crowded and more numerous than of the posterior. Adductor sears obscure, relatively large and well up under the dorsal margins. Pallial line obscure. Inner margins entire. : Dimensions: Altitude, 3.8 millimeters; latitude, 6.2 millimeters; semi- diameter, 1.7 millimeters. Holotype. —U.S. Nat. Mus. Cat. No. 369243. Type locality.—8 miles south of Jewett, Leon County, Texas. 7 Geologic horizon.—Cook Mountain formation HOWE part of the Claiborne group). Leda jewetti is doubtless the Texas analogue of the Mississippi species Leda catasarca Dall. The outlines and dimensions of the two forms are similar but the posterior area of L. catasarca is more sharply defined; the concentric ribbing is broader and less uniform, usually less elevated and developed overa more restricted area. In L. jewetti the entire medial portion of the shell is threaded from the umbones to the base line, the triangular sculptured area extending from an approximately equal distance in front of and behind the umbone. In L. catasarca, on the contrary, the sculpture is comparatively feeble over the entire anterior half of the shell, though it 1s continued pos- teriorly to a greater degree than in L. jewetti. Leda atakta Gardner, n. sp. Figures 7, 8 Shell rather small, plump, constricted and rostrate posteriorly. Umbones sub-central, quite full; the tips proximate and opisthogyrate. Anterior dorsal margin obliquely descending; posterior dorsal margin slightly produced and feebly concave; base line arcuate, ascending posteriorly. Lunular area depressed but not well defined. Escutcheon produced for about half the distance from the umbones to the posterior ventral margin, feebly depressed; the margin elevated and clearly defined by an elongate-cordate area inclosing the escutcheon and extending from the umbones to the extremity of the rostral ray; a second ray developed anterior to the rostrum, well defined but not conspicuous; its extremity indicated at the ventral margin by a slight jog. Concentric sculpture not developed upon the umbonal area; surface away from the umbones threaded with well rounded lirae evanescent upon the anterior portion of the shell and abruptly disappearing a little in front of the secondary rostral ray; rostrum incrementally striated but not threaded. Chondrophore minute, sub-umbonal. Dentition moderately: strong; the teeth in the anterior series approximately 18 in number; posterior series feebly concave, of nearly the same length as the anterior but less crowded, containing only about 15 component teeth. Adductor and pallial scars very obscure; shell reinforced by a slight thickening upon the inner surface directly. in front of the rostrum. AuG. 19, 1927 GARDNER: NEW SPECIES OF MOLLUSKS 3695 Dimensions: Altitude, 3.5 millimeters; latitude, 6.0 millimeters; diameter, 2.6 millimeters. ; Holotype.—U.S. Nat. Mus. Cat. No. 369241. Type locality Smithville, Bastrop County, Texas. Geologic horizon.—Cook Mountain formation (lower part of Claiborne group). | Leda atakta is a species of no striking characters but it does not conform to any of the prescribed groups. Leda jewett: is relatively higher, with rostral rays and with a concentric sculpture developed over a greater part of the surface. Leda media to which L. atakta is closely related is more produced and attenuated posteriorly, with a finer concentric sculpture de- veloped upon the umbones, as well as upon the medial and ventral portions of the shell. In both species, however, the sculpture is obsolete upon the anterior portion of the shell. Family ARCIDAE Genus BarBATIA Gray Barbatia deusseni Gardner n. sp. Figures 20, 21 1919. Arca rhomboidella Harris (part), Bull. Am. Pal. 6: 51. Not Arca rhomboidella H.. C. Lea, 1833. Shell rather small, moderately heavy, transversely elongated, obliquely constricted mesially ; basal margin parallel to the hinge; anterior lateral margin obliquely truncated; the posterior lateral margin vertically truncate, rounding into the base but angulated at the hinge. Umbones prominent, inflated, overtopping the hinge line; the tips flattened, incurved, prosogyrate, and falling within the anterior third. External surface closely sculptured radially, the ribs 40 in number on the type, finest and closest upon the obscure medial depression; slightly coarser and tuberculated anteriorly; coarsest and least crowded upon the obtuse posterior keel; anterior and medial ribs medially suleate; posterior ribs entire though somewhat nodulated; a very fine, even, concentric threading visible in the interspaces and reflected in the nodulation of the ribs. Cardinal area very narrow, asymmetric; area beneath and in front of the umbone smooth; area behind the umbones obliquely grooved. Hinge very narrow medially, widening laterally; teeth beneath the umbones very short and vertical; short and oblique along the narrow posterior portion of the hinge, the distal teeth quite coarse and approximately parallel to the hinge. Muscle scars and pallial line obscure. Inner margins coarsely dentate. Dimensions: Altitude, 11.6 millimeters; latitude, 17.7 millimeters; semi- diameter, 5.2 millimeters. Holotype.—U.8. Nat. Mus. Cat. No. 369244. Type locality —One mile below Collins Ferry, Burleson County, Texas. Geologic horizon.—Cook Mountain formation (lower part of Claiborne group). | Lea’s Claiborne species, with which the Texas form has been confused, is decidedly less gibbous, more elongated transversely, and with a less uniform ribbing. 366 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 14 I have the pleasure of naming this form in honor of Alexander Deussen, Esq., who by his assiduous collecting has so largely increased our knowledge of the Tertiary of Texas. Family OsTREIDAE Genus OSTREA Linnaeus Ostrea duvali Gardner, n. sp. Figures 1-4 Shell of moderate dimensions for the genus, inequivalve, ovate-trigonal in outline, frequently with a large attachment area and relatively broad in con- sequence. Surface layer decorticated; right valve built up of overlapping concentric lamellae so that the shell thins toward the ventral margin, and would be heaviest in the umbonal area were it not for the encroachment of the ligament area; a subcutaneous radial threading on the right valve but no true radial scuplture developed; left valve fluted with narrow radials ranging in number from 20 to 25 in the narrower forms and running to 35 and 40 in the broader; obsolete on the attached surface. Ligament area large, flattened in the right valve; the media] depression in the left valve broadly U-shaped. Lateral margins of right valve finely. pitted, the pitting persistent in some individuals around the entire inner margin. Adductor scars rather small, crescentic, not deeply excavated, posterior and below the median horizontal. Pedal scar obscure. Dimensions: Right valve, altitude, 10.6 millimeters; latitude, 6.1 mulli- meters, semi-diameter, 2.4 millimeters. Left valve of another individual; altitude, 10.5 millimeters; latitude, 6.95 millimeters; semi-diameter, 3.45 millimeters. : Cotypes.—U.S. Nat. Mus. Cat. No. 369239. | Type locality —Austin-Elgin Ferry road, 1 mile north of Austin-Bastrop Highway, Bastrop County, Texas. Geologic horizon.—Wilcox group, probably the Indio formation. Ostrea duvali suggests in the sculpture characters Ostrea crenulimarginata Gabb and Ostrea multilirata Conrad. If the left valves alone were known, they would be referred without serious misgivings to O. multzlirata; if the right valves only, they might be confused with O. crenulimarginata Gabb. ‘The finer, more numerous radials of O. dwvalz serve to separate it from O. crenuli- marginata, and the absence of radials upon the right valves distinguish it from O. multilirata. The exact horizon of Ostrea duvali is not known but it is certainly Wilcox and younger than Ostrea multilirata Conrad. I have the pleasure of dedicating this species to Mr. Hugh Duval of Bastrop, Texas, to whose kindness I am indebted for the knowledge of the locality. Many visiting geologists during the past few years have profited by Mr. Duval’s keen observation, intelligent interest in the country about him, and his splendid collections—the best that I have seen in the way of a local assemblage. Occurrence.—Austin-Elgin Ferry road, 1 mile north of Austin-Bastrop Highway, Bastrop County ; Caldwell Knob, Bastrop County; 1 mile northeast of New Berlin, Guadalupe County. AuG. 19, 1927 GARDNER: NEW SPECIES OF MOLLUSKS 367 Family PHOLADOMYACIDAE Genus PHoLADOMYA Sowerby Pholadomya (claibornesis subsp.?) harrisi Gardner, n. sp. 1919. Pholadomya claibornensis Harris, Bull. Am. Pal. 6: 197. pl. 59, f.9.. Not Pholadomya claibornensis Aldrich, 1886. Shell exceedingly thin, nacreous, oblong. Trigonal in outline, expanded anteriorly; the posterior dorsal margin approximately parallel to the base; the posterior extremity very broadly rounded. Umbones full, prominent, nearly terminal, the tips incurved and in contact. Concentric folds rather. coarse, strong and regular, though incremental in character; radials well’ developed upon the medial portion of the shell, absent upon the extreme | anterior and over a slightly greater posterior area; discontinuous, inclined to be nodose at the intersection with the concentric rugae and obsolete in the interspaces. Characters of the hinge and interior not known. Dimensions: Altitude, 22.0 millimeters; latitude, 30.0 millimeters. (Taken from drawing.) Holotype.—Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. Type locality —Two miles east of Alto, Cherokee County, Texas. Geologic horizon.—Cook Mountain formation (lower part of the Claiborne group). The Texas specimens have been separated from those from Alabama because of the stronger and more persistent radial sculpture and apparently coarser concentric markings. The species is poorly preserved, as a rule, and has only a meager representation so that it is difficult to determine either the constancy or the value of these differences. I have the pleasure of naming the form in honor of Prof. Gilbert D. Harris of Cornell University. Family VERTICORDIIDAE Genus VERTICORDIA (Searles Wood Ms.) Sowerby Verticordia satex Gardner n. sp. Figures 22, 23 Shell hihi nacreous, small, comprenced: subtrigonal in outline, inequi- lateral. Umbones sub- central, incurved, strongly prosogyrate. Margin directly in front of the umbones deeply excavated by the false lunule. Es- cutcheon absent. Anterior extremity strongly arcuate; posterior dorsal and lateral margins forming a parabolic curve from the umbones to the arcuate _ base. Outer surface heavily corded with 14 subequal, abruptly elevated ribs radiating from the umbones in gentle curves, convex posteriorly, more widely spaced medially but with no sharp break in the spacing; interradials deeply concave and wider than the radials; entire external surface micro-granular; outer margins sharply dentate. Ligament opisthodetic, deeply inset, con- tinued to the apices of the umbones. A single, rather stout, subumbonal cardinal developed in the right valve, received in the left valve between the dorsa] margin and the thickened inner margin of the lunule which functions as a denticle; posterior margin of right valve grooved to receive the bevelled margin of the left. Anterior muscle scar small, elongate, quite deeply sunken, its dorsal extremity beneath the ventral margin of the false lunule, posterior 368 | JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 14: muscle scar obscure. Pallial line remote from the margin, distinctly impressed. } Dimensions: Altitude, 3.0 millimeters; latitude, 3.0 millimeters; semi- diameter, 0.7 millimeter. Holotype. —U.S8. Nat. Mus. Cat. No. 369240. Type locality—Mbosley’s Ferry, Brazos River, Brazos County. Texas. Geologic horizon.—Cook Mountain formation (lower part of Claiborne group). i Verticordia satex is doubtless related to Verticordia eocenensis Langdon de- seribed from Wautubbee Hills, Clarke County, Mississippi. The Texas species is a smaller and more delicate shell, less inflated, more trigonal in Ousaney with a more sharply elevated radial ccukptute Family CRASSATELLITIDAE Genus CRASSATELLITES Kriger Subgenus CRASSINELLA Guppy Crassatellites (Crassinella) pteleina Gardner n. sp. Figures 18, 19 Shell very small, quite thin, nearly equilateral, evenly inflated, roughly a sector of 90°. Umbones inconspicuous, somewhat flattened upon their summits, the tips turned slightly forward. Lunule and escutcheon co-. extensive with the dorsal margins, the lunule the narrower and the less produced; both of them sharply defined by the angulation of the valve and by the absence of any sculpture. Anterior dorsal margin shorter than the posterior; base arcuate. Surface smooth excepting for a somewhat exag- gerated incremental sculpture, strongest upon the umbones and toward the tateral and ventral margins; an exceedingly fine radial lineation similar to that often discernible upon the recent C. lunulatus developed in some in- dividuals. Ligament entirely internal; the ligament pit produced beneath the tips of the umbones. Hinge plate minute, the dentition delicate; right anterior cardinal partially fused with the dorsal margin; posterior cardinal short, slender, cuneate; anterior dorsal margin grooved its entire length to receive the bevelled edge of the left valve; posterior dorsal margin slightly modified to function as a lateral; dentition of left valve not known but doubt- less normal. Adductor scars large but obscure. Pallial line simple, distant from the ventral margin. - Dimensions: Altitude, 2.5 millimeters; latitude, 2.75 millimeters; semi- diameter, 1.0 millimeter _ Holotype.—Aldrich collection, Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Md. Type locality — Elm Creek, Lee County, Texas. Geologic horizon—Yegua formation (upper part of Claiborne group). The species is remarkable for the even inflation of the disk, and the absence of any well-defined sculpture. Nothing very close to it has been recognized. _Crassatellites (Crassinella) aldrichi Gardner n. sp. Figures 14-17 °-1919. Crassinella minor Harris (part), Bull. Am. Pal. 6: 92. Not Astarte minor Lea, 1835. ‘Shell minute, compressed, narrow trigonal, nearly equilateral. Umbones ‘AUG. 19, 1927 GARDNER: NEW SPECIES OF MOLLUSKS 369 acute, feebly arcuate, the tips proximate, with a slight posterior inflection, nearly central in position. Dorsal margins straight, converging at an angle of not far from 90°; base line arcuate, a little more strongly upcurved an- teriorly than posteriorly. Lunule and escutcheon co-extensive with the dorsal margins; escutcheon the wider of the two, and like the lunule defined not only by the angulation of the valves but also by the abrupt disappearance of the concentric sculpture. Sculpture very irregular in development, never very sharp; tips of umbones usually smooth; the rest of the shell concentrically wrinkled, the folds coarser, as a rule and less closely spaced-upon the medial portion of the shell than upon the ventral, tending to flatten a little toward the margins of the lunule and the escutcheon where they abruptly disappear. Ligament entirely internal, the pit produced well beneath the umbones. Dentition delicate; anterior cardinal of right valve fused with the cardinal margin; posterior cardinal, laminar, somewhat cuneate; posterior dorsal margin bevelled to function as a lateral; anterior dorsal margin of right valve suleate, the inner margin elevated medially; anterior cardinal of left valve elevated, laminar, the posterior cardinal very short and partially fused with the dorsal margin; margin of ligament pit elevated, simulating a tooth; anterior dorsal margin of left valve bevelled, the posterior suleate, and the inner margin raised medially. Adductor scars relatively large. Pallial line simple. Inner margins not crenate. Dimensions: Right valve: altitude, 2.6 millimeters; latitude, 2.5 milli- meters, semi-diameter, 0.8 millimeter; left valve: altitude, 2.4 millimeters; latitude, 2.3 millimeters; semi-diameter, 0.7 millimeter. Cotypes.—U.S. Nat. Mus. Cat. No. 369249. Type locality—4 miles southeast of Floresville, Wilson County, Texas. Geologic horizon.—Cook Mountain formation (lower part of Claiborne group). Crassatellites (Crassinella) aldrichi is the analogue in the Texas Eocene of Crassatellites (Crassinella) of Alabama. It is a smaller species than C. parva Lea with a more obtuse sculpture. The sculpture is not developed upon the umbones, as a rule, while in C. minor Lea the fine, sharp laminae are initiated at avery early stage. Crassatellites aldrichz is restricted inits distribution and never very abundant. I have the honor to name it for Truman H. Aldrich, Esq., long among the foremost of the Tertiary paleontologists. Family CARDITIDAE Genus VENERICARDIA Lamarck Venericardia horatiana Gardner, n. sp. Figures 28, 29 Shell rather small, thin, rudely quadrate, moderately inflated; obscurely flattened posteriorly. Umbones quite small, incurved, prosogyrate, acutely tapering, placed a little in front of the median vertical. Lunule minute, deeply impressed. Anterior end very broadly rounded; posterior dorsal margin obliquely sloping, rounding into the vertically truncate lateral ex- tremity; base line feebly arcuate. Tips of umbones reticulately sculptured; radials, excepting on weathered specimens, restricted to the dorsal posterior portion of the shell, most closely spaced posteriorly, not developed on the 370 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 14 extreme half or third of the shell; radials usually 20 or 21 in number, moder- ately elevated near the umbones and showing a slight tendency to be nodose; inter-radials near the umbones broadly U-shaped, the incrementals very fine and sharp and evenly developed in the channels but not over-riding the radials; radial sculpture away from the umbones sub-cutaneous; the inter- radials appearing as very feebly incised lines; least feeble posteriorly; a scalloped incremental sculpture showing faintly upon the ventral portion of the shell. Hinge plate moderately heavy. Ligament external, the area narrow and much produced. Dentition normal; anterior cardinal of right valve nearly obsolete; medial cardinal heavy, asymmetrically cuneate, pos- teriorly produced, feebly striated transversely ; posterior right cardinal slender, elevated; anterior left cardinal short, stout; posterior cardinal much produced, : relatively slender, the inner surface of the anterior and both the laterai surfaces of the posterior cardinal transversely striated. Characters of interior sharply defined by the slight thickening of the shell over the surface of the adherent mantle. Adductor scars very distinct, the anterior rudely reniform, the posterior semi-elliptical; pedal scar small but deeply impressed, directly dorsal to the anterior adductor. Pallial line simple, rather far removed from the ventral margin; inner margins strongly crenate. Dimensions: Altitude, 25.0 millimeters; latitude, 27.0 millimeters; semi- diameter, 9.0 millimeters. Holotype.—U.S. Nat. Mus. Cat. No. 369238. | Type locality.—13 miles west of Sabinetown, Sabine County, Texas. Geologic horizon.—Wilcox formation. Venericardia horatiana is remarkable for the quadrate outline, and the character of the sculpture. Beneath the outer shell layer, the radials are angular and persistent to the ventral margin; but in perfectly preserved specimens, they are almost entirely concealed by the epidermal veil. This epidermis is produced, at the lower margin, a trifle beyond the layers beneath and the scalloping of this thin edge is remarkably sharp. Though obviously of the general group of V. planicosta, this species is not approached very closely by any others. Venericardia trapaquara subsp. texalana Gardner, n. subsp. Figures 24-27 1919. Venericardia trapaquara Harris (part), Bull. Am. Pal. 6: 81. (USO Shell of only moderate dimensions, rather thin, rudely trigonal to quadrate in outline, moderately inflated. Umbones gibbous, the tips incurved and prosogyrate, anterior in position. Lunule minute, depressed, sharply de- limited. Anterior extremity strongly bowed in front of the lunule; posterior dorsal margin gently sloping, rounding broadly into the vertically truncate lateral margin; base line feebly arcuate. External surface sculptured with 20 to 22 obscurely terraced radials, each crowned with a narrow, sharply serrate cord; inter-radial channels broadly U-shaped, sharply delimited; microscopically sculptured by the down-curved incrementals. Ligament and dental characters normal. Adductor scars less conspicuous than in the heavier forms. Ventral and lateral margins strongly serrate. Dimensions: Right valve: altitude, 17.0 millimeters: latitude, 16.0 mulli- AUG. 19,1927 © GARDNER: NEW SPECIES OF MOLLUSKS 371 meters; semi-diameter, 7.5 millimeters; left valve; altitude, 17.0 millimeters; latitude, 16.5 millimeters; semi-diameter, 6.65 millimeters. Holotype.-—Academy Natural Sciences, Philadelphia, Pa. Type locality —Black Shoals, Brazos River, Texas. Geologic horizon.—Cook Mountain formation (lower part of the Claiborne group). This subspecies is remarkable for the relatively small number of ribs, and its sculpture is similar to that of V. natchitoches Harris, though the umbones are much lower. More perfect material may prove the subspecies to be deserving of specific rank. Forms from St. Augustine, obviously of this same group, are more com- pressed and develop only 16 or 17 radials. Juveniles from the environs of Sabinetown are apparently referable to this subspecies though they are slightly more compressed than those from the type locality. | Subgenus PLEUROMERIS Conrad Venericardia (Pleuromeris) leonensis Gardner, n. sp. Figures 38, 39 Shel: minute, solid, ovate-trigonal in outline, moderately inflated. Um- bones broadly rounded, the tips proximate and nearly central; the smooth embryonic shell usually retained. Lunule relatively large, much depressed, sharply delimited. Dorsal margins converging at an angle of not far from 45°; anterior extremity bowed slightly in front of the lunule; posterior and ventral margins broadly rounded. External surface strongly fluted by the radials; radials 14 or 15 in number, as a rule, minutely nodose, increasingly elevated ventrally; inter-radials broadly U-shaped, microscopically striated by the incrementals, wider toward the ventral margin than the radials. Ligament external, opisthodetic, lodged in a narrow groove, about one-fourth as long as the posterior dorsal margin. Dentition rather delicate for so solid a shell; anterior right cardinal nearly obsolete; medial cardinal asymmetrically cuneate, much produced; posterior right cardinal obsolete; right posterior dorsal margin modified to function as a lateral; left anterior cardinal short, deltoid; left posterior cardinal relatively slender, produced parallel to the dorsal margin, separated from the cardinal by a deep trigonal sub-umbonal socket; a narrow pocket in the posterior dorsal margin to receive the modified dorsal margin of the right valve; anterior dorsal margin near the extremity of the lunule slightly modified and received in a corresponding groove in the right valve. Adductor scars relatively large. Pallial line simple. Inner margins coarsely crenate. Dimensions: Altitude, 2.2 millimeters; latitude, 2.0 millimeters; semi- diameter, 1.0 millimeters. Holotype.—U. S. Nat. Mus. Cat. No. 369247. Type locality.—8 miles south of Jewett, Leon County, Texas. Geologic horizon.—Cook Mountain formation (lower part of the Claiborne group). Venericardia leonensis is smaller than Venericardia parva Lea and the ribs are less numerous. V. parva symmetrica Dall is quite similar in outline though more compressed. If I have read the description and figure of V. 372 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 14 tortidens Harris correctly, it is very close to leonensis, but thinner shelled and less trigonal in outline. Venericardia leonensis is known only from the type locality. Family CHAMIDAB Genus PsEupOCcHAMA Odhner Pseudochama harrisi Gardner, n. sp. Figures 43, 44 1919. Chama monroensis Harris, Bull. Am. Pal. 6: 1380. pl. 41, f. 2-4. Not Chama monroensis Aldrich, 1903. Shell small, moderately heavy, rudely circular in outline; right valve evenly but not strongly inflated, the left attached valve much deeper. Umbones twisted forward, conspicuously so in the left valve; the nepionic characters not preserved. Lunule and escutcheon not defined. External surface of right valve sculptured with crowded lamellae, their free edges produced into spines, usually finer and longer upon the anterior portion of the shell; left valve not well preserved, apparently much more distantly sculptured. Liga- ment marginal, lodged in a deep groove produced to the tips of the umbones. Dentition rude; the prominent flattened subumbonal process in the left valve received between amorphous corrugated ridges in the right. Muscle scars large and prominent, the anterior elongated. Pallial line entire. Inner margins crenate. Dimensions: Right valve: altitude, 14.5 millimeters; latitude, 16.5 milli meters; diameter, 6. 0 millimeters. Holotype.—U.S. Nat. Mus. Cat. No. 1389451. Type locality.—8 miles west of Enterprise, Clarke Co., Mississippi. Geologic horizon.—Lisbon formation (lower part of Claiborne group). In sculptural characters, the species is much nearer to P. mississeppiensis (Conrad) than it is to P. monroensis (Aldrich). The Vicksburg form, how- ever, is more closely and strongly spinose than any of the lower Claiborne Eocene forms under observation. I have the pleasure of naming the form in honor of Prof. Gilbert D. Harris of Cornell University, who was the first to indicate the peculiarities of this species. Family Luctnipar Genus PHacorpEs Blainville Subgenus Parvituctna Dall Phacoides (Parvilucina) sabelli Gardner, n. sp. Figures 10-13 Shell small, solid, moderately inflated, inequilateral. Umbones small but well rounded, the tips acute and directed forward; prominent by reason of their elevation; nearly central in position. Lunule rather large, abruptly depressed, probably broader and more sharply defined in the left valve than in the right. Escutcheon exceedingly narrow. Dorsal margin excavated at the lunule; anterior lateral margin broadly rounded or even obtusely angulated; posterior dorsal margin obliquely sloping, the lateral margin vertically truncate; base line strongly arcuate, often obscurely angulated aua. 19, 1927 GARDNER: NEW SPECIES OF MOLLUSKS | 373 posteriorly; posterior area flattened or even a little concave, defined by an obtuse keel running from the umbones to the posterior ventral margin; a shallow groove sometimes discernible near the margin. External surface smooth excepting for an incremental sculpture; and, in exceptional indi- viduals, an exceedingly fine radial lineation. Ligament marginal, inset, the groove short, moderately deep, directed backward from the tips of the um- bones. Dentition rather vigorous for so small a shell; anterior cardinal of right valve fused with the dorsal margin; posterior cardinal deltoid; anterior cardinal of left valve broader and more elevated than the posterior, separated from it by a trigonal pit for the reception of the right posterior cardinal; right laterals short, rather stout, conic, with a groove between them and the dorsal margins; receiving pockets of left valve correspondingly deep, their inner margins elevated. Adductor scars strongly impressed, the an- terior reniform, the posterior irregular in outline. Pallial line entire; surface thickened and somewhat punctate over the area of the attached mantle. Inner margins crenate. Dimensions: Right valve; altitude, 2.8 millimeters; latitude, 2.7 milli- meters; diameter, 1.0 millimeter. Left valve: altitude, 2.5 millimeters: latitude, 2.5 millimeters: diameter, 1.0 millimeter. Cotypes. —U. 8. Nat. Mus. Cat. No. 369245. Type locality—a14 miles west of Sabinetown, Sabine Come Texas. Geologic horizon. Snes formation. Phacoides sabelli is remarkable for the absence of any sculpture. It is restricted in its known distribution to the type locality. Family DiIrpLODONTIDAE Genus DipLoponta Bronn Diplodonta satex Gardner, n. sp. Figures 34, 35 Shell small, rather’ compressed, rudely quadrate in outline. Umbones full but narrow, acute and feebly prosogyrate at their tips and overtopping the dorsal margins a little behind the median vertical. Anterior dorsal margin more produced than the posterior, the anterior extremity obtusely truncate vertically; the posterior, obliquely truncate; base line broadly arcuate. Lunule and escutcheon not developed. External surface smooth excepting for a quite sharp concentric grooving restricted in some indi- viduals to the anterior portion of the shell, in others developed upon the posterior as well. Ligament marginal, opisthodetic. Hinge apparently normal, though known only from the left valve; left anterior cardinal bifid, the posterior short and laminar, fused with the dorsal margin. Adductor sears and pallial line obscure. Inner margins beveled. Dimensions: Altitude, 7.2 millimeters; latitude, 7.0 millimeters; semi- diameter, 2.5 millimeters. Holotype. —U.S8. Nat. Mus. Cat. No. 369234. . Type locality—Three-fourths mile south of Elkhart, Anderson County, exas. Geologic horizon.—Cook Monnéan formation (lower part of Claiborne group). The angular outline is perhaps the most characteristic feature of this species. It is rather widely distributed in Anderson and Houston Counties but it has not been recognized elsewhere. 374 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 14 Family LeproniparE Genus Borntia Philippi Bornia zapataensis Gardner, n. sp. Figure 9 Shell small, thin, approximating a low isosceles triangle, slightly de- pressed medially; apical angle about 110°. Posterior dorsal margin slightly higher than the anterior; lateral margins quite sharply rounded, base line nearly straight. Lunule and escutcheon not defined. External surface radially grooved, the radii inclined away from the median vertical, leaving a small medial arc devoid of radial sculpture; radials sufficiently strong upon the anterior and posterior areas to flute the inner surface; a micro- scopically fine concentric striation developed over the entire disk. Interior . filled with a hard matrix concealing the characters of the hinge and adductor and pallial scars. Dimensions: Altitude, 5.0 millimeters; latitude, 6.5 millimeters. Holotype.—U. 8. Nat. Mus. Cat. No. 369237. Type locality.—3 miles southeast of Zapata, Zapata County, Texas. . Geologic horizon.—Cook Mountain formation (lower part of Claiborne group). , Bornia zapataensis is the analogue in the Cook Mountain in Texas of Bornia zsoceles in the McBean formation in Georgia, and Bornia scintillata Dall in the Gosport sand. The sculpture of the Texas species approaches more closely to that of B. scintillata but it is neither so fine nor so sharp and covers a greater. portion of the surface. The type is unique. Family TELLINIDAE Genus TELLINA Linnaeus Tellina makelloides Gardner, n. sp. Figures 41, 42 Shell very thin and fragile, about twice as broad as it is high; anterior portion much produced and evenly rounded; posterior end very short and obscurely rostrate. Umbones small, rising but little above the dorsal margin, strongly posterior, being only about half as far from the posterior extremity as they are from the anterior. Tips of umbones acute and inclined to be opisthogyrate. Posterior dorsal margin more steeply declining than the anterior; base line feebly arcuate; an inconspicuous but well defined fold, uniform in development from the umbones to the lower rostral angle. Ex- ternal surface smooth excepting for incrementals, strongest toward the ventral margin and, particularly, upon the rostral area. Ligament external, opisthodetic, the area linear, lanceolate, and extending for about half the length of the posterior dorsal margin. Hinge characters unknown. Adduc- tor scars very obscure, as might be expected in so thin a shell. Rostral fold indicated on the casts by a rather sharp ridge. Pallial sinus not observed. Dimensions: Altitude, 14.5 millimeters; latitude, 28.5 millimeters; diam- eter, 5.2 millimeters. Holotype.—U. 8. Nat. Mus. Cat. No. 369246. Type locality ——Three-fourths mile south of Elkhart, Anderson County, Texas. AUG. 19, 1927 GARDNER: NEW SPECIES OF MOLLUSKS 379 Geologic horizon.—Cook Mountain formation (lower part of Claiborne group). The type is a partially calcified cast with portions of the shell still adhering, The maximum diameter is at some little distance in front of the beaks. Tellina cynoglossula of the Claiborne is similar in outline but is smaller and more strongly sculptured concentrically. The species is restricted in its known distribution to the environs of the type locality. Family CoRBULIDAE Genus CorBuLa Bruguiére Subgenus CarYocoRBULA Gardner Corbula (Caryocorbula) engonatoides Gardner, n. sp. Figures 30, 31 Shell small, the right valve slightly larger than the left, notably com- pressed, rather solid, rudely rectangular in outline; rostrate posteriorly, the rostrum acutely angular, sharply pinched and slightly produced at the ex- tremity; area between the rostrum and the raised margin of the escutcheon concave. Umbones low, somewhat anterior in position, flattened upon their summits, incurved and prosogyrate, the umbo of the right valve slightly in advance of that of the left. Lunule not differentiated. Es- cutcheon well defined both by the raised margin and the sharp change in the direction of the incrementals, wider in the right valve than in the left. Dorsal margins gently sloping; anterior extremity well rounded, the posterior extremity obliquely truncate between the keels; base line nearly horizontal, feebly constricted in front of the produced posterior keel. External sculpture absent or very feeble upon the dorsal portion of the shell, developed upon the medial and ventral portions in the form of very heavy concentric folds, often with a fine secondary concentric striation; concentric sculpture very strong on crossing the keel, continuing across it to the margin of the es- cutcheon, becoming laminar toward the ventral margin, and reduced to in- crementals upon the escutcheon. Ventral margin of right valve incurved and overlapping the left. Ligament very short, inset, opisthodetic. Hinge normal; the single cardinal in the right valve moderately stout, conical, re- ceived in a correspondingly deep-subumbonal pit in the left valve; a dentate process developed behind the ligament support of the left valve but no true teeth. Interior more or less thickened in the adults. Muscle scars promi- nent. Pallal line distinct, obscurely truncate posteriorly but not sinuated. Dimensions: Right valve: altitude, 5.3 millimeters; latitude, 8.5 milli- meter; diameter, 2.4 millimeters; left valve: altitude, 4.5 millimeters; latitude, 7.5 millimeters; diameter, 2.5 millimeters. Cotypes.—U. 8. Nat. Mus. Cat. No. 369250. Type locality.—Smithville, Bastrop County, Texas. Geologic horizon.—Cook Mountain formation (lower part of the Claiborne group). Corbula engonatoides is present in the lower part of the Claiborne group of Wautubbee, Mississippi, and has been confused with C. engonata Conrad | a Vicksburg species. The earlier form has a much more decided sculpture. The keel of C. engonata is distinct but it is not acute. In C. engonatoides it 376 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 14 is not only acute, but, toward the ventral margin, sharply pinched. Directly in front of the keel, in the adult, there is a slight constriction of the basal ‘margin while the area behind it is decidedly concave. Neither the basal constriction nor the posterior depression have been observed in the Vicks- burg form. The concentric sculpture, as a rule, is initiated later in C. engonatoides and is more pronounced. The very faint radial sculpture of the C. barratiana type which is usually discernible behind the keel of C. engonata has not been detected upon its progenitor. Corbula (Caryocorbula) augustae Gardner, n. sp. Figures 32, 33 Shell small and very fragile, strongly inequivalve; the right valve much higher than the left and overlapping it ventrally and posteriorly. Right valve elevated trigonal in outline; the left, transversely ovate; right valve acutely rostrate posteriorly; a secondary keel developed at the margin of the escutcheon; the area between them depressed. Prodissoconch smooth and thick, capping the umbones as in C. texana Gabb. Umbones set a little in front of the median vertical, the right much more elevated than the left. Lunule not defined. Escutcheon smooth and rather narrow, produced the length of the dorsal margin. Anterior end well rounded from the um- bones to the base; posterior extremity in right valve vertically truncate, acutely rounded in the left; base line arcuate. External surface of right valve concentrically furrowed from the prodissoconch to the ventral margin, the rugae overriding the keel and persisting to the margin of the escutcheon, though with diminished strength; concentric furrows upon left valve, coarser and fewer in number, weakening toward the anterior and posterior dorsal margins. Ligament short, inset; the support in the right valve relatively prominent. Right cardinal slender, a shallow groove near the ventral margin of the right valve for the reception of the edge of the left. Muscle scars not conspicuous. Pallial line entire, obscure. Dimensions: Right valve: altitude, 6.0 millimeters; latitude, 7.0° mulli- meters; diameter, 3.0 millimeters. Left valve: altitude, 4.5 millimeters; latitude, 5.7 millimeters; diameter, 2.0 millimeters. Cotypes.—U. S. Nat. Mus. Cat. No. 369242. Type locality — Augusta, Houston County, Texas. Geologic horizon.—Cook Mountain formation (lower part of Claiborne group). The right valve strongly suggests a delicate C. smithvillensis Harris but the left valve with its coarse concentric sculpture is quite distinct from: the high, inflated, feebly sculptured left valve of Harris’s species. Family RiInGIcuLIDAE Genus RinaicuLa Deshayes Ringicula trapaquara subsp. deusseni Gardner, n. subsp. Figure 40 Shell small, solid; rather squat; the aperture a little more than half the altitude of the entire shell. Whorls approximately five in number; those of the conch and protoconch not sharply differentiated; initial turn largely submerged, the succeeding volution becoming eradually higher and more inflated; beginning of conch probably indicated by the narrow posterior AUG. 19, 1927 GARDNER: NEW SPECIES OF MOLLUSKS OV7 tabulation introduced near the opening of the third whorl; whorls of spire trapezoidal in outline, the body broadly rounded. Surface sculptured with a relatively broad and deep sulcus near the posterior suture and nine or ten lineal sulci upon the body; area directly in front of the posterior sulcus smooth. Aperture oblique, constricted behind; peristome heavily calloused; outer lip slightly patulous, terminal varix wide and heavy, continuous with the parietal wash both anteriorly and posteriorly; serrate excepting along - the margins of the siphonal exits. Columellar folds heavy, three in number; the posterior, posteriorly inclined, placed directly behind*the abrupt con- striction of the body, the medial nearly horizontal and very close to the marginal anterior plait; both the incurrent and excurrent siphonal notches rather broad and deep. Dimensions: Altitude, 2.5 millimeters; maximum diameter, 1.6 milli- meters. Holotype.—U. 8. Nat. Mus. Cat. No. 369236. Type locality.—4 miles southeast of Floresville, Wilson County, Texas. Geologic horizon.—Cook Mountain formation (lower part of the Claiborne group). , 2 The subspecies deussent differs from Ringicula trapaquara, strict sense, in the absence of spiral sculpture over the posterior portion of the body. The sulci are often not developed, at least upon the early whorls of the spire, in R. trapaquara s.s. but in the subspecies this character persists to the adult stage. The subspecies has been confused with Ringicula biplicata Lea, a similarly sculptured form but more slender and decidedly less calloused about the aperture. Family LIMNAEIDAE Genus PLanorsis Miiller Planorbis andersoni Gardner, n. sp. Figures 36, 37 Shell small, exceedingly thin, discoidal, depressed on the umbilical, and to a lesser degree, on the apical surface. Whorls five in number, the two earliest included in the protoconch; first whorl of conch constricted at its opening and depressed below the plane of the protoconch; later whorls in- creasing rather rapidly in diameter and altitude; body relatively high, broadly rounded along the periphery; obtusely rostrate on both the apical and umbilical surfaces. Surface sculpture not developed. Aperture reni- form, adnate to the body wall upon the inner surface; less produced and more sharply rounded anteriorly than posteriorly. Umbilical surface funnel-shaped and somewhat scalariform, revealing all of the obtusely carinated posterior extremities of the component whorls. Dimensions: Altitude, 1.0 millimeter; maximum latitude, 2.2 millimeters; latitude, at right angles to maximum latitude, 2.0 millimeters. Holotype.—U. 8. Nat. Mus. Cat. No. 369235. Type locality —Three-fourths of a mile south of Elkhart, Anderson County, Texas. Geologic horizon.—Cook Mountain formation (lower part of the Claiborne group). This fresh-water genus has not been previously reported from the Eocene of Texas. It is fairly common at the single locality at which it is represented. 378 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 14 ILLUSTRATIONS Figures 14. Ostrea duvali Gardner, n. sp. (p. 366). 1. Interior of left valve (cotype); altitude, 10.5 millimeters; latitude, 6.95 milli- meters. 2. Interior of right valve (cotype); altitude 10.6 millimeters; latitude, 6.1 milli- meters. 3. Exterior of right valve (cotype); altitude, 10.6 millimeters; latitude, 6.1 milli- meters. 4, Exterior of left valve (cotype); altitude, 10.5 millimeters; latitude, 6.95 milli- meters. Figure 5. Leda trivitate Gardner, n. sp. (p. 363). Dorsal view of double valves (type); latitude, 4.0 millimeters; diameter, 2.1 mil- limeters. Figure 6. Leda jewettt Gardner, n. sp. (p. 363). Exterior of right valve; altitude, 3.8 millimeters; latitude, 6.2 millimeters. Figures 7,8. Leda atakta Gardner, n.sp. (p. 364). 7. Exterior of left valve (type); altitude, 3.5 millimeters; latitude, 6.0 millimeters. 8. Dorsal view of double valves (type); diameter, 2.6 millimeters. Figure 9. Bornia zapataensis Gardner, n. sp. (p. 374). Exterior of right valve (type); altitude, 5.0 millimeters; latitude, 6.5 millimeters. Figures 10-13. Phacoides (Parvilucina) sabelli Gardner, n. sp. (p. 372). 10. Interior of left valve (cotype); altitude, 2.5 millimeters; latitude, 2.5 milli- meters. 11. Exterior of right valve (cotype); altitude, 2.8 millimeters; latitude, 2.7 milli- meters. 12. Interior of right valve (cotype); altitude, 2.8 millimeters; latitude, 2.7 milli- meters. 13. Exterior of left valve (cotype); altitude, 2.5 millimeters; latitude, 2.5 milli- meters. Figures 14-17. Crassatellites (Crassinella) aldricht Gardner, n. sp. (p. 368). 14. Interior of right valve (cotype); altitude, 2.6 millimeters; latitude, 2.5 milli- meters. 15. Exterior of right valve (cotype); altitude, 2.6 millimeters; latitude, 2.5 milli- meters. 16. Interior of left valve (cotype); altitude, 2.4 millimeters; latitude, 2.3 milli- meters. | 17. Exterior of left valve (cotype); altitude, 2.4 millimeters; latitude, 2.3 milli- meters. Figures 18,19. Crassatellites (Crassinella) pteleina Gardner, n.sp. (p. 368). 18. Interior of right valve (type); altitude, 2.5 millimeters; latitude, 2.75 milli- meters. 19. Exterior of right valve (type); altitude, 2.5 millimeters; latitude, 2.75 milli- meters. Figures 20, 21. Barbatia deusseni Gardner, n.sp. (p.365). 20. Interior of right valve (type); altitude, 11.6 millimeters; latitude, 17.7 milli- meters. 2h. Exterior of right valve (type); altitude, 11.6 millimeters; latitude, 17.7 milli- meters. 3v9 SPECIES OF MOLLUSKS NEW GARDNER AuG. 19, 1927 Figures 1-4, Ostrea duvali 380 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 14 Figures 5-23. 5, Leda trivitate; 6, L. jewetti; 7, 8, L. atakta; 9, Bornia zapataensis, 10-13, Phacoides (Parvilucina) sabelli; 14-17, Crassatellites (Crassinella) aldrichi; 18, 19, C’. pteleina; 20, 21, Barbatia deusseni; 22, 23, Verticordia satezx. AuG. 19, 1927 GARDNER: NEW SPECIES OF MOLLUSKS 381 Figures 24-29. 24-27, Venericardia trapaquara subsp. texalana; 28, 29, V. horatiana. 382 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 14 Figures 30-44. 30, 31, Corbula (Caryocorbula) engonatoides; 32, 338, C. augustae; 34, 35, Diplodonta satex; 36, 37, Planorbis andersoni; 38, 39, Venericardia (Pleuromeris) leonensis; 40, Ringicula trapaquara subsp. deusseni; 41, 42, Tellina makelloides; 48, 44, Pseudochama harrist. AuG. 19, 1927 GARDNER: NEW SPECIES OF MOLLUSKS 383 Figures 22, 23. Verticordia satex Gardner, n. sp. (p. 367). 22. Interior of left valve (type); altitude, 3.0 millimeters; latitude, 3.0 milli- meters. 23. Exterior of left valve (type); altitude, 3.0 millimeters; latitude, 3.0 millimeters. Figures 24-27. Venericardia trapaquara subsp. tezalana Gardner, n. subsp. (p. 370). 24. Exterior of right valve (cotype); altitude, 17.0 millimeters; latitude, 16.0 milli-. meters. 25. Interior of right valve (cotype); altitude, 17.0 millimeters; latitude, 16.0 milli- meters. j 26. Exterior of left valve (cotype); altitude, 17.0 millimeters; latitude, 16.5 milli- meters. 27. Interior of left valve (cotype); altitude, 17.0 millimeters; latitude, 16.5 milli- meters. Figures 28, 29. Venericardia horatiana Gardner, n. sp. (p. 369). 28. Interior of left valve (type); altitude, 25.0 millimeters; latitude, 27.0 milli- meters. 29. Exterior of left valve (type); altitude, 25.0 millimeters; latitude, 27.0 millimeters. . Figures 30, 31. Corbula (Caryocorbula) engonatoides Gardner, n. sp. (p. 375). 30. Exterior of right valve (cotype); altitude, 5.3 millimeters; latitude, 8.5 milli- meters. 31. Interior of left valve (cotype); altitude, 4.5 millimeters; latitude, 7.5 milli- meters. Figures 32, 33. Corbula (Caryocorbula) augustae Gardner, n. sp. (p. 376). 32. Exterior of right valve (cotype); altitude, 6.0 millimeters; latitude, 7.0 milli- meters. 33. Exterior of left valve (cotype); altitude, 4.5 millimeters; latitude, 5.7 milli- meters. Figures 34, 35. Diplodonta satex Gardner, n. sp. (p. 373). 34. Exterior of left valve (type); altitude, 7.2 millimeters; latitude, 7.0 millimeters. 35. Interior of left valve (type); altitude, 7.2 millimeters; latitude, 7.0 millimeters. Figures 36, 37. Planorbis andersoni Gardner, n. sp. (p. 377). 36. Umbilical view (type); maximum diameter, 2.2 millimeters; diameter at right angles to maximum diameter, 2.0 millimeters. 37. Apertural view (type); altitude, 1.0 millimeter. Figures 38, 39. Venericardia (Pleuromeris) leonznsis Gardner, n. sp. (p. 371). 38. Exterior of right valve (type); altitude, 2.2 millimeters; latitude, 2.0 milli- meters. 39. Interior of right valve (type); altitude, 2.2 millimeters; latitude, 2.0 milli- meters. Figure 40. Ringicula trapaquara subsp. deussent Gardner, n. subsp. (p. 376). Apertural view (type); altitude, 2.5 millimeters; diameter, 1.6 millimeters. Figures 41, 42. Tellina makelloides Gardner, n. sp. (p. 374). 41. Posterior view of double valves (type); diameter, 5.2 millimeters. 42. Exterior of left valve (type); altitude, 14.5 millimeters; latitude, 28.5 milli- meters. Figures 48, 44. Pseudochama harrisi Gardner, n. sp. (p. 372). 43. Exterior of right valve (type); altitude, 14.5 millimeters; latitude, 16.5 milli- meters. 44. Interior of right valve (type); altitude, 14.5 millimeters; latitude, 16.5 milli- meters. 384 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 14 SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS Davip Wuite, who has been serving as Chairman of the Division of Geology and Geography of the National Research Council for the past three years, has returned to his former position in the U. S. Geological Survey. EK. O. Utricu, of the U. 8. Geological Survey, sailed for England late in June and will spend about six weeks in Europe. EUGENE STEBINGER, formerly geologist in the U. 8. Geological Survey and at present engaged in commercial geology with offices at Buenos Aires, Argentina, recently visited Washington on his way to Europe. W. P. Wooprine, of the U. 8. Geological Survey, has accepted an appoint- ment as Professor of Invertebrate Paleontology at the California Institute of Technology at Pasadena, to take effect in September. Frank Reeves has been granted leave from the U. 8. Geological Survey for four months to do commercial work in petroleum peolbeyl in Canada. F. L. Ransomn, formerly geologist of the U. 8S. Geological Survey, has resigned from the faculty of the University of Arizona and has accepted the Professorship of Economic Geology at the California Institute of Technology, Pasadena. M. N. Sxort, of the U. 8. Geological Survey, has been appointed Lecturer in Mining Geology at Harvard University during the absence of Professor Graton on his sabbatical year. Obituary Doctor Erwin F. Smitu, a member of the Acaprmy, a distinguished scientist of the Department of Agriculture and internationally known plant patholo- gist, died at his home in Washington, D. C., April 6, 1927. Dr. Smrira was born at Gilbert Mills, N. Y., Jan. 21, 1854, but early removed to Michigan, where he obtained his university training and lived until he came to the Department of Agriculture in 1886. At that time but little attention was given to plant diseases and few believed that bacteria were the cause of them. Long before the end of Dr. Smirn’s 40 years of diligent service, he ‘was recognized as one of the foremost plant pathologists in the world and leader in a branch of science which now exceeds in number of workers any other branch of botanical endeavor in this country. Dr. Smita was the author of a three-volume monograph on Bacteria in Relation to Plant Diseases and An Introduction to Bacterial Diseases of Plants, besides a vast number of contributions in scientific journals. One of his most important contribu- tions to science and one which attracted world-wide attention was his work on certain plant cancers. He proved that these were caused by bacteria, and suggested the probability that animal cancers were also of bacterial origin, pointing out the striking analogies between the tumors of plants and animals. Besides his direct contributions Dr. Smita forwarded science by the help and encouragement he gave to a generation of younger workers. He was president of the Society of American Bacteriologists in 1906, of the Botanical Society of America in 1910, of the American Phytopathological Society in 1916, and of the American Society for Cancer Research in 1924. At the time of his death he was in charge of the Laboratory of Plant Pathology in the Bureau of Plant Industry. 2 this page on > societies will appe of iated th and o> : a seventh Vhs _ SCIENTIFIC Norss AND ee ee ate eeoreeeoeerveceee 7 OBITUARY... 002+ e.eseteseee seen seenvneezneeveneé President: siacigoee Weucue Smithsonian Lasts tution Corresponding Pee de ae pe See ee Bureau 0 of . Vor. 17 SEPTEMBER 19, 1927 No. 15 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES BOARD OF EDITORS WixuiaAM J. PETERS AaGNEs CHASE JouN B. Reesips, Jr. DEPARTMENT OF TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM BUREAU PLANT INDUSTRY NATIONAL MUSEUM ASSOCIATE EDITORS L. H. ApAms S. A. Ronwer PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY E. A. GOLDMAN G. W. Stost BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY R. F. Griees J. R. SWANTON BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY Roger C. WELLS CHEMICAL SOCIETY PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY BY THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES , Mr. Roya AND GUILFORD AVES. tse SEP BattTmore, Maryianp 4s Entered as Second Class Matier, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., under the Act of August 24, 1912. Acceptance for mailing at special rate of postage provided for in Section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 1918 This Tegsas'i ‘the official « organ ie the Washington nee! of ne present a brief record of current scientific work in Washington. To this en (1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of she short notes of current scientific literature published in or emanat: (3) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth on each month, except when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspond to calenc publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the editors on 1 _ the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from the aut: issue of the J OURNAL for the following fourth or nineteenth, respectively. Fat M anuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. | should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page. ; | Iliustrations will be used only when necessary and will be confined to text, or diagrams of simple character. ae Proof -—In order to facilitate aout publication no proof will be gent. to authors. unless requested. It is urged that Pee suscary be. submitted i in final form; i the will exercise due care inseeing thatcopyisfollowed. — si Authors’ Reprints —Reprints will be furnished at the following schedule of pri Copies 4, pp. g pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. Gaver, 50 $85 $1.65 $2.55. $3.25 — $2.00 100 1,90)". 3.80 — 4.75 HOB EF 2.50 . 150 Pa a0 Boe GOO i ae Oe ZOO sui Seo A BOG BT ¢ Meant Ges 8 Uaemeene rar 5 a" 200) 3. 00. 5.30 © 6.25 2 1 o : 4,00. An additional charge of 25 cents will be ade for each split page. : . Gaal Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with! inclusive page pa) i nation and date of issue, will be seit when ordered. BUN As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for ae copies or reprint should invariably be attached to the first page of his escort a | The rate of Subscription per polteme 1B ia sien sa chek yee eee $6. 00* Semi-monthly mumibers. 26.56. os elie ls 2 Se le alee ae alee aida ae i Monthty numbers. gi, is os evs occ oe tac oe BERD od len oleic ere beat ee’ eae nina enar vad ‘ Remittances should be made payable to “Washington ee of Bdievoas, ey cai sen: addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey Washington, : D. Cc. Nee European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, Bes Ons Oe eta. oe Exchanges.—The JouRNAL does not exchange with other ‘publications. Hh Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, provided ae claim is made a within thirty eh after date of the ay aikaad: issue. i . Aolaiine I, however, from June 19, 1911, to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00, Special aie are given to members of scientific societies afiiliated withthe Academy. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoL. 17 SEPTEMBER 19, 1927 No. 15 CHEMISTRY .—The element ‘“‘mosandrum” of J. Lawrence Smith! Roger C. WELLs, U. 8. Geological Survey. Before the discovery of the rare earth element illintum by Hopkins? American chemists sometimes lamented the fact that no elements had been discovered in this country. It is true that Hillebrand had collected helium from uraninite but he did not recognize it as a new element. A few claims had been made but not substantiated. On the other hand, it is well known that J. Lawrence Smith definitely - claimed the discovery of a new element in samarskite, which he called “mosandrum,”’ but the fact that this name is not in the present list of elements tacitly suggests to most people that Smith did not find a new element. As a matter of fact he undoubtedly had at least one new element, perhaps three, in a certain fraction of “cerium earths,” but his name “‘mosandrum”’ failed to hold for any of these elements on account of a peculiar combination of circumstances. Too many chemists were claiming new elements at that particular period and in the mix-up of conflicting claims Smith, Delafontaine and Soret “lost out,’ though each was dealing with material containing new elements, as shown by subsequent developments. Smith’s well known method for determining the alkalies is a good one but the method he used for analyzing samarskite, a mineral con- taining a great variety of elements, has since been found to be incom- plete and to yield imperfect separations of some of the constituents. For example, calcium and lead were apparently not found by him. As he was one of the first to study the rare earths of samarskite his prepa- 1 Published by permission of the Director, U. S. Geological Survey. Received July 2, 1927. 2 Ind. Eng. Chem., News edition, Mar. 20, 1926; Jour. Franklin Inst. 204: 1. 1927. 385 - 386 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 15 rations containing a supposed new earth were naturally less pure than those made by later investigators. In spite of the shortcomings just mentioned reasons can be advanced for giving Smith credit for the discovery of samarium, and probably also of gadolinium and possibly europium. Working on earths ob- tained from samarskite in 1877 he modestly claimed the discovery of only one new element, which he shortly afterwards named mosandrum. It should be recalled that the only elements of the rare earth group recognized in 1877 were yttrium, cerium, lanthanum, didymium, erbium and terbium. But about the same time Delafontaine thought that he had found a new earth in “‘yttria,’’ the element of which he named philippium, and another in ‘‘didymia,’’ whose element he named decipium, so that when he and Marignac hesitated to recognize “mosandrum,” the weight of their authority and the uncertainties of the questions involved left the identity of ‘‘mosandrum”’ in doubt. Smith sent a communication to the French Academy? in September, 1877, (which was, however, not read until the next July) in which he stated that the ‘cerium earths” extracted from samarskite contained an earth (about 3 per cent of the mineral) which he regarded as new, if it was not terbium, which Delafontaine thought it might be. Its molecular weight was 327. It was more soluble in dilute nitric — acid than ceria, also in an alkaline solution through which chlorine is passed. It differed from didymia in color and in the fact that its— solutions showed no absorption spectrum, and from lanthana in color and in the great ease with which its salts are decomposed by heat. Shortly afterwards he proposed the name mosandrum for the new element. In the light of present knowledge the element thus claimed by Smith could only be samarium, europium or gadolinium, as Smith was not considering the yttrium group. Let us see what happened in the next few years. Smith generously distributed samples of the earths extracted from samarskite to several American and French chemists for any further studies they might wish to make. Delafontaine and Marignac criticised Smith’s announcement of a new element adversely,‘ but it must be remembered that they were at that time strenuously engaged in establishing their own claims to the discovery of new elements.® 3 Acad. sci. C. R. 87: 146. 1878. 4 DELAFONTAINE, Acad. sci. C. R. 87: 600. 1878; Martenac, tdem. 87: 281. 1878. 5’ DELAFONTAINE, Arch. sci. phys. nat. 61: 273. 1878; Acad. sci. C. R. 87: 509. 1878; Marrenac, Arch. sci. phys. nat. 64: 97. 1878; Acad. sci. C. R. 87: 578. 1878. SEPT. 19, 1927 © WELLS: ELEMENT ‘‘MOSANDRUM”’ 387 >] In the years intervening between 1878 and 1886 Lecog de Boisbau- dran, through fractionations, accompanied by spectroscopic study, of earths associated with “didymia,’ found, characterized and named samarium’ (from the mineral samarskite). He said, “I think I should state here that the recognition of the new metal is the fruit of the in- dependent researches of several persons. ‘To each should eventually be attributed his just share in the discovery.” These “unnamed persons”’ were J. Lawrence Smith, Delafontaine, Soret, and Marignac. The name mosandrum might have been applied to the element that was designated samarium, although Lecog de Boisbaudran made no mention of Smith’s element at the time he proposed the name samarium. In the same period Marignac isolated the oxide of a metal, Y., that he supposed might be the element claimed by Smith.? His methods included fractional decomposition of the nitrates by heat and fractional precipitation of the sulphates by potassium sulphate. Smith had also used these methods but Marignac repeated the operations many times and, as Crookes showed by means of a characteristic phosphorescent spectrum, his product, Ya, was pure, whereas that of Smith was impure. The same fraction containing Y, was also prepared by Crookes. ‘The element Y, was later named gadolinium.’ It might possibly also have been considered to be mosandrum. Finally, in 1886, some material that had been prepared by Smith in Louisville several years before was examined by Lecoq de Bois- baudran,® who actually found in it, after removing didymium, both samarium and gadolinium, with some terbium, thus substantiating in a remarkable way Smith’s original claim of a new element in samarskite. Kuropium was not characterized until afterwards but may have been present as part of the “samarium.” It is not easy to say who really discovered europium. It must be admitted that Smith recognized a new earth in samarskite, but he did not obtain it in a pure state. For that matter, however, the first preparations of yttria, ceria, didymia, terbia, erbia, ytterbia, samaria, and holmia were all later shown to be impure, although they were credited to their discoverers as new. 6 LEcOQ DE BOISBAUDRAN, Acad. sci. C. R. 88: 322; 89: 212. 1879. 7Marienac, Acad. sci. C. R. 90: 899. 1880; idem, 102: 646. 1886; CrooKss, zdem., 102: 646. 1886. 8 Lecog DE BOISBAUDRAN, Acad. sci. C. R. 102: 902. 1886. ® LEcog DE BOISBAUDRAN, Acad. sci. C. R. 102: 647. 1886. 088 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 15 It required the spectroscopic work of Lecoq de Boisbaudran to isolate samarium, and he is generally recognized as its discoverer in spite of his credit to several other unnamed persons. On the other hand, the spectroscopic work of Crookes established the identity of gadolinium but its discovery is generally credited to Marignac. Smith and Crookes should share to some extent in that honor. Marignac on several occasions insisted that Smith’s element could not be either of those claimed as new by himself or Delafontaine (philippium, decipium, and Y,), because its oxide was supposed to be yellow. But Smith did not say that his new earth was yellow; more- over, he says that its salts show no absorption spectrum. One cannot help feeling that Marignac’s insistence that Smith’s earth was yellow had more weight than it should have had in discrediting Smith’s real discovery. Smith may have realized that color is a deceptive guide, as small quantities of foreign oxides show strongly in the colorless earths. On the other hand, it was only after Soret’s spectroscopic study that Smith had sufficient confidence to advance the definite name mosan- drum for the element he claimed as new. When all the facts are considered, it appears that J. Lawrence Smith should be given credit for recognizing the existence of a new element in samarskite, although his own preparations were impure and his characterization of the element was indefinite. ‘The element he named ‘‘mosandrum’”’ was in fact not one but at least two elements later given the new names samarium and gadolinium. MINERALOG Y—Sericite-lazulite pseudomorphs after orthoclase from Bolivia. Haru V. SHANNON, U.S. National Museum. The following description pertains to some very interesting speci- mens in the collection of the late Frederick A. Canfield of Dover, N. J., which is now in the National Museum. ‘The specimens were collected personally by Mr. Canfield in 1886 while he was in charge of the mines of the Royal Silver Mines of Bolivia, Limited. There are several examples of the material in the collection (Original Numbers 1650, 5138, 5140) and others were contained in the duplicate material from the Canfield collection purchased from the estate by the Mineralogical Museum of Harvard University. The specimens bear the label ‘‘Turquois? ps. after orthoclase in 1 Published by permission of the Acting Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. Received August 2, 1927. ‘SEPT. 19, 1927 SHANNON: SERICITE-LAZULITE PSEUDOMORPHS 389 porphyry, Real Socavon, Potosi, Bolivia,’’ and an additional memoran- dum on one of the labels states that ‘‘these crystals have never had a complete analysis. The late L. C. Bierwirth found that they were a phosphate of alumina.’ The crystals in question consist of pale to deep turquoise-blue pseudomorphs after orthoclase phenocrysts sparsely scattered through a highly altered quartz porphyry. The groundmass is a pale buff mass of sericitic material containing scat- tered minute crystals of pyrite. The original embayed crystals of quartz are unchanged and the porphyritic structure of the rock is perfectly retained. ‘The larger orthoclase phenocrysts are now entirely composed of the turquoise-blue material. ‘hese are either simple crystals or Carlsbad penetration twins. They are thick tabular parallel to the (010) pinacoid and are somewhat longer than broad reaching extreme dimensions of 33 X 22 X 7mm. The crystal habit is usual, the only forms represented being the pinacoid 6(010), the prism m(110), the base c(001), and the back dome y(201). Coming, as they do, from the walls of a tin vein, these are strongly reminiscent of the perfect Carlsbad twin pseudomorphs of cassiterite after ortho= clase, from the walls of tin veins in Cornwall, which are to be found in old collections. The feldspar phenocrysts of intermediate size are not twinned wa range in constitution from those consisting of an outer crust of blue material surrounding a core of sericite, often stained brown by iron, to masses of soft white sericite including only a grain or two of blue substance. ‘The smaller phenocrysts, probably originally plagioclase, are now silky white sericite without any of the blue material. Several of the broken or imperfect pseudomorphs were detached from the matrix for study. When these were crushed they were found to contain small perfect euhedral crystals of arsenopyrite, pyrite and ' quartz in a soft and lustreless blue groundmass. ‘The whole mass was ground and screened and the quartz and sulphides separated with methylene iodide-bromoform heavy solutions. The blue material was further separated into heavier and lighter fractions. It was hoped that the blue mineral could be isolated for analysis by this method, but microscopic examination of the best concentrates which could be pre- pared indicated this to be impracticable. ‘The purified material con- sisted of scattered blue grains in an abundant matrix of aggregated grains of sericite. Mechanical separation proved impossible and neither blue mineral nor matrix were attacked by boiling 1:1 hydro- chloric acid. When the material was fused with sodium carbonate and dissolved in nitric acid, the solution reacted strongly for phosphoric 390 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 15 acid with ammonium molybdate reagent. When ignited it turned brown, and when the brown material was digested in acid the solution contained aluminum but gave no reaction for copper. Under the microscope the determination of the optical properties is difficult owing to the small size of the grains of the blue material, their ageregate character, and the confusion with the intergrown sericite. Determination of the refractive indices is especially difficult but the mean index, £, is about 1.654. The birefringence is moderately low and the grains perpendicular to an optic axis do not extinguish in white light but owing to the high dispersion give abnormal blue and liver-brown colors. The mineral is biaxial and negative, with 2V very small. The dispersion, r sth ee ft S. A. Rowen é Osh; ; ‘ ‘ sai — pmnosorarcat + socreTy a ih ia ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY —t™*~ SHUN: 9 Be | ‘i ; 1 G.W.Srose aa aris Hike i * ‘ > a ® ; GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY va Pat ste eh ee Yin Pe 5 ‘2; SWANTON | nae ANTHROPOLOGICAL soctEry © Wasee ht ge Le aan : NR, ¢ , ‘a Roane c. ‘Weuns ; he yearn aa _. CHEMICAL SOCIETY, : ee A cetey ae "PUBLISHED eMart Bickieins BRL oane buy rane EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY ; a ss BY THE a er i ‘a WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Be ee ae Mn Roran AND GUILFORD AVES. el as a ‘3 eS Fig: My kK | Baurmwors, MARYLAND / (ht ae eS. 3 4 ae es ata Re = iw ee ee \ 5 y it | | “ UGE Gi. 4 1927 foie es , ) \ . . &. f Ae’ i ovided for _ _« Sha) vA BA i MR ; yen : w This JOURNAL, the official organ | f the Sreleuston ahaa | f clences present a brief record of current scientific workin Washington. To this er (1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the short notes of current scientific literature published in or emanating (3) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and afiilia “notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth on each month, except d when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspond to leas publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the edit the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from issue of the Jougnat for the following fourth or nineteenth, respective M anuscripts may be sent to any member of the Bod of Baitees Mi should} } cleariy typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential changes. The editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. References should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To facilitate the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be numbered serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page. | Illustrations will be used only when necessary and will be confined to text figures - or diagrams of simple character. _ . Proof —In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be aunts to. authors unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. . Meee. Authors’ Reprints.—Reprints will be furnished at the following schedule of prices. eats Copies 4;pp. S pp.) 12 pps 16 pp. Cover Ah ee By 50 $.85. -— $1.65 $2.55 $3.25 Be OG co aia 100 1.90 — 3.80. 4.75 — 6.00 ih Bea 3 Aa i 150 | 2.25. 4.30 5.25 BBO oS I Se ae teem sab . 200 2.50 4.80 8.75 Baie Ui Ch Va hte 7X hy ee Me 250. 3.00 5.30 6.25 7.50 OG aah Marmasse ; Anadditional charge of 25 cents will be made for each split page. ae chee ie a ie Bones Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the article, = inclusive pagi- : ke : nation and date of issue, will be furnished when ordered. Bye ah me a As an author will not ordinarily see feone his request for extra copies | or r reprints i should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript. ry | i hes ae : The rate of Subscription per volumets os. . co. t ss cose eb wman spe ame vee . $6.00* Semi-monthly numbers................ Ci aes lle koe aN cs arg te na a ae Monthly numbers....... sini: Peo ute ta he eae aa) 6 bias Geta lo Cae eb Us oh tate ee ct -— sai Remittances should be made payable to “Washington Academy of Serres id an addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey Washington, 183 ae. European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, London. Ezchanges.—The JounNnaL does not exchange with other. publications. Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, provided that claim is made Ma within thirty days after date of the following issue. *Volume [, however, from June 19, 1911, te December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00, Special rates ed eps than % are given to members or scientific societies affiliated with the Academy. SOR eae RS al A A RT OSA Pe ee ea er oe JOURNAL OF THE ° WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vou. 17 OcToBER 4, 1927 No. 16 MINERALOGY.—Calctte oolites with pentagonal dodecahedral form.' EARL V. SHANNON, U.S. National Museum. The present paper contains a description of some very unusual forms of calcite oolites from Idaho and Japan. ‘The Idaho specimens are from the collection of the late Frederick A. Canfield and those from Japan are in the reference collection of the National Museum. These oolites are regular pentagonal dodecahedra, a geometrical form impossible as a crystal form. It is suggested that they owe their peculiarity to pentagonal dodecahedral packing of the oolites in their original resting place. The Idaho material (Canfield No. 5801) is labeled “‘Calcite, Eagle Rock, Idaho; these forms are regular pentagonal dodecahedrons— said to be impossible for crystals. Presented by Dr. F. M. Endlich, who collected them. See Dana page 268.” On page 268 of the sixth edition of Dana’s System of Mineralogy the following reference to the material from this locality appears: ‘““Minute concreticnary forms having a spherical concentric structure within and externally the form of a regular pentagonal dodecahedron (not pyritohedron) have been obtained from a calcareous spring near Eagle Rock, Idaho; their form has not been explained.” The information given by Dana was doubtless obtained from examination of the same material as that in the Canfield collection, since no reference to these forms has been found elsewhere in the literature. Nothing definite has been learned relative to the occurrence. Eagle Rock is not given on any map or In any gazeteer which has been examined. The specimens were col- lected by F. M. Endlich, apparently while engaged in work on the Hayden Survey, probably about 1872. In several places in the re- 1 Published by permission of the Acting Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. Received August 31, 1927. 409 410 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 16 port for that year mention is made of Eagle Rock or Taylor’s Bridge across Snake River, apparently northwest of Ross Fork and probably at or near the site of the present bridge south of Tilden and east of Yuma. ‘There is no mention of the calcite oolites or of any calcareous spring.” | The Canfield material consists of a dozen white and porcellanous- appearing individuals 2 millimeters in diameter. ‘They are almost model pentagonal dodecahedra although the edges are somewhat rounded and some of the faces are curved. ‘They possess sufficient luster to cause most of the faces to yield a visible though faint signal on the goniometer, and the majority of the faces fall in the positions of the planes of the geometric form. Although they naturally suggest pyritohedra to the mineralogist, the edges are all of equal length and the interfacial angles are all the same. One broken individual was crushed and examined under the micro- scope. ‘The structure is distinctly concretionary and very finely fibrous spherulitic. The natural tendency to break parallel to the fibrous structure competes with a parting in thin skins parallel to the spherical surface. The spherical flakes are approximately perpen- dicular to the optic axis of a majority of the aggregated fibers and are largely dark between crossed nicols, but are granular with stippling by grains of higher birefringence. The flakes as a whole give an apparent interference figure which is uniaxial or slightly biaxial with 2h nearly zero and with positive sign. Calcite is optically negative and it would seem that this positive interference figure is anomalous and is due to the fibrous structure—a supposition strengthened by the features of the grains which lie parallel to the fibers showing maxi- mum birefringence, for the elongation of these fibers is negative, and thus contradicts the observed positive interference figure. Measure- ments of the refractive indices were not satisfactory. Basal flakes yielded for w the apparent value 1.655, and prismatic flakes gave for « a value considerably above 1.485. The apparent birefringence is thus somewhat lower than that of calcite, but this is doubtless another anomaly due to the structure. No grain large enough to examine was crystallographically a single unit but each was made of an enor- mous number of individual fibers, only a majority of which were in a position to show the ultimate indices. Where the birefringence is very high, as in calcite, and the material fine grained, a relatively small dilution of the extreme values for the indices by fibers away 2. H. Brapuny, The Snake River Division. U.S. Geol. Geogr. Survey Terr. (Hay- den), 6th Ann. Rept., p. 209. 1873. ocr. 4, 1927 SHANNON: PENTAGONAL DODECAHEDRAL OOLITES 411 from the critical position must effect a considerable change in the mass index. Lacroix’ has given the name ‘“‘ktypeite’”’ to pisolitic material from Carlsbad, Bohemia, and Hammam-Meskoutine, Algeria, formerly referred to aragonite and similar in character to the oolites from Idaho. Its specific gravity was given as varying fram 2.58 to 2.70, or less than that of calcite. Its birefringence was found to be 0.020 while that of calcite is 0.172. In parallel polarized light a black distorted cross was noted, while portions gave a positive black cross in convergent light. Heated to low redness the pisolites decrepi- tated and finally were ‘“‘transformed into calcite.” ‘“Ktypeite”’ is quite probably the same as the material here described and owes its apparent deviation from the optical properties of calcite to the in- timately fibrous concretionary structure, the relation to calcite being similar to that of chalcedony to quartz. The most striking and unexplainable feature of the Idaho material being the geometrical form, a search was made through the various collections of the National Museum for other examples of oolites or pisolites exhibiting similar features. The only other samples found (U.S. N. M. Cat. Nos. 47,123 and 86,694) were from Shinano Prov- ince, Japan. These consist of some hundreds of pisolites varying from 2 millimeters to 15 millimeters in diameter. The smaller of these are spherical or ellipsoidal in form, and the larger are subangular. Two of the subangular specimens about 10 millimeters in diameter are well defined pentagonal dodecahedra with rounded edges and concave faces. In an attempt to determine whether the oolites under discussion are aragonite or calcite three of the small spheres from Japan, one of the larger Japanese dodecahedra, three snowy-white and perfectly spherical oolites 2 millimeters in diameter from the “‘Snake River Hot Springs,’ Montana, (U.S. N. M. Cat. No. 45,998), one of the Idaho dodecahedra, and a small fragment of “flos ferri’’ aragonite from Steiermark, Austria, (U. 8S. N. M. Cat. No. 87,304), were boiled to- gether in dilute cobalt nitrate solution. ‘The dodecahedra from both Idaho and Japan and the spherical oolites from Japan took on the pale blue color of calcite while the ‘‘flos ferri”’ and the Montana oolites showed the deep violet characteristic of aragonite. It seems estab- lished that the polyhedral oolites under discussion are calcite. The writer is informed by Mr. Laurence La Forge that Wirt Tassin =A. Lacroix, Acad. sci. C. R. 126: 602. 1898. See Dana, Syst. Min., 6th ed., App. 1, p. 39. 1899. 412 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 16 found polyhedral oolites in the collections of the Hayden Survey and, after engaging in considerable speculation as to the origin of the unique forms, analyzed them and found them to be pure calcium carbonate. No record of the figures of this analysis can be found nor any of the analyzed sample. ‘The present writer found the material to dissolve completely in cold dilute hydrochloric acid. The internal structure of the dodecahedral forms is that character- istic of radiate-fibrous concretionary oolites—a structure that almost invariably produces a more or less spherical form. Thus the sym- metry of the exterior of the oolites cannot be the result of internal structure or forces, and it becomes pertinent to inquire as to what external conditions may have produced the polyhedral forms. The normal explanation in mineralogy for external geometric symmetry which is at variance with internal molecular structure is either pseudo- morphism or inversion. In pseudomorphism a previously existing crystal with euhedral boundaries has been converted into another substance by chemical reaction without a change inform. The molec- ular structure of the second substance bears no relation to the external geometric form inherited from the preceding mineral. In the present case the erystal-like forms are pentagonal dodecahedra, represented in crystallography only by the pyritohedron, so named because it is of frequent occurrence with the minerals of the pyrite group. It is a solid bounded by twelve faces, each of which is a pentagon with four equal sides and one longer side, and closely resembles the regular pentagonal dodecahedron of geometry with regular pentagons as faces. ‘The regular pentagonal dodecahedron is one of the two regular solids of geometry which are impossible in crystallography because they are contrary to the laws of symmetry and rational indices. The ratios of the axial intercepts of a crystal face must be either whole numbers, zero, or infinity, whereas the intercepts of the face of the regular pentagonal dodecahedron in prismatic position are as 14++/5 ile :0. The only possible explanation of the origin of the calcite forms in question by pseudomorphism is to assume that they have replaced pyrite crystals bounded by a pyritohedron of high and irrational indices closely approaching the regular pentagonal dodeca- hedron in angle—an assumption which is highly improbable. The other cause of lack of correspondence between external crystal form and internal structure, inversion, is illustrated by many minerals of which leucite is a typical example. This mineral, which occurs as isometric trapezohedral crystals of perfect form, is usually biaxial in oct. 4, 1927 SHANNON: PENTAGONAL DODECAHEDRAL OOLITES 413 polarized light under the petrographic microscope and has the proper- ties of a doubly refracting substance. The accepted explanation of this discordance between form and internal structure is that the substance at an elevated temperature has the symmetry represented by the external form, but at ordinary temperatures possesses the symmetry represented by the internal structure. -The mineral was formed at high temperature and the external form was determined by that temperature. The internal structure, however, inverted in cooling to that stable at ordinary temperatures. In the case of cal- cium carbonate there is no high temperature form which approaches isometric symmetry and inversion therefore cannot be invoked as the cause of the form of the unusual oolites. Since the pentagonal dodecahedral forms cannot be logically ex- plained by changes in internal structure or by pseudomorphism it seems reasonable to investigate the possibility that they are due to forces operating externally. Oolites structurally lke those under consideration and more or less spherical in form are frequently formed in caleareous springs and the most perfectly rounded ones are those which are kept more or less continuously in suspension by the rising current of water. Since the Idaho examples are typical oolites struc- turally, and were formed in a calcareous spring, there is sufficient reason for assuming that they were originally spherical and that the spherical form was subsequently modified by external forces. The most probable force to be considered is the result of mutual interfer- ence or crowding and the problem becomes that of the mutual defor- mation of spheres. If it be assumed that spherical oolites of uniform size and perfect form settled in recesses of the spring and continued to grow at a uniform rate, they must ultimately have reached the point where the surfaces of contact were practically plane. Com- pression of closely packed plastic spheres would give the same result, were the pressure essentially equal from all directions, but the calcite spherulites are essentially rigid and their deformation can scarcely be attributed to pressure from outside the mass of oolites. It is doubtless due to continued growth by accretion from the calcium carbonate of the spring water. The natural supposition would be that when uniform spheres have been so modified as to fill space solidly by becoming plane surfaced polyhedra, each polyhedron would be a geometric holohedron and the problem presented for solution would be the classic one of the division of space with minimum partitional area. Were only two dimensions represented the problem would be easily solvable and the solution 414 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 16 capable of facile experimental demonstration. Thus a single layer of uniform spheres is easily seen to assume a hexagonal packing and the ideal deformation of cylinders into hexagonal prisms, as classically represented in honeycomb textures, is illustrated by many natural examples. In three dimensional packing the problem is not so simple. The mathematical solution derived as to the angles for stable equi- librium is simply that every angle of meeting of film-surfaces is exactly 120°.4 The rhombic dodecahedron is a polyhedron of plane sides between which every angle of meeting is 120°. Space can be filled with or divided into equal and similar rhombic dodecahedrons and the rhombic dodecahedron might seem to be the solution of the prob- lem for the case of cells equal in volume and having every part of the boundary of the group either infinitely distant from the place considered or so adjusted as not to interfere with the homogeneous interior distribution of the cells. The rhombic dodecahedron is the only plane-sided polyhedron which presents a solution of the equilib- rium problem. Lord Kelvin concluded from theoretical considera- tions, however, that, as found by Plateau by experimentation with soap films, the angles of the rhombic dodecahedron, giving when space is divided into such figures twelve plane faces meeting at a point, are essentially unstable. He concluded that the requirements of sta- bility are best fulfilled when the rhombic dodecahedron is so divided by insertion of planes that the unit becomes what he calls a minimal tetrakaidecahedron or an isotropic tetrakaidecahedron, familiar to crystallographers as a cuboctahedron, having curved arcs of 19° 28’ for its edges. Desch® has critically considered this problem from the standpoint of the metallurgist with the view of determining and explaining the forms of the crystal grains in solidified metals. According to the hypothesis of Quincke, metals and other substances, immediately before solidification from the liquid state, separate into two immiscible liquids, one in much smaller quantity than the other. These liquids have interfacial surface tension and a foam is formed, the liquid present in smaller proportion arranging itself in cell walls and the other con- stituting the cell contents. Crystallization then takes place within the cells and the cell walls are represented in the solid mass by the boundaries of the crystal grains. If this hypothesis is correct the 4Sir Witt1am Tuomson (Lord Ixelvin), On the division of space with minimum partitional area. Phil. Mag. 24: 503-514. 1887. 6 Crecin H. Descu, The solidification of metals from the liquid state. Jour. Inst. Metals 22: 241-263. 1919. oct. 4, 1927 SHANNON: PENTAGONAL DODECAHEDRAL OOLITES 415 grains in a solidified metal should approximate the form of cells of a foam and these, according to Kelvin, should be cuboctahedra® with curved edges. Desch experimented with masses of foam and ob- tained a certain proportion of cells having the cuboctahedral form. By far a greater number, however, had the five sided faces character- istic of the pentagonal dodecahedron. He then proceeded to the examination of the form of the grains in beta brass. This brass containing aluminum was made to separate into its individual grains by immersion in mercury. In this also the majority of faces were five sided and the form of most of the grains seemed to approach the pentagonal dodecahedron. The writer confirmed the observations of Desch on the cells of a foam. A large mass of fairly uniform bubbles was produced in a closed vessel by slowly blowing air at constant low pressure through a fine capillary tube. By observing the reflections of light from the contact surfaces of the interior of the mass it was found that a con- siderable majority of the faces were of pentagonal outline and that the cells approximated the form of the regular pentagonal dodeca- hedron. A much smaller proportion showed four and six sided faces, confirming the presence of Kelvin’s cuboctahedral cell. The latter is further confirmed by the practical absence of anything recognizable as a rhombic dodecahedral cell. Since the problem was considered as one of interfering spheres, a number of equal spherical masses of plastic modeling clay about 1 centimeter in diameter were packed in a spherical space and subjected to, as nearly as possible, equal pressure from all directions. When the masses of clay were separated and examined, the interior units had become polyhedra and a considerable majority of them showed five sided faces. In packing uniform spheres to fill space there are-two extremes of compactness of the group. Thus the loosest packing is six-contact packing, that is, any sphere taken as a nucleus is in contact with six other spheres. Compression of such a group would result in the nuclear sphere assuming a cubic form. On the other hand, the closest possible packing is twelve-contact packing, in which each nucleus of the group is in contact with twelve other spheres. There are three ® The term cuboctahedral is here used in preference to tetrakaidecahedral because crystallographers are more familiar with it. It is to be understood that the tetra- kaidecahedron of Kelvin is a simple ¢uboctahedron or octahedron evenly truncated by the faces of the cube so that all edges are of equal length. This yields a fourteen- faced solid in which six of the faces are squares and eight are regular hexagons. 416 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 16 convenient ways in which twelve spheres may be brought into con- tact with the central sphere. First, six units may be arranged around the circumference in a plane with the nucleus, and a triangular group of three placed above and three below. Crystallographically con- sidered the equatorial spheres would yield faces, if the spheres were forced together, in the position of a hexagonal prism with a trigonal pyramid above and below. ‘This may consequently be referred to as the hexagonal-trigonal packing. The second grouping may be con- structed with four spheres placed below the nucleus, four above, and four around the equator. By compression such an aggregate will yield a rhombic dodecahedron and such packing is called rhombic dodecahedral packing. In the third arrangement five spheres form a ring above the equatorial plane of the nucleus and five below, offset so as to occupy the interstices of the upper five. One sphere at the top and one at the bottom completes the group. This group, upon compression, gives a regular pentagonal dodecahedron as the nucleus and may be called pentagonal dodecahedral packing. The faces formed upon any sphere, considered as a nucleus of a homogeneous group, by continued uniform growth or by compression must obviously obey the law which requires that the planes of contact be at right angles to the lines joining the centers of the spheres. In the case of rigid spherulitic oolites of calcium carbonate, all growing outward at a uniform rate, the form attained must be polyhedral and governed entirely by the initial position of the oolites with reference to one another. Assuming a close packing there would be a twelve- contact arrangement and the resultant polyhedra must be either pentagonal dodecahedra, rhombic dodecahedra or the hexagonal trigonal form mentioned above. The cuboctahedron, the minimal form, could not arise because it would require fourteen point packing of the original spheres, which is impossible. The pentagonal dodecahedral forms under discussion may then be reasonably interpreted by assuming a pentagonal dodecahedral pack- ing of the oolites in their original resting place. The fact that the pentagonal dodecahedron is the form which actually occurs suggests that the corresponding packing is most easily assumed, a suggestion further supported by the experiment wherein numerous plastic spheres were packed and compressed. To test the suggestion further a large number of ordinary uniform-sized shot were placed in a round bot- tomed vessel, shaken until settled and cemented with heated wax. Upon dissection of this mass of spheres, the great majority seemed to be packed in pentagonal arrangement. The experiments with oct. 4, 1927 GIRTY: ASTARTELLA 417 masses of foam, both by Desch and by the writer are also in agreement. There is an essential difference in the behaviour of foams, however, since the spheres of foam are more mobile, are capable of greater movement and deformation and of subdivision, and are more sharply dependent upon surface tension. It is very likely, though, from the large number which approach pentagonal symmetry that the normal packing is pentagonal. The fact that no rhombic dodecahedral foam cells are noted substantiates the ideas of Kelvin, but it is also true that every instance of rhombic dodecahedral twelve-point packing must result in the formation of cuboctahedral cells in a foam. The relative scarcity of cells of this form further argues as to the greater stability of the pentagonal dodecahedral packing. The foam cells behave to a remarkable degree like rigid spheres, even to an appreci- able deviation from the theoretical angle of stability demonstrated by Plateau in his study of foam films on a wire framework. The case of metals especially concerned in the work of Desch is a little harder to understand. The coincidence of the pentagonal structure of the granular: metal with that of foam is apparently a substantiation of the Quincke hypothesis. In a homogeneous cooling metal-fusion one would expect the solidification outward from nuclei in a spherical front, and in ideal cases, wherein the temperature was homogeneously distributed, these nuclei might be expected to be very equally spaced. Except by means of the foam hypothesis of Quincke, it is dificult to account for the preference shown for a pen- tagonal packing. The calcite oolites examined in the Idaho lot are without doubt selected, ideally perfect examples which may represent the concentra- tion of hundreds or thousands of less perfect or variously bounded individuals. Their form is of extreme interest and it is highly de- sirable that the locality be visited and a large number of these unusual forms collected as well as studied in place. The explanation of their form above set forth seems the most rational one to fit the facts of the case, but further study of the problem would seem to be highly desirable. PALEONTOLOGY.—The generic characters of Astartella Hall. Grorce H. Girtry, U. 8. Geological Survey. (Communicated by J. B. Rexzsipe, JR.) The genus Astartella was established by James Hall in 1858. The only species referred to it at that time was A. vera which consequently 1 Published by permission of the Director of the U. 8. Geological Survey. Received August 31, 1927. 418 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 16 is the genotype. ‘The original description, which is very brief, runs as follows: Shell bivalve, thick, smooth or concentrically furrowed: lunule impressed; ligament external; hinge teeth two in each valve, the anterior tooth of the right valve large and strong, with a longitudinal pit in the summit. Related to Astarte. This diagnosis has, so far as I am aware, never been revised or re- written up to the present time; yet on attempting to verify it from specimens in my collection I found it far from complete and in some respects inaccurate. The astartellas are one of the commonest pelecypods of our Pennsyl- vanian faunas and if we except a few species which appear to be isolated because perhaps they are rare, but which may be brought into close relationship when more is known about them, all the species or at least all the more common species are pretty much alike. In any collection of considerable size several species might be distin- guished on selected specimens, all of them, however, connected by other specimens of intermediate character. With the astartellas, then, the question is not whether they represent more than a single genus so much as whether they represent more than a single species. The specimens upon which my observations were made therefore unquestionably belong to Hall’s genus. I have identified them with Astartella concentrica Conrad although it is by no means certain that Conrad’s species and the type species of Asiartella are not the same. Astartella concentrica had been in the literature some fifteen years when A. vera was described, but it was cited under the genus Nuculttes and was evidently unknown to Hall. Although shells of this type constitute one of the most common of Pennsylvanian pelecypods, they rarely show characters of prime generic importance. If they are not actually broken in that part, the hinge margin is liable to be covered by hard rock. Or, as often happens, thanks.to the hinge teeth and perhaps also to the marginal denticles, the two valves occur together so that one of them is con- cealed by the other. To be sure, the shape of these shells is in a measure characteristic and also the sculpture of widely spaced con- centric lamellae, although Hall in the original description does say— I suspect with an eye to the off chance—that the shell is smooth or concentrically furrowed. In further comment upon his diagnosis, the right valve is the only one whose interior was figured by Hall and, if oct. 4, 1927 GIRTY: ASTARTELLA 419 judgment is permitted from certain expressions used, it was the only one known to him. It seems doubtful, as will be shown later, whether either valve actually does have two “hinge teeth,”’ by which expression it is fairly certain Hall meant cardinal teeth. The hinge teeth, as just remarked, are rarely to be seen in these shells, but one of the other generic characters, the “external ligament” (or at least its receptacle), is a conspicuous feature in any specimen that is even fairly well preserved. By that designation Hall undoubt- edly had in mind a sharply defined bevelled surface behind the beaks which corresponds to a similar though smaller surface anterior to them which Hall calls the “‘Iunule.’”’ On most specimens these two structures show no material difference except in size, and when I have had occasion to refer to the posterior one I have called it an escutch- eon. The same term was employed by Meek in describing Astartella newberryt. It may actually have been a ligamental area as Hall considered it; nevertheless, my specimens seem to show another structure on the interior of the shell which was apparently a place of ligamental attachment, and although this fact, even if established, might not necessarily prove that the external structure did not also function in the liigamental equipment, it would tend to discredit Hall’s interpretation. Hall’s description, I believe, was predicated largely if not wholly upon the right valve. In my collection left valves showing the hinge are decidedly more numerous than right valves. They show that this valve was equipped with a single prominent cardinal tooth which had a large, deep pit or socket on the anterior side. On the posterior side the cardinal tooth is confluent with a thickening of the hinge margin or sort of hinge plate from which it rises considerably, but by no means as much or as abruptly as it rises from the deeply exca- vated socket in front of it. The shell on the anterior side of the socket is as high and prominent as the cardinal tooth itself; it is probably to be considered a lateral tooth, though it is merely the shell margin which as it recedes, forms the broad, sharply defined lunule. The hinge structure of the right valve, as already noted, is not shown by as many specimens as the left valve, but it is shown very well indeed by one of them. ‘This specimen has a single large wedge- shaped cardinal tooth that is flat on top and slightly indented by two longitudinal grooves. The tooth has a deep triangular socket on the posterior side; on the anterior side it descends vertically, but not quite so far, and is continuous with a narrow shelf-like projection that is carried forward almost to the anterior extremity of the shell. 420 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 16 This, the anterior prolongation of the hinge-plate, is guarded on its outer or upper side by the thin, strongly projecting edge of the es- cutcheon, and as its inner edge also is elevated, a short groove is inclosed between them. But little difficulty is experienced in correlating the structures of the two valves. The flat-topped denticle in the right valve evidently fits into the deep pit that is anterior to the cardinal tooth of the left valve, while the cardinal tooth of the left valve is received by the deep pit that is posterior to the cardinal tooth of the right valve. Thus I recognize but a single cardinal tooth in each valve instead of two. Nevertheless, it is possible to harmonize my observations in some measure with those of Hall, for a slight prominence exists pos- terior to the socket of the right valve where Hall has figured a posterior cardinal tooth. His figure, however, is not accurate; at least it is not in accord with my observations, and I should hardly regard this ele- vation as being a tooth. The structure in this part is peculiar and will be considered more in detail farther on. Hall’s figure shows two other structures that are really important, although, inasmuch as he did not have the left valve to compare them with, he failed to recog- nize their significance. His figure shows, though not clearly, a groove passing down the anterior side of the shell margin for a short distance. Actually, as has just been described, this margin is thickened into a narrow shelf that extends forward almost to the anterior extremity, and this shelf-like structure bears a groove along its upper surface by reason of its raised margins. Hall’s figure also shows quite clearly a projecting lamina back of the peak which is really the margin of the shell along what he calls the ligamental area. The construction of the left valve is just the reverse of this for the shell is thickened along the posterior margin of the hinge line and grooved to receive the sharp and projecting edge of the right valve, | while the shell margin in front of the beak is, as already described, sharp and projecting so as to fit into the groove of the right valve corresponding to it. Whether this reciprocating structure of the two valves would properly be called teeth, I am not sure. In each case one ‘‘tooth’’ seems to be merely the shell margin and not an independent structure comparable to the cardinal teeth. [I must now try to make clear the singular construction of the hinge where in the right valve Hall thought he recognized a posterior cardinal tooth. At this point there is constructed a flat-lying plate approximately parallel to the hinge plate proper, but free above and connected with it only at the lower side. This plate incloses a very mec, 4,.1927 GIRTY: ASTARTELLA 421 narrow, very deep cleft or crack as if -part of the shell had been in- completely sawed off from above. In other language, this structure begins as a narrow groove under the beak which rapidly becomes deeper though not broader so as to detach from above a laminar pro- jection that lies almost flat and is but slightly separated from the main body of the hinge plate. ‘To the reader the thought would probably suggest itself that this is some appearance due to accident, but it is very clearly shown and is quite persistent on both valves and in a number of specimens. This plate helps to form what appears to be a receptacle for the ligament, for there is a well-defined striated area partly underneath the plate and partly visible beyond it on the posterior side which I would say was a place of ligamental attach- ment. ‘The lower boundary of this ligamental area was a continuation of the lower margin of the lamina where it joins the hinge plate; the upper boundary is a distinct angular ridge which forms the lower margin of the escutcheon. Posteriorly this hgamental area narrows strongly from below upward, giving place to the structure which may be called the posterior lateral tooth. The somewhat remarkable structure which I have tried to describe must, I think, be a place of ligamental attachment. It can have nothing to do with dentition though a slight elevation of the surface more or less incidental to it was apparently identified by Hall as a posterior cardinal tooth. In this respect the two valves are alike and the lamellae could not possibly have interlocked. In so far as one may venture the word, this structure must have served for the attach- ment either of a muscle or of a ligament, and one can scarcely question that it was for the latter. As I have already remarked, this would not preclude the interpretation of the ‘‘escutcheon” as a ligamental area, but it would render the interpretation less probable. The escutcheon also begins under the umbo above the ligamental groove. It regularly widens posteriorly but is sharply defined below by a ridge and is distinctly an external character. One more feature, somewhat trivial perhaps, may be mentioned. The dental socket does not itself extend to the umbo, but it is repre- sented upon the plane of the lunule by a triangular structure similar in appearance to the pseudodeltidium of certain brachiopods and formed apparently by shell that filled in (or possibly overarched) the socket as the tooth of the other valve moved forward or was worn off at the upperend. This structure is sharply defined by grooves and is convex, especially on the posterior side. It may be concave on the anterior. 422 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 16 10 x2 . : Poet 7 x4 Figures. 1-11, Astartella concentrica Conrad. 1-3, left valve, X4, X2, and X1. 4-6, right valve, X4, X2, and X1. 7, fragment of a left valve tilted to show the covering of the dental socket and its track, x4. 8, another fragment of a left valve, X4. 9-11, left valve, <4, X2, and X1. i Lawrence shale, Iatan and St. Joseph, Missouri. ocT. 4, 1927 KILLIP: NEW PASSIONFLOWERS 423 To summarize the structure of this genus as shown by my specimens, each valve has a single large cardinal tooth, the cardinal tooth of the right valve being anterior to that of the left valve when the two valves were joined. The left valve, consequently, has a deep pit or socket on the anterior side of the tooth, while the right valve has a socket on the posterior side of the tooth. In addition the anterior part of the cardinal margin in the left valve forms a linear tooth that is received by a groove in the thickened anterior margin of the right valve. On the other hand, the posterior part of the cardinal margin in the right valve forms a linear tooth that rests in a groove in the thick posterior margin of the left valve corresponding to it. Between the cardinal tooth and the posterior tooth in each valve is an area of ligamental attachment partly inclosed by a leaflike plate which is continuous below with the main hinge structure. The sharply de- fined areas on the exterior of the shell are lunule and escutcheon, although the posterior one may have housed a ligament as Hall originally thought. The muscular imprints consist of a rather large, deep, and sharply defined scar at the anterior extremity of the shell, and another some- what larger, but less deep and less sharply defined, opposite to it on the posterior superior angle. The pallial line connecting these im- prints is indistinct in all the specimens seen, but it appears to be without a sinus, as indeed, has generally been believed. A short distance back of the upper margin of the anterior scar and excavated in the underside of the hinge plate is a small but rather deep pedal scar. BOTANY.—WNew passionflowers from South America and Mevzico. EvuswortH P. Kiuuip, U. 8. National Museum. In preparing a revision of American Passifloraceae the writer has had the opportunity of examining the collections of several herbaria in the United States and Europe. As this revision will not be ready for publication for some time the new species recently noted are here described in advance. Photographs of the type specimens in other herbaria are deposited in the United States National Herbarium. Passiflora stellata Moritz, sp. nov. Stem slender, subtriangular, striate, finely pilosulous; stipules setaceous, 5 mm. long; petioles up to 3 em. long, biglandular at base of blade, the glands 0.5 mm. long; leaves 4 to 6.5 cm. long, 4 to 8 em. wide, 3-lobed about 1 Published by permission of the Acting Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. Received August 13, 1927. 424 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 16 one-third their length (lobes broadly triangular or triangular-ovate, 2 to 3 em. wide, acute or obtusish), subtruncate at base, 5-nerved, entire at margin, sparsely and minutely pubescent above, more densely pubescent beneath, membranous; peduncles about 2.5 cm. long; bracts setaceous, scattered: flowers white or greenish (?); sepals oblong, about 2 cm. long, hyaline at margin, cucullate at apex, keeled, the keel terminating in a horn 3 mm. long; petals linear, less than 1 cm. long, obtuse, white, membranous; corona fila- ments In a single series, liguliform, about 7 mm. long; operculum membranous, 7 mm. high, slightly plicate, erose at margin, white; eyueeey slender, striate, slightly swollen at base; stamens very slender, cm. long; ovary ellipsoidal, 6-grooved, glabrous. Type in the herbarium of the Muséum d’Histoire Naturelle, Paris, col- lected ‘in reg. temp. et subfrig.,” New Grenada (Venezuela?), in 1852, by M. Moritz (no. 1961). Duplicate in the British Museum. This is quite distinct from any known species. The shape of the leaves and the presence of glands at the apex of the petioles indicate a relation- ship with P. warmingii. The stipules, however, are setaceous, not folia- ceous; the faucial corona consists of a single, not a double, series of filaments; the gynophore is more slender; and the ovary ellipsoidal, not ovoid. Passiflora quadriflora Kallip, sp. nov. Plant glabrous throughout; stem angular, strongly compressed, striate, scabrous; stipules setaceous, about 1 cm. long; petioles 7 to 9 mm. long, tor- tuous, glandless; leaves narrowly lanceolate, 5 to 8 cm. long, 1.5 to 2 em. wide, unlobed, acute, mucronulate, rounded or subcuneate at base, entire, 3-nerved (nerves nearly parallel, conspicuous), reticulate-veined, ocellate between lateral nerves and midnerve, coriaceous or subcoriaceous; peduncles in pairs, 2-flowered, the main portion and the branches nearly equal, each about 1 cm. long; bracts setaceous, 3 to 5 cm. long, scattered; flowers rotate- campanulate, about 5 cm. wide, greenish (?); sepals lanceolate, about 2 cm. long, 0.5 em. wide at base, acute; petals linear-lanceolate, 5 to 6 mm. long, 1 to 1.2 mm. wide, obtuse, white, membranous; corona filaments in two series, the outer filiform, 5 to 6 mm. long, the inner series capillary, 2 mm. long: operculum membranous, 2 mm. long, slightly plicate, finely fimbriate one-third its length; nectary ring annular; limen shallowly saucer- shaped, 0.5 mm. high; ovary globose; styles very slender, about 8 mm. long. Type in the herbarium in the Field Museum of Natural History, no. 536227, collected at Villeabamba, hacienda on the Rio Chinchao, Peru, altitude about 1900 meters, July 17 to 25, 1923, by J. F. Macbride (no. 5189). A specimen of this collection is also in the U. 8. National Herbarium. This species presents several unusual characters. The peduncles are 2-flowered, but they do not terminate in a tendril as in the case of P. cirrhiflora, P. tryphostemmatoides, and P. gracillima. The leaves are un- lobed, an unusual form in the subgenus Plectostemma, to which the species clearly belongs. The operculum, in addition, is more conspicuously fim- briate than in most species of this subgenus. Passiflora goniosperma Killip, sp. nov. Plant densely pilose-hirsutulous throughout, the hairs of the stem often recurved or retrorse; stem subtriangular, tortuous; stipules linear-lanceolate, 4 to 6 mm. long, up to 1 mm. wide, aristate, subfaleate; petioles 5 mm. long oct. 4, 1927 3 KILLIP: NEW PASSIONFLOWERS 425 or less, glandless; leaves oblong in general outline, 2-lobed one-quarter to one-third their length, 1.5 to 4.5 em. along mid-nerve, 2 to 6 cm. along lateral nerves, 2 to 4 cm. between tips of lobes (lobes obtuse, mucronulate, the sinus truncate or slightly rounded, occasionally emarginate, often mucronulate at end of midnerve), scaberulous and densely hirsute above with subappressed white hairs which are enlarged at pase, usually pilose- hirsute and paler beneath; flowers in pairs on short (2 cm.), axillary, leafy branches, rarely on the main stem; bracts none; sepals lanceolate, about 7 mm. long, 2 mm. wide, acute, hirsutulous without; petals narrowly linear, 3 to 4 mm. long, 1 mm. wide; corona filaments in a single series, liguliform, 2 mm. long; operculum membranous, closely plicate, white; limen annular ; ovary ovoid, longitudinally 6-grooved, white-puberulent ; fruit asymmetri- cally ellipsoidal, up to 4 cm. long and about 1 cm. wide, sharply 6-angled, long-tapering at ends; seeds obovate, 3 to 4 mm. long, 1.5 to 2mm. wide, blackish, lustrous, narrowed at both ends, the axis more or less curved, the lateral margins thin-winged, the central portion of each face elevated, forming a sharp-toothed ridge (hence the seed quadrangular in cross-section). Type in the Universitetets Botaniske Museum, Copenhagen, collected at Nifia de Dolores, (Oaxaca?), Mexico, August, 1842, by Frederik Lieb- mann (no. 4076; Passiflora no. 29). Oaxaca: Santa Gertrudis, Liebmann 4075, Passiflora no. 30 (Copen- hagen). Sierra de Ixthlin, Conzatte in 1913 (U. S. N. M., Gray Her- barium), in 1918 (Missouri Botanical Garden). The seeds of P. goniosperma differ markedly from those of other Ameri- can species of Passiflora. Each of the two faces has the appearance of being compressed laterally to form a narrow longitudinal ridge; the transverse ridges, normally extending from margin to margin in the species of the sub- genus Plectostemma with sulcate seeds, are reduced to a row of teeth along this longitudinal ridge. The ellipsoidal, 6-angled fruit, the absence of bracts, and the general aspect of the plant, however, show a rather close relationship with P. capsularis, the species to which the type specimen of P. goniosperma was referred by Masters. In addition to the seed char- acters, other marks which distinguish it from P. capsularis are the smaller leaves, with rounded subparallel lobes (lobes usually acute, divergent in P. capsularis). Passiflora conzattiana Killip, sp. nov. Stem slender, terete, pilosulous, becoming glabrate, reddish; stipules setaceous, about 4 mm. long; petioles densely pilosulous, 0.8 to 2 cm. long, glandless; leaves 2 to 5 cm. long, 3 to 8 cm. broad, 2-lobed (lobes acute, rarely obtusish, widely divergent, the sinus shallowly semilunate or the upper margin nearly truncate), entire, cordate at base, 3-nerved (nerves often terminating in a short cusp), thin, sparingly setose above, densely pubescent beneath; peduncles solitary or in pairs, slender, up to 2 cm. long; bracts none; flowers small, 1 to 2 em. wide; sepals linear-lanceolate, 3- nerved, sparingly pilose without, glabrous within, 8 to 10 mm. long, 2 mm. broad, ‘petals linear-lanceolate, 4 to 5 mm. long, 1.5 mm. broad; corona filaments in a single series, relatively few, liguliform, 3 to 4 mm. long, 0.4 mm. broad, deep red; operculum membranous, erect, closely plicate, red below, pale yellow or white above, the margin minutely fimbrillate; limen annular; gynophore glabrous, 4 to 5 mm. long; anthers oblong, 3 mm. long, 426 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 16 1 mm. broad; ovary narrowly ovoid, densely puberulent or tomentulose; styles clavate, 3 mm. long; stigma ‘globose, 0.8 mm. in diameter; fruit narrowly ellipsoidal, about 5 cm. long (including the long slender stipe and the caudate tip), 1 cm. wide, 6-angled, finely pubescent, at length glabrous; seeds broadly obcordate or suborbicular, 1.5 to 2 mm. long and wide, trans- versely 5 or 6-grooved, the ridges smooth. Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 1,206,806, collected at Mirador, Veracruz, Mexico, June, 1921, by C. A. Purpus (no. 8804). San Luis Potosi: Las Canoas, Pringle 3638 (Gray Herbarium). Veracruz: Near Jalapa, Rose & Hough 4260 (U.S. N. M.), 4938 (U.S. N. M.), 7840 (U. S. N. M.). Totula, Liebmann 4154, Passiflora 28 (Copenhagen). The principal points of difference between this species and P. capsularis and P. rubra are much smaller flowers, smaller leaves nearly truncate at the upper margin, nearly orbicular, rather than oblong, seeds. Several of the specimens here cited were distributed as P. rubra, a species frequent in the West Indies and South America but apparently not found in Mexico. Passiflora urbaniana Killip, sp. nov. Plant scandent, with slender tendrils; stem terete, softly ferruginous- villosulous or almost tomentose toward end; stipules minute, semiannular about stem, barely 0.5 mm. long; petioles 5 to 10 mm. long, slightly dilated at base, glandless, densely ferruginous-tomentose; leaves oblong or lance- oblong, 4.5 to 8 cm. long, 2 to 4 cm. wide, obtuse or rounded at apex, entire or remotely undulate-serrulate, 3- (or 5-)nerved (nerves impressed at base, the lateral not reaching to middle of margin, the secondary nerves 5 to 7 on each side), subcoriaceous, minutely hispidulous above, densely and softly ferruginous-tomentose beneath; peduncles 5 to 8 cm. long, pilosulous; bracts 2 to 2.5 em. long, 1 to 1.5 em. wide, viscous, deeply bipinnatisect, the segments gland-tipped; flowers about 5 cm. wide, the tube short-cam- panulate, hirsutulous without; sepals oblong, about 2 cm. long, 0.6 cm. wide, obtuse, greenish and hirsutulous without, 3-nerved, the middle nerve becoming carinate toward apex, and terminating in a short horn; petals linear, slightly shorter than the sepals, lavender; corona filaments in 5 series, those of the two outer filiform, about 1.3 cm. long, violet at base, radiate, those of the inner series almost capillary, about 2 mm. long, erect; operculum membranous, erect, about 1 mm. high, non-plicate, minutely denticulate; limen similar to operculum, about 2 mm. high; ovary subglobose, densely white-villous-tomentose. Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 529493, collected at Sanitago de las Vegas, Province of Havana, Cuba, where cultivated, May, 1906. (Herbarium de Cuba, Estacién Central Agronémica no. 2588.) Said to have been grown from seeds from Belize, British Honduras. Specimens of this collection have been seen in the New York Botanical Garden, the Gray Herbarium, and the Berlin Botanical Garden. This is a most unusual species, and it is unfortunate that its precise origin is uncertain. The bracts and flower structure show that it belongs to the subgenus Dysosmia, of which the only other species with entire oblong leaves is the Brazilian P. clathrata. That is an erect, suffrutescent plant with very short peduncles and a wholly different indument. The leaves ecry 4 1927 KILLIP: NEW PASSIONFLOWERS 427 are very similar in shape and size to those of P. multiflora, a native of the West Indies, belonging to a wholly different group of Passzflora. There is a bare possibility that this may be a hybrid of P. multiflora and some species of the Dysosmia group, perhaps P. foetida. This new species is named for Dr. I. Urban, the eminent student of the flora of the West Indies, whose assistance to me at Berlin is highly ap- preciated. Passiflora mesadenia Killip, sp. nov. Stem subquandrangular, striate, pilosulous; stipules subreniform, 1.5 to 2 em. long, 0.5 to 0.8 cm. wide, aristate, glandular-dentate near base; petioles up to 2 em. long, 2 or 3-glandular at middle, the glands short-stipitate, about 2 mm. long and 1 mm. in diameter; leaves 4 to 6 cm. long, 6 to 8 cm. wide, 3-lobed to middle (lobes acute, the middle lobe oblong-lanceolate, the lateral lobes ovate-lanceolate), subauriculate at base (basal lobes slightly overlapping), shallowly and irregularly dentate-serrate, 5-nerved, reticulate- veined (nerves and veins impressed above), subcoriaceous, dark green and glabrous above, paler and pilosulous on the nerves and veins beneath; peduncles solitary, up to 5 em. long, subquadrangular, stout; bracts 4 to 5 em. long, acute, united about half their length, glabrous; flower-tube cylindric, 7 to 8 em. long, about 1 em. in diameter, pink without, glabrous; sepals oblong, about 4 cm. long, 1 cm. wide, obtuse, concave toward apex, short-awned on outside just below apex, pink without, white within; petals oblong-spatulate, as long as the sepals, about 1.5 em. wide, obtuse, white; corona reduced to a row of small thick tubercles about 1 mm. long; oper- -culum 5 to 6 mm. long, the margin recurved, denticulate; limen closely surrounding base of gynophore, lobulate; ovary narrowly ovoid, glabrous, pruinose. Type in the herbarium of the Field Museum of Natural History, no. 536001, collected at Villcabamba, hacienda on the Rio Chinchao, Peru, altitude about 1800 meters, July 17-26, 1923, by J. F. Macbride (no. 4960). This species differs from P. macrochlamys, a near relative, in the con- spicuous petiolar glands, borne near the middle of the petiole, auriculate _leaf-bases, much smaller stipules, and longer flower tubes. Passiflora roseorum Killip, sp. nov. Stem angular, striate, densely tomentulous; stipules oblong, 1.5 em. long, 8 to 9 mm. wide, oblique and subcordate at base, fimbriate-dentate, the teeth 2 to 3 mm. long, not gland-tipped; petioles up to 1.5 em. long, bearing 2 or 3 rudimentary glands, or glandless; leaves 3.5 to 4 em. long, 4.5 to 5 em. wide, 3-lobed (lobes triangular-ovate or suborbicular, 1.5 to 2 em. wide, rounded at apex, the angle at sinus between middle and lateral lobes about 90°), truncate at base, 5-nerved, glandular-serrulate, thick-coriaceous, glabrous and sublustrous above, densely brown-tomentose beneath, the nerves and veins impressed above; peduncles up to 5 cm. long; bracts 4 em. long, united two-thirds their length (free portions ovate-lanceolate, about 1.5 em. wide, abruptly acuminate), puberulent without, tomentose within: flowers violet, the tube cylindric, 7 to 8 cm. long; sepals oblong, about 3 em. long, 1.5 cm. wide, obtuse, minutely awned on outside just below apex; petals subequaling the sepals, obtuse; corona reduced to a deeply crenulate ring, scarcely tuberculate; operculum dependent, the margin recurved, subentire; gynophore slender, not exserted; ovary obovoid, glabrous. 428 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 16 Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,022,682, collected in the vicinity of Zaragura, Ecuador, September 28, 1918, by J. N. Rose, A. Pachano, and George Rose (no. 23154). This may be a hybrid between P. jamesoni and P. ecuadorica, the fringed stipules suggesting the former and the small, shallowly lobed leaves the latter. Unlike either of these the under surfaces of the leaves and the involucre are covered with a dense brownish tomentum. | Passiflora anastomosans (Lam.) Killip. _ Tacsonia anastomosans Lam. in DC. Prodr. 3: 335. 1828. Passiflora acutissima Killip. Tacsonia lanceolata Mast. in Mart. Fl. Bras. 13!: 536. 1872. Passiflora lanceolata Harms, Bot. Jahrb. Engler 18: Beibl. 46: 11. 1894, not Passiflora lanceolata G. Don (1834). Passiflora matthewsii (Mast.) Killip. Tacsonia matthewsii Mast. in Mart. Fl. Bras. 13!: 539. 1872. Passiflora urceolata (Mast.) Iallip. Tacsonia urceolata Mast. in Mart. Fl. Bras. 13!: 539. 1872. Passiflora paulensis Killip, sp. nov. Plant glabrous throughout; stem terete, striate; stipules subreniform, 0.7 to 1.5 em. long, 2 to 2.5 cm. wide, cuspidate, crenulate to subentire, membranous; petioles slender, up to 2 cm. long, 2 to 4-glandular, the glands stipitate, up to 1 mm. long; leaves ovate-oblong or oblong-lanceolate, 5 to 7 em. long, 3 to 4 cm. wide, acute, rounded and subpeltate at base, entire, subtripli- or quintuplinerved, arcuate-veined, membranous; peduncles slender, up to 3.5 em. long; bracts cordate- ovate, 2 to 2.5 em. long, 1 to 1.5 cm. wide, acute, conspicuously reticulate-veined, chartaceous, pinkish when dry; flower-tube broadly campanulate, ventricose at base; sepals oblong, about 2.5 cm. long, 1 cm. wide, obtuse, cucullate; petals oblong- spatulate, slightly longer than sepals, obtuse; corona filaments in 5 series, the two outer 2 to 2.5 em. long, terete, fasciate, those of the two succeeding series minute, about 1.5 mm. long, the inner series about 2 mm. distant, membranous at base, filamentose on margin, the filaments 2 mm. long; operculum membranous, horizontally spreading, serrulate at margin; limen cylindric, 7 mm. high, the lower two-thirds adnate to gynophore, the upper third flaring outward; ovary subglobose, glabrous. Type in the herbarium of the Muséum d’Histoire Naturelle, Paris, collec- ted at Apiahy, S4o Paulo, Brazil, in 1883, by Puiggari. Although numerous species have been described in this group of the sub- genus Granadilla with entire leaves and foliaceous stipules and bracts, none of these descriptions apparently apply to this plant. The material examined at Berlin was distributed as P. subrotunda, which appears to be only a small- leaved form of P. mucronata. From P. mucronata, P. paulensis differs in the shape of the bracts, which are borne close to the flower, more slender petioles, leaves of a much thinner texture, and in the arrangement of the corona. oct. 4, 1927 KILLIP: NEW PASSIONFLOWERS 429 Passiflora dalechampioides Killip, sp. nov. Plant glabrous throughout; stipules semi-oblong, 1.5 to 3.5 cm. long, 0.7 to 1.5 em. wide, acute, mucronulate, rounded at base, oblique, attached laterally near base; petioles 2 to 3.5 em. long, bearing 6 to 9 short-stipitate glands on dorsal side; leaves trisect to within 2 mm. of base (segments lanceolate or elliptic-lanceolate, 3.5 to 10 cm. long, 1 to 3.5 em. wide, acu- minate, mucronulate, glandular-serrulate in sinuses, often overlapping), cordate at base, 3 or 5-nerved, reticulate-veined, subcoriaceous, sublustrous; peduncles 3.5 to 10 cm. long, articulate just below apex; bracts oblong or oblong-lanceolate, 1 to 1.2 cm. long, 0.5 to 0.6 cm. wide, acute, mucronulate, thin-membranous, glaucous, borne at point of articulation; flowers about 4.5 em. wide, ‘‘greenish blue,’ the tube short-campanulate; sepals linear- oblong, about 2 cm. long, 0.6 to 0.8 cm. wide, cucullate and short-awned at apex; petals linear, about 1 cm. long, 0.3 cm. wide; corona filaments in 3 series, the outermost filiform, about 7 mm. long, the two inner capillary, 2 to 3 mm. long; operculum membranous, 2 mm. high, denticulate; nectar ring a short membrane; limen tubular, adnate to base of gynophore; ovary ovoid; fruit ovoid, 4 em. long, 2 cm. wide (probably larger), the exocarp coriaceous; seeds obovate-oblong, about 5 mm. long, 3 mm. wide, reticulate. Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 943534, collected at Coroico, Yungas, Bolivia, in September, 1894, by M. Bang (no. 2441). Duplicates in the herbarium of the New York Botanical Garden and in the Gray Herbarium. This collection was identified by Masters as P. trisulca. The leaves bear a general resemblance to that species, though they are much more deeply lobed, and the petiolar glands are more numerous. ‘The flowers are smaller, the outer corona filaments filiform, not liguliform, and the operculum merely denticulate. The shape of the leaves suggests rather P. weberbaueri, a wholly different species of the subgenus Granadillastrum. Passiflora rubrotincta Killip, sp. nov. Plant glabrous throughout; stem terete, wiry, drying yellowish; stipules subreniform, 1.5 to 2 cm. long, 0.5 to 0.8 em. wide, minutely mucronulate at one end, rounded at other, remotely crenulate or subentire, coriaceous; petioles about 2 cm. long, glandless; leaves 4.5 to 8 cm. long and wide, angulately 3-lobed (middle lobe ovate-deltoid, 3 to 4 cm. long, 4 to 5 cm. wide at base, obtusish, the lateral lobes less than half as long), distinctly peltate, truncate at lower margin, 5-nerved, coriaceous, dark green and lustrous above, dull and reddish beneath; peduncles 4 to 7 cm. long, slender, articulate about 2 mm. from apex; bracts cordate-ovate, about 1 cm. long, 0.7 cm. wide, acute, mucronulate, reddish; flowers 4 to 5 cm. wide, the tube campanulate; sepals oblong-lanceolate, about 5 mm. wide at base, coriaceous, dorsally awned just below apex, the awn foliaceous, about 1 em. long; petals linear-spatulate, slightly shorter and narrower than the sepals; corona filaments filiform, in 3 (or 4?) series, the inner barely 2.5 mm. long; operculum membranous and non-plicate below, filamentose above, the filaments about 3 mm. long; limen tubular, closely surrounding base of gynophore; ovary ovoid. Type in the herbarium of the New York Botanical Garden, collected in Bolivia, the precise locality not stated, by M. Bang (without number). 430 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 16 The angularly lobed, distinctly peltate leaves at once differentiate this species from relatives of the subgenus Granadilla. Passiflora tenuifila Killip, sp. nov. Plant glabrous throughout; stem terete or the younger parts subangular; stipules semi-oblong or subreniform, 1 to 4 cm. long, 0.5 to 2 em. wide, ob- tuse or acutish, mucronulate at apex, rounded at base, subentire, glaucescent beneath; petioles 2 to 5 cm. long (lower up to 8 cm.), 2 to 5- glandular, the glands up to 2 mm. long, thickened at base, scattered or subopposite; leaves 3.5 to 8 em. along midnerve, 3 to 7 cm. along lateral nerves, 5 to 12 cm. between apices of lateral lobes, 3-lobed two-thirds to three-quarters their length (lobes oblong or obovate-oblong, 1 to 3.5 cm. wide, rounded or obtuse, mucronulate at base, glandular-serrulate in the acutish sinuses, the middle lobe narrowed at base), cordate, 5-nerved, subpeltate, membranous, glauces- cent beneath; peduncles 3 to 8 cm. long, slender, articulate less than 2 mm. from apex; bracts cordate-ovate, 1 to 1.5 cm. long, 0.6 to 1.2 cm. wide, abruptly acute and mucronate at apex, glandular-serrulate at base, glaucous, borne at point of articulation, persistent; flowers up to 3.5 em. wide, the tube patelliform, introrse at base: sepals narrowly oblong, 5 to 7 mm. wide, obtuse, carinate, bright green along the keel, white at margin, the keel terminating in a foliaceous awn 4 to 6 mm. long; petals about two-thirds as long and as broad as sepals, obtuse, white; corona filaments very slender, almost capillary, in 4 series, the outer two 5 to 7 mm. long, radiate, the inner two 1.5 to 2.5 mm. long; operculum membranous, 1 mm. high, slightly plicate at margin, filamentose, the filaments attached dorsally just below margin, 1 to 1.5 mm. long; nectar ring a low fleshy ridge; limen shallowly cupuliform, loosely surrounding base of gynophore; ovary ovoid, glaucescent. Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,232,864, collected at Marechal Mallet, Parand, Brazil, about 800 meters altitude, January 2, 1904, by P. Dusén. A duplicate of this collection is in the Gray Herbarium. Braziu: Ijuhy, Rio Grande do Sul, Lindman 1363 (U. 8. N. M.). Paracuay: Along Upper Parana River, Fiebrig 6230 (U. 5S. N. M., Gray). This material was distributed as P. coerulea and P. tucumanensis. The species is not even closely related to P. coerulea, differing greatly in leaf shape and flower structure. Though belonging to the complex group of granadillas with 3-lobed leaves and foliaceous stipules, it is at once dis-— tinguished by small flowers with very short, almost capillary corona rays. Passiflora tucumanensis, P. naviculata, and P. giberti in general appearance closely resemble P. tenwifila, but, in addition to larger flowers with coarser corona rays, the first two have glandless petioles, and the third has a dis- tinctly plicate operculum. Passiflora phaeocaula Killip, sp. nov. Plant scandent, the tendrils well-developed; stem subquadrangular, slender, dark purple; stipules setaceous, soon deciduous; petioles 5 to 8 mm. long, glandless or obscurely glandular at base of leaf, minutely puberulent; leaves oval, 3.5 to 5 em. long, 2 to 2.5 em. wide, rounded and slightly emargi- nate at apex, rounded at base, entire, penninerved (lateral nerves 5 to 7 to a side), reticulate-veined (nerves and veins elevated and conspicuous on oct. 4, 1927 PROCEEDINGS: ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 431 both surfaces), thick-coriaceous, lustrous and glabrous above, dull and minutely puberulent beneath; peduncles solitary in axils, 1-flowered, 4 to 6 mm. long, shorter than the adjacent petiole; bracts soon ‘deciduous; flower ‘ tube funnel-shaped, about 8 mm. long, 5 mm. ‘wide at throat, dark-maculate within; sepals narrowly oblong, about 2 cm. long, 0.6 em. wide, obtuse, ecorniculate; petals similar and subequal to sepals; corona filaments in 2 series, the outer about 1 em. long, subdolabriform, linear below, dilated to width of about 1.5 mm. above middle, attenuate at tip, the inner filiform, about 1.5 mm. long, shallowly bifid; operculum borne*in lower third of tube, erect, 4 mm. long, filamentose nearly to base; ovary ovoid, puberulent. Type in the herbarium of the New York Botanical Garden, collected along the Upper Rio Negro, Brazil, in 1907 or 1908, by Weiss and Schmidt. Among species of the section Pseudoastrophea this is most readily recog- nized by the small, very thick leaves with a conspicuous much-elevated reticulate venation. The peduncles are shorter than the petioles, in this respect resembling only P. candida. In both series the corona filaments are much fewer than in P. candida, P. haematostigma, and other relatives, and the outer filaments are essentially entire at the margin of the dilated portion. PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 392ND MEETING The 392nd regular meeting was held April 7, 1927, in the U.S. Department of Agriculture Motion Picture Laboratory, 1363 C. Street 8S. W. President J. A. Hystop presided. There were present 23 members and 15 visitors. Mr. Fuioyp F. Smiru, of Willow Grove, Penn., was elected to membership. Program: W. H. Larrimer: The control campaign against the European corn borer. (Illustrated by two motion picture films of the Department entitled ‘‘The corn borer and what to do about it,’’ and “Corn and the borer,” —and also by several lantern slides dealing with the various phases of the corn borer activities, such as copies of the original $10,000,000 authorization and appropriation bills, organization charts for the campaign, portraits of some of the executive personnel.) In addition to data in explanation of the film and the slides the speaker gave a brief outline of the events of the past few months concerning the corn-borer clean-up campaign, with not only em- phasis on the scope and magnitude of the enterprise, but also with emphasis on its experimental character, as being solely an effort to check the spread of the pest, and with no attempt at absolute extermination of it, the experi- mental character of the campaign being clearly realized and understood not only by the President, the Director of the Bureau of The Budget, and the Congressional Committee, but also by the International Corn-Borer Com- mittee, some of the members of which were most active in obtaining the ten million dollar appropriation. A. C. Baker: The citrus white fly in California. The speaker gave a brief account of the campaign against this pest and his visit to that State in 432 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 16 this connection. He pointed out that a previous attempt had been made to eradicate the white-fly, which, probably due to a lack of knowledge of its host plants, was unsuccessful. ‘The present campaign resolved itself for this same reason into one of treating the entire infested area, in the hope of re- - ducing the white-fly population to a point where danger of its transfer to the southern citrus region would be minimized, and if possible to a point where eradication might be considered feasible. Informal remarks were made on request by T. H. CoLuBroox TAYLOR, who has been working on cocoanut insects in the Fiji Islands, and who was en route to his old home in England on a vacation. He gave a brief outline of his work and experiences in the South Seas, and discussed with some detail his researches on the life history and control of Levuana iridescens Bath- Baker, a serious pest of cocoanuts in Fiji. This injury, commonly known as “Browning disease,’ was first noticed by explorers in 1860, and again was recorded in 1907. By 1923 it had spread to about a hundred of the near-by islands. Considerable time in control work was given to spraying experi- ments with lead arsenate paste and sea water, but much difficulty was ex- perienced in spraying because of the great height, 90 feet or more, of the cocoanut trees, and because of the corrosive qualities of the sea water on the spraying equipment. Search was made in a number of the other countries for parasites, and, at last, in Java, a Tachinid, Piychomyia remota Aldrich, was found. Serious difficulties were encountered in actual transportation by steamer of the parasites because of inadequate facilities, lack of ice, etc., for properly taking care of them. Much of the rearing work, too, was done under highly adverse conditions. He also touched briefly upon explorations made in other places, notably those in New Guinea and the Solomon Islands. Dr. Bévine directed attention to two copies of a Danish entomological Magazine, ‘“Entomologiske Meddelelser,” vol. 15, Nos. 5 and 6, 1926, which contained an article entitled ““The History of Danish Entomology” by Kai L. Henricksen, stating that it presented a very excellent résumé of the sub- ject and that there was included a number of good portraits of the outstanding leaders of the work in that country, and natives who in other countries have been identified with entomological work. Mr. Rouwer directed attention to an old paper by Fabricius written in 1774 in which the author had recorded a thought quite similar to that ex- pressed recently in an address by Dr. Howard that if we only had closer acquaintance with and more intimate knowledge of insects we could better learn to control them. | —J.S. Wane, Recording Secretary. CONTENTS ORIGINAL PAPERS Page Mineralogy.—Calcite oolites with pentagonal dodecahedral form. Earn Y. SERANINON 3/5) 55) 5 Seay ie AS DTC OM SNA OC 9 is a a . 409 Paleontology.—The generic characters of Astartella Hall. Grorer H. Girry.,.. 417 Botany.—New passionflowers from South America and Mexico. ExLusworts P. RE ee aE ne BOG Ve eVGA NDR MER RRR O00 a ee 423 PROCEEDINGS Entomological Soeietyy os 3s is eee Swi levis bile athe o's eerie’ » op nuaie o an «. 481 ScrenTiPic NOTHS "AND INE WH io. 5 0 Pee he Be See Ug be Oe a ee 432 OFFICERS Ol THE ACADEMY President: ALEXANDER WeETMORE, Smithsonian Institution. Corresponding Secretary: L. B. Tuckerman, Bureau of Standards. Recording Secretary: W. D. LamBer?, Coast and Geodetic Survey. Treasurer: R.. L. Farts, Coast and Geodetic Survey. BOARD c oF EDITORS. : | AenesCuasp=——(itsi‘isés~SSOHN Bese, JW BUREAU PLANT INDUSTRY Ae ad Bick _ ‘NATIONAL MUSEUM. 9 oe ag "ASSOCIATE } EDITORS et ae ae Rouwee 82S ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY . Sat yaar ac G. W. Srosr ox GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY Ey R. SWANTON SR _ANTHROPOLOGICAL eocinry. eee PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY JULY, AUGUST AND PEETEMBER, WHEN, MONTHLY, x gait Sti aye pete at ee rate of ee Brovided for tober 3, 1917, : eine ere es eee 3, 1918, This eee the official o organ ‘of th seas a brief record o pincer pena ure pul lis (3) seit cad programs ae meeting 8 of the Ae and notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. © semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth on each putes ts e when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes corres publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reac eS i the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from tk issue of the Journat for the following fourth or nineteenth, i iv y Manuscripts may be sent to any qeanuee of ihe Board of Edi ors; t clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without esse editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious mino! should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publicatio the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footno serially and submitted on aseparate manuscript page. Illustrations will be used only when necessary and will be confined to or diagrams of simple character. Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be sent to autho unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted i in final form; th dit will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. Authors’ A eine oe wil be furnished at the following schedule of P Copies 4.pp. 8 pp. . 12 pp. 16 PP. — 50° $.85 $1.65 $2.55 $3.25 100 1.90 S80. ATS 600 150 2.25 «4.30. 6.25. 6:50 200 2.50 - ABO ee PO et EO . 290 3.00 5.30. 6.25 és 750 i An additional charge of 25 cents will be made for each Ze 2 : Covers bearing the name of the author and fails of the coe with inetusi nation and date of issue, will be furnished when ordered. a tian As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his at f or extra copies or epri should invariably be attached to the first page of his | manuscript. : The rate of Subscription per clube Semi-monthly numbers. reba cieepeda sa cusewnseccssstn ete ess eens cabs singe Monthiy numbers..... de erie 6 on eh Remittances should be made ayable to “Washington Academy of Sciences,” n addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey Washington, Dx € European Agent> ~ Weldon | & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, London. 2. ay ae Ezchanges.—The JOURNAL does not exchange with other. publications. Roget a: Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, provided that cla is made within thirty days after date of ae foxpwane ft issue. cere *Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to Dersmations9 1911, will be sent for $3.00, Special: rates. are given to members of scientific societ ies affiliated with the tie ag fa JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vou. 17 OcToBER 19, 1927 No. 17 CHEMISTRY.—Dvazo sulfonates! W. L. Hauu and H. D. Gres, Hygienic Laboratory, U. S. Public Health Service. In 1868, about a decade after Griess’ epoch making discovery of the diazo compounds, Schmitt and Glutz,? while studying the reactivity of these compounds towards various reagents, synthesized the first diazo sulfonates. They observed that the addition of moist diazonium chlorides to concentrated solutions of sodium hydrogen sulfite pro- duced clear yellow solutions which did not evolve nitrogen even when heated to boiling. From diazotized ortho- and paraamino- phenol, treated in this manner, they isolated beautiful yellow crystal- line compounds having the formula C;H,-OH-N.SO;K. They con- cluded that the acid sulfite had condensed with the diazo phenols and predicted that the reaction would be characteristic for all diazo compounds. Strecker and Romer? (1871) studied the behavior of diazo-benzene towards potassium hydrogen sulfite and, as predicted by Schmitt and Glutz, obtained a condensation of the acid sulfite with the diazo com- pound, but they noted that during the reaction sulfur dioxide was evolved. Their recrystallized compound was colorless and reduced certain metallic salts, and an analysis gave the molecular formula CsH;N.SO;K. They proved that the sulfonic group was not directly attached to carbon and attempted to write a structural formula for the compound, but failed to recognize the simple relationship between their experiments and those of Schmitt and Glutz. Fischer? (1875) seems to be the first to explain the mechanism of 1 Published by permission of the Surgeon General, U. S. Public Health Service. Received Sept. 2, 1927. 2 Ber. Deutsch. Chem. Ges. 2: 51. 1869. 3 Ber. Deutsch. Chem. Ges. 4: 784. 1871. 4 Ber. Deutsch. Chem. Ges. 8: 589. 1875. 433 434 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 17 the syntheses. He proved that Schmitt and Glutz’s yellow com- pound and Strecker and Rémer’s colorless compound were similar in type. In repeating Strecker and Roémer’s work, Fischer used neutral sulfite and later alkaline sulfite,» and obtained a yellow compound whose molecule contained two less hydrogens than found by Strecker and Romer. With oxidizing and reducing agents, Fischer was able to convert a yellow compound into a colorless one and vice versa, thereby demonstrating a chemical reversibility.® Diagramatically, the synthesis and reversibility of the diazo sulfo- nates may be represented by the following equations,’ where R is an aromatic radical and X a metal. R SOX R . SO;X | a | mt Labile, Syn Configuration | Cl ee %, Orange to Red Coloration | cee R ah Red | | ee ING) IN AE le) Gerrans eee ene i —N gee | SO;X H |} oSO3% Stable, Anti Configuration Stable, Anti Reduced Form Yellow to Orange Coloration Colorless This property of the diazo sulfonates to undergo reversible oxidation and reduction, and the possibility of measuring their electrode poten- tials, instigated the syntheses of 10 of these compounds, five of which apparently are new. So far, measurements made of the electrode potentials are not conclusive enough to warrant publica- tion of this phase of the problem. The part played by the diazo sulfonates in advancing the science 5 Ann. Chem. 190: 67. 1878. 6 Although Strecker and Romer noted that when their compound reduced silver nitrate a yellow solution was. produced, and from this solution they isolated a yellow silver salt, they were at loss for an explanation as to what had taken place. 7 Adopting Hantzsch’s theories. For a detailed discussion of the stereochemistry of the diazo sulfonates see J. C. Carn, The chemistry and technology of the diazo com- pounds, Edward Arnold, London, 1920; and LacumMan, The spirit of organic chemistry, p. 216, The Macmillan Co., New York, 1904. - oct. 19, 1927 HALL AND GIBBS: DIAZO SULFONATES 435 of chemistry has been an important one. HE. Fischer’s® researches on the use of the diazo sulfonates in hydrazine synthesis, first discovered by Strecker and Romer,’ has indeed proved to be a very fruitful piece of work. The use of the diazo sulfonates by Hantzsch, Bam- berger, Blomstrand, and others, as evidence for and against the con- stitution of diazo salts, has been noteworthy. Many substitution products of the simplest benzene diazo sulfonates were synthesized in the search for a stable molecule of the syn configuration. These researches have thrown some light on the stabilization of such a labile molecule. The outstanding characteristic of these compounds in the pure state, synthesized as here described, is their surprising stability. The authors have on hand some compounds that gave a check analysis after the lapse of over a year and a half. Apparently, all diazo sulfo- nates will keep perfectly when not exposed to moisture and excess light. All the sodium or potassium salts containing a single aromatic ring that have either been studied or described are yellow to orange and give like-colored solutions, the color and solubility depending upon ring structure. Hydrazine sulfonic acids'* can be prepared from the diazo sulfo- nates by reduction with zinc dust and acetic acid. By careful re- crystallization, avoiding oxidation,!! colorless crystalline compounds may be obtained. Like many organic syntheses, the production of the diazo sulfonates is comparatively simple when one has learned from experience the proper procedure. Experiments have shown that success lies in the proper control of the pH. As Fischer showed the Schmitt and Glutz method to be faulty, so do we find the Fischer and subsequent methods inadequate when applied to certain intermediates. One must always bear in mind that at no time during the condensation should sulfur dioxide be liberated. Should this happen there may be obtained a gummy mass or even a tar, which possibly is a mixture of the oxidized and reduced sulfonates, sulphazides, and what not. Only a slight excess of sulfite should be used in certain cases, otherwise disulfonates of type formula R-NSO;NaNHSO;Na may be obtained, where R is an aromatic radical, usually containing nitro or sulfonic acid groups. Since in practically all diazotizations here considered an excess of 8 Ber. Deutsch. Chem. Ges. 8: 592, 1005. 1875. ® Ber. Deutsch. Chem. Ges. 4: 785. 1871. 10}. Fiscuer. Ber. Deutsch. Chem. Ges. 8: 590. 1875. 11H, REISENEGGER. Ann. Chem. 221: 315. 1883. 436 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 17 acid is necessary and at the same time prevents the formation of diazo amido compounds, cne is confronted with the problem of obtaining a reaction between the diazonium solution and sulfite without liberating sulfur dioxide. Investigators in the past evaded this difficulty by either isolating the diazonium compound and using neutral or acid sulfite solution, or by adding the diazonium solution directly to sulfite made excessively alkaline. Later workers showed that if after diazotization the excess acid was neutralized near 0° and this solution added to sodium sulfite good results were obtained, but we found the method did not apply in all cases. The following procedure was finally devised and worked excellently where the others had failed. The diazotized solution was added, simultaneously with an amount of sodium hydroxide sufficient to neutralize the excess acid, to the cooled sodium sulfite solution, the rates of adding the alkali and diazonium solutions being such that the pH of the reaction was kept between empirical values and at no time was sulfur dioxide liberated or alkali concentration high enough to cause decomposition. In all cases, except one, a yield of crystals colored from a brownish orange to almost red, was found to be caused by too great an al- kalinity during the reaction. Whatever the procedure, experience has proved that for good yields high concentrations of all solutions are advisable, and even then salting out of the product is necessary for the very soluble compounds. EXPERIMENTAL DATA!” 1-Methylbenzene-2-diazosodiumsulfonate I-G Hs C C.H.-2-N.SO3;Na To 10.7 grams of commercial ortho toluidine’ were added 30 cubic centi- meters of water and 25 grams of concentrated (36 per cent) hydrochloric acid. Upon cooling, crystals of the hydrochloride separated. Nevertheless at 0° the suspension was easily diazotized with 21 to 24 cubic centimeters of a 36 per cent solution of sodium nitrite. The end-point was determined with starch iodide paper. A beaker containing 52 cubic centimeters of a 25 per cent sodium sulfite solution“ was surrounded by a salt-ice mixture and the diazotized solution run into the cold sulfite suspension until a spot 12 The authors are indebted to C. G. Remsburg, Division of Chemistry, Hygienic . Laboratory, for the analyses of the following compounds, except the nitrogen ‘deter- minations which we determined by the combustion method. 13 Although these quantities are for tenth molal proportions, ten times the amounts, or molal quantities, were found to work equally well. 14 Sodium sulfite slowly changes to sulfate. It is therefore advisable to make pre- viously a rough analysis. We found it convenient to use an analyzed saturated solu- tion kept in a tightly stoppered bottle. oct. 19, 1927 HALL AND GIBBS: DIAZO SULFONATES = ——<‘«s«éS $77 plate determination showed the ee solution to have an acidity of about pH 5.6 (deep blue to brom cresol green or just orange red to brom phenol red). Cold 20 per cent sodium hydroxide was next dropped in until the alkalinity increased to about pH 8.2 (yellowish green to thymol blue); more diazotized solution was then added until pH 5.6 was noted, then more alkali until pH 8.2, and so on in alternation until all the diazotized solution was added. At the end the alkalinity of the liquid should be adjusted to about pH 10 (distinctly blue to thymol blue). A total of 6 to 8 cubic centi- meters of the 20 per cent alkali is required. With a little’ experience one can add simultaneously to the sulfite, the alkali and diazotized solution, and still keep within the required pH (5.6 to 8.2) zone. During the reaction beautiful light orange plates separated, which probably were a mixture of the syn compound and crystals of sodium sulfite. ‘The beaker was removed from the ice bath, 10 grams of sodium chloride added, and the whole heated slowly with stirring at 70°. The resulting deep orange red solution was filtered and cooled to 0° with occasional stirring. Clumps of short yellow needles crystallized. These were separated from the mother liquor and purified by three recrystallizations from hot water, in which they were very soluble. The compound was dried at reduced pressure over soda lime-cal- cium chloride-caustic soda mixture. All subsequent drying of crystals was made in this manner unless otherwise stated. Analysis: Calculated for C7H;N.,SO3Na: N 12.61, 8S 14.43 Found: N 12. 78, S 14.22 Colorless crystals of the hydrazine sulfonate were prepared by reduction of a hot saturated 25 per cent acetic acid solution of the diazo sulfonate with an excess of zinc dust, heating and stirring on a steam bath until the solution was practically colorless. After filtering and cooline the ye separated, but no further investigation was made. 1-Methyl-4-sodiumsulfonatebenzene-2-diazosodiumsulfonate a -CH 3-4-8 O3N a: Gol 3-2-N oS O3N a To 18.7 grams (see footnote 13) of commercial 2-aminotoluene-4-sulfonic- acid was added 30 cubic centimeters of water and only 15 grams of con- centrated 36 per cent hydrochloric acid. ‘To the suspension, cooled to 0°, 21 to 24 cubic centimeters of a 36 per cent solution of sodium nitrite was added. ‘The diazotized compound was partially insoluble and evidence of its precipitation was noted after one-half of the amount of nitrite had been added. The end-point was determined with starch iodide paper. There was slowly dropped into the yellow diazotized suspension 13 cubic centi- meters of a 40 per cent sodium hydroxide solution, forming the sodium salt of the sulfonic acid and neutralizing the excess acid. Although a suspension still persisted, 52 cubic centimeters of a 25 per cent sodium sulfite solution was added, producing a complete solution. At no time was the temperature of the reaction allowed to rise above 10°, and at the end the pH of the solution was about 9.0 (blue to thymol blue). Upon adding 25 grams of sodium chloride, heating to 70°, filtering and cooling, deep yellow, short needles crystallized. ‘these were separated and re- crystallized twice from hot water. Great care was exercised in recrystalliza- tion since this compound was extremely soluble in hot and cold water. The purified product was dried at 100° and when dry it absorbed moisture very quickly from the atmosphere. 438 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 17 Analysis: Calculated for C7H¢NeS,.0gNae:N 8.64, §S 19.78 Found: N 8. 69, S 19.42 By means of acetic acid and zinc dust reduction, the colorless hydrazine sulfonate was prepared. 1 ,38-Dimethylbenzene-4-diazosodiumsulfonate 1 ,3(CH3)2C.-H3-4-N2SO3;Na"® To 12.1 grams (see footnote 13) of commercial 4-aminometaxylene was added 30 cubic centimeters of water and 25 grams of concentrated 36 per cent hydrochloric acid. Exactly the same procedure and quantities of nitrite, sulfite, and alkali were used as in making 1-methylbenzene-2-diazo- sodiumsulfonate. In the present case, however, 25 grams of sodium chloride was added and subsequent heating to 70° caused a slight tarring which we were not able to prevent. The tar was easily removed in the filtration and gave no further trouble. On cooling the hot solution to 0° bundle-like short orange yellow needles ee They were filtered, recrystallized from hot water, and dried. Analysis: | Galeunied for CsH,N-SO3Na: WN 11.86, S 13.58 Found: N 12.15, 8 13.29 By means of acetic acid and zinc dust the compound was reduced to the colorless hydrazine sulfonate. Upon drying, the crystals became slightly pink. 1-Hydroxy-2 , 6-dichlorobenzene-4-diazosodiumsulfonate 1-H 0-2 ,6-Cl.: On AH o-4-N SONa Schmitt ee Glutz’ (1868) in a simple quantitative manner synthesized a dichlorophenoldiazosulfonate. They must, however, have used a 4,6- dichloro-2-aminophenol as their starting material, We diazotized commercial 2,6-dichloroparaaminophenolsulfate, in the usual manner. The diazotized compound precipitated!’ and the suspension _ 4% The synthesis and reduction of this compound showed it to be the most unstable of the series. - 1% Per. Deutsch. Chem. Ges. 2: 52. 1869. 17 Paraaminophenol, when diazotized and treated with a sodium hypochlorite solu- | tion made according to the method of Raschig (Fer. Deutsch. Chem. Ges. 40: 4586. 1907), substituted two chlorine atoms in the 2,6-position of the ring and gave the same type of precipitate. Indications are that the precipitate was an anhydride having the graphic formula. Evidence in favor of such a structure is as follows: . Certain diazotized compounds form similar anhydrides, as, for example, diazotized sulfanilic acid. A corresponding precipitate was obtained when 2,6-dibromopara- aminophenol was diazotized whereas its methyl ester was soluble. In the last case the substituted methyl group prevented formation of the anhydride. ocT. 19, 1927 HALL AND GIBBS: DIAZO SULFONATES 439 was added to a slight excess of the molecular requirement of alkaline sodium sulfite. The sulfite, in this case, was not completely in solution and con- tained enough 20 per cent sodium hydroxide to neutralize the excess acid used in diazotization. After standing for an hour, with occasional stirring, the whole was heated to 70°, filtered and cooled. The crystallized yellow plates were separated, recrystallized three times from hot water, and dried. The dry compound quickly absorbed moisture from the atmosphere. Analysis: | Calculated for CsH3;N2ClSO.Na: N 9.56, S$ 10.94, .Cl 24.20 Found: N 9.55, $10.72, Cl 24.14 Upon reduction with zine dust and acetic acid, the hydrazine sulfonate!® was prepared in colorless crystals. 1-Hydroxry-2 ,6-dibromobenzene-4-diazosodiumsulfonate 7-HO-2 ) 6-Bro-CsHe-4-N2SO3Na Boéhmer (1881)!* first made this compound by brominating paradiazo- phenol with bromine water. He separated the precipitated diazotized product, treated it with sodium hydrogen sulfite and heated. His diazo- sulfonate contained 2 molecules of water of crystallization. Hantzsch and Davidson (1896)*° prepared the potassium salt of this diazosulfonate, using potassium sulfite as a sulfonating agent. In repeating Bohmer’s work, we found that his method of bromination with bromine water required too large a volume.?! Therefore we first synthesized 2,6-dibromo-4-amino- phenol by the bromination, in an acetic acid solution, of paranitrophenol The precipitate was separated and dissolved in 36 per cent hydrochloric acid at 20°. A residue was filtered and the filtrate reduced at 0° with a solution of stannous chloride in 36 per cent hydrochloric acid. The hydrazine hydrochloride, 1-HO-2, 6-Cl2,CsH3-4-NHNH-2HCl, so obtained was filtered, dissolved in water, and twice precipitated from its solutions by adding one-half its volume of 36 per cent hydrochloric acid. After drying over caustic soda—soda lime mixture it gave only a poor analysis, and as it was found to be rather unstable even when isolated and dried, no further study was made. A preliminary report of this hydrazine was presented at the Washington, D. C., meeting of the American Association for the Advancement of Science, Dec. 29, 1924. 18 Although we were able to obtain the hydrazine hydrochloride by stannous chloride reduction, the Fischer hydrazine sulfonate method gave no results. 19 Journ. Prakt. Chem. 24: 453, 465. 1881. 20 Per. Deutsch. Chem. Ges. 29: 1532. 1896. 21 We used a modified procedure by which a tenth of a mol of diazotized para- aminophenol was easily brominated ina small volume. The brominating solution was prepared as follows: Promine, 35 grams, was dissolved in a saturated solution of 40 grams of potassium bromide at 20°. The solution was then diluted to a volume of 400 cubic centimeters. When the concentrated bromine solution was added, with stirring, to the diazotized phenol in the presence of much crushed ice, the anhydride of 2,6- dibromo-4-diazophenol was precipitated. The precipitate was separated, dissolved in 36 per cent hydrochloric acid, reduced to the hydrazine, ete. (see footnote 17). The hydrazine hydrochloride, 1-HO-2,6-BreCsH; -4-NHNH:2HCIl, so obtained, although apparently more stable than the dichloro compound, decomposes slowly in solution and likewise when dry. Analysis: Caleulated for CsH;ON-2Br.Cl: N 8.80 Found: N 9.00 440 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 17 (Mohlau and Uhlman 1895).22 The 2,6- dibromonitrophenol was reduced at 70° with tin and concentrated hydrochloric acid and the tin precipitated with hydrogen sulfide. The 2,6-dibromo-4-aminophenolhydrochloride when diazotized precipitated, and the suspension was added directly to a 10 per cent excess over the calculated quantity of alkaline sodium sulfite suspen- sion, heated, cooled and crystallized. The purified diazo sulfonate, when dried at reduced pressure, did not contain two molecules of water of erystalli- zation, as did Béhmer’s compound. Analysis: Calculated for CsH;N2BroSSO.Na: N 7.33, 88.39, Br 41.85 | Found: N 7.86,. 87.71, Br 42:15 Zinc dust and acetic acid reduced the compound to the colorless hydra- zine sulfonate.22 The isolated crystals were not analyzed. 1-Methoxy-2 ,6-dibromobenzene-4-diazosodiumsulfonate iL (Ova! 30-2 ) 6 -B 9° C,H. o-4-N oS O3N. a Hantzsch and Pohl” (1902), after the method of Stadel?® (1882) and Korner®® (1874), synthesized 2 ,6-dibrom-4-anisidine by the use of methyl iodide in the mythelation of the silver salt of 2,6-dibromo-4-nitrophenol and reducing the methylated compound. The resulting dibromoanisidine was specially diazotized and from the isolated diazonium nitrate, both the syn and antidiazotates were made. They found the two isomeric diazotates to have approximately the same stability. Apparently they did not extend their researches into the corresponding diazosulfonates. Since our interest lay in the antidiazosulfonate we synthesized it by methylating 2 ,6-dibromo- 4-nitrosodium-phenolate by means of dimethylsulfate in several different ways. The methylation of this compound is the subject of an interesting study which we hope to describe in a future article. The compound was recrystallized at 60° from ethyl alcohol containing 10 per cent, by volume, of acetone and one per cent of sodium hydroxide. A portion of this product when further crystallized from ethyl alcohol gave a melting point of 122.7° against 122.6° (uncorrected) in the literature.” Another portion recrystallized from chloroform gave a melting point of 123.7° (uncorrected). ‘The compound sublimed very slowly at 95° and the sublimed product likewise gave a melting point of 123.7° (uncorrected). Reduction to the 2,6-dibromoanisidine was accomplished by treating 104 grams of the dibromonitroanisol with 275 cubic centimeters of 36 per cent hydrochloric acid and 80 grams of granulated tin. The tin was added ~ in small portions to the continuously stirred suspension. If the tempera- ture was kept between 75° to 85°, the reduction proceeded satisfactorily Bohmer (Journ. Prakt. Chem. 24: 472. 1881) tried to synthesize this hydrazine by reducing the isolated diazonium compound with zine dust and acetic acid. He proved its presence in a qualitative way but because of instability never isolated it. A preliminary report on this hydrazine was made at the Washington, D. C., meeting of the American Association for the Advancement of Science, Dec. 29, 1924. 22 Ann. Chem. 289: 94. 1896. 23 Attempts to prepare the hydrazine hydrochloride by the Fischer method were unsuccessful. 41 er. Deutsch. Chem. Ges. 35: 2969. 1902. 26 Ann. Chem. 217: 70. 1883. 26 Gazz. chimi ital. 4: 390. 1874. oct. 19, 1927 HALL AND GIBBS: DIAZO SULFONATES 44] and completion was noted after 3 to 4 hours. At the end there was a brown solution having approximately a volume of 600 cubic centimeters at 102°. The tin double salt crystallized upon cooling, was separated, dissolved in hot water, and the tin was precipitated by leading hydrogen sulfide into the hot solution. The hydrochloride of the dibromoanisidine crystallized from the filtered, hot, tin-free solution. A portion was recrystallized from 20 per cent hydro- chloric acid, dried?’ and analyzed. Analysis: Calculated for C;7HsONBr.Cl: WN 4.41 Found: N 4.42 Unlike Hantzsch and Pohl we diazotized the dibromoanisidine in the usual manner except that a decided excess of hydrochloric acid was necessary.”8 For 32 grams of 2,6-dibromo-4-anisidine hydrochloride there were required 200 cubic centimeters of water and 25 grams of 36 per cent hydrochloric acid. ‘This thick suspension was diazotized at 0° to 5° by very slowly drop- ping in 24 to 26 cubic centimeters of a 36 per cent solution of sodium nitrite. The end-point in this case could not be determined since an excess of nitrite was needed to take care of small lumps of the undiazotized material which seem to react very slowly toward the end. A slight precipitate persisted which was possibly a trace of the anhydride of the unmethylated compound and a small amount of the diazoamino compound. This precipitate was removed by filtration. The excess acid, in the clear diazotized solution,?° was neutralized by slowly dropping in, with stirring, 60 to 65 cubic centimeters of 10 per cent sodium hydroxide solution. A yellow precipitate was formed. The pH of the suspension had to be adjusted between 5.6 and 5.8 (orange red to brom phenol red) for a successful sulfonation, then 52 cubic centi- meters of a 25 per cent solution of sodium sulfite was slowly run in. The contents of the beaker set almost solid, but after a slow heating to 90° a dark orange red solution containing a slight precipitate was produced. The solution was filtered and cooled, whereupon beautiful yellow plates were Obtained. ‘The crystals were separated, recrystallized from hot water and dried. Analysis: Calculated for C;H;NeBr,SO,Na: N 7.08, § 8.10, Br 40.37 Found: N 7. 06, pi 700.) “br 4000 By reduction with zine dust and acetic acid the corresponding colorless hydrazine sulfonate was prepared. ‘The isolated crystals were not analyzed. £7 If the compound was dried at 100° it partly sublimed. 28 In several instances where the acid was not in sufficient excess a yellow insoluble precipitate was formed. Analysis of this precipitate, after recrystallizing from ben- zene, indicated the formation of the diazoamino compound having a melting point of 187.7°, uncorrected. Analysis: Calculated for CisHi102.N3Bri: Br 55.81, N 7.34 Found: Er 56.37, N 7.74 29 When this solution was treated with stannous chloride dissolved in 36 per cent hydrochloric acid, colorless crystals of the hydrazine hydrochloride precipitated. These were filtered, and an attempt to purify them was unsuccessful because all solvents tried caused a decomposition with an evolution of nitrogen. The isolated crystals, when dried over caustic soda, were found to be stable. 442 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 17 1-Hydroxybenzene-4.-diazosodiumsulfonate 1-HO- CH .-4-N.SO3;Na The potassium salt of this compound was first made and described by Schmitt and Glutz*® (1868) as containing water of crystallization. As previously mentioned they used potassium hydrogen sulfite as the sulfonat- ing agent. Fischer®! (1877) made the compound by the use of alkaline sulfite. Reisenegger®? (1883) showed that Schmitt and Glutz’s compound did not contain a molecule of water of crystallization. We made the sodium salt of this diazo sulfonate by adding a diazotized solution of paraaminophenol to a 10 per cent excess over the calculated quantity of alkaline sodium sulfite. After heating to 70°, filtering and cooling, there was produced a mass of canary yellow crystals. These were separated, recrystallized from hot water three times and dried. Analysis: Calculated for CsH;N.SO.Na: N 12.50, 8 14.31, Na 10.26 Found: N 12. 43, S 14. 40, Na 10.43. one Reisenegger® (1883) we obtained the colorless hydrazine sulfonate upon reduction with zinc dust and acetic acid. ‘lhe addition of ethyl alcohol to a cold saturated solution of this compound caused it to crystallize. No further study was made. 1-Ethoxybenzene-4-diazosodiumsulfonate Orveh 50 . C ell -4-N oS O3N a Altschul* (1892) first synthesized this compound by treating diazotized paraaminophenetol with alkaline sodium sulfite. We likewise prepared it with alkaline sodium sulfite. Analysis: Calculated for CsH,»N2SOiNa: N 11.11, 8S 12.72 Found: N 11.12, $12.51 By a method similar to that of Altschul®* (1892), with zine dust and acetic acid, we easily reduced the compound to the colorless hydrazine sulfonate. ‘The isolated crystals were not analyzed. 1-Dimethylaminobenzene-4-diazosodiumsulfonate 1-(CH3)oN : C.Hs-4-N»SO3Na Stollé’* (1912) made this compound by isolating the diazonium chloride of diazotized paraaminodimethylaniline, dissolving it in water, and adding a solution of sodium bisulfite. Our method of preparation was perhaps 4 little simpler inasmuch as the diazotized compound does not have to be isolated. To 17.5 grams of paraaminodimethylaniline hydrochloride dis- solved in 300 cubic centimeters of water, was added 15 grams of 36 per cent hydrochloric acid. ‘The solution was diazotized at O° by slowly adding 30 Ber. Deutsch. Chem. Ges. 2: 51. 1869. 31 Ann. Chem. 190: 73. 1877. 32 Ann. Chem. 221: 316. 1883: 33 Ann. Chem. 221: 317. 1883. 34 Ber. Deutsch. Chem. Ges. 25: 1843. 1892. 35 Ber. Deutsch. Chem. Ges. 25: 1844. 1892. 38 Ber. Deutsch. Chem. Ges. 45: 2681, 2682. 1912. oct. 19, 1927 HALL AND GIBBS: DIAZO SULFONATES 443 about 42 cubic centimeters of an 18 per cent sodium nitrite solution. The end-point was determined by starch iodide paper. The diazotized solution was slowly run into an alkaline sodium sulfite mixture (52 cubic centi- meters of 25 per cent sodium sulfite plus 28 cubic centimeters of a 10 per cent solution of sodium hydroxide). ‘lhe pH of the resulting brown suspen- sion was about 9.0 (blue to thymol blue). Heating to 90°, filtering, and the addition of 70 grams of salt yielded brown needles. ‘These were recrys- tallized and purified by boiling with decolorizing carbon. ‘The pure, deep brownish orange crystals were dried and analyzed. Analysis: Calculated for CsHioN3SO3Na: N 16.73, 8 12.77 Found: N 16.41, § 12.44 We found this diazo sulfonate to be the least stable in solution. Even in the dark, a hundredth molecular solution decomposed with the separa- tion of a precipitate. According to Stollé*” (1912) zine dust and acetic acid reduce the diazo- sulfonate to paraaminodimethylaniline. 1-Sodiumsulfonatebenzene-4-diazosodiumsulfonate 1-NaSO3-CeH.4-4-N2SO3;Na Strecker and Rémer*® (1871) tried to synthesize this diazosulfonate but did not isolate the compound. Fischer*’ (1877) isolated a light yellow com- pound, apparently a mixture of oxidized and reduced forms. Pechman??® (1895) prepared the potassium salt, precipitating it with alcohol. He pointed out that in the presence of’ an excess of sulfite the diazodisulfonate KSO;< _>N — N-SO0:K - 3H,0 SO.K could be obtained. We confirmed this in a qualitative way. Hantzsch and Schmiedel* (1897) also prepared the potassium salt of the diazomonosul- fonate but found it to contain a molecule of water of crystallization. We synthesized the sodium salt of this diazosulfonate as follows. To 96 grams of sulfanil.c acid, 125 grams of 36 per cent hydrochloric acid and 200 cubic centimeters of water were added. ‘This was diazotized at 5° with about 115 cubic centimeters of a 36 per cent sodium nitrite solution. © The diazotized compound precipitated as the anhydride, colorless needles. Into the cooled suspension 70 cubic centimeters of 40 per cent sodium hydroxide solution was dropped until the pH was 9.8 (blue to thymol blue). The approach to the end-point was noted by a yellow appearance of the diazotized compound. Sodium sulfite, 260 cubic centimeters of a 25 per cent solution, was slowly added and a deep orange solution obtained. Then 37 Ber. Deutsch. Chem. Ges. 45: 2680. 1912. 88 Ber. Deutsch. Chem. Ges. 4: 784. 1871: 39 Ann. Chem. 190: 76. 1877; Ber. Deutsch. Chem. Ges. 8: 593. 1875. 40 Ber. Deutsch. Chem. Ges. 28: 863. 1895. #1 Ber. Deutsch. Chem. Ges. 30: 79. 1897. 444 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 17 100 grams of salt was added and the solution heated to 90°, whereupon a partial separation of the diazo sulfonate took place. Cooling to 5° yielded yellow needles, which were separated and purified by precipitation from a water solution with an equal volume of methyl alcohol. The compound was dried at 100° and then analyzed. Analysis: Calculated for CsH:N2S,0sNaz: N 9.03, 5S 20.67 Found: N 9. 02, S 20.02 Like Pechman*? (1895), we obtained the colorless hydrazine sulfonate by reduction with zine dust and acetic acid. The isolated crystals were purified by methyl alcohol precipitation, and a final washing with absolute methyl alcohol. They were dried at 60°. Analysis: - Caleulated for CsHsN28,0;Nae: N 8.97 Found: N 8.90 | SUMMARY A brief review of the historical development and uses of the diazo sulfonates is given. In pursuit of certain definite diazo sulfonates 10 were prepared and apparently the following five are new: -1-Methylbenzene-2-diazosodiumsulfonate | 1-Methyl-4-sodiumsulfonatebenzene-2-diazosodiumsulfonate 1 ,3-Dimethylbenzene-4-diazosodiumsulfonate 1-Hydroxy-2 ,6-dichlorobenzene-4-diazosodiumsulfonate 1-Methoxy-2 ,6-dibromobenzenediazosodiumsulfonate Three new hydrazines were prepared: 1-Hydroxy-2 ,6-dichlorobenzene-4-hydrazinehydrochloride 1-Hydroxy-2 ,6-dibromobenzene-4-hydrazinehydrochloride 1-Methoxy-2 ,6-dibromobenzene-4-hydrazinehydrochloride A new diazoamino compound was prepared: 1-Methoxy-2 , 6-dibromobenzene-4- diazoamino-4’-methoxy-3" ,5 dibromobenzene : pes , MINERALOGY.—“Blythite” and the manganese garnet from Amelia, Virginia Earu V. SHannon, U. 8. National Museum. In analyzing spessartite or spessartite-bearing garnets during the past several years the writer has at times found difficulty in obtaining an exact agreement of the results of analyses with the general garnet formula, 3RO-R.O;:3Si02. When the manganese in many garnets 42 Ber. Deutsch. Chem. Ges. 28: 868. 1895. jit 1 Published by permission of the Acting Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. Received September 7, 1927. ocT. 19, 1927 | SHANNON: BLYTHITE 445 high in content of this element is all calculated as manganous oxide the bivalent bases are a little too high and the trivalent oxides corre- spondingly low. This fact led some time ago to the supposition that manganese in garnets might, like iron, exist in two states of oxidation, bivalent and trivalent, and that there might be small amounts of an unnamed garnet molecule in which the trivalent alumina is replaced by manganic manganese. Although practically convinced that such a molecule exists, the writer has felt disinclined to put foward such a conclusion without experimental proof, and has held the matter in abeyance pending the working out of a suitable method for the deter- mination of manganic manganese in a silicate as insoluble as garnet. The problem was discussed orally with Drs. Clarence 8. Ross, Walde- mar I’. Schaller, Henry 8. Washington and Edgar T. Wherry. ‘The present writer was consequently much interested when his attention was directed by Drs. Ross and Schaller to the recent article on garnets by Fermor? in which he recognizes and names the following new molecules: 3FeO- Fe.03:3Si02 = Skiagite 3MnO:- Fe.03:38i02 = Calderite 3MnO-Mn,03-38i02 = Blythite Fermor found “blythite,’”’ named for the analyst, T. R. Blyth, for- merly assistant curator of the Geological Survey of India, in only one of the Indian garnets analyzed. ‘The material is orange-red to orange, and is from the Gondite series, whose rocks are composed largely of manganese garnet and quartz. The oxidation and decom- position of the garnet result in the formation of workable manganese ores, and the garnet rock is thrown by the thousands of tons on the dumps of the manganese mines.? The locality of the analyzed material was Chargaon, Nagpur. ‘The analysis follows: MANGANESE GARNET FROM NAGPUR, INDIA (T. R. Blyth, analyst) Per cent SUNOS Go in SIPs SUR OR EN i ae ace A 2 I Hen nS = 1 I I 0 arene URE ery 34.71 AMIN Ds Gedislsd old basis BAAS ACHE SERRE cE FOGLE CPOE APIA AR BORA MADAM Sorte ESA Cute ts 8.05 Fe.O; cer eoereneereeee ene eeeee eer ee eee eee seoseeseereseseeeoereseereeeeeeeeesenoeeeeeeses ene 8 38 REL CONN eee tree ee dete I Me Ore «cise ea waves woth ora ek 8 SOE Ob Rian Oe anes 38 83 JY [Od Rae Ales Ri ad Ts A A Oe Oa a Pe aE SS oir br as 5.40 SO Oe tein ia MOE a a Kieet, 9 Wiig Rea are MME OS oe DRM ER Roa eS 4.97 BO eae OP re ee Ae eevee eae Seek ING 1S SOL ei, GLU SEA A ale pee ee oe eee trace 100.34 ' 2]. Lurau Frermor, On the composition of some Indian garnets. Records Geol. Surv. India 49: pt. 2: 191-207. 1926. ; ,°? L. Lerigo Fermor. Mem. Geol. Surv. India 37: 167-168. 1909. 446 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 17 This analysis is interpreted by Fermor in terms of mineral mole- cules as follows: | Per cent Pyrope BMgO=):AlQasBSiOo. s sean geese Ast eh os clue bay domed chee ven eee Hokie lee Almandite areO:: AlsO3 BSiOb wi) seco said op ohic sto so «5 26 hile oe eee ee none Spessartite . SMO: (AlLO;-asiOot... 4) se ere en ee pire eh) A Oe Grossularite’ 8CaO"/ A150; :3Si0.)). eee oe LN: A eee none Andradite 3CaO = MecOs SSiOb users eee VALE. «oe a ee . 16.01 Calderite 3MinO: ‘HesOx-3S1@ ah o.8 Skits eo ickdisus 2 eval the acer ee ee 12.81 Blythite 8MnO- Mn O27: 8510, Sjeseois cities cGtcae ss se AO ae 34.72 100.00 Since the material is not near the pure end-member, it is called ‘“magnesia-blythite’ by Fermor. The specific gravity is given as 4.15 to 4.20. Unfortunately no indices of refraction are given for any of the garnets described in the paper. | While examining the analyses of garnet in the literature the writer noted that the manganese garnet from Amelia, Virginia, according to the analysis quoted by Dana‘ from Bradbury® (through Fontaine‘), showed very low alumina and high manganese content. It was accordingly decided to subject this garnet to a reexamination, to see what information it might yield concerning the possible existence and characteristics of such a molecule as ‘‘blythite.”’ Bradbury’s analysis indicates the Amelia garnet to contain only 12.63 per cent of alumina whereas pure spessartite requires 20.6 per cent to conform with the formula. According to Fontaine’s descrip- tion the garnet was found on the walls of a large cavity discovered in pit No. 2 of the Rutherford mica mine. It is in angular masses loosely deposited in the interstices between broad, platy crystals of the clevelandite variety of albite, the garnet being younger than the albite and associated with still younger helvite. The material is stated to be pale pink to flesh-red or, in some fragments, brownish- purple. The fusibility is 3; hardness 6.5; specific gravity 4.20. The analysis and ratios, all manganese being stated as MnO, are as follows: 4H. S. Dana, System of mineralogy, 6th ed., spessartite anal. 1, p. 442. 1895. 5C. M. BrapBury. Chem. News 50: 120. 1884. 6 W. M. Fontaine, Notes on the occurrence of certain minerals in Amelia County, Va. Am. Journ. Sci. 3d. ser. 25: 335. 1883. ocT. 19, 1927 SHANNON: BLYTHITE . 447 ANALYSIS AND RATIOS OF SPESSARTITE (C. M. Bradbury, analyst) Per cent Ratios SOMA en he oe aera eee aes Bos ahs 36. S4 ec BOS og? pe, 2 OOSRE ony LS it 2 Se RE Re ty 1S Se ea ae 12 26orereae: Od LZ aati a (024: LTP We op | DE yy 6 o's ics SRA METI Ao t Cs 6 are ——.. ——: RMN ho ee ye. a: / leds pigeme ts 064). 0 SP olka Sianeli SOR IES ORR te Sol rE A A a ABD ee eet tO2ZBU% den oho O ae i) pee OE A 6 I ee) Ue ge a ENE 012 OE S's. orctede fats bia ei GEBE Geel aie WS es o's aoe WAG sae 027) 99.70 This analysis gives rather exactly the formula 6MnO- AI,03-5Si0z, which certainly cannot be the correct formula for a garnet. Either the mineral is new, the manganese is largely in the manganic form, or there is a serious error in the analytical work. ‘The material was apparently pure, however, and the analytical work appears super- ficially to be of high grade. If, in the interpretation of the analysis, enough manganese be calculated as Mn.O; to make the ratio for R.O; one-third the ratio for SiO», the following results are obtained: Per cent Ratios oe 36:30): o (ENB S es 60S. 22> £201 XSi sOue) RUM ied hiss wd meme » PD. Gaoe oe alee Hie ou 20 KCL OOS) Mn.0; (GE ot oe OTE 7nd... ies tS cae 064 DO. ie re BSD GLA ay 469 TPES MGT SCS, COR DC, 3) Sere or br ed) ERE So bye WA Cite eae. .012 A ea ne eae RetOe a le .027] 100.93 The recalculated figures agree better with the garnet formula, and the mineral molecules, calculated from the bivalent bases, are: Name Formula Mol. weight Ratio Per cent “Blythite’ 3MnO-Mn203-3Si02...... HSI Saeco MOTT ck oe a ee 42.47 Spessartite 3MnO- Al.03-3S8i0O2...... AOR SO) sie SOMOS csi ceeamcee: 39.17 Almandite 3 FeO- Al203-3Si02...... AGS Ges. RODE OS oa ere 10.40 Grossularite 3 CaO- Al.03-3SiO2...... GY Ip See ae POOR Ra eae BR 3 1.81 Pyrope 3MgO- Al203-3Si102...... 404.06...... LOQG: saan dese. a eee 3. 64 ! 97.56 Recalculating to 100 per cent and prorating the specific gravity, we have: Parent SON) eee ta lart Ge aia, eer annae eae eet. SEO EAL ASN 5S gaat 4353 y 5) DOSS MAUS ae AG e155 alan Gk Re ae em AD VS icseye 1.6783 Aiming. ae teas 6 Asean es blade. Sek Rip hire Jsth LO MIBSeS. 2: 4560 Grouswlaiiencetene sok. yet Gauttysei, ch) be dia esewehs TeSGue ore .0657 dN 9) 0) Shae ese SAC asa Lala 41 ER aA a eae nee . 1309 100.00 2.3309 + .4353y 448 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 17 The values for index of refraction and specific gravity of the end- members of the garnet group used in the foregoing and the following interpretations are those of Ford,’ who derived the following con- stants for the garnet molecules: Index (n) pas DPEESArbtites wees a. Geko eee SR OR Mesias ie ink A, ane ER EN I 1 S0GF ace 4.180 VANTIN LEG eos are ill oes isch) ies Me Nace att et ah. ae ee 1 A830 cece 4.250 Grogs ularitey cccccucdss ates oa aLe eee) Rent. ae 1 eon 3 530 PV EODO Care oie sie ere GEESE Cle eR cen at nee De LW0Se one 3 510 NWOT A CIEE ees ees I LEAS, od a te cE NT 1 L895 ee 3.750 Assuming then that the analysis and the determination of the specific gravity for the Amelia garnet are correct, and that the inter- pretation given correctly represents the garnet, the specific gravity ef the pure “‘blythite’” may be calculated from the data given above by the following simple equation in which y is the specific gravity of “‘blythite:’ .4353y + 2.3309 = 4.2000 .4353y = 1.8691 y = 4.294 The specific gravity thus derived for the pure “‘blythite,” 4.294, would make it the heaviest of the common garnets, If the index of refraction of an analyzed garnet is known, the index of an unknown end-member may be calculated by the same method as for the specific gravity. ‘The analysis and determinations of the physical constants, however, must be highly accurate for the values thus obtained to be of value. In order to check the published analysis of the Amelia mineral and to secure an analysis of material which could be examined optically, a lot from the U. S. National Museum collections was selected for study. This lot (Cat. No. 47,705), received in March, 1888, as a gift from’ Dr. George F. Kunz, consisted of five pieces of practically pure garnet having an aggregate weight of over half a pound (265 crams), the largest piece measuring 6 by 4 by 2 centimeters and weighing about 95 grams, The masses are hackly and preserve bladed molds of some platy mineral, probably clevelandite, which has been leached out. The natural unbroken surfaces of the mineral are partly coated with an olive-green clayey substance and show ™W. E. Forp, A study of the relations existing between the chemical, optical, and other physical properties of the members of the garnet group. Am. Journ. Sci. 4th ser. 40: 33-49. 1915. oct. 19, 1927 SHANNON: BLYTHITE 449 delicate parallel tracings intersecting at the angles of the faces of the rhombic dodecahedron. No other substances are attached to the garnet and it is ideally pure and free from inclusions. ‘The specimens . range in color from light to deep reddish amber, are transparent, and have a greasy to resinous luster and conchoidal fracture. In parts the material approaches gem quality. The specific gravity is 4.153, high enough to be noticeable in handling. When crushed, screened, and examined under the polarizing microscope, the sample was found very pure, homogeneous, colorless, and completely isotropic with an index of refraction of 1.794 + 0.002. The powder screened through 200-mesh is almost white. Upon analysis the following results were obtained, all manganese being stated as MnO: NEW ANALYSIS OF GARNET FROM AMELIA, VA. (Earl V. Shannon, analyst) Per cent Ratios Me a inn ec ee Son AD err Ee AER: 19863 TE oe RS trace... . — — POR ee es ok eee sncin ole oe ees i Wages si ea 170 ~ | ty SS ee oS i O20 ae Hi a eta gs i) Se ee SB oie a ne 4 908 Ft: 068 RRA Bae te 20s Soe chara 8 aistel vies bars aye. A GGis oe 3 030 te Bn Oe a ee ee nee Dade Ste 006 688. .-. .218 x 2 SLE: odd rr an BROS. ce 535] EAC Ad sty A Re 58 99.40 The ratios are not in exact agreement with the garnet formula. By adding .022 to the ratio for R,O; and subtracting the equivalent .044 from the ratio for R’’O the results agree exactly. The recalculated analysis and ratios are then: Per cent Ratios SSE meee i ee Seth as cto talus cw gue eiets St as capes ART! east MeL ts) Weare nn |e bait Cis MISO Ne ert eeu Ar. Uo be Gost. hal trace NLC 9 a RS? 0 Li saSe ee 170 1B Ss OAS EN ae ic i ES Wes ne er LO Doak O0GR2. SS OS Ss SS Ger Mn;0; pisioierarel eel elrahaielviishcleleleielehetel ch clicierolenc cree cies 3.47 S.0.0. 0108 022 PG ees es te cee cries cle oe EE ele ese! bs ciclo yg ACO Se ohare 068 CHT Oe Sere MIR ier aero A a a rr L665 030 . ON are Set eC ee AP Tern Obs a err coat eote ele eit UR hei eg iets ee SAS SE ae: 491 18 (ol OE RSME enrch sce NAN: arsenate Leen a 58 450 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 17 Calculated as mineral molecules the revised analysis gives: Mol. wt. Ratio Per cent Proportional ee " ree gravity Spessartite............ 495.89...... VADs ales (Oe: 3 1: 26740. 2.9481 SOR rytlante! Fee eva Dil Oo fie tee HODDER: 1m Beeler 1218... .1213a Almandite...... RMA 498 .65...... O23 2258 DL A eee 1 20Q9e sree .4875 Ame radites iodine hss 508.79...... (0OGS 0%. SOO aetiens OD AS seceaee . 1144 Grossulanite, ccc. ABT OST ace: SOO ee cea soy ea US14 kee .0639 Pyurope, een 40406, 00 oo Ls baal ep. ‘0188; .0284 . 199 99.68 1.5803 3.6673 | | +.1213n +.12132 For the specific gravity, x: | 12182 + 3.667 = 4.153 Si2téc— 72486 zx = 4.01 By the same method, for the index 7: .12138n + 1.5803 = 1.797 aon ee lee, (3 Wel The values just found for specific gravity and index must, however, be considered as only of academic interest and not conclusive, owing to the small proportion of the “‘blythite’’ constituent. There is one other analysis of the Amelia garnet available, that published by Clarke.® ‘The mineral is described as brilliant brownish- red masses of considerable size, and although some of the material is dark, the specimen analyzed was very light in color. Like the material in the National Museum, it was received from Dr. George F. Kunz, and was doubtless from the same original lot. The analysis gave the following results and ratios: ANALYSIS OF GARNET FROM AMELIA, VA. (F. W. Clarke, analyst) Per cent oe eho ae re) RO ipa nus tet Ma AGT A lien ds Se Rea BOLO eon .§86.....° 586; 7 bas ATCO S. o eR ARES nN ae ea ante 200A ea 210 FeO) es eee 7B a 2204295) sete OO. ipa ecat tegen oe Glee he laans taal avers BAe R RNAS LS Ne Al We 024 )Y Ia © ene BCI Meena UAE A poke HIN UN 5 LAA OO. (Oates. 546?.. 587 .196 X 3 CAO CE ee Oe ee a Oe ee OAM es 017 VT eh oo Me a AC ae a Nera un eee none PINs ie ia tsa eaves! ale ae MEG eG RUN UE Ee ee EE ONE 100.17 ’F. W. Cuarx, Spessartite from Amelia County, Va. U.S. Geol. Surv. Bull. 60: 129. 1890. oct. 19, 1927 SHANNON: BLYTHITE 451 In this case the trivalent bases—alumina and ferric iron—are decidedly higher in percentage than the garnet formula requires, although the silica and bivalent bases are in good agreement with each other. Ford used Clarke’s analysis but saw fit to disregard that of Bradbury. The index of refraction and specific gravity accepted by Ford were determined by him for a sample furnished by Dr. Kunz, not for Clarke’s analyzed material. The values are 1.8008 and 4.255 respectively. It becomes pertinent now, after a perusal of the three foregoing analyses, to inquire into the reason for the difference between the results obtained by Bradbury and those of the two subsequent analyses. Either there are garnets from the same locality of dis- tinctly different composition or Bradbury’s analysis is in error in the amounts of alumina and manganese oxide determined. Opposed to the first possibility are the facts that all of the specimens are alike in external characters and associations, all came from the same place at about the same time, and probably all from the same pocket. Fontaine gives the specific gravity as 4.20; Ford measured 4.255; and the material analyzed by the writer, as the mean of three determina- tions, supplied the value 4.153, indicating only moderate variation in composition. Two other specimens with the same catalogue number as the writer’s analyzed sample and from the same lot show the garnet in the interstices of beautiful, platy albite masses. Although of various shades of color, this garnet is all identical in index of refrac- tion with the analyzed material. It appears then, highly improbable that there is more than one garnet in the various analyzed lots under consideration. The second possibility, analytical error, must be considered. Im- probable as it may at first appear, it is very easy indeed to confuse aluminum and manganese in analyzing spessartite. It is almost uni- versal practice to separate these constituents, when the manganese is high in amount, by making the first precipitation by the basic acetate method. This consists of adding an excess of an alkali acetate to the cold neutral solution of the chlorides. No precipi- tation occurs but the following reaction is believed to take place in the cold solution. AIC}, + 3NaC,H;0. = 3NaCl oe Al(ClEO?); (soluble) 452 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 17 On boiling a very voluminous precipitate of basic aluminium un separates out thus: ae A\(C;H,0,); + 2HOH = Al— OH + 2HG.H,0, C.H 30, (insoluble) This second reaction is reversible, and if the solution is allowed to cool the precipitate of basic aluminium acetate redissolves. It is therefore necessary to exercise the utmost care to filter the precipitate at boiling and to recover alumina from the filtrate. Otherwise alumina which passed through the filter may be thrown out as an unsuspected impurity in the manganese sulphide of the succeeding separation and may be weighed with the manganese pyrophosphate. The analysis may still foot-up fairly well and the error may pass un- noticed. As a demonstration of this the writer ran an analysis of a massive spessartite from Connecticut which is to be described in another paper. With the exercise of every precaution to avoid loss of aluminum this analysis gave 20.48 per cent of Al,O3. Carelessly rerun, with the basic acetate precipitate allowed to cool and without special recovery of alumina from the filtrate, this same mineral gave only 9.64 per cent of Al,O;. It seems quite likely that this explana- tion accounts for Bradbury’s results, and one is inclined to wonder whether the single analysis of the ‘magnesia blythite’’ from India, with its high percentage of manganese, may not have a similar ex- planation. An error of one per cent in the determination of alumina in the analysis would cause an error of 5.41 per cent in the ‘“‘blythite’’ in the calculation of the mineral molecules—a large factor wherewith to multiply the error in the analysis. In conclusion, while the evidence available seems to favor the inference that a ‘“‘blythite’’ molecule enters into some mixed crystals of garnet to some extent, the mineral cannot be considered as firmly established until a satisfactory analytical procedure for the determina- tion of manganic manganese in garnet is developed and used on a garnet possessing a considerable content of the manganic molecule. oct. 19,1927 REESIDE: ACANTHOCERAS RHOTOMAGENSE FAUNA 453 GEOLOGY.—An Acanthoceras rhotomagense fauna in the Cretaceous of the Western Interior.: JOHN B. ReEsipe, Jr., U. 8S. Geological Survey. Ammonites belonging to the genus Acanthoceras in the strict sense, that is, to the group of A. rhotomagense Defrance, have been reported from the Woodbine sand and basal Eagle Ford clay ef Texas.2. They have not been recorded, so far as the writer knows, in the literature dealing with the Cretaceous of the Western Interior province. 0 are of the form €. = Mm, Cos (r — a) = — Mm COS a : (1) A = 7m, Sin (tr — a) = =m, sin , | For a proton €2 = My COS a (2) Az = Mm. SIN a] These “charges” refer to their field-producing character in the Max- well-Lorentz field equations. The necessary and sufficient condi- 1 Publication approved by the Director of the Bureau of Standards, Department of Commerce. This paper is a condensed statement of work presented before the Philosophical Society of Washington, October 15, 1927, and is to be published in more complete form as a Scientific Paper of the Bureau of Standards. Received Sept. 29, 1927. 457 458 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 18 tions for the compatibility of these field equations enable us to draw three conclusions as to the constants m, and mz. 1. They must be invariants. 2. They must be strictly conserved (even when we abandon the preliminary assumption that space-time is flat). 3. A physical velocity may be consistently assigned to them, which probably implies (1) and (2). This is taken as a physical definition of ‘thing’ or substance, without implying any metaphysical right to the exclusive “occupancy of space.” It is important (for this theory) to emphasize the fact that the so-called electromagnetic energy, whose density is supposed to be (#2? + H?)/8a and rate of flow |#,H]/4z, fails to qualify as substance under each of these three specifications. ‘This concept arises when (and only when) we resort to physical averages of the field and treat matter in bulk. Dynamics presents us with one and only one concept thus qualify- ing as substance, namely (invariant), mass. We accordingly identify “electricity” and ‘magnetism’ with mass. They are measures of the strength or quantity of the substance in its field-producing character just as mass measures the same substance in its inertial aspect. If m, and m, are the masses of electrons and protons in grams, the equations (1) and (2) give their “charges” also in grams. The factor 8 which reduces grams to c¢.g.s. electrostatic units of charge is found in terms of the mass m, grams of an electron, its numerical electric charge «, expressed in c.g.s.e.s.u., and the Eonar of gravita- tion y, by the relation ese yt = 5.4 x 10" ey) Pe eae This follows from the fact that a is defined by eylas: Lore so that y = 6? sin? a (4) e€ If p: denotes the mass density of electrons and wu; their mean velocity, with p. and wu, for protons, then the complete vector field Ho of the Maxwell-Lorentz field equations (macroscopic) may be resolved into two fields Hy) = H + e and H, = H, + h, where EL,H depend only upon the electrical aspect of mass and satisfy NOV. 4, 1927 SNOW: MAGNETO-ELECTRON THEORY OF GRAVITATION 459 E U U v Cun bt ==) A, i oe COS a =47 6 — C C C div H = 47 (po — p;}) coSa@=476 | (3) curl H+ = =) ¢ Give — © | The field e,h depends only upon the magnetic aspect of mass and satisfies P=) ag | Cc Gaye. — 20) | (6) cule +2 = — 4a (mn +") sina=—4eu C C C C | divh =47(p+ p)sSnaea=4ru | The mean density of electricity « and the mean electrical velocity v are abbreviations defined by equation (5). The mean density of magnetism » > O and the mean magnetic velocity wu are defined by (6), the latter being also the mean mass velocity, since u differs from the mean mass density p only in the fact that it is p sin a. In these equations the masses and hence charges are still being measured in grams. ‘The theory is first presented on the assumption that space- time is flat. In a later formulation we abandon this assumption and view the first statement as an approximation. It is the writer’s belief that there are no phenomena, either elec- trical or gravitational, which give evidence of finite volume of elec- trons and protons. We may treat them as point-masses. The field vectors are regarded as conveniences for expressing the mutual in- fluence of these masses wpon each other and no self-destructive field is introduced. ‘The fields mean nothing by themselves; it is only the equations of mutual influence which have a meaning. ‘These equa- tions show that if we could pin a proton down and neglect the space- time curvature it produces, a point-electron properly aimed would approach it with finite velocity, attaining the velocity of light at the moment it passed through the first point called a proton. On the 460 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES . VOL. 17, No. 18 views here presented, the two points might come to rest superposed in space-time so that if their masses were equal their electrical aspects would go into eclipse. Their inertial and magnetic (gravitational) aspects would still be distinct. The criticism that the field vectors E or h become meaningless as an electron is approached is therefore a criticism of the language used, although the description of mutual influence remains definite and finite. The volume integral of H? or h2 over a volume including an electron has no mathematical or physical meaning. The corresponding physical averages E, etc., of these vectors, which we use for certain ideal descriptions of matter, neglect- ing much of its internal motion, are finite and continuous by defini- tion and lead to the concept of energy density which is limited to macroscopic applications. In the microscopic treatment, the second members of the field equations (5) and (6) are all zero, and they are to be supplemented with a statement of the nature of the singularities in the usual manner as fluxes of H and h. ‘Those conditions at infinity are also assumed which will exclude all solutions not of the form of retarded functions. The expression for the force may be inferred from the suggestion made by equations (1) and (2) which is that electric and magnetic charges, although both measured in grams, are as distinct and inde- pendent aspects of mass as two perpendicular directions in a plane. In fact, while we are neglecting the curvature of space-time (so that with imaginary time its geometry is formally Euclidean), we may view it as part of a six-dimensional continuum formally Euclidean, the two new directions being called the electric and magnetic hyper- directions. ‘They are perpendicular to each other and to space-time. — The vector masses m, and m, are hypervelocities reckoned in units that are meaningless to us. All electrons and protons have the constant and unalterable components of hypervelocity as indicated in equations (1) and (2). When we ignore all the magnetic aspects of mass we are looking at a five-dimensional section which is perpen- dicular to the magnetic axis. With our electric component of mass we respond to the influences of other masses which are propagated to us with velocity c (in space-time) and which are produced solely by the electrical components of these masses, and represented by E,H. Our response in space-time is represented by the classical electromagnetic force 6c \B + 2 nt. In a five-dimensional section perpendicular to the electric axis all electrical aspects are ignored because they are invisible or end-on. Nov. 4, 1927 SNOW: MAGNETO-ELECTRON THEORY OF GRAVITATION 461 The field e,h arises solely from the magnetic aspect of masses, and the only component of our masses which respond to this is the mag- netic component, the space-time effect being described by the force aus — cc e|t. which is our way of describing the universal attrac- c tion of gravitation. The mutual influences of bodies in space-time is described by the force density f= 66 lag AF i= al =e ih — - || (7) ( C CoM although in the hyperplane they appear to be without mutual in- fluence. These two hyperdirections both stand in cylindrical rela- tion to space-time and are so absolute as to be only pictorial for us whose experience is four-dimensional. The meaning of equation (7) is that a particle with electric charge @ grams and mass M grams moves in the complete field according to the equation d U dt \/ An i c If electric charge now be measured in c.g.s. electrostatic units in the field equations (5) and in the force expression (7) and (8), the term 6? disappears and we have precisely the present-day theory of elec- tricity, combined with a theory of gravitation. If the magnetic density » be replaced by mass density p in the field equations (6), this replaces (by reason of equation (3)) the factor 62u by yp in (7) and 6? sin a by y in (8). Gravitation is thus described in terms of two vectors, e,h, to which mass is related like magnetism, together with the force density — yp {i — ie et. G On the assumption that space-time is flat, the motion of a planet M with velocity u about a stationary sun M’ is given by the vector equation M qe +(%,H]!—earin — E e|| sina (8) C C pease) ca MEME dt vi - (¥) 7? where 7; is a unit vector from M to M’. This differs from the New- T1 (9) 462 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 18 tonian law only in that Newton’s equations have on the left side M oe the difference being about one part in a hundred million in se case of the earth’s orbit. The perturbation of one planet on another differs from Newton’s by the same order of magnitude. ‘This views the sun’s influence in rendering the geometry of space-time non- Galilean as smaller than hitherto imagined. As we do not believe that space-time is flat, the foregoing presenta- tion of the theory must be regarded as an approximation. Its com- plete statement is next made in tensor form, using for this purpose the unit of time : but retaining the gram for mass and the e.s.u. for charge. The electromagnetic field is defined as usual in terms of the anti- symmetric tensor f’” derivable from an electrical four-potential 4,, Vedat Om _ I [ee Alig ff ea a Ph a 10 ee ads a where oo is the proper density of electricity. The gravitational field is defined by a similar antisymmetric tensor f#” aa “Ou, Oy, BAN ey Al TA cen OEE Ms eis Se a cs Sa 11 wm), i Ae ds Iw On” On" cay where po is the proper density of mass. In the microscopic treatment o) and po in equations (10) and (11) are zero at all ordinary points, but these equations serve to indicate how the electrical and magnetic (gravitational) characters of the singularities determine the two fields. The motion of a particle with mass M grams and charge Q e.s.u. in these fields is determined by da" ane eda, 1 alae i cs a ag ; 12 ane ae oe ds ds M at ys ds Oe which shows that even when uncharged or in a purely gravitational field f’, it departs widely from a geodetic world-line. The two types of field equations (10) and (11) involve the geometry throughy-— g. The dependence of the metric tensor g,, upon both the electrical and magnetic (gravitational) character of the singularities is assumed to be given by the radical modification of Einstein’s equation G2 a 8 7 CE ar Rey a) (13) C Nov. 4, 1927 | SNOW: MAGNETO-ELECTRON THEORY OF GRAVITATION 463 where Vp ps Pe i du FS Fp (14) Ss 1 eyes Cu = ae Sox Tf Guo SF” fas, (15) It is shown that from the two apparent conflicts with Einstein’s original theory, which we have in equations (12) and (13), there arises a perfect observational harmony, the rotation of perihelion of the planets and the bending of the ordinary light ray [ZH ,H]/4x being practically the same. A symmetrical static solution of (10), (11) and (18) is found for the case where 2!, x?, x3, x4 = 1, 6, ¢, t to be given by ds? = — pdr? — rede — r? sin? 6d ¢? + pdé? foe Ore ht = — Ono? fi, = Mort fi = Mp pave a[f 28] [82)- Cay er This suggests the amount of light-deflection to be expected in an electrostatic field. The gravitational light ray represented by the vector product |h,e]/42 would be deflected the same as the ordinary ray |H,H|/4x but the former is small beyond detection. The average equation for ideal continuous matter is 1 peat GS my ue ay Shae EL te Ho, ay nemy ea) 2 C2 C2 The fact that space-time is not flat, as indicated by the deflection of the light ray [H,H]/4x in the sun’s gravitational field h shows that the six-dimensional picture which the form of this theory suggests can not be formally Euclidean. It is possible that a six-dimensional geometry might be developed which would lead to equation (13) starting from a line element of the form (dr)? = g,, dx" dx” + (4, dx" + dx)? — (y, dx* + dx®)? (19) where the summations in » and » are from 1 to 4 and the coefficients ¢, and y, are the electrical and gravitational four-potentials, so that 464 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 18 6, dx*, y, dx“, and g,, dx" dz” are all invariant to transformations of the four space-time coordinates.? GEOLOGY.—The Upper Cretaceous section in the Colob Plateau, south- west Utah. G. B. Ricuarpson, U. 8. Geological Survey. The Colob Plateau lies in southwest Utah, in eastern Iron and Washington counties and western Kane County, and extends from Cedar City and Kanarraville on the west to Orderville and Upper Kanab on the east. ‘The name applies specifically to the bench under- lain by the Cretaceous rocks, with the Eocene rocks of the Pink Cliffs rising above to the level of the High Plateaus—here known as the Markagunt and Paunsagunt—and with the bold escarpment of Jurassic and probably Jurassic rocks in the White Cliffs descending at the outer margin to the deeply eroded ‘Triassic red beds. The Cretaceous deposits of Colob Plateau are of interest to geolo- gists in that they are on the western border of outcrops of the Cretace- ous of the Interior Province and were very likely near the margin of the Upper Cretaceous sea in which the deposits were laid down. Some information on the Cretaceous rocks of the region has been in- cluded in several papers? though with but little detail as to fossils and sequence of strata. The data presented here were gathered a number of years ago and a first draft of the paper has lain unpublished for some time. No description of the Cretaceous strata of the Colob region has appeared in the meanwhile, however, and, so far as the 2With this form, the field equations (10), (11), and (13) show that G4” —4 y“G (for the six-space R,) vanishes in all components in which space-time suffixes enter and the equations of motion (12) indicate that a charged particle follows a geodetic line in Re. It also appears that the resolution of charge into electric and magnetic (gravitational) components is physically indeterminate, which means that we may choose these two perpendicular directions x° and x° arbitrarily in their plane, thus altering the form but not the content of our description of nature. Certain other transformations such as zg =a? + U (x1, x, x3, xt) do not alter even the form of that description. Electricity and gravitation combined are thus viewed as manifestations of the geometry of a six- dimensional world of which space and time are a part. A relation of this proton to the hydrogen nucleus is suggested. 1 Published by permission of the Director, U. S. Geological Survey. Received Sept. 30, 1927. 2C. E. Dutton, Geology of the High Plateaus of Utah. 1880; T. W. Stanton, The Colorado formation and its invertebrate fauna. U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 106. 1893; W. T. Lez, The Iron County coal field, Utah. U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 316. 1907; G. B. Ricnarpson, The Harmony, Colob, and Kanab coal fields, southern Utah. U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 341. 1909. Nov. 4,1927 ~ RICHARDSON: UPPER CRETACEOUS OF COLOB PLATEAU 465 writer knows, no more recent field studies have been made. It seems desirable, therefore, to make available the data in hand. The Cretaceous strata of the Colob Plateau consist of 2500 to 3000 feet of buff to drab sandstones and shales, with subordinate lenses of gray limestone and, near the base, workable beds of coal. Approxi- mately the lower three-fourths of these beds are of Colorado age and the uppermost part of Montana, probably late Montana, age. A generalized section follows: GENERALIZED SECTION OF CRETACEOUS AND ASSOCIATED STRATA IN Cotos PLaTEau, UTAH Wasatch formation: , Varicolored beds of limestone, shale, and sandstone; conglomerate at base. -oPresmiwater shells: |. hee over 500 feet. Unconformity. Montana group (probably later part): : Buff sandstone and shale; conglomerate at base. Plants and fresh SEGPEECS C121 Ss 6 Me Mace pea dee Ae ECE Ele Aas een about 500 feet. Unconformity. Colorado group: Buff sandstone and drab shale in the east, as much as 1000 feet thick and of marine origin; hiatus in the west. Drab marine shale in the east, as much as 1000 feet thick; changing to interbedded shale and sandstone in the west, with the shale of lesser importance. Sandstone, shale, and coal; in the east 300 to 400 feet thick and non- marine; in the west, very much thicker and non-marine in lower part, marine in upper part. Conglomerate at base. Total about 2500 feet. Unconformity. Morrison formation: Varicolored shale and sandstone with lenses of limestone and gypsum about 400 feet. Unconformity. San Rafael group: Massive gray limestone, subordinate lenses of gypsum. Marine shells about 400 feet. The limestone of the San Rafael group yielded fossils identified by T. W. Stanton as Trigonia sp., Plicatula sp., Cidaris? sp., Campto- nectes sp., and Lima occidentalis Meek and Hayden. ‘These deter- mine the age of the beds as Upper Jurassic. The overlying vari- colored deposits have not yielded fossils but there is very little doubt that they belong to the Morrison formation. At present the Morri- son formation is assigned by the U. S. ‘Geological Survey with doubt to the Cretaceous though many geologists believe it better placed in the late Jurassic. 466 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 18 The Upper Cretaceous strata lie unconformably upon the Morrison formation with an undulating contact. The basal member consists of a variable bed of conglomerate from 15 to 30 feet thick, composed of rounded pebbles of quartzite and limestone up to six inches in diameter. Fossil plants have been found not far above this bed? and marine shells of Colorado age occur still higher. Its exact age and relation to the similar units in other parts of Utah, often desig- nated Dakota (?) sandstone, are not determinable. In this paper the conglomerate will be considered as basal Colorado. TS6éS lM, il Up CLIFFS UNANTNY! Ail The rocks of Colorado age are about 2500 feet thick and above the basal conglomerate consist of buff, fine grained, quartz sandstones with much calcareous cement; buff, drab, and dark carbonaceous sandy and clayey shales; thin lenses of gray limestone; and one or more beds of coal within the lower 700 feet of the formation. The succession of strata is varied and even adjacent sections are unlike in detail. In general view, there is in the east a relatively thin coal-bearing basal sandstone unit, a middle thick shale unit, and an upper sandstone unit. ‘Toward the west, the lower sandstone unit thickens at the expense of the shale unit and the shale unit itself 3T. W. Stanton, oral communication. Nov. 4, 1927 RICHARDSON: UPPER CRETACEOUS OF COLOB PLATEAU 467 acquires sandstones. The upper unit is apparently absent through removal by erosion before the deposition of the overlying Montana beds. ‘These changes result in the absence of the important shale unit in the western section, though it is conspicuous in the eastern section, as, for example, in Long and Kanab Valleys. Faunally the Colorado group in the Colob Plateau may be divided into four units, the lower two of which are really two facies—in a broad view contemporaneous but in individual sections coming in succession. ‘The coal-bearing beds in the lower part of the group contain littoral and brackish-water species, of which the most common, according to T. W. Stanton, to whom I am indebted for examining all of the collections of shells, are Ostrea soleniscus Meek, Cyrena sp., Corbula nematophora Meek, Glauconia coalvillensis Meek, Eulimella funicula Meek, Admetopsis rhomboides Meek, A. subfusiformis Meek. These species are associated at Coalville, Utah, with the principal coal bed, and most of them have been found also in the Oyster Ridge sandstone member of the Frontier formation in southwest Wyoming. The beds above the coal-bearing zone, the lower part of the shale unit in the east and the upper part of the lower sandstone unit in the west, contain a purely marine fauna which includes among many other species the following: Gryphaea newberryz Stanton, Inoceramus labiatus Schlotheim, Liopistha (Psilomya) meekt White, Turritella white. Stanton, Baculttes gracilis Shumard, Helicoceras pariense White, Metoicoceras whiter Hyatt. ‘This fauna occurs widespread in the lower Benton and equivalents, such as the basal Mancos shale of eastern Utah, New Mexico, and Colorado, and the Mowry shale and Frontier sandstone of central Wyoming. In these areas there is no zone of brackish-water fossils comparable to that described in the previous paragraph, the marine fauna constituting the first in the section, and the whole sequence of deposits is thinner. It seems very likely therefore that the marine fauna in the region to the east is contemporaneous with both the brackish-water and marine faunas of Colob Plateau and that the differing thickness is due to relative distance from the source of the sediments. Above the zone with Metoicoceras a zone of upper Benton age occurs, though it is not well represented in the collections. It is best dis- tinguished by the presence of species of Prionotropis. ‘This fauna is widespread also, occurring in the lower part of the Mancos shale, in the Carlile shale, and their equivalents. In the Colob Plateau this. faunal unit is in the middle shale unit. In the upper part of the Colorado group a fauna of Gracie ee 468 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 18 and littoral species occurs, closely related to and in part identical with that of the basal Colorado. Most of the genera are repeated and some of the species. However, at Coalville, near Manti, and in the Kaiparowits Plateau, Utah, a similar zone contains, in addi- tion to the less distinctive species, some that indicate a Niobrara age, and it seems reasonable to infer that the upper zone in the Colorado group of Colob Plateau is likewise of Niobrara age. This zone is apparently missing in the western Colob, for the overlying fresh-water beds of Montana age descend so low in the section that they rest upon beds. that include the horizons of the Prionotropis fauna. Above the Colorado group lie several hundred feet of buff sandstone and shale of Montana age. A conglomerate of rounded pebbles of limestone and quartzite forms the basal unit and rests on an un- even surface of older beds. This conglomerate is about 20 feet thick on the average. ‘These Montana beds contain fresh-water shells, among them Unio holmesianus White, Viviparus panguit- chensis White, and species of Planorbis and Physa—species known in late Cretaceous beds elsewhere. Fossil plants also occur. F. H. Knowlton examined the collections and made tentative determina- tions, some of them being listed on page 470, but the flora is chiefly undescribed and gives little help in correlation. A similar late Montana unit of fresh water origin is present at many places in central and eastern Utah. The next younger unit in the sequence is an irregular succession of limestone, sandstone, and shale of various colors. ‘The contact with the underlying rocks is marked by a surface of erosion and a basal conglomerate of rounded pebbles of limestone, quartzite, and the underlying sandstone. Fossils are rare in these rocks and only frag- ments of Viviparus and Unio were obtained, but the characteristic peculiarities of lithologic constitution and color leave room for little doubt that they belong to the Eocene Wasatch formation so well developed in other parts of the high plateaus of Utah. It is of interest to compare the sections in several other areas in Utah that lie near the western border of the Cretaceous of the Interior Province with that in the Colob Plateau. The section near Salina and Manti! shows almost exactly the same units as in the Colob. A thick lower unit, chiefly of sandstone, but containing also shale and conglomerate, has a lower Colorado marine fauna in the upper part. 41). M. Sprrker and J. B. Reesipe, Jr., The Cretaceous shoreline in Utah. Bull. Geol. Soc. Amer. 37: 429-438. 1926. Nov. 4, 1927 RICHARDSON: UPPER CRETACEOUS OF COLOB PLATEAU 469 This is succeeded by shale with Prionotropis, and then a unit of sand- stone and shale with a marine upper Colorado fauna. The Montana group is represented by a thick series of coarse-grained beds with a thin unit of coal-bearing strata near the top. The age of these Montana beds is not well established by fossils but it is believed that they are of late Montana age. At Coalville® the succession of strata is more complicated but the sequence of faunal units, and, in a general way, of lithologic units, is parallel to that at Salina and Manti and in the Colob. A lower unit of sandstone, conglomerate, and shale contains a lower Colorado fauna; a second of shale with minor sandstone and conglomerate contains a middle Colorado fauna with Prionotropis; and a third unit of sandstone and shale contains a Niobrara fauna. Above the upper Colorado beds lies a unit of rather coarse beds with a fresh-water fauna and a flora of Montana, probably late Montana, age. The succeeding beds at Coalville and at Salina and Manti are unconformable Wasatch deposits. The following sections show the composition and approximate thickness of Cretaceous strata in Colob Plateau and the horizons at which fossils were collected: LOCAL SECTIONS SECTION OF CRETACEOUS Rocks ON MAPLE CREEK (T. 36 8., R. 10 W.), East oF Crepar City, Uta Wasatch formation: Conglomerate, rounded pebbles of limestone and quartzite. Unconformity. Montana group: Feet DING SAG eae wt ee Sa Le Neeru aemertn rpm ea 0? eye! 3 110 AMA ST OME, TMASSHY EDULE. 4c acpcrsac tes cats epee wobec ra odes oeOreth at eae eh 50 OTE Be, Be RN ia a Release Une, Cera eRe LM 24. 90 Sandstone, massive buff, containing fragments of a dicotyledon, yO) CENREVINE Dyed ed (OTASH(HUIS SSS) Smee Se SOO Me Reema reg cere 0 UO ABER GS spendin (SSIES cs ame Aeiea Maps 5 mae eno Pe sk eg eae Te 45 Unconformity. Colorado group: SAMO SnOMe VMs MACs. Pvcmactetree osc hci Medene ace e bake CMMs oes Ate eee ere 60 Dhiglesdrab awathithin beds of. sandstone... ....... do. ee ee 400 SAME SOMES MMACSNVER UT. a 2.2 27 5s cies vet eg So) «oo coy one nlag eee 150 SUOBVIOG 5 yo 8 GEA ES eee eed RS. MAA SSE L OU ee oo. ac ei. Seep oe Sele oe aveie ne Coe ee 110 Concealed, probably chiefly shale.................. Tie Sele Nes Behe 100 “SUD EWSS od THES he oa ETE Sa a a i i RE Nr 60 Bancesied) prowablyemetly shale... eo Le 100 Sul B er CHRD] Oe ec’ A RS aaa mee OI UR he Meee “SER T LS \ 70 OND Sits €p eye ae aS a Ne a ni Revs A iC ae dae. 2 Braatl uO Mery MMM Ce Cee ye oo. a eM ee Bie yon ot ee wae 50 SS LDs GHB Si gtiths Sk OR GREER aU SB RM te acs Nee aaa A pet ere Rely 30 “LDR ACLs ssc Se ce RR See re te at SNE I MAG £2 fg 125 PO orleans Weal Rear ms) sfichs a Lisle Re Marca sia eetue cba e ca ine 8 SUT Spee cael oss a an 5 2a RO Er ee ce cee Ea ye eR a 50 Sandstone, white...... ye oka ents cee SUN RUP SED Nek Age SUE RERUN ahs 40 Beene eDUIONS MMMM ce sehr. cites eae ae Lk gua CEM aneri 5 PTO THOT. WLI Sis yaa meg ail 6 oN a Mi NC aia ar RRR 15 DD 2 OUND STEED REY. Ga AMR A a ae ee 5 Re en RR on rapa 15 Total 25389 Unconformity. Morrison formation. GENERALIZED SECTION OF CRETACEOUS ROCKS IN VALLEY OF VIRGIN RIVER NEAR Mount CarMEL, UTAH Wasatch formation (?): Feet Conglomerate. Unconformity. Montana group: Sandstone and shale, zone of fresh water shells and leaves...... 700 Conglomerate, pebbles of quartz, + to 1. inch in diameter......... 10 Unconformity. | Colorado group: Sandstone and shale, alternating beds, containing in the lower part: Ostrea soleniscus Meek, Anomia sp., Cyrena sp., Thracia sp., Corbula nematophora: Meek. 20.2.0... oe eS 1000 Shale (including a few thin beds of sandstone) containing near the top: Prienotropis sp., Placenticeras sp.; and the following forms near the base: Pecten sp., Avicula sp., Inoceramus labsatus Schlotheim?, Liopistha (Psilomya) meekz White, Den- talium sp., Turritella whiter Stanton, Baculites gracilis Shumard?, 9M etovcoceras whiter Hyatt...0..5 22.) ea 700 Nandsvomeindyshalencoal-pearing. ....4.. te... 2 oie oo ee eee: 400 Conglomerate, pebbles of limestone and quartzite, 1 to 6 inches TIONED eye ice ieie ss edn. LORE e aE. Ahan cpt eee ee 15 Total 2825 Unconformity. Morrison formation. 474 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 18 SEcTION OF CRETACEOUS Rocks IN SInK VALLEY, SoUTH oF UPPER KanaBs, UTAH Wasatch formation: Feet Conglomerate, rounded pebbles of limestone and quartzite, 1 to 6 inches in diameter. Unconformity. Montana group: Sandstone, massive bull) 240 yo ee. tees oe 55 Shale, “drab es oe ee ee 27 Sandstone; massive ‘buff: 2.42400. 1. 30 Dales wml Cee Ce Raa a 6 Sandstone, massive, buff, containing the following fossils: Unzo (casts of two or more species), Physa sp., Planorbis kana- bensts White, Campeloma (?) sp., Viviparus pangwutchensis NGO) (oMiere ey Nie Morn n cite \ SiMe RMS cs a - 60 Concealed (probably shale)... 20 7.20. a 27 Sandstone, massive buff......... oe hal ete oie sls ado By) Conglomerate, rounded pebbles of limestone and quartzite, 1 to 2 inches in diameter...) 0285.08 ol) e. 27 Unconformity. Colorado group: Sandstone, erayish-white. 23.0) ot. ees 150 shale, ‘purplish-drabwc.. oe ae 20 Sandstone, massive bull... 0.00 662 Se i. EO 65 Concealed (probably shale). oo .05...00 S00. 3 Saha ee 60 Sandstone, massive bull... 2.02000 Soe eC 16 Concealed (probably shale) 0 oi sce os se 50 Nandstone, massive buff, fine-eraimed’).)..° 25... eee 65 Sandstone, yellowish, coarse-grained....... owe Oe 25 Sandstone, conglomeratic; pebbles small and scattered........... 5 Sandstone, masiive, buffs. Pe 50 Concealed) (probably shale) ee ease ee eee nist aya 10 Sandstone, massive Soultech howe 6 ee 11 Shale. carbonaceous. .2 ound. haw. kbiiel Do a ee ee eee 7 Sandstone, Ow i ea Ve tae, Be Naes igh.) ee a 11 ho) OV2H Levi HI 02 8 pelea tae ne OnE RINE Ma MOOR og 5 oy wc 8 Sandstone. containing oysters: ..2h.244 05.0). eee eee 11 Sandstone, massive: buffs. ..t:. RS Rs aise bees a 100 Shale, drab, clayey and sandy, and local thin beds of sandstone, containing the following fossils in the lower part: I[nmoceramus sp., Lucina sp., Liopistha (Psilomya) meeki White, Turritella whitec Stanton, Aporrhais prolabiata (White), Szgaretus textilis Stanton (?), Baculites gracilis Sbhumard (?), Helzcoceras pariense White, Metoicoceras whiter Hyatt................. 1200 Sandstone; massive uit. 26h as oie alles nS 60 shale, carbonaceous: 8h. oid aR siraha dalek «all ie ce er 25 Sandstone, ult.) Pol aoe |e aa SEM sce ee 6 Shale vod i has eee Ue a 11 Shales carbONAaceOuUs ees sco ieiaie mae Shao ke Ice aaa 20 Sandstone, massive; (oul 0.2) en oo ee Geet Lea ee 25 Shale, vdiralow: seis cs tn ee age ANC ran er a 80 Coaland ‘shale 23 oie 0 ag GR Ae AN ae ce 8 Concealed (probalbly.shale)i: 0.0) sao ee i ies eee 40 NOV. 4, 1927 RICHARDSON: UPPER CRETACEOUS OF COLOB PLATEAU 475 Sandstone, ATEN A. ee CO ae re nena 2.5 TVR Cut 2 PAs ee Ree 7 Conglomerate, rounded pebbles of limestone and quartzite....... 15 Total 2426 Unconformity. ~ Morrison formation. SECTION OF CRETACEOUS Rocks 5 MILEs NORTHEAST OF Uprer Kanas, UTaH : Montana group: Feet Sandstone, white, containing thin beds of shale................. 150 Sandstone, buff to white, containing: Unio sp., Planorbis kana- bensts White, Viviparus panguitchensis White, Campelema SMELT COKE Nes Crh te de 2 SC.-SP sich athe ia paek oe oe he bea 9 ea a a9) prea md eee RIS: 2c. < Sig me a ew go io hag A OL 8 “SETAC IS OID, NLU EE ie NR ie i mp LIN ats tM! 60 Sandstone, buff, containing the following leaves: Cyperacites sp., BA TGLUS SO eI EI DESYRSIN |, fc 9/48 oo 13, elites cae SMR iA) od tO Lea 42 Sandstone, white oy ek INR OE EERE IS CL ot OS RI Neen ea BEN Oty 17 Conglomerate, pebbles of limestone and quartzite 4 to 2 inches U8, CE RTOD SY E18. 01 | AUER NR de 4 SIRO LCL Vee Di kh MR oe cae 30 Unconformity. Colorado group: Sara CE TOURISTS Ae Sir cP PE AOR asl NG, gn dale at ae 145 Pee eMOTOba bly Shale) ow. fate OU Oe PN Ne ee eae 20 EVENS TIS. CUTE A Ae as Zn A eg es Seegeet Wa ate Met ee RRR cere care he teg 5 Roncenled, (probably, ehieily. shale) 02). acdsee bowels tere Sake 100 PeaPRO UDC OUR ae co Pe gee Lac cn Cys kya Sie ease oe ks 5 SIEGE, DITEY Oala ei 7 esl Bieta lene hee hath anh alee eA cae RR RRM edie 40 BemcLOMe Mdancive., DU Acs es eos k lo, Goi Wl! Yoh Pee 10 mee mL Na Oar ee 0 es tbs eens has Lig de Bren on Ghent sao «ey Mts aha nan 18 SS DLEVG SE ASVRTES TEE PSIST ERA DIL Sp Ge Ra oR ae ER 33 Mancereunc proudly, SWAIG) oh.) seit: waht ce oe Sn ce waa 25 SCULKG IS ACIDVSN A OUTS aha aR ae nla REN No AS OES ioe! a RR 20 Wancealed (probably sale) !.) sass alison hes PE ee ai 15 SAIC SOME IANA SSI MSIE SA ele ete hy ack sp. game Hyer ks aveek acje eek. cat eh aes 55 Egle Ish 00 tio aale NR ls el a ae a a PN i te a A Reema tee Ry Ve 20 SS enol Gigi IMACS RUE NIUE eel MV hk eek, Ah ae ee 15 IO tice eer ie ain ne ere ua ri aa) Ute si ek 0S ull ook ai aaeee 40 eater CIRO aor Wg Oe Ss ye laa, on Suh. 2 el OA 30 Serta OI OMENS so aoe a 2 cen late ee A Fae) ice yt. va, Go ag 55 SE EEN ey RN OE ge ee ae 5 Sandstone, buff, coarse-grained; locally conglomeratic............ 52 PAMGChOMe MONE Ceech lke we ome ol Me Real oc Kesh SOE i oily neil 43 SHORE GTR OL Oe RNa © eae a Re or a le oe enn SY eeeate et 34 SAMUS LOMeS MASSE MOMs i ot ioc so aces node de em ee 18 Sandstone, fossiliferous; containing: Ostrea _soleniscus Meek, Anomia Sp., Barbatia micronema (Meek), Cyrena sp., Corbula sp., Admetopsis rhomboides Meek, Chemnitzia (?) sp., Pricno- UIRBIEUS Sh Ooty 3 S BAN OGM AAD a, Ok eT RORRES ays ibs 7c 72 hi ye 22 SUE EL UK oT hs a ea Sem Povey ee any a 5 SPANOS LOMewmMeassiyeulatmi eso. ce umee ey ee see eee ee: 80 Shale, drab, clayey and sandy, with local thin beds of sandstone. (Same unit as 1200-foot shale in Sink Valley section, p. 473) Total measured 1278 476 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 18 PALEONTOLOGY .—Two new unionid pelecypods from the Upper Triassic... JOHN B. Rexsipe, Jr., U. S. Geological Survey. Triassic unionid pelecypods of the United States include four species from the Dockum group of Texas described by Simpson? as Unio subplanatus, U. dumblei, U. graciliratus, and U. dockumensis; three species from the ‘Trias’ (probably Chinle formation) of north- west New Mexico described by Meek? as Unio cristonensis, U. galli- nensis, and U. terrae-rubrae; two species from the Triassic of the Connecticut Valley, Unio emersoni ‘Troxell* and U. wilbrahamensis (Emerson) ;° six species from the Newark formation of eastern Penn- sylvania described by Pilsbry® as Dziplodon pennsylvanicus, D. borealis, D. wannert, D. carolus-simpson, D. yorkensis, and Myceto- poda diluculi; and two species, also from Pennsylvania, described by Pilsbry’ as Naiadites triassicus and N. wannert. All of these are believed to be Upper Triassic. Pilsbry considers U. dumblet and U. graciliratus, because of the radial beak sculpture, as probably referable to Dzplodon of the South American family Mutelidae rather than to typical Umno of the Holarctic family Unionidae. He suggests that when well-preserved specimens are found probably all of the other Triassic species will show relationship with the South American family, and that the Unionidae proper, which certainly appear in the Morrison formation, will be found to represent a migrant element coming to North America from Asia in Jurassic time. | In the western region, in addition to the Dockum group, unionid pelecypods have been noted at many localities in Upper Triassic rocks. 1 Published by permission of the Director of the U. S. Geological Survey. Received Oct. 4, 1927. 2C. T. Simpson, Description of four new Triassic unios from the Staked Plains of Texas. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 18: 381-385. 1896. °F. B. Muux, Description of three new species of Triassic unios from the Gallinas Range, New Mexico. Ann. Rept. U. S. Geol. Surv. W. 100th Mer., Appendix LL, p. 83-84. 1875. E. D. Corr, The extinct Vertebrata. Rept. U. S. Geol. Surv. W. 100th Mer. 4(2): 9. pl. 23; f. 2-7. 1877. 4E. L. Troxeny, Unios in the Triassic of Massachusetts. Am. Journ. Sci. (4) 38: 460-462. 1914. 5B. K. Emerson, A new bivalve from the Connecticut River Trias. Am. Journ. Sci. (4) 10: 58. 1900. 6H. A. Pinspry in H. E. Wanner, Some faunal remains from the Trias of York County, Pennsylvania. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 738: 30-37. 1921. 7H. A. Prussry in H. E. Wanner, Some additional faunal remains from the Trias of York County, Pennsylvania. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 78: 26-27. 1926. Nov. 4, 1927 REESIDE: NEW UNIONID PELECYPODS 477 The ‘Popo Agie”’ beds (Jelm formation), the Dolores formation, and particularly the Chinle formation have yielded them. These forma- tions contain a similar fauna of vertebrates and are probably of about the same age. No unionids have been found in the earlier Triassic deposits. A form from west Texas and one from northeastern Arizona, each represented by a single specimen in the collections of the U. S. National Museum, do not fit any of the described species and seem worthy of record as new. Both are of types not before noted in the western Triassic, though apparently paralleled by forms in the eastern region. Because of radial beak sculpture rather than concentric they should both be assigned to Diplodon, but the specimen from Texas seems to the writer to be very much like some of the highly sculptured types of Cretaceous Unionidae for which Pilsbry proposes the name Proparreysia.® Diplodon? haroldi Reeside, n. sp. Figure 1 Shell suboval, small; beak small, subcentral; posterior and anterior ends both broadly rounded. | Sculpture of two sets of moderately strong ridges intersecting at an angle of about 60° on a line passing from the beak to the basal margin slightly posterior to the middle of the shell. The posterior slope has the strongest corrugations, the anterior and basal parts few or none. Basal part shows several coarse concentric ridges. Hinge not preserved. Length and height, as preserved, 35 and 25 millimeters; probable complete length and height, 40 and 30 millimeters. Collected by Harold J. Cook in 1925 in Mitchell County, Texas, in the southeast corner. of the Staked Plains. Dockum group. This species is distinguished by its suboval form and by its relatively complex sculpture, resembling in some respects that of Diplodon wanneri but recalling much more that of such later species as Unio (Proparreysia) holmesianus White. It is really not very close to any of the described Triassic forms. The associates of D.? haroldi at the locality of occurrence were Unio dockumensis, U. graciliratus, U. cf. U. dumblei, and some reptilian remains. Diplodon gregoryi Reeside, n. sp. Figure 2 Shell small, suboval; beak fairly prominent, subcentral; anterior end narrowly rounded, posterior end rather broadly rounded. 8C. A. Wuits, Contributions to paleontology. No. 4. Laramie. 12th Ann. Rept. U.S: Geol. Surv. Terr., p. 67, pl. 22, f. 4. 1880. 478 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, NO. 18 Sculpture of about 15 nearly equal, broadly rounded radial ribs, with narrow shallow grooves between. Concentric sculpture weak except on the basal part. The radial ribs are weak or absent on the basal part of the shell. Hinge unknown. Length and height, as preserved, 13 and 11 millimeters; probable com- plete length and height, 16 and 12 millimeters. Collected by H. E. Gregory in 1911 in Beautiful Valley, Navajo Indian Reservation, Arizona. Shinarump conglomerate. | This species is characterized by its form and its radial sculpture. No close relatives are known in the western Triassic. In the eastern Triassic Diplodon pennsylvanicus seems to be the closest, though it differs sharply in the anterior position of the beak and in the outline of the valve. D. Figure 1 —Diplodon? haroldi Reeside, n. sp., lateral and anterior views of type specimen, natural size (upper figures’. Dockum group, Mitchell County, Texas. U. 5. Nat. Mus. Cat. No. 73450. Diplodon gregoryi Reeside, n. sp., lateral and anterior views of the type specimen, < 2 (lower figures). Shinarump conglomerate, Beautiful Valley, Arizona. U.S. Nat. Mus. Cat. No. 73451. borealis has a different type of sculpture, with its broad flat ribs and very narrow interspaces. In the form and sculpture, D. gregoryi suggests strongly some marine species allied to Cardita, so much indeed that it was at first thought to be a marine species’—a very plausible assignment in view of the facts that carditoid shells are abundant in Mesozoic deposits, the specimen was accom- panied by only fragments of other shells, and nothing remotely like it had been reported from fresh-water deposits in North America. There seems little reason now to doubt that it is a fresh-water fossil, and that its habitat was such as to conform to the current interpretation of the conditions of deposition of the Shinarump conglomerate. *H. E. Grecory, The Navajo Country. U.S. Geol. Surv. Prof. Paper 93: 41. 1917. Nov. 4, 1927 SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS * 479 SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS Prof. Leon W. Couuet, Professor of Geology and former Dean of the Faculty of Science at the University of Geneva, Switzerland, who will fill Prof. R. A. Daly’s chair at Harvard University during the first half year and during November will deliver a course of lectures at Princeton University, visited the Geological Survey in September and conferred on problems of tectonics and sedimentation with members of the Survey. + Prof. Collet will visit Washington again in November, at which time he will address the local geologists. Prof. Collet’s new book on The Structure of the Alps has just been issued. Dr. E. Serpu, of Berlin, mining engineer and geologist, known for his studies of the salt domes and potash mines of central Germany, in September presented to members of the U.S. Geological Survey his views on the bearing of salt structures on the interpretation of the structure of parts of the Alps. Dr. D. J. Musxxetov, Director of the Geological Survey, U. 8.8. R., who is visiting the United States to gather data on organization, administration, methods of work, publication, costs, etc., in connection with geologic work; spent some days in early October at the U.S. Geological Survey. He later attended the meeting of the Association of the State Geologists at Urbana, Illinois, and on November 2 spoke before the Geological Society at Washington. The National Academy of Sciences met at Urbana, Ilhnois, on Tuesday, Wednesday, and Thursday, October 18, 19, and 20. G. P. Merritt, U.S. National Museum, Davip Wuitet, U.S. Geological Survey, and C. 8. Hupson, Bureau of Standards, read papers and A. L. Day, Geophysical Laboratory, gave the evening lecture, open to the public, on the subject The volcano problem. Papers dealing with psychology and biology were given on Tuesday afternoon; botany and zoology in one section, and physics and chemistry in a second section, on Wednesday morning; and chemistry and geology on Thursday morning. The Association of State Geologists met with the National Academy at Urbana on Thursday morning, October 20, and on Thursday afternoon con- tinued its meetings in the offices of the Illinois State Geological Survey. The following day was given over to an excursion to points of geologic interest. W. C. MENDENHALL and Davin Waits, of the U. S. Geological Survey, and G. P. MerriLu, of the U. 8. National Museum were in attendance. M. R. CampBELL, of the U.S. Geological Survey, during the second week in October gave four lectures at the University of Pennsylvania as part of a comprehensive course on Fuel Engineering just instituted. This course is to be given by some 50 specialists, each of whom will discuss the aspect of the subject with which he is particularly familar. Mr. Campbell’s lectures dealt with Coal, lignite, and peat resources. The meeting of the Section of Geodesy of the International Geodetic and Geophysical Union at Prague was the most successful one that has been held since the Union as organized at Brussels in 1919. Delegates were present from 25 countries and 4 other countries were represented by proxy. The meeting of the Executive Committee was held on August 29 and 30, while the Section as a whole began sessions on August 31. The formal opening of the Union occurred on September 3. The outstanding report was that on work done by Dr, F. A. Vening Meinesz, Engineer of the Dutch 480 ‘JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 18 Geodetic Commission, in determining gravity at sea in a submarine of the Dutch Navy. In 1926 he traveled by submarine making gravity observa- tions en route from Holland to Java, across the Atlantic and the Pacific and through the Panama Canal; in previous years he had made gravity ob- servations from Holland to Java on a submarine through the Mediterranean ~ Sea and the Indian Ocean. The reports from the United States and Canada showed much work done in the field and in the office since the Madrid reports and give accounts of new instruments and methods. In the Section of Terrestrial Magnetism and Atmospheric Electricity interesting reports were received from many of the 27 nations represented at the Congress. Proposed French work in Indo-China and in the Pacific was of special interest. Reports from the United States, including that of the Department of Terrestrial Magnetism of the Carnegie Institution of Washington, were complete and the latter, especially, was filled with valuable material in regard to international work. Important subjects discussed included magnetic characterization of days, adoption of Greenwich time in observatory publications, advancement of auroral studies for which a com- mittee was appointed including Sir Frederick Stupart, and Commander N. H. Heck, and geophysical methods of studying surface geological struc- tures for which a committee including Mr. J. A. Fleming was also selected. Dr. Louis A. Bauer was elected president of the section. — In the Section of Seismology national reports of considerable interest were presented, especially that of Dr. Imamura for Japan who also discussed results obtained with the long period seismograph. Reports showed that the United States is rapidly taking its proper place in the investigation of seismological problems; a report for the Government, submitted through the Coast and Geodetic Survey, gave a comprehensive statement of all the activities in the United States, governmental and otherwise. Detailed reports described the reports of the Carnegie Institution of Washington and the Jesuit Seismological Association. The work of the Section of Oceanography was chiefly a statement of steps taken in the attempt to coordinate the activities of the Section with those of other. organizations. The possibilities and limitations of such cooperation were brought out. It was pointed out that a recent accomplish- ment of the Section was a preparation of lists of oceanographers and ocean- ographic institutions throughout the earth, publications of great value to those engaged in oceanographic work. With one exception eight sessions of the Meteorological Section were presided over by Sir Napier Shaw of London. A report of the Bureau of the Section showed that pyrheliometers had been purchased for installation in Samoa, Spitzbergen and Belgian Congo, and four special photometers designed by Richardson for measuring the Earth’s albedo from airplanes were ready for distribution. New subjects discussed included the publication of upper- air data, the adoption of the week as the unit of time for meteorological summaries and a common unitary system for all the sciences comprised in the Union. The American delegate, Dr. H. H. Kimball was named chair- man of a commission to arrange for better standardization of instruments and methods employed in radiation measurements. 4 a ; “hai ag t f "ths t : ‘ A > ele 4 - _ ANNOUNCEMENTS OF THE MEETINGS OF THE Capea oy AND. AFFILIATED Lace beat a Waveribce 5 | The Watovial Society. OF We PORE welts. | Wednesday, November 9. The Medical pnpiaty sere cpa tle ie ON Ral SE ok an eee ursday, November 10. ‘The Chemical Society. 2 rely yeian aturday, November 12. ‘The Philosophical Society. SUNG Sues sd Ys. November 15. The Anthropological Rocaty: Bee aD ie) ich - The Columbia Historical Society. POS ee a . We November 16. The Archaeological Society. Program: BOC Me tuae ae Se | _ Dows Dunnam: Recent excavations in ss of Peale wate he: Medigal Society. , De Me te oF ae _ The Helminthological Society. | Eph ap camel stay PNT iS Sa The Biological Reet na bay Saey g » 4 py k HY saree thee oe the Sakis of the affiliated séciaties a appear on this page Chowne Rae . , if sent to the erlitors by the eleventh and the Aven terete of eaeh mong: : as ene CONTENTS ORIGINAL PAPERS Physics.—A magneto-electron theory of gravitation. CuusterR SNOW........... 457 Geology.—The Upper Cretaceous section in the Colob Plateau, southwest Utah. Cy. Bo RICHARDSON. ie ai Ries eS Ue eo a eld cle seein a bea wee RR aie ieee Cian mn . 464 Paleontology.—T wo new unionid pelecypods from the Upper Triassic. JoHNn B. BERSIDE, IR dows ilcicernnece (ary re Sinisa e's leiviele'a/al slp 0a kane wise e eine wjoleiare 476 SCIENTIFIC Notes AND NErws eeeteeeeeeee 6 @eseeceewenvneeveeeeeeeeeaeceeoe ee egoveoesee eee ee 479 OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY President: ALEXANDER WETMORE, Smithsonian Institution. Corresponding Secretary: L. B. Tuckerman, Bureau of Standards. Recording Secretary; W. D. Lamsrrtr, Coast and Geodetic Survey. Treasurer: R. lL. Farts, Coast and Geodetic Survey. — >> sate = = o : a7. Een _Novemper 19, 1927. ib ooo, 49 WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES BOARD OF EDITORS Cre Aanrs CHASE Joun B. Reestpe, Jr. DEPARRENT OF Ssdasmaunt MAGNETISM BUREAU PLANT INDUSTRY NATIONAL MUSEUM | ASSOCIATE EDITORS L. H. Apams S. A. Ronwer . PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY E. A. GoupMaNn G. W. Srosz BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY R. F. Griaes ; J. R. Swanton BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY ‘ Rocer C. Weuus CHEMICAL SOCIETY PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY ‘EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY BY THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Mr. Royat anp GuItrorp AVES. BattimorE, MARYLAND » ‘Entered as Beate Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., under the Act of August 24, 1912. Acceptance for mailing at special rate of yeaa, ee for | in Section ee Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, wh anscerpie fay he sent te any y me - dearly typewritten and in suitable form fo - editors cannot undertake to do more th _ should appear only as footnotes and should 11 e} _ the work of both the editors and print is suggest. i) See and submitted on a separate manuscript page _IUlustrations will be used only when DD essary and will be ( : or diagrams of simple character. uieeaay ae Da rived _Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publicat : unless requested. | It.is urged that manuscript be sub ? nt exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. _ : Authors’ Repri ae ae will “a furmshied at the following Rare Or! $ 85 is 81.68 4) 1 $2.55. GS pa ate a wie ge 2005 4 30 so 5.25, Niven i Aer coat euniee KA oe e 3. 00, 5 30. 6. 25 1 AS Cover : s beating them name bof the aitiae er title of the til 2 a . nati has and date of 1 issue, will bef urnished when ordered. rule : As an ‘author will not ordinarily see proof, his sida for wets : soul invariably be attached to the first Page of his sear - ‘The rate of Subscription 1 per volume i ts. AP BOOS ee ‘Semi-monthly NO ANRC IS Ste Fe _ Monthly BUMDONS 0 fs ince es Linnie eho so ees Vek odin beat one ‘Remittances should be Bie Seabie. to 5 “Washington Meadents of ' ie addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. ‘aris, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washix ‘ye uae ana European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, London. © a ke ties Exchanges.—The JOURNAL does not exchange with other publications. : ce x ae Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, ‘adie das a AR i eae within sags days after r date of the fottieet issue. Pee . ‘ *Volume I, however, den June 19, 1911, to. beher 19, 1911, will be sent. ve $3. 00, “Special ra é are given to members of scientific patieties affiliated dices the are vi 4 Ay 4 i F ; wy i a f Ate { : JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vou. 17 NOVEMBER 19, 1927 No. 19 GEOPHYSICS.—A machine for measuring the depths of deep wells.! C. E. Van Orstranp, U. 8. Geological Survey. The accurate and efficient measurement of the depths of deep wells is a problem of fundamental importance in the fields of science and engineering. Unfortunately, however, but little has been done to place the solution of this important problem on a strictly scientific basis—the methods of a quarter of a century ago, although recognized as extremely awkward and for the most part incorrect, are still in use. The necessity of having a simple and accurate method of measuring the great depths to which thermometers are lowered into deep wells while making temperature tests has led me to attempt the development of apparatus which meets the fundamental requirements of simplicity and accuracy. The investigation to date has resulted in the apparatus shown in Figures 2 and 3. Incidentally, this apparatus may provide a simple means of obtaining the depths of geological formations, thus providing the geologist with accurate data on which to base his correlations. It is not necessary to describe here other depth recording devices. They are quite generally of the type that may be called rigid in contra- distinction to the type illustrated in Figures 2 and 3, in which it will be seen at once that flexibility is a predominant characteristic. The measuring parts of the machine shown in Figures 2 and 3 consist of two flat faced metal wheels each with 23 inch face and 24 inch circumference. A revolution counter geared to each wheel records the depth in feet. One counter only is shown in the illustra- tions. Two small pulleys, 24 inches by 23 inches, attached to a tri- angular frame serve to keep the cable centered with respect to the two 1 Published by permission of the Director, U. S. Geological Survey. Received October 15, 1927. 481 482 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES’ VOL. 17, No. 19 measuring wheels. By spreading the triangle at the base, the opening between the pulleys can be adjusted to a cable of any diameter while adjustment to center is easily made by sliding the triangular frame on the large base frame. ‘The upper part of the base frame measures approximately 12 inches by 24 inches, thus permitting bailers of 6 or 8 inches diameter to pass through the center of the machine when the steel bars carrying the wheels and pulleys have been disconnected and spread apart by rotation outwards about their points of support. The steel tubes shown on the sides of the steel frame for the insertion of legs are not always needed—it is generally more satisfactory to mount the ends of the frame on 2 inch boards which in turn are tacked lightly to the floor of the derrick. Two spiral springs assist in keeping the measuring wheels in contact with the cable, and at the same time Figure 1.—Proposed arrangement of measuring wheels and guiding pulleys. they permit a cable of varying diameter to pass between the wheels without interrupting the operation of the machine. The apparatus described here is intended primarily for use while lowering the cable into the well, but, since the cable runs more uni- formly while being removed from the well, it may be advisable to suspend the measuring parts as shown in Figure 1. T'wo methods of arranging the bars, represented respectively by the heavy and the dotted lines, are shown in the figure. A steel casting which permits of placing the measuring wheels above or below the plane of the cast- ing may be preferable to the steel frame. The casting has the ad- vantage of tending to keep the measuring wheels more nearly in the same vertical plane. In operation the machine is centered with respect to the cable in its normal position while being lowered into or removed from the well. Ordinarily, this position is not in the center of the well. A level placed Nov. 19, 1927 VAN ORSTRAND: MACHINE FOR MEASURING DEEP WELLS 483 first longitudinally in contact with the upper tangent points of the measuring wheels and then transversely across the steel frame is used in making the final adjustment. Agreement of the records of the two counters at the end of the run is an exceedingly severe, but extremely useful check on the measurement. The chief sources of error are longitudinal and transverse vibrations of the cable. Longitudinal vibrations are caused by the slipping of the coils of the cable on the reel, whereas transverse vibrations are Figure 2.—Side view of depth recorder. the result of periodic impulses transmitted to the cable from the engine or other parts of the oil well machinery. Adhesion of the cable to the wall of the well and release from the same produce a combination of longitudinal and transverse vibrations that may be quite serious. Any one of the errors just described may be so serious as to prevent a machine from making an accurate record, but, for velocities of the cable not exceeding 200 feet per minute, these errors are not likely to be serious, and they can generally be eliminated by changing slightly the 484 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 19 speed of the engine, or by adopting some other simple method of procedure. | : In order to consider the possible discrepancies in the measurements resulting from sliding friction, let it be assumed that a well is measured first with a frictionless line and weight (W), the depths being recorded at the top of the well by means of a wheel which accurately records Figure 3.—Side and end view of depth-recorder without guiding pulley. the length of line passing the tangent point of the wheel as shown in the sketch, Figure 4. The depths recorded by the wheel are identical whether the weight is lowered into or removed from the well. As- suming Hooke’s Law, the true depth can be calculated from the observed depth on the basis that the tension in the line is due to a load equal to the weight (W) + 4 (weight of the line). Nov. 19, 1927 VAN ORSTRAND: MACHINE FOR MEASURING DEEP WELLS 485 Assume a second case in which the frictional effects resulting from the movement of the line and weight (W) are identical in magnitude, but opposite in sign according as the cable is being raised or lowered. In this case the mean of the two observed depths corrected as before for a total load equal to the weight (W) + 4 (weight of the line) leads to a correct result. In all practical applications, however, it is ob- vious that the ideal conditions just described are not fulfilled—the probability that the frictional resistances will exactly compensate. each other when the cable is moved in opposite directions is practically zero. Hence, it follows that the true depth of a well can not in general be determined from the mean of two observations made with a perfect recording machine at the top of the well. In measurements of one direction only, such as the well known method of ‘‘stringing over w the derrick,’ the error is increased as frictional effects are not compensated. Frictional effects _ Fisure 4—Showing ; f ; cable and measuring resulting from the motion of the line do not ap- wheel. pear in measurements made with a metal tape, but the true depth of a well can not be determined from an observa- tion of this kind for the reason that the variation in the tension of the tape from the top to the bottom of the well is unknown. The adhesive force between the tape and the wall of the well is usually very intense. It is probably caused chiefly by atmospheric pressure acting in conjunction with a film of moisture that occupies the space between the surface of the tape and that portion of the inner surface of the well with which it is in contact. The preceding theoretical considerations show that identity of measurements with a perfect recording machine at the top of a well is not to be expected. I have no information as to the magnitude of the error when the oil well cable is used as a measuring line. With a number 20 polished steel piano wire carrying a load of 7 pounds (3.2 kilograms), I have found differences of the order of magnitude of 0.5 foot per 1000 feet of measured length.2 An exception to these ob- servations is that measurements of depths of something like 1000 feet are frequently identical regardless of the direction of motion of the LS, 2 Apparatus for the measurement of temperatures in deep wells by means of maximum thermometers. Econ. Geol. 19: 247. April—May, 1924. 486 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES ~ VOL. 17, No. 19 line, the wells in these instances being so nearly vertical over the first 1000 feet that the line does not come in contact with the wall of the casing. In a recent test near Johnstown, Pennsylvania, one counter of the depth recorder registered 6719 feet, the other 6721 feet; and in a test made a few years ago with a single measuring wheel? in deep well No. 1842 of The People’s Natural Gas Company, located near Ligonier, Pennsylvania, the recorded depth was 7697 feet. This result com- pared favorably with the value 7705 feet obtained by The People’s Natural Gas Company using the method of “stringing over the derrick.’”’ Other partial tests which have been made from time to time while lowering thermometers to different depths showed that discrepancies of 1 foot per 1000 feet of measured length are to be regarded as rather extreme. It has been impossible to make accurate comparisons, as an error of possibly 0.5 foot may have been made in reading the revolution counters. To test a depth recorder accurately, it would be necessary to measure off on the cable with a metal tape under given tension a given length as the cable passes in a vertical line from the top of the derrick to the floor. The total length of cable should be limited to a point such that frictional effects in the casing do not appear. I have not been able to make this test, but, judging from the agreement of the readings of the counters and the duplication of measurements to the same point on the cable, I am of the opinion that measurements of rather exceptional accuracy can be made with a machine embodying the fundamental requirements of stability, flexibility, and symmetrical distribution of load on the cable as contained in the apparatus shown in Figures 1, 2, and 3. An obvious advantage in the arrangement of parts shown in the figures is that the measuring wheels tend always to fall towards the cable without causing it to be displaced laterally from its normal position. The apparatus shown in Figures 2 and 3 is convenient for use on field trips when one desires occasionally to test a well in which the casing extends 2 or 3 feet above the level of the derrick floor. The more compact form shown in Figure 1 is probably more convenient for use while drilling or conducting other deep well operations. ‘The supporting bars could be attached also to the lower part of the steel frame so as to make an arrangement of measuring wheels like that shown in the upper part of Figures 2 and 3. 8 See paper cited in footnote 2 for description of machine. 4 Reset revolution counter. M34. Four figures. Veeder Mfg. Co., Hartford, Conn. NOV. 19, 1927 CUSHMAN: FORAMINIFERA IN COLLECTION OF EHRENBERG 487 Finally, identity of measurements independent of the direction of motion of the measuring line is an essential requirement of a perfect recording instrument when operating under conditions such that frictional forces in the well do not make their appearance. In prac- tice, the mean of two readings obtained by running the cable in op- posite directions appears to be the closest approximation that can be made to the true depth of a well. I am especially indebted to Mr. John B. Tonkin, Vice President of The People’s Natural Gas Company, Pittsburgh, Pa., and Mr. Kern Dodge of Philadelphia, Pa., for their generous codperation in making the tests respectively at Ligonier and Johnstown, Pennsylvania. Mr. Dodge assisted personally in making the observations at Johnstown. The Ligonier well reached a total depth of 7756 feet making it, at the time of its completion, the deepest well in the world. This record of exceptional depth has since been surpassed by the deep well of the Chanslor-Canfield Midway Oil Company, Olinda 96, near Brea, California, the total depth as reported a few months ago being 8046 feet. PALEONTOLOGY.—Notes on foraminifera in the collection of Ehren- berg. J. A. CusHMAN, Sharon, Massachusetts. Between 1838 and 1872 Ehrenberg published many new generic names for fossil and recent foraminifera. Of these very few are accepted at present and indeed of many not enough has been known to determine their status in the accepted scheme of classification. In order to place these uncertain genera and to learn more about the species which should be considered genotypes of Ehrenberg’s genera, I undertook a study of part of the original collection in Berlin. My thanks are due to Professor Pompecki, Rector of the University, for permission to study the collection and to Dr. Dietrich for his many courtesies. As the collection has apparently not been consulted for a great many years, something of its general character may be noted. Ehrenberg’s preparations, which include diatoms and foraminifera particularly, are chiefly balsam mounts. ‘These are for the most part still in excellent condition, the balsam slightly yellowed with age, as is to be expected, but very clear indeed and showing no signs of deterioration, and the specimens in no wise impaired for study. The collection is contained 1 Received October 6, 1927. 488 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 19 in a large number of book-like holders with the volume numbers and the general localities marked on the backs. In each volume are usually twelve double card-board trays, hinged at the back and numbered and named on the top. These trays, when lifted out and carefully opened, display the mounts themselves, made of small cover- glasses with balsam between and fastened to strips of mica, five mounts to each strip. The ends of the strip are inserted in slits in a large sheet which fits into the tray and often bears on the lower part a list of the included species. On the surface of the cover-glasses are very small rings of various colors, each ring containing figured or named specimens. With the collection is a catalogue, arranged evidently by Ehrenberg, giving the genera, and under each genus in alphabetical order the species, and for each species the book and tray in which it is to be found. A collection of Ehrenberg’s original drawings, beautifully done in pencil, ink, and water color, is also preserved. There are more than twenty-five hundred sheets of these drawings, many sheets with numer- ous figures. The drawings are accurate and much better executed than are the figures on the published plates. Each individual figure bears a notation in ink or pencil referring‘to the volume, tray, strip, slide, and colored ring, so that the original specimen may be very quickly found. At first the system would seem to be a complex one, but it is in reality very workable, as the catalogue gives under each species a column referring to the original sheet of drawings on which the species appears. The specimens may be studied both by transmitted light, the method by which Ehrenberg largely worked, and by reflected light, by which it is possible to get a good idea of the surface. In the following pages a few notes are given on certain species of especial interest in settling questions of nomenclature which relate to American species. The genus Grammostomum of Ehrenberg has. as its first figured species G. tenue Ehrenberg (Abhandl. K. Akad. Wiss. Berlin, 1841, p. 426, pl. III, vii, f. 45). This then is the species which is the geno- type. OOS esc 8 feu PSTEE ITE COTTON 06 Dea ag a A pe pst! | Nee be re A a ee 8 EMbrmMTIITN (CASTING)... is cbs yee kee ee ieee Ree 1 ETO ee ees 8 er eUA TENA OM wel yk 2 ak ion ict ake a aha te ee OE Aste le: 8 Deke. a). We ee ea PAR” Pee eS el ai OPS heer 3,8 12) EIRLDSET (lee Ree SHOOT AE ee OS AQ wees tia aes! 8 “SEEDERS te ae em LSB VEO ata ea ae TOE 5 Seuan eee: 8 “CLD o DE ELEIIE DS a 2 RO 0 Shs See eee 1S Gos 8 Et oe ee i ay see aii tes 2 ae OR DG Ae Hat 3,8 ALTER. ooh RS Meir are ea ae en AR 8 Se Oia ee ae 3,4 PMR BLINV EG te Se eee Sees we has Loe Degas ema nets O2Gbe= Wiinee -. UID. cig Se Ger an ERS ne ne [OO See O28 ba tts ae 3,4 JE AD LAT). es ey a OSs el OSGi? oe ae 5 Ji OMISE gs te SR a: Sor I, oh en Ee aie ie OEOB ed pee 5 2 TAT TEVA, a ee aa a le rn DEAT A ET Me ORDO sees 3 UA TEUET G9 sy ile RCS BRIT Sal A Oe ea a 7 (ae dopa Ope: YAM eae ee Sui pistes PIERRE DAI OS Oy AN Mc. CIS Sean a2 Danie Gin OF 40h eres 6 IAGO Mey ewes ot ers Salnvers yk ag 3 ik BA te ice Oat eee 6 NASIR DIU Sg ap ia ee a a a 1.2 PL eS O29. eae 6 PERRIN MUERTOS te) ey oe RES a BOT! Ono are pines (1 02 sien ean ai a am REDE SRS eI are Nas cee Sree PNG Ae” ov eys cha lere ud § ORO Ree aie O20 4s eae W MING MEN eee ke cass gue eco Teas AR On1Be sae i CELI CIURD So SE RIN GRR Deed erty a AOD Pe pan TES Gey pee. QL08 5 Sere Uf Scivation ee IR he nt i ON GRO ae ORIG. eens {i DETR PU ae mate eles. Ola, Ni a ne AGT. ae oa. ORL Se eae 7 Baa eTMUCHM tiny! ota ae lal eure ate ten ee ho) «alas (310 Bee Soe ee O10 4s Saas Cf 3 Adams, Williamson, and Johnston, Journ. Am. Chem. Soc. 41: 12. 1919. 4 Bridgman, Proc. Am. Acad. Arts Sci. 60: 305. 1925. 5 Bridgman, Proc. Am. Acad. Arts Sci. 59: 109. 1924. 6 Adams and Williamson, Journ. Frank. Inst. 195: 475. 1923. 7 Bridgman, Am. Journ. Sci. 10: 483. 1925. 8 Bridgman, Proc. Am. Acad. Arts Sci. 58: 165. 1923. 5382 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 21 "10119 [BJ USUIIIEd x9 oy} UBYy} 1038019 A]pIeYy SI OAINO oY} ULOI] S}UIOd OY} JO JSOUL JO UOT}VIADP OYJ, “aInssoid jo osvo1OUI sokTeqesour 000‘0L 4q pasneo gO] UI osvorDep oy} SI Yorym ‘fy— ysulese poyqod st “gOT ‘Ap[Iqissordui0o oy [—*] oIns17 901 X F ALMIGISSAYADWOD Ol 6 8 L 9 S 4 E j | O So Y04 SFV— 80 oe) SSAYXVEVOAW OOOO! N pEc. 19, 1927 ADAMS: CHANGE OF COMPRESSIBILITY WITH PRESSURE 933 factors, but the divergence of the points in Figure 1, is for the majority of the materials, hardly larger than the error of experiment—experi- mental error caused perhaps more by a lack of compactness in the material than by the direct errors of observation. This effect in crystalline aggregates is well illustrated by the behavior of marble. Ordinary marble may show, under pressure, a perfect volume-elasticity, yet at low pressures the compressibility is abnormally high and falls more rapidly than can be accounted for by the elastic properties of the calcite grains themselves. It is believed that the curve in Figure 1 will be of practical value in providing a rough estimate of the change of compressibility in sub- stances for which the mean compressibility only, over a given pressure range, is known. For example, if the mean cubic compressibility of a material over the pressure range from 0 to 10,000 megabaryes were found to be 1.10 x 10~®, then from the value of A given by the curve it would follow that 108 would be 1.16 at zero pressure and 1.04 at P = 10,000. It is probable that these estimated values would not be in error by as much as + 0.02. A solution of the problem of the change of compressibility with pressure must await a more complete knowledge of the dynamics of the atomic aggregates in crystals. The problem must be attacked from the theoretical side as well as the experimental, and until more is known of interatomic forces as a function of distance, any prediction as to Ag for a substance, if the mean compressibility only is known, must be made by some empirical method. For solids of moderate compressibility (excluding the alkali metals and alkali halides) the curve given in the figure will provide an estimate of the change of compressibility accurate enough for many purposes. SUMMARY The change of compressibility with pressure for crystalline solids is to a rough approximation dependent on the compressibility itself, the two quantities increasing together. The mutual relation 1s more obvious if the halides of the heavier alkalis be excluded; 85 per cent of the remaining observations deviate from a single smooth curve by an amount which is hardly greater than the experimental error. Hence this curve may be used to determine the order of magnitude, at least, of the pressure-coefficient of compressibility, if the mean com- pressibility over a given pressure-range is known. 534 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 21 MINERALOGY .—Almandite-spessartite garnet from Gwynns Falls, Baltvmore.1 EARL V. SHANNON and Fornst A. GONYER. Pegmatite in the gneiss which is quarried at Gwynns Falls, Baltimore, bears garnet as scattered and fairly large crystals in a fairly coarse pegmatite, and as small crystals distributed in parallel lines in finer- grained pegmatite. The garnet of the latter rock, which presents a marked similarity to the banded garnetiferous rock in some of the gem-bearing pegmatites of the Southern California tourmaline field, was analyzed in the laboratory of the National Museum and the results are presented herewith. The specimen from which the analyzed material came consists principally of quartz and feldspar in granular gneissic bands with some schistose mica partings. The feldspar is principally white to pale buff orthoclase and forms grains up to 1 centimeter across. The garnet is aggregated into granular, parallel and somewhat wavy bands from 1 to 3 millimeters wide which follow the general parallel structure of the rock. These bands consist of imperfectly euhedral crystals averaging 0.5 millimeter but reaching an extreme size of 2.0 millimeters and isolated in quartz and feldspar. ‘The color ranges, according to size, from pale brownish pink to dark brownish red. Garnet-rich pieces were crushed and screened between 40 and 100 mesh sieves, and the minerals separated with methylene iodide heavy solution. The cleaned sample consisted principally of euhedral garnet crystals formed by an equal development of the faces of the trapezo- hedron and the rhombic dedocahedron. ‘The final sample showed only a very small number of extraneous grains, principally of adhering quartz, and when ground for analysis was homogeneously isotropic. The analysis gave the following results: ANALYSIS AND RATIOS OF GARNET FROM BALTIMORE (Forest A. Gonyer, analyst) Constituent Per cent Ratios SO en ace 599). godt) “god 1)" oR Sc se eee aes INCOR ge ed tie ata 2189. 208)) eis Ce. eh ka Oia eae) 1008) 218) ele ee MEO) Ape eas (A ioe Ad | 91.58... | . iN Oak CR Ea 148) 6 Oe NEO met TG | EDT -596.... 109 x3 Ses GAO) es he 2.34 042] 100.20 1 Published by permission of the Acting Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. Received November 17. 1927. DEC. 19, 1927 SHANNON AND GONYER: ALMANDITE-SPESSARTITE GARNET 930 It will be seen from the analysis that the garnet is a member of the almandite-spessartite series and contains the ferrous iron molecule a little in excess of the manganese molecule. Most all garnets from granitic pegmatites belong to this series. When the bases are com- bined in constituent molecules, the following mineralogical composi- tion is derived from the analysis: Molecule Formula Ratio Per cent PMUPRIAINCHIGE oat ete oe ees en 3FeO- Al,O3-38S102........ POO eres 49.87 SD /LPESSHITE TH (aN: eee SU en 3MnO- Al,03-38Si02........ KOS ae waseioe 40.17 _A TENS PRG IGS eM pee Ae me 3CaQO: Fe203-38102........ s009)s a tea es 4.58 EOSSUMATIUC hy yn loses te ee eee SCO AlOz-ao1Os oe) fe. JOOS erste 2.26 POART ID. 5 cect ee on Aer aa me 38M gO- AloO3-35102........ OOF eras 1.62 eMummaima (EXCESS)... .. 2. sce ac ee he US Ose espace SOMO ee rare eis 1.82 100.32: The calculated index of refraction of a garnet of the above composi- tion, excluding the excess alumina and using Ford’s data for the end members, is 1.816 while the index of refraction of the analyzed powder was found to be 1.808. The ratios of the first table show that the silica almost exactly balances the bivalent bases whereas the trivalent bases are a little too high to conform exactly with the garnet formula and show an excess of 1.82 per cent of alumina in the second table. Many analyses of manganese-bearing garnets present a deficiency of trivalent bases, and to conform to the general garnet formula 3R”’O-R’.03-3S8i02 it is necessary to assume some of the manganese to be present in the trivalent state. As shown in a previous communication,? the defi- ciency may at times be due to analytical error. In the present analy- sis the basic acetate method for separation of manganese from iron and alumina was not used, the iron and alumina being precipitated only by ammonia. The results showed trivalent bases high instead. of low, as is usual when the acetate method is employed. The whole analysis was then repeated and the results checked with the greatest. eare. As manganese is the most troublesome element in such an analysis, the additional amount of manganese in the weighed iron and alumina was determined. ‘The precipitate obtained from the final ammonia precipitation was ignited, weighed, fused with potassium. bisulphate, and obtained in sulphate solution in the usual manner. The solution was then made up to a volume of 250 cubic centimeters. 2HarL V. SHANNON, ‘“‘Blythite’’ and the manganese garnet from Amelia, Virginia. Journ. Wash. Acad. Sci. 17: 444-453. 1927. 536 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 21 in a calibrated flask. One fifth (50 cubic centimeters) of the solu- tion was withdrawn with a pipette and the manganese in it deter- mined colorimetrically. The balance of the solution was reduced, titrated for iron, and tested for titanium as usual. Minor amounts of manganese contaminating the lime and magnesia precipitates were likewise colorimetrically estimated and appropriate corrections made. The results were highly satisfactory and it has been concluded to avoid the use of the basic acetate method in future analyses. MINERALOGY.—Natrojarosite from Kingman, Arizona. Ear. V. SHANNON and Forrmst A. GONYER. Since the discovery that jarosite or members of the jarosite group of minerals are unusually common in the oxidized portions of ore deposits, especially in desert regions or areas of more or less arid climate, the interest in this group has increased among geologists and practical mining men as well as among mineralogists. Follow- ing the description of the original potash jarosite there were found, almost simultaneously, other analogues of the compound in which soda and lead were essential bases. ‘The lead compound, plumbo- jarosite, has in numerous places been worked as an ore of lead, and a variety occurring in small amount at the Boss mine, Nevada, proved to contain relatively very large amounts of platinum and palladium. In addition to these most interesting minerals, analogues of jarosite in which the potash is replaced by silver oxide and ammonium oxide have recently been found in Utah. In appearance these jarosites are so similar that they cannot be distinguished from each other with- out chemical tests. Although distinct and measurable crystals have been found, the minerals usually vary from yellow to brown in color, are more or less earthy in texture, and have in many cases been mistaken for earthy limonite. The finer-grained examples are dull in luster, but the coarser varieties are usually silky or satiny in lustre. A large lot of specimens of a jarosite was received at the National Museum from Mr. W. F. Smith, of Kingman, Arizona. The locality is given as the Georgia Sunset mining claim, ? mile east of MceConnico, a station on the Santa Fe Railroad in Mohave County, 4 miles south of Kingman. Since the material was pure and in good specimens 1 Published by permission of the Acting Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. Received November 17, 1927. DEC. 19, 1927 SHANNON AND GONYER: NATROJAROSITE FROM ARIZONA 537 which it was desirable to preserve in the collections, it was analyzed. A representative specimen of the purer material was ground, and when examined under the microscope was found of satisfactory quality. The analysis gave the following results: ANALYSIS AND RATIOS OF NATROJAROSITE Constituent Per cent Ratio Mrrsmlibless <0 2D) ee ee Be Oe at oe: 069 Mare ee ee at: Di OGhe aki 024) is Oe 2) Sana none APOE ge ye. ars as bs trace (NEL OS Oe none er es, = Yo iee i! Kaan oe i 97 Ui Ay igre A eer ey orcs 1.05 X 4 TE Do SO eee LO (O82 IS HO ak SOMERS. 99 X 6 100.25 The ratios give the formula for natrojarosite, (Na,K).O-3Fe.0;- 480;-6H.O. The material is free from more than traces of silver and lead although a larger sample might have shown precious metals upon assay. The material is compact to earthy and golden-brown to yellow. The more friable and lustreless portions greatly resemble common yellow ocher. Other specimens consist of a greatly altered, kaolinized or sericitized, and bleached igneous rock heavily impregnated with pyrite. Others are similarly altered rock from which the pyrite has decomposed, leaving jarosite obviously derived by oxidation from the pyrite. Under the microscope the mineral is clean, transparent, greenish- yellow, and nonpleochroic with high birefringence. The powder is made up of tabular crystal grains, many of which show hexagonal or rhombohedral boundaries. Many of the crystals lie on their basal plane and since these are dark in all positions between crossed nicols the mineral is uniaxial, or nearly so, and is negative. The indices of refraction measured are: w-= 1.829, « = 1.760 + 0.002. The differences in optical properties between the several members of the group are not such that they can be differentiated micro- scopically. 038 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 21 PETROLOGY.—Rocks. of the Galdpagos Islands.1 H. 8. Wasu- IncToN and Mary G. Kryss, Geophysical Laboratory, Carnegie Institution of Washington. In 1923 the Harrison Williams expedition of the New York Zoo- _ logical Society visited the Galdépagos Islands, where extensive zoolog- ical collections were made.? Dr. Beebe, Director of Scientific Work, was so good as to collect some of the rocks, in spite of the very limited time at the disposal of the expedition. For this and for his kind permission to describe some of the specimens we would express our hearty thanks. This small group of wholly volcanic islands, lying on the equator about 500 miles west of Ecuador, was first made known to science by Charles Darwin, who visited them in 1835 during the famous cruise of the Beagle and described them in a classic chapter.’ Since then several other expeditions have visited the group, as noted by Beebe in his book cited above. Most of these expeditions were for zoological and botanical purposes and, apart from Darwin’s masterly observations, the literature on the petrography of the islands is very scanty. Of the papers that deal especially with the rocks of the islands there appear to be but two that need to be mentioned here and that are not included in Beebe’s bibliography. One is a paper by Gooch! describing a set of specimens given him as a student by Tschermak; the other is a brief report by Merrill’ on a small collec- tion of rocks made during the Albatross expedition in 1891. Neither Zirkel nor Rosenbusch do more than make very brief mention of the ‘““palagonite”’ tuff. Darwin estimated the number of craters at about 2,000, and several of them have been in eruption during the last hundred years or so.6 The lavas, in general, have been considered to be basaltic, with the peculiar yellow tuff described by Darwin, but the papers by Gooch and by Merrill give indication that there may be considerable variety, as will be noted later. The specimens especially studied by us were collected by Beebe on Eden, an islet off the northwest coast 1 Received November 19, 1927. 2 WILLIAM BEEBE, Galapagos: World’s End. New York, 1924. 3 Darwin, Geological Observations, 3rd. ed., London, pp. 110-131, 1891. 4 Frank A. Goocn, Tsch. Min. Mitth. 6: 133. 1876. > Merriuu, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. 16: 235. 1893. 6 See Sapper, Katalog der geschichtlichen Vulkanausbriiche, p. 95,1917. Also BEEBE, op. cit., pp. 411, 412. (ca. 1912, 1897). These two eruptions are not mentioned by Sapper. DEC. 19, 1927 WASHINGTON AND KEYES: ROCKS OF GALAPAGOS ISLANDS 599 of Indefatigable. They consist of basalt and of the peculiar yellow tuff; the other specimens were so altered as scarcely to repay study. Basalt.—The rock is dense, non-scoriaceous, and very fine-grained, but not aphanitic, small glistening crystals of feldspar being visible through the mass. The color is very dark brownish gray—almost black. A few very small phenocrysts of feldspar are seen here and TABLE 1.—Basauts or GALAPAGOS AND OF Hawall (1) (2) (3) Lot. oy ae Se Sena Re See ONT Pei iE eee Rien ee Tego ea 48.24 48.04 48 42 ee NER ew ee ie: Phos Magiierl ds ug da ape fe S2 15.35 13.97 Bi atte a Rr SL a ae rn aa eae meaner Or ene 0.78 De ANG, SN nner Re Re res ce eS rr, a esr Stee ay 9.84 Os OPT Oe so OR ee SG Eee ai ied ee Me eo ae 5.84 Na Ere 4.61 ELL. 12 3 TE ERE Bt are ee Teen ae Oates eas en 8 9.84 10213 8.86 ae es sel dae cis SN ak aes Cha eee 3.63 3.26 DeOU UR ee ea altoid nae Picea viele ats 0.64 0.79 1.29 Ei = lan c ~ Sa I ae eS ea et ra me Ane 0.72 0.27 0.84 Sie ee Ne ee a aely ca ge se elas 0.11 0.04 0.42: Cb a. | GLE SRO SIS a cr a es or 3.88 Bula BAD NP tk pe Na Se 6 el ete a git iw 0.16 0.33 0.91 eto elle Se RR As I dene ia eng 9 en 0.20 0.10 Ola 99.7 100.62 99.78 Norms OS so Sl NEARS gon eels Pareto ARR, AL —— - 0.84 mPa eee, eA Rie Tk. ok cde Wiacan ot © 3.89 4.45 Che Ped oa SS ee ene ns Me er 29.87 DATES PAGEL RRP ry A SRR as ps RS oils wes 8, 25.02 24.74 19.46 VE pee he ERE RP Tae aa a oars ES MR 0.28 ——~ —— RU ee fee AR ate h ain We. cee Pe hia cag Sarina? Semele 18.67 18.65 15.49 pare Bees irs See Rees . hie, VE um Gree. —- 8.91 12.88. PRI See FO ee ance tas hey Beta 11.98 0.76 —_——. OLE Lo Wiens I i STP oR: ere Eeeiees eee Seen Re aS. A iis 8.35 6.03: ve se cas ik Gee RR aT ie Benes TPS, Fe A ads 7.45 5.93 6.23 B05 SSS Ul aE a CIS IERA ont? Gb age ey iar: St levee or a 0.34 0.67 2202 (1) Andesine basalt, Eden Islet, GalApagos Islands. Keyes analyst. (2) Andesine basalt, Hualalai, Hawaii. Washington analyst. Am. Journ. Sci. 6: 104. 1923. (3) Andesine basalt, Mauna Kea, Hawaii. Washington analyst. Am. Journ. Sci. 5: 493. 1923. there. In thin section, the texture is seen to be ophitic, the rock being made up of tables of andesine (about Ab;An,), with interstitial, anhe- dral, pale brown, non-pleochroic augite, and very few rather larger rounded olivines. There is no magnetite, but considerable darkish brown glass in interstitial patches. A narrow rim of the glass sur- rounds the olivines. . 040 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 21 The chemical composition of this basalt is shown in No. 1 of Table 1. The analysis is that of a normal basalt, which may be matched by several of the basalts of Hawaii, as shown in Nos. 2 and 3 of Table 1. The only features worthy of special mention are the great prepon- derance of FeO over Fe: O3, and the high Na.O and TiO.. Tuff—Darwin devotes considerable space to the description and discussion of the origin of ‘‘a singular kind of tuff,’ which forms craters on Chatham and James Islands. ‘This is the so-called ‘“‘palag- onitic’’ tuff of Bunsen, Zirkel, and Rosenbusch. All the specimens examined by us came from the small islet of Eden. This tuff is very dense and compact, but most specimens can be readily scratched with a knife, having a hardness of 3 to 4. The color is a rather light, yellowish brown and the luster is peculiar—greasy or, as Darwin puts it, resinous. Fragments are slightly translucent on thin edges. The mass contains very small (1 to 2 mm.) grains of black augite and also fragments of basaltic lava, some of them scorlaceous. | The making of coherent thin sections of this tuff, using the most compact specimen, proved amatter of much difficulty, as the section broke up and spread into a number of detached pieces. ‘The greater part of the material is composed of small angular fragments of clear bright yellow glass, slightly mottled, the average index of refraction being 1.585, as kindly determined by Dr. Merwin. This glass con- tains a few small inclusions, some of them of augite and some inde- terminable, with a few small ellipsoidal vacuoles. These glass frag- ments are separated by a white doubly refracting mineral of very low refractive index, which appears to be zeolitic. The presence of this accounts for the peculiar action of the section. A few grains of olivine and one or two of augite are seen. | An analysis of a compact specimen, free from basalt fragments and from veinlets of calcite, is giver in No. 1 of Table 2, with one of a similar tuff made by Bunsen in 1851, and several analyses of similar rocks. In No. 1 the low 810., MgO, and KO are noteworthy, and it is very evident that the iron is almost wholly in the ferric state. The amount of H,O (both + and —) is remarkably high, the two together making up almost 21 per cent of the rock. Unquestionably much of this belongs to the rather abundant zeolitic material, but some of it is also probably contained in the glass. The complete absence of CO, in such a hydrated tuff is noteworthy. ‘The analysis by Bunsen, one of three made some 75 years ago, is of only historic DEC. 19, 1927 WASHINGTON AND KEYES: ROCKS OF GALAPAGOS ISLANDS O41] interest, but in its general outlines it greatly resembles the recent one and is evidence of Bunsen’s accurate work, given the facilities and methods of the time. As compared with analyses of similar rocks composed mainly of yellow glass, some analyses of which are given in the table, the Eden tuff is much less alkalic than the yellow tuff of San Felix (No. 3), which is derived from a nephelite basanite, and differs in other respects, especially in Al,O; and MgO. If it is assumed that there TABLE 2.—ANALYSES OF PALAGONITIC TUFFS (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) rine mee AS! Roe yi Sielg thas 38.07 36.35 48 .90 47.75 46.58 Ji) 505 ee a 14. 64 13.03 8.14 13.80 18.34 18.61 2) ew ite 7.93 9.99 5.57 er (fi 9.94 7.43 LEEIO) sie eee a 0.87 —— SEU 6.84 1.09 3.1 oO a 3.84 6.58 9.05 8.85 4.78 1293 CaO. > a an eee 8.97 7.54 7.44 enc tele 8.14 MRNA ee ccc. Rw «6 2.67 0.70 4.70 Spoz 3.34 3.85 il Ce Ae 0.15 0.94 Sigs 0.96 0.19 OE 1B AO = St 2 12.34 4.01 1.65 ——. ——- OE Rite i asa 8 | eas 8.35 a lay eens Oise ee none me 4.00 trace —— —— Ook cr rr 2.00 n.d. 4.76 Our one, SLOW TE Oe, on Ae 0.01 n.d. 0.83 0.04 0.01 —— beret ose Ok O14 n.d. meds trace 0.19 — 100.61 100 .00 99 95 100.11 100.00 100 .00 (1) Palagonitic tuff; Eden Islet, GalApagos Islands. Keyes analyst. (2) Palagonite, Gaidpagos Islands. Bunsen analyst. Ann. Chem. Pharm. 83: 221. 1851. (Calculated to 100). (3) Basanite tuff, Cerro Amarillo, San Felix Island. Washington analyst. Bull. Geol. Soc. Amer. 35: 381. 1924. , (4) Palagonite (“‘Basalt glass’’), Palagonia, Sicily. Ponte analyst. Atti Accad. Gioenia (5) 3 (10): 7. 1910. (5) Analysis No. 1 calculated to 100.00, as free from H,0. (6) Yellow basalt tuff, Monte Pozzolana, Linosa Island. Calculated to 100.00, as free from H.O and CO,2. Washington analyst. Journ. Geol. 16: 29. 1908. has been no loss or other considerable change in the bases and if the analysis (No. 1) is calculated to 100 per cent on an H;O-free and CO.-free basis (No. 5), the result differs along much the same lines from the analysis of a palagonite of Sicily (No. 4), this being an al- tered basaltic glass occurring in basaltic tuffs, but peculiar because of its highly sodic character and low water content. On the whole, the Galapagos tuff, calculated to 100 per cent, most resembles the tuffs of the island of Linosa, which are derived from feldspathic basalts. 542 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 21 So, although the evidence may not be conclusive because of the small number of specimens, yet it may be assumed that this peculiar yellow Galapagos tuff, or rather the predominant glass, is derived from basaltic rather than from tephritic lavas. At the same time, these yellow basaltic or tephritic glasses are so peculiar that the term ‘“palagonitic’’ may well be applied to them. The origin of these Galdpagos tuffs was a source of much specula- tion to Darwin, who finally concluded that they were ‘‘produced by the grinding together of fragments of lava within active craters, communicating with the sea.’ The modern methods of study of rocks in thin section, unknown in his day, do not bear this out, but indicate, rather, that these and similar palagonitic rocks are much altered basaltic (or tephritic) glasses. The subject will be taken up again when specimens collected in the Val di Noto, Sicily, are studied. Conclusions.—In so far as the material at our command permits us to judge, it would appear that the lavas of the Galapagos Islands are chiefly andesine (and probably also labradorite) basalts, with their peculiar tuffs, which latter, as stated by Darwin ‘‘present the most striking feature in the geology of this Archipelago.’ At the same time the few brief notes given us by Gooch and Merrill indicate some features of greater complication and of especial interest as bearing on the relations of this group of volcanic islands to others of the Pacific. Both of these authors describe most of their specimens as being ordinary feldspar basalts, and Gooch explicitly states that nephelite was not observed in any of the specimens examined by him. Gooch, however, very briefly notes some pumice’ containing orthoclase, from Indefatigable and Abingdon.* Determinations by Gooch on the Indefatigable pumice showed 61.48 per cent of Si0,_ and 12.45 per cent of loss on ignition. The rock is, therefore, ob- viously trachytic’ or rhyolitic. Merrill also briefly describes an ‘‘andesite (?)’? from Cocos Island, of which a ‘‘rough analysis” yielded the following results: SiO., 56.50; Al.Os, Fe.O3, 28.20; CaO, 2.83; MgO, 0.98; KsO, 4.25; Na,O,e(by difference) 6.68; Sum, 99.44. ‘The rock contained Cl “derived presumably from ocean spray.” He remarks that ‘‘this indicates that the rock is more nearly related to the andesites than trachytes, though abnormally rich in potash.” In other words, the rock appears to be trachyandesitic. 7 Goocnu, op. cit., p. 137. 8 Darwin states that he could find no pumice or trachyte on any of the islands. a a DEC, 19, 1927 KIRK: PYCINODESMA 543 These two observations, scanty as they are, show clearly that not only are the lavas of the Galdpagos more complicated and varied than has been generally thought, but—and this is a matter of especial importance—that there is much similarity between their lavas and those of most of the Intro-Pacific volcanic islands. Thus, we find such “‘trachyandesites”’ at Hawaii and at other islands, and moreover trachytic lavas occur with basalts at many of them; as on Hawaii, Maui, Molokai, in the Hawaiian Islands; Tutuila in the Samoan group; Tahiti; Juan Fernandez Islands; San Felix; Nukuhiva, Marque- sas; and several others. A “phosphatized trachyte” is known from Clipperton Atoll, many hundred miles north of the Galdpagos.!° This very general occurrence of trachytic and trachyandesitic lavas with dominant basalts is a feature of the petrology of the Pacific of very great importance, and one that appears to be of great bearing on some problems of geophysics. But it cannot be discussed here. It need only be said that thorough study of the lavas of the Gala- pagos Islands is highly desirable. PALEONTOLOGY.—Pycinodesma, new name for Pycnodesma Kirk not Schrammen.! Epwin Kirx, U. 8. Geological Survey. Under the title ‘“‘Pycnodesma, a new molluscan genus from the eilurian of Alaska,’’ (Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 71; Art. 20, No. 2692. 1927) I proposed the generic name Pycnodesma. ‘This name had been used by Schrammen for a Cretaceous sponge, and I therefore propose the name Pycinodesma, with Pycinodesma giganteum Kirk as the genotype, for this group of Silurian pelecypods. 9 The references need not be given here. Some of the observational and analytical data are as yet unpublished. 10 TEALL, Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. 44: 230. 1898. 1 Published by permission of the Director, U. S. Geological Survey. Received November 17, 1927. 544 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 21 ENTOMOLOGY.—New species of American Lepidoptera of the families Lamacodidae and Dalceridae.1 Harrison G. Dyar, U.S. National Museum. (Communicated by Auaust Busckx.) The species here mentioned will be discussed more fully in other places, but it is desirable to validate the names as soon as possible. Family LIMACODIDAE Genus Apopa Haworth Apoda maxima, new species Fore wing ocher-brown to reddish brown, the terminal area slightly paler than the basal one, or not so; a dark, somewhat oblique line across the middle, edged with whitish without. Hind wing a shade lighter than fore wing. Expanse, male, 27 mm., female, 28 mm. Male and female, Type No. 40665, U. 8S. Nat. Mus., Big Bend, Brewster County, Texas, 5000-7000 feet alt. (O. C. Poling, gift of F. Johnson). Genus SIBINE Herrich-Schaffer Section 1. Anellus of male hypopygium with a dorsal chitinous tongue Sibine clarans, new species Fore wing narrow, elongate, rather pointed; dark rufous brown, the veins, especially median and at base, blackish shaded; three white subapical dots, one small subbasal dot. Hind wing rosy whitish, inner area rosy brown. Expanse, male, 38 mm. Anellus with a horn on each side. Two males, Type No. 40666, U. S. Nat. Mus., No. 860, Cornell Uni- versity Coll., Yahuarmayo, Peru, 1200 feet, alt., April, 1912 (Dognin Collec- tion); El Campaniente, Col. Perene, Peru, June 14, 1920 (Cornell Univ. . Exp.). Sibine dorans, new species Like clarans; a little less rufous. Male anellus without horns; spines of penis a wide mass of small ones. Five males, Type No. 40667, U. 8S. Nat. Mus., La Oroya, Rio Inambari, Carabaya, Peru (Dognin Collection). Sibine tontineans, new species Similar to clarans and dorans, anellus without horns, spines of penis in a line, small at base, very large in the middle, small again at tip. Expanse, male 33-35 mm. Two males, Type No. 40668, U. 8S. Nat. Mus., St. Jean du Maroni and Nouveau Chantier, French Guiana (Le Moult, Dognin Collection). Sibine giseldans, new species Like tontineans, but much smaller in size. Expanse, male, 29 mm. Spines of penis a mass of very long slender ones. One male, Type No. 859, Cornell Univ. Coll., below Rio Negro, Amazonas, Brazil, September, 1920 (Cornell Univ. Exp.). 1 Received November 12, 1927. DEC. 19, 1927 DYAR: NEW AMERICAN LEPIDOPTERA 545 Sibine joyceans, new species Fore wing trigonate, rather short, dark, less reddish than in horrida; dots white, the subapical ones consolidated in an oblique line; hind wings rather dark. Expanse, male, 30-33 mm., female, 40-43 mm. Spines of penis numerous terminally, small, the basal ones few and large. Five males, two females, Type No. 40669, U. S. Nat. Mus., Panama (Busck and Zetek). Sibine iolans, new species Dark rufous brown as in pallescens Dogn. (= rufescens Walk.). Male without dots or markings. Hind wing pale rosy brown. Expanse, male 31-85 mm. Male hypopygium as in nitens, the spines of penis more slender and numerous. Three males, Type No. 40670, U. S. Nat. Mus., Paramaribo, Surinam, May, 1904 (W. Schaus); Cayenne, French Guiana, June, 1904 (W. Schaus); French Guiana, 1900 (Pouillon). Sibine norans, new species Dark rufous brown without dots; hind wing dark brown. Male hypo- pygium as in pallescens (= rufescens), but the harpe finger-shaped at tip, oblique on one side. Expanse, male, 30-40 mm., female, 43-45 mm. Eleven males, three females, Type No. 40671, U. 8. Nat. Mus., Sao Paulo, Castro and Santa Catherina, Brazil; Paraguay (Schaus and Dognin Col- lections). Sibine didactica, new species Smaller than norans, similarly marked; two subapical and one subbasal white dots. Male aedoeagus a very narrow tube, much narrower than in nitens, etc. One male, Type No. 40672, U. 8. Nat. Mus., from the British Guiana Museum, presumably collected in that country. Sibine ximenans, new species Dark purple brown like nitens, the dots minute; hind wing very dark. Male hypopygium as in joyceans, the spines of penis numerous throughout, long and about alike. Expanse, male, 32 mm. One male, Type No. 40673, U. S. Nat. Mus., Rio Tocantins, Brazil (Dognin Collection). Another male in the Cornell University Collection is not made an allotype because the number of spines of the penis is much — La Merced, Rio Chamchamayo, Peru, June 3, 1920 (Cornell Univ. Exp.). Sibine violans, new species Rather large, dark shining purple brown; dots pale yellow, large, and tending to confluence.. Hind wing dark red-brown, the scales purplish and raised between the veins. Expanse, male, 33-35 mm., female, 48 mm. Generally similar to bonaerensis Berg, larger and more brilliantly marked. Two males, one female, Type No. 40674, U.S. Nat. Mus., Muzo, Medina, and Pacho, Colombia (A. H. Fassl, Dognin Collection). 546 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 21 Sibine helenans, new species A small species, smooth dark purple brown. Expanse, male, 25-28 mm., female, 40-42 mm. Male hypopygium as in bonaerensis Berg, but the wing-shape different, the present species having pointed fore wings. Three males, Type No. 40675, U. 8. Nat. Mus., Rurrenebaque, Bolivia, October, 1922 (W. M. Mann, Mulford Biological Exp.); Teffé, Amazonas, Brazil, September (A. H. Fassl, Dognin Collection). Also 14 males and three females examined from the Cornell University Collection from various localities on the Amazon and from Corumba, Matto Grosso, Brazil. Sibine priscillans, new species Large, rather hight rufous brown, with red stain subapically and sub- basally; single subapical and subbasal yellowish dots. Hind wing pale ereamy. Expanse, male, 43 mm. Male hypopygium of the type of violans, ximenans, etc. One male, Type No. 40676, U.S. Nat. Mus., Zacualpan, Mexico, Novem- ber, 1914 (R. Muller, Dognin Collection). Sibine laurans, new species Blunt-winged, rather ight purple brown, the fringe dark; a large orange- red shade along inner margin below a darker ray; no subapical marking, no dots. Expanse, male, 28 mm. , Two males, Type No. 40677, U. S. Nat. Mus., Sa Paulo Olivenga, Amazonas, Brazil, November—December (A. H. Fassl, Dognin Collection). Section 2. Male anellus without dorsal chitinized tongue Sibine reletiva, new species As in eatensa Schaus; smaller, the spines of the male penis shorter but large and stout and followed by minute ones. Expanse, male, 30-35 mm., female, 40 mm. Three males, one female, Type No. 40678, U.S. Nat. Mus., San Salvador, Central America (Dognin Collection). | Sibine ophelians, new species As in extensa; blunter winged, somewhat less strongly marked and thinner scaled. Expanse, male, 30-35 mm., female, 46-50 mm. Hypopygium as in reletiva, the spines of penis fine, slender, not followed by minute ones. Twelve males and three females, Type No. 40679, U. S. Nat. Mus., San Salvador, Salvador; Cayuga and Quirigua, Guatemala; Juan Vinas and Sixola River, Costa Rica (Schaus & Barnes); Lino, Panama; Pacho, Colombia (Dognin Collection). Sibine gertrudans, new species Blunt-winged, dark umber brown with little reddish tint; a blackish ray through cell and along submedian; dots obsolete. Hind wing purplish brown. Expanse, male, 30-35 mm. Hypopygium similar to ezxtensa, the spines of the penis smaller. The wing-shape differs. Eight males, Type No. 40680, U. S. Nat. Mus., Cuernavaca, Morelos, Mexico, July, August, November, December, 1906 (W. Schaus); Colima, Colima, Mexico, July, 1924 (R. Miller). DEC. 19, 1927 DYAR: NEW AMERICAN LEPIDOPTERA 547 Sibine quellans, new species Fore wing pointed, dark shining brown with contrasting areas; subbasal and subapical reddish stains, no dots. Hind wing rather dark brown. Expanse, male, 30 mm. One male, Type No. 40681, U. S. Nat. Mus., San Antonio, Colombia, 5800 feet alt., December, 1907 (M. G. Palmer, Dognin Collection). Sibine rollans, new species Blunt- and square-winged; light rosy red-brown; a narrow blackish ray from base below cell, the inner area below it bronzy red. Hind wing rather brightly reddish brown. Expanse, male, 25-27 mm. Eight males, Type No. 40682, U. 8. Nat. Mus., St. Jean and St. Laurent, French Guiana (Le Moult); Yahuarmayo, Peru, April-May, 1912; Codajias, Coary and Teffé, Amazonas, all from the Dognin Collection. Also 9 males in the Cornell University Collection, not mounted, but agreeing superfi- cially, Mackenzie, Demerara River, British Guiana, June 24, 1927; Tuma- tumari, Potaro River, British Guiana, June 27, 1927; Moengo, Cottica River, Surinam, May 23, 1927 (Cornell Univ. Exp.). Sibine francesans, new species Like eucleides Dyar, the wing even broader and squarer; a little less dark brown, the black ray under median vein more distinct. Expanse, male, 36 mm. Two males, Type No. 40683, U. S. Nat. Mus., one without label, the other, Rio Songo, Bolivia (A. H. Fassl, Dognin Collection). Sibine zellans, new species Fore wing narrow, pointed, hind wing trigonate, the outer margin straight; dark purplish brown, no markings, the hind wing almost as dark as the fore. Expanse, male, 37 mm. Hypopygium with the two limbs of the aedoeagus irregular, one shorter than the other, the limbs quadrate, granular. One male, Type No. 40684, U. 8. Nat. Mus., Pard, Brazil (Moss). Sibine berthans, new species Like zellans, blacker, wings rather less pointed, the outer margin of hind wing convex. Female less intensely blackish, the ground brownish in places, a red apical stain, and subapical yellow streak on vein 6; hind wing lighter brown. Expanse, male, 34 mm., female, 54 mm. The spines of the penis are finer and more numerous than in zellans. Male and female, Type No. 40685, U. 8. Nat. Mus., Villa Rica, Paraguay, March, 1926 (F. Schade). Sibine sarans, new species Small, dark, blunt-winged, resembling st?mulea Clem. Hypopygium as in zellans, but the limbs of aedoeagus slender, irregular. Expanse, male, 23 mm. Hypopygium much as in pawper Dyar. One male, Type No. 40686, U. S. Nat. Mus., San Sebastian Retalhuleu, Guatemala (L. Thiel). 048 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 21 Genus Eucutea Hubner Euclea cassida, new species Fore wing won light yellow ground, the scales suberect and thin; blotched with blackish, especially at base, and defining a pale pinkish patch between the subapical silver dots and subbasal strongly waved line; no discal dot visible. Expanse, male, 23-24 mm. Two males, Type No. 40687, U. S. Nat. Mus., Amathura and Caicara, Amazonas, Brazil (Dognin Collection). Genus TaLtima Walker Talima sissypha, new species As in straminea Schaus, but the whole wing darkened with purple-brown; inner and outer margins darker. Expanse, male, 21 mm. One male, Type No. 40688, U. S. Nat. Mus., San Sebastian, Retalhuleu, Guatemala (L. Thiel). Talima varians, new species As in flexilinea Dyar the fore wing light purple brown, darker shaded at base; veins outwardly dark, crossing the slender flexuous outer line; apex broadly dark purple-brown beyond the line; hind wing rather pale stramine- ous, with a purple area across the middle. Expanse, female 23 mm. One cae Type No. 40689, U. S. Nat. Mus., Venezuela (Dognin Col- lection). Talima merilone, new species Like emilia; larger, the fore wing heavily suffused, the veins not lined; a round clouded discal area. Expanse, male, 22-23 mm. Two males, Type No. 40690, U. 8S. Nat. Mus., Colombia: Micay, August, 1896; Pueblo Rico, San Juan Choco, 5200 feet alt., September, 1909 (Dognin Collection). Talima insulla, new species Like sulla Schaus, but the outer dark line absent, replaced By a narrow pale yellow shaded line, which is rather faint in the male, distinct in the female. Expanse, male, 20 mm., female, 26 mm. Two males, one female, Type No. 40691, U. S. Nat. Mus.; Type No. 857, Cornell Univ. Coll., below Codajos, Rio Solimées, Brazil, September » 6, 1920 (Cornell Univ. Exp.). Genus Monoteuca Grote & Robinson. Monoleuca angustilinea, new species Fore wing uniform red-brown; silvery line erect, sulphur-yellow tinted, narrow, slightly oblique, entering cell before origin of vein 2, preceded by faint reddish. Expanse, female, 23 mm. ; One female,-Type No. 40692, U. 8. Nat. Mus., Capron, Florida, March 23 (H. G. Hubbard). Genus SISyROSEA Grote Sisyrosea brusha, new species Fore wing dark purplish brown, sparsely sprinkled with black scales; hind wing distinctly blackish. Expanse, male, 20 mm. DEc. 19, 1927 DYAR: NEW AMERICAN LEPIDOPTERA o49 Two males, Type No. 40693, U. 8. Nat. Mus., Jalapa, Mexico (W. Schaus) Godeberi, Maroni River, French Guiana (Le Moult). Genus NatTApDA Walker Natada styx, new species Like deba; darker brown, the lines obscure, divergent below; hind wing blackish. Expanse, male, 25 mm. One male, Type No. 40694, U. S. Nat. Mus., Yahuarmayo, Peru, April, 1912 (Dognin Collection). Natada ulaula, new species Like michorta; larger, darker, the indicated transverse lines farther apart and less numerous. Expanse, male, 30 mm. One male, Type No. 40695, U. S. Nat. Mus., Medina, Colombia, 500 m. alt. (A. H. Fassl). Genus Peroua Walker Perola prosper, new species Fore wing white, overlaid with olive brown, leaving a broad submarginal white band with rather irregular edges; white mottlings about cell and marginally; a dark dot in base of cell and large discal spot. Hind wing whitish. Expanse, male, 24-25 mm. Three males, Type No. 40696, U. S. Nat. Mus.; Type No. 856, Cornell Univ. Coll., ‘‘Lassance,’’ Minas Geraes, Brazil, November 9, 1919 (Cornell Univ. Exp.). Perola subpunctella, new species Like subpunctata Walk.; smaller. Expanse, male, 20-22 mm. Seven males, Type No. 40697, U. 8. Nat. Mus., Castro, Paranda, Brazil, (EZ. D. Jones); Villa Rica, Paraguay, February 9, 1921 (C. Jorgensen). Genus ALARop1A Moschler Alarodia minuscula, new species White, without markings; fore wing below smoky shaded, darkest along costa. Expanse, male, 11 mm. One male, Type No. 40698, U.S. Nat. Mus., Matanzas, Cuba, November, 1902 (W. Schaus). Genus SEMyrA Walker Semyra erna, new species Markings of eucharista, but darkened, the silvery bar more distinct; hind wing blackish brown. Expanse, male, 17-19 mm. Four males, Type No. 40699, U. S. Nat. Mus., Villa Rica, Paraguay (F. Schade). Semyra lucilla, new species Markings of gladys, the whole wing dark purple-brown, the spots distinct, although not contrasted. Hind wing brownish black. Expanse, male, 25 mm. One male, Type No. 40700, U. 8. Nat. Mus., Venezuela (Dognin Col- lection). 050 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 17, No. 21 Genus IsocHarTEs Dyar Isochaetes ashtakel, new species Fore wing dark purple brown, hind wing bronzy_ black; some rufous patches basally; a black highly angled zig-zag line crossing the: wing centrally, rufous-edged without, and below the median vein forming a deep excavation; a dark outer line excurved over cell inclosing a curved pale space at end of cell, which is ovate in its upper half, obscured except for two whitish patches below. Expanse, male, 18 mm., female, 26 mm. Male and female, Type No. 40701, U.S. Nat. Mus.; Type No. 855, Cornell Univ. Coll., male, Molinas, Paraguay, October, 1925 (F. Schade), female, Ni Essequibo River, British Guiana, di une, 1927 (Cornell Univ. Exp Genus VENADICODIA Dyar Venadicodia ruthaea, new species Fore wing brownish; basal space dark brown; a darker oblique bounding line from costa before middle to inner margin beyond middle; a little whitish in its irregular outer edge; outer area light brown; a small brown patch at apex, continued narrowly along termen. Hind wing blackish brown. Expanse, male, 18 mm. One male, Type No. 40702, U. 8. Nat. Mus., without locality (Schaus Collection). Family DALCERIDAE Genus Daucrra Herrich-Schiffer Dalcera consanguinea, new species Fore wing pale purple, shading to blackish outwardly; costal margin, inner and outer margins narrowly, pale yellow. Hind wing orange yellow with a narrow outer black border, in width less than one-fourth the length of the wing. Expanse, male, 39- 45 mm. Two males, Type No. 40713, U. 8S. Nat. Mus., Rio Tapajoz, Amazonas, Brazil; Porto Velho, Rio Madeira, Brazil (Dognin Collection). Perhaps not distinct from Dalcera semirufa Druce, which I know only by description. Genus AcrRAGA Walker Acraga perbrunnea, new species Dark purple, uniform, the hind wings apparently of the same color, though badly denuded in the specimen. Expanse, male, 25 mm. One male, Type No. 40714, U. 8S. Nat. Mus., Oxapampa, Peru, 2000 m. alt. (Dognin Collection). Genus ANACRAGA Dyar - Anacraga citrinopsis, new species Color of citrina Schaus, but considerably larger. Expanse, male, 25 mm. One male, Type No. 40715, U. S. Nat. Mus., Callao, Peru (Mrs. M. J. Pusey). mee. 19, 1927 DYAR: NEW AMERICAN LEPIDOPTERA 551 Anacraga ingenescens, new species Fore wing dull golden yellow, color of ria Dyar (luteola Hopp); hind wing pale yellow, more golden on the margin. Expanse, female, 32 mm. One female, Type No. 40716, U.S. Nat. Mus., Merida, Venezuela (Dognin Collection). Anacraga sororcula, new species Like sofia Dyar, smaller, most of the wing markings except the discal dot faint and obsolescent. Expanse, male, 12 mm., female, 16-17 mm. Four males, two females, Type No. 40717, U. S. Nat. Mus., Cayuga, Guatemala, May, September, October (Schaus & Barnes); Misantla, Mexico, September, 1910 (R. Miller). Anacraga phasma, new species White faint yellowish clouded markings on lower half of wing; no discal dot. Expanse, female, 17 mm. One female, Type No. 40718, U..S. Nat. Mus., Venadio, Sinaloa, Mexico (A. Kusche). Genus Protacraca Hopp Protacraga nigerella Dognin Dognin’s Dalcera nigerella is apparently the male of Hopp’s Protacraga micans. Genus Minonoa Dyar Contains the following species: Minonoa perbella Schaus (genotype) Minonoa variegata Jones (Dalcera variegata Jones) I have not examined specimens of this species, but feel sure from the wing shape and pattern of coloration that it will find place in this genus. Minonoa elvira Dognin (Acraga elvira Dognin) Dognin’s types are before me. The disparity in the sexes in color and even pattern of markings is remarkable. SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS The annual series of lectures representative of the work of the Carnegie Institution of Washington was given in November and December, and included the following: November 15, Oscar Rippux, Internal secretions in evolution and reproduction; November 22, J. P. Aut, Purpose and progress of ocean surveys; November 29, Reminaton Keuuoce, History of whales— their adaptation to life in the sea; November 30, 8S. G. Moruey, Hxcavations at Chichen Itza, Yucatan, Mexico, and at Uaxactun, Peten, Guatemala, in 1927 (presented at the Bureau of American Republics); December 6, WaLTER 8. ApAMs, The interior of a star and how it maintains its life. The annual reception and exhibit of apparatus and methods was held on Decem- ber 9. @Obituary Mr. FRANK SPRINGER, a member of the AcaprEmMy, died September 22, 1927, at the age of seventy-nine. Mr. Springer was born in Iowa and re- ceived his earlier education in that state. As a young man he moved to New Mexico and soon became prominent as a lawyer, a successful business man, and a participant in public affairs. An interest in the study of the fossil crinoids aroused in his younger days in lowa, however, remained with him to the end of his career and resulted in extensive collections and in descriptive monographs that rank among the major contributions to Ameri- can paleontology. Mr. Springer’s magnificent collection and his library of erinoid literature have been housed for a number of years in the U.S. Na- tional Museum and were given by him to the Museum. Professor Mitton WHITNEY, a member of the AcApEMy and for more than thirty years Chief of the Bureau of Soils, Department of Agriculture, died November 11, 1927, in his 67th year. He was born in Baltimore, Maryland, and was educated in the schools of that city and at Johns Hopkins University. Before taking charge of the Bureau of Soils he was attached to Agricultural Experiment Stations in Connecticut, North Carolina, South Carolina, and Maryland, and was Professor of Agriculture at the University of South Carolina. His numerous publications deal with soil Payal and other problems connected with soils. INDEX TO VOLUME 17 A { denotes the abstract of a paper before the Academy or an affiliated Society. published under the head Scientific Notes and News. A § indicates an item PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES Biological Society of Washington. Entomological Society of Washington. Geological Society of Washington. Philosophical Society of Washington. Proceedings: 240, 346. Proceedings: 172, 402, 431, 454. Proceedings: 23, 118, 200, 231, 270, 320. Proceedings: 20, 73, 171, 269, 319, 344, 399, 501. Washington Academy of Sciences. Proceedings: 96. AUTHOR INDEX Apsot, C. G. {fObservatory, new, in Southwest Africa. 20. Apams, L.H. Change of compressibility with pressure, note on. 529. —— {Interior of the earth, what we know about it. 171. Apams, Oscar 8S. {Triangulation net, readjustment of the western. 502. AtpEN, W. G. {Gros Ventre landslide of June 1925. 123. AupricH, J. M. Cordyligaster and Eu- cordyligaster, Dexiid genera, notes on. 84. —— j{Diptera, collecting in Guatemala. 180. —— jSay, Thomas, naturalist. 350. — jTaxonomy, limitations of. 403. AmaraL, A. po. {Snakes, venoms and antivenins. 352. ASCHEMEIER, C. R. j{Gorillas in French Congo. 241. Back, E. A. tAnthrenus seminiveus, note on. 178. BaILEy, VERNON. tMouse plagues. Baker, A. C. {Citrus California. 481. BassutER, R. 8S. Sponge fauna, new early Ordovician. 390. Bates, FREDERICK. 348. white fly in tQuartz, 573-degree inversion of. 345. Bett, W. B. {Biological relationships. 351. Berry, Epwarp W. Cycads in Shina- rump conglomerate of Utah. 303. BLAKE, S.F. Asteraceae, new, from Costa Rica. 57: — Inabum, new South American species of. 288. — {Pursh, Frederick, early American botanist. 351. Bovine, A. G. jfEumolpinae, larva of. 182. —— 7Flea beetle, Oedionychis gibbitarsa, larva, of. 176. Bowen, N. L. Analcite-rich rock from Deccan trap of India. 57. Bowie, Witui1am. Isostasy in geophysics and geology. 101. BrapLEy, W. H. {Tertiary and Recent fresh water algae reefs. 232. Bretz, J. HARLAN. jfChanneled scabland and the Spokane flood. 200. BROADBENT, B. M. jAzalea leaf miner, habits and development of. 175. BROMBACHER, W.G. jBarometric method of measuring aircraft altitudes. 75. Bryan, Kirx. 7Palouse soil of Columbia Plateau, Washington. 120. Carrns, J. E. I. Influence of low-resis- tivity layer subsoil on forward incli- nation of radio waves. 264. CampseLL, M.R. 7;Tidal streams, mean- ing of cut-off meanders in. 125. CuasE, AGNES. Grasses, new, from His- paniola. 72. — Grasses, new, from Panama. 142. CHRISTENSEN, _ CARL. Pteridophytes from Kansu, China. 497. 503 554 Curistin, J. R. Rhigonema, intestinal nemas of millipeds. 17. Cops, N. A. &higonema, nemas of millipeds. 17. CoiuiER, A. J. {Madison limestone and Ellis formation in Montana, uncon- formity between. 130. Couuins, Henry B., Jr. Potsherds from Choctaw village sites in Mississippi. 259. Coox, O. F. Ivory palms from Colombia, Ecuador and Peru, new. 218. Coutter, Joun M. Myrrhidendron, re- vision of. 213. CusHMAN, JosEPH A. Foraminifera in the collection of Ehrenberg. 487. intestinal —— Intuonella and Coskinolina in America. 198. Day, A. L. tEarth movements in Cali- fornia. 96. Disney, L. P. Current harmonic con- stants for San Bernardino Strait, Pel 3325: Dovz, W. E. 454. DunsBar, P. B. {Arsenical spray residue. 404. Dyar, Harrison G. Lepidoptera of families Limacodidae and Dalceridae, new American species of. 544. {Creeping eruption, the. East, C. 8S. Six-lined race-runner in District of Columbia. 399. EVERMANN, B.W. {Conservation of fish- eries of the Pacific. 242. Ewine, H. E. {fChiggers, control of. 182. — Mallophaga, new genus and species of. 86. —— Menoponidae and _ Philopteridae, keys to related genera of. 91. Freracuson, H.G. tRegiona! relations of Nevada ore deposits. 121. GARDNER, JuLIA. Mollusks, new, from Eocene of Texas. 362. — Recent collection of late Pliocene invertebrates from headwaters of the Amazon. 505. Gissps, H. D. Diazo sulfonates. 433. GILMORE, CHARLES W. {Fossil footprints in Grand Canyon. 272. Girty, Grorce H. Astartella Hall, ge- neric characters of. 417. AUTHOR INDEX GoupMAN, E. A. {Migratory waterfowl in Mexico, conditions affecting. 350. GoNYER, Forrest A. Almandite-spessar- tite garnet from Gwynns Falls, Balti- more. 0534. — Natrojarosite from Kingman, Arizona. 586. GREENE, C. T. {Fruit flies, collecting, in Panama. 180. Hay, Ouiver P. Hquus laurentius Hay, type skull of. 5. Pleistocene geology and paleontol- ogy in Florida, recent reports on. 277. Hecx, N. H. fEarthquake problem, in- ternational attack on. 502. +Submarine features in north Pacific Ocean, unusual. 127. +Waterspout formation, 319. Hess, F. L. j{Cesium, source of. 124. —— Phosphate deposits, Florida. 321. Heryi, Paut R. {Constant of gravitation. 270. — j{Newton, contribution of, to me- chanics and astronomy. 400. Hitcucocx, A.S. fCuba, recent botanical trip to. 350. — Grasses from South America, new. 215. — Ortachne breviseta, new grass from Chile. 141. —— Psammochloa mongolica, new grass from Mongolia. 140. Hosss, W.H. {Greenland expedition of the University of Michigan. 400. Horrman, W. A. tHaitian Anophelines. 175. —_—— unusual. HorFMBISsTER, J. E. tSediments from Pacific Islands, unusual types of. 275. Hoots, H. W. {Geologic features of southern end of San Joaquin Valley, California. 123. Howe tt, A. Brazier. Chinese squirrels, new. 80. Humeureys, W.J. t{Tornado, the. 320. Jaacpr, T. A. Engulfment in volcanism. 23. JOHNSON, Duncan S. fBlue Mountains of Jamaica and their vegetation. 347. AUTHOR INDEX Jonas, Anna I. {Ordovician shale and associated lava in southeastern Penn- sylvania. 240. KELLOGG, VERNON L. {Dr. F. H. Snow, veteran entomologist. 174. Keyes, Mary G. Rocks of Galapagos Islands. 588. iorrie, ELiswortH P. Cordia and Tournefortia, new species of, from South America. 327. —— Passionflowers from South America and Mexico, new. 423. Kirk, Epwin. Pycinodesma, new name for Pcynodesma Kirk not Schrammen. 548. Lapv, H. 8. {Sediments from Pacific Islands, unusual types of. 275. LAMBERT, WALTER D. Variation of lati- tude and motion of the moon. 133. Larrimer, W. H. {Control campaign against European corn borer. 481. Lracu, G. C. {Trout propagation by Bureau of Fisheries. 2438. Lronarp, E. C. Hispaniola, new plants from. 665. —— Mimosaceae from Hispaniola. 254. — fuellia tuberosa and its allies. 509. Lincoitn, F. C. {Flight line of ducks. 353. Lovueuuin, G. F. Ore at deep levels in Cripple Creek District, Colorado. 321. McLaueuuin, Donatp H. {Geology and physiography of the Andes in Central Peru. 320. MANSFIELD, G. R. {Geology of south- eastern Idaho, summary of. 129. Marner, H. A. Tide at Tahiti, the. 157. Mason, P. W. {Specialization of aphids from general to monoxenous feeders. 455. Martuer, Kirtury F. {Stratigraphy of lake Ainslie Region, Nova Scotia. o22. - Matrues, F. E. flIce, cellular structure of. 126. {Influence of secondary faults on development of Grand Canyon topog- raphy. 2338. Meccers, W. F. Arc spectrum of lan- thanum, regularities in. 25. 500 MeERRIAM, JOHN C. {Origin and evolution of man. 97. Meyers, C.H. tVapor pressure of liquid carbon dioxide. 501. Miser, Hueu D. {Erosion in San Juan Canyon, Utah. 98. —— jShapes of stream pebbles in San Juan County, Utah. 270. MITCHELL, GEORGE T. +Tea and Cassina (Ilex vomitoria). 242. Mouter,F.L. fSpectra excited by atomic hydrogen. 75. Mo.uuer, J.R. tAnimal diseases (insects responsible for.) 99. —— 7Foreign insects. undesirable. 99. Moore, Raymonp C. {Problems in the history of Grand Canyon region. 272. Nouan, T. B. fPotash brines under- lying Great Salt Lake Desert, Utah. 274. Noutan, W. J. {Sex forms of honeybees. bing Nuttine, P. G. Mechanical properties of moist granular solids. 185. PatmeER, T.S. fBird study in suburbs of large cities. 354. ParRKER, J. B. {Vespula diabolica in Brookland, D. C. 181. PuHELps, Francis P. Quartz, 573-degree inversion of. 345. Piper, ARTHUR M. {Metalliferous re- sources of Silver City, Idaho. 237. Pirtipr, H. Convolvulaceae from Vene- zuela, new. 284. Porter, B. A. fArsenical spray residue. 404. QUAINTANCE, A. L. due. 404. RAPPLEYE, Howarp S. f‘‘Fool proof” checks on computations. 501. RepFievpD, A. H. fPetroliferous provinces of United States. 235. REESIDE, JOHN B., JR. Acanthoceras rhotomagense fauna in the Cretaceous of the Western interior. 453. — Unionid pelecypods, two new, from | Upper Triassic. 476. REEVES, Frank. ftLandslide origin of thrust faults around Bearpaw Moun- tains. 127. {Thrust faulting adjacent to High- wood Mountains, Montana. 232. Arsenical spray resi- 506 RessmrR, C. E. Cambrian in the Rocky Mountains, the. 130. RIcHARDSON, CHaRiLEs H. spray residue. 405. Ricuarpson, G. B. Upper Cretaceous section in Colob Plateau, Utah. 464. Rouwer, 8S. A. Scolid wasps from tropi- +Arsenical cal America. 150. Ross, J. N. {Cacti, distribution of. 349. — Hydrocotyle, Central American species of. 194. —— Mimosaceae from Hispaniola. 254. —— Myrrhidendron, revision of, 213. Ross, C. P. fPaleozoic stratigraphy of Idaho. 125. Rounpy, P. V. {Geology and oil develop- ment of Elk Hills, California. 271. Ruspey, Witniam W. {Origin of Mowry shale. 235. — fStream piracy in northeastern Wyoming. 120. SAaNForp, R. I:. tMagnetic analysis, problem of. 269. ScHALLER, W. T. {Mineralogy of the Tintic Standard mine. 121. SCHUREMAN, Pau. {Tides in wells. 345. SHANNON, Hart V. Almandite-spessartite garnet from Gwynns Falls, Baltimore. 534. —— “Blythite”’ and the manganese gar- net from Amelia, Virginia. 444. — Calcite oolites with pentagonal dodecahedral form. 409. —— Natrojarosite from Kingman, Arizona. 536. — Sericite-lazulite pseudomorphs after orthoclase from Bolivia. 388. SHANNON, RayMonp C. Syrphid flies of subfamily Ceriodinae. 38. Simmons, Perez. tHistory of carbon bisulphide as fumigant. 179. — {Resistance of larva of cheese skipper, Piophila casei. 403. Snow, Cuuster. Magneto-electron the- ory of gravitation. 457. Snyper, T. E. {Forest insect pests and their control. 100. {Insects change building code. 178. tQuartz, 573-degree SOsMAN, RoseErtT B. inversion of. 344. STANDLEY, P. C. Alfaroa, new genus of Juglandaceae from Costa Rica. 77. AUTHOR INDEX SranpuHy, P. C. Central America, new plants from, VI. 7; VII. 159; VIII. 245;1X. 309; X. 520. — Hamopea, the genus. 394. — Hydrocotyle, Central American species of. 194. — Rubiaceae collected in Mexico by Tiebmann. 3835. Stearns, H. T. {Volcanoes of Japan in 1924. 118. STEJNEGER, LEONHARD. Tibet, new. 317. STEPHENSON, L. W. Origin of rock wall at Rockwall, Texas. 1. Stose, Grorer W. Ordovician shale and associated lavain Pennsylvania. 240. SverprupP, H. U. fElectromotive forces | possibly produced by the earth’s rotating magnetic field, and diurnal variation of atmospheric potential gradient. 504. Taytor, G. F. tNew type of thermostat. 74. TRASK, PARKER D. {Stratigraphy of Lake Ainslie Region, Nova Scotia. 322. Van Dusen, M. S. {Vapor pressure of liquid carbon dioxide. 501. Van OrstrRAND, C. E. Analytical and graphical representation of arith- metic, geometric, and other means. 307. —— Machine for measuring depths of deep wells. 481. VILLADOLID, Droaracias V. Naobran- chia occidentalis on Pacific Coast of United States. 230. Wait, G.R. tElectromotive forces possi- bly produced by the earth’s rotating magnetic field, and diurnal variation of atmospheric potential gradient. 504. +Magnetic permeability of iron and magnetite in high-frequency alter- nating fields, 22. Wasuineton, H.S. Rocks of Galapagos Frog from Islands. 538. WeiceL, C. A. fHot water bulb steri- lizers. 407. Wetts, Roger C. “Mosandrum,’’ the element. 385. +Sediments, unusual 275. WENTWorRTH, C. K. types of, from Pacific Islands. AUTHOR INDEX Wuerry, Epcar tT. Polygala, free methyl salicylate in some American species of. 191. — Soil reaction preferences of certain plant orders. 148. — Soil reactions of saprophytic or- chids. 35. Wuitr, G. F. {Creeping eruption, the. 454. Wuitr, W. H. j{Arsenical spray residue. 405. Wuitr, Waiter N. {Discharge method of estimating ground water supplies. 238. 507 Wuitr, W. P. {Chalcedony, relation of, to quartz. 344. —— jImprovements stabilizers. 22. —— jMercury contact thermostats, new method of avoiding lag in. 74. Wiuuiams, R. 8. Mosses from Ecuador, collected by J. N. Rose. 491. WooprinG, W.P. +Geologic history and paleobiologic significance of Clemen- tia. 128. WootarD, Epe@ar W. fPlace of Isaac - Newton in history of pure mathe- matics. 399. in galvanometer 558 SUBJECT INDEX SUBJECT INDEX Archeology. Potsherds from Choctaw vil- lage sites in Mississippi. H. B. CoLuINns, JR. 259. Astronomy. tNewton, contributions of, to mechanics and astronomy. P. R. Heyu. 400. Observatory, new, in southwest Africa. C. G. ABBot. 20. Biology. Anophelines, Haitian. W. A. HorrmMan. 175. +Biological relationships. W. B. Butt. 351. {Diseases, animal (due to insect agency). J. R. Motier. 99. jForeign insects, undesirable. J. R. Mo.uier. 99. {Forest insect pests and their control. T. E. Snyper. 100. 7Man, origin and evolution of. J.C. MERRIAM. 97. : tMouse plagues. VERNON BaILny. 348. Snakes, venoms and antivenins. A. DO AMARAL. 302. Botany. Alfaroa, new genus of Jug- landaceae from Costa Rica. P. C. SDTANDLEY.. @(.' Asteraceae, new, from Costa Rica. Die Bh A Ken. 01, +Blue Mountains of Jamaica and their vegetation. D. 8. JoHnson. 347. TCacti, distribution of. J. N. Ross. 349. {+Cassina (Ilex vomitoria) compared with tea. G. T. MitcHELL. 242. Centra] America, new plants from, PC STAN DIR Wel) of.) Vile) 59): VI 245) EXC 309) 2 520) Convolvulaceae from Venezuela, new. Ee Purr ns 284 Cordia and Tournefortia, new species of, from South America. EH. P. Kruuip. 327. tCuba, recent botanical trip to. A. S. Hircucock. 350. Grasses, new, from Hispaniola. AGNES CHASE. 72. Grasses, new, from Panama. AGNES CHASE. 142. Grasses, new, from South America. iA Oe LUE CHCOCK. Vel 4 2a: Hampea, the genus. P. C. Sranpiey. 394. Hispaniola, new species of plants from. E. C. Lronarp. 665. Hydrocotyle, Central American species of. J. N. Ross and P. C. STanpiEy. 194. LIiabum, new South American species. S. F. BLake. 288. §Library, botanical, of John Donnell Smith presented to the Smithsonian Institution. 24. Mimosaceae from Hispaniola. J. N. Ross and E. C. Lronarp. 254. Mosses from Ecuador collected by J. N. Rose. R.S. Wituiams. 491. Myrrhidendron, revision of. J. M. CouttTEerR and J. N. Ross. 213. Orchids, saprophytic, soil reactions of. E. T. WHERRY. 35. Ortachne breviseta, new grass from Chile. A. 8S. Hircucock. 141. Palms, ivory, from Colombia, Ecuador and Peru, new. O. F. Coox. 218. Passionflowers, new, from South America and Mexico. E. P. Kiuurp. 423. Psammochloa Mongolica, new grass from Mongolia. A. 8. Hircucocx. 141. Pteridophytes from Kansu, China. C. CHRISTENSEN. 497. *Pursh, Frederick, early American botanist. S. F. Buaxn. 3651. Rubiaceae collected in Mexico by Lieb- mann. P. C. STANDLEY. 330. Ruellia tuberosa and its allies. E. C. LEONARD. 509. tTea, story of. G.T.MitcHeiyi. 242. Tournefortia, new species of, from South America. E. P. Kruiitp. 327. See also Biology, Plant Chemistry, Plant Ecology. Chemistry. Diazo sulfonates. W. L. Haru and H. D. Grisss. 483. “Mosandrum,” the element. R. C. WELLS. 385. Entomology. +Anophelines, Haitian. W. A. HorrMan. 175. tAnthrenus seminiveus, noteon. EH. A. Back. 173. SUBJECT INDEX Entomology (Continued) tAphids, specialization of, from general to monoxenous feeders. P. W. Mason. 455. tArsenical spray residue. P. B. Dun- BAR. 404. B.A. Porter. 405. A. L. QuUAINTANCE. 404. C. A. RicHARD- son. 405. W. H. Wuite. 405. tAzalea leaf miner, habits and develop- ment of. B.M.BroapBent. 175. +Building code, insects change. T. E. SNYDER. 178. {Bulb sterilizers, hot water. C. A. WEHIGEL. 407. {Carbon bisulphide as fumigant, history of. P. Simmons. 179. tCheese skipper, Piophila casei, resist- ance of larva of. P. Simmons. 403. {Chiggers, control of. H. E. Ewrne. 182. {Citrus white fly in California. A. C. Baker. 481. {Corn borer, ‘European, control cam- paign against. W. H. LaArRimer. 431. Cordyligaster and Dexiid genera, AupRicH. 84. {Creeping eruption, the. and G. F. Wuirr. 454. Dalceridae, new American species of. Harrison G. Dyar. 544. {Diptera, collecting, in Guatemala. J. M. AupricH. 180. _ fEumolpinae, larva of. Eucordyligaster, notes, (on. 2° Mi: W. E. Doves A. G. B6vine, 182. {Flea beetle, Oedionychis gibbitarsa, larva of. A. G. B6vine. 176. Flies, Syrphid, of subfamily Cer- loidinae. R. C. SHANNON. 38. jForeign insects, undesirable. J. R. Mo.uuER. 99. Forest insect pests and their control. T. E. Snyper. 100. {Fruit flies, collecting, in Panama. C. T. GREENE. 180. jHoneybees, sex forms of. W. J. Nouan. 177. tHymenoptera, Motschulsky collection of, found in Moscow. 180. Lepidoptera, new American species of. Harrison G. Dyar. 544. 959 Limacodidae, new American species of. Harrison G. Dyar. 544. Mallophaga, new genera and species of. H. E. Ewrne. 86. Menoponidae, keys to related genera of. H. E. Ewine. 91. {tOedionychis gibbitarsa, larva of. Boévine. 176. Philopteridae, keys to related genera of. H. E..Ewine. 91. tSchwartz, E. A., library of, presented to Entomological Society. 404. Snow, Dr. F. H., veteran entomologist. VERNON KeLuoaa. 174. Syrphid flies of subfamily Cerioidinae. R. C. SHANNON. 38. {Taxonomy, limitations of. J. M. AupRIcH. 403. tVespula diabolica in Brookland, D. C. Jini PARKER rOl: Wasps, scoliid, from tropical America. S. A. Ronwer. 150. See also Biology. General Science. of the University of Michigan. AnG: *Greenland expedition 400. Geodesy. tReadjustment of the western triangulation net. O.8S. Apams. 502. Geology. Acanthoceras rhotomagense fauna in the Cretaceous of the West- erm ‘Interior! Jy BeoREESIDE: Jin: 453. Andes in Central Peru, geology and physiography of. D. H. McLaucu- LIN. 320. ;+Earth movements in California. DAY 96: ;Cambrian in the Rocky Mountains, the. C.E. Resser. 180. +Channeled scabland and the Spokane flood. J. H. Bretz. 200. tClementia, geologic history and paleo- biologie significance of, W.P. Woop- RING. 128. Colob Plateau, Utah, Upper Cretaceous vata Op section in. G. B. RicHarRpson. 464. jEarthquake problem, international attack on. N.H. Heck. 502. Elk Hills, California, geology and oil developments of. W. P. Wooprine and P. V. Rounpy. 271. Eocene of Texas, new mollusks from. JULIA GARDNER. 362. 560 -Geology (Continued) {Erosion in San Juan Canyon, Utah. EHDA Nisin, 198: {Fossil footprints in Grand Canyon. C. W. GILMORE. 272. tGrand Canyon region, problems in history of “RG; Moore, 272: +Grand Canyon topography, influence of secondary faults on development of. F,. E. MattTues. 283. {Gros Ventre landslide of June 1925. W.G. AtpEN. 123. tIdaho, summary of geology of south- eastern. G. R. MANSFIELD. 129. {Interior of the earth, what we know about it. L. H. Apams. 171. {Landslide origin of thrust faults around Bearpaw Mountains. FRANK REEVES. Of +Madison limestone and Ellis formation in Montana, unconformity between. A. J. COLLIER. 130. }Metalliferous resources of Silver City, Idaho. A.M. Pipgr. 237. {Mowry shale, origin of. W.W. Rupry. 230% Ordovician, early, sponge fauna, new. R.S. Bassuer. 390. tOrdovician shale and associated lava in southeastern Pennsylvania. G. W. Stosge and A. I. Jonas. 240. tOre at deep levels in Cripple Creek District, Colorado. G. F. LouGHuin. SYA : . tOre deposits, regional relations of Nevada. H. G. Fercuson. 121. TPaleozoic stratigraphy of Idaho. C.P. Ross. 125. tPalouse soil of Columbia Plateau, Washington. Kirk Bryan. 120. {Petroliferous provinces of United States. A. H. RepFrrELp. 285. }Phosphate deposits of Florida. F. L. Hess. 321. Pleistocene geology and paleontology in Florida, recent reports on. O. P. RAG (ee Pliocene invertebrates from headwaters of the Amazon, recent collections of late. JuLIA GARDNER. 505. TPotash brines underlying Great Salt Lake Desert, Utah. T. B. Nowayn, 274. SUBJECT INDEX Rockwall at Rockwell, Texas, origin of. L. W. STEPHENSON. 1. {San Joaquin Valley, California geologic features of southern end of. H. W. Hoots. 123. Sediments, unusual types of, from Pacific Islands. C. K. Wenrwortu, J. E. HorrMeister and H. S. Lapp. 275. tSpokane flood, channeled scabland and the. J. H. Brerz, “200% {Stratigraphy of Lake Ainslie Region, Nova Scotia. P. D. Trask and K. F. MaTHER. 322. +Stream pebbles, shapes of, in San Juan County, Utah. H. D. Miszr. 270. Stream piracy in northeastern Wy- oming. W. W. Rusry. 120. {Tertiary and Recent freshwater algae reefs. W. H. BRapLEY. 232. {Thrust faulting adjacent to Highwood Mountains, Montana. FRANK REEVES. TED. : +Tidal streams, meaning of cut-off meandersin. M.R.Camppenu. 125. {Tintic Standard mine, mineralogy of the, W. 1. ScHAtmEre aie +Voleanism, engulfment in. T. A. JAG- GER. 23. tVoleanoes of Japan in 1924. H. T. STEARNS. 118. See also Geophysics, Mineralogy, Paleo- botany, Paleontology, V ulcanology. Geophysics. Isostasy in geophysics and geology. Witiiam Bowls. 101. Machine for measuring depths of deep wells. C. E. VAN OrnsTRAND. 481. Moon, variation of latitude and motion of the. W. D. Lampert. 138. +Tides in wells. Paun ScHUREMAN. 345. See also Geology, Physics, Vulcanology. Hydrology. +Discharge method of esti- mating ground water supplies. W.N. White. 238. Mathematics. Analytical and _ graphical representation of arithmetic, geo- metric, and other means. C. EH. Van ORSTRAND. 307. +Computations, ‘‘fool-proof”’ checks on. H. 8S. Rappieye. 501. t+Newton, place of, in history of pure mathematics. E. W. Woouarpb. 399. SUBJECT INDEX Meteorology. Tornado, the. W. J. Hum- PHREYS. 320. Waterspout formation, unusual. Heck. 319. Mineralogy. Almandite-spessartite gar- net from Gwynns Falls, Baltimore. Eart V. SHANNON and Forest A. GONYER. 584. “Blythite’ and the manganese garnet from Amelia, Virginia. E. V. SHAN- NON. 444, Calcite oolites with pentagonal do- decahedral form. E. V. SHANNON. 409. 7Cesium, source of. F. L. Huss. 124. tMetalliferous resources of Silver City, Idaho. A.M. Piper. 237. ; Natrojarosite from Kingman, Arizona. Eart V. SHANNON and Forest A. GONYER. 536. +Ore at deep levels in Cripple Creek District, Colorado. G. F. LouGHutin. 321. fOre deposits, N. H, regional relations of Nevada. H. G. Fereuson. 121. Sericite-lazulite pseudomorphs after orthoclase from Bolivia. E. V. SHan- NON. 388. {Tintic Standard mine, mineralogy of qhe: OW. T..ScHALLER.. 121. Necrology. {Brzz1, Marto. 349. Datt, Wittram Hearty. 244, 400. §Man- OUVRIER, LEON PIERRE. 212. {TPatT- TEN, JOHN D. 402. {SxKinNER, H.S. 179, 402. Smita, Erwin F. 384. SPRINGER, FRANK. 552. SUDWORTH, GrorGE BisHop. 356. WatcorTt, CHARLES DoouitTLE. 7234, 308. foenNanG. E «Wee 172. SWEENEY, Miuton. 552. Oceanography. Current harmonic con- stants for San Bernardino Strait, el ple PDisnEy:. 325. {Submarine features in north Pacific Ocean, unusual. N. H. Heck. 127. Tide at Tahiti, the. H. A. Marmer. 157. Ornithology. +¥Flight line of ducks. LINncoLn. 353. +Migratory waterfowl in Mexico, con- ditions affecting. E. A. GoLDMAN. 350. 7Study, bird, in suburbs of large cities. T. S. Patmer. 354. HEC. 561 See also Zoology. . Paleobotany. Cycads in Shinarump con- glomerate of Utah. E. W. Berry. 303. Paleontology. Acanthoceras rhotomagense fauna in the Cretaceous of the West- ern Interior. J. B. REESIDE, Jr. 453. Astartella Hall, generic characters of. Ge Hi -Girrye) Al7- {tClementia, geologic history and paleo- biologic significance of. W.P.Woop- RING, * 128: Coskinolina in America. J. A. CusH- MAN. 198. Equus laurentius Hay, type skull of. Os Po Haye ob: Foraminifera in the collection of Ehren- berg. J. A. CuSHMAN. 487. {Fossil footprints in Grand Canyon. C. W. GitmorE. 272. Intuonella in America. 198. Mollusks from Eocene of Texas, new. JULIA GARDNER. 362. J. A. CUSHMAN. Pelecypods, two new unionid, from Upper Triassic. J. B. RrEsIpE, JR. 476. Pleistocene geology and paleontology in Florida, recent reports on. O. P. A211. Pliocene invertebrates, late, from head- waters of the Amazon, recent collec- tion of. JULIA GARDNER. 505. Pycinodesma, new name for Pycnodesma Kirk not Schrammen. Epwin Kirk. 548. Sponge fauna, early Ordovician, new. R. 8S. Basster. 390. See also Paleobotany. Petrology. Analcite-rich rock from Dec- can trap of India. N. L. Bowen. 57: tChalcedony, relation of, to quartz. W.P. Waite. 344. Rocks of Galdpagos Islands. H. S. WASHINGTON and Mary G. KeEryss. 538. See also Geology. Physics. tBarometric method of measur- ing aircraft altitudes. W. G. BrRom- BACHER. 75. TChalcedony, WP. Waite. relation of, 344, to quartz. 5oZ SUBJECT INDEX Physics (Continued) Compressibility, change of, with pres- sure. Lrason H. Apams. 529. +Computations, “‘fool-proof”’ checks on. H.S. Rappipeye. 6501. +Electromotive forces possibly produced by the earth’s rotating magnetic field, and diurnal variation of atmospheric potential gradient. G. R. Wait and H. U. SvERpRup. 504. 7Galvanometer stabilizers, improve- ments in. W. P. Wuitr. 22. Gravitation, constant of. P.R. Hryt. 270. Gravitation, magneto-electron theory of. CHESTER SNow. 457. fice, cellulan: “structure! of) by Ee Matrues. 126. tMagnetic analysis, problem of. R. L. SANFORD. 269. jMagnetic permeability of iron and magnetite in high-frequency alter- nating fields. G. R. Wart. 22. Mechanical properties of moist granular solids: | RG NurrinG:) 85: tMercury contact thermostats, new method of avoiding lag in. W. P. Wuitr, 74. +Newton, contributions of, to mechanics and astronomy. P. R. Heyu. 400. tQuartz, 573-degree inversion of. FREDERICK Batss and F. P. PHELPS. 345. R. B. Sosman. 344. {Thermostat, new type of. G. F. TAYLOR. 74, +Vapor pressure of liquid carbon di- oxide. C. H. Mryers and M. 8. Van Dusen. 501. Plant Chemistry. Free methyl salicylate in some American species of Polygala. E. T. WHERRY. 191. Plant Ecology. Soil reaction preferences or) “certam / plant «orders:)) Hay LT: WHERRY. 148. Soil reactions of saprophytic orchids. EK. T. WHERRY. 35. Radiotelegraphy. Influence of low- resistivity layer subsoil on forward inclination of radio waves. J. E. I. CaIRNs. 264. Scientific Notes and News. 24, 53, 13 156, 183, 215, 244, 276, 307, 324, 35 3J84, 408. 432, 456, 479. 504, 528, 55 Seismology. {Earth movements in Cali- fornia. A. L. Day. ‘96. tEarthquake problem, international attack on. N.H. Hecx. 502. Spectroscopy. tAtomic hydrogen, spectra excited by. F. L. Monumr. 75. Lanthanum, regularities in are spec- trum of. W. F. Mreaaers. 25. Technology. {Galvanometer stabilizers, improvements in. W.P.WuitTE. 22. +Thermostat, new type of. G. F. Tay- LOR. 74. {Thermostats, mercury contact, new method of avoiding lag in. W. P. Wuitr. 74. Terrestrial Magnetism. tElectromotive forces possibly produced by the earth’s rotating magnetic field, and diurnal variation of atmospheric po- tential gradient. G. R. Wait and H. U. Sverprup. 504. Gravitation, magneto-electron theory of. CHESTER Snow. 457. Vulcanology. tEngulfment in volcanism. T. A. JAGGER. 23. jJapan, volcanoes of, in 1924. H. T. STHARNS. 118. Zoology. tBird study in suburbs of large cities. T.S. Parmer. 354. tBulb sterilizers, hot water. C. A. WEIGEL. 407. tDucks, flight line of. F. C. Lincoun. 353. §SElk, southern Yellowstone herd, plan for preservation of. 183. {Fisheries of Pacific, conservation of. B. W. EVERMANN. 242. Frog from Tibet, new. LEONHARD STEJNEGER. 3817. Gorillas in French Congo. C. R. ASCHEMEIBR. 241. Isacis Serjabin, rhigonemas inhabiting intestines of millipeds. J. R. Curis- Tim and N. A. Coss. 17. tMigratory waterfowl in Mexico, con- ditions affecting. E. A. GoLpMAN. 350. tMouse plagues. VERNON BaILey. 348. Naobranchia occidentalis on Pacific Coast of United States. D. V. ViL- LADOLID. 230. Race-runner, six-lined-, in District of Columbia. C. 8. East. 399. SUBJECT INDEX 563 Zoology (Continued) jSnakes, venoms, and antivenins. A. Rhigonema, intestinal nemas of milli- DO AMARAL. 352. peds. J. R. Curistre and N. A. Sea new Chinese. A.B. HowE.t. Coss. 1%. {Trout propagation by the Bureau of jSay, Thomas, naturalist. J. M. Aup- Fisheries. G. C. Leacu. 248. RICH. 3650. See also Biology, Entomology, Ornithology. i if sae N ine n't Ne lala nus TS OF THE MEETINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND PADTRIATED SOCMIEIS. 8 is Woes The Anthropological Society. Re ee ae The: THisterwal Buciety ee The Medical Society. 8 Be st ‘The Medical Society. 6 Toke re ee Phe Houeateuaiy cs ee. The Society of Engineers. _ | hee eee: ene Mesen nome, | Sete Se oe a CONTENTS : OrreInaL Papers Physics.—A note on the change of compressibility with pressure. Laasox 3 ADAMS ois ce ees cee Spay he cing Bee coma 6 oe Sawin et Mineralogy esate a ete garnet from Gwynns Falls, Baltimore: ‘Ean V. SHanwon and : Forest A, GONYER. : 30.6. cit kw as a ee oA Mineralogy.—Natrojarosite from Kingman, Arizona. Eart V. Seaon and Forest A. GONYER........ Vales. Wee ee hs are aes wee : Petrology.—Rocks of Galacsecs idence. 3 ee WasHineTon and Mary 3 KEeymEs.. cence oeces ee ee ee a vie snl ete elem 538 Paleontolory po Penida, new name for Pitenodeutis Kirk na Schrammen. ee Wepwitt! KIRK if. ke eis ose a en ee Bee es Entomology.—New species of SES Lepidoptera of the families Limacodidee and Dalceridee. Harrison G. Dyar.................... Vey aes open een Screntrric Notes AND NEWS......¢0.e0cceeereecens Sees 551 OBITUARY..... eeeacee ar ce te ee a eo 552 INDEX | ne aN Author Index ..... opt Bess ced wae We em enag ee emir eee Subject Inder iin. Visi ae ico ak og seat Pe ee eee ii waa Wides ss ewe sae OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY President: ALEXANDER WETMORE, Smithsonian Institution. — Corresponding Secretary: L. B. TuckerMan, Bureau of Standards. Recording Secretary: W. D. Lampert, Coast and Geodetic ene. Treasurer: R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey. «a Vy i & oy IAEA: ry Ni oy © bee Y Op St gt BOT pee ap ger at ve ie d Pr Le ¢ 1h he © ee { SUA MUNA UR RU hh Whe ty He Wim he td fe YBa shew ot Mya’ lay Ys Books tin ater kcre: % RAL O Wy WhO 6 RK BD hee Ui al i eee ” eS OU BU ow Leh LA Le ies ee ba ¥ ay UA iy LA FA AMA YO Hts He BAL yh be) MAY OOOO RSME Sle bebe & ‘ ah SEAR WENN nv ae DOOR tO CM RSAC ANU beds HHEEE I DDE PAREN GP whe hE ¥ ATA ba I bs ch why oy GO 8 4h ae ne tae ed byt PEAR O RAT LOE DT Be tl Dt tl nh pe | CV hb htt ihe beth. f , +; ARM H NO NE Ye Cae Ra ORICA OC A) AE ca aera A \ ee eee eh at ee ee “ aris! COE MIE HIV Rae bin : ji aiesi ‘ns wine toh en en wus WD Ha a bw tee — ieee wea ht a HSONIAN INSTITUTION LIBRARIES Pa, Hea ie i te : ) t 4 : ye) Ben My nt me ans de ete , + re cys we ese Wr | f | ant ‘ent en ata ea teteh ape Huhy aeulh keycna wt » “ ty ore RUE che ') baat “ae } - ” i , H ey pak ee atin ony i DN UNOS , ss oe 4 Ha-oe pate an a \ ’ ' i! , 1 aoe ae ei aes en Materettatienth ye ' ¢% 6 Pw * Tet WenH Hohes bs (l a att " 4) Mh pen Bie Tet aha? rune te ee Aree) ope ‘ beth pet beh i iti 1 lary Se yh Heh bh mat aN hd a np PA AUN ON AR LH my Lune A ae Ta WR 3 9088 01 — 1711 . “ ‘ gee WD Be fiopid hea @ hob ae t q , i : ' stata felt re Sate fave Neha nbn b's Wy we nre Mok (iad Ueki - Sa) an ila teatelay a nan "G Vd Asan A NOM RA O eH Hel uk gl At Dy aA ee i! Mey th aly Sie “ey wR RE AVAL Me ao 4 DR TAA RUBS ALA Loch UY Mie ! LeRVE WA ant we r a] 4 ho i) se he ow TUE MDS HHO DW Dow gg OF Pa VOURRHWOH EEDA HET " grey t CHO VCMT EE UATE MEL ME eC wume to bt yt Ne | one ty . wr 6 Ve hh eh Oe eb ae berep nes ' We iro | i tt ch He "yy , hp ay Syope pr 4 AACA . ph pos bug i ) YU Pek Ope ADR A he be LA bed i> | , a ’ APRH ERNE He wy We ie } ‘ Pan Pra ‘ - r] ¥ % wh OOOO OL RCC a me A Ale ess TRO ABET sued Le A AL AR Ci meeetioh Eg t \ ' ‘ th ms Het Hats te Penk ee yy GN A, yyy VAN \ i Baa peeks J NODES te of ‘ SEL SNR ‘ Jay oh ey eta Naeem \ Lita Pe Sa tet 4 yar WA Veoh? yy yeaiea oat is nay Abie pe lant meas taint cit an ihe eet aN w | i WAT) Ay mae ie yy » \ 4 {4 i] ‘h . { nib " . ' ( te ein He Stel FA Bas} SOC DOOR RIED SCC NNR eta NY WAP AON aaah oa " \ i . ’ wre POR CK AN ea . He eee ' er ’ } Desh oe Hoy ait Wow at pa ofeinh ys hy a haen phe he Mites ! bebe Oh ts why we nate PD RM MN RC aa Lees i , ‘ aoa dla eee tat an ye Ltt fae A Ape ep ot PREL A EOD Oe EO Lee EOE poe ahs a4 u-h4h) ” 5 { er iey we ARM ADA (te uitib MW RSA UNH tly A SUS 4 bib { { hh} ’ Ths a atetleety ig CPs ea 4 Biles Ahly yi 4 hhc a ee PAV SA LAA a ie wt meh b nf i er as Sr wi F ‘ ery hoki Sop nate he aM a A AC A ay 90 ae he SA Rh f : he > : oh ny in ay Paik aiu een Cures NH HI) RNS f A dthep & } bch h A enya 45 aCe oC an DL se of s { {> | ‘ oie ey Wt, wa ee wri War a ie ; » i) ‘ vs) Ri " ‘ ¥ ni Wane KP Wg bet tb ‘a: ehhh AY \ Pont ets fi fi ony Mean eh ying ¢ ets feu ce ms W Hy \ itm ecu Nt Ne x Sakeie i belt tity he ute begin catty wh elaalt i ' } f ' ' aft r aM pane 49) KY oan w a Masai b> Ch 8 } (is vit Ae aR R RB ERE Cb t bo we 0 9 1) 408 debit Uf OX PU rbot BS AT Ri) b bf\t ! : AL wenus meth iy tite Y Pee tens ) ‘s basa TATA he rai SUA Nh fo " 4 Ai : L Hore i Hf Ntateitet abet ati tat Wey y e fey. eed oh» We: " ne on \ ¢ mately i 2) gi Aa aS hd hy 7 ' f hats rH a ene ae tana Mee eaate nei ele Abe hs Bs : Paks a- \ eb ¢ te ! ‘ dd saat 5) aly Mola aalg ; et eaves Mears yt Arr Weleeis j : St A Wo Py ice: eho Eke b bet Hh Barge } x ore 4) Ce eh Meh eS. 4 » Aa bio Hind Leama Curae beat ’ ORO Wie ue t tA , ” % : ry be Ne R r Pl Dit i iA ; ; aeaey "ayia WN RN cork A Teg ih wt Th tt te. hist f ' Atte ds Wd ete ce fiteb ht ' ape mae IAN CADW { ( mikacsute ; aM Acta ‘ "4 > ” an tee cp © WR MN Bik ‘ ‘ ae Pea i a ee ke | kts Weed GAN a f eo $; Sree > Wy, ct ul Ghee ne} i Ca A at » i eee y } : ea MAY i lJ x Wiha. hee | » h , , KA : \ t% iG: Wh i ' r b % Ph Greet ere CK sun My ie 3 4 £7, tous * saute i ¥ : ye ‘ 4 aes J ‘| ed y v ( p $ Sah i X edit i Pyial end vi Sai y h ‘ t mht i #) NT ky ( wie + A, a NA) ae : ‘ ee i ( " : : & BS Sate he ‘ bee vy “uh » ef vy A y \ t yy . ve e " al \ wan Mn b> si dei ry Me ea « 4 Daa Ss iA a he 7 ae Carne , ) ‘ i at hits ‘4 A Goeth 4 ? . a ‘ ’ eee ew ie Nhewte wi ilin \ ’, ' " of - v rer , tapas ii : if at ‘ us he ie eae Rehan ae t y 5 Sy i > i ’ ui aN tale rea i iu Gh i Geb ; * “ x 1 * vi a ee ee a y 2 . anh a a ce myo ‘ eek wet } A thy WA ' : NRL AN, 5 uaa Aya Mea! wae Wehbe Mie tk reat 144 i ‘ ‘ Mh ’ ; ont Ie! ts Me \ C hers f r ni \ we Armee » + t sh we Shatin A Ke Ns ) ‘ bah ey mae ay ih t ste ec Li t Bate) ; Se So eran ' re k yey oe nh e. Sea ak " ’ ' wy a a tA aah het “Hi bee rit > ete ; - BE HEAT okt Bh, tbe | re) at yer powrt . y t Wy Te Pe ae Ont oS Ah hwe - rt oe | vow WED LTA ED heb bbe bes OCR i ef pruer He ah! t by i t ee ‘ thresh habe ite itt e te: ih ere rb: oO Gide ‘ rt Wd ip ee relish lice) vi ' r eo wile bbe e poe aE RRR ye ' , ven Yr HU ba tte : eke WR Wa)! ‘ ayia i vhag t ae > i eb. yt xi a ee wes ne ATL ts % a a SOO lyre ee a : aN sh eee é | ie Wet 7 : 4 Ca BN ‘ it " i) ee is oN . A i oe Wit i yi Westos tise ity DN <0 " pg +i faba i Vi bins i welt Where fe bole Baio bc) wt ’ ne 0 ‘ bh by, ' i ke ‘ey ere ld ¥ vert wr os nai i ectk \ ‘ ; i, fa ' i RANA fh a ‘ i ‘ita Dd 10H it , f b ohh i ' hi + Ae cv akc mii ke ’ \ hee ie b NL) wee ay Ay tiny) iat cei he We he mre wee oy ¥ y ee 0 eryshy iy? y? hy Wy ' ' » (ibhus ) aan NN ase hye an ” Wha Wine rb W rk aks oh hy als Ady Htc tit TASC HOCUS SR RA A 14 Sieh bh bh pb fer ‘ thpbng heb bot bin wb pee hi AN ene i pe L brea ht r an a Ny yk tik a ' DWE NT ye Yb wb we wee IH RV UG heh bo ed Heh arp in ‘ wh eo? ie we eth a? LUN Ahh DR he Pippi ‘ ' Oey Pepe vy Hie S PROPEL eh hb pat \ ‘ a. tan iit aie fb bk bebe 8") toh h A VOY bee ah heh E ta ate weie PAL RY POE Om) bem ee 1 ; Wye we eh wt " Pehl bib Gh tob be he COs oe rit Ha CN Pee hh heer h eh r bee bh PVA ES yin » we ite Cou OLS Wei b tl OA I a OF Pe hte he Py t \ ey TPA EE eh ea EE BRD MOAT 1h whe Ge eS Bone wane hy CO DR bh OD PEAY he he ee te he shit Pew yy CT a PEEVE SAVED OV ED CREE PE LUT A BD Bip we UAC eas a die eet {sh uray Wetenieih vy Aen 4 x wine ha bib th Vib ah deeb A 5 Dati y i b : (US bb Oe HF | SRS eh wed ti STN adt ay SOTO St aa » «yay oh bh ey ec $40: ALTER DEEN LEA Bh bet Rae eT ub Oe whe Re hae Ht Wid ge yi A args ; J I ¥ mY + ' ’ iy’ } ane te Reatastatt wens we IA bey ny a) ahh Ee Ne cy 3s ee ae te " ee , wt ty ¢ POL ERMiE DE ' ; ASS LAA et Out th 1 Ye Be He eee May vate Whbrh & 6 neh o